This book is dedicated to my dearly beloved husband, Geoffrey, to the Masters of the Wisdom—the Great White Brotherhood—and to the enlightenment of all humanity.

Sandra Hodson

I would like to express my profound and heartfelt gratitude to my dear Theosophical friends: the late Dr Esther Zapata Doval Santos, all her family—Pediing, Clarise, Elena, Luisa, Roselmo—and sister Cleo Gregorio of Manila in the Philippines for their part in the preparation and publication of the occult Diary of my husband Geoffrey Hodson; Mrs Virginia Hanson for the professional work she contributed in the early stages; Mrs Antoinette Bollard, Mr Frank Eden, and Mr Michael Eden who have devoted so much of their time and energies in assisting me in the final editing and preparation of the text; Mrs Phyllis Gardner who assisted with the typing of the manuscript; and others who collaborated in valued ways.

FOREWORD

A basic teaching in the Ancient Wisdom called Theosophia is the existence of perfected Men and Women Who are called Adepts. This follows as a natural corollary of the occult view of man as a divine being. Of this perfection, the Lord Jesus Christ Himself said, “Be ye therefore perfect, even as your Father which is in heaven is perfect.”^{^[1]} In Christian scriptures, They are referred to as “just men made perfect”.[2] As the son of his Divine Parent, the seedlike divinity within man must, in the endless progression of Life, “flower” in due time to the measure, the stature, and fullness of his Divine Progenitor.[3] In Eastern philosophy, these perfected Men are referred to as Mahatmas, meaning “great souls”. Some of Them, as Elder Brothers of the Race, take as Their pupils those awakening souls who, by self-devised and self-directed effort, progress far ahead on the Path of Hastened Unfoldment.

This book is irrefutable proof of the existence of these Great Beings Whose everlasting arms enfold and guide every aspiring soul to the Path. This compilation of Adeptic ministrations and instructions is a faithful record of part of the very private inner life of Mr Geoffrey Hodson, which his wife, Sandra Hodson, now presents after his death, as his gift to all aspirants to Truth. Privacy is an inalienable right and to sacrifice it in the interest of others merits the deepest respect and gratitude from all beneficiaries.

Internationally famous as a great seer and occultist, Mr Hodson never admitted nor revealed his privileged intimacy with the Mahatmas, except to his very close associates. His own enlightened and spiritually vital life speaks for him more than words can say.

His occult investigations reached from the atom to the highest planes of consciousness. He was well known for his collaboration with, and writings on, the Angelic Hierarchy and nature spirits. His clairvoyant investigations are well documented and scientifically verified, including work on prenatal life, palaeontology, anthropology, archaeology, geology, and the cause and cure of disease. Naturally compassionate and kindly, he vigorously espoused and campaigned for youth welfare groups, the Boy Scout movement, and the Order of the Round Table.’ He also campaigned continually against cruelty and worked for kindness to animals, in support of which he helped to organize and headed the Vegetarian Society in New Zealand. He spoke on family unity, health and happiness, penal reforms, and world peace. A spiritual “torch-bearer”, he brought the light of the Eternal Wisdom to so many, transforming and healing hundreds upon hundreds of lives all over the world.

Words fail. They cannot do justice to this man who devoted his multifaceted capacities and spiritual powers to the service of his fellow man. His creed of selfless service perhaps found its fullest expression in his written works. Of these, the major books alone were conservatively counted as 47 in number. He was the recipient of the Subba Row Gold Medal for his valuable contribution to Theosophical literature. His Diary, as compiled by Mrs Sandra Hodson, may be said to be the world’s most valuable legacy from so prolific and enlightened an author.

Mr Hodson was a guest of the Philippine Section of the Theosophical Society on four occasions. During his three latter visits, constantly in the company of the Hodsons was a small group in which my sister, Esther, and I were fortunately included. Eventually we were drawn into a little circle which Geoffrey called his “family”. Ever since, we have carried on a continuous correspondence with them. We were later privileged to receive from him an offer to prepare for publication manuscripts of some of his books, including this book which is his occult Diary.

Helping in the final stages of the publication of this work is a great experience, a marvellous privilege that can only be acknowledged, not in words, but by having it available to a world so much in need of spiritual upliftment.

In his small book, A Yoga of Light, Mr Hodson wrote: “Voluntarily imprisoned within you as Light is an omnipotent Power. Set it free. Let the Light shine.” Marshall Foch said: “The greatest weapon on earth is the soul of man on fire.” May this book enflame the hearts of its readers. May its radiance “set many souls on fire” so that they may become as living torches for Theosophy in the world’s battle of Light against darkness. This may be said to be the supreme purpose of The Diary.

Geo Z. Gregorio General Secretary, 1970—1984 Theosophical Society in the Philippines

PREFACE

The following notes have been compiled to clarify the meaning of some terms frequently used in this book:

1. Throughout The Diary will be found such phrases as: “The Master spoke to Geoffrey” or “the Master said”. To avoid any misunderstanding, may I make it clear that the ideas were not communicated audibly, but rather at the mental and Causal levels. Quotation marks which should legitimately appear around such words as “said” have been deleted for the sake of simplicity. For a further explanation of this process, see my introduction and the entry of January 1977—The Sibylline Siddhi.

2. The reader will also find a number of passages marked as having been communicated by “An Adept”. In these cases, the name of the Adept was not recorded by myself at the time, even though Geoffrey always recognized the particular Master.

3. All capitalizing of initial letters of pronouns referring to the Masters of the Wisdom is the decision made by the compilers of this work, and not the result of a request by the Masters Themselves. On those occasions when the Master or Bethelda, in speaking to Geoffrey, used the pronoun “our”, it has been left lower case where Geoffrey was understood to be included in the meaning.

4. Where humanity is referred to as “man” or an aspirant as “he”, the meaning includes both men and women, all being equal. For simplicity, the masculine form only is generally used. Pronouns relating to devas and Deity are treated similarly.

5. Throughout The Diary there are references to “The Path”. For those readers unfamiliar with the Theosophical concept of the Path to Hastened Unfoldment, the following short extract has been included from The Path to the Masters of the Wisdom, by Geoffrey Hodson:

THEOSOPHIA AND THE PATH

The essential human unit of existence, the Innermost human Spirit, the Monad, manifests as an Inner Immortal Self or Ego and an outer personality in mortal, bodily form.

The Inner Self manifests in and gains experience and knowledge through the outer man. Partly by that means and partly by an interior unfoldment, it perpetually evolves, being immune from death.

The outer physical form of man, on the other hand, develops to full bodily maturity and then declines, dies, disintegrates, and disappears forever.

The faculties and capacities of the outer self are received by and perpetually preserved in the Inner Self, there being but one consciousness and life in both.

The immediate objective of the Inner Self is development of faculty. The long-term objective is all-round genius or the development to the highest degree by the Inner Self of all possible human faculty. This attainment is termed Adeptship and is the goal of human existence.

The human Spirit, the Innermost Self, the Monad, is a fragment of Divinity, a concentration of Universal Spirit, with which in origin, nature, substance, and potentiality it is identical. It is as a spark in a flame, a drop in an ocean, a microcosm within the Macrocosm. This is the highest truth concerning men. “They are broken lights of Thee.” (In Memorial)[4] The full realization in consciousness of this truth of truths is man’s greatest possible illumination.

At the attainment of Adeptship, the identity of the Innermost Self of man with the Innermost Self of the Universe, the Atma with the Param-atma, is fully realized. Pseudo-individuality is dissolved. The Adept abides in perpetual experience of identity with Universal Spirit. This is Perfection, Nirvana, or Salvation—Salvation from the illusion of separated individuality. This is the highest human attainment and the spiritual “purpose” of existence.

The means of attainment consist of interior unfoldment and external experience. Interior unfoldment is continuous, while repeated physical rebirth or reincarnation provides the necessary time, opportunity, and external experience.

A cosmic law of compensation, partly seen operating upon man as cause and effect, ensures absolute justice to every man. The places and conditions in which individuals and races are born, as well as those later entered, are exactly the “right” places and conditions, for only in them can justice be done and the experience required for the attainment of Adeptship be obtained.

Already men and women have attained the state of Adeptship. Some of Them remain on earth as Members of a highly organized Fraternity of Agents of the purposes and laws of life and as Directors of planetary evolution.

Of these great Sages, some, in compassion for humanity, accept individual men and women for training in the mode of life and thought which increases the rate of evolutionary progress and is called The Path.

These Adepts Who teach and train pupils are known as Masters. They can be successfully approached by those who fulfil the necessary conditions and apply for admission to Their Presence in the appointed way. These conditions and the method of application are fully described in ancient, mediaeval, and in modern Theosophical literature.

Any other biographical material in book or any other form will be unauthorized by myself. The only checked accounts of my life are contained in this volume authorized by myself.

Geoffrey Hodson

INTRODUCTION BY GEOFFREY HODSON

At her request, I hereby fully bestow upon my deeply beloved wife, Sandra, to whom I owe so very much, permission to publish after I have left the physical plane, accounts of certain of the more occult^{^[5]} events in my life which have been systematically recorded in my personal occult ‘Diary. I have allowed her to do this for reasons put to me by her: to interest and to inspire people to undertake the study and teaching of Theosophy. In addition, her purpose is to help others who are also seeking to find and tread the Path of Hastened Unfoldment. In consequence, an effective contribution to the work of the Parent Theosophical Society with its Headquarters at Adyar, Madras, India, may be made. I have agreed, since service in this unique movement is indeed a veridical way leading all those who are utterly dedicated and “faithful unto death” towards the swift achievement of Self-perfection.^{^[6]}

Drawing upon my superphysical experiences, generally written down immediately after they occurred, and upon my own verbal accounts of these, Sandra is producing an accurate history of one part only of my inner life. Many of these events have been regarded by me as extremely private; sacred, indeed. Nevertheless, I have agreed to their revelation after my death (only), for the sake of giving assurance to others that they, in their turn—if rightly moved—may seek to prove for themselves the reality of the occult and spiritual teachings of Theosophy.

I here affirm that, throughout my lifetime and membership of sixty-six years in the Parent Theosophical Society, at the time of writing (1979), except for a very small number of intimately active collaborators, I have never presumed to claim direct knowledge of and personal communication with the great Mahatmas. When, however, the record is published (without making the slightest claim to personal worthiness) I now permit Sandra to include accounts of such deeply privileged occult and spiritual relationships which, as she herself knows, have indeed become a veritable part of my daily life. Despite my readily admitted imperfections and limitations, I have agreed that, after my departure, a selection only of these experiences should be shared in this book.

An important part of Sandra’s motive, as also of my own, is, in addition, to give assurance to members of the Parent Theosophical Society—and to all others who may be interested—that the Great Masters of the Wisdom have not withdrawn Their interest in the profoundly important movement established under Their Adeptic inspiration on the 17th of November 1875, in New York City.^{^[7]} Indeed, They have continued to bestow a considerable measure of Their unsurpassed knowledge of occult philosophy and Their Adeptic wisdom upon certain of the members of the Theosophical Society and through them on behalf of the world. May it not reasonably be presumed that this will be continued for “the amelioration of the condition of man”?^{^[8]}

Sandra has been aware that I have received throughout a great many years of my life, direct, fully conscious, intellectually understood ideas and teachings from Members of the Hierarchy of earth’s Adepts; for I have long been thus privileged, my earliest experiences having occurred in the year 1913, as this Diary faithfully records.^{^[9]} On two occasions this took place physically. On one of these a Master caused Himself to appear so clearly to my vision that I was enabled to make a very imperfect attempted portrait sketch of Him, which is included in this book.[10] In addition, and more recently, the Master Morya materialized His face so reasonably near to mine that I could see through the dark hairs of His beard to the skin beneath.^{^[11]}

The Parent Theosophical Society itself has made available to the world Adeptic expositions of Theosophia (Divine Wisdom), a procedure which has been carried out since the founding of the Society, chiefly in the writings of H.P. Blavatsky^{^[12]} and her valid literary successors. This practice, I venture to affirm, will continue so long as both the spiritual and the philosophical purposes for which the Society was founded are positively and genuinely adhered to. My own studies have convinced me that Theosophia, its availability to mankind, and its acceptance and application to life’s problems are essential to the well-being of humanity as a whole.

I am also deeply convinced that the Adept-inspired Parent Theosophical Society will continue to be held within the consciousness of the great Masters and also that “so long as there are three men worthy of Our Lord’s blessing in the Theosophical Society, it can never be destroyed”.^{^[13]} Granted the above conditions and complete honesty of character, purpose, and conduct of officials and regular members, I am convinced that this security and acceptance of the Theosophical Society as an agency in the ‘ world of the Great Brotherhood of the Adepts will not only continue, but that its work will increase in effectiveness as also will the responses from the Masters to the evocations from sincere truth-seekers and idealists amongst mankind. The above-quoted passage assures this, and I venture humbly to affirm—with due respect for the right to freedom of thought and opinion of others—that the Masters of the Wisdom will never withhold Their inspiration from Their “good ship”, the Parent Theosophical Society.

Fortunately, one part of the precious Theosophical “cargo” consists of survivals of the active Mystery Tradition. The Mystery Tradition, another presentation of Theosophia, is in these days becoming increasingly active as in the Orders of Chivalry, Freemasonry, and Co-Freemasonry (an Order that admits women) for example, and in the growing interest in the esoteric teachings of the Eastern religions. This ensures the added ability to serve to all who, with the essential quality of wisely applied selflessness, aspire to knowledge of Truth. For all those, the ever open portal of the Temple—whether material, psychological, intuitional (“not made with hands”),[14] or a combination of all of these—is passed through and ceremonial training is bestowed. Thereupon may follow the touch of the Thyrsus^{^[15]} placed upon the crown of the head of the candidate by the reigning Initiatory Official, a representative of the Hierophant of the Greater Mysteries. However secretly in modern days, this immemorial usage has continued to be an essential part of national, governmental, and personal life, as more publicly were the Lesser Mysteries of Egypt, Chaldea, Greece, and other lands—Eastern and Far Eastern, for example.

The above-mentioned original, esoteric, and symbolic Temples of the Mysteries will, I believe, maintain their proffered direction and leadership, and “open doors” to their “tyled” interiors, degree by degree, until the goal of Superhuman Perfection or Adeptship is attained by ardent, selfless, and determined aspirants.

I here repeat the great Master Morya’s words: “You have still to learn that so long as there are three men worthy of Our Lord’s blessing in the Theosophical Society, it can never be destroyed.” As I have throughout many years pondered this profound utterance, the following thoughts have entered my mind: The passage of the Adept-inspired “ship”, the Parent Theosophical Society, has not by any means been peaceful in character. On the contrary, it has sailed through stormy waters, some of the breakers of which unfortunately still strike against the “bow” and “sides” of the “vessel”, and especially its “stem”. Even so, because of its extreme importance to the human race, the Parent Theosophical Society will not be allowed to perish so long as the above-mentioned conditions prevail. Fortunately, they still do prevail in both the character and the motives of those who have not only remained faithful, but who have also “stayed aboard” and helped to steer the wonderful “vessel” on its voyage with its precious “cargo” of Theosophia. This, for me, is of immense importance for “the amelioration of the condition of man”. The Divine Wisdom is, indefed, I affirm, the ONE SAFEGUARD FOR HUMANITY AS A WHOLE. This surely is of critical importance as the human race passes through wavelike periods of war and peace, cruelty and humaneness, power-seeking and selfless service.

Our movement is, at this time of writing, apparently being attacked by one of its “storms” or “storm-waves”. The nature of one of these appears to consist of the diversion of the interest of a very large number of members (all being free, of course) away from fundamental Theosophy, especially The Secret Doctrine.[16] These people find themselves attracted to the literature and activities of seemingly associated societies. This reduces the efficacy of Sections, Branches, and individual members, as teachers of basic Theosophia—I am permitted to express these personal views because of the Chartered Statement that for members of the Theosophical Society, “our bond of union is not a common belief, but a common search for Truth”. As I advance these views—if I may so presume, warning myself as I do so -1 find myself remembering Aesop’s fable of the dog which, whilst crossing a stream with a bone in its mouth, saw its own reflection in the water. The bone seemed larger, and thus deluded, the dog dropped and lost the real bone as it sought to grab the reflection in the water.

Greatly favoured are those who, with never the slightest thought of self-gain for either their present or their future lives, join the Parent Theosophical Society, and throughout the years of their membership remain steadfastly—immovably indeed—faithful to the original principles and purposes, and to the time-adapted methods of their fulfilment These were agreed upon when the Society was founded and firmly established according to the original ideas, ideals, provisions for its progress, and for the outworking of its objective, which was “TO POPULARIZE A KNOWLEDGE OF THEOSOPHY”.^{^[17]}

During the now-completed first century of its life, the mission of the Parent Theosophical Society has been—and, I submit, must continue to be—the sharing with fellow human beings of the unchanging age-old foundation doctrines of Theosophia. The Greek name for these, Theosophia (Divine Wisdom), was most appropriately given by Ammonius Saccus, the great Neo-Platonic teacher in Alexandria between the second and third centuries A.D.

If, and as long as, this ideal of faithful fulfilment of the Adeptically affirmed plan and uttermost loyalty to the intelligent outworking of the basic task of our movement is adhered to, then, I submit, the Society will continue to fulfil its twofold function: to make available the ageless truths and their applications to human living; and to offer invaluable opportunities to all so moved to find and tread the ancient Pathway leading to Discipleship of a Master of the Wisdom, the great Initiations, and to the final liberation from all human limitations, or the attainment of Adeptship.

Before I close my contribution to this Introduction, fully aware of my limited ability in these fields, I hereby vow that every account of an occult experience shared with and recorded in this story of my inner life and here presented by Sandra, is not only truthful in itself, but is as accurately described as was possible for me. May these offerings of my inwardly inspired visions, experiences, and understanding, and also my greatly privileged associations with the deva kingdom, fulfil the purpose for which Sandra has undertaken to produce this very partial description of my occult life.

Geoffrey Hodson

INTRODUCTION BY SANDRA HODSON

My husband, Geoffrey, has given me permission to publish, after his departure from the physical plane, shared confidences concerning what I knew to be the deeply occult nature of his spiritually and intellectually illumined Initiate life. These experiences, I feel assured, will in the main be received with respect and, I hope, with genuine interest, as well as being an inspiration to others in the unfoldment of their inner lives; for I am convinced that aspiring seekers for the specialized knowledge which Geoffrey possessed will indeed be wonderfully benefited, as I myself have been

This direct knowledge included knowing the existence upon our earth of the Occult Hierarchy of Adepts—perfected Men and Women—and therefore of Initiates on their way through the first five Great Initiations, the fifth being that of the Adept. This spiritual progress is assured, I have learnt, for those who in both motive and mode of life are utterly selfless, pure-hearted, and faithful unto death to the Divine Wisdom or Theosophia. Such aspirants will never fail to receive at the right time and place, and in forms suitable to their temperament and understanding, the guidance that is needed for their personal happiness and their hastened evolution to the occult and spiritual heights.

As the great Master Polidorus Isurenus of the Brotherhood of Luxor has made clear, the central necessity is that the individual who successfully seeks true occult and spiritual unfoldment is Egoically or interiorly self-moved, irresistibly as it were, from within, so that in truth, for him or her, “there is no other Path at all to go”. Without this, all the virtues in the world will lack the inward fire which the Ego or spiritual Self alone when sufficiently developed—can and does provide, for then there cannot possibly be any hesitation at all, and no other person can then finally divert the aspirant from treading the central. Adept-founded and Adept-inspired Path of Swift Unfoldment that leads to Adeptship.

Amongst the virtues to be acquired above all others, it is taught, is humility, Geoffrey’s guiding quality in which I found him unfailingly to excel; for throughout his entire life he never felt himself to be either superior to others or a specially chosen agent of the Masters of the Wisdom. Nor did he ever seek for himself power, position, or office. On the contrary, despite his consciously exercised occult powers or siddhis, humility was the outstanding characteristic and notable impress of every motive, thought, and conduct of his life. In consequence, apart from myself and a small number of intimate colleagues, no one was ever informed of, or even directly knew about, his lofty evolutionary status and his capacity for direct knowledge.

Only on unavoidable ceremonial occasions did he ever permit those present to be aware of his occult status. Even then, he never claimed it personally or ever permitted any discussion or questions concerning his intimate esoteric life. This was not in the least an assumed humility, rather was it expressive of the sense of oneness, the appreciation and impersonal affection which he naturally felt towards his fellow human beings.

In all cases of sickness and other needs, whenever his help was sought a continuing event—Geoffrey was clearly moved by a deeply compassionate concern for the welfare, restoration of health, spiritual progress, and general well-being of all his fellow men.

Whenever research into a consulting person’s privacy was necessary, Geoffrey would use the appropriate kind of clairvoyance. Apart from this, on no occasion whatever would he allow himself to pry or penetrate into another’s privacy. Indeed, I know full well that not once did he do so, never thus demeaning himself or lowering his lofty standards.

Throughout the whole of his life since I first knew him, he consciously and with very deep conviction responded to the statements made by the revered Master Kuthumi: “The only object to be striven for is the amelioration of the condition of man by the spread of truth suited to the various stages of his development and that of the country he inhabits and belongs to”^{^[18]} and “We have to popularize a knowledge of Theosophy”. Indeed, Geoffrey would hardly have agreed to my publication of this unique document, were it not for the spiritual and occult impetus and help that would be given to the Theosophical Society, its members, and countless others.

Before the “knocks”‘ method of obtaining Geoffrey’s attention was instituted, and when Geoffrey’s mind was strongly concentrated upon his work, the Master or high Initiate of the Brotherhood would sometimes make Geoffrey aware of His Presence by sending a strong current of energy sweeping down the side of his face. This means was still used by the Master if Geoffrey was not alone and there was need to advise him concerning the solution of a problem, or for advice to the person who was with him, so that they should not be at all aware of the invisible Personage or His interpolated verbal help. Geoffrey would respond immediately by entering into what he called the “white-sheet” state of hyper-awareness of consciousness, that of the absolutely stilled mind, cleared of all mental biases and thoughts of its own—so that nothing should colour, alter, or disturb the purity of his reception of the concepts and their meanings received from the communicating Adept. I also learnt that Geoffrey unfailingly placed his mind in this unoccupied state whilst preparing to engage in occult research, but, let it ever be remembered, always in full consciousness and in complete possession of all his remarkable faculties^{^[19]}- true Seership.

Throughout many years, Geoffrey recorded, or related to me to record, the wonderful experiences he passed through while out of the body during sleep. These were either events that occurred in the higher planes of Nature, visions, or inner teachings impressed upon him by the exalted and glorious inhabitants of the inner worlds—the Masters of the Wisdom and the great devas. These experiences were recalled by Geoffrey with an amazing degree of clarity, and the Master would confirm the accuracy of his recollection the following morning.^{^[20]}

As Geoffrey has explained, in sleep and in death the physical and etheric bodies become inoperative, unconscious. The Ego is then five-principled, and is able to function in the astral or mental bodies or both, according to evolutionary stature, mode of life, and training.^{^[21]} The study of Theosophy, regular meditation, and the practice of yoga, quicken the evolution of the subtle bodies and increase self-mastery and effectiveness in superphysical travel and action.

A true “dream” is experienced in the higher planes (mental and Causal levels) and the memory of it is impressed indelibly on the consciousness. Thus the “dreams” of a highly evolved person such as Geoffrey are fully conscious waking experiences and quite distinct from the confused and disconnected memories normally implied by the term “dreams”, which usually occur on the astral plane.

After Geoffrey had passed on, I decided to include certain passages in which acknowledgement is made by the Masters of the Wisdom for his contributions to Their work. Although his natural humility would have prevented the publication of any praise to himself, I myself have added certain communications which show, among other things, that the great Masters are deeply appreciative of those who work selflessly and tirelessly in the spreading of Theosophia.

From the early recollections by Geoffrey of his childhood, the angel experiences, communication and teaching, and on through the many wonderful years when he became a messenger-agent of the Masters of the Wisdom, a light illumined his life and chosen Path—the Light of the Sanctuary of the Great Brotherhood of the Adepts. He was a bringer of that Light to man and with it, awareness and knowledge of the reality of those Superhuman Beings, the Perfected Ones, Who, during our unfoldment guard, guide, and inspire us on the long homeward journey of our pilgrimage back to the limitless source of all Love, Wisdom, Peace, and Joy.

May those who read the pages which follow, find the inspiration and depth of realization that they, in their turn, may serve humanity and the Great Ones. They may thereby tread that same Pathway that leads “to Discipleship of a Master of the Wisdom, the great Initiations, and to the final liberation from all human limitations—the attainment of Adeptship”.

Sandra Hodson

A LIFE REMEMBERED

[When eventual publication of biographical material was being contemplated, I asked Geoffrey to put on tape the story of his life, with special reference to his occult experiences. Some portions were recorded in 1957 and others in 1979. This section is the result.]

One remembers—yes, one remembers especially—events which have profound influence upon one’s life. It seems to have been my destiny to experience many such events, and they began at a very early age. Indeed, I was perhaps only five or six years old when the first of these came to me. It remains partly as a vivid dream-experience, for I was in a half-dreaming, half-waking state. It seemed that, from within the sun itself, a huge birdlike figure of fire, with a long tail shaped like that of a lyre bird, descended and entered my whole body through the crown of my head, almost setting up a blazing fire within me. Too young to sustain such a visitation, I screamed in terror. As always, my mother came to comfort me. From very early childhood I had often been frightened by ugly elemental faces, grinning and grimacing at my bedside, and my mother’s wise and loving presence always dispelled my fears and brought me peace.

Very much later in life, if I may move ahead temporarily, I gained what I think is some understanding of this strange and rather shattering experience. I was living with some tea planters in Ceylon, and used to go up high into the mountains to meditate. On one such occasion, there suddenly appeared what seemed to be a great Archangel from the sun which hovered above but fairly close to me. Not frightened this time, but filled with awe, I dared to examine this resplendent being, and I saw that all the figures, shapes, colours, and forces of the famous wand of Hermes were living and flowing upward through it and into its head. It was a kind of living caduceus, built of intense fiery power, seeming to reach from earth to sun. I was aware then that I was seeing a kind of solar intelligence, a Kundalini deva.

Later, I wrote a description of this great being and, still later, a very fine artist, Miss Ethelwynne Quail of South Africa, painted it from my description. This painting appears in my book, The Kingdom of the Gods, as Plate 27, a Kundalini deva.

Despite a number of rather unusual experiences, some of which I shall describe later, I had a happy and wholesome childhood. I was born on the 12th of March 1886, of a family of landowners and gentlemen fanners in Lincolnshire, the fen district of England. Our home, a large Tudor style house with surrounding gardens, was situated in the centre of an estate of over a thousand acres. Another part of the family estate, Candlesby Hall, was located in the hills, the Wolds, as they were called. There, in what I might call our “headquarters home”, lived my grandparents. The memory is one of peace, beauty, and happiness—all in all, a fine place to begin an incarnation.

Apart from the houses of the farmhands, our nearest neighbour was a mile away, and the closest town over four miles distant. Families so situated had to depend upon themselves for the activities that made up their daily lives and for the happiness and well-being of the growing children. I was one of five, so there was always ample opportunity for the normal give and take of family life. Our father was an expert at creating interesting and pleasurable things for us to do, and he managed to touch it all with a spirit of adventure. When he bade us goodnight, he would say, “We’ll have some fun tomorrow!” And we always did. There were horses to ride as we accompanied him on his errands about the farm, dogs to play with or take with us on long walks, birds and small animals to discover and watch, and all the other exciting activities possible on a large and busy farm.

Some of my happiest memories surround our Christmas festivities. All the farmhands and our nearest neighbours were invited to our home, and the servants and staff of gardeners shared with us, as part of the family, in the Christmas tree and the joyous activities that took place in our big drawing room. Father and Mother would stand side by side as Father distributed the gifts and all of us revelled in that indescribable sense of Christmas joy which everyone who has such memories will appreciate.

My mind goes back to this especially because our home was none other than Bethlem Farm^{^[22]} in the parish of Wainfleet-St Mary’s. So I, who have developed into a devoted Christian, was “born in Bethlehem”, so to speak, and under Our Blessed Lady’s name, a cherished facet of my memories. Returning there from time to time, as Sandra and I have done, I have found that the love I felt for the place has remained fresh and real.

In the midst of all the activities which went to make up a normal growing boy’s life, there was, from a very early period, a shining inner thread of knowledge which brightened and inspired my days. This remains as a sort of daydream recollection, yet it was nevertheless living and true for me. It was the conviction that there existed somewhere a secret Brotherhood of perfected Beings with a hidden headquarters from which the Members went out into the world to teach and perform deeds of mercy. I knew that when They met each other, They used certain signs for mutual recognition; and when They became fatigued by Their efforts to bring wisdom to human beings, They could return to Their secret headquarters for rest and refreshment. Much later, through my studies of Theosophical literature, I learned that there do indeed exist on our planet not one, but many such hidden Sanctuaries which serve as headquarters for groups of Adept Teachers. These Beings are the flowering of our humanity, Who have earned the right to pursue Their individual evolution, but Who have chosen to remain in close contact with the world in order that They may help those of us who have still to attain that exalted state. I have reason to believe that my life has several times been miraculously saved, and I dare to assume that Members of this Brotherhood may have been responsible.

Perhaps it should be pointed out here that, in relating the often strange and unusual happenings of both my younger days and my more mature years, I do so according to my own understanding and interpretation, using my intuition so far as that has been developed. I make this statement in order to avoid distracting the reader hereafter by repeated interpolations to this effect as the story proceeds. I ask that this be kept in mind.

The first rather dramatic instance of mysterious rescue occurred when I was seven or eight, after I had been sent away to boarding school at Spilsby, about eight miles from Bethlem Fanm. Bicycle riding was a favourite leisure-time occupation, and it was a thrilling experience to explore the countryside. On one occasion, when I had cycled about three miles from the school, I had to descend a very steep hill. The wheel of the bicycle must have caught in some way; at any rate, I was thrown off and apparently lost consciousness. I remember nothing at all until I regained consciousness back at the school, with one side of my face severely gravel-scarred. No one reported having found me and having brought me there, and later studies and experiences have led me to believe that an invisible protector was responsible. A few other instances will be related at the appropriate places in my story.

After four years at the boarding school in Spilsby, I progressed to the Bishop’s Stortford Grammar School in Hertfordshire, and many unusual experiences came to me during my studies there. Such instances were by no means unusual for me throughout my boyhood, as were certain mystical experiences. I remember that, attending church with my mother, who was organist and choirmistress at the Church of St Mary’s, Wainfleet, I learned about the existence of Jesus, and I came to know, or thought I knew, that I would see Jesus Himself before I died. That has still to be fulfilled,^{^[23]} but the memory is vividly with me. Also, at a very early age, in passing through the ceremony of Confirmation and for at least three days afterwards, I lived as if surrounded by a sphere of golden light. That experience, too, is still with me.

May I digress briefly to recall that, in connection with my Latin studies, I frequently came upon mention of Rome. This reminds me of a sudden recollection of a Roman incarnation which came to me one day in later years when I was visiting that city. I was seated with my hostess in the ancient Pantheon, trying to open myself to whatever memory the situation might evoke. Suddenly I saw the whole area surrounded by fire. I exclaimed about it, and then described what seemed to me a very curious thing. “They have some form of fire engines, because a lot of people are coming and trying to put out the fire.” My hostess told me afterwards that she thought at the time, “That’s quite wrong! The Romans didn’t have anything in the way of fire engines.” But she was intrigued and made a point to do some research. “There really was a fire at the Pantheon,” she assured me later, “and the Romans did have fire extinguishing machinery.”

To return to the recital of my earlier years, and specifically to the religious attitudes and convictions which were so much a part of my life, it is perhaps obvious that I grew up a truly devout Christian and, in general, an unquestioning one. I thought much about the Christian message but for me the Bible was absolutely true and every word of it had to be believed literally. I was due for a drastic awakening.

When I was about twenty-four, I obtained employment at a business house in Liverpool, and lodgings were found for me with a family across the water in Canmere. I was very comfortably situated and came to like the members of the family. The father, however, was a complete atheist. He saw me going to the church, which happened to be across the street from the house, and decided to question me.

“Geoffrey,” he asked me one day, “do you believe that there were two of every animal in the Ark before the Flood?”

I replied confidently, “Of course I do. It’s in the Bible.”

“Well,” he said, “the South American sloth at its fastest can move one mile a day. It would have had to start two thousand years before the Flood in order to get there in time to be taken into the Ark. Can you believe that two of them reached there?”

This shook me considerably and I didn’t know how to answer. He persisted: “And do you believe, for example, that Joshua made the sun stand still to make a longer day?”

Less confidently, perhaps, this time, I answered, “Of course I believe it. It says so in the Bible.”

“Look, Geoffrey,” he said patiently, “the movement of the sun has nothing whatever to do with the length of the day. It’s the rotation of the earth on its axis that determines this. Now, in order to lengthen the day, Joshua would have had to stop the earth from rotating, and then every living object, including Joshua, would have taken off with the speed of light to the east, and there would be no one left to record the incident. What do you believe now?”

So he went on, needling me with questions, until he completely shattered my treasured faith in the Bible and left me a very, very miserable young man. My heart seemed empty and I did not know where to turn.

I must have carried my unhappiness with me to my work, for one of my older associates, a Quaker, seemed to understand my trouble. One day he handed me a small book entitled Esoteric Christianity by Annie Besant, then the great and deeply respected world President of the Theosophical Society. My eager study of this book restored my faith in Christianity and gave me an understanding of scripture as a blend of history, symbology, and allegory. The insights which came from this experience resulted later in an intensive study of allegories, mythologies, and symbols, and awoke in me an awareness of the fact that they reveal not so much historical events as profound and everlasting truths. My continued interest in and study of these subjects has led to the writing of no less than four books and two pamphlets on the hidden wisdom in the Holy Bible; and, as I record this, I am at work, with my wife Sandra, in writing an illustrated work dealing with the secret wisdom and truth not only in scriptures but in world mythologies as well.

Later, I came to know Dr Annie Besant, but before that transpired I was privileged to hear her lecture and to have, in that connection, a profoundly moving experience. This was in March of 1912, shortly after I had moved to Manchester. I was delighted when I saw advertised the fact that Dr Annie Besant was to lecture in the famous Free Trade Hall there, and of course I attended. Not only was I enthralled by the philosophy she expounded but, as I watched her, I saw what I later came to know was her aura, shining out from her far beyond the walls of the building, filled with rich and wonderful colours and radiating streams of benediction to the world. So great was the impact of this experience that I immediately joined the Theosophical Society.

This was not the last of the experience, however. Some time thereafter, I came upon a book written by Annie Besant and C.W. Leadbeater entitled Man, Visible and Invisible, and the frontispiece of that book depicted the aura precisely as I had seen it during Dr Besant’s lecture in Manchester. Indeed, as I look back, I see that evening in the Free Trade Hall as a decisive event in my life.

I became quite active in the Manchester Lodge of the Theosophical Society, and after a time I was appointed as one of its visiting teachers who were sent out to small groups in the surrounding towns.^{^[24]} My first venture in this capacity was in the old township of Wigan, and my talk was on the subject “Life After Death”. Returning not long afterwards for my second lecture, I found awaiting me on the steps of the meeting house a lady in deep mourning, accompanied by her daughter. They urgently requested an interview and I arranged to see and talk with them.

The lady told me that, a few weeks before my lecture on “Life After Death”, her son lay dying and she was experiencing the deepest grief. The attending physician had warned her to stay close by and she remained in an adjoining room, with the door open between her and where her son lay. An outside door led into the room which she occupied and, sometime during the night, this door opened and two young men entered. Apparently without noticing her, they passed on into the room where her son lay. After a time they emerged, and one of the young men spoke to her with great kindness. He told her not to grieve, as her son would not be lost but would only leave his physical body. He then went on to explain the nature of the life after death, and she felt greatly comforted and consoled. Finally the two men left by the door through which they had come in.

The son died shortly thereafter, and the mother was sustained by the help she had received. She repeatedly related to the family, and even to friends, the story of her strange visitors, so that they came to know her helpers almost as well as she did. Then the mother and daughter attended my lecture on “Life After Death” and sat in the front row. What was their astonishment when there walked out onto the platform none other than one of the young men who had visited her in her home! They wanted to tell me the story and express their appreciation.

I was not then familiar with the Theosophical teaching concerning “invisible helpers”, but I came upon it soon afterwards, and thereafter made it a practice to determine, before going to sleep each night, that I would engage in this type of service. I must confess, however, that I had in those early days no memory of having done so on the occasion related to me by the very grateful mother.

Other recollections come to me in connection with my work in Manchester. During the ceremony of my admission to the Theosophical Lodge in that city, I was only half aware of what was going on outwardly, because I was watching a kind of dual vision. This appeared to consist of a large, almost living pair of scales and, beside it, a ceremonial chair. The President of the Lodge, a seeress and my valued occult instructor, noticed my abstraction and afterwards asked me about it. I shared the vision with her and she, most inspiringly and truly as I later came to know, interpreted it for me. The scales, she said, symbolized the working out of much karma, both adverse and favourable, from previous lives, a balancing of the different aspects. The chair, she felt, obviously symbolized my future occult development

THE YEARS OF WORLD WAR I

One of the most striking and helpful experiences in my life came to me at about this time. World War I had broken out, and I was inwardly tom. My Theosophical studies had led me to a deep appreciation of the quality of compassion, and I shrank from enlisting and indeed from the whole thought of the life of a soldier. I found no solution and my uncertainty and distress continued. One night I awoke with the full memory of having been in the Presence of a very great Master, robed and shining with white light. His right hand was extended towards me, and in it was an upward-turned shining sword. My doubts dissolved, and I knew at once that my duty lay in the defence of the small country of Belgium, just then being invaded by the German army. Almost immediately I joined the Cavalry Regiment,[25] for I had learned to ride as a boy. Ever since that time, I have seen clearly the difference between a war of aggression—ever indefensible—and a war of defence, always justifiable, indeed essential, I have come to think.

Later, while an officer in the Royal Tank Corps in training in Dorsetshire, I was a privileged visitor in the home of a prominent Theosophist in Bournemouth. On one occasion, having arrived there after a tiring week of training and a motorcycle ride of several miles, I retired to the room which I was permitted to use on such visits for what I anticipated would be a necessary rest I had scarcely stretched out on the bed, however, before I was wholly caught up in the consciousness of being in the Presence of one of the great Masters of the Wisdom, the Master Kuthumi. I remained there for a time in deep meditation. Finally I rose and, hearing a sound outside my window, I looked out into the garden. There I saw a large group of people being addressed by an elderly gentleman. I went out and joined the group. I found the speaker to be none other than Mr A.P. Sinnett, the recipient of many letters[26] from that particular great Adept and, so far as one knows, His pupil. This fact seemed to underscore the earlier vision, and the whole incident gave me greater awareness of the reality of the Master.

One day, about this time, I had come in from parade, probably driving a tank, and was lying on my bunk. To my astonishment I had a superphysical visit from my brother Stanley, who was then in France with the Canadian Army. His head was bound up and I knew that he had been mortally wounded. Shortly afterwards, news came from my mother in London that he had been killed in the Battle of Lens, which took place at about the time of his visit to me.

On another occasion, when I was undergoing special training in the use of a new tank in France, I was meditating near the church of St Martin Les Deux Eglises at the edge of a small wood. I was suddenly overwhelmed with the consciousness, however partial, of the awe-inspiring majesty of the Supreme Deity, and I passed into really deep contemplation.

Almost every day, when I was off duty, I went into the church at Les Deux Eglises, and there I would sit in the front pew and try to meditate. The training I was undergoing was especially rigorous; the new type of tank which we were learning to use was to enable us to take a team of machine gunners ahead of the retreating enemy and put them in the German trench so they could operate from there as the Germans came in. Not only was the work exhausting but, although I was not very conscious of it at the time, I suppose I was frightened, for the kind of action for which we were preparing meant going right behind the German lines, a manoeuvre of extreme danger.

One day, as I sat in this church, trying to pray and looking at the beautiful stained glass depiction of St Martin bestowing his cloak upon a beggar, I became aware that the real Personage had “moved from the window” and had come to stand directly above and behind me. I felt a great stream of healing grace and spiritual power descend upon me; and then, almost as though he spoke in words, I received the absolute assurance that, in whatever actions I might be engaged in the future, I would be quite safe and would return home unharmed when the war was over. I could scarcely believe that such a thing had happened to me, but the conviction became so strong that my fear completely vanished.

The next day I returned to the church and the whole experience was repeated; and this occurred on another occasion also. The nervous condition which had been tormenting me disappeared and I felt an inner assurance of complete safety. This remained with me throughout the harrowing experiences which followed, especially during the great Allied advance in August, and right on until the close of the war.

There were, however, a few occasions in which it seemed that my end had surely come. In one such instance I was walking ahead of my tank, guiding it forward in the night in preparation for an attack. Suddenly I discovered that I was backing into a great row of barbed wire. The tank continued to move forward and would soon have crushed me underneath, but by some miracle (I cannot explain it) the driver felt impelled to stop. Thus did I escape by almost a hair’s breadth.

Again, during the attack on the St Quentin Canal, I was in the nearby village of Hargicourt. It was necessary for me to keep closely in touch with all information about the enemy, and I gained a great deal of valuable knowledge by going to the dugout where prisoners of war were questioned. One piece of information was so important that I hurried back to my tank in order to pass it on as quickly as possible. This tank, incidentally, was the first to be equipped with radio for direct communication with headquarters. The village was under shellfire, and as I walked rapidly down the street, a huge shell came over and seemed to be aimed directly at me. There was pressure as of a hand between my shoulders, and I was forced to lie flat on the ground. The shell came down a few yards behind me, and all the power of the explosion passed over me. My tin hat came off and rolled down the street, while I lay there for a time, rather stunned. But I was unharmed except for a mild concussion which lasted some three weeks but was not sufficiently severe to keep me from the performance of duty.[27]

Of course, I shared in the general relief and gratitude when the war came to an end.

A CIVILIAN AGAIN AND THE OPENING OF A NEW LIFE

My position with the Manchester branch of a large London interior decorating firm had been held for me, and I thankfully returned there after my discharge from military service. My Theosophical associations were also still alive and vital. However, I soon found myself struggling with a total lack of interest in business. The unique quality of comradeship which develops in groups sharing the stark realities of war had so permeated me that it became increasingly difficult to adjust to the atmosphere of commerce. I simply wanted to give everything away. For a time, however, no other avenue opened for me.

Then came a wonderful and unsought relief, as on so many occasions in my life. I received an invitation from the head of the world Y.M.C.A. to become one of its active directors and to take over a post in some city in England. This invitation came when I was on honeymoon with my dear earlier wife, Jane, in the beautiful Lake District, and one of its conditions was that I should go immediately to London for an interview. Although this meant abrupt termination of a very happy time, Jane and I decided that I should go. As a result of the interview I accepted the appointment, resigned my position with the interior decorating firm, and arranged to attend the school of instruction which preceded actually taking over a Y.M.C.A. post. Eventually I was assigned as Y.M.C.A. secretary in the city of Preston, in Lancashire.

Unfortunately, the country was then in the throes of an outbreak of strikes in a great many areas, and one industry after another was forced to close as a result. This inevitably affected the work of the Y.M.C.A., as promise after promise of financial help was withdrawn. The outlook seemed bleak indeed.

Again, a kind of miracle intervened. I began to have very definite and peculiar occult experiences, quite unsought as it happened, for the Y.M.C.A. work with the young people in Preston absorbed most of my time and energy.

ENTRY INTO THE KINGDOM OF THE GODS

Jane and I lived in a large old house just outside the city. A wonderful pet, a rough-haired fox-terrier named Peter, shared our home and was actually the means of a startling development in my life. He was highly intelligent and very much a part of our lives. In winter he loved to lie near the fire and could almost always be found there while we ourselves relaxed during the evening hours.

However, one evening, to our surprise, he left the fireside and went to the far end of the long room, where he stood for some time staring into a comer. Very curious, we called him, but he did not respond. Now and then his eyes would roll as though watching something flying about the room; otherwise he stared at what, from our view, seemed empty space. Finally Jane said, “Do go and see what Peter is looking at.”

I went and sat beside our pet and put my arm about him. “What is it you are seeing, Peter?” I asked. Then suddenly he and I together became aware clairvoyantly of the presence of many members of the fairy kingdom and a great deva which I believe brought them to us, using the instinctual clairvoyance of Peter to attract my attention. I must describe the experience in the light of later knowledge, for I did not then understand it. The comer of the room was filled with the great glowing aura of the deva, and in this aura, at about the level of our eyes, were a number of nature spirits. They kept moving about within the great cloud of light; occasionally one would flash out about the room, alighting on the architraves at the top of the door, or on some other object in the room. Then, all at once, the auric cloud seemed to open and all the creatures within it were freed to dart about the room. I went back to where Jane sat by the fireplace and tried to describe to her what I had seen and was still seeing—especially one brownie who tramped up and down the fireside carpet in a most amusing manner.

Indeed, I was very greatly indebted to Jane in this particular relationship as in all others; for from the first moment when I began to speak of occult awakenings, visions, and experiences, she unfailingly both responded and faithfully recorded every single one of them. In consequence, I was both supported personally and assisted in the production of all my books upon the subject of the kingdom of the fairy and the Angelic Hosts. From described visions of fairies later carried out at Sheepscombe to the quite sudden and totally unexpected establishment of the link with the Maha-Deva Bethelda^{^[28]} and receipt of His teaching, she carefully wrote word for word every record of such experiences. Without this ever ready aid, the books referred to could hardly have appeared.

Thus came about the beginning of my study of the kingdoms of faerie and angels, for the visitations continued through that long cold winter. At that time, not knowing the significance of my life, I regarded myself simply as an explorer in a new land, recording these happenings as accurately as I could. Most of the descriptions eventually found their way into my book, Fairies at Work and at Play.

When spring came, Jane and I went out into the fields and woods and onto the moors, carrying out these studies in the midst of Nature itself. This was indeed a wonderful time, during which I gained much knowledge of the kingdom of the angels through the different parts of England, and especially in the Lake District and the mountains. In the midst of all this, I was trying very hard to fulfil the Y.M.C.A. secretaryship but, due to the continuing strikes, my success was not outstanding.

THE CALL TO OCCULT RESEARCH

Again destiny seemed to intervene. A group of Theosophists in London had evidently heard something of what had been happening, and invited Jane and me to go to London and work with them in the establishment of new methods in various fields of human welfare, including medicine and the healing of the sick. I had an interview with our great friend and brother, Mr Baillie-Weaver,^{^[29]} at his office in London, with the result that I accepted the invitation.

We sold our house in Preston and went to London to live under the auspices of this very wealthy group, among whom was at least one millionaire and one member of the British aristocracy. Lady Muriel Delaware. Both became fast friends and shared in the investigations into healing techniques. I have written about all this elsewhere, but I may say here that while I worked with a group of physicians in the study of the procedures of healing, I became aware of the collaboration of Orders of what I must regard as healing angels. Indeed, some quite remarkable events, such as sudden healings without much effort on my part, did continually occur during the six years or more that I remained in this work. The general nature of the undertaking was described and published in the book, Some Unrecognized Factors in Medicine, edited by my very close friend, Dr Tudor Edmunds. This is now available in Quest Books, published by the Theosophical Publishing House.

Another undertaking during this time was a study of prenatal life, for our researches into the deep-rooted sources of human illness pointed again and again to the importance of this phase in the cyclic reincarnations of the spiritual Self or human Ego. It was suggested, and I agreed, that I should engage with these doctors in investigating the processes which take place during this period. Fortunately, a special opportunity was offered, as the wife of one of the physicians was expecting a child.

This enabled me to watch the process of the embryo’s development from week to week. In addition, two of the co-operating doctors maintained a large maternity home in the south of London, and provided me with opportunities to carry out similar investigations there. Here, too, I became aware of the co-operation of Orders of angels, including that wondrous Representative of the Feminine Principle of Deity which we have come to call the World Mother. I have recorded my findings in my small work, The Miracle of Birth.

As this part of my life is being recorded, I think I should include here my meeting with a highly clairvoyant lady, Mrs Mary de la Middleton. She had heard of me and the experiments I was undertaking, and sent a message through a friend inviting Jane and me to have afternoon tea with her, which we did. I soon saw that she was a remarkable person, quiet, unassuming, with large and wonderful eyes, and an inner poise. She impressed me very deeply.

Her Master (Master Rakoczy) had instructed her to offer me guidance in this work of diagnosis, healing, and occult research, which she subsequently did. She showed me how to awaken clairvoyance into activity when required, how to focus consciousness at different levels, and how to project certain forces into the subtle and even the physical bodies of patients according to their needs.

We made a practice of her coming once a week, and as I would go through the list of patients with her, naming and describing them, she could herself “see” and, where necessary, rediagnose the case, and help me with the occult force to be used. She taught me so much that I greatly needed to know, and therefore meeting Mrs de la Middleton was a very, very important event in my life.

THE MIRACLE OF THE SHEEPSCOMBE COTTAGE

It was at about this time that another strange event occurred. This was in August of 1925 and concerned arrangements that had been made for Jane and myself, with a group of friends, to spend a holiday in a house that had been reserved for us in Newquay, Cornwall. However, just as we were preparing to leave for Cornwall, we received word from the owner of the house that it was no longer available. It looked very much as though our holiday would have to be abandoned or some alternative arrangement made. We had not arrived at a decision when, much to our surprise, a letter came from a complete stranger offering the use of a cottage in the valley of Sheepscombe in Gloucestershire. The writer stated that she had received, on two occasions, a strong impression that she should write to us and offer us her home for the month of August and for as long as we might need it. We accepted her offer and went down to the beautiful valley of Sheepscombe to find a well-built, commodious cottage awaiting us, and a family nearby, ready to help us with the household duties.

PROFOUND APPRECIATION TO MRS FLORENCE TIDDIMAN

Indeed, it is quite impossible for me to describe the many extremely beneficent results arising from the intuitive action of our hostess, Mrs Florence Tiddiman. She was a member of the Theosophical Society and evidently a true mystic in the real meaning of the word.

Almost as soon as Jane and I met this most generous helper, a strong friendship developed with her and her family, resulting in voyages being made together to Holland, and residence—again with us as her guests—near the great European occult Centre of St Michael’s, Huizen [Naarden],

Whilst verbally I have continued to express my deep appreciation and gratitude to Mrs Tiddiman, I here wish to record publicly my deep feeling of respect and thankfulness to her—my greatly valued friend and helper, for from her spontaneous invitation arose everything which made possible my fairy and angel books, beginning there with The Brotherhood of Angels and of Men and culminating thus far in the illustrated work, The Kingdom of the Gods.

Sheepscombe is a small village slightly over a hundred miles from London, fortunately still unspoilt, probably because there is no highway through it. The few houses are built of lovely Cotswold stone, and all stand within the remains of what was once a large beech forest. The whole valley is wonderfully peaceful, and when we were there it proved to be very rich in fairy life, enabling me to continue the investigations I had begun at Preston. It was a charming place, with green meadows, fruitful orchards, flowering gardens, and even a little stream nearby which ran through the valley. A village church added to the atmosphere of tranquillity. So delighted were we with the place that we returned there whenever we could for rest and relaxation. But it was on that first holiday that an extraordinary experience came to me. .

THE GREAT ARCHANGEL BETHELDA REVEALS HIMSELF

Jane and I were lying on a hillside at the edge of what remained of the beech forest; I was dictating to her my observations as I studied the fairy life about us, and I had noticed an especially beautiful fairy associated with a tree about fifty yards in front of us. Quite suddenly, and entirely unsought, I had a tremendous expansion of consciousness. It seemed that the whole heavens opened and became filled with light, and I was caught up into a height which I had never hitherto attained. All was radiant with “The light that never was, on sea or land”.^{^[30]} Gradually, as I tried to adjust myself to this new experience in the higher consciousness (the Causal level, at least, I believe it to have been), I became aware of the Presence of a great angelic Being from Whose consciousness to mine there began to flow a stream of ideas concerning the life, the forces, and the consciousness of the universe as these realities express themselves in both angels and human beings. So far as I was able to discern in the brilliant light, He was supernally beautiful—is supernally beautiful, I should say, for the link with Him has never been broken. (I use the masculine pronoun for convenience only.) He was majestic, godlike, impassive, and utterly impersonal. Eventually, He communicated to me that He might be known by the name of Bethelda. A Hebrew friend of mine, an expert in the Kabbalah, later gave the meaning of this name as “the Angel of the House of God”.

As teacher, Bethelda began to communicate to me knowledge about the Angelic Hosts and especially the possibility of founding a great movement which He Himself entitled “The Brotherhood of Angels and of Men”. I dictated to my wife Jane as the message came to me, missing some parts because I was too far out of ordinary consciousness to bring it all “down” into our customary speech. There poured into my mind in the most beautiful language the whole concept of a time to come when brotherhood would really be established among the humans of our earth along with a companionship, a co-operation, a genuine brotherhood between the angels and mankind.

And so a wonderful gateway opened into realms of light. Daily entering that gateway, I became aware of the great ocean of the life and force and soul of the universe and its myriad denizens—the spiritual Selves of men and Supermen and the vast company of Angelic Hosts, the Shining Ones—all engaged in the creation of a celestial symphony, with the Logos as the divine Composer, and great Beings Who assimilate the mighty creative chords in Their primordial potency and re-echo them through all Their ranks from the highest spiritual worlds to the realm of everlasting archetypes. These are the great sound forms, I learned gradually, upon which and by which the universe is modelled according to the divine idea. The music of the creative song passes through the lower worlds to where man responds to it, perceiving it as the varied forms of Nature. Thus it seemed to me that when the Master Musician enunciates the great theme for His Solar System, a mighty paean sounds forth in answer from the innumerable celestial beings. From and through them, as the sound of myriads of harps touched by immortal hands, this music pours forth to create—to shape—the material universe. Since the great Artist of the universe perpetually creates, the symphony is forever being composed and performed. Wondrously, and without the knowledge of humans, all life dwells amidst these celestial harmonies, the music of the spheres, but only he who hears “takes off his shoes”.^{^[31]}

Such, in part, is the vision which once I had, lying on a hillside in England. This vision still lives with me, and there has come with it the knowledge that the Gods Who were once so near to the ancient races of men were none other than the Angelic Hosts, that throughout the great racial darkness They have still been near though unperceived, and that the time will come when once again the Gods will walk with men. For that day, man must prepare. Ugliness must be banished, war outlawed, brotherhood must reign, beauty must be enshrined in human hearts and revealed through human lives. Then to a humanity united in one fraternity, the Gods will draw near, reveal Their immortal loveliness and lend Their aid in building a new world, a new Temple in which all men may perceive and adore the Supreme as BEAUTY.[32]

The messages continued during several visits until at last there was a considerable manuscript. The challenge was staggering, for I did not feel •at all adequate to be a leader in bringing about such a tremendous change in human thought.

DR BESANT SUPPORTS AND OFFERS AN INTRODUCTION TO THE BOOK

Fortunately, at the time we completed the manuscript of messages from Bethelda, no less a person than Dr Annie Besant, President of the Theosophical Society, was in London. I sent some of the manuscript to her and asked for her advice concerning whether I should continue to receive these teachings and eventually publish them. Shortly thereafter, I went to the home of Lady Delaware, where Dr Besant was staying, and talked with her. She told me she had read the manuscript.

“Mr Hodson,” she said, “this is just what we have been expecting. It is one of the signs of the coming of the New Age.”

“Does this mean, Dr Besant,” I asked, “that I, who am without any position whatever in the world, am to announce the formation of a movement called ‘The Brotherhood of Angels and of Men’?”

“I will test that,” she replied, and was silent for some minutes. Finally she said, “Yes, proceed, and I will support you. If you wish, I shall be glad to write an introduction to your first volume.”^{^[33]}

Of course, I was deeply grateful. Humbly—on my knees, almost I thanked her, and then, most encouraged, I went down to the village of Sheepscoaibe. The flow of ideas continued.

The first volume which resulted from these experiences, and for which Dr Besant wrote the introduction, is entitled—as might be expected—The Brotherhood of Angels and of Men. Four more angel books followed, the last being The Supreme Splendour.

Thus, what began as an interesting personal study of the kingdom of faerie led into communication with the kingdom of the angels and the writing of several books and, indeed, all that has followed.

As we were leaving the valley for the last time before going on a world lecturing tour, Bethelda gave me the only personal talk I have ever had with Him... I have tried to live up to it. He said, “If you so wish, you can be an ambassador from the angelic kingdoms to humanity and travel around the world bringing to people as much of this message in an acceptable form as they are willing to take. I will still be willing to help you, wherever you are. This is My name, Bethelda, and you can call upon Me for aid.” And never since that time, after the passage of all these years, have I lost touch with Him.

In that last communication with Bethelda in Sheepscombe, He showed me the possibility of my taking this message, of the existence of the angels and nature spirits as real beings, to mankind. I could give some information about their place in the economy of Nature, how they were members of a parallel stream of evolving life, using this planet and solar system side by side with humanity for their purposes of evolution and work. This was the message that I was to take to the world which I was now going to enter. I was leaving my retreat. I was leaving my time of research and study, meditation, and communion with Him and other angels, and now going right out into humanity and another kind of life altogether.

He told me that this was the purpose and meaning of all my contacts with the angelic kingdom, from that first experience when a deva brought the fairies into my room, on through all that happened thereafter. All were outworkings of a plan which could become my dharma.

As friends have expressed it, the devas have taken me into their ranks, and asked me to be their accredited agent to whatever country I go. And since that Sheepscombe communion, they come to me at once in greeting... As far as I remember, in practically every country, the devas have found occasion to give me welcome to that area of the planet

Since then, I have travelled around the world, lectured to large audiences in many countries, and taught many classes. Often I have been asked to expound this whole idea of the existence of the fairy kingdom and the Angelic Hosts and the wonderful possibility of a true brotherhood of angels and of men. In a manner which I could not have foreseen, the response has been remarkable, evidencing the hunger in the human heart for assurance of life beyond the mundane physical world. A number of groups in different parts of the world—I have no idea how many—are using the invocation from The Brotherhood of Angels and of Men, especially the one for healing, in collaboration with the Angelic Hosts. So, in however small a way, the great movement has been established and continues.

In 1929, events combined to bring that period of my life [occult research and healing in London] to an end. And just at that time, when I was uncertain what to do, there came an invitation from the American Section for us both to attend the septennial World Congress in Chicago. We accepted, and travelled over with Miss Clara Codd and Mr Peter Freeman, by ship to Canada, then to Chicago.

It was there that I received the angelic expression of greeting and welcome to that great continent while I was on the roof of our hotel overlooking the lake. A number of shining beings hovered above, caught my consciousness and saluted, giving me the sense of readiness to support—a wonderful experience.

Following the Congress, we embarked upon lecture tours for four years, travelling practically the whole American Section except the Northwest and Southeast. During that time, there were some memorable occult incidents, discoveries made in research, and continued clairvoyant diagnoses of disease and healing for individuals.

At this point, perhaps, I should mention that although I had tried my very best to describe the angelic kingdom lucidly and accurately, I always felt that mere words could not do justice to the splendour and beauty, the wonder, of the more advanced members of these hosts. An artist was needed—someone who could collaborate with me in depicting these great beings on canvas. And then another kind of miracle took place.

ETHELWYNNE QUAIL, THE ARTIST, OFFERS COLLABORATION

After lecturing in the United States, Jane and I went to South Africa on a lecture tour, and then on to India to the International Headquarters of the Theosophical Society at Adyar, near Madras, where we stayed for a time and participated in the work. Later we returned to South Africa, where many people had expressed deep interest in the subjects on which I was writing. The ship on which we travelled was a small one and it was possible to become acquainted with other passengers. There was a family on board, a Mr and Mrs Quail and their daughter, Ethelwynne, who knew about Theosophy, and we at once formed a happy quintet. They had asked me whether I was the Geoffrey Hodson who had written the books on fairies and angels. When I replied that I was, and that I hoped they had found my books believable, one of them replied, “Of course we do! We have read all your books and are deeply interested.”

Mr Quail was a leading South African architect, just then engaged in building a hospital in Capetown. Their daughter, who had done some of the statues in Capetown, was an artist in several fields, including painting, sculpture, and poetry. We found ourselves discussing the desirability of illustrating a book with paintings of some of the magnificent members of the Angelic Hosts, with the result that we agreed, when circumstances permitted, we would get together for this purpose.

Jane and I were again in India when we received a cable from the Quails: “We invite you as our guests to come and stay with us for six weeks in order to paint the pictures of the angels.” We made arrangements to go immediately, and were warmly welcomed at “St James”, the lovely home of the Quails a little distance outside of Capetown.

Miss Ethelwynne Quail and I set to work on our project. Many of the paintings were done from my descriptions of the angels as I remembered them. Occasionally, we explored together and Ethelwynne would paint as I was directly observing one of these great beings. In one instance we spent three or four days in a beautiful horticultural garden just outside of Capetown, where I described and Ethelwynne painted the angel of Castle Crag.

Eventually; the paintings were completed and our time in South Africa came to an end. Jane and I accepted invitations to travel and lecture in Australia and New Zealand. We had the paintings with us but, at that time, no idea whatever where the money would come from to publish a book in which they could be used.

But the work was not in vain. As we travelled, different people who saw the pictures determined that they must be published. Subscriptions were sought and contributions began to materialize. Members of the Theosophical Society in Sydney and Java were particularly generous. At last the Theosophical Publishing House at Adyar agreed to publish a book with all the illustrations, and The Kingdom of the Gods became a reality. Since that time, the book has gone through many printings and just now, as I make this record, a new one has been released.

Of course, as I look at the pictures, I realise that no illustrations, however beautifully done, could do justice to these marvellous beings, some of whose auras reach for half a mile out over mountainsides. The two-dimensional depictions—no matter how brilliant, and they are brilliant—cannot possibly catch the living splendour of the beings themselves. However, I continue to be deeply grateful for the opportunity to offer to readers some hint, at least, of their supernal beauty and magnificence.

AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND

After the visit to South Africa during which the deva paintings were done, we accepted an invitation from Miss Clara Codd, who was then Secretary of the Australian Section, to visit and tour that country. We arrived in April after a very rough voyage, and quickly began the work of lecturing. Jane’s health must now be seriously allowed for, because it changed the pattern of my life considerably. She had been suffering since 1929, observably if slightly, from disseminated sclerosis which gradually progressed. I had everything possible done, by every means we could find in any country that we visited, to ameliorate the situation. It was in Australia that she had to give up coming to lectures, playing the piano for me, and participating in my public life at all. This was a very, very severe blow to both of us.

Shortly after arriving in Australia, I experienced another of those welcoming greetings which I received from the devas of the country. It occurred in King’s Park, which is on an eminence overlooking the broad Swan River at Perth. From there you could see the whole city and beyond to the Darling Ranges, behind which lie the hinterland and the rest of Australia. A large number of great golden devas appeared in the air some distance away, and gave me the customary kind of greeting and assurance of such assistance as was within their power throughout my tour. This was a totally unexpected experience, and showed me again the reality of the inner association with the deva kingdom in general, which the Teacher Bethelda had really established for me. I found that ever afterwards such recognition was always readily available.

It was at this time that Jane and I met a young Theosophist, Miss Sandra Chase, whose mother had been a prominent social worker in Perth, founding the Chase Homes for elderly people, which are still operative. Sandra became drawn to both of us, and spent all the time she could with us while we were in Perth.

One day she drew my attention to Jane’s increasing disabilities, and asked what I was going to do about it, since obviously I could not go on lecturing and travelling much longer if I was to give my whole life to nursing her. She offered to come as soon as she was able, if I liked, and care for Jane. Well, she and Jane had become great friends, and this seemed to me to be a very remarkable offer.

However, we sailed away from Perth to Adelaide without any decision. Then, when Sandra became free, Jane wired to her to come and join the family.

Eventually, during the three or more years in Australia, Jane’s health completely broke down, and she could no longer stand. We did tour the whole continent, however, and finally settled at the Manor. I worked for two years in Sydney as president of the Blavatsky Lodge there. Then the New Zealand Section invited me to tour that country. Sandra was in charge of Jane, and they were happy together. We had a Dodge car in which it was possible, by using a wheelchair and a little help from Sandra, to take Jane for drives, reducing the sense of imprisonment for her. Everyone at the Manor was exceedingly helpful and kind. So I accepted, and went to New Zealand on 17 December 1940, landing at Wellington in time for the Convention which was held at Christchurch. Miss Emma Hunt was then General Secretary, and I embarked upon a tour for three months in the main cities.

However, Jane’s health began to decline rapidly, and Sandra cabled me that if I did not go back, or if Jane could not be brought to me, she probably would not live long. She was becoming seriously ill from loneliness, never really having been parted from me in our marriage till then. We both felt it very deeply when partings occurred. So Miss Hunt found a house in Epsom, where many Theosophists live, and Sandra brought Jane with all our possessions over on the Monterey. They settled into that house while I was far away in Dunedin.

I arrived home to a situation of great sadness and severity. Jane’s decline was rather serious. The doctor, however, stabilized it to some extent, and we were able to nurse her between us for some months, though the effort was very great indeed...Her health continued to deteriorate, and she at last saw that we could not go on any longer, and asked me to place her in a nursing home, which I did. She no longer suffered pain, and adjusted herself to life in a private nursing home which was made comfortable and as nice as possible for her, with my help and Sandra’s constant help when I was away.

The Second World War had broken out and prevented any further touring, even if I had wanted to, although after staying beside Jane for one year, I did start touring the New Zealand Section again. This cessation from travel gave me a great opportunity for fuller study of Theosophical literature. I read right through practically all the major works again: the writings of H.P. Blavatsky and her successors including A.P. Sinnett and G.R.S. Mead, whose writings I liked very much. This led on to deeper studies of occultism, books on Kabbalism and the Tarot and all the world religions, and of special interest, the language of symbols. So I was greatly indebted for this time in which to deepen my understanding and such knowledge of Theosophy as I may have attained.

An interesting development occurred through which I became drawn into the work of animal welfare, concerning which I had not involved myself very much, though Jane had been very active in it, and used to lecture and broadcast upon it during our tours together. The newspaper announced a meeting of people interested in vegetarianism. I happened to notice the advertisement and, thinking that New Zealand was to be the home of the new subrace, and that the Manu would welcome any refinement of the people through diet, I attended the meeting. I took a back seat but joined in where I could, and before long I found myself being invited to come to take the chair and conduct the meeting, which I did. There was so much enthusiasm that I put it to the meeting as to whether we should found a New Zealand vegetarian society. The decision to do so was unanimous, and we did, there and then. I found myself elected as president, an office which I have held down to the time of dictating these memoirs (1957).

As I toured the country on behalf of the Theosophical Society, I was able to secure the assistance of a great many members who were, of their own free will, vegetarians, and to enrol many of them into membership in this new society. The result was that it prospered. The Theosophical membership devotedly came forth in the branches that were formed in the principal cities in New Zealand, with groups in the smaller places. It is still an active organization, producing a good quarterly magazine.

Then another animal welfare organization developed, in pursuit of the idea of the world week for animal welfare campaign, the first week of October. Several of us had the idea of holding a kind of union with delegates or representatives from the different animal welfare organizations, chiefly in Auckland then, to make the celebration as fine as we possibly could. Out of that idea grew the Council of the Combined Animal Welfare Organizations of New Zealand, a unique body of cooperative animal welfare workers, which also is active right down to today. I am still holding the office of president.

By that time Jane’s health had become stabilized, and the progress of the disease apparently arrested by the treatments applied by her New Zealand doctor. She was comfortable in her nursing home and in herself, so she insisted that I should now accept the numerous invitations to revisit the different countries abroad for lecture tours. Sandra would be there as company and to see to her extra wants. So I did accept, and have toured almost continuously until now (1957), visiting Australia, the United States of America, Canada, England, Holland, and India again.

As I continue this work of meeting the public all over the world, trying to bring to them the teachings of Theosophy through lectures and personal consultations in their troubles, I find the effect of it all has been to deepen into a profound and unshakeable conviction my belief that Theosophy is the world’s greatest need. I feel that if we follow the direction of one of the great Adepts at the beginning of the experiment in the 1870s and 1880s to “popularize a knowledge of Theosophy”, the world problem of dividedness would be solved, and the hearts of those who are in great need spiritually, mentally, and physically would be healed; the way to prevention of suffering would be shown.

So I’ve come to see the teaching of Theosophy as a profoundly important mission. I have felt increasingly what a tremendous privilege and opportunity it has been to respond to invitations to travel the world, lecturing on the Divine Wisdom.

This realization deepened and grew upon me as some thirty years of such work went on, joyous years. They, in a sense, came to a wonderful—I don’t like the word “climax”, because it suggests “end”—consummation for a time, for me, in an invitation from the President of the Theosophical Society, Mr N. Sri Ram, to accept the position of Director of Studies at the School of the Wisdom in the two different sessions of 1953-54 and 1954-55. This School of the Wisdom was brought into existence largely under the inspiration of Mr C. Jinarajadasa, who conceived a special school where members of the Society could come and live at Adyar and study together, having the advantage of the Adyar library and various speakers and authorities gathered there under a director. I quickly welcomed the invitation, and enjoyed directing two sessions of six months each. Because students came from so many countries and spoke so many different languages, I was forced to simplify my presentations of Theosophy and make them a little easier to understand.

I might include here some of the interesting, not necessarily occult, experiences with the students and by myself during this period in India.

INDIA

...Farther southwards more beauty at Tiruvannamalai (notice the prefix Tiru, holy) a very ancient and sacred temple centre at the foot of the famous hill called Arunachala, brought to western knowledge by Paul Brunton in his book In Search of Secret India, where he tells about it and his contact with the Maharishi, Shri Ramana Maharishi, of whom I will speak a little. The hill itself is supposed to be one of the oldest mountain-masses in India, and has been regarded as a very sacred hill from long ago. The word “Arunachala” means “vision of light” or “beacon of light”, and is dedicated to and thought to be a centre of the power of the Third Aspect of the Trimurti, which simply means “three powers”, and is the Indian or Sanskrit word for “Trinity”. At the foot of it there is a very ancient temple, one of the gates or gopurams being older than all the rest

On the other side of the hill remains the ashram of Shri Ramana Maharishi whose story is very illuminating... He used to teach in a large room where he would lie upon a couch with the people on the floor all around him. From all over the world people like Brunton came to him to sit at his feet and ask him questions, listening to his learned addresses on the spiritual life. I have heard many who knew him, testify to one peculiarity of the sage. You did not have to ask your questions, merely sit with him and the proper answer to them sooner or later arose in your mind without any verbal question and answer. He was very deeply revered by large numbers of people, and came to be called “Maharishi”, which means “great Rishi”.

I was granted the privilege of going into the room in which Shri Ramana Maharishi lived. The little room was regarded as particularly sanctified, and I sat there where all his things were: his crutch and a few bowls, an incense holder for pujas. All seemed to have been kept as it was when they took the body away. I then thought I would try to see if his influence was still there as I felt it was, and would ask a question mentally. So I meditated for quite a time till I felt myself definitely in touch with him and seemed to see him in higher worlds. I held in my mind the request to please enunciate a principle of spiritual development. After a time the following words effortlessly formed themselves in my mind; “Voluntarily imprisoned within you as light is an omnipotent power. Set it free. Let the light shine.” Those words may not seem so very much to some people, but they produced a most profound and illuminating effect upon me. I used them as an introductory sentence to my little book on meditation, A Yoga of Light, which was written shortly after that experience.

While I was being driven around Arunachala after I had visited Maharishi’s ashram, I turned to my Indian friends, one of whom was an advocate living in Tiruvannamalai, and asked if this hill did not shelter other holy men. He answered that it sheltered even greater than the Maharishi. When I asked eagerly where they were, he said that they did not reveal themselves, but were known to be up in the heights of the hill. Some shepherds and village people sometimes saw them, and even took them food. Then I urged for information as to there being one known to be available to interview. My friends looked at each other for a few moments, and answered that there was one called Shiva who they felt sure would receive me. We decided to go at once.

Circling the hill, we turned off the main road along a narrow lane between the trees, closer towards Arunachala Hill itself. Eventually we came to a beautiful clearing in the forest where there was a tank, a stone or concrete-lined pool. As we got out of our car, one of my friends exclaimed that there was Shiva over to the right, and I saw an almost naked man who rose as we approached. He was elderly, erect, very well in health, his skin seeming to glow with vitality. He was slender, with long white hair nicely combed down onto his shoulders, with longish moustache and beard, also white. But his eyes were alight with humour and affection, and again that same inner light of which I spoke; indeed, more than that. The whole bearing of the man demonstrated that he had conquered the weaknesses of man and was self-ruled, a kind of king. His very walk showed the most perfect freedom from any weakness, limitation, or fear of anything whatever.

He received us near his own hut under a thatched roof open at the sides. We sat down on the concrete flooring and he on a curved concrete seat. He had made the hut and the lining of the pool by his own hands. He smiled upon us, and my friends introduced me and asked if I could have a conference with him. He smiled radiantly, assenting. So we began to talk about spiritual matters, yoga, philosophy, and the things I love to discuss. He was very friendly, and when I came again on another occasion he seemed to show a warm liking for me. Finally I ventured my most important question. If a person had learned to meditate and could hold his consciousness for a reasonable length of time in a sense of unity with the One Supreme Spirit, the essence of the universe, the Atma, what was the next step? How does one lose the consciousness of the body as he and others were able to do, and become absorbed in the Paramatma?

He laughed out loud at me, and said he could not tell me that. I must learn that and be shown, not merely told. Then he was silent again. Of course he had talked through interpreters because he only spoke the local language, Tamil. Suddenly he turned to look at me, and asked how long I could give him. I thought a moment, then realized that I could come the hundred and fifty miles from Madras for a weekend by car, if friends were available to drive me each way. So I said that I could come only for twenty-four hours. He said that it was not enough time, but to come.

To cut a long story short, I came. A good English-speaking disciple of his was there on that next visit, a man who had been in the civil service and had had similar yearnings. He had given up that life to become an ascetic. A very beautiful looking man he was, too. He called himself Asangha Maya (not bound by maya). We became quite close friends in that twenty-four hours.

The Shiva, as he is called, admitted me into his own sanctum which simply was this concrete hut where he slept. There he gave me certain instructions. They were not about getting into samadhi, I must admit, or else I failed to understand them. But it was a certain knowledge and combination of actions which I am not at liberty to describe, for sinking into deeper meditation, and for the arousing of Kundalini. As I had already achieved some of that, the effect upon me was very striking. The Kundalini almost shot up and my whole body was electrified by it in his presence. The disciple sat by me and, when our hands or arms touched, would exclaim that I was electrified, for he felt the electric power shooting from me.

Well, Shiva went to bed and to sleep in his hut, while Asangha Maya and I spent the night outside. I had brought a bed and mosquito curtain. He lay down on the concrete seat, having acquired the faculty of sleeping anywhere, he said. But we did not sleep. I went on practising under his guidance the procedure which had been shown me, until I was reasonably adept in it, though it is nothing difficult. I plied him with questions and we talked about the spiritual life all night long in that warm Indian summer night. It was a wonderful and unforgettable experience, all within the aura of Shiva whom I felt to be a very great man. I developed a very close affection for him and he for me, as it was seen to be expressed. He has written to me through an interpreter, and I to him. When my friends go to see him, he asks after me. His other followers in different parts of the world similarly have had these privileges. I have spiritual-mental contact with him more or less all the time. Here was a person who had actually done the things about which we read, and it was a wonderful thing to be in his beautiful presence.

On another occasion, having heard that another holy man was visiting Conjeeveram, I sent a request through a local Theosophist, to know whether he would receive the students of the School of the Wisdom. That was none other than the reigning Shri Shankaracharya, administrative and spiritual head of the whole monastic centre, or mutt as it is called, of the ancient temple centre at Conjeeveram. The office has been held in an unbroken line since the days of Shri Shankaracharya Himself, twenty-three or four hundred years ago, according to Subba Row, one of the early Theosophists and occultists connected with our Society. The Lord Shri Shankaracharya is regarded occultly as a voluntary incarnation of one of the Lords of the Flame following the Lord Buddha to correct certain misconceptions, using some of the Lord Buddha’s subtle vehicles. Amongst other things, He established four such temple centres and ordained, as we would say in Christianity, the first of an unbroken series of representatives of Him to bear His Name and preside over these centres continuously down the ages. As far as I know, this has been kept up, and the finest human beings available are called to occupy these positions, regarded as amongst the highest in India.

Our request for audience was granted. We arrived on a Sunday morning, and in due time were led into his presence. He had chosen a walled garden a mile or so outside the city of Conjeeveram. It was a sacred place, because for long years a holy man had lived and died there. We went in through the garden gate. Nobody seemed to be there at first, until, over on one side, right across the garden, we saw a figure sitting on a mat under a tree. He was in a yellow robe with a chaplet of leaves around his head. In front of him was spread Japanese matting to which we were led. The Europeans saluted him in the usual fashion, and the Indians prostrated themselves before him.

We sat down and, as the leader, I expressed gratitude to him for granting us this audience, addressing him as “Your Holiness”, which is his title among his people, and told him who we were. He spoke very good English, but an interpreter helped, and he began to ask all the students questions in turn. Interestingly enough, these questions were about their Lodges and how many members, what they did, and what they taught...

All of us bore testimony afterwards to being bathed in an atmosphere of peace in the presence of this slight figure. Looking at him you would never have thought that he held one of the highest positions in ecclesiastical India, so humble was he, but he did. Towards the end I asked him if he would give us all a message to take back to the world for ourselves. He had a peculiar habit of closing his eyes and being silent for quite a time after every question, clearly allowing his consciousness to slip back to where it seemed to be normally living, in a higher realm. That was very marked with him, it appeared to me. The eyelids were half-closed much of the time until his full attention was arrested. Then the eyes were open and alive. He said, “Fix your mind upon God. Keep it there always, and whenever it tends to move away from the thought of God, bring it back instantly, until at last it becomes a habit always to keep one part of your mind contemplating God.”

He also spoke of universal truths that other holy men had stressed. For example, that you can do nothing in the spiritual life until you have purity of heart. Shiva said the same several times. Purity of heart is of the utmost importance, meaning that there must be no thought of personal gain or personal reward whatever from any attainment spiritually that may be reached. Finally, this successor in office to the great original Shri Shankaracharya held up his right hand and said, “This is the blessing.” And certainly some of the members of the School, next morning, when we went-over it all, bore testimony to having felt a descent of blessing.

As we withdrew from this unforgettable experience, one of the men attendants came to me before we left the garden, and said that His Holiness would see me alone for a few minutes if I wished. I felt very highly honoured, of course, and went back, knowing that it was only because I was the Director of Studies of the School of the Wisdom. He asked if there were any questions that I, personally, would like to ask. He made me feel completely at home with him, never any embarrassment at all. I did ask a number of questions, but I wish I had been more prepared for the opportunity. One felt that one did not have any questions in his presence. As a result of Theosophical studies, one’s mind isn’t really filled with questions.

I did ask him whether the Rishi Agastya was still in India, guarding it, fulfilling His Office, still reachable by men, and could be seen. He went off into silence, and then asked if I meant in the physical body. I answered that that was said to be the belief. He went off again for some time before answering. Then he said that the Rishi Agastya was still in His physical body, but not here; that He lived in the Himalayas. Then again he held up his hand and said, “This is the blessing.” I further thanked him on behalf of us all and withdrew.

I have been asked if I looked at his aura. I had not. I forbore to try to look at him in any kind of a research method, because I felt it would be unfitting and perhaps an impertinence. I was only aware that the slight figure was surrounded by a great light and that he was a highly advanced person... Such were the rich extra-curricular activities of our school.

*****

As Sandra has requested, I have related some of the major events which have shaped my career during a very long and active life. Unanticipated in every instance but bringing at the same time unshakeable conviction of their reality, they have indeed often seemed in the nature of miracles. Not the least of these is the fact that Sandra came to share my life in due course after my dear first wife Jane was released from a physical body which had come to mean only pain and suffering to her. With untiring devotion, Sandra has continued to give me the benefit of her superlative capacities and her unfailing understanding. She proposes now the ultimate publication of this book, to which all the events and experiences which I have related seem inevitably to have led. I leave it now in her hands.

Geoffrey Hodson

1921 -1929
THE EARLY YEARS
EARLY DEVELOPMENT OF ANGEL AND FAIRY WORK

(Entries of 29 October 1921—28 March 1923)

29 October 1921 (9:20 p.m.) Drawing Room, The Haven, Preston, Lancashire, England

A devachanic visitor. The form is that of humankind at a period of radiantly beautiful youth—thus far only, the appearance is human. After that, the similarity ceases, the aura shining with a purity and radiance far beyond that of creatures of clay. From around the head and shoulders streams of force play upwards and outwards like hair streaming in the wind, while over the nobly modelled brow the brilliance is so dazzling as to almost blind the inner vision. The central form is that of a rather slim youth, rose pink and almost transparent; the eyes, both in shape and expression, convey more than a hint of nonhuman power—yet in them there is dawning the softening influence of human love.

This combination produces an effect of indescribable beauty, as of a God who voluntarily sacrifices immortality for love of mortal men. The motive for this sacrifice is deep-rooted in an unshakeable determination—steel-like in its strength and power to fulfil the inner rulings of the soul. The whole effect is that of one of the Gods of Ancient Greece, sprung into life and sweeping Hermes-like from Olympus to the homes and hearths of men.

It is almost impossible to imagine this Godlike being clothed in the dull flesh of man, the refulgence of that piercing gaze made dull by fleshly eyes, that radiant purity bedimmed by passion-stained life, that perpetual exaltation of the mind made subject to the pairs of opposites. Yet that is the path upon which he proposes to set his feet. Bedimmed will be the crown of glory set upon his head, lost for a time will be the auric pinions and winged sandals of the God, while he walks a man among men, clothed in robes material, a pilgrim to the outer ring.

21 November 1921, Sunday

Mentally seeking guidance as to the safety of communicating with the deva and fairy kingdom, I receive a message: “Go forward. You are divinely guided; reap wherever you are able.”

Geoffrey: Exalted one, teach me the way of life.

Answer: The way of life, my brother, is not made up of one road, but of many. Seven paths^{^[34]} together compose the road for human feet. From these seven, many new roads are formed, for by their twists and turns, their weavings and interweavings, a mystic pattern is woven. From this pattern spring all the complexities of the spiritual life, so the path is not one but manifold.

Occultist, mystic, server, actor, organizer, you may be, seeming to have a foot now on this, now on that path. In your case, the closely woven paths along which, in different incarnations, you have travelled are each one .finding their expression in your spiritual constitution today. Fearlessly pursue them all, for could you but see it they are all one. Strive then to be the perfect occultist, the perfect mystic, the perfect server, drinking deep from the fountains of life that well up within you from each of these sources of life. A mistake is made, my brother, by those who regard the seven paths as separate and mutually destructive. In your case, great progress may be made in each if you will but grasp the opportunities each provides.

Occultist you may become; the seeds were sown in Egypt for the occult life; there began the psychic phenomenal phase of your unfolding. In three successive lives you studied and you strove for the psychic gifts you now possess. Step by step, you will need to master the vestures of the soul. Working now from below and now from above, as the mystic within you is dominant or subordinate. Mystic you are, for mystic you were, in Greece, in Asia Minor, and in Germany, rising in those lives to the heights of supreme devotion and adoration and being given by the hand of your Teacher an entrance into that womb of Nature from which all mystics are born. Of mediaeval mysticism you have a strong flavour. That development and its stored-up harvest is affecting your spiritual development at this particular period of your life, and the planets in their courses combine to arouse and stimulate that side of your soul which craves for union with the All.

The exaltation of the mystic will render far easier the patient Self-unfoldment of the occultist-servant; also you now are obeying truly the deepest instinct of your nature, living as a member of the E.S.^{^[35]} A mighty impulse to serve took birth within you in Palestine, planted there by the great Servant of us all. Obeying Him you wandered homeless and alone, along the Mediterranean shores and into Europe, bearing the Light kindled by Him.^{^[36]}

Be of good cheer, my brother, the dawn approaches, the iron bands of karma shall be loosed; the Self shall be set free.

2 November 1922 (9:40 p.m.) - Drawing Room, The Haven

The swiftly moving drama of the soul’s awakening forms a study of entrancing interest seen from within. See how from birth to death glowing radiance doth increase; this marks the progress of unfolding life. How valiant is his forward march, how steadfastly he braves the trials of the Path; see now he falters, dim grow his eyes; a shadow falls about him, encloses him in gloom. Gone now is the shining splendour, hid deep within the darkness of the night. A blazing light shines all about him when, with eyes uplifted to the stars, the soul presses onward in the path of rectitude and truth, questing the goal. When once from deep within the soul an answer has rung forth to the great appeal, he is enfolded in a shining splendour which draws upon him the blessing of the saints and the aid of the high Gods. Should he falter, the light is dimmed; should he fall, the darkness descends; the blessing and the aid cannot pierce that gloom, which must be dispersed from within. Even amid the gloom, the throbbing, pulsing powers of the soul are expanding with a swifter growth since that moment when the inward vow was made. No darkness, however deep, suffices completely to enclose that upwelling life.

Hence it is that, after a brief period of effortless and redeeming conduct here below, once more the head is slowly lifted up. Strong aversion to all slothfulness is born; the robe of darkness being cast aside, the light of virtue and of effort most intense shines forth into the upper air. From every fall an added power is gained; after each darkness a new light is born.

Take courage, oh striving human soul. The prize is certain; not endless is the Path, for God within you will bring you to your goal. Strive, therefore, with all your might. Aim ever at constant equanimity, an ever growing speed and such a firmness of your foothold on the Path that falterings and falls shall be no more. Aim high, ever higher, aim to be a God. By virtue of your heritage divine, enter that splendid realm of pure reason, that land where all knowledge of the manifold is gained in the cognizance of One. Remember that the quality of the inspirations you receive depends upon yourself as much as on the inspiring consciousness. The further you expand and the purer you become, the greater will be the measure of truth which you can receive. Let this be an added incentive, not only that you yourself may more quickly tread the Path, but that you may become a fitter channel for divine truth to man, along the lines of your particular gift of receptivity. Keep your mind always at concert pitch, thinking constantly on the highest and noblest subjects in your leisure time. Deliberately withhold the mind from all subjects of a sensual and fleshly nature; if you approach them in literature or general reading, pass them by deliberately and refuse to give them entrance to the mind. Think oftener of the noblest, loftiest topics and train the mind to spiritual responsiveness and conquer the human tendency to think too much of things of earth.

17—21 December 1922 (10:00 p.m.) - Drawing Room, The Haven

(A note on the piano is sounded by Geoffrey. This note has now become a permanency and is continually being sounded forth from his physical and etheric bodies. Hence his very frequent awareness of nature spirits, whether at home or out of doors. It is the note of calling; it is the note to which the fairy kind must answer, the note of that stratum of life which commences from the surface of the ground and rises upward to the heavens. Therefore it is the note of the life of the little folk. When it is sounded they recognize it because it corresponds to the note of the matter of their fairy forms.)

An Angel

A note of peace, a message of goodwill and of affection I bring to you this night. I and my fairy children visit you with this message of our love. Go forward into the New Year without fear. The shadows of earlier months cannot harm you, and through them you will pass into the sunlight of the summer days. The sunlight and deep joy await you as you emerge from the shadows of winter time. You will have visitors whom you love, and much happiness in your garden. Success awaits you after all your strivings, and after success comes freedom. It will be partial at first, and you do not necessarily move from here. Home becomes home in a truer sense.

The events of the past year have been varied and, in some cases, very trying. Scorpio has been stinging you both, whilst Saturn has held you in his grip. The poison will be transmuted into virtue and from the grip of Saturn you will spring into the wider life. These limitations must be got rid of, those karmic debts be paid before this life begins. You are shaking off the shackles of the past with much pain, but fear not, your joy shall be the greater. Influences are at work from over the seas which shall be the means of your liberation into the life you love. Messages are travelling to and fro. Seek no further but go forward without fear. The darkness and the suffering of the past year have not been in vain, and though much light has shone upon you, a greater light will shine and you will finally be healed. There will be considerable travelling, but not a complete removal. You will make new friends of the kind you desire, and your life will begin gradually to run on the lines of your future work... Be steadfast and selfless and I will bestow a gift of greater power—to see and know in those realms which are hidden from the eyes of men. All blessings. Goodnight

28 March 1923 (6:15 p.m.) - Drawing Room, The Haven

A superphysical male visitor, tall, dark, with brilliant dark eyes, firm chin, rounded handsome features, ears a little prominent, dark hair carefully brushed, frock coat, well-groomed, well dressed air.

He says, “The first essential in psychic research of the kind in mind is privacy. This must be absolute. Disturbance should be all but impossible. The conditions should be reproduced as nearly as possible at each meeting, i.e„ same room, surroundings, furniture, etc., and above all, the same people. It is not wise to introduce a new personality into a psychic research group, unless that one is very sympathetic and has some definite contribution to make. Conditions are more than half the battle, especially when you expect help from external incorporeal sources. I may say that if you can provide the conditions and a highly altruistic motive, that help will be forthcoming. You are far more likely to get good results with that aid than without it, at the present stage of development of psychic power in the group...

“No research group is complete without its sibyl.^{^[37]} The days of the oracles will return when you erect suitable temples (not made with hands)[38] where they can be heard. The divine hovers closely over our battle-wrecked humanity. Scientific research alone provides a suitable chalice in modern times. A new Blavatsky must be provided; I [the communicant] am an old Italian pupil of hers.”

19 April 1923

If an ideal, presented to the soul as a possibility of attainment, is not accepted and attempts are not made to reach and express it, definite loss of soul power results. Advice sought, obtained, but not followed becomes a hindrance and a source of weakness. The karma of not following the Light when once it is seen is darkness; that of not acting upon advice given, is inability to receive further advice and act upon it.

30 April 1923

THE CALL TO LONDON

Harold Baillie-Weaver guarantees £400 per annum for us (Jane and myself) if we will come to London and do healing work, without any conditions or restrictions. The miracle has happened at last! May we ever be worthy.

Henceforth and for ever I must be utterly and irrevocably consecrated to the service of humanity—to heal, teach, and save the world.

1 May 1923

FOR ASPIRANTS

Induce the condition of Discipleship in your lower vehicles. Purity of aura is all-important. You must not admit thought, feeling, word, or act that is not perfectly pure. You must neither see nor hear the impure. You must not read the impure or even the criminal; these must henceforth have no place in you unless for the work. Then only can you seek and ask for the Master’s power without fear of desecration.

24 May 1923

THREE LEVELS OF CONSCIOUSNESS

(Monadic, Egoic, Personal)

1. The Monadic. The true Self, our Home, a radiant and free Self-consciousness,^{^[39]} “always beholding the face of our Father which is in Heaven”. This we rarely contact at the present level of evolution. On the great occasions of our lives a ray of the Monadic consciousness penetrates the lower realms, lifting the personal to the Egoic and illuminating the latter. Such occasions might be joining the Theosophical Society, accepting a spiritual leader, marriage if it is a true union of souls, the first glimpse of the Master, and occasionally in meditation.

The purpose of the mantram of yoga discipline is to achieve that contact, so that our personal life may be raised to the Egoic and our meditational life to the Monadic.

Regard the Monad as the Father, and continually aspire and reach towards Him. Make regular and definite endeavour to cultivate Monadic consciousness. Even failing to reach Him, we raise ourselves in the effort, and an arrow aimed at Atma may reach Manas I or even Buddhi. The matter is largely one of persistent effort and continual Self-recollection.

Thought is the instrument ready to our hands. Give thought a definite swing upward—always upward—until an automatic action is induced and the thoughts continually revert to the highest we know.

The question is almost a mechanical one. So many foot-pounds of thought-energy continually and concentratedly directed in the right direction will inevitably produce a proportionate result

Right motive is all-important in dealing with the questions of practical interior magic—upon oneself.

2. The Egoic must gradually replace the personal; that is our immediate task. Learn to live continually at the Egoic level. This is the secret of the power and achievement of great souls (e.g„ Annie Besant and the incident of an unprepared lecture at Leeds; C.W. Leadbeater lecturing when he had lost his voice from a sore throat). Continuous and strenuous work is possible only to Egoic consciousness; the physical and personal could not stand the strain.

3. Personal. This is ourselves as we are most of the time, not as we are at meetings, E.S. gatherings, and times of upliftment, but as we are at home, at social gatherings, during holidays, and in our daily lives. We are relaxed, letting the three bodies do pretty much as they like with us. We engage in small talk, tittle-tattle, indulgences, chatter (oh, the amount of chatter in the world!).

27 May 1923

Jane and I returning from an evening walk. I observed a deva passing overhead, apparently belonging to a grade parallel with the higher stages of the Path. He was entirely white in colour, and his auric robes were of a glistening snowy whiteness. His face was benignant and beautiful, and the expression more kindly and human than that of some devas I had observed. Something in our appearance attracted him and he hovered over our heads. I gathered that he came from the arctic regions. He appeared to speak as follows:

“I am from the north, from the land of snowy wastes and fields of ice, and travel to the west. I am one of the agents of the Lord of the North. There too, life is growing, as are many people. May the blessing of the Four Lords be upon you, and may the light that shines around you shine upon your fellow man as I shine upon you.” (Geoffrey had been to a church service.) ,

The angel then descended until his aura enveloped us and poured force down upon us, assisting the flow by a movement of the hands, several times repeated; they were joined in front of his breast with fingers pointing upward and were separated by a brisk movement downward and outward. The effect of this upon us was similar to that of an electric discharge. The auric flow very strongly resembled flowing white robes, and the usual pinion-like radiations were not so noticeable.

The method of address and the luminous superactive aura were decidedly devic, yet the general appearance, expression, and “feel” were very much more human than has usually been the case with those few members of the deva kingdom which it has been my privilege to contact. The Traveller seemed to accompany us for some distance towards the house, and then departed on the journey in a westerly direction.

15—16 November 1925 - Harrowgate, Yorkshire, England

(While lecturing for the English Section of the Theosophical Society)

I “dreamt” of being with Jane in a house with the Masters Morya and Kuthumi^{^[40]} and Their friends. Master spoke to me of the power of love and said that He sent out His love to the world every day. I said, “You are able to engulf the world with Your love—the power, knowledge, and love to save the world.”

He smiled in a rather self-deprecatory way. I referred to our feeling of a descending blessing during the daytime and asked if He sent it. He said, “That is private information!”

He allowed me to sit near Him and I felt the inexpressible happiness and thrilling joy of being near Him.

Shortly after being received on Probation^{^[41]} by Master Kuthumi, I had a vivid out-of-the-body experience of visiting Him again. He was seated in the long room in His own house with several younger pupils who were comfortably established near Him. On arrival, I was greatly privileged to be placed on a raised cushion near Him on His left, and He talked to us all. My body was awakened, causing me to be absent for a short time. It then fell asleep again, and I immediately returned to the Master’s room and was privileged to be shown the same seat near Him, which He indicated with a friendly smile and look. This filled me with very great happiness, as does the memory still.

There were coloured cushions in the room, and I perceived a portion of the architectural arrangement.

Later on I left and found myself on a high snow-covered mountain pass with a deep valley below. From there came a red-cap lama^{^[42]} who approached me, saying, “You are a very unusual young man. We have much that would interest you down below.”

As he spoke I realized that both he himself and his “centre” were of an evil character, and that he was tempting me by promises of psychic experiences, etc. Foolishly, I suppose, I made a powerful sign of the Cross over and through him. This infuriated him and he said, “If you do that again I will fix you.” Stupidly, I did so, and for a few moments was paralysed. However, I used a rather powerful method taught me by Mary de la Middleton which immediately freed me, and I dashed across Asia and Europe at high speed to my sleeping body in Harrowgate, Yorkshire, England, where I was lecturing. The lama followed me in anger but I managed to reach my body safely and woke up trembling, with the whole double knowledge clearly in my mind.

1929 – 1940
THE BEGINNING OF WORLD TRAVEL

[Much of the material resulting from the clairvoyant research carried out by Geoffrey Hodson in the late 1920s appears in his angel books and others of this period, which are listed at the back of this book.]

20 November 1932

During night after last public lecture in New York, remembered being before Masters Morya and Kuthumi, the latter seated and the former standing on His left. The American work was discussed and dispassionately appraised; encouragement given for the future, we being regarded as travelling Theosophic messengers.

Early 1930s

A RETURN VISIT TO BOROBUDUR

During a lecture tour of Java in 1933, a visit was made to the great Buddhist shrine known as the Borobudur. The presence was realized of the great presiding Deva—a very lofty being—and two poems were written as a result. These were published in The Theosophist during 1934.

Return visits have recently been made to the shrine during which we were again received and an attempt made to obtain a description of the Deva, as also to receive of His wisdom.

As He presents Himself to the writer, graciously descending to his level, this great Deva is distinctly masculine and markedly Indo-Aryan in appearance. He is probably a Deva of Wisdom, for the golden light of Buddhi shines all about Him, glowing through the successive spheres of soft rose, soft green, and dazzling white, of which His aura chiefly consists.^{^[43]} An emanation of white fire shot through with gold surrounds the inner form, then a great sphere of yellow is followed by the other colourings, the whole displaying in quality of colouring and in luminosity the glory of a sunset sky. White rays, like searchlight beams, play out from the central form, in the heart of which they seem to arise. Some of these shine upwards, others laterally over Java and the sea beyond, the others deep down into the earth, widening as they leave the central form.

All life, for many miles, especially devic life, is quickened by this light and power of the Deva of Borobudur. He is, I think, the Head of the devic life of the island, as also of the surrounding seas, a veritable Deva King. Ever and anon a Silver Star flashes forth above His head, whilst great forces, white and gold, flame-like and petal-shaped, play about His feet as if He stood within a great lotus formed of fire.

Within the central aura is a thought-form of the Lord Buddha, seated in meditative pose. It is a vehicle, at the lower mental level, for the life of the Lord, upon Whom the Deva appears to meditate perpetually.

Contact with the consciousness of this Great One gives rise to the following thoughts, as if He preached for all aspirants a brief sermon on enlightenment and the Path:

“Although for men the attainment of enlightenment seems far away, in realms beyond time’s imprisonment, enlightenment for all is here and now, within them as a living fact, a power of accomplishment.

“Thus, within your archetypal self, as in these stupas^{^[44]} which you see, there sits a Buddha, fully formed though partially concealed. The secret of your own enlightenment is the presence within you of this Buddha-to-be. As you must gaze within the stupa’s form, piercing with your eyes its covering, so with the eyes of thought and will gaze inward and perceive that embodied wisdom which is yourself, the Buddha which you are in timelessness and will make manifest in realms of time. Keep your soul’s gaze fixed upon this archetypal Buddha. Dwell daily, hourly in its presence, until thought and will combine to bring to birth within your outer self the Buddha of which your inner Self consists. Then let imagination soar into your Buddhahood. Picture yourself as living now the Buddha life, moving amongst men as did the Lord. Do this with will and thought unchanging, until in very fact these two bring forth in you the living Buddha.

“Thus shall time cease to imprison you. Thus shall future be blended with present, yourself at the centre, conscious of both as the eternal now. Past I counsel you to forget, annihilate entirely, wipe from the tablets of your mind, as scaffolding which having served the builder’s need is taken down and disappears. Past is dead for you. Present and future will similarly disappear as you learn to live intensely in that fullness which is the eternal now.

“Dark is the world; darker it may yet become. Grave dangers threaten human life, human progress, human peace. The opposing forces gather for a conflict which well may be the greatest and the last of the planetary battles waged on earth. Should light conquer, should brotherhood and peace prevail, as almost certainly they will, then the opponents of the Law, organized as enemies of man, will meet with that defeat which will put an end to mass hatred, mass brutality, and mass enmity to Light. Thereafter the great Law shall prevail.

“Could you but see as We see Who, standing above the conflict, represent the Law, how every unifying thought and deed of every man, however humble if sincere, plays its important part—nay, I would say tremendous part—in bringing victory to the side of Light and Law, your work would be more inspired, your wills more ardent, your faith more fiery, and your lives more full of power. Go forth therefore with added force, with greater zeal, constant in self-discipline, losing self in service, planning, thinking, working in the cause of Light and Law and in the name of Those Who are the Light and have become the Law. On all your work the blessing, the peace, the beauty, and the power of Borobudur.”

On another occasion He said:

“You will help in clearing away the mists of ignorance and superstition with which Java is enwrapped, by awakening the minds of the better classes to a realization of the harm which the practice of blood sacrifice is doing to the national soul and through that to the health and well-being of the people; also in instructing them concerning the facts. The educational authorities and the members of the Theosophical Lodges are the most promising agents for such work. United, well-organized and well-informed groups of esotericists could help greatly by means of regular and constant activity along the lines suggested, and in the daily radiation of Power and Light over the island.”

THE ETERNAL NOW

(Meditation at the Borobudur)

“Learn to live intensely in that fullness which is the eternal now.” In these words the great Deva of Borobudur spoke of the goal of human life. Meditation upon this reveals that everything is fully present all the time, therefore every moment contains the whole, manifests the whole.

Time divisions and privations are created by thought. Above the mental plane they disappear. Causally they still exist as concepts but not as factors ruling consciousness which, at that level, is already independent of them.

Beyond the Causal, wholeness is conceived. Becoming is resolved into a completed fullness of being. Since this fullness is unrelated to time, it is present always. Hence every moment contains the whole. Every second of consciousness is replete with the whole Solar System from Adi to solid physical and from Manvantaric dawn to Manvantaric night. Realization of this is purely a matter of consciousness. The fact exists read!? To be known, like the sun to a blind man, like the ever shiningness of the sun to a person who can rise above the rotation of a planet

All exists at once as does the whole Solar System physically to a consciousness in the Sun which is aware within and through all its rays. All exists at once, in its fully developed state, to a consciousness beyond time and space.

To live in the fullness of the moment – this is Nirvana, this is the goal.

12 December 1933 - Adyar, Madras, India (The International Headquarters of the Theosophical Society)

Arrived at Adyar after tour of China, Philippines, Java, and Malaya.

16—17 December 1933 - Adyar

Do not fritter away strength in die small things of the personality. Develop interior calm, speech control, and strict adherence to facts. Develop a passion for facts; avoid superfluities and Mils. Pare your mind down to the bare bones of fact and truth.

Interior vision of the Master in E.S. meeting, 17th [Who said to Geoffrey], “Remember, I am ever present in your heart there and you are ever present here in Mine.”

*****

“The great metropolis and see of Adyar” as Shakespeare^{^[45]} might have truly named it. For it is the capital of a mighty empire, whose boundaries extend beyond and over all other boundaries and frontiers on earth. The Theosophical “Empire” embraces almost the whole of the civilized world’, and Adyar is its capital. Were ever subjects so lightly ruled, ever a diverse people so free and so united in proud loyalty and love as are the people inspired and taught at Adyar?

May the spiritual sun never set upon our “Empire”, for in that night it dies.

17 July 1934 - Durban, South Africa

(At the inaugural lecture of the Durban Youth Movement)

During the chairman’s remarks, I became suddenly and definitely aware of the consciousness of Dr Besant turned upon the gathering. First Ray power, strong but very tender, descended upon the whole audience of over one hundred young people. I felt lifted up into her consciousness and this influenced my speech, the choice of words, and form of sentences, especially at the beginning.

The response was enthusiastic, some 67 young people joining there and then.

8 July 1934

“Ice-cold impersonality must characterize all your relationships, especially with those who love you and to whom you are especially drawn. Give the wannest possible friendship, yet within, remain emotionally and mentally aloof, as leader, teacher, and friend to all. Thus is a great leader born.”

“Stark realism must be the basis of all judgements.”

20 September 1934 - S.S. Randfontein

The Masters are great “lighthouses”, shining over the darkened seas of life. Humanity, blind to Their shining, save for the few who first catch glearnsand later enter the beam and find their way to its source.

The Masters are World Planners for humanity as a whole. Not for any special time or age, but for the duration of the world-period and perchance beyond. Unmoved by temporary changes, as a mariner by an individual wave, yet making allowances for every change, Their eyes on the Goal. Undisturbed by apparent breakdown of the plan, the failure of a particular instrument, the defection of a Napoleon, the nefarious traffic of a Bismarck, They apply a ceaseless, beneficent influence using every possible instrument,’ individual or group, knowing that the end is sure. Hence, Their undisturbable calm, Their peace that passeth understanding.

13 October 1934 - Wimbledon, London, England

A realm of consciousness was entered which was marked by a deep stillness, a profound calm that was yet positive, above the world, beyond the personal and the fleeting, in the realm of the Eternal. Beyond events, changeless, motionless, yet full of power, the Self abides immovable inthis realm. No persons are observed here, nor any light as we term light, for naught exists requiring light. Thinking, seeing, knowing are all merged into one consciousness which is Being. Translated into terms of mind and form, it is a realm of great seated Buddhas, dark as if of bronze, sunk deep in meditation, motionless as if immovable, and from Them power flowing not as light, but pure power. On meditation these become ONE Buddha: The ONE.

Nothing ever happens in this realm, nor any change—only the state of continuous being, existence apart from action, causes only, and they static though dynamic. External awareness is reduced to a minimum; interior calm, poised being: these are the states in which the consciousness dwells. This still poise, immovable, must be maintained in personal existence. Consciousness must be established in this realm. All day long, awareness must be maintained there, the personality directed from there, and no outer circumstance have power to disturb its calm.

I become conscious that I am steadily cleaving my way upwards towards the very Heart of our Lord, the Spiritual Sun, the Life-Centre of Creation, the Source. To be lost therein is my goal, which I shall one day attain. I shall enter the ineffable radiance, as one enters the Holy of Holies of a temple. A great longing for this exaltation and this union turns my thoughts constantly to that One Light. I yearn increasingly to be one with the Light and Life of God. The pains and trials of this transitory life serve but to spur me on. The joys are as a foretaste of eternal bliss, drawing me nearer to the Source.

Within this realm of Light I know the Master dwells. He is that Light and in moving towards it, I move towards Him. The quest, however, becomes increasingly impersonal.

15 October 1934

ON IMPULSE

Impulse never pays; never act upon impulse. Always pause to consider, allowing at least one day and one night to pass between the idea and the action. Be careful during that time to eliminate all personal elements from the idea, considering it with complete impartiality as if it were the idea, considering it with complete impartiality as if it were the idea of someone else. As long as personal feeling remains, let action be delayed.

ON LEADERS

Every sentence and every action assumes added significance in the presence of a leader. Leadership is always a dual problem and, for success, depends equally upon the leader and the led. The actions and reactions of the follower condition and frequently limit the conduct of the leader.

The ideal follower is unobtrusive, silent, inconspicuous, save on the rare occasions when action is demanded of him [or her]. Even in his devotion he is impersonal, asks nothing and is prepared to wait. Furthermore, he trusts his leader and is prepared to recognize a deeper wisdom than his own, especially in actions which he cannot understand.

Yet the follower must not be blind, nor must his devotion ever become an embarrassment to the leader. He should rather wait and watch than obtrude. Even apparent neglect has its legitimate place in his education as a follower.

16 October 1934

The One Mind is active, externally aware, responsive only at the circumference. Within (higher dimensionally) there is a profound stillness, a great and undisturbable peace, silence, darkness, as of the womb of matter, space, form. Energy passes continuously, but consciousness is still. “I am that Mind, that Mind am I.”

The One Mind does not appear to think; it contains the possibility of every combination of thought-experience, but itself remains still, passive. We think on its edge. It gives the impression of a very highly stretched transparent membrane over a platonic solid octahedron. There is a curious sense that it deliberately remains still, that we may think freely – Egos inside and personalities outside with the membrane as human mind-focus. Human Atma in the centre of the form and personality moving, connected by a moving ray, on the outside of the surface.

18 October 1934 - The White House, Wimbledon Common,London, England

DISCIPLESHIP

Discipleship is an intensification of the tests of the probationary period. Every quality in the disciple, whether favourable or adverse, is strengthened by the more intimate relationship with the Master. Whilst this increases the disciple’s power for good, it also increases his personal difficulties. One after another, his failings and weaknesses become manifest, are apparently magnified. This process inevitably increases the difficulties of the disciple’s personal life and sometimes leads him almost to despair. Faults and errors, weaknesses, and even vices of which he deemed himself incapable show forth in him, often causing him much self-disparagement and pain. He should not, however, despair since his inner life becomes increasingly rich and beautiful. His Egoic power steadily increases under the influence of his Master, and by its aid he is enabled to overcome. His weaknesses, both active and latent, must be made unmistakably clear to him so that he knows of them and may eliminate them from his nature.

Ignorance of weaknesses and limitations is one of the greatest barriers to occult and spiritual development. The disciple must know himself thoroughly, be modest and humble concerning his capacities and clear-eyed concerning his limitations. The disciple must be wise concerning himself. He must rely upon himself, seeking no external aid, must in fact become his own guru.

The Master may be thought of as presiding with careful and affectionate interest over the alchemical process of the transmutation of all that is base in the disciple, into the pure gold of purity and spirituality. The Master guides the disciple as much as possible through his intuition which is thereby developed, but life itself is his true teacher.. The disciple must learn to interpret his life-experiences, to learn from them and so become wise. If he could but realize it, every experience, great or small, may assist in the development of wisdom. Important tasks, contact with important people, may be made supremely illuminating. Everyday lesser tasks and meetings, ordinary human interrelationships, can prove equally instructive. The disciple should therefore study life, watch life intently, observe his own reactions and responses to every incident great or small, for thus he may learn and grow.

Especially should the disciple pay attention to small things, his personal appearance, conduct, his manner both with others and when alone, the opening of a door, entry into a house or a room, manners, speech, contact with animals, servants, shop assistants, children, friends: all of these should bear the mark of Discipleship; that is, of impersonality, self-control, refinement, dignity, purity, and spirituality; for these must be the keynotes of the disciple’s character.

7 November 1934

All human beings, even those on the threshold of Adeptship, are unequally developed. Those whom the Masters use are chosen because of one or more outstanding quality and capacity. These are almost inevitably accompanied by certain anomalous defects, because the worker is still human. The Masters are not blind to the defects, nor do They condone, by Their continued use of the individual, the actions to which they give rise. They use whatever material is at hand, employing the qualities and capacities useful to Their work and thereby assisting in the elimination of the defects.

A Master’s encouragement should not be interpreted as acceptance of the whole personality or approval of its obvious defects. The Master’s method would seem to be to draw out the capacities and to appear to ignore the defects. Human critics, therefore, are valuable when their judgment is sound, in supplementing encouragement of good qualities with attention to their opposite.

(It was whilst I was living at Wimbledon Common that the Master Kuthumi “dictated” Meditations on the Occult Life.)

17 November 1934 - Camberley, London, England

The Master’s ecstasy! An intense, yet harmonious bliss which is permanent. In His case it is the whole Buddhic body, glowing, golden, sunlike, with the quality of limitlessness like the sun and its radiance. Every atom intensely alive, thrilling with a still, interior, inner life flowing without obstruction through the whole body. Apparently it is this continuous flow which produces the ecstasy. “Buddhi is bliss.” The effect of experiencing this in the night seems to have established an area in the Causal body of this Buddhic matter, light, and quality of bliss, to which I can retire in contemplation.

Curiously, it appears to the brain consciousness as an oblong window through which the Buddhic light is shining into the Causal body. Actually, it is more than that; concentration within it at once produces happiness. An effect of sun-ness and of golden light pervades the mind. This is associated with the Master, and His form, built of sun-radiance, is perceived. He lives, moves, has His Being in, and is Buddhic.

Murder by the State is not the best method of eliminating murder from the State.

On judgement: The first essential in sound judgement is dispassion.

Second, the facts. Study all equally, not only those which favour the judge.

Third, the central issues.

Fourth, the human factors inevitably colouring statements, actions, and reactions.

Fifth, synthesis.

Facts alone are misleading; the circumstances, inner and outer, surrounding them must also be known.

23 November 1934

As in the stilling of the tempest, it is the storms of life which awaken the sleeping divinity. Therefore, welcome the storms and attain the maximum of awakening from each of them. The people through whom they come are only the impersonal instruments of karma. Regard them impersonally and, if possible, gratefully. Welcome the storms and the storm bringers. “Everest” cannot be climbed without either. A blow is required to cause the spark to leap out of the flint. The Adept is fashioned from the man under the hammer blows of Thor.

24 November 1934

The Ancient Wisdom must come forth through the lecturer, pure, translucent, sparkling, yet deep and clear. There must be no striving, especially for effect. The Truth and nothing but the Truth must flow through an impersonal channel. The body very still and relaxed, gestures few, ease, grace, and an even, gracious flow.

For many Christians, the historical events of Christ’s life and its biblical interpretation form the basis of their religion. For the mystically minded, however, and indeed every human soul, it is Christ as the Revealer of the Universal Wisdom, as that Wisdom itself, which makes the greatest appeal. He is not an historical figure only. He is “the way, the truth, and the life”.[46] If one gains but a single flash of that Light which is Christ Universal, one’s life is changed: it is the Christ Light, ancient but ever new, which every Teacher brings to the world. They are mighty Saviours but the Light is mightier than They. This is the heart of Christianity as of every other real religion, and in this truth all faiths are ONE.

This flash, which is union with the Universal Christ, is the goal of the religious life. The Teacher brings it nearer, makes it more easily attainable by consciousness in all kingdoms of Nature. This experience can be gained deliberately, for its attainment is governed by laws as exact as those to which the chemist must subscribe in the laboratory.

“Europe has a religion which satisfies her heart but not her head and a philosophy which satisfies her head but not her heart.” Theosophy—or mystical Christianity—meets this need. Show the laws and the way to the vision splendid which, when attained, dims all the world’s radiance for the happy ones who see. This experience and the yearning for it is a lost passion in the world, lost because submerged in physical experience and yearning. The world is spiritually homesick; it has wandered so far that it has forgotten its home.

The function of religion is to restore that memory and to show the way home. Instead, it insists upon articles of faith and imprisons men in the grip of creed, blinds them spiritually by the fear which threats of damnation arouse in the ignorant. The tragedy is that creeds are of no importance whatever and vision is all-important in true religion.

O ye priests! How you fail—yet mean so well! Every story of the Master’s life shines with the true Light. The Bible is not a book of words; it is a ray of the spiritual sun, alight, alive, Light-bringing, Life-giving, and above all a key to prison doors.

Become interpreters; that is your task. The spiritually blinded man hurries at dawn to the market place in search of wealth and never sees the diamonds of dew sparkling on every blade of grass. To become an interpreter of wisdom and of truth to men, an awakener of wisdom and truth within man—this is a truly religious, truly Christian, and truly worthy work.

11 December 1934

All sense of self-satisfaction and self-gratulation in work must be avoided. Neither is artificial humility, cloaking pride, any more desirable. Clear-sighted recognition of one’s limitations produces a natural humility which is a virtue indeed.

Praise and correction must be equally acceptable. Praise because it encourages and correction because it draws attention to needed improvements. We must neither be unduly elated by the one nor unduly cast down by the other, regarding both impersonally.

However well one may have done, one can always do better.

*****

ON PAIN

Two lines from “The Hound of Heaven” by Francis Thompson assist the solution:

“Ah Designer Infinite, must Thou char the wood

Ere Thou canst limn with it?”

“Is not my gloom after all

Shade of His hand outstretched caressingly?”

Nothing is born without loss. All pains are pangs of birth.

*****

AWAKENING

cf. Seneca: “The soul may be and is in the mass of men drugged and sickened by the seductions of sense and the deceptions of the world. But if in some moments of detachment and elation, when its captors and jailors relax their guard, it can escape their clutches, it will seek at once the region of its birth and its true home.”

Is this a renunciation? Yes—of a single rose in order to possess a tree that bears seven times seven.

If we only knew what awaits us, we would not hesitate a second.

*****

ATTAINMENT

Thus along the Path man moves to his supreme achievement, to that coronation which marks his true kingship. Thus reverence is of supreme importance, for “he who cannot bow his head shall not receive his crown”. Thus we make manifest the nobleness with which we are endowed. Thus the as yet silent notes in the human chord are heard; thus the unstruck music at last sounds forth.

Thus man shall eventually reach the goal and rejoice in that dawn where the morning stars sing together and the Sons of God shout for joy.[47]

Death exists only in the eye that beholds it.

Material and form hide from us the eternal realities within them, just as the veil of day conceals the ever shining stars.

*****

In the occult life:

That to which you cling, you lose;

That which you renounce, you retain.

Let go!

The aspirant must be prepared to experience the disloyalty of pledged friends, to see a beloved and revered teacher and friend change suddenly in an hour to a ruthlessly cold and polite stranger. The resultant pain must be born without bitterness.

If the aspirant be truly loyal, the disloyalty of friends will not change his loyalty to them. Their disloyalty is absorbed in and transmuted by his trustworthiness. Loyalty is one of the synthetic qualities in which all others are contained.

The would-be disciple, and even the accepted disciple of an Adept, must be prepared to have his heart opened like a young rose by an almost divine love and devotion evoked by a leader and then to have the tender, sensitive petals ruthlessly crushed by a relentless coldness suddenly displayed, utterly unresponsive to his tenderest pleadings, his appeals refused with a laugh of scorn. The pain and shock of this will cloud his nights and days for years and darken the happy hours of his Discipleship, sometimes almost to despair, and of this he may not say one complaining word nor hope for healing balm. Cast out from that heaven, he must find another which depends upon no other living being. His religion must be „ kindness, its highest expression friendship, its greatest virtue loyalty.

*****

THE THEOSOPHICAL SOCIETY

The Theosophical Society resembles somewhat a piece of mechanism, like a watch, to which additions are continually being made. All people, events, and movements are really part of the mechanism, and its work should be regarded as such, that is, impersonally and dispassionately. One’s own place and movements within the mechanism should also be regarded impersonally and dispassionately, as merely parts of the whole and of small importance in themselves. The hands of the watch appear to be most important, but in reality they are not more so than a hidden and motionless screw. More beautiful than the hands are the jewels, which only the watchmaker sees.

20 January 1935 - Bolton, England

When I come forth from the adored Presence of the Guru,

My heart is full of light

My mind is keen, alert, yet most serene.

My will is strong as if invincible,

And my soul is pure and also full of light;

When I come forth from the Presence of the Guru.

25 January 1935 - Bolton

When a man steps out of the shade, the sun shines on him.

There is nothing personal in this.

When a man meditates upon the Master,

The Master’s consciousness responds.

There is nothing personal in this.

30 January 1935 - Bolton

Argument and discussion should be reduced to a minimum

And ultimately replaced by thought

Thought should be reduced to a minimum

And ultimately replaced by silence.

In silence, wisdom is born.

To bring the Ancient Wisdom to the world is a difficult, often painful task. We, within the ranks, should not wilfully or carelessly inflict pain on each other.

4 February 1935 - Manchester

The bridged consciousness is like a bridged string—tending constantly to lose tune and requiring constantly to be tuned. Effort must not cease after attainment, but on the contrary needs to be greater if the illumination is to be sustained. Do not rest on your oars.

The toll-gate is on a spring (matter) and tends always to close. The tendency of matter must be conquered by repeatedly forcing the gate open until at last the tendency is reversed. Hence, some form of daily meditation is a necessity.

Therefore, whenever there is an inner experience during ceremonial, dream, vision, meditation, Step, or art, meditation becomes more important. These openings of consciousness by the individual affect the whole race. One valuable way of helping humanity is to keep the channels open in oneself. This is the value of the yogi in retreat. Mankind is one body corporate. It is the office of Mercury (Buddhi) also to draw Venus (Manas) back to himself, Hermaphroditus, from the embrace of Mars (astral) and net of Vulcan (mental web and artificer of iron, i.e., powers of astral). The world needs more and more Mercurys.[48]

10 February 1935 - Manchester

Here, in 1913, I first saw the Master Kuthumi at my first E.S. meeting. As we saluted, His face appeared in the middle of my head and I could and did compare it with the coloured picture. Communication occurred in a swift flash, I offering myself, He welcoming me back in the present personality (“Welcome back to the Ranks, Geoffrey”), later accepting me as a probationary pupil and eventually as His disciple. I was healed instantly of a deep grief and moved for many days as if in a golden light. Adoration to Thee, O mighty Guru!

23 May 1935 - Folkstone

(After an intensive lecture tour of England)

There are higher dimensions of consciousness but not of space.

The sun within[49] never sets.

A human being cannot understand a superhuman Being, nor can he comprehend the conduct of the latter, therefore a man should never judge and pronounce upon a Master. The Master uses a higher dimension—not only level, but actual dimension—of consciousness. The man sees only cross-sections of the Master’s motives and actions cut by his threedimensional consciousness through the larger “mass”. When the Master in action produces effects in the man’s world, the man cannot hope fully to comprehend, since plan and motive and much of the action are out of his sight. Therefore man should never judge a Master.

14 July 1935 - Maraisburg, South Africa

To be a pure channel, a translucent lens through which, untainted and undimmed, the light of Truth which is Theosophy may be focused into the mind of man—this is the ideal. Not the praise of fellow members nor the applause of the public; to win those is easy to anyone possessing a sound knowledge of Theosophy and “personality”—but to open doors for others that they may pass through to their own light: this is the ideal of the teacher. The lecture should contain material which will lift the hearers up towards their own Egos which perpetually shine down; thus the inner doors are opened. Also, material for profound thought—deep truths and ideas upon which they can ponder afterwards. And, third, practical guidance amid the difficulties and problems of life. But through all must shine the pure light of Truth.

21 July 1935

Be in your personality what you are as an Ego.

Be in little things what you are in great.

Be in particular what you are in general.

Be in your moments what you are in your mission.

Then will your future glory be foreshadowed in your present life.

25 July 1935 - Maraisburg

To the thinking man life is a comedy.

To the feeling man, life is a tragedy.

To the intuitive man, life is a great Quest

*****

Mental asceticism which nothing can sully;

Mental purity which nothing can stain;

Mental stability which nothing can disturb;

Mental clarity which nothing can obscure.

4 August 1935

ADYAR

Steeped in peace, bathed in power,

Not of this world of time,

But of the eternal.

Beyond events, behind facts,

Above change.

Peace everlasting,

Power in perpetuity.

In such peace is Adyar established,

In such power maintained.

*****

BEAUTY

Within this world of ours is another, almost its antithesis. It is a world in which all the positives reign and the negatives are not Light perpetual shines therein, pervading with glory all beings and all thoughts and all places. It is a realm of light a world of radiance; and it is here and we are in it now.

This inner realm is all beauty, whether known interiorly or seen or heard. Knowledge of it exalts the mind to ecstasy, to freedom, to dancing, flying happiness, as of a freed bird or newborn butterfly, a-wing in sunlit summer air. Vision of it reveals beauty beyond portrayal by any art, beauty irradiated by glory, living, conscious, exalting to bliss. Heard, this realm within reveals its light and beauty as a wondrous symphony perpetually performed. The hearer is at the centre of the universal orchestra in the very midst of glorious music experienced at its source.

He who enters this world within our world is not external to its light, its beauty, and its song. He is one therewith, shines with the light celestial, is part of the immortal beauty and a member of the orchestra which perpetually performs inspired improvisations on the theme which is the WORD. He knows himself a centre and source of light, heart of beauty, the very symphony of creation itself.

Little meaning has the world of negatives, of thoughts, events, and things, of separateness and self, of shadow and of pain, to him who knows and sees and hears the world of light and beauty and of song. There unity precludes all sense of separateness and self, all shadow and all pain.

Tragedy that man lives so near this world, within in very fact, and yet cannot know or see or hear!

Ignorant, blind, deaf! By what means may the veil be drawn aside for you? How may you be helped to know?

Ignorance, blindness, deafness, were no doubt inevitable, but are they still? Have we not outgrown the stage of separateness, passed the cycle of forthgoing, entered on the way of return?

I feel that we have; that there is something wilful in our selfishness; that we deliberately keep ourselves blind and deaf; that many, many more of us could know and see and hear.

Yet to have and to hold (motto of the race) is inevitably to lose, whilst to give is to gain for evermore. “Give” is the password to the realm of light. Once within there is naught either to give or receive, for all is one and one is all.

How teach this to a race which lives to get and knows not unity (?), is blind to inner light and deaf to the eternal song? “Through beauty,” the answer comes. Beauty will be the religion of the new age. Orpheus must come again within our hearts and lives and as His own most glorious Self.

*****

HOMAGE TO THE MASTER

Master, in the realm of knowledge, of beauty and of power

I kneel at Thy feet.

Seeing Thee as knowledge incarnate,

As beauty perfectly portrayed

As power of the Word.

Myself a seed of these,

A young plant.

Growing before Thee,

Thou, the Sun.

Small am I beside Thee,

Imperfect, undeveloped.

Ignorant, unbeautiful and weak.

Yet, because a seed

Containing all,

Hopeful, with Thine aid

And by Thy light,

One day to be As Thou arc now -

A light to all the world.

First, I must simplify my lower self,

Must purify my soul,

Lest the growth be warped.

The beauty marred

And the song sung out of tune.

Better perchance to be less

And that less, simple

And true and pure

And beautiful

As Thou art most perfectly.

In love and gratitude

I bow at Thy feet,

Revered Guru.

*****

THE SPIRITUAL SUN

At the centre of every sunrise, at the heart of every sunset, is the Sun.

The beauty of every dawn and every eve comes from the Sun.

The glory of every dawn, the mystery of every twilight,

The splendour of sunrise and the wonder of sunset –

These are the glory, the mystery, the splendour and the wonder

Of the Sun.

Shines the Sun in splendour at high noon,

His full power revealed,

Glearnsthe sun in mystery at midnight,

Hidden by the earth, revealed by the Moon, Splendour and mystery:

High noon and midnight—

All owe their being to the Sun.

The world within our world Is all Sun.

Light perpetual

Shines at every point

Every atom glows and gleams,

Filling the world within

With unfading splendour.

Immortal beauty,

Deep mystery,

Everlasting Light

He who enters there becomes the Omnipresent Sun,

Shines there in glory,

Lives there in loveliness.

Knows himself the heart and centre

Of all light and power,

And knowing, is at peace.

Peace shot through with ecstasy.

Calm, filled fall with joy.

Light perpetual,

Joy abounding,

Bliss unfading,

Such is the world within our world.

13 August 1935 - Pretoria

I feel that my life is guided, not necessarily by a person but by a principle. I go wherever the way opens up, have done so since the War and probably before then. The way is now opened up until early 1938. It leads through Durban, Adyar, Calcutta, and Java, to Australia. What then, I know not, nor can be anxious. A way has opened up from South Africa to Australia, but whether it is the way I know not, though in good time I shall know. (1939: It was.)

What is this principle which guides me so unerringly? And does it guide all nations and all men? If so, why the failures? Because the individuals involved have not obeyed but have intruded self and selfish desire. A great lesson to be learned: not to obtrude self!

Was it all planned from “the beginning” and I just coming to it? If so, were the failures in the plan? This would explain the absence of need to initiate a plan – the fact that it is only necessary to accept invitations as they come. A mystery indeed to the three-dimensional brain, but not to the space-time Ego, which knows and says one word: “Inevitability”. Almost like Humpty Dumpty – symbol of the Augoeides – who said, “Impenetrability”. I give thanks to Life; I trust Life.

23 October 1935 - Pretoria

Mental serenity, emotional calm, physical stability, personal poise. The consciousness must be centred above and beyond the phantasmagoria of the physical world in that realm where there is no-thing.

*****

EPITAPH

He loved beauty, he loved spirituality, and kept his thoughts pointed towards the ideal—the epitaph I would like to deserve.

1 November 1935 - Pretoria

interview With general smuts

CONCERNING THE SOUTH AFRICAN YOUTH MOVEMENT

A white-haired, clear-skinned, fresh-faced man with a small, pointed beard, keen eyes, short features, and a habit of thinking within himself before speaking—not a common attribute!

General Smuts began by saying that the movement was too nebulous, not concrete enough. Unless it had a kernel, he said, it would not live. He mentioned the youth hostel movement in England, succeeding because the aims were concrete...

Our talk moved to unity, internationalism, holism, the new age being born, the desirability of unity here, etc. I spoke of these ideals as basic to the Youth Movement, and reminded him they were taught in it. He warmed to the conversation, saying, “It is fine to see a young man (sic) full of enthusiasm, giving himself to these ideals.” He ended by advising me to go on and issue a clarion call to youth.

A big Ego, definitely irradiated by the gold of Buddhi, I would assume. I asked the Masters’ blessing on him, his nation, and his life. A very fine human being, not sufficiently appreciated by his own countrymen.

No personal help for the movement as yet The Secretary of the Youth Group to send him a copy of the annual report listing achievements.

2 November 1935

One great achievement of the Masters, which differentiates Them from men, is continuity. This displaces the need for dependence upon memory. Their Self-consciousness is unbroken; They are perpetually aware. They have discovered that principle in Themselves which is changeless and in that They are established. They have found the Eternal Themselves.

7 December 1935 - Adyar, India

(Adyar Diamond Jubilee)

Man is made up of two parts,

One part gifts, one part character.

The world appraises by the one

The wise man by the other.

No gifts, however great,

No faculties, however brilliant,

Compensate for lack of character.

Gifts show what a man has,

Character what he is.

Possessing both, man is rich.

Lacking character, he is poor

However great his gifts.

Happy is the man who has gifts.

Happy is the man who has character.

Happy indeed is the man who has both gifts and character,

For the world is at his feet

25 December 1935 - Adyar

Self-purification includes the complete elimination of all resentment. The heart must be pure from this point of view; otherwise the Master cannot abide there. There must be nothing between the personality and the Ego, nothing between the Ego and the Master. A pure heart and ever open channel is the ideal.

*****

THE MASTER’S HEART

In bliss I abide in the Presence of the Guru,

I worship in the golden temple of His heart

Therein is peace which nothing can disturb

And stillness absolute.

Time is not, nor space, nor form;

Only the radiance of far-shining love.

Duality is not, not I, not He,

Only the principle of love as light

Not an enclosure, but a centre,

A source of universal love and light

Elsewhere within Him there is power

Resistless, and intellect all-knowing.

But here within His heart

Is love which knows no boundaries,

Which shines on all, just and unjust,

High and low, sinner and saint

*****

THE DISCIPLE’S SONG

One life in metal, gem and rock,

And shining, quickens it;

One life in plant, in flower and tree,

And shining, beautifies;

One life in every animal and bird,

All insects, winged and creeping things;

Knows each one of them and cares

With deep solicitude for all.

And caring, helps by strengthening from within

And hastening growth.

At the centre of this love and light

abide and learn one day to love

As He loves, Who loves all things

And loving, shares His love with all.

And sharing, lifts all things and beings up

To those tremendous heights which He has climbed.

To that great peak on which He stands

From which the light of love shines out on all the world.

10 March 1938 - Melbourne, Australia

From one High Initiate to Another—from the Inner Worlds to the Outer (Transmitted to the latter by Geoffrey)

No one can make progress on the Path without the experience of mental anguish. There are qualities and powers of men which only anguish can reveal. They pertain to the manifestation of Buddhi in the personality.

Gethsemane begins the moment the foot is set upon the Path and continues to the end. Actually, the cause of the anguish is an illusion viewed in the light of Egoic consciousness. There was no cause, but the lower self is unable to perceive this at the time.

Part of the illumination of Adeptship consists of the discovery and dispersal of this illusion. This process also begins the moment the foot is set upon the Path, and is continuous unto the end. In the end the individual looks back at all his suffering, perceives its purpose and recognizes its fruits, whilst at the same time discovering that in the realm of the real, that is, from the point of view of the Ego, the whole experience was beneficial and educative. This probably is the ideal attitude when pain comes.

26 February 1940 - The Manor, Sydney, Australia

It is possible to know and speak well the language of Theosophy and yet be ignorant of its light, to know the words of the Ancient Wisdom but not the music. Theosophy is a force and it should be used only for “the amelioration of the condition of man”.[50]

THE OCCULTIST

There are two acid tests of an occultist: the extent of his fantasy, and his capacity to remain unmoved by either appreciation or criticism. To strip off everything except the essential: this is the task. Success, the applause of public audiences, the praise of friends, the open friendship of prominent people, the acceptance of books to be published, the inevitable sense of satisfaction produced by these and all success, and a certain unconscious inflation of one’s opinion of oneself – all this must go.

One must step out of this as from a garment and stand naked before one’s higher Self and one’s Master. Nothing must remain but the highest, truest Self and its faculties. Then one must, in one’s brain consciousness, steadfastly hold to that vision of oneself. Nothing must have power to dim it, to mar its clarity and truth. This is the central task of the occultist

To compare oneself with those greater, and especially to look up to the Master – His splendour, His real greatness, His power: how puny, infantile one feels when one does this! One is just a groping, slow-moving baby in the great art of the conduct of life and the work of occultism. Yet the germ is there – thank God! The most difficult problem before the successful worker is his success. It is almost impossible not to be pleased, gratified, elevated. BUT ONE MUST NOT.

2 May 1940

Theosophy does not need the first person singular.

As the work of lecturing and teaching continues, one becomes more and more deeply impressed with the very lofty nature of the calling of the teacher, especially the teacher of the Ancient Wisdom. His is a high office, a great privilege, a deeply spiritual function. He is an apprentice preparing himself some day to serve in the teaching department of the Inner Government of the World. His Exemplar, His ideal, is the Great World Teacher Himself, the perfect Teacher of angels and of men. The Lord Buddha, the Lord Maitreya, and the Master Kuthumi represent the highest perfection, the finished example of the teacher’s art. To Their height the teacher of the Ancient Wisdom in the outer world aspires. If he is steadfast to it, one day he will attain. Spiritually, he becomes one with Them and with all great Teachers when he carries out his task, which is a holy calling indeed. The Theosophical teacher is as a King’s messenger who brings the message safely through all dangers. Theosophy is an utterly impersonal science. Impersonal also is Theosophical work. Impersonal therefore must be the Theosophical worker—and silent. One must constantly re-examine one’s work and one’s attitude to keep both free from egoism and self-satisfaction, for these are two of the most deadly poisons to the soul.

4 May 1940

Sometimes it is helpful to divest yourself of your past and be just a soul aspiring to the light It is often a great relief to do this, for so-called mistakes and “falls” disappear, and there is a certain freshness, newness, and brightness visible within the soul. It looks like a flame, mounting steadily higher. Actually, the trammels of the past should not hamper us. We should forget them, cast them off as a garment outworn, yet perceiving for a while their usefulness.

5 May 1940

If you think you have found a wise plan, look deeper and you will find a wiser and a deeper wisdom.

9 May 1940

The occultist undertakes more than the man can perform—and in the end performs it The man may never hope to reach his Star, but like the mariner he sets his course by it

16 May 1940

THE SUBLIMATION OF MISTAKES

There is a need of a philosophy showing the place and sublimation of mistakes. To the spiritually sensitive, mistakes, when remembered, are a constant prick. The memory of them and of their effects is humiliating, fills one with regrets, produces acute rushes of shame. Doubtless these pricks (they can be deep and unhealing wounds) serve also as goads to spur us on to greater efforts. But what of mistakes or falls, errors and wrong judgements? What is to be done about them and the recurring disturbances which they produce upon the poise of the soul? How does the Ego view the enormous list of falls and errors, wrong conduct which must have occurred during hundreds of lives? Can they ever be undone? Do they distress the Ego? Are they really errors or just natural manifestations of imperfection and so inevitable? At what stage does the individual cease to make them (?)—not until Adeptship.

23 June 1940

FANTASY

I repeat that the test of an individual’s evolutionary status is the extent of his fantasy about himself. Adeptship really means the breaking and final disappearance of fantasy. Crucifixion marks this attainment.

25 June 1940 .

In the occult life, privileges, positions, and favours received from without, whilst received with gratitude, are far less important than the changes occurring within. “What is happening inside you?” is the supremely important question, and never more so than when favour and preferment come your way. The silent unfolding of the mysterious flower of life within the soul, its increase in beauty and fragrance, in delicacy and sensitivity—this is the all-important experience, the true spiritual sign of progress. “Look within” must ever be the motto of the occultist, especially amidst outer successes.

26 June 1940

FLAWS

There can exist serious flaws in the nature of the aspirant and yet he can continue to aspire and to work successfully. A glass vase will stand and even hold flowers whilst cracked or broken right across, although a movement may cause it to fall shattered to the ground. Fortunately, the human soul is not brittle like glass. Also, it perpetually grows and mends itself even after a fall. Nevertheless, the flaws must be eliminated as soon as possible.

6 July 1940

Flaws in steel or glass can be fused out by reheating; so also, flaws of character may be burnt out by the fire of the will turned upon them at high pressure.

8 July 1940

P... replies... and uses these memorable words: It’s so easy for the dark powers to influence any of us, without exception, both in our weaknesses as well as in our qualities. We are generally inclined to believe that it is the other party who is influenced by the dark forces. As a matter of fact, the slime of darkness is no respecter of persons and, so far as I have ever been able to judge, is extremely impartial in its attention. Indeed, the more we repudiate the thought we could ever be assailed by the dark forces, the more is it quite likely that we are temporarily in their grip. “Let him that thinketh he standeth take heed lest he fall.”[51]

*****

THE PATH AND IMPERSONALITY

The Path is the most impersonal fact in the disciple’s personal life. He must learn to stand alone, utterly alone. He must rely upon his own strength alone, his own vision and understanding alone. For in all tests and trials, naught else can help him. He himself and his quest are impersonal manifestations of an impersonal and ever ascending life force. The fact of the focusing of this life into an individuality for a certain time and a certain purpose does not alter the fact that it is itself impersonal...

Of a surety, the tests of a neophyte are searching and severe. The lesson is, apparently, complete impersonality and imperviousness to the opinions of others, however high—the Masters always excepted.

ATMA-THE NEW BIRTH, THE STAR OVER THE BABE

What is reality? The Atma and nothing else; the flame of Atma which at last descends into the centre of consciousness and bums there as a flame. The real birth of the Christ is not of Buddhi alone. It is of Atma sheathed in Buddhi, power clothed in wisdom, will at the heart of universal love, the Star above the Christ. This alone is the reality behind individuality; the Atma is, above all things, as universal as the sun and its rays.

When the aspirant at last finds his Atma, his kingship begins. When he becomes his Atma, his coronation occurs. Then he is an Adept, immortal, free.

23 July 1940

St Teresa of Avila truly says, “Do not think, though it may seem so, that a virtue is acquired when we have not tested it by its opposing vice.” And again, “If anyone detects in himself any tenderness about his good name, and yet wishes to advance in the spiritual life, let him believe me and throw this embarrassment behind his back; for it is a chain which no file can sever.” And again, “What keeps him back who does so much for God? There it is: self-respect. . .”. “Are we striving after union with God? Do we not wish to follow the counsels of Christ who was loaded with reproaches and falsely accused—and at the same time keep our own reputations untouched? We cannot succeed, for these things are inconsistent one with another.” How difficult this is! The standards of the inner life seem almost impossibly lofty.

DOUBLE TIME CONSCIOUSNESS

Strange superphysical experience of double time consciousness. I was both in the present writing in the proper place in my war diary and present at the end of the last war, participating in the last days’ fighting before the armistice. I was assisting in loading a bombing plane and seeing all the lurid effects of gunfire and bombing as on November 10-11, 1918. Yet I was fully conscious in 1940 and was recording and knowing the 1918 experience. Have already been in two places at once, but never before in two times at once!

* * * *

Even if you wear the richest vestments for the sake of the work, underneath must be only the yellow robe [of the monk],

29 July 1940

The sufferings of others may be received with compassion, one’s own only with will. Buddhi for others, Atma for oneself (cf. The Voice of the Silence, Fragment III, verse 261). To be misunderstood is part of the “game”. To be selflessly “indifferent” to all opinion concerning oneself is to be free.

23 August 1940

NO FRUITS

I learned to some extent the profound significance of dispassion where the fruits of work are concerned. The motto of the would-be occultist must ever be “no fruits”. Only the work and its motive matter. The fruits are not the worker’s concern. He must be unmoved by either success or failure, detached, dispassionate.

2 October 1940

Wherever he is and whatever he does or does not, the disciple is important, for he can always be of use to his Master both as a channel and as an outpost of consciousness. Therefore he should always go where he should, despite personal aversion, and he should always keep himself open to the Master. His judgement of which occasions are important and which are not is unreliable. An occasion which seems unimportant to the disciple may be most important to the Master, and vice versa.

10 October 1940

EGO AND PERSONALITY

The duality of human nature becomes very pronounced and observable in times of great stress. The personality is influenced continually by its karma, has periods of adversity, stress, trial, and even error, and periods of success and happiness. Astrological influences play upon and affect it. The thoughts and actions of others produce their effects. The dharma of the individual is being steadily worked out amidst the light and shade of life. Thus, the personality lives amidst perpetual change, oscillates between darkness and light, between trial, difficulty, pain, and success, ease, and happiness. On occasion, the personality cries out, “How long, O Lord, how long?” Stability, serenity, eventually result

The Ego on the other hand is free from moods, from change, doubt and uncertainty; from the ups and downs of life. It abides in a serene poise, unaffected by any events or changes in the personality save those of an extreme nature, such as a very bad fall or a great attainment. In either case it remains the dispassionate centre of divine consciousness, far beyond the limitations of mortal man. Ever increasing radiance; steady, rhythmic, ever mounting power, deepening intensity of existence without the slightest strain; wide grasp of evolutionary plan, position, and future, ranging over all past lives and into those to come; fully aware of its divine nature and infinite potentialities; wanting naught, possessing all; beyond time limitations; spaceless; rooted in the eternal—the higher Self of man is a mighty spiritual king whose dominion and powers ever increase, whose bliss grows ever more intense, and whose wisdom mightily and sweetly ordereth all things. Therefore, become and live as an Ego.

13 October 1940

I meet C. Jinarajadasa. He has a great inner stillness, a most valuable quality to be developed to the highest pitch. One must attain to and convey this sense of inner quiet, poise, stillness, especially in trials.

Through all experience there continues that mysterious and wonderful process—the unfoldment of the soul of man; “everything comes to him who renounces”.

29 October 1940

RENUNCIATION—THE MASTER KEY

There are amongst mankind two classes of souls; those who have surrendered and those who have not. The acid test is “Have you surrendered?” The vast majority of Egos at this stage are still in the state of individuality-accentuation. The few have said to the Most High and His ministers (as it were), “I surrender to You. I am Yours. My will is Your will. My life is Your life. I ask naught ever again for self. I give all I have and am to You.” So, in Gethsemane, Jesus said, “... not my will, but thine, be done”.[52] Yet this Gospel is but for the few as yet. For it is the heart of the occult life. Only after surrender do the Great Law and the Great Life take you in charge utterly and you are “safe forever”. Spontaneity then becomes the characteristic of life, “give” the religion, “absolute unself-consciousness of self’ the one aspiration. “Let go!”

One must be ready to bow the head, even to what appear to be injustices, to bow to all superiors in utmost humility. Renunciation is the master key. “Blessed are the meek: for they shall inherit the earth.”[53] After surrender, all is open.

This, in part, is the message I shall give—some day.

12 November 1940

When St Teresa of Avila was bitterly and unjustly attacked by her family through their lawyer who accused her of hypocrisy, she said, “May God reward thee for the favour that you do me.”

2 December 1940

ENDURE IN SILENCE

St Francis, concerning his trials, said, “My secret is my own. Endure in silence under attack.” St Teresa: “Learn to bear some little thing for the love of God without everyone’s knowing of it.”

1940 – 1952
RESIDENCE IN NEW ZEALAND

1941 - New Zealand

On December 13, 1940, I sailed in the Maunganui to this new field of work. The parting from Jane and Sandra and home life and friends in Sydney was very painful and the domestic separation grew harder as time went on. Jane, who had not been well, grew worse and was brought over by Sandra in April and comfortably settled in at 3 Belvedere Street, Epsom, where I joined them on May 31, 1941.

8 May 1941 - St Claire, Dunedin

Outstanding experiences are the great friendliness and trust of the leaders, especially Emma Hunt, the Crawfords, Mathers, Yates, and Harry Banks. Harry was at once recognized as an old and loved friend, and we worked together as a perfect team in deep affection. He drew me back into church work,[54] concelebrating several times until I undertook the priestly office with growing confidence and ever increasing joy and upliftment. Oneness with Our Lord Christ deepened and I now always feel uplifted into the immensity of His glorious love and Presence at every Celebration. My gratitude to Bishop Wedgewood and now to Harry is unbounded.

The Theosophical Convention and Christchurch work were a success, and although Dunedin is less spectacular, useful work is, I hope, being done.

*****

The open wound is essential to outpoured power and grace. Suffering is one of the gateways to the Kingdom of Heaven. Bliss is another, intense effort, ardent aspiration, heroic faithfulness, and largeness of vision, thought, and action are all other gateways. Endurance is an essential quality. One must always be especially big in the presence of littleness, generous in the presence of meanness, always heaping coals of fire on those in error[55] and remaining silent when wrongfully judged and accused, especially by leaders. Under attack we have always to remember that the Master knows the facts and so there is no need of defence of oneself, though always of the work.

*****

White Lotus Day meeting in the lounge at Dunedin Lodge. I meditated on H.P.B. and aspired to her greatness.

Do your best as a Theosophist to remove the ignorance of the world. Do your best as a Theosophist to shed the light of Truth upon the world. Do your best as a Theosophist to purify, refine, and strengthen your own nature. Conceive of yourself as always in training for harder and greater tasks than those which you now perform, and live and work accordingly. Meet “adverse” karma valiantly, philosophically, and without flinching. Meet your “favourable” karma calmly and in self-control. Be not unduly moved by either. At the centre always be still. Set the will to work on your personal failings and eliminate them. Never be satisfied from day to day until they are gone. Develop a valiant independence of all personal favours, yet be grateful for them when they come. Inculcate in humanity a staunch adherence to the highest moral principles and ideals. The moral standard is everywhere too low. Put the seal of perfection on everything you do.

I awoke feeling greatly uplifted after the Vaishakh Ceremony.^{^[56]} My consciousness was occupied with one idea which was, as it reached my brain: “The whole world is born anew.” I have a great sense of upliftment and feel that all channels are wider open and my inner consciousness exalted.

30 June 1941

Everyone has his Achilles’ heel. Find your own and safeguard yourself. Adeptship is the state in which there is no Achilles’ heel.

7 October 1941

THE ETERNAL WOMAN

Behind all womanhood exists the Eternal Woman, the one divine manifestation as femininity. At its origin, it is cosmic, being the half of all creation. The other half is the Eternal Man, and mysteriously these are not two but one, for both emerge from a common source; they are expressions of a unity which combines and includes them both. It is this basic fact of unity within the One Source that is the root of attraction, whether chemical, magnetic, or of gender in organic life. For these temporarily separated twain-in-one are forever drawn back towards their primordial unity, and this attraction is continuous and compulsive.

Thus, behind every individual woman there is the Etfemal Woman. Within and through the feminine personality is made manifest the spirit of femininity, the archetypal woman. This is the highest in every woman. Perpetually this is seeking ever fiiller, ever more radiant, more tender, more fragrant expression through the wondrous flower which is an individual woman.

What are the essential qualities of this archetypal woman? They are sacrifice, tenderness, graciousness, divine radiance, heavenly fragrance, beauty, and grace. They are wisdom, fathomless as a still dark pool of infinite depth, profound compassion and intimate concern for all living things, ministration, healing love. They are joyous radiant girlhood, graceful womanhood, creative, preserving, and transforming motherhood.

Within the Heavenly Woman is an ascetic refinement of utter purity. The archetypal woman is a yogini, however much she may sacrifice herself to express herself in matter, form, earth, and all productive processes. Some part of her, the real part of her, is in no way touched by these, in no way sullied, even through a life of prostitution. Though one with the very soul of every woman, the archetypal woman is remote, out of reach, even of the woman herself, save in her highest moments. Still more is she remote from the very matter, form, experience through which she is partially, imperfectly made manifest.

This archetypal woman becomes at last unified and fully expressed in the woman Adept. It may be, and often is, temporarily expressed in and through the human woman at her highest moments. Nevertheless, she (the archetype) may be perceived and known at any moment through any woman by those who have eyes to see, whether woman or man. To know and see the archetypal Self in an individual is to love. True love, the highest love, the love which would inspire the lover to die gladly for the beloved, that love is born of vision of the divine archetype.

Every child unconsciously finds the spirit of womanhood in its mother’s ldve and care. This is why children suffer so deeply, if instinctively, at the hands of their parents. For when they are wrongly treated or misused by either, an offence has been committed against the spirit of womanhood and manhood, motherhood and fatherhood. Naturally the child cannot reason thus or comprehend this fact but instinctively is aware of a profanation of divinity.

In the holder of the divine Office of World Mother, a conscious union occurs between the archetypal woman fully manifest in the woman Adept and the cosmic principle of womanhood. This constitutes a descent, fiery, pentecostal, of the Eternal Woman into its own purified and exalted superhuman manifestation in tune and space.

The potentiality of this hypostatic union exists in every woman and is frequently foreshadowed throughout successive human lives as interior illuminations, wondrous yet indescribable in visions ever beyond the possibility of communication to another. This is in part the mystery of womanhood, this the secret life of every woman, that on occasion she knows and is one with the Eternal Woman and has her mysterious life in that realm wherein She abides.

Thus is revealed the yoga most appropriate to woman. Interiorly, it is union with the Eternal Woman and externally it is to make manifest that archetype in daily life. Mentally still, withdrawn from earthly life, she opens the calyx of her higher Self to the descent of the rays of the Eternal Self as woman. Knowing the union she closes the petals of spiritual love upon the heavenly visitation and is one with the divine in silence, in seclusion, in mystery.

27 November 1941

The first year’s work in New Zealand draws to a close. It has been full of effort, opportunity, expanding vision. In my life, I have witnessed four momentary Transfigurations. One was Dr Annie Besant, at the first lecture I heard her deliver at the Free Trade Hall in Manchester, England, in 1912. My whole life was changed and all my later activity sprang from this. Homage to her!... Evidently, transfiguration is physical as well as spiritual, and at the third Initiation, the possibility of transfiguration at any time is opened up.

16 February 1942

MEMORY OF MASTER KUTHUMI

Last night I awoke with the vivid recollection of being in the Presence of the Master Kuthumi. His remarks seemed to concern the fiery soul-essence of Nature and of man, the akasha Agni, perhaps, or essence of both. I was enabled to see or rather realize myself (and Him) as this substance, as die inmost Self, the Mahatattva—presumably Buddhi-tattva. Everything was fused as if by fire into unity when this state was approached from below, and on descent from it, everything seemed heavy, dark, dull, like coagulations of mud in water.

The Master seemed to say, “This is the Creative Principle ceaselessly at work in matter, this is the ‘fire of creation.”‘ It was less verbal instruction than vital experience; “afterwards” my gratitude, love, and veneration mounted to great intensity. In utter reverence I bow before the Guru.

Throughout 1942, world affairs have passed through many fluctuations. After great initial success, Germany is being driven back with heavy losses in Russia. Japan strikes successfully at America in the Pacific during negotiations in Washington. She is now temporarily master of the Pacific, and this morning comes news of the fall of Singapore. Then doubtless will come attacks on D.E.I. [Dutch East Indies], Australia, and New Zealand. America is harnessing all industrial power to gigantic war production and sending aid to these countries.

An Adept “Friend” warned of all this last year, but assured me of my family’s perfect safety, and that New Zealand would not be successfully invaded—a very great support and consolation.

28 February 1942

A memorable day. Immediately after breakfast, received teaching and direction of an authoritative character. Our joint work is to discover knowledge, to arrange knowledge and to spread knowledge. Teaching is promised, and direction, especially after racial and individual karmas have been met.

The influence and atmosphere of this experience arc distinctly of Master Kuthumi, possibly, as I feel, of Master Djwal Kul and of the Valley and of the Occult World—the only Beings and the only world for us.

20 March 1942 - Oamaru

An Adept

Tell your family that the whole danger of invasion by land forces of Australia and New Zealand is now remote. The recent losses and others to come make it too costly. Air attack may still be attempted on the southern areas of Australia, but the resistance is becoming very strong. You may say that the war has taken a definite turn and the tide from now on will continue to flow in favour of the Allies, despite occasional setbacks and losses.

American production and manpower are the deciding factors now, just as British courage and skill and vision have held the fort till now and Russian doggedness spells Hitler’s doom from the east. He is to try a gigantic thrust through the Caucasus for oil but after a first success, he will fail as he did against Russia. He and his army are doomed, as you dreamed truly the other night, remembering a summing up of the situation which you attended. So your family are not to be in the least afraid; neither are you; and the future is indeed brightening in many ways.

Theosophically, a gigantic task awaits the Society and its principal workers, and the outlines of that task will soon be physically discernible as they are superphysically already. It is a call to preach the Brotherhood of Man, the occult truths, and the Path of Discipleship. A great wave of public interest in Theosophy is to be expected, and growth of the Theosophical Society in some countries as a result. Big events are in preparation, and a great work will have to be done. All your self-training will be of inestimable value. But this is not immediate, and for a time things will go on as they are.

Humanity must unite or perish.

19 April 1942

A DISCIPLE’S PRAYER

“O Master! May I keep humble

And true and fine and pure in Thy sight

May the curse of egoism never fall upon me,

Nor the vice of pride ever take hold of me.

And may I ever remember to Whom I belong

And under Whom I live and work,

And so be worthy of my Discipleship.

Amen.”

The soul is truly healthy only when in a state of humility and self-correction. The First Ray says, “Only when standing to attention.”

9 May 1942

My life is an inconceivably slow apprenticeship for self-mastery, for true attainment. One seeks ever a stable centre, a faultless wisdom, an unfailing vision, an utter steadiness between and amidst happiness and pain. I think I have found these blessings and their name thus far is “work”. As long as I am at work I am still, calm, steady, sure, impersonal, happy in the “Great Stream”.

The personality is the barrier, the weakness, the Achilles’ heel, the source of failure. The long slow apprenticeship must be continued, for like grammar it will repay me later on. It is the work you will one day do which is of significance, not yourself, and above all not the self of today. We must cease to be concerned with ourselves, only with That of which we form a part. “Except a com of wheat fall into the ground and die, it abideth alone; but if it die, it bringeth forth much fruit.”^{^[57]}

*****

SACRIFICE

Sacrifice is the supreme virtue, the greatest contribution, the meaning of “rejection of the stone”^{^[58]} and why that stone is the “keystone”. The worker voluntarily foregoes acceptance. The rejection is chosen beforehand. Sacrifice is the stone, contributed to the Templar life. Sacrifice is the very root of being, the essence of creativeness, the essential to creation.

Therefore let sacrifice, renunciation, ever be the keynote of life and work, the master theme, the motif of motifs. Then it will also be the joy of life. Let go the separate self, the individual life. Then the greater life will be revealed and known.

Self-negation does not produce futile nullity. It is the only gateway to fullness of being and to infinite potency. But to achieve and maintain this, one must live in the realm of infinite thought and eternal truth. “He that loseth his life for my sake, shall find it unto life eternal.”[59] Give to have. Serve to live. Renounce to perceive and receive. Share to enjoy. See life whole and live for the whole and nevermore for the separate self alone.

26 May 1942

SUCCESS

No one can succeed unless he has a Holy Grail in the search for which he can lose himself. To have each his quest, his Holy Grail, this is the need of mankind. To lose himself in his quest is man’s assurance of success. -

11 June 1942

POWER

For those on the Second Ray, there is only one way—that of Wisdom and Love. But you must learn to be completely tolerant and appreciative of other ways of evolving, manifesting, and serving. One such way is that of power, will (characteristic of the First Ray), and though it may appear to be wrong, it may not always be so.

For First Ray people, power is their Holy Grail, their quest; great cosmic power can flow through them and exalt them, and they must express it in some way. Learn to see the necessity for power rightly used; try to understand men of power, even when they appear to be totally wrong. Avoid a hasty judgement. Be wise about power.

15 June 1942

SPIRITUAL REFINEMENT

In addition to all the listed qualities required for the Path is an unlisted one which can bring success even in the absence of many others. It is spiritual refinement, a fragrance of soul or a “high note in the chord” ever sounding out. It is an aristocracy of Ego, a patrician quality which places the Ego amongst spiritual kings and princes, however lowly his physical lot. It results from past loftiness and high attainment. It is “a pure influence from the Almighty” which is the Monad, an utter refinement, a loftiness of soul, a “racehorse” quality.

*****

THOSE WHO HURT

One must not resent the “grinding process” or have the slightest feeling against those whose function it has been to carry it out. They are the soul’s best friend. First Ray people can be strong and decisive, but they must not be Queens (as in Lewis Carroll’s Alice in Wonderland) who ever cry, “Off with his head!”

20 June 1942

JUDGEMENT-THE ERROR WHICH LEADS TO GOSSIP

The great error is perpetually to judge other people, to presume to assess them and their motives. Without a knowledge of their past and future one cannot correctly judge other people, and it is wisdom to refrain from the process; impertinence and folly not to refrain.

Behind gossip is judgement. Don’t judge.

*****

THIRD RAY WISDOM AND DETACHMENT

Third Ray wisdom is a great essential. Always one must be detached and study the problem or situation impersonally. Innumerable factors enter into every problem and into every individual motive and conduct, and no human being can accurately assess them all and so correctly judge the situation. Therefore, even whilst studying, observing, be slow to judge, especially adversely and from what may be an apparent mistake.

*****

MISTAKES

The Path is the doctrine of the fruitfulness of mistakes.

Mistakes are the most valuable experience because pain-producing and so educative. The shortest, quickest path is to make mistakes and learn from them. Many of the world’s greatest have died in ignominy... Make a study of errors of the great and realize their fruitfulness. When you see a weakness or error and go out to cure it, you manifest the opposite virtue and right conduct. Never hide from mistakes.

Most probably, in the long run, there are no mistakes. For every mistake is right action in embryo. Capacity to make mistakes is capacity for right action in process of germination and development. Every mistake is a channel through which added perception of rectitude will be gained. Within every right action is the possibility of wrong action; within every wrong action lies the possibility of right action. Hence, that wrong action or mistake, however grievous its consequences to the actor and others, is not wholly wrong and irretrievable. Nevertheless, our own mistakes must never be lightly regarded; nor must they be over-accentuated. They must be seen as mistakelessness-in-the-becoming. If we never made mistakes we should never become mistakeless. The Adept is one Who is mistakeless.

*****

BEWARE OF SUCCESS

Never for a moment be deceived by outer success. When it comes, be acutely on guard. Success can be the greatest failure. Failure can be the greatest success. Failures are powers in embryo.

Be ever ready to sacrifice, forego outer success. Don’t seek it, don’t desire it, don’t admit it. The dharma of all beings is to break down separated form; for outer success nearly always conceals inner limitation.

Success always belongs to the circumference. Only the Adept has success at the Centre and even that Centre recedes further and further away.

9 July 1942

FLAWS

“A diamond whit a flaw is better than a common stone that is perfect.”(Chinese proverb)

The one determination of the true occultist is to know the flaws in his [or her] own nature. Better far to go down in defeat and failure before the world but with flaws revealed and acknowledged, than to die in public acclaim, self-deluded and blind to one’s flaws.

The occultist’s epitaph: “He knew his weaknesses.” The antithesis: “He is under the maya of self-congratulation.” No outer success must ever be allowed to blind one to inevitable inner failure. Therefore, whenever success comes, use it at once to seek the flaws and manfully remove them.

31 January 1943, Sunday 3 - Belvedere St, Epsom, Auckland

This week marks the beginning of the end of a period of householding and the beginning of homelessness.

Throughout 1942 I toured N.Z. whilst Jane’s health seriously declined. Sandra cared for her during my absence with unfailing love and support. After the 46th N.Z. Convention at Wellington, I planned to stay here and see Jane through. A rapid deterioration began with acute pains until drugs were applied. After a fortnight of much difficulty and suffering, she was placed in Lavington Nursing Home on the 29th of January 1943, and our responsibility for her physical well-being was transferred...

19 February 1943

Plans afoot for Easter Conference. Keynote accepted by Emma Hunt: The Dedicated Life, the only life worth living.

Realize that each must crown himself with the royal crown of Atma.

10 March 1943

(Vivid superphysical experience of visiting the Masters in a house. The President, Dr G.S. Arundale, was with us—Jane, Sandra, and myself.)

The Master Morya was with us the most. Master Kuthumi retired to another room opening out of that in which we were received. We four were visitors permitted to pay a call upon Them. The President seemed to have an official position. Each of us, as every visitor, would see Them and the experience differently, with certain objective facts in common, but we would not necessarily share in the others’ contact with the Masters and, at any rate, would remember most clearly one’s own, as I do.

Conversation was very open and easy. At first, as we approached, the house was invisible. It was in mountainous, pastoral upland just off a well-used trail, and one “saw” a maya over it as of a haystack and open country. I recognized the path and exclaimed to our unremembered guide (in some way one of Them): “I have been along here before!” It was a long, white building off to the right, but concealed save to admitted visitors. There was a hall and we entered a room on the left with a table against the right wall. They “ate with us—broke bread”.

It was perfectly clear that the Masters were living an intensely vivid, inner life, full of its own activity all the time. They were graciously turned outwards to us at the personal level. As Porphyry said of his teacher Plotinus, “He was able simultaneously to live with others and with himself.”

I was greatly impressed by the Master’s youthfulness: He seemed not more than 28, and I remember “thinking” over to the President, “How remaikably young They look!” There was not a line on Their faces, and the skin was perfectly smooth and very vital. They were strikingly beautiful, and it was hard to keep one’s eyes and mind from Their wonderful faces and outer being. I was not aware of auras.

Their complete unconcern—upeksha—absolute indifference, and smiling ease, immovable equipoise, detachment, interior bliss impressed me profoundly. Apparently They... abide in absolute peace, “at ease” throughout Their whole nature and with all Nature.

I cannot remember much conversation. I could not wholly repress interest in Them as the Beings of the “Letters”^{^[60]} and I asked some questions (I fear too many) about that period. I received quite open and interesting answers, but no “interest”. I was told that the house had been rebuilt on the old site.

Disinterestedness^{^[61]} with personality, yet clearly being personalities with characteristics. Master Morya gave me an object[62]—very clear to me. The act evoked instant gratitude and devotion... He talked quite freely to me.

THE PENCIL INCIDENT

Master Kuthumi emerged from another room, now glowing with golden light. I received the impression of a dedicated altar within it. He walked up to me and handed me a long used pencil of white wood. On it were several signatures, including His own as in the Letters—“K.H.”...

I did not feel it was given, only shown to me and to be held. As we left, later, I laid it down on the doorstep, not feeling that I ought to keep it. I cannot recall any significance in these two incidents of “gifts” unless the pencil was a hint to write more, or a prophecy that I should one day write for Him or at His direction. (On 13 February 1945 I was told by Him, “The Pencil was your work in the world as accredited agent for Us.”)

These two incidents seem to be the most significant and to symbolize the purpose of the visit. Both seem to concern the future.

There was present a shorter man who lived there, an Oriental with refined, somewhat Mongolian features, clean shaven. Could it be Master Djwal Kul?

Master Morya’s face in profile remains as a strong memory. Master Kuthumi’s extraordinary beauty and grace, and chiefly His hair, free on the shoulders, are remembered clearly.

At last both Masters withdrew and the third personage said, “We have to go now.” We four then withdrew. In the hall was a table on which was a kind of cap commonly used in the district. I received the impression that the Masters went out unrecognized amongst the people. I was last to leave and longed to stay. As I put the pencil down on the doorstep I found my shoelaces untied. The right one broke and I left with the shoe unfastened. The other three were waiting for me across the road which, in a maya, now seemed to be in an English town. I looked long at the front of the house, saw its number, 403, on the wall left of the door, but couldn’t find the name of the street or the town. Still, I felt that I had been permitted to know much... I know the house, although I would not dream of intruding uninvited.

There are incalculably great differences between the bodily personality of anyone and the real individual. This is especially the case in embodied Adepts. There is a certain sublimated and beautiful humanness at the physical level, yet an inconceivably great Adeptship above. Physically, there is an extraordinarily refined, strong, serene person “cosmically at ease”. Although the Masters, in this superphysical experience, must have been intensely active at many other levels and fully aware of them, there was no slightest absent-mindedness. There was, however, a sense that They lived wholly within Themselves, at the “Centre”, and that actually there was very little awareness (relatively) away from that Centre. The Master Kuthumi radiated warm friendliness. My fullest memory is of Master Morya, near Whom I sat all the time following the meal.

The above impressions and all the wonderful atmosphere of the out-of-the-body meeting are very clear. I do not wish to come out of it; it is so very wonderful. I have the assurance of having seen reality...

In spite of Their impressive greatness, the Masters have a human sociability and friendliness and sense of fun which is delightful.

[On the 2nd of October 1976, at our home in Epsom, Auckland, just after my typing the above account of the Master Kuthumi’s handing Geoffrey the Pencil, Geoffrey received the following communication from the Master Kuthumi, Who spoke mentally to him as follows:]

“As you have said, and as you so well know from almost a lifetime of experience, one of the tests—but not the only one, remember—of the reality of an occult experience, is whether or not it fades from the memory, particularly in its details. Entry into supramental consciousness, interrelationship with a Deva-Raja and, of course, an Adept or one near thereto, produces an effect upon the personal mind of the awakened seer, the Ego and Causal body and, of course, the Akasha of each of these and the place where the events occur.

“Thus, prophecies of future events may at first appear to the recipient to be unlikely of fulfilment, even impossible, in fact, as in the case of the ‘Pencil’. In such events, and especially when all the other components of the experience prove both lasting and intellectually realistic, then an apparently doubtful prophecy or other statement must be held in abeyance in the mind and watchfully observed on occasion. If the other assurances of certainty are met, then it is reasonable to assume that, however unlikely at the time, the prophecies will be fulfilled, whether personal, group, national, or international.

“At the time I handed Geoffrey the Pencil, Sandra, and partly prophesied its later use symbolically, and when My Brother—Morya—showed him the ‘Historic Scroll’ (or ‘Roll’)^{^[63]} and pointed to his place in the future as a successor to H.P.B. and others, the possibilities could hardly be acceptable to Geoffrey at those times! Now, however, the truth of both prophecies is abundantly clear, even though he never claims, and probably never will claim during his lifetime to be repeating the words of a Master.”

12 March 1943

My 57th birthday, on which I feel a new dedication to the service of the Masters and, by Their aid, to the world. The memory of my superphysical experience two nights ago remains very strong indeed, and I am living in the happiness of the experience.

1April 1943

Recently received, at a Masonic meeting, the illumination of the double pyramids, a great stabilizing and empowering symbol and shield.

12 April 1943

Two great virtues which are really one: in religious life, “self-recollection”, and in secular life, “heedfulness”.

“For all your days prepare,

And meet them ever alike.

When you are anvil, bear.

When you are hammer, strike.”

22 April 1943

Preparing my various addresses for the Easter Conference (in New Zealand) on The Dedicated Life, I realize that in all this work I am sharpening my “tools” for the future. The Pencil which the Master Kuthumi handed to me in that wonderful superphysical visit to His house was not for me to use (at that time) and I rightly returned it. It was a model. First, it was given by a Master, it was not my own. Second, it was white and so unsullied by self or sense. Third, it was straight and sharp. Fourth, it was not new but had been used. Fifth, it had other names than mine on it and its shape is the symbol of spiritual power. Sandra says that it is the symbol of my work, to bring through and write down divine inspiration, continuing the work of predecessors. (This is now officially ratified.)

So I must sharpen my tools and learn to use them: will to finality; wisdom to mistakelessness; intellect to perceptiveness and prescience; mind to intuitiveness, clarity, and absolute long-and short-range logic, perfection of reasoning; emotion to intuition and selfless universal love; and body (the point) to complete efficiency in the expression of all these and channelship for the Master’s power. Such is my Pencil to be!

24 April 1943

Easter Conference well begun. The most important quality in a lecture is not its cleverness, its power to win applause, its worldly success...Supremely important in a lecture is its power to elevate the consciousness, stimulate higher mental activity in members of the audience, and serve as a vehicle for the Master’s influence.

The occultist must develop the most absolute, positive indifference to personal reactions to him and his work. He must proceed upon his inwardly appointed way, balanced alike in favour or disfavour. Impersonal, detached, seeking the approval of none save his Guru, fearing no disapproval as long as his best is always done, he becomes a conqueror of Mara. Praise must at once place him on his guard, reference to him turn him to ice, and he must straightway direct all applause to his Master Who alone is responsible. He must be utterly indifferent, impersonal, detached.

3 May 1943

QUESTIONS

Where does legitimate pride of craftsmanship end and self-satisfied egoism begin? Where does careful examination and impersonal enquiry into the actions of others end (with a view to understanding and avoiding errors) and karmically self-injurious criticism of others begin?

6 May 1943

KARMIC REBUFFS

In Occultism, one must learn to take everything in one’s stride, especially rebuffs, disappointments, and pain. We create our rebuffs by littleness and the errors which arise from it. They are our own fault and no one else’s. Hold to that. Refuse to admit the possibility of the slightest injustice, and stride on. All is Karma, Karma is all, and all is well. Don’t seek consolation, healing, sympathy: that is weakness.

10 May 1943 - Tauranga

B ODHIS ATTVAHOOD

At Tauranga I communicated with the deva of the Mount and learned much of the plan of devic activity. Perceived something of the spirit of Bodhisattvahood. It is a combination of intense spiritual love for all, divine wisdom and compassion founded upon an impelling will to save, to enlighten, to heal, and to teach. It is most highly spiritualized and refined. Whilst impersonal in itself it includes deep concern for all individuals. It abides in bliss, in oneness. Its influence is known when teaching impersonally and with love. It is the Second Aspect of the vast consciousness of the Lord Maitreya in Whom all Bodhisattvahood, past, present, and to come, is concentrated at its highest spiritual essence and manifestation. It is the apotheosis of Divine Love, Wisdom, Light, Ministry, Union. At its heart is fully realized Unity with the spiritual Soul of all living things and beings. It is equally devic and human, as if a Bodhisattva combined both kingdoms in Himself and manifested the perfected powers and attributes of both. Thus, He is Teacher alike of angels and of men. He is a heavenly “mendicant, a sage, a healer, the King of Kings, the Yogi of Yogis”.^{^[64]}

8 June 1943

You cannot be a genius suddenly. Genius is preceded by practice, work, plan under the direction of a Senior.

A great work to be done: “To infuse modern thought with the Eastern (Chaldean-Tibetan) occultism and esoteric Buddhism and Hinduism.” Study, co-ordinate, and practise.

19 July 1943

Realize that I must gradually establish unbroken continuity throughout the twenty-four hours in contact with Reality and continued work. A line of fire must connect Atma-physical and grow in intensity and width. It is this fire which bestows immortality and gives growing power to all work. It is the LIFE LINE. It is the SELF in man. “I am THAT, THAT am I.”

17August 1943

CONTACT WITH A DHYAN CHOHAN OR TATTVIC LORD

In meditation at the study class (held in H.P.B. Lodge, Queen Street, Auckland), at the level of One Life, I cognized for the first time what may have been a Dhyan Chohan or Tattvic Lord. It was the unit of consciousness of a whole plane, definitely a Being Whom I could address, “beseeching” help for mankind. Yet I experienced, however faintly, a unity with that glorious Being, even though almost infinitely below it in evolution externally... The mind translated the experience into formless “form”. An egg-shaped aura within which was the human form, and from the “shell” connection is extended in all directions infinitely as outflowing waves. All was a single colour which was pure gold; a deep, rich golden light shone through and from the Being throughout the universe into which it extended. A very great upliftment resulted and an interior happiness and voidness of consciousness.

30 August 1943

THE ONE LIFE

While at Rotorua, after conducting a Lodge study group, I returned to my lodging and, in a state of contemplation, realized, “There is only the flowing stream of Life. In individuals it develops attributes, qualities. Only the highest of these endure as characteristics of individuality within the ever flowing stream of life which is God’s essence and is eternal. Those who love ‘flow’ together as streams running side by side within the great Stream of the One Life. Death is a widening of the banks.”

6 September 1943

A SOUL IN DARKNESS OR LIGHT

An individual may be grievously transgressing and still be in the Light and within the Sanctuary as long as he is fighting. The presence of a vice tendency in man is not a crime. The absence of a virtue in a man is not a crime spiritually, as long as he is aspiring. Darkness descends, crime is committed occultly only when the man deliberately chooses evil, voluntarily panders to a weakness, ceases to fight. Then the soul is in danger, e.g., desire for power, sensual indulgences; public corruption as a deliberately chosen policy.

21 September 1943

Somewhat weighed down by a situation, on entering my room I saw it was occupied by a Presence. I saw and sensed a form “dark” against the evening light from the window. The room was “drenched” with power.

It was a highly spiritual being who spoke most beautifully and consolingly, encouraging me to endure and develop all possible qualities from the difficulty which had arisen. “Bring forth will: in stability under stress, in courage under fatigue, and in power when at work...” A message and a blessing from Them was brought in the most striking and “phenomenal” experience so far.

23 September 1943

Receive impression that I am to enter a renewal of the cycle of 192330… and it will last to the end of my life…? (In late 1944, Master Polidorus Isurenus began teaching by the same method as Bethelda: so above impression was true.)

4 October 1943

TROUBLE

Trouble when on the Path should always be met with power and in power. Troubles are to aspirants what blizzards on steep slopes are to mountaineers. They call for greater effort and greater caution, and they develop greater power. Storms are not to be feared, for they always pass.

4 October 1943

During this week I have realized the importance of absoluteness in dedication. There must be nothing whatever held back; no personal plans must ever be even as the faintest film between the worker and the Adept “Planners”. “Thy will, no mine, be done”[65] is the heart of Occultism. The aspirant’s will-power is exercised in self-training and self-mastery, and must become omnipotent in that field. The personality is submitted to the will of the King [the great Lord of the World].

29 October 1943

LIMELIGHT

Learn steadfastly to refuse “limelight” invitations. They are snares. The Sage is “retiring like snow beneath the sun, lowly as the valley, obscure like muddy water”. (Lao Tzu) Don’t reveal yourself as such; reveal impersonal truth.

4 December 1943

FERVOUR

Always be on guard with fervent people. Never take them or their enthusiastic appraisements of themselves and affairs, others, or situations for granted, however sincere and well-meaning they appear to be. cf. Lao Tzu: “They (the ancient Sages) were reserved as one who doubts his fellows.”

9 December 1943

DISRUPTIVE INFLUENCES IN THE THEOSOPHICAL SOCIETY

One must not be concerned with false statements and personalities, but rather with the fair name, progress, and unified effort of the Theosophical Society.

Temporary doctrinal leanings and memberships of organizations have nothing to do with the case. We have a great movement designed to do and doing a great work in the world. Unity means strength. Dignity and courtesy give prestige. Breadth and tolerance ennoble. Let us maintain them.

13 December 1943

THE PATH

All-important is realism concerning one’s true position on the Path, one’s monthly and yearly progress or otherwise, the development and increase of faculties (for which one should ever be avid); growing selfmastery, clarity of vision, prescience, soundness of judgment, skill of address in all matters, whether worldly or otherworldly; to the sole end of the advancement of the Cause, one’s true usefulness to the Brotherhood and to one’s fellow men, and the increase of refinement, sensitivity, spiritual responsiveness and channelship, as well as one’s steady, continuous growth in actual knowledge of the Sacred Science: these are amongst the essentials of self-knowledge on the Path. ONE MUST BE UNDER NO DELUSIONS ABOUT ONESELF AND ONE MUST LIVE NO MORE FOR ONESELF.’

3 January 1944

Life opens the door of opportunity and there is no need of “thought for the morrow”.

It has been said, “We must not try to manipulate life; rather we must find out what life demands of us, and train ourselves to fulfil these demands. It is a long and humble business.” I would add that we must be continually fitting ourselves for—and watching for—the opportunities which life will not fail to offer us, especially if our work is for others.

20 January 1944

THE DHYAN CHOHAN SELF

There exists a Dhyan Chohanic Self (spiritual ensoulment of the Monad) Who is the real “Father in Heaven”, the Logos of the Soul, the A…of the Egoic B...and personal C...As evolution proceeds, these three gravitate towards each other, both in mutual influence and in conscious recognition from below. The Dhyan Chohan presumably is first revealed either as a known Being (rare?) or as a spiritual impulse when the Ego turns to the Path and is successful in bringing the personality “into line”. Thereafter, a ceaseless pressure towards spirituality is experienced by Ego-personality, and the power of the Ego over the personality increases. I think I begin faintly to realize this “A” as a LORD IN PERPETUAL CONTEMPLATION, as resident within the Solar Atma with consciousness seated in Solar Adi, i.e., of the System and so supra-planetary.

The shape is a semicircle over a triangle.

The intellectual power is awesome. Consciousness perpetually abides in, and as, eternal truth and Adic principles of “creation”. It is adamantine in power and crystalline in diamond-hardness. It comprehends all things, is “established forever”. It is the true “Master” and apparently will be the Self-Initiator at the Fifth, when the conscious blend is attained. Master Kuthumi definitely suggests the existence of this other Self in the Letters. “I invoke Thee and surrender to Thee, O All-pervading One.”

*****

“READ THE SECRET DOCTRINE”

When I mentally appealed for knowledge of the truth concerning various teachings, I later “heard” the words, as if from Master Morya, “Read Our doctrine,” meaning The Secret Doctrine. So I shall concentrate upon that work and adjust my lectures increasingly to its teachings.

Feel impelled to rewrite Kingdom of the Gods based upon The Secret Doctrine, Volume 1 (Lipika, etc.) and be ready to publish when war ends.

21 January 1944

“THE REJECTED STONE”

“A false judgement against one is a point in one’s favour.” The higher and greater the false judgement, the greater the “favour”, (cf. the “rejected stone”.)^{^[66]}

1 February 1944 - Auckland

An Adept

Do not fail to proceed systematically to master The Secret Doctrine and to set out in your own language its basic teachings and their applications to life’s problems. A new phase in your work approaches and you must be prepared to enter it effectively... A renaissance of original Theosophy is desired, and Sinnett’s valuable work is to come to the fore again. Take each doctrine and work out its implications, keeping strictly to the original. Thus you will build a sure foundation for your future roles.

Take the facts about death and devachan as originally given and restate them, and so on through the basic teachings of reincarnation, karma, rounds, races, cosmogenesis, deity, and deities. A powerful current of Theosophical thought is desired to flow through the post-war mind of humanity. Begin to strike this note of the need for and value of restatement of the bases of Theosophy.

(I must prepare articles for The Theosophist of the future, “The Secret Doctrine and e.g. death.” etc.—not limited to that book only.)

8 February 1944

Remembered conversation with Master Morya on this matter. Feel impressed to master and re-present the original teachings, study divergences and work them out. Feel sure the doctrinal situation must be cleared up.

Impressed with Master Morya’s tallness, strength, detached ease in power, and yet interest in T.S. and workers.

*****

There have thus far been two phases in the life of the Theosophical Society. The first was pure revelation from the Masters to man via H.P. Blavatsky and Letters. Teachings were acceptable because of the source. The “Back-to-Blavatsky” movement remains in this phase.

Subba Row, C.W. Leadbeater, Annie Besant ushered in the second main phase characterized by direct clairvoyant research and experience by members. The E.S. training, yoga practices, and vegetarianism have brought varying measures of direct interior experience to considerable numbers of Fellows of the Theosophical Society. This experience resembles and supports teachings of A.B., C.W.L., e.g. auras, thought-forms, devas, the appearance of the Masters, etc. That which appears to “Back-to-Blavatsky” people as blind subservience is not really so. It is founded upon both intuition and similar findings.

27 February 1944

LIBERAL CATHOLIC CHURCH CELEBRATION

Regular Celebrations at Wellington are a great source of upliftment. This morning the Lord’s Holy Presence was wonderfully revealed. I knew that it was in very truth the “Lord Maitreya Buddha”... He appears to my limited consciousness as a golden, glorious, shining Presence of unimaginable beauty, love, spirituality, and transcendent refinement, as if there were naught lower than Buddhi and limitless extensions above. He is all-embracing.

Of the reality of the Holy Eucharist and of the Consecration and Tran-substantiation there can be no doubt. It is a glorious truth.

29 February 1944

THE SOLAR SYSTEM AND THE SENSE OF SIZE

Received the impression in early morning of the Solar System as small and comprehensible. I saw that size is an illusion produced in the mind, and that the sense of dimension is dependent upon the mental limitation and viewpoint. The atom can appear as large as a Solar System, and the latter as small as an atom. For a fleeting moment, the faint sense of the Solar System and Planetary Schemes as a comprehensible totality, as within the grasp as in the physical body, was experienced. Strangely, the Master Kuthumi was associated with the Solar System as being one for Whom it was normally thus comprehended and apprehended. It is a bodily unit with sun as heart. “I am that Sun, that Sun am I.” There are Solar Dhyan Chohans Who are Planetary Scheme Logoi and Planetary Dhyan Chohans Who are Logoi of the planes of the planets. It is a wondrous Hierarchy.

1 March 1944

KEYNOTES OF THE FIRST AND SEVENTH RAYS

Have read two books on Edward Wilson who died with Scott in the Antarctic. His faith: evolution pushed to its ultimate conclusion. First-Ray qualities: undefeatable sportsmanship, buoyancy, indomitability. Neither count I my life dear unto myself, so that I might finish my course with joy. Indomitable courage—to be entirely careless of your own soul and body in looking after the welfare of others.

“Slog on, just slog on,” was Wilson’s advice to Oates when he knew his feet could no longer carry him and he was doomed.

The Ideal: “To strive, to seek, to find, and not to yield.”

Seventh Ray: “The knightly spirit, stainless in honour, selfless in devotion.”

The world needs these people, not only as physical explorers and adventurers, but as spiritual explorers and adventurers as well.

5 March 1944 (9:00 a.m.) - Wellington

An Adept

TO BRING THEOSOPHY TO THE WORLD

You are asked to prepare a statement of the best means of bringing Theosophy to general public attention. The fact remains that after seventy years of activity, the great masses of western humanity are not yet aware of the doctrines, particularly those of evolution—physical, cultural, and spiritual; of causation, reincarnation, and Adeptship. Neither are they aware of the existence of the Path of Discipleship. This is a serious disadvantage to mankind and especially unfortunate as regards post-war reconstruction.

Set out, therefore, without recriminations, a general plan for bringing mankind to a knowledge of Theosophy. Put the accent upon public propaganda and apply the process to the different classes of society, the wealthy, the educated, the struggling employees in industry, trade, and the “submerged” workers... All these need Theosophy. To them, its message of hope and guidance must be brought. To all must be offered, in the most acceptable forms, the precious truths of which the T.S. is the custodian. Address yourself then to this task of drawing up a plan of campaign with the one objective that the majority of mankind may know the teachings of Theosophy.

The means are literature and lectures, books and addresses, pamphlets and study classes. State the kind of each most likely to be effective, the necessary preparations and publicity...

10 March 1944

Yesterday I came to and passed a milestone in my life.

Mr. A. Leigh Hunt offered me the post of director and travelling speaker for the Dominion Settlement Association, mentioning one and even two thousand pounds a year—in fact, almost anything I asked. I never felt the immense privilege of being a Theosophical Society man more strongly than when I told him I was committed to the Theosophical Society. I would rather, infinitely rather, be in poverty as a servant of the T.S. than a millionaire in any other organization. As I left his office, I saw the dead, dry dullness of working for pay and knew that, as long as life offered the alternative, I could never go back thereto. There was no struggle, no slightest temptation, no virtue whatever in the instant and only decision. Thank “God” (Life) for the T.S. and the opportunities it brings. May I ever be worthy and ever keep my place in the ranks.

12 March 1944

My 58th birthday and a Sunday spent in Wellington, N.Z. Celebrated and offered my respectful homage to the revered Guru from before the altar. This year and onwards when the Master looks at me He must find no self-pity. Besides the suffering of those who have been tortured and have died for truth, my little pains are as naught. I brush them aside and away.

Granite imperturbability must be mine. Impersonality that seeks naught for self, cares naught for self, never obtrudes or advertises self, must be developed as an ineradicable trait persisting through all the days of this life and all the years of lives to come. Upeksha is the goal—absolute indifference (as regards myself, but never as regards the cares, sorrows, and burdens of others).

8 June 1944

[Geoffrey comments on the progress of the war (World War II) which he has followed closely, incorporating the distinctive events as a part of his Diary:]

Reports of 50 miles of beachhead in Normandy and 12 miles inland being established “according to plan”. Goebbels threatens another Dunkirk. Counter-attacks not yet seriously felt. Allies ten miles north of Rome. Montgomery, in charge of land forces, gives a prescription for victory:

1. Allied solidarity: 2. offensive eagerness; 3. enthusiasm; 4. confidence; 5. all-out effort. It is the same for the Path; early steps are only beachheads. Real conflict lies ahead. Minor and major trials and errors are valuable training. Beachheads (first steps and expansions of consciousness) can always be extended if plans, preparations, and power of attacking armies suffice. They will fail otherwise. Plans are the rules and maxims for the inner life. They must be literally implemented. Preparations consist of steady demolition of centres of weakness and indulgence and attacks far behind on sources of supply to these centres—an inner deep determination and action to eliminate them.

*****

RENUNCIATION

Strangely, power on the Path is not generally of personal offensive action. It is of silence and of absence of any personal desire whatsoever, e.g., desire for personal rehabilitation is a weakness which must be completely eliminated, renounced, as a settled policy.

Power consists on its active side, of faculty for effective work in any field, especially the chosen fields. Selflessness, self-control, detachment, dispassion, constitute the real power of the aspirant to Adeptship.

When distressed by strain and pain, turn at once to some continuing current work of a creative nature and lose yourself in it; you will emerge restored.

18 June 1944

SELF-HEALING

When distressed by strain and pain, turn at once to some continuing current work of a creative nature and lose yourself in it; you will emerge restored.

29 June 1944

CALL

Have strong experience as of a voice saying, “Make ready. The call is coming.” I perceive the importance of this time of waiting in which I must be preparing my character for future work, developing faculty and amassing material for lectures, classes, talks.

The character needs are impersonality, detachment, self-disinterestedness, power, will, stability, and discernment. There must be mastery of every situation.

5 July 1944

DANGERS OF SUCCESS

Especially must successes, major and minor, produce (be signals for) retirement, silence, disappearance. The periods following successes are very dangerous. Beware of success. Don’t let barriers down then; strengthen them, especially those of silence and inaction.

12 July 1944

THE TEACHER’S TASK

At this time, the importance of teaching as a vocation becomes deeply realized. The very word “teach” assumes profound significance, importance, beauty, as if it expressed the greatest thing in the world. I form the following opinion:

The teacher of the law is placed under severe restrictions. His major task is impersonally and accurately to offer for consideration established principles, unchanging truths, fundamental laws. In doing this he speaks from the higher mind and gives nothing of his own. He enunciates axioms. There are few voices but many echoes.

He may, however, legitimately suggest—not dogmatically affirm—possible and useful applications of principles to life. In this he speaks from higher and lower mind and his personality therefore becomes involved. His duty, in consequence, is clearly and continually to differentiate between axioms and opinions. The teacher must be translucent to the light of Truth.

The teacher’s task is not personally and directly to mould opinion. It is rather to supply the correct materials for the free formation of opinions. He himself must not intrude. He is the impersonal voice of impartial Truth. He is successful in the degree in which he provides opportunity for the unbiased development of individual views from knowledge of basic truth.

If well-informed, he may usefully say whether or not such views may permissibly be formed from axioms. Nevertheless, in so doing, his responsibility is heavy. When he enunciates principles, he is safe. When he moulds opinions, he is in danger. When he sways unduly or enforces opinions, he has fallen. If the opinions formed are perfectly sound, he does good. If they are unsound he is responsible for much harm. The dogmatist is always on dangerous ground. The teacher of axioms is always on safe ground. He can remain there, at the same time helping the thought and conduct of others if he continually makes plain the differences between impersonal axioms and personal opinions and, at the same time, makes clear which of the two he is offering.

The great Teachers chiefly enunciate principles, leaving their application to mankind.

Sometimes, in the service of a righteous cause, a teacher must run risks, put his solution at the disposal of the cause. He may then seek to mould opinion and direct action. But he must do two things under such circumstances. He must take care that opinions and actions are right and he must get back to first principles as soon as possible. White light—not the coloured rays—is the teacher’s contribution to human welfare.

13 July 1944

MOTIVES FOR PROGRESSION

Atma does not love its fellow men in their separated human personalities, for it knows itself as one with all. In its naked state its will is to make power manifest, to overcome obstacles to fulfilment, to become a flame. Pure First Ray people are realists. They don’t pretend to love everybody, especially ugly, brutish, selfish, cruel individuals. They determine to achieve immortality and to finish with earthly, mortal limitations as soon as possible.

Atma clothed in Buddhi does love and feel at one with its fellow men. The Second Ray ideal of attaining individual perfection and fulfilment is indissolubly associated, fused with, the resultant benefit to mankind, to God’s plan, and the evolution of life as a whole. The Second Ray man cannot help himself.

Atma-Buddhi clothed in Manas determines only to comprehend all things. The Third Ray individual realizes that all will quite naturally attain at the appointed time just as he himself will.

Dangers:

First Ray’man runs great risks of seeking personal stature and so of becoming hard, prideful, separative.

Second Ray man is less susceptible and vulnerable to that danger. He unifies even in error.

Third Ray can become cold, separative, individualistic.

23 July 1944

A Gnostic maxim: “Learn to know all but keep thyself unknown.”

2 August 1944

FREEDOM

Realized: Break the bondage of sense by willing renunciation. Break the bonds of karma by loving service to the world.

I have recently taken up the study of the Egyptian religion and symbolism, especially the Judgement Scene. A new region of knowledge, particularly of the Sacred Language, has been opened up to me in consequence. I am incorporating the material into members’ study classes in Auckland, and having pictures prepared.

27 August 1944

LEADERS AND CONDUCT

Always give ideas, however inspired, as one’s own tentative thoughts. Don’t suggest to a leader that you do anything. Always wait until asked. Never permit the impression that you want to lecture, appear, etc. Quite the contrary. Speak little and never interrupt. “Work out in hours of darkness what you see in hours of light.”

*****

THE TEACHER

“He who shall declare this supreme secret among My devotees, having shown the highest devotion for Me, without doubt he shall come to Me.

“Nor is there any among men who performeth dearer service to Me than he, nor any other shall be more beloved by Me on earth than he.”^{^[67]}

3 September 1944 - Auckland

First Ray finds it hard to admit error and apologize!

All strong points must be completely concealed except when time for action demands their employment. Realize your strength and then reserve and conceal it. If forced to a reference by some appreciation, at once point to someone possessing it in a far higher degree, to one’s own disadvantage…

MASTER POLIDORUS ISURENUS BEGINS TEACHING

A Teacher[68] very powerfully impressed me as follows:

“You are asked to undertake a special work. Begin to draw up policies for attaining the various objectives of the T.S. These, as you are aware, are as follows:

1. To spread the Wisdom Religion over the whole earth.

2. To restore the Ancient Mysteries for the guidance of the few who seek the Path.

3. To influence the minds of leaders and principal agents in the fields of religion, economics, education, politics, science, and the arts. Each of these must be taken separately and plans formulated. The chief means are personal contact by accredited Theosophists, lectures, and articles.

4. To carry American scholastic investigation into the sixth sense[69] much further and show the rationale and mode of development of this power (intuition) and especially the safeguards essential in that development. To this end a pamphlet needs to be written, outlining these matters.”

Followed advice to pursue comparative religion, showing the one Wisdom Religion as having always existed on earth.

11 October 1944

PSYCHOLOGICAL TIME

Realize that there is psychological time, as well as physical time. That essential time is marked by inner growth and not by hours and days. Changes must occur within one to bring one successfully to the next period. Happy are they whose psychological time coincides with and accurately meets their physical time!

*****

MAYA

Realize how utterly mayavic^{^[70]} physical events can be, especially to outside observers. Greatness is marked by freedom from maya. One must develop the power to pierce all illusion, to gain “implicit insight into every first truth”.^{^[71]}

The inner motives are the truth; the outer actions the maya. One must be ever on guard against maya. The key is the motive, good, bad, or indifferent Facts are perhaps the most mayavic of all the illusions by which man is surrounded in order that he may develop perception. The charges against...were based on facts and even admissions. But both were deceptive, illusion. The motive was pure, selfless, and that was the reality.

Our Lord was accused of consorting with the dregs of society, including a prostitute taken in the act. She even washed and annointed His feet! She was not condemned by Jesus; was admitted to His group, and was present at the Cross with His Mother and was the first human being to whom He presented Himself after the Resurrection. He asked her not to touch Him then and to carry a very personal message to the other members of His group. All these are facts. But consider the motive of Jesus—to save, to heal, to uplift, and to encourage. “They that are whole need not a physician; but they that are sick.”^{^[72]} The facts are mayavic. The motive is the reality.

5 December 1944

THE IDEAL LECTURE

“A lecture should not be a display of knowledge but a gateway to knowledge. It should be simple, clear, and eloquently delivered; it should elevate as well as inform, and it should above all inspire to personal research. A lecturer should be a pure, impersonal channel for occult truth to mankind. His personality and his manner should appeal only through the perfection of their channelship for wisdom and inspirational appeal. Simplicity and directness should be the keynotes of both lecture and lecturer.”

So said the Adept Teacher [Master Polidorus Isurenus] Who has done me the great honour to begin to open for me the door to the esoteric wisdom of Ancient Egypt This process followed some months of study and began earlier this year; it has continued almost daily immediately following breakfast in the quietude and harmony of Mrs F. . .’s home. He gives the impression of the greatest serenity and yet power of consciousness. The teaching flows into my mind in good English with great ease and without strain.

Interruptions (in the midst of this delicate occult procedure) make no difference. There is no hurry, no abnormal state of consciousness. It is the nearest thing to being “talked to” I have yet experienced. Knowledge of His Presence and readiness to teach comes from a descending shaft of power into my head and a tingling of the skin of my cheeks. These are the signals that the teaching is to begin. I see how important all preceding study has been, for without yoga and the basic knowledge, I could not receive these shared ideas from the Master.

6 December 1944 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

RETURN TO THE SANCTUARY

Your whole life in this incarnation was mapped out for you from the beginning, and you, as an Ego, accepted the plan. You had earned a healthy body in your life to stand the strain of disaster and later occultism. Your boyhood was watched over and you were saved from death more than once, as when you swallowed a penny and when your pony galloped away. Your entry upon the Path was the sole consideration with you and you were ready to work and to suffer, as indeed you have done. But your reward is sure and draweth nigh. Together with your old friend, you are going to take up the occult life in real earnest before very long. The shackles are falling away already, and you have made your own road by your exertions. Soon you will be free to follow wholly your own chosen path, the path of Light and of the Light-bringer.

You began that path eight thousand years ago in Ancient Egypt and have followed it ever since. You found the Light and the doctrine of the Light in both male and female incarnations in Ancient Egypt and later on in Greece. Your path led through Palestine at the time of Christ Then Alexandria and the Gnostics received you. Steadily you advanced in occult science with but brief interludes of worldliness, most of them unfortunate…However the excursion was not all loss, as it brought knowledge and experience and set your will for this incarnation towards the occult life. You belong to the Temple and the Sanctuary and that is why you responded as you did to Theosophy when first it came into your life, as it was bound to do. For you had served the Light too well for it to desert you for very long.

Your siddhi of intercommunication, thought transference, or faculty of receiving, in full consciousness, soon came out, and your Archangel Teacher [Bethelda] developed it by use.[73] Now it is operating again and will develop further as your life becomes more established. You are a messenger above all things, a bringer of the Light to man. The next twenty years of your life will bring you to great spiritual and occult heights and largely because of your capacity to receive direct the Light which the Great Ones propose still further to give. This link now formed between us will endure to the end, for I have been deputed as Their messenger when They do not wish to speak direct. No longer need you feel alone. You have drawn near to the heart of the work and are, in fact now received back into the Sanctuary; exile is done. You are back Home. I am the Elder Brother Who receives the prodigal home, an old Friend Who worked and taught with you in your Egyptian and Alexandrian days. So now assume self-confidence and speak your word, if with outer diffidence as is your wont, yet with inward calm. To restore your confidence and to reassure your heart I give these words to you...

28 January 1945

OUR BLESSED LADY MARY

At 9:20 p.m., after returning from the Sunday public lecture, Our Blessed Lady Mary came to talk to me. I became aware at the mental level of the Presence of Our Lady, Who appeared as a highly spiritual, wonderfully refined young lady of perhaps twenty-eight years. She spoke in a voice of compelling sweetness and beauty and with the most engaging charm, saying, “I was Miriam, the Mother of Jesus, and now hold the Office of World Mother. I knew you in that life and befriended you.^{^[74]} I have given you messages in this life. Could you not collect all your writings of Me and publish them as an aid to My cause amongst men?” Her shining blue aura seemed to enfold me for a moment, and its light to fill the room. A still peace pervaded me from the highest levels down to the physical. This experience seems like an answer to an unspoken wish, that I might again have contact with Her and receive direct assurance of the correctness of the teachings concerning Her. I now feel utterly sure and rededicate my life to Her service. I had invoked Her aid for a girl of nineteen during a healing service a few days previously and felt a response.

1 February 1945

The Teacher Who came last September [30th] proved to be an Adept of the Egyptian Branch of the Great White Brotherhood^{^[75]} (the Brotherhood of Luxor). He was Philo Judaeus, the Alexandrian sage (c.30 B.C.-c. A.D. 40, which means A.D. 70 to A.D. 140). He assures me of continuing guidance and of progress and responsibility in many hours of teaching which consists largely of interpretations of the symbology of Egypt, the New Testament and Freemasonry. He reveals the... incarnation which I study with great illumination and an utter sense of reality.

January 1945 proved to be a most wonderful month, including as it did continuation and deepening of teaching; revelation of His name, Office, and relationship to me. With my Master’s consent, I am in His School, training for important future work. Egyptian and Palestinian incarnations were given; decision verbally and inwardly taken and pronounced to be correct; yoga of Kundalini at once given; great sense of added power in my work; description of Philo Judaeus by member of our audience as overshadowing myself.

Sandra to begin typing and arranging teaching, which is wonderfully rich, deep, and full. “Seventy years old” article^{^[76]} finished and dispatched; further instruction to prepare a plan for bringing Theosophy to every class of society.

*****
THE BROTHERHOOD OF LUXOR

... The Brotherhood of Luxor which was directing H.P.B. and H.S.O. must be distinguished from “The Hermetic Brotherhood of Luxor”. This [the latter] was a spurious organization started somewhere about 1883. The papers about it in the Adyar records show that its principal agent in U.S.A. was a certain “M. Theon, Grand Master pro tem of the Exterior Circle”. This person’s real name was Peter Davidson, who, in the secret instructions issued, signs himself “Provincial Grand Master of the Northern Section”…[77]

…the Theosophical Movement in the beginning was under the supervision of certain Adepts and Initiates who belong to that branch of the Great White Brotherhood which is known as the Brotherhood of Luxor....

In the archives of the Theosophical Society is a letter from the Master Tuitit Bey. It is the first one received by Colonel Olcott from the Brotherhood and refers to three of its Adepts:

From the Brotherhood of Luxor, Section the Vth to Henry S. Olcott.

Brother Neophyte, we greet thee.

He who seeks us, finds us. TRY…

Thy noble exertions on behalf of our cause now give us the right of letting thee know who they were:

SERAPIS BEY (Ellora Section)

POLIDORUS ISURENUS^{^[78]} (Section of Solomon)

ROBERT MORE (Section of Zoroaster)

By Order of the Grand.’.

Observatory of Luxor...

TUITTT BEY

The Egyptian Adept who calls Himself Serapis Bey took charge of the direction of affairs, and He gave instructions both to Colonel Olcott and H.P.B... .^{^[79]}

13 February 1945, Tuesday (3:30 a.m.)

(Sleepless, reading the Mahatma Letters)

Master Kuthumi

It is I (Master Kuthumi) “Whose attention has been arrested by your perusal of My letters of the early days and by your thoughts and memories of Me. You do well to make the most of this waiting time to study under Our Egyptian Brother (Master Polidorus Isurenus) “Who is very learned in the Kabbalah and the scriptures of the Jews and of other civilizations. He is a sure and admirable Adept Guide, and you are fortunate to have His assistance; for He will take you far into Our Mysteries and help you greatly in your yoga and your work. Trust Him and He will lead you to great heights. He is free as I am not and has the necessary time to watch over you as you develop. Earnestly study all He gives you and put it instantly into practice, as that is the way to make progress and to earn more teaching.

I want you to make rapid progress after what must have seemed a long delay whilst your karma was working itself out and your nature was being transformed. Not only purity of heart and life but also wisdom in the conduct of affairs born of profound experience are necessary for occult progress and the work that lies ahead of you as indicated by Our Brother.

The next cycle in the life of the T.S. opens very soon, in fact is opening now, and your contact with the Egyptian Section is part of the phenomena connected with it; a rebirth of the early years. Persevere with your studies and your work, keep closely and daily in touch with Him, adhere to your new resolve in thought and deed, and be content to remain in the background apparently unrecognized at...and your progress is assured. For of course. We have watched you all the time and have noted especially the flame of your devotion to Us and to Our work of the Parent Theosophical Society. And now it all begins to bear its own natural fruit, without the necessity of interference, and especially of expenditure of energy by Us. That karma which has hampered you physically has helped you occultly and spiritually. You were patient and so We were saved the necessity of communicating with you, which would have used up valuable energy. For this patience and this devotion, We are grateful, and now these qualities reap their own reward.

You have your own Teacher-Guru as well as your Master, and you have gradually won for yourself your own place in the T.S. The effort has been severe for karma weighed heavily upon you and you were unguided for a long time. But faculty has been developed and knowledge gained. You can now “hear” Us and make your own voice heard as you address your audiences. Go on, then, just as you are and all will be made plain to you and for you in just a little while.

My Brother Morya asks me to tell you that He has recognized you from that day you joined the Theosophical Society in Manchester and made your offering and gave your life to Us. He called you to Him and made a link—the sandalwood box in your “dream” was its symbol—and has kept it ever since; for He wants you in His service later on and foresaw your future usefulness when first you joined.

The Teacher’s art—Second Ray—and your possession of it from the past and by nature brought you to Me in pupilhood. But the leader’s art is the First Ray and linked you with Him, and so you serve Us both and will increasingly do so from now on; for We have learned to trust you in both your steadfastness and your discretion, and Morya adds, “and in your ‘steadiness under fire’.” You were badly “shot at”... and came through well. It was your test as well as your karma and you came well through both. Initiation will come in due course [10 September 1947]...

(Geoffrey: “Is there anything You want done, Master?”)

We want the Theosophical Society to expand in every department Expansion is to be the keynote of the new cycle of 70 years. We want to see Theosophy applied to every human being. Every branch of human activity needs Theosophy as indeed does every human being. Plan, then, and work on to bring Theosophy to mankind as your article said. The Pencil was your work in the world as accredited agent for Us, and the President (G.S. Arundale) knows for he was there.

23 February 1945 (Leaving for Palmerston North on tour of North Island)

Master Polidorus Isurenus

My son, your setting forth upon this tour makes a new page in your Theosophical career; for this time you will carry the influence of the Masters with you in greater measure than ever before. You will also carry Their wisdom and Their power in added measure, for the channels in you are opened wider than heretofore, whilst your own contact with the Masters’ world is closer now than it has ever been in this life. You may take it that you have the goodwill of the Brotherhood behind you and you are quite definitely travelling on its behalf. There are no reservations now and that is a great step forward. Further steps depend upon time and the working out of your own karma in the months that lie ahead. They will not be unhappy months, and your year on the whole, despite some anxieties, promises to be a good one...

I shall continue the flow of teaching as is convenient for us both, and we will take the pictures as media for that teaching. Interpretations stimulate the intuition and offer Me opportunities for conveying many occult truths. By and by these will take literary form in a somewhat useful publication. But the time for that is not yet You must have a far more complete knowledge of your subject than you possess at present, and so write with authority. Meantime, give out as much as you can verbally and perhaps in occasional articles, though even those may be held back for a time.

I want you to practise steadily and daily the meditations I gave you for the purpose of arousing and drawing up the three currents of Fohat, or Kundalini. ..

Keep yourself aloof from the interplay of friction between personalities. You may, without failing the work, decline to discuss such matters, and it is better so since nothing can be done by you for their amelioration, save to teach the Ancient Wisdom and portray to the individuals all that is highest and noblest, which means an impersonal, unselfish attitude towards the Masters’ work. Let that be your note and leave them to work out their own karma, solve their own personal difficulties, assured of your friendly sympathy and interest Detach yourself from the problems of groups, then you will avoid discomfort yet not fail in the work. Go forth in Our name and by Our power, knowing that your wife [Jane] is cared for by Us.

27 February 1945

Teaching continues and technique improves. Can watch picture, receive interpretations, and write simultaneously. Begin to feel that at last I have been granted and have established a foothold in the occult world. Must never relax if it is to be maintained. Must work ceaselessly if it is to be extended; for this is only a beginning. The successful inhabitant of the occult world must be ahamkara-less and ever ready to put duty first, last, and always.

12 March 1945

THE PATH

This morning of my 59th year, I experience a renewed ardent aspiration, which I expressed in thought to the Masters and the Adept Brotherhood: to gather more and more “sheaves” until at last all mankind is on the Path of Swift Unfoldment that leads to Adeptship. I see this as the inner goal, as recognition of Theosophy by all mankind is the outer. So I aspire on this 59th birthday to become a great recruiter to the Ranks of the Brotherhood.

World War II constitutes and has provided a unique opportunity; for the self-assurance of mankind is shattered (cynical); doubt of the future exists in many minds, despite pronouncements by leaders. All are seeking happiness which is secure. The Path is the only way to such happiness. Therefore, one must tell mankind in clearest terms about the Path, draw mankind to the Path. For the Path is the religion of the new World Order.

22 March 1945

Master Polidorus Isurenus, blessed be His name, daily elevates and expands my consciousness and floods my mind with teaching based on Egyptian symbology.

24 March 1945

Next morning I awake in a great calm and the certainty that the future is secure, not that I ever questioned that.

To Master Polidorus Isurenus I say, “Master, I have been trying to reason it all out.” He replies, “The means are Our concern, the self-preparation is yours.” Later, Master in a remarkable communication explains why I am chosen (faculty and its usefulness in Their plans) and answers all my questionings, save the phenomenal means and the reaction of the leaders. These are no business of mine, but I am to receive my instructions at the proper time and according to the circumstances of that time…

*****

Master Polidorus Isurenus

My son, the future progress of humanity is intimately involved in the present progress of certain individuals. Some men and women, by following a certain line of interest (generally, though not always, the occult, though it is so in your case), for several lives, develop qualities and faculties valuable to the whole race and which make them specialists in their own line. Now, specialists are of great value to humanity, and therefore of special significance to Us. We therefore use them as much as their karma, willingness, and capacity permit. In your case, you have specialized in occult philosophy for scores and scores of lives. You have developed siddhis, particularly that of receptivity of mind and brain to superphysical thought currents from both devas and Supermen. Now this makes you a specialist and that is why We are now preparing to make the utmost use of you in the coining years.

The karma which keeps you back from Us is nearly outworn. Your willingness, nay, devoted readiness, has never wavered for thirty years.

Is it then surprising that We choose you for certain special work which We have long had in view? Of course it is not, however strange it might appear to the purely worldly mind and reason. You do right to use that reason, for occultism is common sense, and We hope that you will develop your powers of logic and always use them, especially in all Our affairs entrusted to you. But fully accurate conclusions depend, remember, on full knowledge of all factors involved. You cannot know these, for some of them concern your past lives wherein you both worked extremely hard for Us, or one of Us, and suffered very grievously indeed, horrifyingly, in fact.

These factors are taken into consideration as We are not heartless towards those who serve Us but full of compassion for them and console and heal whenever We can.

Your present life has not been without hardships, physical and occult, and We recognize and desire to heal the resultant wounds, not always fully deserved in this life, though always within your karma. You still suffer, and We come to your side. Then there is the future, both of this life and of the lives to come between your present state and Adeptship, which We wish to help you to attain, ardently aspiring thereto as you are.

It is a very important piece of work which We have planned. It concerns the further deliverance to mankind of another “fragment” of occult truth and the further raising of the comer of the curtain hiding that truth from unprepared mankind. You can help Us in this work because of the faculties and karma developed in your past. Therefore, My son, I have been deputed to inform you of and prepare you for this work, and at the same time to help and console and guide you in your present personal life. That is the “common sense” of it all...

27 March 1945 - Wellington

Full moon of March. Easter Thursday.

I awoke feeling very happy, and during the day gradually remembered having been with M.P.J.^{^[80]} last night. My impressions are of a young man, tall, well-built, in radiant health, strength, and happiness. The sense of freshness, exhilaration, of outer grace, ease, charm, and great friendliness towards me and really wishing for and enjoying my company was marked, whilst within Him was the strength of a coiled spring perfectly controlled. He is youthful, extremely handsome and graceful, wearing a loose white robe. We talked, but I cannot remember the subject, although I think several questions were asked and even some tests made and reported upon.

Other people were within the house where we met; it was white and, believe, pillared. It seemed to be near water... I remember, too, the remarkable brilliance of His aura, particularly about His shoulders and head. Youthful vigour, freshness, and inner serene bliss and great personal friendliness for me are outstanding memories. May I live up to and never forfeit this most highly treasured association with one of the world’s Adepts Who was my old friend Philo Judaeus.

“Creative effort and careful study of experience produce progress on the Path and develop wisdom.”

*****

Master Polidorus Isurenus

The throne of the Pharaohs was one of the stages on the way to Adeptship passed through by many Adepts. It gave access to the Mysteries and unparalleled opportunities for the development of wisdom and the acquisition of faculties through experience. It was a most unique privilege and opportunity and marked the turning point for many Egos.

The Egyptian royalties and aristocracies were thus used by the Authorities to push people along. The Mystery Schools and training were fully available; Adepts and high Initiates were permanently incarnated in Egypt for thousands of years, and the whole great work of training, Initiating, passing, and raising and perfecting went on without interruption throughout all that time. It was one of the planet’s greatest epochs, and because of its value it was maintained for such a very long time. Another such epoch is to be initiated soon when the world settles down after the war, if and when mankind establishes an efficient World Court. The founding of the Parent Theosophical Society and the writing of the first Theosophical books was the first step.

The T.S. is an organization of the greatest significance because it is the instrument fashioned and used by the Masters gradually to reintroduce the occult Wisdom to the world, and pave the way for the re-establishment of the Ancient Mysteries. Far-reaching plans were evolved before and at its founding and all outstanding Theosophical workers are significant agents in their fulfilment. Indeed, all workers who prove of any real value are participating in a tremendous work for the enlightenment and spiritual quickening of man.

The Brotherhood want to hasten the deliverance of humanity from pain-producing, cruelty-produced karma. They want to get the majority of mankind out of the limitations and “evils” of lower Manas into the freedom and “goodness”, and so beneficence, of the higher mind and as quickly and as soon as possible. That is the work of this period. Theosophy is the power and the T.S. the instrument. Happy are those F.T.S.^{^[81]} who perceive this and give themselves to this mighty work; for theirs shall be the great reward.

Show the members all this, and arouse them to fuller and more active, more intelligent, and more selfless participation in the Society’s activities. Fire, intelligently directed zeal, selfless devotion, and untiring effort: these are the qualities which lift an individual up and which, at the same time, ensure the progress of the organization.

To be up and doing both as Egos and as personalities—that is the call to F.T.S. in the post-war world. Happy are they who answer, for opportunity for occult progress and development shall be their reward and the Masters will bestow it upon them.

*****

THE PATH

When once the Path is undertaken, a scientific process of character building is quickly and determinedly entered upon. Every weakness that shows itself is attacked and its opposite strength developed. Every absent quality and faculty is studied and “applied for”. Every applicable item of wisdom is collected and stored. Every experience, both of failure and success, is thoughtfully studied and the causes found. The achievements and teachings of others more advanced are studied, assimilated and memorized.

Every opportunity of turning precept into practice is taken, and so the aspirant gradually grows in knowledge, power, striking power, detachment, serenity, and stability. So he marches cm. As to “personality”, upeksha—absolute indifference—gradually is developed. The whole process of growing into an Adept is as deliberate as horticulture.

25 April 1945 - Wanganui

Here work prospers and teaching continues.

This morning, Master Polidorus Isurenus broke off from interpretation of Egyptian pictures to give a wonderful dissertation upon the Path, stressing the necessity for and describing the condition of utter stillness and purity of mind essential to “new birth”.

*****

THE MASTERS AND THE WORK

After a superphysical experience of meeting Master Morya and receiving directions and some bodes (three, I think) from a lower shelf of His library, and after receiving fee essay on the occult life from Master Polidorus Isurenus, I perceive that the Masters are chiefly concerned with the Centre and far less with the circumference. They know that if They liberate certain forces, give certain impulses from the Centre, effects will be produced in due course at the circumference. So They are Beings of the Centre. We are workers at the circumference.

Our task is to intuit Their decision, pick up Their indications, and work them out as efficiently and perfectly as we can in the world. Sometimes they are wholly misinterpreted and the outworking of the impulses They release is wholly marred. Bad workmanship and faulty intuition spoil the work. The intrusion of “self-personality” is the great spoiler of the Masters’ work. Self-personality keeps a man at the circumference. Impersonality keeps him near the Centre.

2 June 1945

(After a week at Hamilton).

Realize strongly that Reality is the greatest good; maya, the greatest evil for the occult student Absolute reality must be sought and found. There must be neither illusions nor delusions. If successful leadership is to follow, then the facts must be known, as also the Masters’ plans and wishes without possibility of misconception. Until that is gained, action can be faulty.

4 June 1945

CERTAINTY ESSENTIAL

The servant of the Masters needs to possess true knowledge of facts concerning any field in which he is to serve. He must not be in doubt and must be “docile”.

Working on a plan to bring Theosophy to every class of men as instructed. “We want a series of articles in The Theosophist.” [Instruction to Geoffrey from the Master Polidorus Isurenus.]

5 June 1945

MEDITATION—“TAKING SIGHTS”

I perceive that the daily routine of opening consciousness to the Masters is of supreme importance. It corresponds to taking the sights daily at noon, which checks the ship’s position and corrects navigational errors. Navigational errors, in their turn, reveal deficiencies of compass, chronometer, sextant and their manufacturers, also those of charts and log, mistakes of officers and men, and methods of navigation concerned. Thus revealed, these deficiencies can be eliminated and their effects minimized so that a straight, true course can be set

Being human, the aspirant tends continually to get off his course. Meditation consists of “shooting the sun” which is the Monad, checking course set by the owner, the Ego, correcting errors of navigation, i.e., daily life. Daily meditation is as essential to the occultist as daily shooting the sun is to the ship’s captain. It must not be merely formal. It must be actual if it is to help. Navigator must by training and experience attain his technique. So must the occultist. St Paul said, “... work out your own salvation with fear and trembling. For it is God which worketh in you…”^{^[82]}

*****

Master Polidorus Isurenus begins interpretations of Bible from Genesis. Thus, a life work may have been initiated by Him. May absolute accuracy and reality characterize the whole work.

6 June 1945

MAYA

Truth, truth, truth is the God and the goal. Falsehood, delusion, illusion is the devil and the enemy. Truth is the sole objective. Falseness is irrevocably renounced, denounced, abjured forevermore. Reality, reality, reality must-ever be the will and the cry of the occultist. “Give me the REAL.”

MAYA. “Our greatest trouble is to teach pupils not to be befooled by appearances.” (Master Morya in The Mahatma Letters.)^{^[83]}

18 June 1945

Realized man as a funnel with bowl opening from Causal up to infinity. Tube begins at Manas II (constriction and entityship) and passes through the astral to physical. The secret is to be the perfect funnel open to infinity.

19 June 1945 - Belvedere Street, Epsom, Auckland

THE ADEPT

After Master Polidorus Isurenus spoke I realized that the Adept is a unified individual. All the principles from the physical to the Atmic have been brought fully on to the same group of wavelengths. No discordant, foreign vibrations, and therefore qualities, exist anywhere throughout His whole nature. He is totally unified and utterly purified. His entire Being is transparent and translucent to the Light of the Monad. His aura and His consciousness are illumined with and by Monadic Light. He is the Monad in terms of consciousness and in the sense that He is a unit, a single skandha-less individuality, Monad-illumined, Monad-enfired, Monad-empowered.

This, in part, is the secret of Adeptship, namely unification, purification both complete and unchangeable, and Monadic consciousness. This is the impress left upon me by Master Polidorus Isurenus. The line of communication between the Monad and the physical body is fully opened and can nevermore be closed at whatever level the lowest body may be.

20 June 1945

Momentous Day. After a magnificent interpretation of Chapter 4 of Genesis by Master Polidorus Isurenus, and His urging me to greater effort, as C. Jinarajadasa, who had an operation, may decline in activity, and other occult circumstances producing urgency, I saw in a vision the three great Centres and some subcentres of the Great White Brotherhood: Tibet and China, Egypt and the Middle East, and Hungary. From each, radiating lines of power were visible like permanent rockets!

28 June 1945

Realized utter security and surety of Master Polidorus Isurenus whilst receiving. Wrote two poems. Saw vision of sculptor at work in Ancient Egypt, on what I believe was a statue of King Khephren, who I think was Master Polidorus Isurenus. He has bestowed upon me great mental serenity.

3 July 1945

THE PATH

... the path to Occult Sciences has to be trodden laboriously and crossed at the danger of life; that every new step in it leading to the final goal, is surrounded by pit-falls and cruel thorns; that the pilgrim who ventures upon it is made first to confront and conquer the thousand and one furies who keep watch over its adamantine gates and entrance—furies called Doubt, Skepticism, Scorn, Ridicule, Envy and finally Temptation—especially the latter, and that he, who would see beyond had to first destroy this living wall; that he must be possessed of a heart and soul clad in steel, and of an iron, never failing determination and yet be meek and gentle, humble and have shut out from his heart every human passion that leads to evil. (The Mahatma Letters to A. P.Sinnett, Letter LXII.)

“To rise is to immolate oneself. Every summit is cruel.”

6 July 1945

THE ADEPT

Remarkable teaching from Master Polidorus Isurenus on the Sacred Language, Bible, the Jews, and Abraham. Saw Him clearly in His house, a great, serene, victorious Man Who has blended microcosm with Macrocosm—the secret, I begin to believe, of Adeptship. The embodied Lha (after whom Lhassa, Their residence, is called) is:

1. a personality with human traits and human characteristics, however sublime, but maya-free;

2. an Initiated Ego, an immortal, liberated Adept;

3. a Dhyani Buddha of the Macrocosm overshadowing and ultimately united with the Monad-Ego.

*****

PLACATION MAYA

Nearly all leaders and most ordinary people live in a maya about themselves. In order to work successfully under maya-enclosed leaders, one must first discover their particular maya—generally illusions of grandeur and self-importance—and then pander to it, tragic though the admission sounds. The alternative is constant discord, interference with their calm and efficiency and their work, culminating in banishment History demonstrates this amply.

In order to live harmoniously with ordinary people, one must also placate them continually and play up to their sensibilities and tacitly accept their maya. This is very sad, but a very true fact where great work has to be done. To be under these necessities as a worker is very useful training. It forces one to subdue one’s personality, to be free of self-maya, and to be “gentle, humble, and shut out from the heart every human passion that leads to evil”.^{^[84]}

Constant contact with the maya-ridden and constant necessity to placate them indicate that this very lesson has to be learned and self-personality eradicated. Never must the placation be based upon a lie, however much the recipient may be self-deceived. Man is maya-ridden; Adept is maya-free. The aspirant must be conqueror of both maya and mara, essentially one. “Reality” must ever be his cry, his god, his goal. This is the heart of the occult life.

The Tao doctrine and philosophy of NO-THING-NESS is the key.

“The whole personality must dissolve and melt away.”^{^[85]} Ahamkara-maya^{^[86]} is the great barrier to truth and victory.

11 July 1945

After interpretations of the story of Abraham which continue regularly, Master Polidorus Isurenus gave the inner history of the Jews, much of which is not written in the scriptures. Many pages have been excised. They (the Jews) were chosen to be the repositories of occult Wisdom and to deliver it to mankind, hence the occult help given and the succession of Initiates who, as prophets, incarnated in the nation...

26 July 1945

After receipt of teaching from Master Polidorus Isurenus, realize Him again as a youthful Adept in a state of deep inner happiness, living in Egypt...

The arrow is the Ancient Wisdom and the target is the mind of man, and the bull’s-eye is the human heart or intuition. Interpretation of Chapter 22 of Genesis brings forth a reference to the Dhyan Chohanic Self, the “A” to which the Monadic Sojourner on earth is as a “B”.

*****

Second article on “70 years old” appears in June Theosophist.[87] New one on Cycles in the Theosophical Society and future in preparation. Writing humanitarian pamphlets.

Remarkable experience at class. “Saw” all members of audience, about fifty-five, linked to me by a broad beam of golden light connecting their hearts to mine. This I carried up through my head to the Master, trying to take them all to Him. Later He commended the effort and encouraged me to repeat it and serve as a link between Him and the world. Said also that He is undertaking wider Sixth Subrace work in which I could help.

30 July 1945

Further remarkable communications on Sunday night, 10:30 p.m., from Master Kuthumi and Monday morning from Master Polidorus Isurenus, warning of dangers and change coming and of the necessity for skill and care on the Path and in humanitarian crusade which is commended. Conceive of a world “Brotherhood of Life League” with heart for symbol. Master Kuthumi says my life-cycle coincides with a cycle in the life of the T.S. and a harmonious interrelation will occur. “Be as serious as a Sage, as wise as a Judge, and as calm as a captain of a ship should be.”

Interpretation of Genesis continues daily. Chapter 24 very remarkable.

4 August 1945

REALITIES

The realities of my life upon which I can rely utterly because they are independent of events are: 1. The existence of Theosophy and the Theosophical Society. 2. My study and growing knowledge of Theosophy and my membership in the T.S. 3. Humanity sorely needing Theosophy and ready to listen. 4. My accepted position as exponent. Given health, these will not change. Founded upon these as a square base, the pyramid of my life can be erected. Added are: 5. The existence of the Masters Who want to “popularize a knowledge of Theosophy”. 6. Their readiness to use human agents. 7. Their readiness to receive and train potentially useful men and women. These three sides of the pyramid are also secure and independent of events. 8. My acceptance as a disciple^{^[88]} and potentially useful co-worker. This apparently is a secure reality. 9. Contact with B.O.L. [Brotherhood of Luxor],

The past, then, is secure and favourable. The present is favourable despite the suffering of my dear wife Jane. The future is unknown and cannot be relied upon and must not be built upon. The deduction is that can count only for a time upon the continuance of my present privileged position. The stem realities of the situation must ever be held before my mind. The Masters are realists and They will use realists and hard and useful workers. So must I be.

7 August 1945

Addressed 18° Chapter Surya, Auckland. During ceremony, saw circle as base of huge golden cup opening out into the Causal and coincident with series of larger Grails up to Solar System.

11 August 1945

End of the most momentous week in world history. On 6 August 1945 the first atomic bombs were dropped on Hiroshima and Nagasaki in Japan, killing by atomic disintegration 100,000 people and destroying most of the cities. Today brings news of the surrender after Russia had also declared war and attacked in Manchuria. Hirohito’s retention a condition of surrender. Decision not yet announced, but acceptance seems certain and peace at last.

14 August 1945

Above and beyond this world of activity is a realm of still power. Therein the man of action must ever live. From there he must ever act.

News in the paper of the passing of the President [of the Theosophical Society, Dr George Sidney Arundale] on 12 August. A new president must be elected at once.

V.J. Day, 11:00 a.m.:

B.B.C. broadcast by Attlee announcing Japan’s surrender. Peace has returned after six years.

20 August 1945

PAST PERSONALITIES

After interpretation of Chapter 29, vs. 4-7, of Genesis, Master Polidorus Isurenus says that at physical Initiation the powers of past personalities are communicated to the present one. These old selves have not vanished. They are indelibly imprinted upon the Astral Light and can be evoked, studied, and redeemed by the Initiate. Errors cannot be erased, but their agent must be redeemed and they [the errors] karmically “undone” or balanced.

The Adept is in full possession of all the knowledge and the powers of all past personalities who constitute an invisible museum-library at His disposal. Magical evocations are of these imprints in the Astral Light and not of the old personal egos.

The Initiate learns the art, studies his own past, absorbs its desirable qualities, and redeems the undesirable. ‘“The washing away of sins by the blood of the Lamb” is deeply occult The Initiate’s own awakened Buddhi enables him to redeem the past in an occult and mystical sense. Of course, no external Redeemer can perform this task, though the Initiator greatly assists. Christ in this Office of Redeemer, thus viewed, is the Initiator, a symbol of the Hierophant rather than of the Logos.

26 August 1945

MASTER POLIDORUS ISURENUS AND MASTER SERAPIS BEY

After interpretations of Genesis 29, v. 14, et seq. by Master Polidorus Isurenus, have a great expansion of consciousness. Feel myself in touch with the Brotherhood of Luxor and the occult life of Egypt and see... as if ablaze with sun-glory. Then Master Serapis Bey speaks in short sentences with “thee” and “thou” explaining that the first cycle of the T.S. is reincarnating and Their influence coming in again through me.^{^[89]} At night, at public lecture, again feel the Master unifying the audience with Himself, blessed be His holy Name. Am conscious that a closer relationship with Them has been established since the President’s passing. Om Gurudevaya namaha.

28 August 1945

CLARITY OF CONSCIOUSNESS

After clarification by the Master Serapis Bey of relationships with and impressions given to me, perceive that sharpness, keenness, fine responsiveness of consciousness is the ideal to be aimed at Wrong attitudes, mental obscurities, and over-personalization of thought and truths learned from study, all bedull this sharp keenness and refinement of conjoined Manas I and II. Every erroneous concept and conclusion retained in the mind serves to blunt the mental perceptions, to becloud the clarity of mental vision and to reduce the capacity for intelligence and understanding. Clear thinking, utterly impersonal and strictly logical; complete thinking right through to correctly formed conclusions—this is the functional basis essential to the development of prescience, implicit insight into first truth, wisdom. One big factor is the absolute detachment of the self from the thought processes and concepts and their applications.

The aspirant must be ever keenly on guard against the slightest falseness of thought, wrongness of deduction, and error in conclusion. His mind must harbour no mental “mud”, must be clear, perfectly translucent to truth. Deliberate lies befoul the mind. Unconscious error clouds the mind. Self-personality renders perception of impersonal, exact truth impossible. From now on, crystal clear thought, mind, consciousness, utterance, and writing must be the goal. Lucidity like that of C.W. Leadbeater is one of the fruits of clarity of mind.

Truthful thinking and speaking are the most important because an untruth spoken is reflected in the mind as capacity for error which can betray the reason. A lie told produces a corresponding weakness in the mind-brain, makes the latter subject to error, maya, erroneous deduction. Karma adds to this.

1 September 1945

C. Jinarajadasa has accepted nomination for the office of President of the Theosophical Society. Master Polidorus Isurenus dictates article for The Theosophist on Spiritual Dynasties.^{^[90]} Bible interpretations continue (Jacob’s story). Address Howard League for Penal Reform.

8 September 1945

Very busy last month in Auckland with much animal welfare work added to Theosophical lectures. Theosophical Order of Service and New Zealand Vegetarian Society pamphlets written and published, reports and plans for the future. Chaired World Week for Animals campaign again with widespread plans.

Awoke full of light and energy this morning, aura flashing with royal blue and the knowledge of having been with the Great Ones. Praise be to Them and profoundest homage.

*****

Maya-fret, I will to be,

Maya-proof, detached, aloof,

Undeceived and so believed,

Open-eyed, tested, tried,

With delusion gone and wisdom won,

Healer, sage, pledged to wage

Warfare stark ‘gainst powers dark,

And with all my might to bring the Light

To my fellow man.

29 September 1945

Invitation from Auckland Lodge, No. 407,^{^[91]} to Honorary Degree of I.M.^{^[92]} Accept. “Gratitude to Thee, O.V.M.O.T.W. for further honours and opportunity to serve under Thee. May I ever grow in capacity, character, and worthiness.”

Instruction from Master Polidorus Isurenus that They want intensification of campaign for humaneness and World Federation of Animal Welfare Societies that do not compromise.

30 September 1945

Realize that to persuade, uplift, and illumine mankind, one must not forget or neglect the fact that a great many people hold cherished beliefs, inherited for the most part rather than thought out and experienced. In presenting the real truth, one must not irreverently or with seeming casualness affront the sensibilities of one’s audiences. Conviction inevitably influences manner, method of presentation; ardent aspiration to save and to heal gives fire and zeal to one’s work, yet one must not become dogmatic or appear oversure that one is so completely right. Theosophy is an offering, a very precious gift of gold, frankincense, and myrrh which the Masters lay at the feet, not force into the hands, of the dawning intuition of modern man. So the teacher must ever offer for consideration, and never seem dogmatically to insist upon Theosophical truths.

2 October 1945

I find my ideals and objectives gradually becoming unified into one single purpose: to prevent and to relieve suffering on earth. Success demands the prevention of cruelty and this now becomes my supreme objective; for all suffering is the result of either cruelty or bodily abuse and neglect. A Royal Society for the Prevention of Cruelty must come into existence under the Patronage of and deriving its title from THE KING.

13 October 1945

KILL OUT SELF

The task demanding the closest attention, the greatest and most continuous effort is that of the destruction of ahamkara (egotism). Hour by hour, day by day, the would-be Adept must kill out self, destroy illusion, ignore and refuse the satisfactions and renounce the rewards of separated selfhood. Beside this continual self-immolation, all other discipline of the occult life is easy and straightforward. For each achievement, each selfless, impersonal thought, motive, and action can increase self-personality by reason of the sense of personal attainment and success which it produces. The worm of self renews and rebuilds itself continually, despite the cutting off of its tail. The “head” must be destroyed.

*****

THE CURE OF PAIN

The surest way to prevent human suffering is to stop human cruelty which is its cause. Cruelty comes from lust and ignorance. Teach and inspire to self-purification and give wisdom and knowledge: these the sovereign remedies for all human suffering. The lust is twofold: sadistic satisfaction and desire to dominate. This double lust must be extirpated and replaced by pure love from which springs aspiration to heal and serve and to self-free liberation.

*****

STEPS TO YOGA

Sense of the One (physical), instinctual perception of the One (astral), conviction of existence of the One (Mental 2), Knowledge of the One (Mental 1), Union with the One (Buddhi), Identity with the One (Atma)—these are the steps to yoga.

*****

THE ONE LIFE

The Beloved is the One Life, loved in all because the essence of the Self. This One Life need not be personalized to be loved. It must not be personalized to be known. It is the vital essential “Being” of all creation. When the Self is identified with the One Life, it is free of the universe; it is universalized. ‘

16 October 1945

Human strife is now rampant in the world. In Palestine, Jew faces Arab. In Java, Indonesians face Dutch. In Australia, a quarter of a million workers are on strike. In England, tens of thousands of dock workers hold up supplies of sorely-needed food. America announces her determination to keep atomic bomb secret to herself. Millions of refugees roam central Europe, homeless and foodless. Epidemics are feared. Laval was shot. Quisling condemned to death. Russia, through Molotov, rendered Conference of Secretaries of State almost abortive. Stalin’s health is declining. Thus mankind travails.

*****

THE PATH

Rapid progress on the Path demands an attitude of mind of controlled urgency, as if an international emergency existed and must be dealt with at once. Actually, such an emergency does exist, if only on account of the inconceivable cruelty practised continually and the appalling suffering constantly endured by animals and men. Monadic-Egoic pressure upon the personality must be maintained, realized, accepted, and applied by the physical man. Intensity of effort is the key to rapid progress. Wisdom in its application ensures success. The aspirant to Adeptship must live with extreme care mentally, emotionally, verbally, and in conduct.

*****

NEW POWER

Conscious of a marked inner, change. A new level and height, not of consciousness so much, but of power. An intense, fiery power from within and above is now available at the level of the mind. It gives stability, ability, and a sense of mastery over weaknesses. It is a power that can be turned on to give intensity of will, to change an undesired trend of thought and feeling. I realize that Manas II, astral, brain, and body need not, nay must not, stiffen up to this power, but rather become fully relaxed and let it play; that is the true technique—Ego intense and personality at ease.

17 October 1945

The “new” inward power is the Immortal Principle. It is the Atma or its shakti, of which I begin dimly to become aware and which, like an Avatara, is descending upon and into the Ego and through that, faintly to influence and be known by the personal ego in the brain. This is but a beginning. Yoga, constantly practised, will bring the “seed” to the “flower”. This experience, in its new definiteness and persistence, is the harbinger and promise of conscious immortality.

To attain, one must be free of delusions, particularly that of a personal God ruling and saving man and of any vicariousness which suggests the abrogation of karma. One must also keep on with mounting intensity of determination and effort. Burning-glass intensity is the secret of success. As to the source of this new experience, it may be the effect of years of attempted yoga and especially of the daily effort to communicate and experience communicating with Master Polidorus Isurenus. Also it may be largely due to Their assistance in response to daily dedication, invocation, and teaching. Apparently, the Atma can enfire and so hasten development of every principle, especially the physical cerebro-spinal system and Manas. Carried sufficiently far this could bring physical knowledge. It is clear to me that the Initiate leaders of the Theosophical Society had their inner power greatly aroused. This Atmic fire is to the individual what atomic energy is to Nature.

28 October 1945 (6:35 a.m.)

The Master is a Father to the disciple. The devotion which He evokes is that of a loving son who deeply reveres his Father. The Master is realized in all the highest aspects of Fatherhood perfectly portrayed and meeting the disciple’s every need and summing up all his highest ideals.

17 November 1945 (10:20 p.m.)

Momentous date. Seventieth birthday of the T.S. This evening, 70 years ago, They founded the Society. An old age is now ended and a new age begins. May I have some place, however small, in this new age. Held members’ meeting at new Dunedin Lodge premises, gave some of the events which have occurred and recurred in seventh and tenth years, and tried to show significance of the day and hour. Closing meditation dedicated the new era of the Lodge and the new premises to the Masters.

Feel a great inflow of stimulating, almost exalting, life. Blessed forever be They Who gave us the Wisdom and the T.S. Honoured forever be H.P.B. and H.S.O. who endured that we might “live”. All honour to them and those valiant and wise ones who followed after and brought the ship safely through. How blessed are we who inherit and reap from this sowing! Onward must we go in our tum with wisdom and zeal to labour for and in the same great Cause.

8 December 1945

This evening I was installed by... Miss N.E. Ockenden, in the Chair of K…S…[93] in Auckland Lodge, No. 407, in the Orient of N.Z. It has been quite the happiest experience of my life of this kind. The ceremony and the response to the invocations so impressively uttered by N.E.O. and the marked sense of attention of Masters Kuthumi, Rakoczy, and Polidorus Isurenus, exalted me spiritually. Yet there was a complete absence of the slightest strain. I felt it was an entrance into the Degree and state corresponding in some way, however small and microscopically, with the Office of Solar Logos.

The colour is gold and the light and power are of the Sun, and majesty is the quality; so it seemed to me. It is the true Degree of the Master Builder and Ruler of a Solar System as the w..g t..s[94] clearly indicate, especially the p..b and also the p..n. I found that I knew one of the p..l s..ns, though I do not as yet know its significance. There would seem to be a glorious golden Solar Deva attached to the Office, somewhat like one pictured in the Tarot Trump Major...The brethren were one and all extraordinarily generous and affectionate and I feel a wonderful family relationship with them all. Verily, I am part of the Brotherhood which is part of The Brotherhood (The Great White Brotherhood of Adepts).

Master Polidorus Isurenus came (5 December) to tell me that I am to be known best as an author, and will be given opportunity to write: “We may take you off the platform for a time . . .” 1946, a favourable and occult year and the last of the years of this cycle with quiet progress as its keynote. “What is the will of the Masters” is the best of every activity.

January 1946

Very successful 49th Convention of the T.S. in N.Z. with conferences of the Vegetarian Society and the Theosophical Order of Service, and the note of compassion and humanitarianism with the major note of The Will to World Unity as suggested by Them [the Masters],

1 January 1946

An Adept

MESSENGER OF LIGHT

My brother, on this New Year’s Day I greet you and yours and give you Our Blessing from the Luxor Sanctuary. You have laboured devotedly and well for Us and Our Cause, sacred to Us, and We are not unmindful of this fact We are watching over you and yours and you are, and will be, in Our care. Fear not for your future or the days immediately ahead, for all is well with you karmically and you have forged bonds of unbreakable steel with Us and Our Brotherhood... All your present activities are as training for a new life which awaits you later on. Meantime, be steadfast in your inner yoga...and travel this country as Our messenger of Light. Then We can bless it and its people more abundantly. Your warning to mankind is needed, and you must sound it again but may frame it in a reference to the development of Buddhic consciousness and its results now occurring and so strike a spiritual note at the end. Our blessings upon you, My dear son, and upon your devoted life.

(From the Brotherhood of Luxor)

3 January 1946

Instructed to complete and send to The Theosophist articles applying Theosophy to every department of life, to follow quickly on Cycles in the Theosophical Society already submitted.

21 January 1946

THEOSOPHY AND THE MIND OF MODERN MAN

Awoke at 6:00 a.m. with mind powerfully stimulated and face and eyes of Master Morya impressed upon it. Ideas present are: Theosophy is a compound made up of a number of extremely dynamic ideas. These are cosmogonic, of solar, terrestrial, human genesis; graphic, as cosmography and of solar systems, planets, men; dynamic, describing emergence, evolution, and return of cosmoi, solar systems, planets, and men; legal, enunciating the laws governing the creation, evolution, and perfecting of the above. As the school boy arrives at geographical knowledge from books, maps, photographs, and moving pictures, but must visit the place studied for full knowledge, so the student of Theosophy must contact, apprehend, comprehend, apply practically, and finally experience its component ideas, in order to become a gnostic. He passes through successive stages of Theosophical study. These are discovery, examination, test by reason and application to life, and finally direct experience. The last is the most prized, and the student is ever advised to seek that inner perception and individual experience and comprehension by which alone the acid test of the reality or otherwise of ideas may be applied.

As I write this, it seems both obvious and ponderous, but these are the thoughts filling my mind. They are for use in the articles upon which I am at work on the application of Theosophy to every aspect of human life. Intellectual lucidity, mental power, clarity and penetration, capacity for perfect logic, and instant detection of unreason and untruth—these are, the mental objectives for which I now strive, as also is the sublime wisdom which is their product.

26 January 1946

Writing at Adeptic direction the articles applying Theosophy to every department of human life. The one on education closed with “Let the Inner Self shine forth.” This should be the motto and maxim of every educational institution.

4 February 1946 - Vasanta House, 18 Belvedere Street, Epsom, Auckland

First meeting in “Vasanta” of Sun Ritual Group based on Chapter IX of The Angelic Hosts. Thirty present.

6 February 1946

When free to do so, I will force my life to be a perfect channel for the work of the Masters. Habits, sleep, diet, hours, will be co-ordinated and subordinated to that single end—the maximum amount and maximum efficiency in Their service. The world is mine oyster. Adeptship is the pearl within.

9 February 1946

Master Polidorus Isurenus interpreting Genesis 37, v. 2, gives the Macrocosmic interpretation of the elder brothers of Joseph as Asuras, and their plot as the real Plan or statement of Law numerical and cyclical, of the process of incarnation, Macrocosmic and microcosmic. This is the Great Plan, the writing on the palette of Tehuti and on the wall before King Nebuchadnezzar of the Medes and the Persians, i.e., unalterable.

17 February 1946

Adyar Day, when the Theosophical Society commemorates the passing of its first President, Col. Henry Steel Olcott, and also Brother Raja’s assumption of office as its current President—one of the very highest on earth. May all blessings be upon him, our great brother and leader. His health is reported to be much improved. Cabled. Miss Hunt and I spoke at Sunday public lecture tonight, she on Adyar and I on “Theosophy, the Heart of World Religions”, celebrating Adyar Day.

Last night, at Miss Blanche Trevithick’s, 96 Owens Road, attended my first P.M.^{^[95]} meeting to receive Auckland’s gift of the P.M. Jewel, beautifully engraved. Miss Nettie Ockenden, Mr G. Trevithick, and Miss G.M. Hemus spoke favourably of my contributions—far too generously.

I gave thanks not only for the Degree and Jewel, but also for all the loving kindness and family adoption received in New Zealand.

12 March 1946

My sixtieth birthday. Letters and presents. A pouring wet morning, and I in the hut at 11 Grosvenor Terrace, Wellington. Master Polidorus Isurenus has completed interpretations of Genesis, and apparently Exodus is to follow. But He is graciously dictating The Kingdom of the Gods (new version) giving the Sephirothal origin of the universe and devas. It proves to be Alexandrian Platonism expressed in some Kabbalistic terms. At present, He has reached the Fifth Sephira, the mental artist-craftsman.

Last night I began a new Theosophical activity—a class of Theosophical Lecturers’ Association members. Addressed them on public speaking and heard two and commented. Am writing a Theosophical Lecturer’s Handbook, having finished booklets on Principles Governing Happiness in Marriage for the Theosophical Women’s Association, and The Path To the Masters of the Wisdom which I shall offer as a Jubilee Convention souvenir (N.Z.)...

*****

PAST LIVES

Master Polidorus Isurenus gives me information on some past lives. In order backwards, they are: England, 17th century, ending tragically in middle age; India, 10th century, as a doctor, Rome and then the Jewish life when we met. He (Master Polidorus Isurenus as Philo Judaeus in that life) and Aristobulus were my friends. He was an obscure Alexandrian writer and philosopher. Aristobulus was son of Alexander Janneus, said to be reigning at the time (true) of Jesus and a prince of Judea! Remarkable, as I knew naught of Aristobulus save his name. Yet dates are right...

*****

Master Polidorus Isurenus

ON THE OCCASION OF GEOFFREY HODSON’S SIXTIETH BIRTHDAY

You came down to earth sixty years ago today. You came to earth with a mission to teach humanity and an impulse to inquire into Truth. You were born from the temples of Chaldea, Egypt, Greece, and destined to pick up the threads, skandhas, and knowledge of those temple lives. The intermediate appearances in Rome, India, and England were less occult than temporal, though a thread of occultism ran through them.

But the last temple life was the Jewish one of the first century, when we met. Your Mother Egypt received you then in your last days and gave you her peace, received you into the Sanctuary and laid you to rest... Aristobulus was your friend and re-Initiated you in your old age. Worldly life then tested and strengthened you. Rome gave you stability, India metaphysical faculty, for you were a doctor there of the Ayurvedic law, studied herbs and minerals in both their occult and their physical properties, but lived out in the world, save for a learned guru. This was in the tenth century, and followed after a long devachan. Then came the English life in Tudor times as a landed gentleman, which ended tragically in middle age. That death paid many karmic debts, and cleared the way for this most fruitful life in which the wheel turns full circle and you are back in occultism again. The Path is straight before you now and you are back “Home”.

2 May 1946

AHAMKARA

Realize that there is an egoism in thinking that one is not egotistic. One must beware of this which might be called the supreme ahamkara or egotism. “I have transcended egoism” can be egoistic and a maya. No-thing-ness is hard to achieve. Better to say, “I am in the process of transcending ahamkara.” The experience of two nights ago of being with the Master Rakoczy at His Temple remains vivid and has produced an additional sense of occult power and will.

7 May 1946

Finish statement, “The Extreme Urgency of the Humanitarian Cause”; am considering printing and despatch to all Humanitarian Societies and magazines. It makes a “new” approach through cosmic law of cause and effect under which health and happiness of humanity are at stake.

*****

THE POWER OF FOHAT

The experience with Master Rakoczy remains fully vivid. The scene is indelibly imprinted in my mind... Realize that cosmic Fohat is source of all power. The Adept is one therewith and those of First and Seventh Rays especially wield that power through ahamkara-less identification therewith. It is a white, cold fire which plays like continuous lightning in and through and around those who can tap and wield its potency, outlining their forms and “tools” in dazzling whiteness. His face is fully before me, not as in a portrait but as it appears while officiating as Fohat-empowered Hierophant—a wondrous “vision” indeed of overmastering, ever triumphant power directed by a Master-mind at overwhelming intensity of concentration.

*****

THE LISTENER

Out of the body last night, I addressed a great multitude of all ages and both sexes crowding around me and stretching out of sight. Amongst a sheaf of written questions was: “Who is the listener?” I answered, “The Logos, ever listening to the echo from the universe produced by His creative voice and directing the creative ‘sound’ accordingly—like sonic radar.” The Monad of man is similarly “listening” to the chord, variations, harmonies, and discords by which it is aware of Ego-personality when in incarnation and directs its influence accordingly. Periods of exceptional harmony evoke Monadic power which produces genius and quickens evolution. The Ego similarly listens to personality, but also to the Monad and, when able, to the Logos. The personality which, for a long time, listens to the world without, and hears only its appeal and responds thereto, gradually learns to listen more and more to the Ego, then to the Monad (Atman), and eventually to Logos (Paramatman). This is the true Mantra Yoga: to listen for, hear, and eventually relay perfectly at all levels—especially the physical—the Divine Voice, cf. “Elijah and the Still Small Voice” and ceremonial conversations which ritually enact the above intercommunication from O.G.[96] (physical) to R.W.M. (Atma) and I.P.M. (Logos).

Speech is of immense importance and must be controlled and perfected. Master speech and perfect voice, and the goal is won.

13 May 1946

The experience with Master Rakoczy still lives vividly and I am conscious of added Fohatic power. Realized at lunch with Rotarians that He is concerned with the man of the world in a way that perhaps my Master is not. There was a flash of His blue and power during the lunch.

4 June 1946

Life and work in Auckland resumed. Receipt of teaching on Exodus continued. Realize that the Adept abides in a state of cool stillness as far as the “human” bodily personality is concerned, and of intense Atmic power at levels above. The house in which Master Polidorus Isurenus lives is steeped in silence. All is ordered to perfection. The machinery of life is perfectly designed and runs with complete smoothness and “noiseless ease”. The art of life is practised with consummate skill, even genius.

Attendance at 18° Suiya Chapter 33, re-evokes the experience and power of the meeting with Master Rakoczy. Am informed that I knew Bacon and was received by Him into His “Rosy Cross” temple at Gorhambury, making a close link with Him. Later told that I was a Flavian at the declining period of the Roman Empire and, as a seeress, travelled with my husband through Italy and south of France. The Constantines were members of gens Flavia. I was a Roman matron.

2 July 1946

Returned from Hamilton after thirty-three meetings in three weeks!

4 July 1946

THE COSMIC ATTRIBUTES OF ADEPTSHIP

After receiving from Master Polidorus Isurenus interpretation of verse of the 8th Chapter of Exodus, I realized that the Adept possesses cosmic attributes. Adept consciousness has extensions beyond any limitations which the word “Monad” might seem to imply, even into the universe as a whole! Subplane by subplane, He ascends and also enters into the cosmic planes, unifies Himself with them and draws on their power. This is the secret of Adept theurgical power or technical omnipotence, as well as of His omniscience and omnipresence. These are derived from superterrestrial and later supersolar levels. Universalization of consciousness is the work of the Adept and therefore is the ideal for which to strive.

The Adept still has individuality and even personality, but suffers no limitations in consequence. “Liberation” most perfectly describes Adept attainment. Even though a body is used and imposes its restrictions, Adept consciousness is both free in itself and capable of reducing those restrictions to a minimum. The Adept is completely master of His instruments and of the technique of their employment for all possible purposes. I became aware, however faintly, of the cosmic attributes and liberated state of Master Polidorus Isurenus.

13 July—2 August 1946

The article, “The Extreme Urgency of the Humanitarian Cause” being sent out to 80 societies. Concentrating on literary work, especially “The Humanitarian Cause” and “The Case for the Abolition of Vivisection”. Horrified by descriptions of the practice and deeply determined to attack it continually, skilfully, and powerfully. It must stop, if only from a karmic point of view [great karmic suffering and adversity in future lives].

20 August 1946

New Zealand Vegetarian Society entered its fourth year on July 31st, with 458 members, a growth of 69 in the third year. Re-elected President, with Sandra and Miss Finnis as Vice-Presidents. Finances sound. Second Dominion Conference of the N.Z.V.S. to be held at Golden Jubilee Convention of the Theosophical Society in New Zealand. Antivivisection and Theosophical Order of Service pamphlets now going through the press. Two vegetarian pamphlets reprinted, and a third on diet commissioned.

Urged by Master Polidorus Isurenus to concentrate on literature—my “passport to the physical Sanctuary and Sanctum Sanctorum”. Master Polidorus Isurenus’s interpretations continue almost daily, the ten plagues now being described. They relate allegorically the evolution of the principles of man and cosmos.

28 August 1946

THE EGOIC NAME

Remarkable midnight communication from Master. Was reading Five Years of Theosophy and perceived the value of personal knowledge born of direct perception awakened and directed by a Master physically within the Mysteries. When this has occurred the Ego will be freed and revealed to the fully conscious personal self in its real Egoic nature, whether deva or man. At the appointed time the Master will call the disciple. Then the mystery of his own nature and Egoic Name will be revealed.^{^[97]} It is the only mystery there is, for the “Lost Word” for each one is simply one’s own name. Karma patiently endured brings insight and opportunity.

I broadcast a statement by Master Polidorus Isurenus on economics.

13 October 1946

Whilst Celebrating at Dunedin, I experienced a sense, however partially, of All-One-ness. It began to dawn at the Gloria and deepened up to by Him were all things made. By then I was exalted into an experience of universality of consciousness. I cannot describe it in its reality. Transference to normal terms normalizes it, and it was for me completely new and so “abnormal”. There was at the Causal level light, freedom, stillness, expansion, and all without strain. There was also the sense of tremendous power, the limits of which could be neither perceived nor conceived. Some of this came “down” into the personality. The physical body which was fatigued by the strain of the Christchurch visit was empowered, and the service was conducted with a sense of ease.

28 October 1946

THE LORD VAIVASVATA MANU

Four nights ago, out of the body, I was present when the Lord Vaivasvata Manu^{^[98]} appeared in His physical form. He was tall, even amongst the tall “men” with whom He moved, possibly six feet ten inches. I waited and He came. He was dressed in a long dark coat such as Parsees wear. The portrait is like Him except that His hair seemed shorter and smoother. I happened to perceive most His aspect of power which, in absolute ease, was immense, though not exerted. The shoulders were broad and the chest very large, giving a tapering effect to the figure. He seemed like a Lord of the Earth as He appeared and walked on out of my sight. I saw Him only for a minute and early in the night. Even so, I awoke with the knowledge that the Lord Manu came. I was perhaps twelve feet away and merely “among those present”—a very lofty privilege and possibly a portent, the significance of which is not yet apparent

When seeing the physical form of the Lord Vaivasvata Manu, it is interesting that whilst so doing one perceives only an exceedingly lofty Adept “Personality”! Seeing His magnificent First Ray, Atmic-Will-inspired form, I was not aware of His equally developed interior Will-Wisdom-Love aspect, which is at one with the Solar Logos, and which is immediately perceived in the case of the Lord Maitreya at the Consecration of the Holy Eucharist Focusing full attention on the mighty power personality, one misses the Manu-Ninani. [99] When the outer form is not seen, the Inner Lord of Will-Love is glimpsed.

Dunedin, New Zealand, work in third week. Teaching received from Master Polidorus Isurenus on Plagues IX and X. After teaching had ceased, the impression was left that Moses—the person not the symbol or, rather, the real author of the Pentateuch—was a Hierophant of the Mysteries who used the wandering of the Jews as a basis for revelation, as a later Adept similarly inspired the Evangelists to use the story of Jesus. The actual writing in both cases was done by a number of Initiates who were given the idea, general plan, range of revelation, and symbols to be employed. The Idyll of the White Lotus by Mabel Collins is another example of this method, used, however, by a single Adept, the Master Iamblichus-Hilarion.

7 November 1946

At lecture on meditation, I distinctly felt the overshadowing Presence of the Master. The ideas did not change so much as the force with which they were stated. I could feel the exertion of mental energy to drive them into the minds of the audience. It was a mental ministration. In addition to my head centres and mental body being used for that purpose, my heart was opened and an attractive influence drew all the people into it as if into the Master’s heart which was one with mine. These two processes went on together during part of the lecture. I felt fully aware of the Master’s attention—and, as it were, Presence—using me in this way and was able to note and register it without its affecting the flow of my ideas and language.

The urgent need for regular meditation by everyone was especially stressed, and the appeal was closed with the word “begin”. Blessed is He. Privileged am I. A somewhat similar event occurred during an address to members on the preceding night. Descending, awakening power was its characteristic.

9 November 1946

ADEPT MINISTRATIONS

After receiving teaching on cycles, in interpretation of verse 13, Chapter 12, Exodus, I found myself offering the gratitude of humanity to Him (Master Polidorus Isurenus) for this revelation. As I did this, the debt owed by humanity to the Elder Brethren was perceived in part. Throughout innumerable ages, without intermission, They have ministered unto mankind spiritually, mentally, and physically. Their very existence on the planet is as a leaven which leaveneth the whole. Would that humanity could realize and more consciously respond to the Presence and influence of earth’s Adepts! Luxor and Master Polidorus Isurenus seem very near this morning, praise be! Humanity ought to live mentally upon its knees. The pupil must ever do so.

13 November 1946

An hour and a half of reception of teaching of transcendent beauty and wisdom in interpretation of the tenth plague and especially of Exodus 12, v. 15. Adeptship and omnipresence are described unforgettably, despite continuous barking of two dogs and the voices of children in the house. Thanks be to Thee, O Master, Teacher, and Friend.

19 November 1946

Return by air to Auckland and very happy resettling into my room.

24 November 1946

Wonderful experience for two nights of being with Master Morya; of being shown His Manu-line and invited to serve thereon under Him.

RECOLLECTION OF BEING SHOWN THE SCROLL BY MASTER MORYA

This morning I awoke remembering clearly being out of the body and with the revered Master Morya in the room of His house from which the small balcony projects. A long table occupied the centre, and from another room on the left side, looking out of the window, He brought a large roll or scroll. This He laid on the table, partially unrolled, and at a certain place indicated in the series of recorded events upon the scroll the literary collaboration of H.P. Blavatsky with Himself, Master Kuthumi, and other Adepts. To my surprise—almost unbelieving astonishment—He showed that it was written further along, or down the years, that I also would similarly serve. I remembered His tall stature, His kind friendliness, and the view from the balcony of the wide river flowing down the Masters’ Valley, exactly as in the picture by the Master Djwal Kul.[100]

As I considered this recollection and relived the wonderful experience, I realized that a prophecy by an Adept must be a true one. Nevertheless—quite naturally in my present condition and mode of life—I was unable to think of myself in such a lofty capacity.

The Master Morya unrolled the scroll into the past, as it were. I saw names of great historical figures—Julius Caesar, for example, and others earlier in time whose names I failed to remember. I was deeply impressed by the marked further impression that, in some mysterious way, the scroll was not only a historical table of events, but metaphysically “alive” and linked with each recorded event, person, and Personage. Past, present, and that which is normally known as future, were in some mysterious way merged so that my name appeared upon it related to events unknown to me and to take place in the future.

26 January 1947

Golden Jubilee Convention of the Theosophical Society in New Zealand has come and gone. It has been an unqualified success. Mr Sri Ram produced a profound impression by his inner stillness, impersonality, and freedom from unessentials, or simplicity. His every utterance, to members and to public, was distinguished and inspiring. Concert Chamber of Town Hall was well filled (about 700) for the two lectures. Wellington, Christchurch, and Dunedin were visited, and Section should step into the second fifty years greatly inspired and stimulated. I felt honoured to have been present and especially so to be very kindly treated by Sri Ram. I recorded all meetings and speeches at request of the General Secretary.

6 March 1947

A motto occurs to me: Veritas, et nihil sed veritas.[101] This is indeed an impelling and insistent urge: never to be self-deceived, to be undeceivable and so never to deceive. Adherence to the truth as far as I know it is surely the first essential. My prayer constantly is that amidst all the inner experiences and preparations now occurring, I should be helped and guarded as far as may be from self-deceit. Faith, meaning intuition, must be fiery, like that of the Syrophoenician woman of Matthew 15:21-28.

26 March 1947

Awoke with the vivid memory of being with the Master Polidorus Isurenus in one of the Ancient Egyptian Temples, like Karnak, of passing between great pillars and then turning to the right into a secret passage and crypt—but no more. This evening, someone was deputed to awaken my memory of the event, and I relived the whole wonderful experience. After bowing to the Chair—an ancient throne -1 turned with Him to the south wall which grew light and then before me passed a great pageant of Egyptian life from the Eighteenth Dynasty onwards to Cleopatra, and when the daricness fell... I believe I greatly loved and tried to serve the land of Khem.

28 March 1947

Perceive at least one clear purpose and reason in the forewarnings of the last two years, viz. to prevent me from making any engagements. Apparently a fifth sudden, dynamic change is to follow the four that have already occurred: 1. Enforced leaving of school (loss of family fortune) and entry into business life at the age of about fifteen years; 2. World War I and joining the Army in October 1914; 3. Call from Preston to London in 1923; 4. Call to U.S.A. and lecturing in 1929. The nature of the work to be done cannot yet be conceived. Presumably it will be another attempt to bring the Ancient Wisdom to the attention of modern man and possibly again with the aid of some form of supernormal illustration.

20 April 1947

Adeptic utterance: “As long as there is a continued supply of E.S. members [the Esoteric School, closely allied with but administratively separate from the Theosophical Society] We are satisfied.” The E.S. is indeed the heart of the work.

23 April 1947

TRUTH, REALITY, STABILITY

Realize that the occultist must not permit himself to be disturbed by the events of his daily life, the ups and downs of human existence. His inner life must continue serenely and in unbroken progress and unfoldment His work must be maintained at an ever higher level, and nothing which occurs to his personality must have power to hinder his performance of all his duties. Meditation, study, writing, preparing and delivering lectures, and other work must, in my case, go on in unbroken and unbreakable continuation whatever happens in my personal life^{^[102]} and all around me. This is STABILITY and it must be developed and maintained.

The daily receipt of teaching from Master Polidorus Isurenus is of the greatest possible benefit in this connection, and I am greatly privileged in this most wonderful association. I have now reached Exodus 18, v. 13 (Judgement Days). Blessed be His name. “Truth, truth, truth” is the insistent demand of my mind, and “Reality” the absolute necessity. Truth and Reality are the right and left hand pillars of my arch. Only when they are conjoined can there be true stability. The outer man is being tested in this long interregnum. Intuition says, “Hold on; the future is assured,” and events support the assurance.

27 April 1947

Last night delivered the last of seven lectures on “The Soul of Man in the Modern World”. Five of these consisted of material dictated by the Master Polidorus Isurenus and also sent to The Theosophist. One, “The Artist”, has been published thus far. The study was undertaken upon instructions from the Masters.

Am increasingly moved by a “passion” for truth and truth-ness. Especially in all inspirational and superphysical experiences and deductions made from them, and actions based on them, there must be complete truth-ness, utterly free from self-deception. Veritas, veritas et nihil sed veritas becomes my motto. From the unreal lead me to the Real, O Teachers of the Race.

3 June 1947

Returned from Gisborne, Rotorua, Tauranga, where a lodge was formed 1st June 1947. At Tauranga, realized future and so the reason for all events from vision at admission to the T.S., through sandalwood box, Pencil, footprints, and chart and L plans. All are preparatory and so justified. The intellect is satisfied.

Exodus 30 being wonderfully interpreted as the Third Initiation.

I realized the need for: Stability immovable, by Atma; Profundity immeasurable, by Paramatma; Power irresistible, by Atma-Paramatma; Gentleness, warmth, humanity, by Buddhi. (Later; This was the result of nativity.)

20 June 1947

Master Polidorus Isurenus reveals the reason for and nature of the validity of Rites. The human kingdom is the first on the upward arc in which life becomes conscious of and aspires towards its Source. This aspiration is natural as evinced in the plant, which points its blossoms to the sun. So man, approaching the florescent state, and afterwards in aspiring thought, points the chalice of his Higher Self towards his Maker. The human kingdom, therefore, is the one in which the subhuman is elevated, offered to God.

When, therefore, a single man, the officiant, takes bread, elevates it and offers it unto the Lord, he is performing ceremonially and symbolically that which the human kingdom as a whole actually achieves and performs on behalf of evolving life. Ceremonial is valid when accepted by both Superhuman and Archangelic Ministers, and when it enacts faithfully in time a natural process that is relatively timeless.

23 August 1947

THE HOLY GRAIL

Buddhi is the gateway to all planes above. As the vehicle of Atma, which descends through it from above, it is also a channel or pathway for consciousness to ascend into Atma from below. Once Atma is entered, if only at the seventh subdivision of the seventh subplane, ascent to Adi becomes possible. Therefore, Buddhi and Buddhic consciousness are the keys to eternal power, wisdom, and knowledge, and so to immortality and Adeptship. Adi-Atma constitutes the core of existence.

The first Initiation admits the candidate to the Buddhic plane, which is the “Stream”. It therefore makes possible the rest of the attainment through all grades and planes beyond. The reason why the personal vehicles above the physical and the human individuality which takes the first Initiation become immortal is that Buddhi-Atma is let down into them, thus immortalizing them.

Adi-Atma is the Elixir of Life, Buddhi is the bowl or the cup which contains it. Higher Manas the stem by which it is both supported and administered, whether to oneself or to others. The Initiated personality down to the physical is the base. Thus the whole being is the Holy Grail.

10 September 1947 - Tauranga

INITIATION

On the night of 10th September 1947, after having been Initiated...my future mission was accepted by me. The power of Atma to hasten all circumstances in my life was indicated. I was told to observe the quickening of events, for this is the outcome of the power of...After this great event, the Initiatory Charge was given to me by the Master Polidorus Isurenus as follows:

THE INITIATORY CHARGE

Learn to attune your consciousness to Him and to live in His power in uttermost humility. This presentation happened whilst you were away. He stretched forth His hand over you as you stood before Him... You will work with Us under Him. A new attitude of inward dignity and of indifference to outer events, persons, and things, even whilst serving them, must be developed. Actually, this recognition by... changes your relationship to the world. Meditate upon it, please. Bring it into your consciousness. It is the inner reality of Initiation and your forthcoming admission to the I...T...The words of the Rites now have for you their full significance.

In addition, yoga is called for. It will consist of a mental act of homage to Him and the attainment of a deepened realization of your relationship with Him. He is one with your Monad. That Monad is awakened to awareness of Him and of unity with Him. In the most real sense, you are subject, servant, agent, and outer representative of... So are We all, and it is this which holds the Brotherhood together. Self-will has gone. Only His will remains, and for—and in—Us, His will is omnipotent

This presentation in the rock-hewn Hall of Audience is of the very greatest significance to you. It puts the seal upon your life and existence from henceforth. You must meditate upon . . . Such meditation largely takes the form of stillness of mind anfl heart. In your stillness, thinking of Him, His power and His Presence are realized. Learn to be still in the Name of...

Though He is active in His Office, His consciousness is steeped in stillness. He abides in silence except when duty calls. His Senior . . . abides in silence always. For silence is the uttermost power. Always remember that. Learn and practise, then, the yoga of stillness in which your mind and will are at one with His. No mental action or effort is needed save to be still in communion with Him. As you attain this and make it a part also of your daily life, a habitual state of consciousness, the karmic “mills” will have power to grind you no more. Karma, both favourable and adverse, there still must be. But it is of the personality and hardly concerns you. Both kinds are really imposters, as Kipling wisely said, inspired as he was in that poem by one of Us. The still peace, the utter calm of...must reign in your heart and mind. This will be your “rock” against which the froth of life has no influence. Your whole nature will thereby, thereafter, and thereupon become deepened immeasurably and real power begin to be yours, the power of...

I am happy to deliver this charge and to greet you in your new life, lived henceforth under His hand. Woe be to an enemy that assails you now. Before such you need only be still.

8—13 September 1947 - Tauranga

Wonderful rest and recuperation after twelve meetings in eight days at Hamilton. On Thursday, the 11th, whilst walking on the beach after breakfast. I suddenly realized, however faintly, the omnipresence of. .. My brain received the idea diagrammatically as... as a point of white, fiery, Fohatic will, awareness high above the planet, which was within and above the base of a cone of white radiance with the point as apex. The Presence was strongly felt as all-pervading, a descending stream of power-consciousness interpenetrating all planes of the whole planet. Earlier, I had a marked impression of the Master Morya, as I now often do on waking and when meditating. This realization of . . ., however faint and far off, is the highest experience which has yet come to me.

24 September 1947

CONTROL OF SPEECH AND ACTION

I perceive the extreme importance of watchfulness so that everything in life may be handled with perfect strategical wisdom and tactical skill.

On the Path, this necessity is accentuated. Apart from the motive of ministration, spontaneity must give way to strategy. Otherwise one’s actions and words will betray one. Ultimately, skill will be so well developed and wisdom so great that the possibility of error will be reduced to a minimum and a measure of spontaneity may be permitted. Until then, unpremeditated action and speech must have no place in the aspirant’s life. This is especially true concerning words, whether spoken or written. It is one’s words which betray one most often. Therefore, “Control of speech is the first gateway to yoga.”...One must never be off-guard. Especially is this true when things, great or small, appear to be going well. Often they are not, and the illusion that they are is dangerous. It should, in fact, be regarded always as a bright red light, a danger sign. Until one is an Adept, things are rarely, if ever, going well. The Path is razor-edged, and the aspirant must bring that fact constantly before his Self-conscious mind and hold it in full, sharp focus before him. Motives apart, the real Judas is the tongue.

11 January 1948 - Auckland

Remarkable experience whilst I was Celebrating the Holy Eucharist at prayer “for the people here present”. I saw that the Christ Presence in the Host flashed out as in golden darts or rays to Himself in each one of the people and became linked thereto, awakening, arousing the Christ consciousness and power. Like sought like as if by magnetic law as the prayer was uttered.

31 March 1948 - Wellington

The Lord of the World. His will is “Victory for Light”. He has seen the Race through wars and darknesses of the fourth Root Race and first five subraces of the fifth Root Race. Presumably one of His responsibilities is to bring humanity through the very grave dangers and trials of these Manasic (II)[103] periods into the Kingdom of Heaven on earth, which is life lived in Buddhic consciousness as by the Great White Brotherhood.

He is the All-Commander, we are His officers, rank upon rank, and must rise to supreme greatness in His service and surrender with a deep sense of privilege to His will. Greatness in the King’s service demands yoga. Greatness there must be.

1 April 1948

Wonderful experience of being used last evening. I was sitting writing letters, with Mr and Mrs M...when I felt power and found my aura glowing with azure blue, which then flowed out into the three, shining all about us. Feel very near to the revered Mahatma [Master Kuthumi] ever since, blessed be His name.

6 May 1948 - Napier

C.A.W.O.[104] HUMANE KILLER CAMPAIGN (Captive-bolt Weapon)

Deputation received by Minister of Agriculture [Keith Holyoake], with ready-drafted Bill: promised favourable sympathetic consideration. Campaign for signatures to continue. . .

22 May 1948

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Why did Queen Hatshepsut write on her obelisk: “Let all men know that this is the greatest thing in the world”? The obelisk is one of the greatest of all occult symbols, for it is the pyramid elevated upon an elongated or upraised cube. It is a symbol of the Adept Who has achieved this elevation, having developed His vehicles to perfection and elevated His consciousness from the physical at the base to the Monad represented by the apex.

The pyramid is the symbol of perfection, Macrocosmic and microcosmic, its proportions and shape being incapable of and beyond improvement. It is the Archetype in solid form. The interior chambers of the Great Pyramid are also archetypal, representing diagrammatically the basic principles on which the human body is built and the universe constructed. The obelisk is the same elevated. It is therefore man-god, or the perfectly manifested archetype.

Queen Hatshepsut knew this, having been so taught in the Mysteries of the Temple of Amon at Thebes, as also elsewhere. Therefore, on her obelisk at what is now called Karnak—a very mystical word—she had carved the symbols of the seven planes of Nature and the seven bodies of man. She ended her life as a fully conscious Initiate. Egypt benefited greatly from her reign, not only because of cultural advancement but because she supported and was ever obedient to the Mysteries. Never once during the whole of that life did she fail to obey a summons or answer to a call. The archaeologists’ views of Egyptian history are in the main misleading. They have to depend upon those very few incidents which were recorded and know nothing of all the rest with its immense significance. Add to that the secrecy enjoined upon the Initiates and see how limited the conclusions can be. The obelisk is the revelation of the monument to that truly royal life.

1948 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

THE SANAT KUMARA

The KING, the Sanat Kumara—Earth’s Spiritual King is the essential mediator without Whom there can be no access to Atma, planetary and solar. Therefore, all must be done in His name. The Buddha and Bodhisattva mediate to Buddhi. The Master mediates to Causal. The Adept is self-developed to the full at the planetary levels and so no longer has a Master on earth. He then becomes a pupil of the Solar Logos and enters the Solar Lodge as an E.A.[105] Chohan Initiation = F.C.; Maha-Chohan = M.M. The Arhat becomes a pupil of a Maha-Chohan Who sponsors him (or her) to the Solar Temple and its degrees, etc.

After the Ninth Initiation, the human and angelic are equally manifest and used. The Dhyan Chohans of Planes, Rounds, Chains, Schemes, Systems arc Archangels. Their model is the butterfly “form”. The “wings” of the Solar Logos uphold the Solar System and stretch to the extreme limits of the System.

The Hierophants and Adept Officiants are the “Accoucheurs” Who bring the butterfly out of the chrysalis—Nature’s “womb”—and the Initiate out of the mother’s body, which is the Causal body and which, at that level, is Nature’s womb in which is fructified the Atmic germ and from which is born, after due gestation, the newborn Atma-Buddhic man, the Christ within, “the hope of glory”.

14 June 1948 - Auckland

FOUR TEACHERS

The four great teachers of man are: successes, failures, events and opportunities, and the actions we provoke in other people.

*****

PRIORITY

Work of paramount importance is to banish human ignorance and so wickedness and so suffering. THIS MUST BE DONE QUICKLY.

*****

THE CROSS IN THE HEAD

The Cross of Matter in the human is sixfold, and Atma in the middle of the intersection is the “crucified Christos”—the divine nature in man crucified on the cross of the fourfold personal nature: physical, etheric, astral, and lower mental (prideful, critical, cruel, separative mind).

*****

THE SELF

Realize that the personality is mere karma and that the individuality is largely skandhas and the Atma is the Self with which forma-fashioned Ego-personality must become one and so “crowned” as Arhat-Asekha. The principles underlying patience and “play” (Lila) must be found.

*****

RITUAL

Ceremonial as ordered activity is—rightly directed—real “play” which is fulfilment in a relaxed ease. The ideal human life is continual, constructive “play” which gives happiness, unity in self-forgetfulness, freedom from strain, stress, constriction. Principles are the Point-consciousness, the “Centre from which a M.M.[106] cannot err.” Play is self-fulfilment through right activity—a principle.

1 July 1948 - Auckland

KABBALAH

Studying the Kabbalah with great profit and teaching it to a class. “When it is said that these scriptures were delivered by God first of all to Adam in Paradise, and then to Moses on Sinai, it is meant that the doctrine contained in them is that which man always discerns when he succeeds in attaining to that inner and celestial region of his nature where he is taught directly of his own Divine Spirit and knows even as he is known.” (Statement made by the Kabbalah as to the manner of its delivery)

4 July 1948 - Auckland

ATMIC POWER AND THE CENTRE

Using Manas alone one can be limited to the circumference, even though the existence of the Centre be recognized and the desirability of reaching it be appreciated. Attainment and use of Buddhic consciousness enables one to intuit conditions at, and the wisdom of, the Centre. In occultism, after due Manasic consideration, everything should be approached via Buddhi. Atma alone takes one to the actual Centre. Therefore, to intellect and intuition there must always be added an intensity of will.

After studying events, problems, work, and one’s relationship with the Adept Brotherhood intellectually and applying to them the faculty of intuition, one must endeavour to stand at the Centre and to know the truth by spiritual or Atmic Will. Remember that, like Manas and Buddhi, Atma is a state and a kind of consciousness, although unlike anything known Manasically. It is an intensity of Will-knowing, a fiery Atma-Vidya, an awareness which is rooted in the Paramatman, the central One Self of All.

Now, the Initiate uses the most valuable Higher Manas (abstract, intuitive mind) and, in addition, has entered and is developing the Buddhic vehicle and powers. The consciousness of the Brotherhood, whilst active at those two levels, is, however, rooted in Atma. The goal of the Initiate therefore is to develop and express his Atmic powers and vehicle. Then, as he passes through the Grades, he moves from the circumference to the Centre of the consciousness of the Brotherhood and then, to use an ancient phrase, “knows even as he is known”. The Atma ever calls and its call is the music of the magic flute of the Lord Shri Krishna.

I visualize—vividly remember—the Brotherhood with Centre of intense whiteness encircled by purest gold and, outside that, blue. The King and Others were at the Centre. High Initiates in the gold and new Brothers in the blue. The Centre condition called, and awoke an intense aspiration, yearning, will to reach and be absorbed in the white fire and radiance of the Throne and Him Who sat thereon, the Lord of Light

15 July 1948 - Auckland

TRUTH

Realize increasingly and am more and more impressed by the fact that truth and truthness alone bestow omnipotence. Without them, the strongest occult power cannot succeed or prevail. Against an individual rooted in Truth naught can prevail. The body may be destroyed but the individual and that aspect of Truth for which he stood are invincible, invulnerable, and indestructible.

*****

C.A.W.O. HUMANE KILLER CAMPAIGN

Work, Theosophical and humanitarian, continuing. Eighteen thousand signatures gained to petition and Bill before Cabinet

*****

TO TEACH A PUPIL

To teach a pupil one must have won his confidence by wisdom and knowledge. If not, the pupil resists the process of instruction, becomes self-defensive, self-justifying and, if prone, self-righteous. Resentment and loss of trust in the teacher may result in a hopeless situation.

[1] September 1948 - Auckland

THE PATH

The Path moves “twixt cliffs of ice and iron” and the treader thereof must have both ice and iron within him if he is to succeed. The ice and the iron must affect only judgement and discipline, the severity being veiled by unfailing kindliness.

[1]5 September 1948 - Auckland

IN THE PRESENCE OF MASTERS MORYA AND KUTHUMI

Awakened from a long out-of-the-body experience of our being guests with Masters Morya and Kuthumi. We were treated with complete informality and even permitted to be perfectly at ease. Most vivid memories were of Master Morya’s great stature—very tall—so that I remarked upon it to myself, the tremendous power within the calm ease of the bodily person and life, and that He understands everything. We were allowed to talk quite freely, and though I do not remember meals, I remember our being seated at a table together. On one occasion I clasped the Master Morya’s hand for a few moments, and He gave a friendly laugh and an answering grip. His magnetism set my arm and right side tingling. The Master Kuthumi was less in evidence. I was permitted to carry something for Him. I remember saying...that we were the two most privileged human beings...

In a previous experience—interpreted by Master Polidorus Isurenus as “Sonship” and Causal union—we were in our own house. In this one, we were “staying with Them”. Outstanding impressions are of complete normality, total absence of strain or even heightened consciousness, and the outer unconcern and calm ease, especially of the Master Morya. The experience is totally real and very happiness-giving. I have no recollection of locality. The atmosphere was unusually still, utterly calm. Life was quite leisurely and not at all intense outwardly...The Master’s Presence is vividly before my mind with a deep sense of privilege and happiness in knowing Him and being allowed near Him.

Five-and-a-half-years ago (10 March 1943) I had the superphysical experience of being in a house with Masters Morya, Kuthumi, and Djwal Kul, together with George Arundale, Jane, and Sandra, and of receiving the impression to prepare for responsibilities in the future. I was then struck by the Master Morya’s smiling ease and unconcern, upeksha, the poise of indifference. Master Morya gave me an object. Master Kuthumi gave me the Pencil as already recorded. I “dreamed” again of Master Morya on 8 February 1944 and of His detached ease and power. I was with Him out of the body on two successive nights on 23 and 24 November 1946 and was shown His Manu line... footprints and Scroll.

Thus, successively at intervals—10 March 1943, 8 February 1944, 23 and 24 November 1946, 15 September 1948, as also in the early days of my membership of the T.S. and Army, I was superphysically with the great Chohan of the First Ray, Master Morya. The Egyptian Brotherhood trained H.S. Olcott at first, and he “belonged to” the Master Morya.

[1]8 September 1948 - Auckland

KUNDALINI

The seven layers of Kundalini correspond to the seven planes and states of consciousness. The arousing of each layer brings about entry and awareness in the corresponding plane and state. The core is Adi.

The story of Samson being daily interpreted.

25 September 1948 - Auckland

The New Zealand Section Headquarters [of the Theosophical Society] opened, from 2:45 to 3:30 p.m. I spoke on Headquarters as a centre of (spiritual) power.

4 October 1948 - Auckland

World Week for Animals is in full swing. I have been visiting schools with films.

26 October 1948

Humane killing for cattle and swine and Weinberg pen to be made compulsory by law.

1 November 1948 - Wellington

In morning meditation, receive enhancement of the will to know beyond the application of principles alone—to become a knower of Truth direct, a gnostic in reality for humanity’s sake.

16 November 1948

INITIATION AND THE CORRESPONDENCES

The Rite of Initiation in both Lesser and Greater Mysteries brings about “fertilization” by Atma of the Macrocosmic “seed” within the matrix of the Augoiedes, of candidate, Hierophant, and Lord of the World. Each Rite also arouses into heightened activity a chakram or group of chakras. This makes their activity more conscious for the Initiate, adds self-awareness in the chakram to its existing instinctive, pranic function.

The angel of each chakram also grows in stature as must therefore (and with all reverence, be it said) the Dhyan Chohan of the plane and its subplanes. There must be seven angels associated with each human being, one with and at each chakram, also with each gland and centre, and therefore with planetary and extraplanetary correspondences. Each such angel represents and is a manifestation of both the Dhyan Chohan of a plane and of the plane itself. Pranava with meditation arouses all these correspondences into action, makes sevenfold man an increasing manifestation of noumena and phenomena of the seven planes. Initiation galvanizes the whole mechanism of seven sets of seven components into heightened activity and hastened development In Sanctuaries and secret schools of old and today, this is allowed and made to occur in the physical brain and body, but not outside in worldly life, save in exceptional cases and circumstances, particularly those in which the Initiate is of very stable mind, strong body, and the circumstances permit of much seclusion.

Presumably, a thaumaturgist—supposedly possessed of the power of working wonders with the help of the Angelic Hosts—comes to know and work through the angels of the chakras and so of planes. When not called on, their auric wings (shakiis) are folded. When evoked and used, the wings unfold for “flight” or active expression of powers...

January 1949 - Auckland

An Animal’s Bill of Rights is being praised and printed by G. Rudd. I am writing a leaflet for the British Union for the Abolition of Vivisection.

10 January 1949

From the Master Morya

YOGA AND THE SOLAR LOGOS

The supreme objective of yoga is skinlessness, edgelessness, total submergence of the pseudo-individuality of the yogi in the boundless ocean of eternal life. Every other result should be regarded as intermediate, leading only to absorption in the Supreme. Nothing less than this is the goal of every true yogi. Mystics may frown upon undue interest in Kundalini, chakras, and the gradual ascent of the planes and levels of consciousness, layer by layer, for their way is the immediate self-surrender, self-losing carried to such a pitch that “the bubble of self is burst”.

This is attained by intensity of love of God, or, Theosophically stated, adoration, yearning, and aspiration directed to the Supreme with such intensity and fire of devotion that the Auric Envelope breaks open and, if the term may be used, “lets the Logos into the soul”. For Christian mystics, the Lord Christ is as the Logos, as is Shri Krishna for the Hindu bhakti yogis.

The keynote and secret of success on this marga is fiery intensity of self-abnegation, self-surrender, self-giving to the Deity itself, to an Avatara or one’s Adept Guru. There is, however, no reason whatever why this method should not also be followed by the occultist. Indeed it is a valuable supplement to Raja Yoga. A successful combination of the two is greatly to be desired.

In the Initiate, the human heart corresponds to the Second Aspect of the Solar Logos, and after Initiation or corresponding development, is especially linked and open to the Logos in His Aspect of perpetual sacrificial outpouring of life motivated by a supernal and transcendental love beyond normal human understanding.

The Office of Solar Logos must surely—if one may so presume involve the enactment throughout Maha-Manvantara of the drama of Calvary. That is why meditation upon the crucified Christ and use of the crucifix can lift the devotee out of this world and body into union with God in His Second Aspect This Deity is Divine Effulgence, and the physical sun is both its symbol and material expression as far as its vivifying function is concerned. One may valuably dwell more and more deeply in thought upon the Eternal Oblation, the perpetual sacrifice of the Solar Logos until dawning understanding, appreciation, and even sharing of it is experienced. Thus, meditatively blending oneself with the Solar Logos, one’s heart is placed in the position of the sun as “heart” through which His life is outpoured in golden radiance to fill the Solar System with Solar Life. The aspiring devotee may usefully try to experience, however faintly at first, the love of the Logos for His Universe, the compassion of the Logos for the suffering which manifestation entails for all unemancipated beings, animal and human, in an elevated, impersonal sense, that the “dark” phases could presumably be passed through and the “light” phases entered.

May it not be presumed, although with absolute impersonality, that He himself, in experiences beyond all human comprehension, endures, shares—cannot escape—the sufferings experienced by the life in any form of being. Hence, perchance, successive Avataric visitations; for He is consciously identified with all at however lofty a level, travails with all that “He has made”. All is Himself, His Body, His Being. One may well deeply contemplate this mystery, one’s heart being reverently unified with the Heart of God, pass into, sink into, be lost in that wondrous Heart of Love.

16 January 1949 - Christchurch

The hard kernel of ahamkara must be extirpated. The deep roots of self must be tom out, that the noisome weed may wither and die. These are the timeless (apparently) tasks of the Initiate. A passion for reality and a genius for realism must be developed.

February 1949

Master Polidorus Isurenus gave me a wonderful yoga... to the end of conscious union and the awakening and action of the corresponding powers. This is to be performed daily for the rest of my life.

1 April 1949

Very successful yoga producing remarkable bodily relaxation and mental equipoise. Nearly learned to use the “Capricornian Gate” of exit. Experience that inner calm characteristic of C. Jinarajadasa and Sri Ram.

3 May 1949 - Christchurch

SOLAR ROSE AND CROSS

… At the Celebration of the Holy Eucharist on 1^st May, at the Gloria and afterwards, my consciousness was opened out to perceive unity. Sun and planets resembled an opened rose on a great cross of matter.

5 May 1949

I begin to realize the truth that “Nature has linked all parts of her empire together by subtle threads of magnetic sympathy, and there is a mutual correlation even between a star and a man.”[107] The yoga is producing some realization of the presence within me of the active power of the Planetary Regents …

The anxiety concerning Jane, which has existed for twenty years, is increasing. It is now very great, as is the limitation of her tragic situation lasting for so long. In the midst comes “Salvation” – a glorious fact.[108]

30 May 1949 - Christchurch

SOLAR LOGOS AND REGENTS

During this period, I passed through certain vivid occult experiences. At the Holy Eucharist, realized and saw correspondences between the microcosm and the Macrocosm. The Rite is solar and cosmic, with the Lord Maitreya^{^[109]} as Mediator. A “funnel” opens out from the personality into Causal consciousness to the verge of Buddhi, revealing the Solar Logos and Planetary Regents as a unit, a vast sphere containing all. Had momentary flashes of the experience of unity with the Solar Logos, to Whom the Gloria is addressed and, through Him, with Himself as the Planetary Regents. This was very general and no single Regent and Hierarchy could be isolated and known. All indeed are “parts of one stupendous whole”...

Also I perceived, during a celebration in Wellington (29 May 1949) the Solar Logos as a multidimensional living “monstrance”,^{^[110]} Himself as “Host” in a crystalline sphere at the heart and His power, life, and consciousness, radiating in innumerable tongues of golden flame throughout the Solar System—a wonderful and wondrous vision.

Then, for the first time, I experienced, out of the body and in full consciousness on waking, the Vaishakh Ceremony of this year. I walked in the procession, saw the leading Adept of great beauty and grace, with reddish brown hair, the curved and sometimes straight lines followed by the Initiates in single file, the uplifted Rod. I heard the resounding invocation and the shouts of amazement of the pilgrims behind, saw the gold-clad, seated Figure and one rose on its stem, alive, fresh, falling close to me. All Initiates were materialized and had a curious faraway concentrated expression, with the centre of awareness on the Causal and higher planes. This is a most vivid conscious experience and completely satisfies me concerning C.W. Leadbeater’s account…[111]

3 June 1949 - Christchurch

THE SOLAR LOGOS

My meditation during bodily sleep appeared to concern the Solar Logos, Who becomes increasingly a reality to me, especially since the experiences of the Solar System as a sphere and the Logos as a Monstrance of effulgent glory. Some time ago, I had the experience during sleep of watching a vivisector experimenting coldly, unfeelingly, on a fully conscious dog, opening up layer after layer of skin and muscle. The pain, intolerable agony, of the dog seemed to travel vertically into the heart of the Solar Logos Himself.

This morning I experienced a measure of oneness with Him and the conviction that all pain in His system is His pain. Therefore all reform is sought on His behalf in order to relieve Him from pain. “I am the gambling of the cheat,”[112] says Shri Krishna-Vishnu. He is also the vivisector which is a double pain, since the Lord of All is forced into crime and cruelty. This must be so because He is at one with all beings, is the “Inner Ruler Immortal seated in the heart of all beings...”. He is also the reformer, since “naught exists bereft of Me”.[113]

Does the Solar Logos actually experience the sufferings of all sentient beings on earth? In His immanence, presumably He must. In His transcendence, presumably He does not. My vision of Him as a living, effulgent Monstrance, irradiating golden glory, makes it difficult to think of Him, as the “Host” within, in any other condition than that of the highest ecstasy. His physically embodied Self suffers and rejoices with animals and men. His Adi Self, even if reflected or projected as far as Buddhi-Causal, could hardly experience a negative. It has opened up consciousness to Him, however slightly.

7 July 1949 - Auckland

Work in Auckland continues, with an inflow of teaching on King Solomon’s Temple, which apparently was not only mythical, as The Secret Doctrine says.^{^[114]}

I was appointed by Raja [C. Jinarajadasa], via Miss Hunt officially, as National Director of the Theosophical Order of Service in New Zealand. Another avenue thus opens.

7 July 1949

Very wonderful teachings are being shared by Master Polidorus Isurenus, especially on Atmic Will—mental stillness.

I realize strongly the importance of knowledge and teaching in The Secret Doctrine. I must master this most marvellous work.

8 October 1952 - Auckland

Regular practice of yoga before receipt of Master’s teaching of Biblical interpretations occasionally produces comprehension of the nature of Nirvana.

*****

NIRVANA

The mantra. Awn Mani Padme Hum, is the formula for Nirvana...

The atoms of Nirvana are all atomic germs of beings with Monads in the heart of them, as it were. This sea is all there is, everything else being an illusion. Yet, strangely, the observer knows himself as an observer and a Nirvani, and that this is the result of evolutionary progression. Nirvana is not bliss, which appertains to Buddhi. Rather is it eternal equipoise, absolute harmony.

The lower planes will be forced to yield to this power of equipoised unity, and that is the evolutionary effect at the end of the correct numerical cycle. In the meantime, they look like dark, discordant, broken-up areas of disintegration shot through with lurid, jagged flashes of yellow, red, and brown, with Adepts standing as Nirvanic lighthouses in the midst, exerting an energy which steadily brings harmony out of discord and integration out of disintegration. The motto of the Masonic Order: Ordo ab chaos, is a statement of the work of the Nirvani and the influence of Nirvana which, in a mysterious way, is intimately associated with the physical universe.

The rupa planes, beginning with the fourth subplane below the mental, mark the boundary of divine harmony in our Chain and Planetary Scheme. Below that, discord, disequilibrium begins. The delusion of separated entityship and the unresponsiveness of the matter of the rupa planes to the equilibrating forces from Nirvana constitute the “devil”, which simply means ahamkara and the unbalanced condition of the gunas of matter.

Everyone in whom the Nirvanic star in the Causal body is awake and active, is at work automatically to bring the chaos of the rupa worlds into the order of the arupa worlds, a mighty mission and wonderful office. This is where valid ceremonial is of such great value. It generates and establishes areas of order and communal consciousness which man calls brotherhood. An operative Hierophant brings Nirvana down into the mental and physical worlds, as also into the Causal and lower bodies of the candidate.

Such in part is a purely intellectual reference to Nirvana. Of Nirvana at its own level, all that can be said is that Nirvana IS, the verb having an immense significance beyond the power of mind and other words to convey. The Latin esse and the Sanskrit, asi, sat, and tad are descriptive of essential existence and come nearest. All this is summed up wonderfully in sound, sense, and effect of chanting, in the Awn Marti, which unlocks the door to the All-in-All.

The Gods, Tattvic Lords and Regents of Planets, Schemes, Systems, and Signs are all present in this Atmic germ of everything, just as the types of tissues and shapes of a full-grown body are present in latency in the fertilized germ. They, the Gods, see themselves there somewhat as one sees one’s reflection in a mirror. At first the reflection is unlighted but realized. Evolution lights it up until each supposedly external intelligence sees himself perfectly in the Monad-Egos of perfected man. Nirvanically, he is the Gods and the Gods are he. Our mental invocation to the Gods as we chant hastens that attainment They are external Beings and powers, at least in the lower subplanes of Nirvana, so to speak, and on all planes below. But above that, they and the Nirvani are utterly and completely ONE.

1953 – 1972
RESUMPTION OF WORLD TRAVEL

1953- 54 - Adyar, India

THE DIVINE OMNIPRESENCE

[An experience in Adyar, Madras, India, at the International Headquarters of the Theosophical Society, at the first School of the Wisdom conducted by Geoffrey as Director, 1953-54:]

When I was living at Olcott Bungalow, Adyar, and had been thinking much of the great Avataras Who had visited India, including the Lord Shri Krishna, I was strolling under the trees during my leisure time. As I did so, to my wonder and uttermost reverence, I saw with inward vision the figure of the Lord as a young man. I gained the impression that He had been moving about that area, but He appeared to me to be motionless and playing on His flute. His garments and bodily colours were extremely radiant, the colours sapphire blue and dark gold seeming to predominate. His skin was, however, not dark as legend and name have indicated, but pale cream, as of a magnolia blossom, and of a great purity. All around Him for several yards there shone what I can only describe as a’ glowing splendour. He did not in any way regard me, although I seemed mentally to “hear’’ or at least to be influenced by His voice saying, “He who seeth Me everywhere and seeth everything in Me, of him will I never lose hold and he shall never lose hold of Me.”[115] Psychologically stilled, I found myself affirming, as it were, “He has not gone! He has never left the world but still is here as a timeless, divine Presence, the omnipresent spiritual Preserver, the Lord Vishnu Himself.”

The vision passed, but the experience has never left me, blended as it were with the reported words of the Lord Christ spoken as He is said to have ascended into Heaven: . , lo, I am with you always, even unto the end of the world.”[116]

Even as I describe this experience, I remember and am in some way associated in consciousness with the experience of seeing the Lord Buddha at His attainment of Nirvana and the utterly strange and quite mentally inexplicable conviction that this is also a continuing experience and that, in some mystical and very truthful way, the great attainment of Buddhahood by the Lord Gautama transcends time, is as it were a timeless event that, it would seem, finds expression as the potentiality of Buddhahood existent in every human being and mysteriously continues to occur.

1954

THE SUBBA ROW MEDAL

The Subba Row Medal (for outstanding contributions to Theosophical literature) was awarded to Geoffrey Hodson in 1954. The Medal is held in the archives of the New Zealand Section of the Theosophical Society.

22 June 1958

Master Polidorus Isurenus

MEMORY ON WAKING

One reason why memories of our night experiences are not remembered on waking is that reasonably advanced people use the mental and higher mental bodies, leaving the astral nature behind. This is partly done because it could hamper the Ego in its activities during the sleep of the body. The astral nature is inevitably conditioned by the experiences of daily life, both pleasurable and painful, ease-giving and producing tension or distress. It would be a hindrance to take these conditions about with us and particularly into the Master’s Presence. In consequence, we are very different in some respects out of the body, which in its turn affects consciousness greatly. Free of these, as we are at night, we are more effective and clearer-minded than when awake. Problems, feelings towards people, limitations, and the tendency to concern ourselves with unimportant, relatively trivial matters, and to argue and proclaim our views as final truth—all these limit the expression of the Ego and makes the bodily person much smaller than he or she really is. These tendencies have to be eliminated so that the pure Egoic light and power are expressed in the daily life.

One test of evolutionary stature consists of the degree in which the Ego is thus expressed in daily life and available to the brain in consciousness. When we return to our bodies, preparatory to waking up, we reenter the physical through the astral nature, inevitably influenced by the condition of the body. One effect is to blot out memories of experiences in the higher consciousness or, if not, to distort and misunderstand them.

Yoga is particularly valuable in overcoming these difficulties, particularly chanting the Sacred Word with the appropriate thought. We should not assume that the absence of memory of higher states of consciousness and of visions of the Great Ones means that they do not occur whilst the body sleeps. They do occur. In sleep and in successful yoga the range of consciousness is extended one plane. If, for example, whilst awake, we can use the lower mental vehicle and consciousness freely, then when we sleep the Causal body and consciousness become available in so far as we have developed them. In successful yoga they are included in waking consciousness, though physical awareness is reduced.

22 October 1958 - New Zealand

Master Polidorus Isurenus

CLAIRVOYANT RESEARCH INTO THE STRUCTURE OF MATTER

After you have taken all possible care to see and describe accurately, you are right not to allow yourself to be disturbed by either contradictions of the present findings of science or differences from Occult Chemistry (C. W. Leadbeater). I watched you through most of your experiments... The doctor is right in saying that the angle of vision is decisive in the appearance which the object presents to the observer. Degrees of magnification also make a big difference. There was, however, no denial of fact, and you are right to describe impersonally what you see without attempt to correlate your observations with either physical or occult physics... The results will be cumulative and eventually, when all put together, will be part of the edifice of truth concerning the structure of matter.

The physics of the scientist is largely conjecture drawn from observation of phenomena. The physics of the occultist is the result of direct observation. This is the great difference between them, and it is inevitable that a bridge between their findings is difficult to find or build as yet. It is, however, not occult but physical science that will have to adjust its conclusions which, whilst explaining some phenomena, leave others unexplained. Occult physics elucidates them all, but knowledge of it must be slowly built up, and you are at work upon that process. If you keep on, as you are advised to do, you will help towards breaking through the barrier which divides the two schools of thought and the two approaches to knowledge, external and interior.

We wish this research work to go forward and to be extended into other fields, including the superphysical planes, forces, and Intelligences, as also the operations of the life principle in the organic kingdoms of Nature. Continuity of effort will make your work easier.

14 November 1958

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Let the soul take wings: clear the heart of hesitation and misgivings. Open the heart to the light and love of God and the Masters, without reserve. This will help the health. Be free-hearted. This is important in yoga. Fear naught. Become the free-winged soul that every aspirant to perfection should be.

Practise stillness, as if listening, thereby giving the Ego an opportunity to reveal itself to the brain-mind as understanding, light, and activity. Thus will the knack be developed of communing with the Ego, thus attaining bliss consciousness and a sense of “Godliness”. The centre of awareness should be in the middle of the head. This is “The Hall of Silence”, where the “Voice” or the “flute” or “song of the nightingale”[117]—which is the song of life itself—may be heard. One must be in a relaxed bodily condition with a consciousness that is “listening” or “waiting” for the arrival, as it were, of the divine Beloved.

*****

Master Polidorus Isurenus

ATMA YOGA

The sense and realization of the white Atmic power in the middle of the head as the “King within”, as you the omnipotent Self: learn both to realize it more and more fully and to permit it to rule consciousness at will.

All is Atma, Atma is all. The Self is Atma and Atma is the Self. Selfdiscovery simply means knowing yourself whilst wide awake as the white unstainable One, the purest Essence of your existence.

Atma Yoga is the greatest Yoga there is.

For the Atma is limitless Light, quenchless, undimmable, eternal, the Power that “maketh all things new”—a white radiance before which no darkness can remain.

The Atma erases all sorrow, all remorse, all memory of pain, all grief, all fear. It is the Truth that makes one free. Therefore, concentrate more and more upon the Atma and whenever a difficulty arises in the consciousness or memory, instantly enter the Atma, affirm the Atma, become the Atma, saying, “I am That, That am I. Aum.”

22 December 1958 - New Zealand

Master Polidorus Isurenus

CLAIRVOYANT RESEARCH INTO THE STRUCTURE OF MATTER

It is better that you continue your clairvoyant researches mentally uninfluenced by Us. The tasks you are undertaking are exceedingly delicate ones. No thought from another must influence you. Use what powers you have. Observe as accurately and carefully as you can and describe as precisely as possible.

The Masters, therefore, will not tell you anything at the present stage lest your mind should become biased. Furthermore, karma is profoundly involved and you must have the full karmic advantages accruing from successes. Therefore, keep on quietly without strain, using such powers as you have; for this is all part of the One Great Work. You are aided but not influenced mentally. Don’t ask Us for knowledge about your subjects. Work hard to find out for yourself as each one of Us has done and every occultist must do.

Do not concern yourself unduly with the body of present-day scientific opinion, which still rests on very shaky ground. Do not look for or expect revolutionary discoveries so much as foundation stones on which the edifice of scientific knowledge may be erected through the ages. We are not seeking to startle humanity with suddenly revealed provable facts. Indeed, We carefully refrain from doing so. The real teacher indicates ways of obtaining knowledge rather than bestowing facts alone.

Proceed then, in this general attitude and atmosphere, not allowing your mind to be disturbed by anything. Your task is to observe and describe. Others will evaluate.

10 January 1959

AKASHA OF KARNAK

I see the great Hall at Karnak from inside and am especially struck by the brilliant colours, terracottas and reds being most noticeable. All the goddesses’ head-dresses and their wings are accentuated and picked out in brilliant blue. A procession is coming out, mostly robed in white with the typical head-dress, and there are slaves carrying a platform or litter, on which is the golden boat of Amen-Ra. There is chanting in a very deep bass, and it is tremendously impressive. Banners and symbols are being carried on high poles. The procession goes down the sphinx avenue, through the first pylon to the Nile, which is very clear and beautiful. There are a great many more trees around the temple than now. Priests are in the procession chanting, not Amen but “ORMAN” or “AWMAN” and the “E” is not sounded. It is like “U”— “ORMUN”.

There are great temples and residences across the Nile, all in light-coloured stone. An enormous city is there, with an avenue running up to Deir-el-Bahri. There are highways branching off to the Ramesseum and Medinet-Abu. The road to Deir-el-Bahri has a bend in it. It aims south and then takes quite an angled turn and there are two temples...

14 January 1959 - New Zealand

THE SAGES OF KAILASA

I remember being amongst the snowy heights of the Himalayas last night. My friend and I visited, amongst other peaks, Mt Kailasa, having floated very easily side by side in the mental body but retaining the vision of the physical planets. When thus travelling, we saw the edges of our auras keep contact, and through this we were able to keep perfect mental communication. The auric contact can be felt somewhat like holding hands physically.

We went up a long valley to the foot of Kailasa, which is shaped roughly like a great curve or half-circle with a peak at the summit when approached from that side. We saw certain caves in which hermits lived amidst the snow and ice, far above the world and all its affairs and cares. There was a group of such sages presided over by a Senior. Their bodies were mostly only just alive and very slightly conscious, although we realized they could and do become physically awake at will. There was one Who had long black hair, black eyebrows, beard, and moustache. He was a Being of very great power, an Adept with an enormously vibrant, brilliant, and far-reaching aura, virtually embracing the whole mountainside. They were not normally approachable, being withdrawn to an extraordinary degree from the rupa planes and apparently living out their lives in a kind of physical hibernation under this Great One, Who was much more physically awake and active than most of the others. Their bodies were warm in spite of the extremely low temperature and it seemed that they live perpetually amidst snow and ice.

I think they were in grades because there was one who didn’t appear to be so evolved as some of the others, though sufficiently developed to keep his body warm and to sustain Samadhi. His hair was very matted and he looked dirty, but I realized these effects were due to prolonged Samadhi, during which the hair had grown and the body become coated with dried material exuded from the skin as waste toxins and perspiration. He was physically unconscious and insensible and sat facing the mouth of his cave some few yards back. The interior was rather dark and there was some jutting rock which gave the appearance of shelves or seats. There was a kind of terrace outside which really was part of the pathway of ascent. Physical people such as pilgrims may pass and see him quite immovable but alive. He was in one of the yoga postures -1 think the lotus asana.

Higher up the mountain, where no one could physically reside, lived the more developed men, including the great Adept. He looked as if clothed in a freshly washed and ironed white linen garment, and His body shone physically with a white radiance extending some inches from the skin. He was able to be in Samadhi and physically alert and awake at the same time, and His eyes and consciousness seemed to be turned towards India as if He were responsible for it and ministering to it all the time. He was definitely one of the Adept Members of the Great White Brotherhood and of very high rank. His face was something like the mosaic pictures of the Christ in certain Byzantine churches, powerful yet benign. We both noticed the strange fact of the perfect freshness and cleanliness of body and clothing and the fragrance which emanated from it. I think it was sandalwood, though sweeter, as if attar of roses had been added. He was on a raised platform or dais made of wood and about six inches high, being just large enough to hold His body, which remained motionless, though His eyes moved and were remarkably brilliant One received an impression of timelessness and of being near to eternal truths in the presence of the sages of Mt Kailasa.

I couldn’t tear myself away from this region and the vision of the great Rishi of Kailasa for a long time. I could see His heart chakram and marvelled at it as well as the other force-centres of His body. But especially wonderful was the heart. Very privately, I incline to the view that this is the real ancient Rishi Agastya of the Hindu scriptures and that any other physical being living in India would be a representative official under Him. I think the body lives without food, or at any rate without eating. If food is taken, it would be made by a Kriyashakti or transported from somewhere else occultly. I was impressed by the sense of complete liberation, not only of the Monad-Ego, but even of the body itself, from all necessities and restrictions of any kind, individual power being virtually absolute.

Finally, I withdrew down the valley again, floating lightly and easily and feeling awe-inspired by my experience. I followed the valley down to a river and to earth’s greenery again.

I am impressed by the perfect psychic purity of the regions visited at such high altitude. Though I was unconscious of it, I knew that the cold was intense and it seemed as if this very low temperature had an occult and psychic sterilizing effect. On Kailasa itself, the purity was absolutely apart from the powerful spiritualizing influence of the yogis and their great Senior.

I see that the truly spiritual life of India is, in reality, highly organized and, I think, under this Great One of Kailasa. The true gnanis, the high yogis, and the heads of mutts[118] and similar organizations are all linked with the Regent of India, though some of them may not be aware of it The Shankaracharya of Conjeeveram (Kanchi) knows about it, as do several others. It is wise when travelling about India always to keep one’s eyes open for those who display true nobility of bearing and appearance and, if so moved, to approach them.

I remember that I was very solemn as I floated rather slowly down the valley from Kailasa, feeling that I had been richly blessed and the recipient of a great privilege. I paused on the way down, where the face of a glacier was melting, and watched the change of condition and density of the substances. I saw that the change from ice to water occurred in many steps from hard ice to soft ice and so on.

My own freedom of movement was fairly complete, and I was free also from the pressure of time, as if time in the superphysical bodies were extended and depended far more upon consciousness than physical time, which is so unalterably fixed. There was no sense of being limited because of the enforced return to the body.

I visited other parts of India, including the great caves near Bombay and Ajanta.

February 1959 - New Zealand

THE APPROACH TO THE MASTERS

The Masters may be approached in thought from below in recognition of Their superior stature. Humility, devotion, and dedication characterize this approach which is valid and fruitful. If, however, unity and the universality of the one Spirit-Essence be even glimpsed, then the approach is from the level of that Spirit and that experience. The Atma is shared by all. In the Adept it is a consciously wielded power, in the aspirant it is at first intellectually and later intuitively perceived. Whilst reverence and homage remain and humility in the presence of supreme greatness is natural, nevertheless, the approach to the Master is more from the level of universal Spirit and less from the level of man towards Superman.

The aspirant conceives of himself as a co-worker, somewhat as a soldier knows himself as part of a military machine and operation. Superiority of rank is recognized, but a sense of unity of purpose, and in battle of shared danger, is also experienced. Similarly, the would-be disciple is in the front rank, as it were, in the greatest of all operations, namely, opposition to the powers of darkness and the illumination of the minds of all men.

Think also of the Master as a mystical Presence within the Inner Self. This is an unchanging Power and Light within one, which may or may not be associated with a Divine Personage.

16 September 1959 - Vietnam

THE WORLD MOTHER

I remember an atmosphere and area of the arupa planes which contains nothing else but the Feminine Principle and the spiritual essence of all that constitutes the feminine in Nature and womanhood in the human kingdom. No male spirituality or force, influence, or aura, so to speak, was included in this world of being, which could be described as all feminine. Whilst arupa, it extends into the third subplane from below the mental plane.

The mental image, which is symbolic, is of a throne, dais, or circular wooden pedestal like the lotus bases on which statues of the Lord Buddha are placed. This would represent the lower mental part, an extension of the world of the Feminine Principle. Upon this, symbolically, a glorious figure is placed which is the World Mother Herself. She is almost formless, but there is a distinct central feminine figure down which, from the head to the feet and into the platform, a white rod of Atmic power is to be seen. The heart chakram is a remarkable vision like a fully opened lotus flower through which forces, spiritual powers, are flowing continually out. The throat and head chakras are also wonderfully shining and beautiful. The form has a distinctly Eastern appearance and is, I believe, Kwan Yin Herself.

The aura contains a great deal of golden yellow which interpenetrates and extends beyond the womanlike form of great beauty and spiritual grace. She is magnetized. Her consciousness ranges freely up to the Atmic level though, for the purposes of Her Office, She functions chiefly at the Causal level and on behalf of the Egos of humanity, and through them in the human rupa worlds. This is all symbolized by the figure of Kwan Yin on a pedestal, and devotees could catch glimpses of Her looking like that

There is in Her aura and nature an area which is full of the laughter and play of happy children. In another part there are mourning women. In another, the abstract concept of the emergence of girlhood into adolescence. Her central aura is all pure gold. Round this there is a sphere of softest rose pink, beyond that leaf green, beyond that the glorious Madonna blue. These blend into each other in a shimmering merging of colours, the outer aura being iridescent like mother-of-pearl and the opal. This probably is why the opal is Her stone, since She somewhat resembles a glorious living opalescent jewel with the gracious radiant form within. The Madonna blue surrounds Her like a sky surrounding the sun.

In Causal consciousness, large groups of ideas can be discerned and expressed instantly or in a very short space of time. This comes through to my brain as a penetrating look in the glorious eyes of the World Mother, a glance in which full comprehension is conveyed.

The pedestal is like a living, wide-open lotus from one point of view, and in some way the lotus is Her symbol, containing in its essential astro-physical nature, as well as in its symbolism, the Third and Feminine Aspect of Deity in preponderance.

This is sacred and divine, the Kwan Yin area of the arupa world, wherein is Her Presence. I realize that Her own inner consciousness is in perpetual ecstasy, even while at the same time sharing the sorrows of the women and children of the world, which She seeks to alleviate through their Egos. Devas and human helpers are near Her, associating themselves with Her work and carrying out Her wishes.

It seems possible that there are two World Mothers, one for the Fourth Root Race and one for the Fifth Root Race. The former assumes the Kwan Yin individuality and the latter that of the Virgin Mary, whilst at the highest level the two are expressions of the one Divine Principle, like twin Avataras of the Feminine Aspect of Deity, in the main ministering to the East and the West.

Early 1960s Auckland

PRACTICAL YOGA (Advice to Aspirants of an Occult Group)

The aspiration to make the very most of this incarnation is most important, for you and for the sake of humanity, for it is also Monadic, and therefore should be maintained at its greatest degree of influence upon your motives and attitude towards life. Your own awakening to and acceptance of the Ancient Wisdom are also indications of the Monadic influence, chiefly upon the mind. In this connection, as far as your busy lives permit and without placing undue restrictions upon your way of life, please consider the advisability of bringing your knowledge of Theosophy into orderly arrangement This will imply a certain amount of regular and carefully progressive study, which will be valuable to you in many ways. The would-be occultist needs to have his or her ideas, knowledge, and thought arranged in orderly and systematic progression. Thus, all vagueness, and so vain speculation, can be avoided.

Books to read: First Principles of Theosophy by C. Jinarajadasa; A Textbook of Theosophy and An Outline of Theosophy and other books by C.W. Leadbeater, books by Annie Besant; and Lecture Notes of the School of the Wisdom by Geoffrey Hodson. These will all provide you with the necessary material for the attainment of a reasonably clear-cut and orderly understanding of the Ancient Wisdom.

Membership in an occult group such as this one implies close occult relationships in former lives and complete Causal togetherness wherever the physical bodies may be on this planet. As long as the channel is available, guidance and ministration may be sought and received, it being possible always to seek them whenever seriously needed.

Whilst holding these ideas in your mind and also other natural implications, do not feel that you have come under any system of severe restriction upon your ways of expressing your idealism and the conduct of your daily lives. You are advised, however, to learn and live by the “Golden Stairs”[119] and the “Four Great Truths”.[120]

Finally, the most important part of the universe and of every individual in it is the Monad. This means the essential spiritual Principle which is both eternal and universal. It is only at the levels of the formal mind, emotions, and physical body that the ideas of mortality and separateness as individuals can exist. For all above these levels, the Spirit-Essence in all beings is one and identical.

Maintain, develop, and expand a sense of deepening concern for the welfare of humanity and let readiness to contribute to this, within the ranges of your natural modes of self-expression, be the unfailing purpose for your existence.

Selflessness should ideally be the keynote of the lives of all aspirants to spiritual associations and hastened unfoldment

1960s

THE CREATION OF THE GOSPELS

[Geoffrey says that whilst he is receiving the interpretations of the Bible from the Master Polidorus Isurenus, and more particularly afterwards, he clairvoyantly sees the Gospels being written. He describes this experience:]

A number of men, some of whom are bearded, are writing in a classroom, several at one table and others at their own desks, as it were. Each is responsible not only for putting the different parts of the original source together but also for bringing out, however symbolically, the occult and mystical meanings. This is done by so relating the various incidents in the life of Jesus that an interior, time-free and universal Truth is enunciated under the veil of allegory and symbol. Over them there is a Senior whom they acknowledge as a Sage and whose directions they unhesitatingly accept and follow.

These men are free, safe, and whilst working hard are not actually driven by any haste. As they write, they compare their work with each other and there are general discussions as to how the guidance of their leader may best be followed. He appears occasionally, looks over their shoulders, picks up a sheet or two of manuscript, reads it, comments, and suggests changes or additions.

The climate is hot; the ocean—presumably the Mediterranean is visible, as also is a long curved quay, which reminds me of attempted restorations of the city of Alexandria. Ships are arriving at the port, some of them with graceful high poops, very high masts, and very high sails; some of them loaded with merchandise. Business must be very brisk at this time, for a dozen or more ships are tied up, whilst others, great and small, can be seen arriving and departing across the deep blue sea.

These men, Hebrews I think, live and work in an eastern part of the city and not very far from its outskirts where, apart from some palm trees and some irrigated fields, the desert begins. Here, quiet reigns in marked contrast to the very great activity—maritime and commercial—characteristic of the city itself, especially at and near the waterfront, where there are storage sheds and sailing-gear factories and repair shops. All this constitutes a veritable hive of industry, whilst further back there are very fine white buildings, civic and governmental, and an educational centre. I see many young and middle-aged men and women studiously engaged, some reading scrolls, some studying what looks like Euclid, and some making models of geometrical forms and even mechanical machines. The impression is that this is one of the great centres at this time of world civilization and culture and, in a very private way, of occult study and some forms of the Mysteries.

1960 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

MONADIC YOGA

Meditate upon the Monad as an immensely powerful concentration of divine power. In terms of consciousness this will be experienced as stimulation, occult tonic, and the enfiring of the will. The whole process is from within outward, not from above downward. To reach the Monad, or “up” towards it, one really penetrates in thought deeper and deeper into the innermost recesses, depths of one’s nature, into the very heart, which is the Monad itself.

The greatest of all siddhis is to know the Monad, whether experienced as enhanced power of achievement and will to overcome, or subjectively and even objectively, as an expansion of physical consciousness and an increase of faculty and fine qualities of character.

The ultimate goal of yoga is always the deepening experience of the Godhead within and without you, to mount the winding staircase which leads within the temple which is man, who is the true King Solomon!

*****

Master Polidorus Isurenus

YOGA AND THE REALITY OF THEOSOPHY

The Monadic germ and centre is within the Ego and in the antahkarana as a movable centre of awareness, the real passenger who uses the bridge, the real man in fact. The centre from which an aspirant cannot err is this Monadic germ in the Causal body which is its aura. Once it is contacted—and that is the purpose of yoga—the way to the Monad is found and this is the true Path which leads not to the Master or the Sanctuary or to Initiation, but to the Monadic Self. The first step upon the Path is the discovery of this manifestation as a centre of power and light in the Ego of the true and immortal Monadic Self. This is the goal of the great Search. So when meditating and chanting, assume first that you are the Monad in the Causal body and do all from there as that God in you, the true Father in Heaven.

As a form of yoga, meditate on the following: “I am the Monadic Self.” Then carry the Monadic Centre with you up into the Egoic, the Buddhic (5), Atmic (6), and Monad itself. Identify yourself with the Monad utterly then (or there) and remain perfectly still, poised in, united with, the Monad itself... Work away at this until realization is attained. It frees the consciousness. Later, learn to look out, as it were, into the world of the Monads, the fiery realm of the Divine Sparks, and perceive direct that which you learn as Theosophy.

For Theosophy is not an invented system of thought, a concocted explanation of the Cosmos, as has erroneously been said. Theosophy is the statement in terms of intellect of that which ever is, has been, and will be: Cosmogonical processes, involutionary phases and stages, the play of cosmic forces, the use and misuse by occult man in any cycle and condition of manifestation of free will, the mighty cosmic irresistible surge of outpoured cosmic life and all the results of that outpouring which occur inevitably, as well as the Laws by which they occur—that is Theosophy. It is no more invented by sages than gravitation was invented by Newton or electricity by Faraday or evolution by Darwin. These men were high yogis and, as^: men on the Gnana-marga, they perceived that which eternally is.

Reduced to mental terms, presented in logical sequences, eternal truth becomes a scientific philosophy, nay, many such philosophies, each accentuating one aspect of the one Truth. The aim of yoga, the goal of the yogi, is to penetrate beyond the system of philosophy into the eternal Truth which is behind, past the time-prisoned intellectual concept into the eternal Monadic realization.

Thus, seek the Monad and the Monad alone. It is the only true, eternal Self, the only true Teacher in the realm of eternal Truth and the only Redeemer and Initiator. Discover it, rest on and in it, relying on naught else in the whole universe. So will one liberate oneself and thereafter thousands of one’s fellow men.

We have to learn to live relentlessly as Monads, however long the period of imaginative self-identification therewith must last. That period must and will end, but to do so it must begin. Let us begin now to be Monads and live as such, for that is the way to salvation...For the radiance of the Monad is the light of the Logos and so of the Universe...

31 July 1960

NOTE ON MANTRAS

Mantras saturate the physical and superphysical bodies with the thought and power of God. Eliminate all other thoughts; render the personal vehicles and consciousness working in them subservient and responsive to thoughts of the Deity and the influence of the Ego; unify all vehicles into an inter-harmonized organism, physical and superphysical; reduce the resistance of both the personality to the Ego and the tamas guna to the Monad-Ego. It is like tuning the string of a musical instrument so that it produces exactly the true note on the true pitch.

11 September 1960

Master Polidorus Isurenus

ADVICE TO A DISCIPLE

Develop a more relaxed mental and psychic approach to your duties and services. Continue to serve as you naturally will, but be yourself more and more fully, and cease trying to be what you think other people want of you. You might, mentally, repeat such a simple affirmation as:

I am inwardly happy.

I am at peace.

I am immortal,

Self-shining, pure being.

Accentuate the thought and bring on the mood of interior happiness, even mounting to joy. This, perhaps, is the best antidote to the present almost unavoidable strains and the demands which cause them. Then really let go inwardly, developing the paradoxical care-free state of mind, even whilst fulfilling duties.

3 September 1961

THE MASTER MORYA AND THE WORK OF THE BROTHERHOOD

Last night, out of the body in sleep, I had the experience of seeing the Master Morya, seated at a table, highly concentrated upon work which was both designed and indicated upon a chart. That is the purely three dimensional physical symbol which I brought through on waking. It is the extremely limited physical and solid representation of what I experienced, the very least of it, but nevertheless quite true as a symbol.

Mento-astrally, the Master is seated at a curved bench, the table being the portion of it immediately in front of Him. Intricate designs, maps, and charts are on the bench, somewhat like a navigator’s charts and very complex. There is an equatorial line running from the centre of His table chart through the middle of all the others, which stretch away to His right and are at least five in number. I cannot see any to the left. At this level the chart on the table in front of the Master is electro-dynamically alive and extends below the table and above it, as if it were some kind of machine. The charts are really all connected. The electrified chart in front of Him represents the present, and those stretching to the right of Him represent periods reaching further and further into the future.

The Master is setting going certain forces and movements which will have effects in various directions, some of them not pointing away to the right but straight in front of Him and at various angles. The extension of the table to the right is not only slightly curved away from Him, but the charts on them are slightly curved upward also, as if referring to some fact such as the curvature of space. The Master was wholly absorbed in this work, which occupied Him intensely.

Whilst watching this as an objective sight, I was also realizing the more abstract and universal principle which it exemplified. This is what the Brotherhood is actively at work upon, not only in relation to the present situation on earth, but in the fulfilment of far-reaching plans for both the present and more and more distant future periods.

The Brotherhood, I realize, does not have to react to any present circumstances because it knew them in advance and is planning far ahead all the time. This is because of knowledge of mathematically certain forces and developments produced by the irresistible pressures exerted or released from within the Cosmos and its parts, making irrevocably for expansion. To use a metaphor, the Adept watching the hatching out of a chicken would know in advance exactly where and what the lines of cleavage would be on the shell. This would be because He knows what pressures are being exerted from within, the exact areas and the degrees of energy in each of them. So also the Brotherhood knows perfectly well what is going to happen and has long since, and for far ahead, made plans for it. If one asked the Master at some level where it would not disturb Him, what one could do to help, the reply would be, “Hammer home the Truth of Unity.”

Now that account indicates how a “dream” can be accompanied by an understanding of principles behind the dream phenomena. Summed up, it answers the natural question, “Are the Masters helping in the present crisis?” by a complete affirmative. Not that I ever needed to ask the question, or ever have. Last night I went to the Master and saw Him doing His part. I also had another superphysical experience or “vision” which I will describe to you.

I saw the Great White Brotherhood as if its members were arranged in concentric circles on an upturned bowl; the newer, younger members were around the rim, the others according to rank in circles above them, culminating in the centre where the Lord of the World is represented by a column of white light, edged with gold. The whole is similarly lighted, there being no secondary colours and no deep shades. The colouring ranges from the white at the centre through gold, blue, to green, and is lighted as if the bowl were transparent with an intense white light source underneath or in the material of the bowl which, like everything else, is self-luminous. This is purely symbolical, though accurate as such, since the Brotherhood is so arranged, consisting of Initiates of various degrees.

6 December 1961

Master Polidorus Isurenus

THE INNER LIGHT

The aspirant to occult, spiritual knowledge and power is grimly resolved to continue and fight through to final attainment, despite every obstacle without and within. This decision, courageously and unyieldingly maintained, is the result of the lighted state in the brain. When a Master observes an aspirant, receives and examines a neophyte. He always looks at these two factors when considering the amount and kind of aid to be given, namely the degree in which the Ego is in the lighted state and is influencing the personality on the one hand, and the karma, especially concerning health and personal relationships on the other. The former is the add test...[121]

10 January 1962

THE WORLD PROBLEM OCCULTLY VIEWED

The root cause of the troubles of the world might be expressed by the one word “TIME”. Everything that is happening, good, bad, and indifferent is typical of the age in which we live, the “hour on the evolutionary clock”. In fact, these troubles are inevitable and will remain so until mankind passes from the present age into its successor. One might almost say “They can’t be helped.”

Continuing in this very simplified, perhaps over-simplified view, the work of the Great Brotherhood is to hasten the speed of human evolution, to quicken growth, to get people out of this age into the next as soon as possible. Restricting oneself to this very simple diagnosis, one might say that the occult message of the day is “HURRY UP”.

Whilst the Brotherhood and all good men and women, whether conscious or unconscious collaborators, do all they can to remedy world evils and to reduce world suffering, the immediate single objective is to quicken human evolution and so to change human consciousness. This necessary change is from the desire personally to possess and enjoy, to personal detachment and the merging of the self into the whole.

This is where the ideal of the Path is of such very great importance. Every successful yogi, spiritual aspirant, and disciple helps the whole human race. This is chiefly, but not only, because in quickening his own growth and change of consciousness, he helps all of humanity. Each one who gets a little further on than the normal, each one who grasps the Plan and sees humanity as a whole and serves it, each one who sinks self into oblivion and lives for all mankind—such a person mightily aids the human race. True, the immediate gain is not noticeable, but the “leaven” is working. World-movements of co-operation are born and function, however imperfectly. Nations, groups, and persons become inwardly moved in these directions and exert an energy in the direction of entry into the consciousness typical of the next hour or age. The dark forces and men sunk in self and sense, on the other hand, oppose these influences and slow up the evolution of mankind. The call of the hour, therefore, is for men and women who will tread the Path; for these are racial-quickeners, speeding up the rate of progress and so liberating mankind from the evil of ignorance, selfishness, and sensuality. “Find and tread the Path” is the great call to man today, remembering that all this is said purely from the occult point of view.

What is the experience which causes a person to seek, find, and tread the Path? It is “dissatisfaction”, “discontent”, which is fortunately becoming almost universal...

The necessities for finding and treading the Path may be stated as follows:

1. Learn to think for yourself. Value, but examine critically, all you have been taught, particularly about religion.

2. Take stock of your character including your motives for all you do. Clean up the character and reduce to a minimum the selfishness in your motives.

3. Study the great writings on Mysticism and Occult Science.

4. Form the habit of cogitation in solitude on the deepest truths you know. Let this lead to the regular practice of a suitable form of yoga according to the ancient science.

5. Fulfil your duties in the world and with maximum efficiency, thereby further developing and improving your character.

6. Acquire as many faculties as you reasonably can.

7. From deep down within yourself, from your heart and mind and will, send out a call for help in your quest, for a true spiritual Master to guide you. He will at once begin to help you, will have been doing so already if you are in earnest. Eventually He will make Himself known to you, generally at first through an agent of His, and ultimately in the full Presence.

8. Never be satisfied with either yourself or your rate of progress. Whilst preserving the due serenity of one who would become a Sage, press on with discriminating wisdom.

9. Look out for others and aid them as you are being aided. Lend them your strength and share with them your vision and if possible infect them with your enthusiasm.

These are the general principles, again purely according to Occult Science, underlying the present world need, its cause and its cure. The work of the would-be servant of his fellow man is to spiritualize the consciousness of mankind. This has always been and always will be the chief work of every spiritual teacher, however lofty, however human.

If anyone should question the necessity for self-quickening and spiritualizing the consciousness of mankind, the answer is “for the sake of suffering humanity, these being the most effective preventions and remedies”.

Teach also the “wheel of the Law”.^{^[122]}

4 February 1962

A SUPERPHYSICAL INVESTIGATION OF ANCIENT EGYPT

During the receipt of teaching in interpretation of verses 8-9 of Chapter 10 of St Matthew, I was strongly conscious of the influence and atmosphere of Egypt, as if my consciousness were taken there as the teaching from the Egyptian Master continued.

In certain cases, the Master, as on former occasions, caused the ancient cities to reappear from the Akasha so that I could see them. Some of these stretched westward into what is now desert, notably one which reached into the Quattara Depression. The adobe-like construction of the houses, •the streets, and roads leading into and out of the city were thus visible.

We are now over Thebes which appears as a vast city with wide roads reaching almost back to the cliffs where the Queen’s Mortuary Temple (Hatshepsut) exists. It is a thriving, exceedingly busy metropolis at this time, ruled from the Ramesseum or another palace in that area which the Master is showing me and which is familiar to me as a memory of a former life. Many scenes and incidents fill the region and my mind, but for some reason the Master is concentrating His attention at the place indicated, saying, “Here is where you lived, though your duties took you throughout the city and across the Nile to Karnak and Luxor.”

Across the river in another part of the city, about a mile away, there is a large military establishment, including the supply of chariots in great numbers, horses and schools for driving and general care of this form of cavalry, which was highly developed and highly skilled, the horses being schooled and men trained in shooting with the bow-and-arrow from chariots moving at high speed. There is great exuberance and much hilarity and pleasure in life amongst the personnel, whilst outside, the life of the city of Thebes is quiet, orderly, and serene. Master said, “You lived at Thebes at its highest and best.”

28 February 1962

THE AURIC LINK WITH THE ASPIRANT

One part of the value of a direct link with an Adept through membership of a valid Order, is that it helps to bridge an otherwise almost impassable gulf. The difference between the state of consciousness of an Adept and of a man living in the world, even a Theosophist and E.S. member, is very great indeed.

1. The Adept is always fully conscious in the arupa worlds, and aware that He, as Atma, is a temporarily individualized expression of the Universal Atma. He lives in this condition, never losing consciousness of divinity and unity. He is indeed one with life, yet lives not as a personal individuality any more. If He has a physical body, it requires only a fragment or minute amount of His Selfhood to run it, so perfect is the technique of its management. Those who conceive of or claim to have the experience of meeting a physical personality of a Master really contact hardly any of the true individuality of the Adept. He is not there, but elsewhere. He is not only superconscious but He is cosmically conscious.

2. The man or woman, however devoted and pure in motive and life, who is obliged to manage fully a body and its upkeep, is forced to live in a totally different world. Material purposes and objectives, gain, and an inevitable selfishness in however slight degree, characterize his outer personality. In this condition he cannot know the Masters’ world, for indeed there is a great gulf between the two worlds.

3. The interests of the Adept are wholly spiritual. He is only concerned, or at least very largely, with the spiritual evolution taking place on the planet. The material evolution is left to Nature whose special work it is. The Adept is a quickener of spiritual unfoldment. Man, on the other hand, is inevitably a money earner, a guardian of himself and his dependants whom he defends against hunger, thirst, nakedness, and homelessness. This opposition of interests, this complete dissimilarity cf aims contributes to the gulf between the two worlds and their inhabitants.

4. The condition of the mental, astral, and physical worlds, psychical and physical, is repellent and even painful to the Adept. He lives in a delicately poised state of complete and very sensitive harmony. The world of men is a discordant world. This also contributes to the gulf between them.

5. The Adept can overcome all these resistances and difficulties, though generally at considerable cost of psychic force and even pain. He does so, therefore, as infrequently as possible, and only for very special and important reasons.

HOW THE GULF MAY BE BRIDGED

1. The Masters continually watch over humanity. One part (only) of Their watchfulness is for two types of people. One of these consists of reincarnated disciples and Initiates. Another includes those who are awakening spiritually.

2. The Master deliberately re-forms for the new personality the occult link with the reincarnated disciple particularly in the new astral and mental bodies. This is done by calling the disciple into His Presence and placing Himself en rapport with the personal auras, forming connecting lines of force which automatically act as two-way radio beams, as it were. When desirable, this is also done for devotees and servants of the Masters from fonner lives, whose dharma and choice indicate occult pursuits for the new life. The Master also establishes the relationship of observer with those who are advanced as Egos and are awakening spiritually and becoming genuine idealists and altruists in their personal lives.

3. The beginning or resumption of the occult life may show itself as a sincere and intelligent prayerfulness, an overmastering determination to live rightly and to help others where possible. Such an attitude attracts the attention of the watching Masters. These attributes of character and forces playing in the personal bodies in their turn begin to build a bridge from the human side to the world and atmosphere of the Adepts. The latter respond fully, and, if the idealist persists, a bridge will be built

4. Such a link will not be as close at first as that between Master and disciple, which is unique.

When the T.S. and E.S. are joined purposefully, a personal link, an auric contact, is formed; for these movements have as part of their objects to bring human beings across the gulf into the Masters’ world and condition. It can be an immense benefit, even saving lives of effort and evolutionary development. When the Adepts found such movements, They continue to keep a close watch upon all who join them, and especially those with deep sincerity, and with realism, fervour, and capacity to serve.

This link can remain dormant and does so in many cases, though the Master still watches over the person and even helps them materially, psychically, and occultly.

Thus, admission to these Societies and orders can be of very great benefit both to the Ego in its unfoldment through the ages, thus being quickened, and to the personality whose occult life can be initiated and consciousness in the astro-mental body be stimulated and strengthened so that he or she is wide awake at night and even by day.

When a person gets this far, the width of the gulf, so to say, is greatly reduced. The Master is much more easily able to reach him and vice versa, as also to use him as a channel.

The perplexing problem is recognized by the Adepts that, whilst much of this is intellectually and intuitionally acceptable, direct experience is rare.

A vivid “dream” is generally given, more than one in fact, arising from a real meeting, the memory of which the Master Himself takes steps to ensure when the person awakes. After such experiences and memories, the aspirant must forge along courageously as the great Adepts have done and every aspirant from the beginning of the world and human life upon it

This is a more difficult and complex matter than is generally understood. There are clearly defined limits beyond which an Adept cannot go in forcing a person’s evolution, providing him with occult experiences too far ahead in time of the condition in which they will be more frequent and then normal. Some of the aspects of this problem might well be stated from both the human and the Adept points of view:

The Adept, on His side, whilst perhaps ready to meet an aspirant who sincerely seeks the Path, is restricted not only by the above considerations, but by others. Amongst these are the following:

1. The Adept Fraternity long ago agreed, was even forced to conclude, that for its own sake and for humanity’s sake, its members must seclude Themselves from mankind.

2. When the occult laws governing Adept-life on this planet were recodified by Tsong-Kha-Pa about the twelfth century, a strict rule was established, that the Adepts should live quite apart from men and unknown by them and invisible to them. This was not due to any feeling of separateness or lack of love for humanity, but because it was, all circumstances considered, wise to do so. Experience proves this to be the case indeed.

3. When, therefore, an exception is to be made, and the rule modified or even broken, in some cases, senior Adepts must be consulted and give consent. Their decisions are always made with a view to the welfare and progress of humanity and ONLY SO.

4. The manifestations of the Adepts in the first fifteen years or so of the Society’s life were examples of such modifications of rules...

5. In order to appear to a person physically by astral travel and materialization, a very great deal of occult power and psychical energy is used up. This is so valuable and so greatly needed at this time that severe restrictions are placed upon its use.

6. Karma plays its all-powerful and virtually unyielding part, as is well known. Fortunately that is in the hands of man, and by devoted and reasonably intelligent collaboration with the Masters the karma of meeting Them can be generated.

Such are some of the considerations from the point of view of the Adept. Nevertheless, the Masters do both call aspirants to Their Presence during bodily sleep quite frequently, and do communicate verbally when a serviceable channel is available. Admittedly these are rare but they do exist. Even in using them, all of the above considerations also apply.

Finally, it is important and perhaps encouraging to know that the Masters know Their devotees and those among men who practise yoga and live the yoga-life. They not only know them but shepherd and help and guide them, even improving their material circumstances where karma permits.

When once a person has truly dedicated himself to a Master or the Great Brotherhood, his dedication is unfailingly accepted. This is especially the case when the action is the result, as it nearly always is, of an impulse from the Inner Self. Some of the matter of the aura logins to vibrate at the rates or wavelengths of the aura of the Master, if only in the degree in which response is possible. As time passes, the area affected is greater as also is the degree of response, the depth, as it were, of the change. Eventually, almost the whole aura becomes like that of the Master, however much smaller and less, luminous it may be. This link is most valuable to both the devotee and the Master, for the former can reach the Master in personal as well as Egoic awareness, and the Master can reach the chela and use him or her in a number of ways. These may include a general influence and likeness to the Master’s Presence.

If First Ray, for example, then the person will carry power wherever he goes and tend to evoke it from within those who can respond. The Second Ray aspirant carries compassion, pity, and lovingness wherever he goes, and so on through the Rays and their qualities.

24 April 1962

THE NATURE OF ADEPTSHIP

Whilst Adeptship as an evolutionary status, and the Adepts Who have reached it, may usefully be studied, especially because Moksha is man’s future state, it will be useful also to consider the Great Brotherhood as a unit, a single entity which it is. At the level of the Atma, differences between Monadic rays and even Monads themselves have virtually disappeared. In Nirvanic or Atmic consciousness, particularly the Paranirvana of the three higher subplanes, it is virtually impossible to experience separated selfhood. Only Oneness and Allness are conceivable to the Nirvani. Even the word “consciousness” falsifies the situation, if only because it suggests something else of which one is aware. There is no “something else” at that level, but only Allness, entirely undifferentiated.

Every Arhat experiences the beginning of this merging into the All, but has to ascend subplane by subplane of the Atmic world. He is held back all the time by his humanityship, his karma, his habits, and the almost entirely preponderant sense and even assurance of selfhood by which the world-mind is saturated and dominated. The struggle for freedom from this obsession—for such it really is—becomes intense as the time of deliverance draws nearer. The stories of the sufferings and deaths of heroes and saviours are dramatic portrayals of this conflict. Hercules dying within the shirt of Nessus, as well as the passion of Jesus, are good examples. Once the battle is won, the relief and the bliss (not in the least as a sensation, however) are indescribable. The Asekha Adept has won freedom from all those limitations and restrictions upon consciousness, and often for a long time remains in a high Samadhi, completely out of the world-mind, utterly beyond its pernicious influence.

Every successful yogi temporarily touches this condition. Those who go into retreat and prolonged trance Samadhi, stay in it for long or short periods at will, bringing back the reflection of the condition when they awake to physical awareness. Indeed, the aim of all yoga is to touch, however slightly at first, this glorious condition in which all the Adepts perpetually dwell. If They keep bodies and must manage them and carry out physical duties on behalf of the Brotherhood, They do so without any interruption of the lofty Nirvanic state. Whilst a great many choose to become absorbed forevermore in the Allness of Nirvana, adopting the Dharmakaya Vesture, as it is called, some others make the great renunciation, one which is quite beyond any human conception or understanding. Those Who take pupils and to that extent throw Themselves open to the world-mind, psychic atmosphere, and evil, suffer most intensely in Their lower manifestations and vehicles. Their pupils are very often the greatest source of such suffering, because They have deliberately brought Themselves into full rapport with them.

Whilst the Adept and other members of the Great White Brotherhood have personal individualities, the Brotherhood itself is Causal, Buddhic, and Atmic. It might be thought of as an upturned funnel with a very wide mouth, gradually narrowing tube at the apex of which is the Lord of the World. There, the tube opens out into a smaller upturned funnel into which the powers and energies of the Solar Logos are continually pouring, at least those which have been apportioned to this Planetary Scheme, Chain, Round, and more especially, Globe. This is only a diagram, remember, the fact being that such forces exist at the Centre and flow out, as in a sphere.

At the Buddhic and Atmic levels to which every Adept has attained, the knowledge of unity greatly preponderates over the Causal idea of individual components or Members of the Brotherhood. So it is a unit, indissolubly united, incalculably powerful, and pervaded by the most absolute assurance and certainty. It is to be assumed that at the septennial Assemblies, only those capable of functioning reasonably well in the Causal body hear the call and can attend. The Assemblies are not to be thought of as a Parliament at which policy is discussed and laws enacted; for the Brotherhood is an embodiment of the one and only policy which is evolution, and the laws with which it deals are Nature’s laws, everlasting and unchanging.

Now, the lower Manas is within reach of Causal consciousness and therefore world problems can be known, generally in essence and principle, but when necessary in detail. They are, of course, never new because the consciousness of the Brotherhood is all-knowing and all-foreseeing, especially in the case of the higher Adepts.

The discovery of atomic energy and the attainment of space flight were long ago foreseen, as are the later developments of which the present ones are only the faint beginnings. Action is taken when man endangers his own evolutionary progress and threatens his own future. Then the Brotherhood would step in. Just as it prevented the enslavement of the world by the dark powers... so it will restrict their influence and successes—is, in fact, already doing so. One of the means is to place a measure of its power behind those nations which can safeguard human evolution and human freedom. In consequence, those nations grow in strength until the crisis is past.

From these points of view the Lord of the World is rightly named “the King”, for He is indeed the absolute Ruler over all life on this planet and His will is law. He is, indeed, Will incarnate, Atma most perfectly made manifest in a vehicle at the highest levels and using only the upper subplanes of matter to build the denser vehicles. The central fact about the Adept, then, is that He is an Atmic Being with all that that implies in terms of power, and with fully unfolded Buddhic and Causal vehicles as instruments for the expression of that power, all wise and all understanding.

If you think of the physical plane as the circumference or outer skin of a sphere and the Atma as at the Centre, then the head, as it were, of the Adept is forever in the Centre and when incarnate. His feet on the inside of the surface of the sphere. All men are thus constituted and have their Atma at one with the Centre. Whilst still men, however, they are unconscious at that level and only rarely conscious at the Buddhic with the leaders entering the Causal. That is one reason why in all yoga it is so important to meditate upon the Atma in order more and more to come to know it, be established in it, and be able to wield it through the lower vehicles with wisdom and intelligence.

In all the affairs of ordinary life the ideal is everywhere to assist in the fulfilment of the divine policy of the Brotherhood, which is the policy of evolution.

3 May 1962

An Adept

THE MASTERS

Make clear in your study and teachings concerning the nature of the Adept—a very important and vital topic—the distinction between the known physical personality with its bodily appearance and name on the one hand, and the true Adept functioning as Atma, Buddhi, Manas, on the other. This wonderfully unfolded Higher Triad manifests on the higher mental plane in an intensely luminous and radiant vehicle built of the material of the highest subplanes of the mental plane. This distinction is important, for there, and there alone, the true Adept exists and is to be seen and known. Real and full communion with Him can only occur at the Buddhic level, that is to say, by the exercise of the purest intuition and not by any reasoning process. Still higher, meaning still deeper into the interior nature of the Adept, shines the Atmic Being, the true Maha-Atma, the just man made perfect, the rare efflorescence of the human race.

The outer physical Master is still using a human personality, true it is, utterly and completely purified of all human dross, but still in the appearance of a man, as the portraits show. The body can be in one of three states at least:

1. A wide-awake, extremely sensitive and refined human being, humorous, extraordinarily intelligent, highly intuitive, particularly in the degree in which the Buddhi is illuminating the brain. The eyes display this, but also on occasion, the interior Atma as a remarkable light shining through them. In addition, there is always great dignity of person, poise, and a certain grandeur, as of a natural royalty, characterizing His physical self.

2. The body may be resting, not wholly asleep but with the Inner Self much withdrawn. In this condition He is fully aware physically and responds to approaches from the physical world. In addition, while in this state. He can at any moment make manifest His Mahatmic Self in the body and make use of any Adept-siddhi at will.

3. Nearly but not quite asleep. In this state the eyes are partially closed and He is oblivious to the physical plane, His bodily senses being temporarily paralysed as it were. From this state, when He so decides, He permits the body to sleep, then being wholly withdrawn except for the sutratma. Whilst at this level, He carries out His duties on behalf of the Great White Lodge, including any business which He must transact, directions to His chelas if He so decides. He can then also communicate telepathically with any other Adept in any other part of the world and with pupils who have been trained for the purpose. In addition He may plan forthcoming activities and movements, whilst all the time being also aware at the Causal and higher levels.

Having passed the Fifth Initiation, which mysteriously He confers upon Himself, He cannot fall back, fail, or ever act in any important matter with even the slightest trace of self-will. In this sense He is inerrant, cannot be mistaken on any subject to which He turns His attention. He possesses a very highly developed power of concentration, far beyond anything of which a human being is capable. His will resembles a shaft of white fire which can be focused to the finest point when so rendered active and concentrated.

Remember, also, to instruct your fellow students that all of this development, power, and capacity is within every human being and is stirring into activity in the races as evolution proceeds. Every man is an Adept-in-the-becoming and that Adept exists within him now, somewhat as the flower is present in the unopened bud and the whole plant in the seed. As the hothouse can hasten the unfoldment of the flower, so the occult life, and especially yoga, can quicken the evolution of the aspirant and bring to flower ahead of the normal time for the race, the Adept-to-be.

It is helpful to try and realize the nature of this interior, perfected One, to commune with it, as it were, establishing relations with it and so drawing it out of its sleeping latency and then granting to it freedom of action and control of the outer self.

Thus one may find out even fairly early, the Adept that is one day going to be, the line one will follow and the Office which one will take. More especially, of course, there should be contemplated the choice of vesture, whether Dharmakaya, Sambhogakaya, or Nirmartakaya.^{^[123]}

Actually these developments and choices are far less individual actions at any given time than the natural outcome and effect of the development of the Inner Self. They may even be decided in some mysterious manner from within, doubtless by the Monad, as soon as individualization is complete. A Manu-to-be, will naturally become the head of a tribe, the Bodhisattva-to-be its priest, and the Maha-Chohan-to-be the King’s councilor and general manager first of a tribe and later of a confederacy.

Whilst many changes, modifications, and mixtures of functions and developments will thereafter occur, the underlying Monadic type and temperament will tend to emerge and influence the personality. This is discernible right up to Adeptship and afterwards, and will influence the preponderant aspect of the divine in each great Adept, as also the Path and Vesture which will be chosen. But remember, and keep reminding your fellow students, that the Inner Mahatma is the real Adept, the true Master, even though the named personality Whose portrait may be possessed or seen, is also a very glorious Being, “a Golden One”, in fact.

About 1963 - Luxor, Egypt

A High Initiate of the Greater Mysteries of Ancient Egypt

I greet you in our ancient land where our deepest ties and links were re-formed and strengthened from earlier days, both personal and in the occult life. It is happiness-giving to me to see you living in such ease here, where Thebes once stood. I go with you to the tombs and temples noting, not without regret, that the former glory has all gone except where it has been immortalized in the religious and funereal art of ancient Khem. The temple Initiates of those days, who included the architects and artists, took great care whilst composing praises to and the history of kings, to keep on repeating the occult symbols so that the Ageless Wisdom might ever live for those who have eyes to see. Now you can talk of Egypt with a sense of deeper reality, for you have stood in your old apartments even though the family home has long since vanished beneath the desert sands and the inundations by the Nile. Books and photographs can do much, but to see and touch and move amongst these grand relics of the ancient days give life and reality to knowledge gained from books. Isn’t it wonderful to sit and watch the great river flowing by and to sail upon her, as so often you did of old in well-appointed family ships!

*****

Master Kourious

The ancient shrines are still here and guarded occultly, both for their value as existent in the world and for the future.

I Who speak to you am far away in central Europe with the great Master Who is its Adept-Head. Others are travelling and making every legitimate effort that the tinder-like danger areas do not burst into flame. But Our Brotherhood is still represented in Egypt and so in Luxor by the few men who really know, as no archaeologist can wholly know, not only the great historical but also the mystical past of the land of Khem. Every great civilization and Centre of the Mysteries will rise from the ashes of the past and the time will come when Egypt will again be a centre of culture and occultism... ‘

Remember that monuments crumble, but the Akasha does not change and your lives are indelibly imprinted amidst the splendid scenes impressed there long ago; and Mother Nile, in a mystic sense, is Mother to you both, for she represents life and the possibility of life, both physical and spiritual.

I am not one Whom you have met, as yet, but know you from of old. Your Egyptian Teacher Who was once the great Hebrew ambassador, scholar, and occultist, is also far away in another land, but you will hear from Him also. The three names on the certificate of Colonel Olcott were far from a complete list of the Members of this Branch of the Great Brotherhood. He, your Friend, Who is now exceedingly preoccupied, will soon talk to you and more interestingly and pertinently than I am able to do. He is exerting Our power to minimize the danger in Crete and prevent a rupture in the relationships between Turkey and Greece. At present this is occupying almost the whole of His attention, though He is not alone in the task, the Lebanese Section also assisting.

But I thus greet and welcome you at Luxor, so that you may know that Our attention is upon you and Our interest in your visit is very great Although We all know of every major activity of Our Brotherhood, We are also specialists in a way, hence I myself Who am wearing a Greek body but not that of Hilarion, was not very much concerned with the Theosophical Society-aspect of Our manifold activities...

The role of Light Bringer, whether of a person or a movement, is always a difficult one, chiefly because of the limitations of human nature during this Kali Yuga. But I know that the Society will survive and experience a resurgence of its power and influence in the world.

*****

Master Polidorus Isurenus

I greet you from across the blue waters where in Cyprus there is a temporary lull in the fighting, though smouldering passions and national rivalries constitute a tinder-box indeed. We cool down the astral atmosphere, We influence when permissible the psychology of leaders, potential trouble-makers, and future saviours of the troubled situation. It is like keeping the soft-pedal down whilst a military symphony is being played on a piano, and the same kind of work is being done by Members of the Brotherhood in other lands, where signs of danger are less visible but none the less real.

I rejoice to find you in the very places where you loved and where you sorrowed and succeeded three-and-a-half thousand long years ago. Here you contacted the deeper aspects of the secret wisdom, received instructions from your Seniors...and took part in stately, purposeful ceremonials in half-lighted halls and crypts, some of which have vanished completely and a few of which remain. Here, also, you made links with many with whom you have worked in this life and will work later on...

About 1963 - Beirut, Lebanon

Master Jesus of Lebanon

There is a Centre of Our Hierarchy here in the general area known as Lebanon. From here, at Our Occult Observatory I greet you psychically if not physically. No public road and no guided tour will bring you directly within reach of Us, but the lines of occult communication are very good. There are lines of direct spiritual and mental communication established ages ago with Lebanon, the original, almost prehistoric Founder and Order of the Druses,^{^[124]} and the Himalayan Brotherhood and thence to Shamballa. From here one such line goes direct to Cyprus and central Europe and die Ashram of the Hungarian Master. Another goes direct from here to the Brotherhood and its Members in Egypt, all being part of a great system of occult communication which has functioned perfectly for untold ages. Adepts can communicate independently of those; but the lines of least resistance are as I have described them. Word reached Us of your coming, and I thus take the first opportunity of communicating with you.

About 1963

An Adept

PALLAS ATHENE

The blessing and protection of Pallas Athene means that of the Greek Branch of the Great Brotherhood, and the high devas associated with its work. Yes, indeed, you have done well and learned much here in Greece, and will always, henceforth, be enriched by these your wide travels. As you now see, there is a great thought-form in the mental world of the Goddess Pallas Athene. It is alive with the spiritual forces which brought about the rise and long continuance of the Greek civilization with all that it gave to humanity, and the geniuses who incarnated to produce its greatness. There will one day be a resurgence of the old, great civilizations according to cyclic law. So Egypt and Greece will live again when their new days dawn upon the earth. These contacts here have reawakened valuably, forces and memories in your inner psychology. I shall remain near throughout your voyage and coming flights, for this is part of the eternal link between those who have laboured, loved, and suffered intimately together through many lives, some of them in great positions of high standing, some secret and occult, whilst others have been strangely normal and at a more purely human level. So it will ever continue in unbroken and ever deepening intimacy.

8 February 1963

YOGA, MENTAL STILLNESS

The stillness of the mind refers not only to the reduction to vanishing point of the activity of the mind in thought-processes, important though this is. The real silence in which alone the “Voice” of the silence may be heard also includes the reduction to a minimum and final disappearance of the idea of “self”, “selfness”, of existing as an individual, selfconscious being.

One way to achieve this is to fix the mind and heart on the Guru or other great spiritual Being, up to and including the Solar Logos, so that thought of Him, and devotion directed towards Him, necessarily reduce and even obliterate the thought of oneself. This is one reason why those who follow Bhakti Yoga can have great success; for they direct an almost fiery current of devotion-thought to their Lord, and are carried along that current into His Presence, and in consequence forget themselves, which is the secret. Though it may sound negative, forgetting self because absorbed in a great idea or a great Being, induces the state of mind of what might be called “self-fasting”, “self-forgetting”, or losing oneself in a larger Self. This procedure combined with mental quietude leads to the ideal condition for spiritual awareness. All yoga practice should be done first and thoroughly, but with full relaxation, and then the effort should cease in both physical and mental silence as if absorbed and lost in a great stillness. To help in this, the universe may first be thought of as a condition or ocean of stillness, silence, even being blank from the point of view of sound. These are only images which may help some temperaments to “fall” into the silence state. It is a very good practice which might well be added to and followed after all normal yoga.

If ever a foretaste of the divine stillness is granted during yoga, if a feeling of stillness is experienced, then all practice should, not forcefully but gradually, die down, and the waiting state be allowed to supervene. The stillness may then deepen and eventually the knack of it may be developed or acquired. Remember, though, that this is but a threshold state, and not something to be held on to for itself alone.

One of the possible further experiences is to find oneself rather like a remote watcher, and the consciousness may be allowed to identify itself with this inner witness or watching consciousness even while the quietude remains undisturbed. Now, these are words only, and designed to suggest pathways to be explored and leading to states beyond those already attained.

Another experience is somewhat like entry into a universe or ocean of glowing Light-Life, of swimming or plunging or diving deeper and deeper towards its depths. No thought must be allowed to arise, however, except that of “One Life”, or “The Life”. Then try to be swallowed up in, lost in, this Life. Or there may come a tremendous thrill of power into the midst of the stillness until one feels oneself to be all power, nothing else in any part of one but power.

If a mental activity or procedure is really necessary—and this may legitimately be so for some—then such sentences may be meditated on or mentally uttered as, “Oh Lord of universal Power, I am one with Thee, filled with Thy Power.” This should be followed by a continuance of the mental stillness with only that experience of identity of universal power being permitted. ,

Similarly, one may say, “Oh Lord of Universal Life, or Light,” and continue the sentences appropriately. At some stage thereafter, even that thought must stop, because consciousness is above and beyond thought, lost and merged in a far higher state, as described. Remember, no yogic effort is ever wasted, or even fruitless. One minute of thought, a single chanting of the Sacred Word with the thought of unity, one minute of pranayama—any of these is bound to produce its effect, and strangely, a short, sharp, strong effort can sometimes be more effective in both clearing channels and inducing Causal consciousness, than a prolonged endeavour, particularly if the body is tired or the mind wanders. The ideal, however, is a steadily continued effort with yoga, meaning realization of oneness as the yogi’s goal, and increased effectiveness in the service of mankind, as the goal on behalf of others.

5 December 1964

A VISION OF THE LORD SHIVA

Whilst chanting and meditating on the cosmos, I found myself suddenly confronted by a clear Presence in the form of the Lord Shiva. My highest consciousness was formless and meditating (Hi the cosmic omnipresent Atma, but my less abstract mind, normally in abeyance at this stage, was intruded upon, as it were, by a colossal cosmic figure of the Lord Shiva, with the crescent moon shining above His head, the trident in His right hand, His eyes literally alight and afire with the cosmic Atma, and the ajna chakram shining brilliantly between them and on the forehead. Translating the experience into words, and therefore greatly limiting and marring it, the great Lord seemed to communicate:

“You have evoked My form and awakened My attention by your Atmic meditations; for I am the embodiment and manifestation of the one supreme Maha-Atma, the interior, all-pervading, divine Spirit. The universes, all that is in them, and yourselves consist essentially of Myself, Maha-Atma, the One Spirit-Presence. Meditate on Me and I will aid you. Continue on My yoga pathway and by trident and serpent and moon I will elevate you into union with Myself as the eternal essence of all that exists; for I am That, That am I. This Shiva form is an illusion created for the ignorant who are as yet unable to perceive and know My essential Self. Meditate on Me. Become absorbed in Me, not as form alone, for all forms are unreal and changeable, but upon the one eternal and unchanging Reality which men call God. The staff of My trident is the core of your being and physically your spine. The three prongs and the serpent twined about My neck are emblems of all triplicities in the universes, the Lords thereof, and of men. The fiery creative power ascends within the yogi to its position in My Rishi-formulated image, round My neck, and on My head.”

As these ideas arise the figure changes to that of the Egyptian deity, uraeus-crowned, and holding the sceptre; Athene, too, with spear and serpent shield and all the gods and goddesses of every land and every time: these are all but permutations of the One Lord, Maha-Shiva, the divine Spirit, which is the essential life of all that exists. All this is seen in the form of a supernal vision as if in the heavens above the earth, to which I gained access by the special meditation. At the same time, there is the knowledge that beyond all form and states of form and form-consciousness, there is the formless Spirit of the Cosmos. It is rather like the Acropolis and the limitless sky above. ‘

7 December 1964 - New Zealand

Master Polidorus Isurenus

ADVICE TO AN ASPIRANT

Maintain singleness of inner purpose amidst multiplicity of outer activities. Keep remembering your Ego as well as when meditating. It is the continuousness of the meditative thought which brings about the “marriage” (of Monad-Ego and physical brain).

Add to your yoga periods (after practice) a quiet receptiveness or spiritual listening, not for any phenomenal occurrence—whether high or normal—but to create more receptivity to the highest influences.

The fruits of yoga are not occult sensations only. These have their place, but other fruits are peace, harmony, psychological ease in which much progress has lately been made and, when you can reach it, pure bliss.

Remember that the highest part of the Ego, its inmost Centre—the Atma—is always rooted in the eternal and is in a state of meditation after a certain stage of enlightenment has been reached.

1965 - New Zealand

Master Polidorus Isurenus

THE LORD OF THE WORLD

Let us steep ourselves in the thought of the Lord of the World, in His power as the Atma of the planet and of every human Ego; as the shining glory of Shekinah of the planet, and of every human Ego; as the Kingly Will of the planet, of the Occult Hierarchy, and of every human Ego.

He is the summation into unity of the Atmic fire of all the Monads, sixty thousand million, for whom this planet is a field of evolution. Each Monad is an individual entity, a Lord of the World, a Solar and Cosmic Logos, potentially. One day, every Monad will attain to those evolutionary heights [under the Law of Reincarnation and Karma],

The Lord of a World co-ordinates, helps to project and direct the Atmic shaft by which each Monad reaches and is expressed in the fivefold universe from Atma to physical. That Atmic shaft of each Monad is the real spiritual Selfhood of every Ego, the core of Egoic being, the essence of divinity, the projection, presence, and power of which are essential to Monadic manifestation in each and any of the five worlds. Without the Monadic shaft, the Monad would remain relatively quiescent within “the bosom of the Father”—meaning the Solar Logos—and totally unmanifested as far as the five worlds are concerned. One pan of the Office of the spiritual King is to co-ordinate into a unity within Himself all these Atmic shafts, and in this Office He is all Atma, all Atmic Fire, all Atmic Will. Passing through Him, as it were, these shafts descend into the fivefold universe, or rather the five planes of the planet of which He is Lord. Thereafter, under His direction, the devas attach the five permanent atoms to the shaft.

The descent into matter, and later into form of Monadic power, life, and consciousness, then occurs, under the guidance of the three classes of Pitris and with the aid of the form-building function of the devas. Both of these involutionary agents serve under His direction as far as this, His planet, is concerned. By this means, He—the great planetary Dhyan Chohan—both obtains and retains directive charge of every manifested Monad in His keeping, and in this sense “rules” His world and subjects, and aids mightily all Monads by sharing with them and allowing them to draw freely upon His own perfected Atma.

That which the World Teacher Maitreya does through the Buddhi, within the Ego of man, the Lord of the World does through and within the Atma of man. Both lend Their own perfected vehicles and powers at these two levels to the Monads in whom, up to the First Initiation, these powers are dormant. Without this aid, evolution would be far slower, and the work of the Pitris and devas far less effective, because less coordinated, and the attainments at the end of each cycle far less lofty. So these great spiritual “Bridegrooms” of the Monad-Egos of mankind, by “marrying” and becoming interiorly united with them, save them a great deal of the slow toilsomeness of the cyclic pilgrimage to perfection. This is the true Atonement

The same principle is carried on at still higher levels, when the Monads become conscious therein, by Solar and Cosmic Dhyan Chohans. This, in fact, is one part of Their work in the fulfilment of Their Offices.

We Who adopt protégé in the inner life in order to help them spiritually, become “Bridegrooms” at the astral and mental levels, especially the three highest subplanes, and so assist the Ego to reach and direct the physical personality. The Master, in His turn, becomes the “Bridegroom” of the accepted disciple at the Causal level, and especially at Sonship, thereby aiding the personality. So, all occult ministration is done from within the individual who is served.

To help people We have to unify Ourselves with their Egos and through the Egos from above only with the three highest subplanes of their mental and astral bodies. We have to try to bring the individual’s own Atma down through the Ego into the highest aspects of the personal nature. In doing this, the greatest care must be taken to touch only the upper parts of the aura and of the personal consciousness, that which responds to beauty, truth, and idealism.

19 October 1966

Master Polidorus Isurenus

GUIDANCE ON LECTURING—THE ANGELIC HOSTS

Science, although still operating and investigating at the physico-material level, is extending human thought in the direction of extra-physical and extra-sensory directions and dimensions. Obtain and give a list of these; then your exposition will be strengthened. The strictly occult realms, the form-building, life-stimulating, and landscape deva and devas are most acceptable. Gandharvas should be placed in the first of these categories, because of their part in the operation of the Logos Principle. Actually, the Form-Builders are by far the largest Order, and of more public and general interest because they include those agencies which restore injured forms to the original pattern and shape under the operation of word-force. This should be made clear to members of the Theosophical Society. Healing devas function under this principle of the restoration of form and the preservation of the exact pattern.

The picture of Our Lady Mary, the World Mother, might suggest Roman Catholic tendencies, especially when projected in Christian countries. Before its projection, or the commentary, a statement is advisable that the T.S. is completely independent of all organized religions, even though members belong to many. In France, however, and some other Catholic countries, the presentation is acceptable.

The Gandharvas and die Form-Builders are die chief Orders of the Angelic Hosts, with Karma Devas equal to them preferably presented next, thus keeping the concept at die cosmic and universal levels. Fran them you may proceed to the more personal associations with man, ending up always with the idea given by your Angel Teacher of future collaboration between angels and men. You might usefully include that angels cannot, in this age, become physically discernible; but the range of human perceptions can be increased to include clairvoyant perceptions of them. The whole subject can very usefully be reintroduced into your public work in America and elsewhere. Meetings of members and students also offer good opportunities.

5 December 1966 - Houston, Texas, U.S.A.

An Adept

As far as you are able, do not encourage or even allow Theosophists to anticipate, wait for, and rely upon dramatic manifestations in the last quarter of the century. An effort will be made for power to be liberated, but it is not likely to be spectacular, neither are its results to be immediate.

...Immense good has been done in spreading into the world-mind and the minds of large numbers of individuals, Theosophical teachings and ideals, including that of the Path... There will be help in the last quarter [of the century] and even certain great personalities who might appear at certain times. In consequence, an upsurge of spiritual and intellectual awakening, interest, and effort is likely.

11 December 1966 - Austin, Texas, U.S. A.

From One High Initiate to Another from the Inner Worlds to the Outer (transmitted to the latter by Geoffrey)

Already you are a member of that Temple, a “living stone” within it and granted absolute right to move within it and live within it at all times with welcome assured. For it is your Temple and many others’, being the true “House of the Loid” on the “Hill of the Lord”, in which and on which all those enter who have passed through the tests and received the Great Initiations which make the Ego “safe forever”, as the ancient doctrine teaches. Press on, for you are on the upward path ascending steadily step by step. The Master Rakoczy and Our Lady—Who is a Reality, I assure you—are still your sponsors and will be, every step of the way, to the summit of human evolution.

Remember always, it is the Ego which attains, and it is the Monad which is the essential Self within the Ego, as you have been finding out, both in your meditations at night and by day. When you chant and perform your various yogas, do it all as a Monad-Ego, with the accent on the Monad. “I am That, That am I.” We are all Monads and this is the aspect of our being which is of prime importance, more so, in fact, than the Ego, which mystically “dies” at the First Initiation, and will disappear entirely by the Fifth, or rather, as the Fourth is passed through.

Master Rakoczy asked me to tell you to live “near Him” at Krotona, especially—though always, of course—and particularly on the night of Christmas Eve, when He will call you to Him. There is to be a gathering of the Masters during Christmas, and He will take you, after a time, with Him. I shall be there as well. Think a great deal of the Masters and live with Them from now on, though I know you always do this. Forget as many of the clouds as you can, and just refuse them room in your mind until you can forget them altogether. Forgetfulness is a very great power when developed in the way I have just described. Forget, forget, forget Eliminate, eliminate, eliminate all thoughts of shadows and darkness and faults until they disappear or are reduced to little specks, minute and almost invisible, and without power to become any larger ever again. Thus they will fall away, belonging as they do to time and place and the unreal.

Think of yourself as what you want to be, and so mould yourself as your ideal. Thought is the sculptor. While watchfulness is important, thought of yourself as the ideal which you want to be is the most important Visualize yourself just as you want to be—form the habit of thinking of yourself in that way only.

I have limitations too, not being an Adept But if it helps you to think of yourself as like me, then do so. Of course, we are all intensely individual at the level of higher and lower Manas. That will be so for a long way on the Path, though, as Monads, we are all very much the same, surprisingly so in fact. Think of yourself too, as the Monad, the Monad-Atma and these two fully filling the Monad-Ego. Then think of the personal self as the Monad-Atma-Ego, shining perfect and pure. Thought is the mallet, which the Monad-Ego uses to chip away gradually all the “marble” which hides the Monad-Self in all its immortal beauty and perfection.

Reject out of hand and automatically all else when thinking of yourself. That is the way. Keep at it in the “studio” of the world which is that Path to which God has called you—as the Prayer Book puts it

21 February 1967 - New Zealand

THE WORLD MOTHER

The idea that a human being can evolve to and attain Adeptship in a female body and personality, is age-old and completely true. That certain of the supposed Goddesses—spouses of God—embodied the principles of divine Motherhood and ministered to mankind is founded upon such an occult possibility. Highly spiritual women with this mission before them are extremely rare in that they attain to that perfect puriiy which involves a complete abnegation of self, or rather a total outgrowing of all the limitations imposed upon consciousness by the feeling of separation from others. To these virtues are added a transcendent and divine compassion, not only for their own sex, but for every sentient being which can and does suffer, and an intense longing and self-dedication to the reduction of cruelty and pain and every other form of human misery.

Thus, hyper-inspired by all that is loftiest and noblest in human nature—especially in women’s nature—on Achieving Adeptship, such a Monad-Ego-personality now united into one conscious Being, becomes as an Avatara for the feminine, or negative, polarity of the Logos and the power, life, and currents of the divine Breath and divine Life-Force of Kundalini. The neutral and opposite polarities are equally present in Her Person, but the conserving, protecting, enclosing, and saving attributes are accentuated to produce an Official worthy of the title “The World Mother”.

Despite the loftiness of this conception, it is necessary to remember that such an exaltation of all that is highest and noblest and most beautiful in womanhood still uses a representative personality through which Her own higher principles, illumined and inspired by the “descent” of the same qualities of the Logos, function in the world of man. This is the true spiritual Madonna in whatever form She may decide to reveal Herself to humanity.

Thus, whilst away from a sleeping body and meeting Her, one would see a divinely beautiful human form, a perfect woman in fact, lovely in every aspect. One should remember that although beautiful, She is none the less strong, not only with the power of Her own Monad, but also with that of the Logos—all those other attributes are also present in exaltation in Her.

28 July 1967

From One High Initiate to Another (transmitted to the latter by Geoffrey)

Do not think of spiritual progress in terms of yogic attainment only, valuable and important as this can be. But even more important in some ways – many ways, indeed – is the unfoldment within one of a natural spiritual grace. It is compounded of sheer human kindness, ready concern for others, especially those in need, and a kind of affectionate nearness which heartens people and saves them through many dark hours and loneliness. In this wonderful way, without ever knowing it, people can grow beautifully and naturally a lovely way to grow.

1968 - Paris, France

While I was in Paris in April of 1968, a great deva communicated to me. This deva wears a wonderful crown and belongs to the Seventh Ray in general and also to an occult group working in the city of Paris. He said, “There is a powerful occult group of men at work in Paris. It is a continuance of a very old foundation, partly Masonic, with which the Comte de St Germain was associated as inspirer and Teacher.”

The deva stated that he retains his association magnetically and super-physically with this group, saying, “The members are mostly, but not entirely, physical descendants of the original group founded in the fourteenth century. Eliphas Levi was a member, and learned his Christian-type Kabbalism there. Van Helmont and other famous occultists were members. Very strict discipline is administered, some members having been expelled and their minds closed to memory because of black magic tendencies such as occultism for monetary gain. Their sign is... being a secret agency of the Adepts. Other similar groups exist in the older European cities. Paris is famous in occult history for various groups such as that of Cagliostro, but most of them have died away through lack of worthy and occultly capable successors.

“As you know, deep occultism in the fullest sense is attractive to only a very few who are occult-minded. Most people want to play with occultism and very few want seriously and completely to live occult lives and remain unknown as far as their occultism is concerned. Some groups, however, continue to exist and always will, even though some members are very much inward-turned in pursuit of knowledge of the hidden forces in Nature and man, and in gaining mastery of those forces.”

This deva has a great deal of primrose yellow in its main aura and white and electric blue forces flowing up from shoulders and crown of the head. It is quite familiar with human yogis and accustomed to watching and helping their meditations and rituals.

In the human group there are rites which are deliberately designed to awaken Kundalini and the chakras. These groups are Masonic at heart, and popular Freemasonry actually has the same objectives.

THE DEVAS OF SWITZERLAND

(Entries of 19 June—1 July 1968)

19 June 1968 - Interlaken, Switzerland

IN VIEW OF JUNGFRAU

I sense, but do not yet see or contact in consciousness, a lofty overlord or Maha-Deva of the Alps. These nearer mountains appear to me to include numbers of different ranges or groups of mountains. Over each of these, very highly evolved landscape devas preside, each being intimately associated with and functioning under the Maha-Deva referred to, itself manifesting under and as an emanation of the total landscape Deva-Raja of the planet. This extremely lofty Being is in charge of all landscape devas and their operations in all parts of the world.

I seem to be aware, however slightly, of this very great Being and receive the idea that even if a mountain range or peak is under the sea or partially so as an island, this also would be under the ministration and direction of the Planetary Deva-Raja.

I conceive that there exist, both in principle and in function, groups of highly evolved Archangels and angels who receive solar power through the mediation of the planetary Maha-Deva. They then project or drive it into the earth, so that the whole globe—meaning in this case the unfolding life of the natural mantle of the earth—is being subjected to this stimulation by the Solar Logos through Hierarchies of this order of Beings whom I call generally “landscape devas”.

As far as my observations go, we are now in a region over which, from an area to the left and behind Jungfrau from our position, there is a senior deva of great power under which the devas of each lofty range, peak, and lesser areas, are recipients of and directors for this solar, planetary, and more local alpine power.

Thus viewed at the arupa and rupa levels—and doubtless at those still higher beyond my reach—this region is plentifully inhabited or “alive” and populated with such mountain devas. That which I am now tracing is thus in the charge of a very lofty landscape deva whose presence is located (in mental terms) further back over a range which includes this peak. .

Such devas are extremely impersonal, almost severe in character and very highly concentrated upon their tasks of serving as relay power-stations for the solar energy. The aura of this particular deva includes much of the range and reaches down like a wonderful “waterfall” of light and colour, gold, green, with flashes of blue to three-quarters of the way down to the foot of the mountain. Interpreted in terms of brain-consciousness, its body is high above the highest peak. The moment I touch its consciousness I am at once elevated out of the individual into the general principle which I described at first. It now grants me a measure of its attention. It sweeps its consciousness in the direction of a much greater and more glorious deva, located many miles away, mentally saying, “The senior Lord of this particular area is over there.” I now catch sight, through to consciousness, of this much more highly developed deva working from a much higher level than I can reach. This deva is a great senior with an area under its charge covering twenty or more miles in all directions. This nearer deva now gives me the signal known as the Deva of the Pointing Hand,^{^[125]} showing that by some interior communication it has become aware of this solution (sign) arranged long ago.

We should remember that the lower slopes of the mountains and the valleys also have their importance from this devic point of view, although the inherent life-force is more diffused and spread out beyond the mineral into the plant kingdom of Nature. From this I learn that a mountain is especially important for the work of the landscape devas because the life-force in the mineral matter of the mountain is more highly concentrated and restricted in space and therefore more readily reached by the devic energies and powers than that in plants. As he indicates this, I notice that all along this great forest on the lower slopes there are hosts of lesser devas of varying stature moving about among the trees with which they are associated. I see that this principle may safely be applied everywhere and visualize the flow of the quickening solar electric force as like the finest luminous “rain” descending upon the landscapes everywhere, particularly if thus regarded from the mental level, where the whole area around us now is being subjected to such streams of stimulating power.

There is a mountain there to the left over which a similar deva is also in charge. It is at least 100 ft tall (the central form) whilst the aura almost encloses the whole mountain half-way down and in all directions. The chief colours are white, blue, green, with a concentration and crown of golden yellow within, around, and above the shoulders and head—all being extremely brilliant and making the deva look like a wonderful king. Very much restricted, this causes me to think of the Statue of Liberty, though the uprushing forces are much closer together above the deva’s head than in the statue.

I receive an indication something like this: “Although the quickening of evolution continues throughout the ages, under His will (presumably that of the Solar Logos) time is without significance.” He now takes me partly into his consciousness, and I see therein no sense of any limitation of time, the concept of the passage of time not being part of the awareness of these beings who are beyond it. Seemingly in contradiction, in my purely human mind I perceive a certain sense of urgency but this rather concerns intensity of effort than of pressure or hurry in time.

In the region of Jungfrau to which I now pay attention, farther back, some miles behind the part of the mountain visible to us, 1 have seen that there is a great mountain deva from whose consciousness and function I receive the idea of “Watcher”. This is one of the great devic Overlords of a vast region rather than of the Jungfrau itself, which is nevertheless obviously under its influence and that of several mountain devas. This Overlord is at a level beyond my range of consciousness, but I receive the impression that it is Atmic, extremely powerful, as if it were a veritable incarnation of power itself, not only directing channeled power but also in its own being, as it were, a power-source. Thus viewed, the whole region is perpetually receiving this strong descent of power in general which I described somewhat as “power-rain”. As I watch the Jungfrau, I perceive that there is a slightly lower subsidiary peak where there is stationed another very mighty, but nevertheless secondary, power-deva.

That forest over there is extremely interesting as a field of research because it is thickly populated with other kinds of devas associated with the life in trees and grasses. This inner life is spread out almost like an extremely fine, golden liquid in which the presence, movement, and directed forces, together with the auras of tree devas, create ripples, like stirring a liquid, though at a level finer than the gaseous, if this can be imagined. Of course, all humans and members of the animal kingdom receive this same stimulation but do not seem to be as responsive as the mineral life-force. Perhaps this is because the quickening solar power is deliberately restricted and attuned to that particular manifestation of the divine life now evolving at the lowest level on earth, the mineral. From this one I get an assent and it says, “The mountain deva consciousness is more restricted in range (to the mineral), whilst plant kingdom devas have a wider range of movement and attunement and so can more readily affect humanity and animals.” (He withdraws.)

[1] July 1968 - Geneva

THE DEVA AT MONT BLANC

A brief glimpse only of this great Being from the cable-car station on Le Brevent, Chamonix, revealed it as a mighty and majestic “Deva King”, whose outstanding characteristic was of immense power.

It appeared to be wielding or invoking, transforming and distributing very great life-quickening energy received at lofty levels, doubtless the Atmic plane. This energy was being radiated over the whole massif and far beyond.

The stature of the Deva was scarcely measurable at the great distance away from the “dome” summit. The majestic head and eyes of this great Being were of an intense brilliance, and the impression upon me was one of awe-inspiring power upon which one could hardly bear to gaze.

The Deva’s consciousness was far beyond anything 1 could hope to contact. Every effort produced the same impression of awe-inspiring, Godlike power, as an attribute of the Deva, as also of that force for which it was an agent

The dazzling white and electric blue aura was seen to be moving across the great alpine landscape in a somewhat slow and deliberate sweeping motion. This doubtless was also part of its age-long mysterious ministration to the divine life hidden in the mountain massif below.

Although the time of this observation was necessarily brief, the experience still lives quite clearly and powerfully in my consciousness, elevating it towards those supernal heights from which its ministrations would seem to be conducted.

*****

ANGELIC HOSTS AT GENEVA

Yesterday, while taking lunch at the United Nations building in Geneva, on the balcony of the uppermost floor with local T.S. members, I found myself being greeted by a number of landscape angels associated with Mt Blanc and surrounding peaks towards which I was looking across the lake. My attention was evoked by the familiar, brilliant flashes high in the air over the region, these proving to emanate from a lofty Archangel and associated hosts. Greetings flashed between us in recognition of former occult associations with Le Grand Salfeve. If the Causal and Buddhic “flash” be translated into thought and words, they might be as follows:

“Greetings from those of us whom you contacted before. The concept of co-operation between angels and men might well receive a new impulse from now on.” -

In addition I perceived intuitionally the National Angel of Helvetia, whom I contacted earlier. This Being is far above the lofty mountain angel in spiritual stature, and beyond the range of intercommunication, probably because [it exists] at a level—presumably Atmic—where no conceptual thinking occurs. It was perceived as power incarnate, kinglike, with hosts of representatives—all gleaming with the white fire of that lofty realm. Whilst they canied out behests, the National Angel appeared to remain completely motionless, robed in power—an incarnation of the WILL of the Solar Logos.

These experiences prove highly stimulating and evocative of the highest within me. The thought also arose to include reference to the Angelic Ministers in die Solar Hierarchy, recognition of and collaboration with them, as pan of the lectures, teachings, and writings.

I also sensed the presence of an arupa deva as watcher for the Brotherhood at the United Nations. Whilst a general blessing is bestowed upon the Organization there, this angel can draw the attention of die Brotherhood to special activities going on and particular opportunities and needs for Adept inspiration and help. This deva is not so much permanently established over the building, as maintaining an intimate rapport with all that takes place there.

The same, of course, is likely to be true at New York, but the world movement grows large with extremely divergent types, nations, and so national interests and motives. This will pass as the newly independent peoples grow in maturity.

ATTEMPTED OCCULT INVESTIGATIONS INTO THE LIFE OF FRANCIS BACON (Entries of 30 August—7 September 1968)

30 August 1968 - St Michael’s Church, St Albans, England

[Geoffrey Hodson attempts to put his consciousness down below the altar foot-piece, and finds no sign, as far as he can now see, of any burial or remains of Francis Bacon. Geoffrey has had no previous experience in the investigation of sealed tombs or other underground areas. He therefore warns that his impressions should be regarded as tentative results of experimental researches in these fields, he himself claiming no degree of reliability resulting from previous tests.]

My impressions are:

That the whole story of Lord Bacon’s decease, of the experiment with snow, the subsequent chill and death in Lord Arundel’s house, was a cleverly constructed allegory, in the classic style and symbolism, and really a myth.

That no bones of Lord Bacon have lain here. That by secret means, the disguised person of Francis Bacon, in perfect health and full and selfdecided consciousness, left the land of his birth and city of his office, and went overseas.

That there, in the seclusion of the Sanctuary, he entered upon an even fuller life of spiritual and intellectual activity—and the fulfilment thereof—than was ever possible amidst the stresses and distresses inseparable from so much, though not all, of his daily life in England. Of that life he was able to proclaim, “It is finished.” This was true, however, only in the sense described.

A further impression (carefully to be examined on future occasions) is that he was received as a great representative of the Brotherhood, who had fulfilled his mission as a visible man, researcher and revealer in this world; also as a leader, inspirer, and lofty (if not England’s loftiest) servant of mankind.

Thereafter, Francis Bacon entered upon his true life as a Spirit and “intellect-Monad-Ego” unfolding the inner Godhead. This continued abroad in the conditions and surroundings and the companionships which were wholly conducive to the fulfilment of his self-manifestation both as Francis Bacon and his true spiritual Self.

If my impressions are correct, then Francis Bacon was a soul nearing the end of its pilgrimage through the world of matter which is the world of dream. He therefore needed seclusion from the world of men in order that in other ways (and by other means than those of his great and glorious life as man, and almost superman) the latter evolutionary state would be prepared for. In the completion of the cycle of time, the true mystical death, resurrection, and ascension (in contradistinction to the historical myth) could lead his spirit to its true, and this time recognizable and acknowledged, Royalty.

From this first seeking for light concerning the objectives of the Francis Bacon Society, in St Michael’s Church and before his statue, the impression is received that, whilst Francis Bacon worshipped here and willed his burial here (at least for public understanding) his body was not in fact laid here. His mother was buried here, I think, but not he himself.

It is likely that a number of his R.C. brethren all conspired to fulfil his wishes, nay, determinations. This they did for the sake of posterity, history, and the satisfaction of the very human desire for the completion of a human story, natural as it is. This account of his supposed death was composed even as he, in his own way, would have written the story of his manufactured end.

3 September 1968 - Gorhambury, St Albans

[We are sitting in the drawing room of Lord Verulam’s house on the Gorhambury estate. Geoffrey Hodson holds Bacon’s own personal volume of Euclid and describes what he sees as follows:]

First scene: a long room, richly carpeted, books all round it on shelves, a window behind me, a door away to the right in the middle of one of the longer sides of the room, a table, oaken with, I think, carved legs and sides. Seated at it a man with books on the table, one being propped up in front of him. To his right are some concentric forms like the platonic solids, though I can only identify a tetragram. I think there is one paper i- on which he is sketching, as he refers to the book. He rubs out occasionally and then makes another sketch. He reads with this book a little to his left, writes on papers to his right and refers back and forth to ensure accuracy, looking at the geometrical solids. He leans back in his armchair, closes his eyes and ruminates, mentally constructing many intricate thought-forms and drawings. There is a clock on the side of the door facing him, and he is conscious of the demands of time and seeks maximum study in the time available.

There are country noises coming through the open window, such as birdsong and the sounds of cattle and, I think, the rustle of leaves, for it is windy. There is an opening in the wall opposite to the window which is behind me (as observer), and near which he is sitting. The bookcases do not continue across (this break) which reveals what looks like a built-in sideboard or cupboard of dark wood. On it refreshment materials and liquids can be seen.

He now rises, draws on his gloves, takes up his hat, and walks towards the door, glancing back almost regretfully at having to leave. He then has an idea and steps back to his table and his studies for a moment, briefly. He goes out, as it were, the Lord and Master over others, to whom he calls in a strong and resonant but not unkind voice, giving orders.

From all this, I deduce that he whom I am seeing is indeed Lord Bacon, and I am led to him by this book I am holding. He is in good health, stands erect and walks strongly and firmly. I could follow him but it would take hours to do so. I think the door led into the inner courtyard, if all this is indeed at the old Tudor House. The wall opposite the door has two windows; if I am right this room is Lord Bacon’s library but only a part of it in one of his studies.

In his consciousness there is another house or home, I think in London, where he is now going. I think we have to find another place, more secret, more secluded, where the literary creations were conceived and written.

Here now, is another scene: He is declaiming, repeating, walking about, occasionally assuming postures and gesticulating dramatically before a group of five men who are writing avidly as if not to miss one word. A play is being composed and written.

Now I must stop; but I venture to think that from this first preliminary glance, and indeed through this book and these pages, I may very well be placed in touch with two aspects or more of Sir Francis Bacon. He is obviously superior in almost every way, especially intellectually and spiritually, to those other men whom I saw. They recognize and work, as in service, for one far greater than themselves, thus forming a dedicated group. The gathering is not all serious, since there are shouts of laughter now and again, and nods of appreciation and even wonder.

[Question by Mrs King: “Will you establish ownership of Bacon’s Euclid, and then see if the marginal notes in Coke’s reports are in the same handwriting as Bacon’s? Or rather if the marginal notes are Bacon’s, and if this book also belonged to him?” Geoffrey Hodson holds Coke’s reports. He says:]

Yes, I think so. This is Bacon’s handwriting and it is his book. It belongs to his library.

I see again the figure of a maa He is going to a shelf and replaces the book (I could even tell you on what shelf it is!) before leaving the room. This man is apparently going somewhere, being differently dressed as if for a journey. He has a high collar, a hat with a feather in it, and wears a ceremonial sword.

I will now look out into an inner courtyard, built around. Oh, yes, there are offices and servants’ quarters, I suppose. Oh, much work is going on down at the far end. 1 see smoke, a fire being used for some reason.

N.B. I am inclined to accept the idea that this second man might be Sir Thomas Meautys.

4 September 1968 - Holy Trinity Church, Stratford on Avon

Two visits were made to the Shakespeare tombs and monument at Stratford. Experimental projection of consciousness into William Shakespeare’s tomb suggested a high degree of emptiness. Some debris appeared to be on the floor of the tomb under which bones might lie. No presence of documents or manuscripts was detected. Attempting to read the Akashic Records, interments were seen, these appearing to be natural in character with no element of secrecy or concealment being discernible.

Somewhat later Geoffrey Hodson “saw” an apparently furtive entrance of some three or four men by the side door of the chancel. These men appeared to open the tomb and remove something from it, the chief impression being of the removal of bones, in spite of the curse on the epitaph. These remains were apparently removed by the men through the side door, carrying them as if in some sacking or sailcloth. Thereafter the record was found to be so much overlaid with general impressions of burials and other human traffic, that Geoffrey Hodson found it difficult to follow the movements of the men outside the church door. He thinks it probable, however, that the remains were taken to a boat moored against the river’s bank and carried away. All this appeared to be done at night, and very secretly, with watchers guarding the procedure. Some of the company appeared to be well-dressed and to be acting purposefully.

As far as Geoffrey Hodson could see, the grave of Anne Shakespeare had not been disturbed. Finally, he thinks that some relic of the exhumation, such as bones or a dropped ornament – a ring for example – might still lie at the bottom of the tomb. His closest scrutiny failed to reveal to him at last, the presence of evidence concerning authorship, and he doubts whether aid in the solution of the problem, which would be convincing, is likely to be found. However, he makes these suggestions with some deference. .

6 September 1968 - The Bodleian Sheldonian Theatre, Oxford

An Adept

Pay very careful attention to the Burton tomb and area, and advise the Society to explore for possible relics or a direct link with Bacon and the problem. Observe for your own interest the traditional scholastic influence and magnetic forms from the arupa into the rupa planes pervading the Bodleian and surrounding institutions. Note that this is under the Maha-Chohan and the Master Rakoczy as one of His centres for the dissemination of not only learning but more important, the powerful spirituo-mental (I) impulse towards the intellectual development, progress, and culture of humanity. There are other kinds of centres than purely occult ones. These concern the development of the other aspects of human nature.

This city and its consecrated and long-used edifices serve the Master for the transmission to successive generations of this fructifying power to keep alive and greatly stimulate the intellectual and cultural development of the human race. It is a supranational centre since people from many nations come here.

You would only have confirmed that the withdrawn volumes, now kept here, did belong to Bacon’s library and were used by him. They are of course charged with his special spiritual, intellectual, and personal influences and characteristics. They would be useful as entrances into the “Person” and so “Ego” of Bacon, which is one of your objectives.

To solve this problem the more you can know of the Francis Bacon personality the better, for of course he designed everything including secrecy, deception (in the highest meaning of that term)—protective camouflage—very deliberately.

Geoffrey Hodson sees Bacon as a “Magisterium” amongst a group of men who were in those days his servants and willing and even grateful subservants and servitors.

He also sees the Order of the K.T.S. of the Helmet. They are holding a ceremony in a secluded Temple. Part of the ritual included mock-combat with imitation spears. This symbolized the battle of Spirit against matter, and of the human spirit against the human personality, which had symbolically to be destroyed, meaning the death of its power to inhibit the function and expression of Buddhi-Manas (!) or spiritual intuitiveness. After the mock-battle, there was left lying on the floor the supposedly deceased newly accepted knight, who then rose as if from the dead in semi-ceremonial fashion. Thereafter the Chapter was closed and there was rejoicing, a business meeting, and orders from Francis Bacon for the fulfilment of the Great Design.

So successful was this that the dual project of concealed authorship and later simulated death, were fulfilled to the letter. In all this, Francis Bacon was really almost superhuman in his power to organize and lead his followers through that double procedure.

*****

Christchurch Cathedral, Oxford

ROBERT BURTON’S TOMB AND MONUMENT

Find architects’ drawings, if any exist, and the records of entombments and names and places of burials within four square yards of the monument. Remember the design was that the pages should be deliberately concealed and that, therefore, the repository may be strange—a receptacle perhaps and not necessarily a tomb. X-rays or other and later methods of discovery might reveal the hiding place. It is of first importance to search among authentic records of burials at that time, and every minute piece of evidence concerning the exact repository and location of Burton’s body.

I receive the impression of a deposit by night and in secret by a group of Elizabethan men, with candles and a lantern, depositing many books and many loose pages and other relics in this particular area. Reminding my readers of my remarks concerning the interior of tombs and sealed areas, and of the consequent possibility of error, I would suggest photography or other technical methods of investigation to be applied to the pillar, and to the subterranean areas around it, if such kind of research is feasible.

*****

Poets Corner, Westminster Abbey, London

There flashes the vision of a trembling spear of golden light pointing directly under this tomb, rather to the rear.

Various ideas contributed to the decision to conceal:

1. For Bacon’s safety.

2. To ensure absolutely that the original manuscripts at least should be preserved intact, and free from alteration by later and even corrupt hands.

3. The total work attributed to Shakespeare, being of such very great (even extreme) value, it must imperatively be preserved.

4. That the profound occultism and power-bestowing “veiled” knowledge might in its turn be conserved.

This concept of the words is of equal if not greater value as part of the riches of humanity, than are the gracious, poetic, and dramatic words, lines, and total compositions within which they are concealed. Thus the Baconian writings were treasures within treasures, and therefore, for humanity’s sake, had to be preserved from loss by concealment, from profanations, and from the dangers of adverse actions and accidents, such as fire or flood.

The group of dedicated and enlightened men—the Rosicrucians and others of those times—knew all this; and in dedicated service to humanity they took the necessary steps, and for the most part they buried the documents below the ground. Under spiritual guidance they also received the vision of a future age, when this dual treasure would play its appointed part in breaking open, as if by a “spear” of power and light, the hardened, materialistic minds of men, notably those of the centuries which would follow. Thus time enters into this problem, in that the cycle of human living, thinking, and acting, and the orthodox religion which would follow the Baconian era, would contain men hardly able to respond to the inner idealism and potent knowledge contained in the works. Another cycle was foreseen in which more responsive minds, more thoughtful seekers for truth would be born. These men and women will be trustworthy recipients of both declared and concealed works, which contain guidance in the fashioning of the New Age, in cycles only then dawning, and in those to follow.

In other words, although the works have appeared and have in general been saved, more remain to be found; the plays and sonnets are far from being all Guidance will be given in the discovery of the hidden wisdom underlying and available within the outer vesture of the literature which is so magnificent The poems, essays, and other contemporary inspired writings, when lightly and deeply read, reveal both the wisdom of the ages and its practical application to human living, especially as the age of Light begins to dawn. The “spear’’ is the flashing wisdom-light: like all power it trembles (technically it “vibrates”) as it flashes forth from its own realms into the world-mind in general, and into those minds in particular of men and women who can receive it. The very name of the supposed author means in this sense “trembling light”. That name, with these significances and with this knowledge of symbolism in mind, largely influenced Bacon in his choice of a reputed author and a pseudonym. Through his benefit [kindness] to humanity he wished to have available a trembling Ray or Spear of Light from the inner to the outer worlds and minds of men. He is therefore worthy to be regarded as one of the very greatest benefactors of the human race, whose value to humanity can hardly be overestimated.

5 September 1968 - Old School House, Aldworth, Berkshire

FRAGMENT OF THE FOURTH PART OF INSTAURATIO MAGNA

Impressions received by Geoffrey Hodson whilst examining this manuscript which consists entirely of drawings and symbols:

The author, I think, is the same man (presumably Francis Bacon) who was earlier seen at the end of a tunnel, in a cell, writing. He is smiling as if both enjoying his mental and higher mental state, and revealing truth while concealing it (as in a charade). His thought seems to be somewhat as follows: “Wisdom, which gives power and knowledge (which in turn give strength) must be delivered under the rose.”

Geoffrey attributes the authorship of this book to Francis Bacon in his Self-inspired and divinely inspired state of consciousness. In this condition he differs greatly from the outer man living the apparently outer life. The long tunnel and the cell may be symbols of the transition of the former into the latter, although various impressions do indicate the actual use of a place of retreat, within the secrecy of which alone he could give himself up to inward inspiration and “vehicleship” from on high.

This book is only a portion of a larger one similarly produced, namely by the impartation of wisdom in symbolical form, thus evoking the reader’s or viewer’s intuition whereby and wherewith symbol becomes transformed into the Light of unchanging truth and law.

As in other attempted contacts, Geoffrey Hodson again receives the impression that the writer (Francis Bacon) is conscious of the limitations of time, and that he must hasten if this part of his life’s work is to approach its fulfilment. Yes, lost works or secret works were also produced, one day perchance to be found. In this book, Francis Bacon would seem to have regarded his life-work to be a unity composed of many self-integrated parts; everything he did being thus directed and produced. Even sketches, playlets, poems, plays, and great literary works were integral parts of a whole which included all his symbolism, ceremonialism, and the occult Orders.

Another impression repeatedly received is that Francis Bacon himself was not only hastening but was almost driven; as if the great spiritual forces and truths, upon which the Ancient Mysteries were formed (to liberate and reveal respectively), were at work on him and in him like a ferment.

If this is true, as Geoffrey Hodson believes, then Bacon succeeded in providing the first steps towards the re-opening of those Mysteries to modern man, and is still engaged in that work... the Great Work.

Concerning the book under examination, he thinks that the pages are to be regarded as in some way successive, and that the later ones contain, or rather refer to, deeper layers of Truth than the earlier ones. In other words, the book is also systematic. Proffered interpretations could be of very great value in modern days.

*****

On leaving the Old School House, Geoffrey Hodson felt moved to say that he thinks this faculty of discerning the actual site of secretly deposited manuscripts and other objects, will undergo a gradual development if further used. Only during these few days in the eighty-second year of his life has he attempted to use the kind of clairvoyance necessary to achieve the following:

1. To see through tomb-stones and other opaque matter.

2. To read the Akashic Record of the area, which especially depicts the time when the deposits were supposedly made.

3. To respond intuitively to guidance from various sources, such as those men who were intimately associated with Francis Bacon and possibly more evolved Beings, and so to receive some direction concerning the project in general and the procedures for local research.

All the above have been applied to the problem, and with some apparently useful results, e.g., the feigned death, the empty tomb at St Michael’s, the book of Euclid, and the suggestion that the Burton Tomb and Westminster Abbey are significant locations in the search and research. Had Geoffrey Hodson’s faculties been sharper and previously used, he thinks that he could have found better results, and that further practice would develop a greater faculty, should it become part of his work. He offers these thoughts to those who honoured him with the invitation to collaborate with them, and who provided support and hospitality. ‘

1969

AN OCCULT EXPERIENCE IN THE HIGHER PLANES OF CONSCIOUSNESS AND BEING, OVER THE NORTH OF INDIA

The gathering was in the northern hemisphere and seemingly in the air and higher planes over North India. So-called “couriers” kept coming and going in the service of the presiding Beings—Adepts. These messengers were white, shining members of the Angelic Hosts, though some superhuman Beings also participated in this activity.

At a certain stage in the proceedings, everyone became completely still, almost as if frozen into immobility in yogic silence and quietude. The gathering at this time could be likened to a radar “dish” built of human beings, highly evolved and specialized (Initiated), silenced to receive inflowing power at the highest levels—mostly beyond my capacity to see and interpret. The effect upon my consciousness was as if the floor of the great “stadium” began to be covered with an intensely brilliant gold and fiery “liquid”, layer upon layer, reaching down to the level of the physical earth and even penetrating far below it.

This is probably a materializing and symbolizing memory of the inpouring from extraterrestrial sources, notably the Sun and the Solar Logos and His Ministers, of a kind of transcendent fiery power for the service of all life unfolding on earth, physically and superphysically. I received and remember an impression of the Sun as a “Being” rather than an orb of light as seen physically—a limited perception of a projection to planetary planes of the attention of the Solar Logos and His Archangelic Ministers in awe-inspiring power.

It seemed that all bowed, even the highest Adepts, whether inwardly or in the bodily sense I cannot say, but there was a united obeisance. The great Presence filled the sky, hovering over the earth and both enfolding and saturating it superphysically with solar power and life and light...

My consciousness was and is filled with many thoughts, items of knowledge, in fact. Amongst these is the realization that, unlike its physical condition, the planet earth is not separated from the rest of the solar system and particularly the Sun which, if only for a moment of illumination, was known as a unit within the vast Being and life of Ishvara, or the Solar Logos.

All beings as “cells” and perhaps “molecules” in the vast body and aura of the Lord of the Sun were seen to be filled with His life and to be part of Him, as are molecules and cells of one’s physical body. This was one part of the night’s experiences, so very imperfectly remembered and understood. The keynote was that those present, including the younger souls, entered into the Samadhi-state of realized oneness and knowledge of the all-enclosing and preserving Lord of the Sun as a transcendent Individuality Who, at this time especially, revealed Himself to all who could know Him.

The second remembered part of the great occasion consisted of some kind of Baptism of Solar Fire. I think the candidates were laid down in the Solar Fire-force which was concentrated upon the planet during the proceedings. The candidates were almost unconscious in their mental bodies which became saturated with this wondrous force, and as Initiate-Egos they experienced what could perhaps be described as an interior “sunrise”, not distant and rising above a horizon, but occurring deep within their natures.

Otherwise expressed, the Atma was tremendously enhanced by an inflow of the Solar Atma or Paramatma as a kind of golden, liquid fire. This was not an official Step, I perceive, but a benediction received and, of course, a preparation for a Step by Baptism in or of Solar Fire.

The personalities of the candidates were unconscious, the whole experience taking place principally at the Atmic and Buddhic levels and greatly affecting the Egos in the Causal bodies. They came back to consciousness and were presented to some of those present, everyone being in a highly exalted and illumined state. There was an entire absence of both sequential thinking in time and of any emotion whatever, the whole being blissful but far beyond anything that could be described as feeling.

The “Baptism” was an extraordinary spectacle and experience. The partly entranced mental body of a candidate was laid flat in the reservoir of Solar Life-Light-Fire, which seeped into and was absorbed by it as if being soaked up. The Ego participated but was not entranced and knew what was occurring. This Initiatory spectacle which I witnessed was an enactment in actuality of the myth of Danae; for the “shower of gold” is the very “Fire of God”, whilst Danae is the Initiate-Ego, and the “tower” the mortal vehicle in which the Ego is, so to speak, imprisoned.

All during the following day I was almost continually conscious of the touch of power on my body and of being urged to write.

6 April 1969 - Auckland, New Zealand

Master Polidorus Isurenus

TEACHING CONCERNING THE ARHAT DEGREE

Not only chant the Aum; become the Aum!

In his higher Self, the Arhat is made one with the company of the “Gods”. This means that he is not only a human Monad-Ego, communicating with and collaborating with the Archangels and Their Hosts, but is also consciously one with Them, part of Their life and kingdom as They are part of his. As the Sephiras are all emanations of the Logos and therefore parts of Him, so the Monad-Ego of man realizes, knows that self-same unity between himself and all the mighty hosts of the angels. Their Atmic-Buddhic-Manasic vehicles are made of the same substances, supplied from the same single source. At the Atmic level to which, during the ceremony, the Arhat is elevated, the actual oneness of consciousness and life is known as a living Truth. For the Arhat, ever after, “Gods” and men are one, their very essence being part of the Eternal Principle.

The “Avitchi” of the Fourth Initiation is simply rescue work. The Ego finds itself amongst those lost and broken souls who by sheer, deliberate, self-chosen wickedness and selfishness, persisted in as a kind of purpose for living, are in the depths of “hell”, in a state of consciousness in which there is no light and no hope of light, in which there is no Life-Principle and so only a living “death”. This is a condition—waveless, indeed—in which such people find themselves after death of the physical bodies.

The Arhat approaches them on a saving and redeeming mission and because he himself has not so lived, he retains even whilst in the depths, his own vital, illumined, Egoic awareness. He is voluntarily in the Avitchi-state, but not of it, and so can return. Whilst there, he mentally appeals, offering himself as a rescuer for anyone sufficiently conscious of and regretful of error to grasp his outstretched hand and so be “saved”. So the entry into Avitchi of the Arhat is not an entry into Avitchi itself as “hell”-consciousness, but as a mission offering redemption to “lost” souls, meaning mental and astral bodies.

The achievement of the Arhat Initiation is, however, dependent upon successful passage through the “hell” of aloneness followed by enormously exhilarating realization that one ever has been, is, and ever will be, one with the Godhead. It is this which makes possible the rest of the procedure of the Fourth Initiation.

The Arhat-Monad-Ego becomes the Logos and in a brief period passes through and experiences the forthgoing and return—death and resurrection—of the outpoured Logoic and Monad-bearing Life-wave. The Arhat-Monad experiences in a timeless moment what the Logos experiences during Maha-Manvantara, but, of course, in miniature, as it were. The Solar Logoi are evolving and also passing through, at lofty levels beyond our conceiving, great Initiations of which these Initiations are reflections. This may be thought of as the heart and key of the Arhat Rite, namely, the Monad-Ego is fully conscious of identity with the Logos and shares in the experience of Logoic forthgoing and return.

Actually, the last words spoken from the Cross, “Eloi, Eloi, Lama Sabachthani”[126] should be thus translated: “My God, My God, how Thou dost glorify me!” For it is this which happens and this we must say when writing of the Crucifixion of Jesus.

Now, the difficulty associated with the Fourth Degree, unless the Initiate, ovArhat, rather, is living in a Sanctuary, is that the full effects of it are only gradually realized. This is so chiefly to preserve from strain. Arhatship is, of course, a great benediction for the Monad-Ego which reaches it. It is also a time of possible psychic strain, as the tremendous power gradually manifests itself in the personality.

About October 1969 - Perth, West Australia

ARHATSHIP

[Geoffrey recollects standing before a number of the Great Ones and receiving this teaching at the beginning of the Australian work, in which evidently much inner interest is felt and expressed on behalf of the Brotherhood. An Adept Whom Geoffrey does not recognize especially greeted him and received him into His Presence and activity. He being the Adept in charge of Egos evolving in Australian bodies.

It was as if he had been presented and paid his respects to the King, Lord, or Ambassador-in-Chief of a country. At this level there are no “places” such as an ashram, garden, or temple, these forms being transcended in consciousness. He concludes that the audience occurred at the Causal level, in “Heliou Basileuma, the radiance of Apollo, the Kingdom of the Sun”.]

Amongst the teachings concerning the Arhat Degree of the Greater Mysteries:

The widely stretched, open arms of Christ upon the cross indicate also deeper levels of every personal proclivity, tendency, and inherent attribute whenever these could influence and even limit either inner attitude or outer conduct. The whole personal nature and Ray tendencies, for example, are transcended quite naturally, and the whole Logos of the Soul or Monad-Atma is freely and fully expressed without inhibitions. This is a very great liberation.

The “Open Heart”[127] symbol also expresses this total Monadic manifestation, and this is essential to the attainment of Adeptship in which no faintest tinge of any kind of classification or terms of reference must remain. The Adept, be it remembered, is a complete and total manifestation of the whole Logos at the level of the Fifth Initiation. Thereafter, the more widely expanded field of Logoic expression is achieved, culminating, of course, in being a Logos.

The antahkarana of an Arhat is between Buddhi and Atma, whilst in the First Degree Initiate it is between Higher Manas and Buddhi. In the Adept it is between Atma and the Monad and so the Logos. Arhat Yoga is Logos Yoga, just as Initiate Yoga is Atma Yoga, which is still practised.

The Arhat has to acquire the habit of affirming and thinking of himself as Monad-Ego, as a child of the Logos, He the parent and the seven Principles of the Sun as the “Home”. Thus shall he finally penetrate more and more deeply into the heart of being. The Arhat has to try to elevate consciousness, if only in imagination, into the Sun, physical and spiritual, “Our Lord the Sun”. This is Solar Yoga, the Yoga of the Arhat and Adept.

Arhatship, together with the three preceding Initiations, is as it were, a milestone or position of near attainment on the road to Adeptship.

So it is ever to be remembered that the ultimate truth and the ultimate goal consists of ALLNESS or limitless width, depth, and height. In manifestation there must be classifications, such as the Rays or primary Monadic attributes. So, in the Great Brotherhood of Adepts, there is an Arhat classification, grouping, and particular kind of instruction, yoga, state of consciousness, or outlook.

1969 - Perth, Western Australia

THE SURVIVAL OF ANIMALS AFTER DEATH

I noticed the little dog Rexie, whom we had known and who had died about one year ago. He was inside the lower part of the aura, or auric “dress”, of his mistress. The little dog would not continue to exist astrally indefinitely by himself, being in reality not much more now than a shell, though just enough awake to know that he was with his beloved mistress.

When animals die, they continue for a time proportionate to their evolutionary development and the existence of someone on the astral plane—or, rather, with an astral body—who can hold them together, who aids them to extend their life-span long beyond the normal period. After a few months, the superphysical bodies of domestic animals begin to fade out and the intelligent life flows back into the Group Soul. They begin to look as if they are disintegrating when this process starts; then the little form—which is only just a shell—breaks up and all the atoms go back into the free elemental essence to be used again.

But Rexie loved his mistress so much that when he began to feel himself “dying” in his little astral body, he nestled into her aura, which comforted him. He is still doing this, but is beginning to fade out He is actually rather far gone, in fact. But there is just a tiny bit of him still there, like a gentle heartbeat, so that he knows where he is, and his mistress lets him stay, thus making the transition easier for him. But he is going very rapidly now and soon will be gone; for he was not individualized, clever little fellow though he was. I could see Rexie like a reddish-brown coloured little creature round the lower part of the auric “dress”.

Approximately early 1970s

The Angel Teacher Bethelda

ADVICE FOR WORK IN ENGLAND

Teach truth; refuse to discuss personalities upon which truth does not depend. Stress and persistently proclaim freedom of thought within the Theosophical Society as long as it does not harm either the Movement or other people, and carefully avoid discussions...That was a good example of “dipping down” [Geoffrey’s making the sentence correct] from Causal to mental consciousness. You may well think out other ways with the purpose of showing the practical value, not only of Causal consciousness, but also the ability to enter and draw upon it even in the midst of a task demanding concrete thought.

Salutations to you and congratulations on your world mission and travel, and especially upon the most valuable and valued meditation combined with healing invocations for suffering ones which provide not only benediction and help for them, but also opportunities whereby the many Orders of Angels upon which you call may, and definitely do, collaborate. This is a service of priceless value in all its aspects and especially to the profoundly venerated Queen of the Angels Herself, and Her hosts.

30 June 1971 - Aldworth, Berkshire, England

Whilst walking in an open field on the crest of the Berkshire Downs this morning, my attention was suddenly attracted to the presence and vision of a great angel—silver and gold—hovering high in the air before and above me. As I saluted in response, the sky was suddenly full of angels gathered around the first one, making a glorious company of shining ones, somewhat less evolved, it would seem, than the first one seen. On capturing my full attention in salutation, it seemed as if all chanted to me, “Come back, come back to your own native land, come back to us, come back to us!”

As I responded with the mental assurance of our return, my mind was strongly attracted to the valley and Bethelda with the thought that there was further work to be done with Him.

14 September 1971 Krotona, Ojai, California, U.S.A.

Master Kuthumi

Yes, I am in the same body and expect to be so for at least a hundred years and more. Some of Our Shaberons have bodies which are over five hundred years old and perfectly efficient. The Adept, you know, has discovered and partaken of the Elixir of Life.

Try, as you are doing, to preserve your own body as long as you can, useful as it is both to Us and to yourself. For it is a humanity and Adept-serving body... (He smiles at me.) Write on, remembering that Pencil I gave you so long ago. It was a mystery then, wasn’t it? Now most, but not all, of the mystery has become reality. Our blessings upon you here and at this moment, and also when and wherever you go, Initiated channel that you are.

1971 - Krotona, Ojai, California

AN OCCULT EXPERIENCE

As work on the book, The Priestly Ideal, was approaching its end, superphysically I was at what appeared to be a library and museum of antiquities. I was shown some comparative passages in both the Liberal Catholic Church Liturgy and very old documents, some of which consisted of unbound sheets rather resembling the Dead Sea Scrolls. I was informed that these were preserved rituals of the Ancient Mysteries, more particularly Egyptian, and I think Chaldean and other countries in the Middle East. Although I could not read them, my “Friend”[128] helped me to distinguish certain parts of these ancient rituals which had correspondences with Christian liturgies, notably that of the Liberal Catholic Church.

Druidism, it seems, is the most modern and most direct form of the preserved Mysteries, especially in the secret rites. I see a portrait... of an Adept resembling closely the portrait known to some as that of the Master Jesus.

This out-of-the-body experience, which seemed to me to have taken place in a Retreat in Lebanon, introduced me to a great Personage Whose existence is unknown outside the circle of Initiates…

23 September 1972 St Michael’s Centre, Huizen (Naarden), North Holland

The Archangel Bethelda

Before you leave Europe, may I reaffirm our most intimate link as Monads, dedicated to the Source of all living beings at all levels of evolution from mineral to man. I hold all your visits as far as mere geography is concerned, continually in My mind and Self and assure you of the fullest use of the high degree of channelship which you provide in the mental, emotional, and physical worlds. Only there does the need exist Here, in the worlds within those worlds, all is well, shining with the purest Light, beams from the One ever stainless Source. Continue, My brother, your noble endeavours both to realize ever more deeply that One pure Source and to express that realization in your lives of service and “mission” amongst your fellow men.

As you see and have more than once been reminded, distance has no significance in our association. Yes, Geoffrey, the trees are there as I see you now perceive them, but we are ever world-wide, treeless, placeless, nationless, even wordless in our real natures, for as you know, this planet earth has no confining power for ourselves, free as we are and ever will be of all imprisoning circumstances and ideas.

Continue your message, I pray you, which is Our message, of the Brotherhood of Angels and of Men. I knew all your ideas in Germany and even received the vibrations of your closing words: “A Brotherhood of Angels and of Men”. Continue, for this is indeed your mission, intimately at one as it is with Our mission for humanity and every living being. I am and ever will be easily within your reach, respecting as I do, however, the greater ease of communion and communication which existed and exists in and at our valley.[129] Rest assured that your prayers, Sandra, for angel guardianship for our Geoffrey, are ever heard and will be ever answered; for his mission is very far from ended yet; neither is the conclusion at all near in terms of earthly time. In Our timeless world, of course, it never ends nor ever will.

Yes, My Brother, words from Java may well be published suitably. Angel guardianship, angel healing, and angel inspiration of the intellect will ever be fully available to you and each one of those for whom, by you, it may be and is sought. I read your thought, but remember that even our valley is “everywhere”.

(I was philosophically hoping that the valley might still be visited again—physically, of course. Bethelda saw this, hence his closing remarks.)

About December 1971—January 1972

Master Polidorus Isurenus

You are enfolded in the love and the light and the power of your fellow Initiates of the Great White Brotherhood on Earth, and nothing need disturb those who are riding upon the great evolutionary wave...

1972

An Adept

ENCOURAGEMENT FOR AN ASPIRANT

(A Message through Geoffrey)

Whilst expressing my deep sympathy for you in all the great and long-continued sufferings and trials through which you are passing, I venture to remind you that you have voluntarily placed yourself upon the ancient Pathway which leads in advance of the normal evolutionary procedure to Initiation and Adeptship. In consequence, the life of every great Initiate and prospective Saviour of man has inevitably to be lived. It is just, therefore, as Jesus—though perhaps at a later stage than your present one passed through His grievous Gethsemane and Golgotha. In Gethsemane, according to the Gospel story, He shrank from the sufferings which had already begun when He found His normally trusted disciples asleep in the hour of His need. His hesitation was assuredly but brief since He surrendered His personal will to that of the Father saying, “...not my will, but thine, be done.”[130] Thereafter, He steadfastly stepped forward towards Jerusalem.

Such, My dear fellow student, is the unchanging and unalterable Pathway which you are now treading. Such for every true-hearted and stalwart seeker for the Light is the Gethsemane which—adapted to personal karma, payment of which is being hastened—must be experienced and endured. In your present most serious plight, the demands of which I in no wise wish to minimize, you are not alone but stand with every other true and faithful occult aspirant who has in the past experienced, and at this time is experiencing, the testing and purifying trials which lead to the goal, the Path to which, as Monad-Ego and personality, you have irrevocably chosen to tread.

My message to you, therefore, can only consist of one word, even whilst I share your tribulation. That word is ENDURE, to which I may add, AND LEARN ALL YOU CAN FROM YOUR DIFFICULTIES. Especially would I recommend careful self-examination, day by day, with a self-determination towards the possible acquirement in the highest degree of the art of being wholly and at all times harmoniously acceptable to those with whom you find yourself in personal contact.

In your darkness, I assure you that in your true Self and in the qualities of character, which you so outstandingly and admirably display throughout your difficulties, you are truly robed in Light. Dark though your way seems to be and really is at the personal level, you are nevertheless both shining inwardly and moving quite rapidly towards your entry into the Egoic Light. Your every tear is recognized and your depression and despair, so bravely endured, regarded with the most compassionate sympathy and concern by both Myself and My Brothers. God bless you and keep you steadfast until that day, which I assure you will really come, when you are free to order your life according to your own will and to enjoy the company of those you love so much and who so deeply love and admire and respect you. May I advise you to maintain a clear picture of your great Master continually in your heart and mind.

About October 1972 - Krotona, Ojai, California

THE HEALING DEVA

Geoffrey tells me that this healing deva is involved with all the present invoked healing forces and also linked with the Archangel Bethelda, the inspirer of his angel books. He is stationed in front of and above Geoffrey during the beautiful healing meditations and descent of the healing forces. He directs the power. Geoffrey describes the upper part of the angel as being all white, while rose, green, and blue, amongst other scintillating colours, form the lower part of the aura. In his consciousness, in relation to Geoffrey’s, there is the whole greenery of Sheepscombe Wood. The angel communicates to Geoffrey:

“Your thought and power and our thought and power flash swiftly, but please grant a little more time between names.

“Your reference to Tehuti is well made since, under the influence of the Being and Order which Tehuti represents, you performed such rituals in the Egypt of long ago. Should you ever return to Karnak, try to enter and meditate while in the actual quarters occupied during an Egyptian life, allowing the Akasha to revivify both memories and links with ourselves, the Hierarchy of Angels of those ancient days.

“The four ‘Sons of Horus’ may truthfully be regarded in one of their meanings as the Hierarchies of devic Agencies of the Four Quarters and the Four Elements. The modern Masonic ceremony is a renewal of those links, little though the Freemasons of today recognize the fact. Proceed and continue to walk upon the earth as the operative occultist which you are in a very real sense of those words.

“The invocation and distribution of power which you practise is the correct and effective one. The Tehud-principle of and within the Logos, or Amen-Ra, was partially embodied in Hermes Trismegistus,^{^[131]} Who was a real Personage, the Avatara on behalf of Ancient Egypt and particularly its Mysteries, Lesser and Greater.”

The angel bowed and “flashed” away. He operates at the mental level and has withdrawn into the arupa worlds. Such angels do not “go away”. Rather do they withdraw their attention from the temporary vehicle in the realm of concrete thought from which they also function in other forms of collaboration with human beings.

October 1972 - Adyar, India

INITIATE LIFE

(The Unawakened and the Awakened)

The newly awakened person is by analogy and by direct symbolism referred to as “a little child”. Indeed, this child-state is said to be essential. “Except ye... become as little children, ye shall not enter into the kingdom of heaven.”^{^[132]}

Just as in physical childhood, one needs at first to move on hands and knees and only later to stand erect and walk, so the neophyte does well at first to adopt the mental posture of the child, particularly in its implications of recognized, very appropriate, and essential humility. Then, and perhaps only then, may he safely begin to “stand erect and learn gradually to walk”. Even so, the helping hand of parents, nurse, or others is needed and should, in the mystical context, always be gratefully accepted, even sought

Thus, we may learn from the posture which Nature imposes upon the child to proceed carefully and with humility as the mysterious procedure of spiritual awakening takes place—a veritable “birth” indeed!

Running, of course, comes later as the child grows. So also, the newly awakened one will surely be well advised to exercise all care in ceasing to use all available help whilst remaining a completely faithful observer of all available guidance, promises made, and ideals accepted. Indeed, at no stage along the Path is it either advisable or permissible to fall away from, forget, or neglect any of the procedures, pledges, and promises undertaken from the very beginning of entry upon the Pathway of Hastened Attainment

The analogy between physical and spiritual childhood is very close indeed, and it is advisable that comparable rules be obeyed. Fortunately, from the very first moment at which sincere and self-free adoption of the ideals is made, help is available. At the moment at which a human being awakens to the ideal of hastened attainment for the sake of humanity alone, one of the great Masters becomes aware of that event and begins to provide such aids as are both advisable in His eyes and permitted according to the karma of the individual. Indeed, it is perfectly true to say that from that moment, the Master knows. No one is ever left alone to try to pass through the mire-filled ground, but is strengthened spiritually, guided intuitionally and intellectually and, within his karma, is assisted physically.

One is wise when one listens to this inward “voice”, taking care, however, to avoid being misled by the imagination. One test of such teaching is that it is logical, that it is accompanied by a sense of inspiration, and persists after the experience of guidance is concluded. Of course the best and wisest plan is to include within one’s daily periods of contemplation what might be called a mental “listening”, which implies a period of silent attention to the voice of the Master, or one’s higher Self.

Although apparently accentuated in this historical period, spiritual awakening has always occurred. The difference between the unawakened and the awakened person, however, may not easily be perceived, and therefore one should be very careful not to judge by the outer individual and his behaviour alone; for such ones may actually be undergoing a kind of preliminary awakening which, for the time being, is not observable. The transformation may be very gradual and that of the outward life hardly discernible. Nevertheless, deeply interior changes may be occurring: a kind of “yeast” if one may so name the Masonic influence, is at work, rather like a ferment in the mind.

Those, on the other hand, who have already achieved the transformation in former lives, may quite swiftly bring it about in the present incarnation. Thus, an apparent outward difference is visible. It is important, however, that the more advanced should not either criticize or derogate the less advanced, for in spirit all are one and the only difference consists of the degree of unfoldment

22 November 1972 - Adyar, India

From Master Polidorus Isurenus

THE MASTER THE PRINCE RAKOCZY

(The Great Chohan Head of the Seventh Ray)

Whilst the name and princely title may be retained by the great Adept for exoteric purposes, it must be remembered that although the body was thus born and is of that rank, He Himself has so far transcended His earthly vehicle that it cannot be said to represent Him, the Mahatma, Great Spirit. It is only a kind of vessel or vehicle used largely, we may assume, for thought processes.

Actually, true though the name of the body is, it no longer refers to Him, since although He maintains it, He would seldom be functioning through it on the physical plane; for the Master the Prince Rakoczy must be infinitely more Atmic and Fohatic than physical. The triangle is, as it were, reversed for Him—and indeed for all Adepts, Initiates of the Fifth Stage in the Greater Mysteries—and the physical is the minute apex whilst the largest consciousness and being is at the widest place, namely, the base of the upturned triangle.

The same is true, surely, for His supposed portraits? Whilst they have a certain likeness to the body and face, they fail almost completely to portray Him, particularly in His function of Hierophant of the Mysteries. When we view the portrait of the H.O.A.T.F.,[133] let us remember that this portrait is not a true likeness of the great Adept Head of the Seventh Ray. The Master Rakoczy is the V.M.B., the ever continuing and immortal, spiritual Being, part of Whose task has been to help, by means of the ceremonial way, to preserve the Ancient Mysteries through the dark eras and to resuscitate them as and when the darkness has sufficiently given place to Light.

Our faithfulness, our dedication to Co-Masonry, our living of the Masonic code of ethics and life out in the world, will prove most beneficial in driving the darkness away and helping to restore the Light to a world of chaotic confusion and—to a great extent—spiritual darkness. For is it not humanity as a whole which is blindfolded? And only as the members of the human race reach the mystical “altar” (their own divine Selves, wherein they meet the Divine Self of the Universe) will the racial blindfold be removed and the blessing of Light be restored. ,

Even then, there will remain the danger that mankind, with the various exceptions, will replace the blindfold of ignorance upon itself and His great “project” and also ours—the restoration of the Ancient Mysteries in this our day and age—will be destroyed of its fulfilment. So let us keep on and on using our best intuitions and intelligence, so as to bring the benediction of Light to the real seekers amongst mankind. They are still but few, although their numbers will gradually increase as the race evolves out of its obsessions with self and separateness into selflessness and realized unity, bringing nearer the dawn of that great day when all over the world there will have become recognized the Brotherhood of Man.

1973-1975
RETURN TO NEW ZEALAND

27 January 1973 - Auckland, New Zealand

Master Polidorus Isurenus

When you speak reverently of the Solar Logos and the Hierarchies—both Kabbalistic and of Planetary Schemes and planet—remind [your listeners] more than once that these Beings, however great and wonderful They are, beyond our conceiving, are in no sense whatever separate from ourselves. They are part of us, we are part of Them. They are in us, we are in Them. Then, include some references to the Logos in the more mystical sense and advise realistic meditation of unity with the great Being and all the mighty Hierarchy of all the Dhyan Chohans. Mention this also when you come to the Planetary Hierarchy. Affirm the same and advise meditation upon unity with Them and living and serving in Their names.

1973 Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

In Occult homeopathy, recognition is given to the hidden Life and its nature spirit and angelic representatives in every chemical product... In Occult Astrology, recognition is similarly given to the Archangelic Regents of stars and planets and Their cohorts whenever a natal or a progressive horoscope is studied and expounded.

About 1973 Auckland

ROSE DEVAS IN HEALING AND MYSTERY RITUAL

Two rose devas—deva and devi—are observed. One is the power source and the other its expression and application (devi). Both participate in the ritual, but the devi tends to go to those in sickness and trouble “cases”, one might say. With each, there are others of the same Order who divide the healing work among them. The deva remains whilst this is being done, very friendly and responsive to my recognition, especially the ideal of collaboration. In this ceremonial, the devas surround those taking part in the ritual and accompany from within it the streams of love-force sent out upon the world by the Hierophant

They are resplendently shining and really Buddhic in nature and stature. The rose colour shows itself in and through them when they come near to human beings and collaborate at about Manas 4,[134] counting from above, there being no veil in their case between arupa and rupa consciousness—one of the differences between devas and men.

Another difference is the entire absence of ahamkara in the devas. The other devas are Atmic, being pure white in their radiance and very tall at least twenty feet. They are associated with the Occult Hierarchy more especially, and collaborate with Them. They are at the evolutionary level of the First Initiation, and even higher.

This is a wonderful Order of representatives of the Planetary Archangel Who is intimately associated with the Lord of the World. Two of these beings are collaborating with the special work for and with the World Mother.

The mention of the patients’ names gives the devas an instant clue and link with the sufferers, and when these names are pronounced, power flashes into and through the Egos of the recipients, whilst the rose devas remain and continue the healing work.

There are also two blue devas of the main colour of the blue regalia. They are Masonic devas and attached or linked at and after installation as R.W.M.[135] They are also co-operative in every class of the Seventh Ray activity, which includes all World Mother or Third Aspect (of the God-head) service. During ceremonials, the rose devas are on the left and above the shoulders and the blue devas are on the right, whilst the great white devas are directly above the heads of those participating. The Star of that great Being—the Spiritual King of the World—simply blazes in the upper auras of these devas of the Brotherhood. Every time the Reigning Head invokes the blessing of the Great White Brotherhood, all of these and their colleagues instantly and fully participate.

Rose devas sometimes stay with one or other of an audience, whilst the general impulse and angelic ministration of the power of the Occult Hierarchy is more inclusive, touching everyone present.

The Master Rakoczy knows about this activity and adds power, occasionally participating in person where there are large attendances, for example.

All the devas withdraw from active participation when no invocation is being uttered, mentally or physically, with the exception of the gold and rose devas.

16 January 1974 - 17 Belvedere Street,-Epsom, Auckland

Master Morya

THE ASHRAM CENTRE

[At a highly privileged audience with the Master Morya, He spoke, saying:]

… You will find drawn to you certain of Our reincarnated disciples and Initiates seeking and receiving your aid. This is one important part of your work throughout this period...Watch for them, whether their bodies are old or young. Your intuition will be sufficient guide, though the true disciple in each life will always be detectable by the presence of the quality of THE SEARCH. The house and ground also are already becoming charged so that all who draw near and enter are touched by Power. The groups which will be held are also of especial importance. Amongst them you may also discern here and there either a reincarnated disciple or those approaching Discipleship. You are empowered to ensure that the Path, the individual Master, the Stages of Discipleship and Initiation are all available, open, and operative even though what are known as Pronouncements may not be given.

Keep the Light of occult development burning as brightly as you can. Include it, together with the much needed ideal of compassion, in the forefront of every lecture you give here in this house and elsewhere.

So far as your karma permits, and it seems to be favourable, you are now “Centre-Builders”.

Continue ever more forcefully to invoke and radiate power and blessing upon individuals of the world. Continue also in the almost perfect conditions which now are yours to receive and publish books upon the Occult Life; for this is the keynote of these years of your present incarnation.

Encourage all aspirants and make them feel part of your “Occult Family”. Time alone will show how such a procedure will succeed.

29 January 1974 - Auckland

Master Morya .

STEPS TO SPIRITUAL ILLUMINATION.

(Guidance to an Aspirant)

The steps in attaining illumination are:

1. To recognize intellectually that you are two beings, one spiritual and the other physical.

2. To unite these two in physically-awakened awareness.

3. To so direct and then still the brain-mind that it becomes receptive to the guidance of the “Inner Man”.

4. To practise a personally suitable (meaning effective) form of yoga, notably Mantra Yoga and the chanting of the Sacred Word.

5. To achieve transference of the centre of awareness from most of the limitations of physical awareness and to unite with, identify with, the Inward Self, thereby permitting that Self to communicate its state of consciousness to the outer man.

This is attainable always granting that the Inner Self is sufficiently evolved and the outer person has practised effective yoga for the necessary period of time. What to the brain consciousness is a series of ideas, to the Adept in Causal consciousness is one concept-experience, i.e., as “sunlight” in the Causal, and split up into the colours of the spectrum in the brain-mind.

2 March 1974 - The Manor, Sydney, Australia

Master Polidorus Isurenus

SEVENTH RAY YOGA

(Advice for Aspirants)

The tendency of Seventh Ray people is to become active and learn to work more and more effectively with the mechanisms by which life and the forces of the Logos and the Masters become operative. This approach to activities of various kinds in the physical and mental worlds tends to become for them the more natural way of working.

In the practice of prayer, contemplation, and systems of yoga, they are also deeply concerned with methods, forces, effects upon body, brain, and mind, and ways of obtaining results from the practices of yoga. These results can also be partly, but of course not entirely, concerned with experiences within the body, and particularly its more important parts which deal with consciousness, the brain and its components, for in so far as they bear added activity, can these results become sufficiently strong to be felt. All this is not only natural but of course can become very useful, helpful, and encouraging. But it must not, I strongly suggest, become the whole procedure of yoga…

I would suggest that, in addition, and as you doubtless already do, you experiment with that which the word yoga really means. This does include methods but actually means the experience of identity with one’s own inwardly pervading, spiritual life—and more subtle still, one’s own Atmic Spirit-Essence and thence experienced Self-identity with the same indwelling Life and Atmic power-principle in everything around one, the Universe as a whole, indeed.

Now this experience is the goal up to which all methods are tending, and it is important that the methods should not absorb too much of the thought, time, intent, and objectives of one’s yoga life.

I am aware that this will seem vague, formless, and beyond the scope of the average mind and almost impossible to include in one’s thought—rather like fishes that are all the time escaping from nets.

If you ask me how to begin or how this may be done, then for all aspirants—differing according to Ray and progress in former lives and this one—it will necessarily include a kind of intellectually listening stillness. So when the necessary and most useful exercises have gone so far and may perhaps be producing effects in terms of vibrating forces then, letting that go on of itself, as it were, be mentally still, seeking intuitively to know of, experience oneness with, the inmost Principle which—remember—is the ONE REALITY in all Nature.

Call it what you will; for no name is really correct. It is “the God Presence”, “the Divine Life-Force”, the upwelling stream and inexhaustible “Pool of Life-Essence”, the One Reality within all forms which, relative to it, are unreal. With such an experience (and this is how you may recognize it) there comes an unmoved and unmoving quietude of consciousness during which an interior happiness pervades the consciousness—bliss-consciousness, in fact. That is how one may know that one is really passing from mechanisms to the objective for which they are operated, namely experience of BEING THE LIFE PRINCIPLE OF NATURE in a state of happiness.

In fact, yoga is happiness-consciousness, or leads thereto. Experiment with this which I am not able to put into clearer words. In fact, no words can encompass, describe, or fitly refer to the enblessed, stilled condition of deeply interior, completely form-free, universal awareness. Only so far can words help. Nothing but direct experience will express the theme, and so, when you have done your practices, experiment with entry into a stilled state of intuitive awareness, of oneness with Divine Presence and Divine Life.

Eventually, method will be shortened and experience take over. As I have already indicated, try also to be aware intuitively of, and one with, the life in everything that exists. Take the flower, take the whole plant and, in bliss, experience unity with the indwelling all-productive Life-Principle.

May I close by saying very firmly: this, and this alone, is yoga in the true meaning of the word.

13 July 1974 - Auckland, New Zealand

THE LAW OF KARMA

I experienced the Presence of a Being Who is the absolute essence of impersonality. This presented itself almost as if symbolical, as if He were slender, rather tall, and with the thin, clean-shaven face of the portrait

The eyes are most impressive, not only in their brilliance, but in their intensity of penetration. If true, this means very literally that, as He turns His attention upon one, nothing remains unknown to Him.

He knows all, not so much or only in terms of actions, incidents, and activities in different lives, but the resultant essence, as it were, or one might say the karmic formula which in some way could be described, perhaps, as almost cosmic and therefore unalterable. An appeal which we might make on behalf of a friend, while natural on our side, is like asking that the time of day be changed by a miracle, which, of course, is impossible, however willing an Adept might be. Our approach to Him included, I think, chiefly a friend’s case which, since the circumstances were created under the [Karmic] Law, cannot be altered.

Despite the detachment where the unalterable Law is concerned, which might be described as “ice-like”, the Being in Whose presence I was must in no slightest sense be regarded as without compassion and its possible expression as tenderness. Quite the contrary. But to put the impression received allegorically, the operation of the Law of Karma resembles the swinging of a kind of cosmic, or terrestrial, or planetary pendulum which is ever unswervingly accurate.

Whilst this may seem cruel, it is far from being so, because all “good” deeds produce proportionate happiness. All this is to be regarded as being taught by the Great One or, if preferred, as my being allowed to learn from this virtually absolute knowledge of Truth.

The equation is not, of course, as simple as that. No action is ever single, but is led up to, performed according to, and followed by associated actions, all of which contribute to the end results at all levels—mental, emotional, and physical.

7 February 1975 - New Zealand

Master Polidorus Isurenus

ADVICE TO AN ASPIRANT

(Concerning the Difficulties of Silencing the Thoughts and Achieving Mental Silence or Stillness in Yoga)

Imagine a shrine like a tabernacle in the centre of the head and put yourself within it, “closing the door” to everything else as if in the Presence of the Host.

One ideal of the yogic Pathway of Gnana-Marga is to become increasingly an “Ego-listening-post”. Whilst within your Egoic listening silence, watch for the arising in your mind of philosophic and occult ideas. After yoga, record these and thus build up your growing personal knowledge which is the goal of Gnana-Marga or the gnani.

10 April 1975 - New Zealand

Master Polidorus Isurenus

The appearance of the three books now being printed and of the two upon which we are working, will be amongst the crowning achievements of your literary life in this incarnation. Therefore let nothing, I say nothing, distract or direct you from the fulfilment of these and the other great tasks on behalf of humanity upon which you are engaged.

In addition, you are influencing—moulding, in fact—the attitudes towards life, Theosophy, the Theosophical Society, and esotericism of present workers and future leaders of the Theosophical Society in New Zealand. Nothing, I repeat, nothing should interrupt this work. It was for these reasons, including others of deep import, that you were both brought here...

20 April 1975 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Yes, Geoffrey, this morning’s Ceremony^{^[136]} is a part of and contributes most helpfully to that symbolically conical descent of power... upon the whole of our planet earth.

Your talk last evening was useful. May I suggest that you continue to stress this theme of the extreme importance—especially just now—of the realization by an increasing number of people, of the fact that the Spirit-Life -Essence manifest throughout all Nature, and so all beings and things, is ONE.

6 June 1975 - New Zealand

Master Polidorus Isurenus

YOGA

After the “mechanics” of the yoga practices are over, and before mental stillness, allow some moments for realization of the true nature:

Affirm, visualize, realize fully as the Monad-Ego: “I am in the reality of my being, shining with divine Light, Splendour, and Beauty. The Glory of the Lord is within me and shining in the middle of my head.”

*****

GEOFFREY HODSON’S PALESTINIAN LIFE

In a Palestinian life of that era, I was privileged to meet the Lord Jesus, however briefly, although in very tragic circumstances. My servant-guide, who was an Egyptian Initiate, had brought me to the small township where Jesus and a group of His disciples were shortly expected. I was about nine years old and responsive to the occult teachings the guide had given me (actually he came to our house for that purpose), and we were standing with a considerable number of people gathered at the side of the street to see Him. I was in the front row and my guide just behind me, whilst in front of me were Roman soldiers or other armed men acting as policemen with weapons like javelins. The Master Jesus came through the arched stone gate of the town on foot with a number of His associates following Him.

When He came opposite where I was standing, the crowd behind pressed forward, so that I was pushed on to the guard in front of me. This annoyed him and he turned around in a bad temper to punish, and ready to kill me as an example to keep the people in obedience. Seeing this, my guide slipped forward and received the point of the javelin in his own breast and fell dead at my feet. I became enraged and was going to assault the soldier when Jesus Himself halted and turned and drew near to the scene. He said, “Do not abuse this man who was but doing his duty. Rather express gratitude for him who has done so much for you and now has given you his life, thereby saving yours.” As He spoke our eyes were linked together, as it were, and I felt a great longing to be admitted to His presence and group, saying, “Master, may I belong to You?”, or some such words. His beautiful large brown eyes looked into mine, doubtless read my destiny, and declined, saying in effect, “Not yet, My son. For you have family obligations to meet and immediate duties to perform. Return then, and meet your responsibilities. Later, We shall see.” The Master Jesus’s skin was slightly browned, rather like a deep tan. He was very erect in carriage as He walked on down the street followed by a number of differently dressed people.

I arranged the burial of my guide and, remorsefully and sadly in one part of myself, and mystically elevated in another, I returned home as instructed and carried out my duties. At home, I had the same double consciousness of grief on the one hand and exaltation on the other since a mystical influence and, as it were, assurance had passed from the Master into my mind and heart, greatly elevating me. I longed to go to Him as I heard of His travellings about our land, but could not do so. Later on in that life I “came” to Jesus and worked for His cause for the rest of my life, having handed over all family duties to a younger brother. In doing His work, I travelled and taught. Ultimately, not being present in person, I heard of all that happened to Him, including His very brutal and untimely death.

In this twentieth century life, looking back, I still see Him as already described, and particularly His wonderful eyes looking deeply into mine and into my very Self. His words remain in my memory something like this: “It is promised you that you shall never be forsaken by Me or severed from all that I represent and am, including the Light which you saw shining about Me.”

30 June 1975 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

ADEPTIC DIRECTION

[An Adeptic direction to Geoffrey to leave a document regarding his knowledge of the validity of the existence of the Masters of the Wisdom upon earth...]

The necessity has arisen with regard to our Cause (the Parent Theosophical Society), for an affirmation [to be prepared, stating], perhaps in all modesty, that you know by direct and continuing experience, that the Great Brotherhood exists, that its named Masters, Who associated with the Parent Theosophical Society during its formative years, continue to take a vital interest in its development and to help where activities and dedicated members and workers exist.

You may also leave on record—to be revealed after your passing, however far ahead—that since the night of your First Great Initiation, you have been capable of lull and unbroken consciousness. Then, from your knowledge and memory, describe your experience on waking next morning and how it has remained even clearer and more evident in your life ever since. State how, about a month later, you received the information from Brother Jinarajadasa—Our Agent at that time—affirming that you had passed the Initiation during the night that preceded your experience on waking, at Mt Maunganui. At your discretion and according to your personal outlook, but always with a view to usefulness, you may affirm that your relationship with Ourselves has remained not only unbroken in your consciousness, but active in your work of writing, teaching, counselling, and healing. For the sake of the continuance of the Occult Tradition, both on earth and in the Parent Theosophical Society, We ask that you make affirmation of your continuous knowledge whilst in good health, and even when ill, of the existence and ministrations of Our Brotherhood.

You may very usefully draw up your declaration and leave your request to Sandra that it be made known at a suitable time.

You might decide to describe the restoration of your life by Master Morya at a hospital in Sydney, Australia (you were in the process of leaving your body finally at that time, you know), and to record other very vital and vivid experiences through which you have passed and continue to pass, your mind and faculties being completely unaffected by the passing of the years of your life.

Yes, your occult Diary and even story, from Jane, fairy and deva, Middleton, Quail, Sandra, and scientific research experiences, the production of literature, world travel in response to invitations to lecture on Theosophy, and fulfilments of the office of Director of Studies at the School of Theosophy at Adyar, as also at Krotona, Geneva, Huizen [Naarden, North Holland], Australia, New Zealand; and continuous, effective healings as a channel for spiritualizing and psychologically corrective forces these could all be included.

We are aware of the heavy demands upon you and of your complete shrinking from self-acclamation, but strongly suggest the production of such a testament before you complete the present incarnation...

24 July 1975 Auckland

Our Lady Mary

[On returning from a walk, Geoffrey became aware of the Presence of Our Lady, Who addressed him as follows:]

I first knew you in Nazareth when you came with your servant to visit My Son, Jesus. I witnessed the tragedy, your outbreak of indignation, your response to My Son’s advice, your flood of tears for your deceased servant who died to save your life (received a spear-thrust from a Roman centurion). I heard My Son’s promise and saw you as a young boy, departing dutifully for your home and duties awaiting you there.

In this present life, I first knew you as an infant baptized in the church dedicated to Me at Wainfleet-St Mary; next, in that small church in the little square in Manchester, where you used to come to meditate and where I caused you to see My aura shining through and around My statue.

Then I assisted in your studies of prenatal life and, through My deva representatives, revealed Myself to your consciousness, as an Adept Who chose the Path of entrance into the Angel Kingdom[137] and was dedicated as Planetary Agent for the more Feminine Aspect and activity of the Solar Logos. As you perceived, I also came to you in the remains of the beech forest in Gloucestershire when you were exalted by your Maha-Deva Teacher Bethelda and you received and have since spread in many parts of the world My “Call”, printed in your book, The Brotherhood of Angels and of Men.

Now in your ninetieth bodily year we have communed, you have opened the mental lines of communication by your talk with its reverent references to Me. This has drawn Me much closer to you. Daily, I and My Maha-Devas and Devis respond to the empowered Invocations on behalf of the suffering world and those known to you who are sick and in need. Thus we are a “team”, My direct co-worker in the darkening world. You now know that I am, therefore, both linked and available within and through your beautiful Adept-inspired tabernacle.

7 August 1975 - 17 Belvedere St, Epsom, Auckland

THE BLESSED LADY MARY

Today, while resting, I found myself thinking about the Blessed Lady Mary and then became aware of Her presence. She requested that I give to and through the Theosophical world, and that of the Liberal Catholic Church, a statement affirming the authenticity of Her existence, and of Her complete reality as a Being. I was also inspired to provide a philosophic and, based upon my experience, an occult exposition that would help the members of the above movements—and so humanity more truly to realize Her veritable existence. She reminded me of the experience of the study of the embryos[138] and Her Presence when receiving The Brotherhood of Angels and of Men.

One of the most remarkable attributes of Our Lady Mary is Her complete humility. She did not, and does not, assume or appear in Her most exalted state as, for example, the Adept Queen of the Angels. I reverently responded to Her Presence as a visiting (if Adept) Friend. She is the highest possible imaginable spiritualized Queen...

Having been and being the Mother of Jesus in the reality of His appearance amongst men and His attainment of Adeptship whilst using that body,^{^[139]} She did Herself attain to Adeptship, took the Fifth Initiation in the Egyptian Mysteries, having also been trained in their Chaldean form, as a woman, meaning in a female body. The tests were very severe in those days, especially for beginners, even for males, but She passed through them all successfully, almost overriding them as it were, instead of being subjected to them. She was then one of earth’s Adepts.

The Master Jesus was inherently a masculine Adept as far as His personality was concerned, though it should be remembered that this does not really apply at the arupa levels, where all Monads are sexless, even though certain predominances might remain, especially for a time. Our Lady, on the other hand, may be described as Monadically and inherently feminine wherever personality was concerned. She left the human kingdom altogether and entered the Angelic Hierarchy, being naturally moved to do so, knowing that with Her nature She could best help onward the evolution of human beings and animals as a Member of the Angelic Hosts.

Difference of sex can in no remotest sense be conceivably applied to Deity and Monads. However, certain cosmogonies, especially the Hindu, teach that a particular highly mystical cosmic energy does function as if oppositely polarized in the fulfilment of the Office of generation of universes. This does not imply male and female, of course, according to the normal human understanding, but rather the universal attributes of positivity, negativity, and a generative interaction.

This Logoic self-differentiation has a profound effect upon the component Monads of the Logos, certain of Whom become more predominantly positive and others negative during the particular period of cosmogenesis or creation. This endures, and the great Being Whom we Christians refer to as Our Blessed Lady is Monadically, if one may so presume to think and say, negative, or is inherently of a polarity that is more negative than positive.

Both of these Orders of Beings are of equal evolutionary stature, of course, and after Adeptship are able to transcend the restrictions of either. Even so, a tendency remains for the inherent polarity to endure and to be voluntarily responded to after Adeptship. Thus, Our Lady entered the Angelic Kingdom on attaining Adeptship, and has chosen to minister to mankind under the Parviti, true Kwan Yin, Ishtar, Hathor-Isis, Lady Mary Individualities.^{^[140]} Thus, in Them, the maternal Spirit, the transcendently compassionate tenderness of all mothers, and indeed motherhood itself, is the predominating impress made upon all orders, communities, groups, and individuals upon whom She bestows Her ministrations. All of these Divine Beings are—for none of Them have disappeared—incarnations of Divine Motherhood.

Although the Lady Mary is no longer limited to expressions as a Person, having long ago won emancipation and liberation therefrom, for the sake of all mankind She does assume the restrictions of a highly spiritualized “Personality” in order to come as near as possible to those whom She helps. This ministration could become much more effective and general if increasing numbers of communities, groups, and individuals would especially recognize Our Lady, and both be gratefully recipient of Her benedictions and offer themselves as Her servers at the personal level.

Thus a World Mother Movement would at this time be of great benefit to humanity, and would offer Her increasing opportunities and channels for the helping of mankind. Such groupings do exist in certain Roman Catholic institutions, such as the monastery and chapel of Einzedelin. More and more are needed, particularly with greater freedom of religious thinking, even though within the Christian faith. The same, of course, is equally true in other religions in which a Feminine Aspect of Deity and a representative thereof is accepted and believed in. Whilst all forms of ministration would be included in the activities of such groups, the underlying principle would be the furtherance throughout the world of compassionate humaneness in every walk of life—so overwhelmingly needed at the present time.

Our Lady suggests inclusions in articles and books being newly reprinted for the Liberal Catholic Church, and certainly an article in The Theosophist, leaving all possible room for freedom of thought

28 September 1975 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

When a student and practitioner of yoga reaches the required state of advancement, he always comes under the direction of a Guru. The Guru-chela tradition and practice correspond very closely to the Mystery System. In fact, apart from some differences of method, they are identical. Every yogi who has attained a certain degree of renunciation, self-purification, and at least the beginnings of Causal consciousness, comes under a Guru.

He or she is then both taught and very secretly and privately submitted to an Initiation. This means that the Guru—himself an Initiate—does actually perform a ceremony upon the chela. Every successful Yogi—from Shri Shankaracharya through Kabir and on to Yogananda and Rama Krishna—passed through the yogic form of Initiation.

The method differs from that of the Ancient Mysteries, but degrees of Egoic consciousness are successfully bestowed and entered. Believe me, despite differences of wording and partial public knowledge in different ages and parts of the world, the system is the same and identical. Those Yogis in India, Shri Shiva and Shri Ramana Maharishi, and their equals[141] had all been Initiated by a Senior, even though, sworn to secrecy, they would not normally reveal the fact. In this Fifth Race period no one can break through from the rupa into the arupa worlds without help.

To this must be added the fact that when a person has once been Initiated (attaining arupa consciousness), there is the possibility of a repetition in a later life, in order to bring about the preceding condition in the physical body. This re-Initiation, occurring whilst out of the body, may or may not be remembered on waking.

Every great and illumined Yogi or Yogini was and is an Initiate. The effects of the occult processes of Initiation and the consequent development of seership depend upon the tremendously complicated problem of the individual karma for that life. If, for example, an aspirant, in all sincerity, asks of the Lords of Karma that all adverse karma be paid off as quickly as possible, no matter what it may cost in pain to the personality, then the concentrated “paying off” may include brain-sickness and so brain bedullment. The Ego is fully Initiated and enjoying all the arupa and rupa results from astral body inward, but the poor “crucified” personality and brain cannot know the fact. Hence one interpretation of the cry of the Lord Christ upon the Cross in utter loneliness and darkness, “My God, my God. Why hast Thou forsaken me?”

Geoffrey, when I hovered beside your bed in Dunedin [New Zealand], it was not only to teach you, at that particular time, about our Egyptian symbology. I knew then of all these possibilities, including the collaboration between you and My self that later became established and is now continuing, and, happily, will still continue for some years. Of this possibility I was well aware, and this is why, on instruction, I then came. Indeed, such plans for the helping of humanity and the choosing of human collaborators by an Adept may extend over several lives. Your contacts with Bacon and Occultism in Elizabethan times contained all the possibility of the present conjoined work. Moreover, your next life is included in potential plans for a continuance of Our Work. And, if you can believe it, even the Egyptian life co-operation included this same possibility; so also, during the Eleusinian lives in Greece. Thus, a thread runs through, and conjoins very favourably, a large number of lives.

30 October 1975 Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Of course, I will dictate when you are ready, the story of your occult life for you, beginning at your experience when the Master Kuthumi, at your first E.S. meeting, welcomed you back into the Ranks.

Yes, yes, get our next book finished first. The new book fills and even exceeds my best expectations (The Call to the Heights)...You are progressing quite well with the second successor (‘The Occult Sciences’).^{^[142]} Meanwhile Volume IV (The Hidden Wisdom in the Holy Bible series) moves onward, however slowly. Yes, in that work and the other, decorate with diagrams as you plan.

1 December 1975 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

SOME DIRECTIONS ON LITERARY WORK

The second of those two pages needs one or two more words in place to make the meaning clearer. You tried, but thought it would do as it is. Try and work in, if not too difficult and if it does not unduly complicate the page, the idea that the Archangel of the Annunciation was the spiritual Father and His words the fructifying, fecundating agency received by Mary, as you now have it

Galatea was not really the product of a virgin birth. She was a statue brought to life by a goddess; just as a purely materially-minded, unillumined person can be brought to life by a spiritually awakening experience; as also was St Paul and, one might add, St Francis, St Clare, and St Teresa of Avila.

In the broadest allegorical sense, all wives of Zeus were really virgins, since he was a god and not a physical, man, which fits in with the explanation that Atma, the God-Self, fertilizes the germ (represented by Mary—abstract mind or intellect), bringing about the birth of the Son, this being the simplest of all expositions.^{^[143]}

Thus viewed, the personal characters associated with the Annunciation and Virgin Birth may Theosophically be interpreted as follows: The Angel Messenger is the Monad [the Divinity within man] in which a degree of evolutionary stature has been attained, thereby affecting the whole spiritual nature of the individual. The Holy Ghost is “the power of the Highest”, the Atma. In the Mysteries it is the Initiatory Power applied by the Hierophant. The Christ Child is the faculty of intuitional wisdom and illuminating, implicit insight—Buddhi. Mary is the form-free, abstract intellect, untouched by or unassociated with the world of form—Manas I. It is the pure “virginal womb” within which evolutionary development and illumination occur (hence The Magnificat, Luke 1:46) as a result of successive incarnations…

Yes. Affirm that We never use spiritualistic mediums.

Late 1975 - Epsom, Auckland

“TAPS” IN THE SHRINE

During the period of residence at 17 Belvedere Street, an actual physical phenomenon began to occur, in order to attract attention to the Presence of a Master or a readiness to communicate with Geoffrey. It took the form of very noticeable “taps” from within the wooden “Shrine”, wherein the portraits of the Masters are kept in privacy. On the first occasion, the taps became a definite and briefly prolonged metallic rattle. We could not really credit our hearing—that the taps came from within the Shrine and not from outside somewhere. The sound then became definite and prolonged. Geoffrey then looked “inwardly” to behold the “Recorder” or originator of the occult phenomenon, and said, “Sandra, this is an actual example of phenomena.”

The Shrine was at once opened and the Master communicated. Previously and throughout the years, such communications from Adepts had always been heralded by an electric current sweeping down the side of Geoffrey’s face.

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Yes. I do tap, but this is private. Yes. The right-hand door as you face the Shrine was made briefly to tremble.

About 1975

An Adept

At these superphysical levels, communion and communication are both virtually instantaneous, though not as deeply as at the upper Causal levels. Atma-Buddhi is quite another consideration, for at those levels, duality, if experienced at all, is virtually imperceptible. Of course, there are, must be indeed, differences in characteristic methods of the “external” expressions of the Monad, even though the inmost Essence or Spirit of all is identical.

Not only the Ray imprint, but other factors of which you have not yet been taught, affect the Atmic expression of the Monad, always occurring, remember, via Buddhi, which is the essential vehicle and communicant for and by the Atma as a manifested Self. One of these is—and this may surprise you—what may be called the Atmic astrological chart, which differs for everyone according to the cosmic and solar time-periods and almost myriad influences under the law of correspondences.

Another consists of much more personal and more especially Egoic responses to human life, which are transferred in however refined a manner and state to the manifesting Atma.

Then, there are numerous other influences which leave their mark upon the Atmic Self, such as those of the National Devas of the countries in which the Ego has been incarnated, and the World Teacher and Angels of Religions followed in those incarnations. To these must be added the effects of cosmic and solar events such as the death and birth of stars, universes, and worlds, and the interactions between the Logoi of Solar Systems at arupa levels, and other supradivine interrelationships which do occur and vary in degree and periods in cosmic time as far as the birth, evolution, and death of Systems occur. One must not humanize these concepts, even though one may help one’s understanding by drawing certain parallels between human and divine experiences. These include, of course, the birth of the physical body, its death (sometimes sudden and at other times very painful and prolonged) and other tragic happenings.

.. .Cosmic Deities are, of course, eternal Beings, but when They manifest Themselves throughout Manvantaras They cannot altogether avoid the effects upon Themselves of what might be called cosmic cataclysms, physical and superphysical. These include explosions of physically immeasurable proportions and collisions between components of galaxies far greater than might be thought of as occurring between comets.

1976

2 January 1976 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Yes, of course, Sandra, The Diary will consist of two parts at least. One of these must simply be a consecutive record of the events in time of Geoffrey’s occult and semi-occult experiences from childhood right on to today, for they will continue for a long time yet.

Then, another part of The Diary will be the inborn and generated philosophy of life, developing in concordance with the experiences and discovered by illumination as they occurred.^{^[144]} In some cases the philosophy section will need to be related to the occult experience, thereby bridging or blending the two together occasionally. So proceed dually, as it were, with two aspects. Sandra, feel free.

18 January 1976 - Epsom, Auckland

An Adept

We, of the Brotherhood of Luxor, add to the words of Our Brother Who has just spoken to you Our greetings and assurances of the continuation of the support you have received and are receiving. We are the same in NAMES as on the document [printed in The Golden Book of the Theosophical Society, edited by C. Jinarajadasa] together with some more recent additions. Whilst never failing to respond to legitimate appeals for aid, including personal ones, keep the list of your visitors as small as you can. Note how this evening—evening with you, morning with Us—you are alone and have in the aloneness and largely because of it, been susceptible to and have received these Our greetings and suggestions.

Yes indeed, although it cannot be claimed in your lifetime, the communication between Ourselves and Our recipient member (H.P.B.) is being repeated this early in the second century of the life of the Theosophical Society.^{^[145]} This must, as of course you thoroughly know, remain a closely guarded secret for the time being.

One of these days, perhaps, our brother-sister, H.P.B., may speak to you. But not yet.

20 January 1976 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

DEGREES OF DEDICATION

(Guidance Concerning an Aspirant to Discipleship)

As you know, there are certain words in our more occult vocabulary that have degrees of meaning largely according to the person who uses them, and more especially to whom they apply. The word “dedicated” is an example. In its full meaning, as for all of us, to be dedicated to an ideal, the attainment of a goal and the living of an appropriate way of life, means total and exclusive acceptance of and working and living for the objective; nothing else really has any importance in comparison. Should an associated subject be involved, then its meaning and desirability would at once be judged according to the ideal—and, again, exclusively. Such, in the highest meaning of the word, is dedication.

But people can be dedicated in varying degrees, can they not? Or, their fulfilment of the ideal may be only partial, half-hearted, or much more so. They also may be thought of as, in a lesser meaning of the word, dedicated and so respected for doing the best they can considering their evolution, spiritual position, karma, and other interests.

Now,…is in the process of moving from the second to the first of these. His Ego-Monad belongs to the highest interpretation of the word, but not so his personality! Here, he has dedicated himself as far as he can and does his best with what may be described as his spare time and the “grip” upon him of other interests, happy home life, for example. No one, surely, can blame him, especially as he is a Venus type of man and has been deprived from childhood of home and love in the real meaning of the terms. There he is now and probably will remain even for some years until, in the later time of his life, he has satisfied and outgrown the normal human interests and thereby permitted the Monad-and Ego-dedication to find not partial but full expression. Therefore, we must not be disappointed if we cannot hurry him! The ideal is put before him as you both so wisely have done, and the rest lies with his human nature which will display a form of dedication. He is, if you like, just “hatched out of the egg”, a “fledgling”, but one who—if karma permits—will both learn to fly and [actually] fly.

The best Invocation each morning for him will probably be for Egoic illumination, empowerment, and one-pointed dedication to the Path Life. As this is invoked, a vertical descent of power from above his head through it and into his heart, white in colour, will also help—as he richly deserves. Your idea is a good one and he may be advised that he himself should invoke exactly the same Egoic aid, using the same words but personally meaning: “I invoke upon my personal self Egoic illumination, empowerment, and one-pointed dedication to the Path Life.”

Always allowing for the entry of the unknown factor, his greatest advance in this life will be to be placed on Probation; he might, if you think wise, be advised to add when so moved: “I aspire ardently to become a disciple of the Master.”

Then he can read your book, The Pathway to Perfection, and Brother C.W.L.’s The Masters and the Path, wherein are teachings for the fulfilment of such an aspiration. Advise him also against one cause of his failure, namely, to tend to forget, or fail to try and remember and to repeat, what he has been studying. In consequence, the resultant gain is almost lost. This is in no sense really a criticism, because his business life and activities demand almost the whole of his concentration and thought. Advise him also to make occasional acts of self-recollection, when he repeats his dedication, if only for one minute, thereby maintaining his ideal freshly in his mind and as sharply focused as possible.

He is a kind and likeable fellow who has almost “strayed” into the occult life rather early! This is very fortunate for him.

28 February 1976 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Yes. Change your Auckland titles to include this lecture adapted for the public, and add another taken from The Pathway to Perfection, describing all the Steps. Keep on enunciating as you did, both that the Path and the Mysteries are not only still open, but are still functioning more fully than ever before, despite the darkness of the world.

You did well to depict understandably that the Way is ever open even though in pait your depiction was, unintentionally, of course, a challenge. The fact is that numbers of our members are suitable for Candidature, but are not aware of it, and so do not know what to do. Keep on telling them what you said tonight, namely, that the Road to the Masters and Self-perfecting is ever open.

Indeed, you might legitimately close almost every lecture with a brief reference to the ever open Road—”fishing”, as it were, for candidates. Our Lord Jesus said to His disciples, “I will make you to become fishers of men.”[146]

5 March 1976 - Epsom, Auckland

H.P. Blavatsky

Cabinet excellent. Keep it going, then we can communicate. Yes, continue the presentation of the ideas that the Masters still exist, are still near the Society and its members, and that Discipleship of one or other of Them remains a distinct possibility for all those who conform to the Rules with both their mental outlook and actions and their physical lives. The outlook must be one alone and unchanging: to uplift, to make happy, and to show and teach humanity how it can be saved from itself—its only enemy.

Yes, Centenary message good. Why not circulate it widely throughout the Society or your group. The danger is that in looking forward to and bringing about developments in the future, the membership may tend to lose sight of, touch with, and inspiration from the early years. Do what you can to prevent this, not only in your own work but through suggestions to the leaders, the President for example.

Assurances that our Masters are using you. Congratulations.

H.P.B. (as I then was)

7 March 1976

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Yes, yes indeed, your Kabbalistic studies, charts, and rolls of charts should not be allowed to lie dormant when they are so magnificently full of life. Each heading and each square is charged with the power of occult truths and members of the Sephiroth.

When the present work is finished you could well think along these lines, especially as you noticed this morning, the charts themselves are “etheric-astro-mentally alive” with Kabbalah-power and Sephirothal relationships. There is a whole field of new investigation open to you, and you could give to the world a revitalized presentation of Kabbalistic philosophy. Our next work, Geoffrey? We will most probably begin with the charts themselves and all that they refer to and reveal. Yes, finish the wonderful Diary, to be left in Sandra’s hands, and then let us get to work on the Kabbalah. Yes, I did venture to tap.

Yes, also, the famous “Scroll of Time”^{^[147]} has become further unrolled so that what was once future—unbelievably so to you—now is present time and the “K.H. Pencil” is now in use.

Live with Us in thought as much as ever you can, both of you, and entrust yourselves to Us, as in fact you already have done in both the inner and the outer planes and bodies.

Rest now, for tonight. Be sure that We also will be there [at the young Theosophists group that meets regularly, once a month, at our home, 17 Belvedere Street, Epsom, Auckland, New Zealand].

12 March 1976

An Adept of Luxor

GEOFFREY’S NINETIETH BIRTHDAY

In these special years in your life, Geoffrey, from the ninety-first onwards, your contact with Ourselves will become more and more clear, frequent, and profound. Therefore, preserve—both of you—the only conditions in which We can thus reach and ‘‘employ” (forgive the word, please) you, which are the present ones of undisturbed freedom, privacy, auric harmoniousness, and quietude, entirely necessary for our communion and direct communication.

Fate, karma, the fact that you are also thoroughgoing Bhakti yogis, have brought about and make this present interrelationship possible. As you see, our work together is deepening and expanding, and this promises to continue, since as Our Brother humorously, yet truthfully, said, “The sands are flowing upward as yet!” To lose this time, to surrender this karmically arranged and deserved present ashramic situation would be the tragedy of both your lives. Guard it above all things, and then, Sandra, as you are doing, guard Geoffrey’s health. There is the dharma for both of you for the rest of your life. As you see, no signs of aging are as yet at all present, and this is likely to continue for years to come. The osteopathic treatment is beneficial for both of you. Maintain that also, We suggest. Your man is a reincarnated friend. There is, of course, no desire to cut you off from your closer friends. But We would strongly urge: short visits please.

Geoffrey’s psychological and psychical condition and ability at any time to receive consciously [the teaching and other] communications, normal though it seems, is very delicate indeed. What seems to be so natural and so easy is in fact the use of a quite high yogic siddhi and so is very precious... We greatly value your wonderful, nay, extreme care of him, Sandra.

Geoffrey, at least three holidays a year are advisable for you both. In the full occult meaning of the word, your dharma is here and is being now wonderfully well fulfilled.

23 March 1976 - Auckland

Master Morya

Tell humanity that the purpose for existence, the real meaning of life on earth is not “getting” and “having”, but “giving” and “serving”.

*****

Part of our work is to “hatch” the world’s mental “egg”! Then the “chick” of intuition will be born.

*****

The Esoteric Section of the Theosophical Society and Co-Freemasonry indicate that beneficial though these private meetings are, it is a wise practice to prepare oneself for such gatherings. Though the actual meeting and ceremonial is “geared” with the necessary force and spiritual power by virtue of its Consecration, founding, Adept and angelic links—each one present needs to contribute his own efforts on his own behalf. This could be done by preliminary self-preparation and full mental collaboration in every part of the ceremonial and a certain attitude of self-dedication to the particular work which each of the two Orders was founded to perform.

*****

Every Adept is an Avatara; for every Adept is a conscious manifestation of the Solar Logos—Brahma (Hinduism).

*****

Every Adept has been received into the Abode of the “Gods”—”The Immortal Olympians”.

After the Fifth Initiation on the Initiatory Pathway to Superhumanity or Perfection, the erstwhile human being becomes deathless. He or she no more undergoes the normal processes of dying. The Master alludes to this attainment of Adeptship and the overcoming of death as entry into the “HOME” or Occult Hierarchy.

24 March 1976 - Epsom, Auckland

THE PRESENCE OF MASTER MORYA

On the afternoon of this date, here at our home, after a siesta, I vividly remember an interview with the Master Morya. I saw the scenery portrayed by Master Djwal Kul in the picture of the Valley in Tibet where the Masters Morya and Kuthumi have Their dwellings.^{^[148]} The Master Morya’s body is marvelously perfect in every way, particularly in muscular resilience, or youthfulness. Later in the day, when I was wide awake, the Master Morya visited me in His subtle body^{^[149]} in our room in Epsom. He deliberately brought His face quite near to mine in order to demonstrate to me that He appears quite unchanged from one hundred years ago and the Schmeichen portrait of Him. He evoked from me an experience which I can only describe as Will-Love. He must have been partly materialized because I was able to observe the texture of His skin, the hairs of His head, and the wonderful “light” of His eyes.

I used the special method in consciousness developed recently—and used thereafter of receiving consciously Adept instruction and teaching in a reclining posture instead of spine erect as formerly. This grants me the absolute bodily relaxation that my advancing years demand.

28 March 1976

Master Morya

[Geoffrey was conscious of the Presence of the Master Morya and then of the Master’s face very close to his own. The Master Morya said to Geoffrey:]

None, no one, can see, find, visit either Ourselves or Our retreats against Our wills, which are totally predominant in this matter of Our personal lives.

Similarly, no one flying over, travelling, or wandering upon the Gobi Desert can see the remains of the buildings of what was once the Great White Island in the Gobi Sea.^{^[150]} This intrusion, My son, into Our personal privacy and that of the Government of the Brotherhood as a whole, is forbidden and with such potency that the greatest of the inventions of scientists of today and tomorrow cannot enable one single person to enter Our realms against Our wishes.

This is the only claim We make—that of uninvadable privacy.

Even Our disciples and fellow Initiates, up to a certain Degree, who do visit Us, can never do so, can never find Us and Our retreats again unless We permit. THIS IS THE ONE UNBREAKABLE STATUTE OF OUR GOVERNMENT—UNINVADABLE PRIVACY.

(In answer to my question of how that privacy is preserved, the Master answered:)

By the imposition of a maya which not even the strongest minds of the most advanced non-initiate can penetrate or dispel. It is so, My brother, I thus assure you.

10 April 1976 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

CIRCUMSTANCES

In Our activities, We are guided not only by opportunities and even the existence of suitable agents at any given time, but also—strange though it may sound, but not to you—by circumstances. In the wise adjustments of situations in the world, and in certain aspects of Our work—the occult, for example—We have learned to observe what might be termed the “Play of Destiny”.

Circumstances in the lives of all those outside of the Sanctuary change—actually are somewhat wavelike—and in order to be reasonably successful, We choose what might be called “the crest of a wave” in the lives, activities, and general evolutionary development of mankind.

Thus, the time—one hundred and twenty and one years ago was, in this sense, ripe for a reasonable measure of success in what was, in fact, a very extraordinary attempt and even experiment. It has done an immense amount of good—immeasurable in fact—particularly for those persons who were able to respond to and apply to their lives the teachings given. It has so far failed in its sublime purpose of establishing Universal Brotherhood on earth, as you are only too well aware, but it succeeded in bringing to the attention of very large numbers of people the knowledge of Our existence, of the Hastened Pathway, and the joining of Our Ranks as the goal of human development. The inner movements were formed and have helped throughout the one hundred years…

The concept, inspired by the message and article dictated to you, of a more or less immediate endeavour to restore practical Occultism to the present activities of the Theosophical Society is a very good and noble one and, of course, all help obtained that is usable will be employed gratefully. We will see the responses evoked by the article.^{^[151]}

In addition, as you were recently saying, individuals are lacking who can be used in such an endeavour. Nevertheless, with your united aid we are now making one! If, as a result, the circumstances change from adverse to favourable as far as the restoration of the Mysteries for the public is concerned, then further steps will be taken by Us.

Please continue your sense of urgency in this matter and your mental delving into existing possibilities. These may favourably influence one of the deciding factors, namely, CIRCUMSTANCES. So, dear colleagues, let us wait a while and see the response to the article…

Of course, We need more disciples (meaning conscious co-workers, Initiates-in-the-becoming, and Initiates) out in the world, as it were. Keep your eyes open for promising people here and abroad. Draw them nearer to yourself and “open” them to the practical possibilities of occult progress indicated in the article.

The old phrase, “strike while the iron is hot”, plays a large part in the formulation and fulfilment of Our plans. Of course, it is always possible for persons to make even the coldest iron warmer than it was and even bring it to a great heat!

16 April 1976 - New Zealand

Our Lady Mary

THE PRINCIPLE OF ALL ONENESS

When a person reaches Adeptship the personality of old and especially the personal inclinations become merged in or with the vast Being known as the Solar Logos. Adepts are no longer Themselves at all from this point of view, especially that of Offices assigned and fulfilled, even though traces of the last human personality remain, especially as long as the body lasts in which Adeptship was reached. “ALL ONENESS”, alone, justly describes the consciousness and state of being of the Adept Happy are those human beings who are beginning to experience foreshadowings of this surrender and mergence of self-ness in the ALL ONENESS which governs, rules utterly, the life and work of every Adept. Indeed, We are not “people” any longer but, to use “light” for a simile, are just as Rays emanating from within and radiating from without the Solar Logos, the Great Lord of Light. Every human being who would hasten along the evolutionary path can do no better than meditate and with ever increasing fidelity put into action the wondrous Principle of ALL ONENESS. Yes, you are quite right, This is the true yoga in both consciousness and life—ALL ONENESS.

* *

Geoffrey says, “The different visions and differing appearances and positions which people of various religions and countries attribute to the World Mother are all adaptions of visions and teachings chosen as most suitable and given to these various members of world religions. None of them, even the most beautiful Madonna statue or picture, really portrays the official Holder of that Office of World Mother, Who, nevertheless, responds to and permits Herself to be mentally moulded by our religious conceptions, and Who permits Herself to be seen in forms acceptable and helpful to those who are accorded the appropriate vision.”

17 April 1976 - Auckland

Our Lady Mary

Each Adept, as you are aware, on attainment pursues both a particular path of Self-expression that is decided largely by the nature of the Monad, and fulfils the associated duties sometimes but not always as an Adept Official. The Lords Manu, Bodhisattva, and Maha-Chohan and Their immediate Adept Collaborators are examples of this system.

I in My turn, continuing to express innate Monadic accentuations, serve as far as I am capable in the Department known as “World Mother”. This encompasses the whole of femininity throughout the animal and human kingdoms, the extremely subtle and sensitive procedures of Nature during pregnancies in both kingdoms and, more especially in the human, the actual procedure of the delivery of the child and the experiences through which every mother passes. In the animal kingdom this is reasonably natural, but in the human, for various reasons into which I will not go here—karma being the most important amongst them—assistance is necessary and is provided for the mental, astral, and physical bodies and nervous systems of every mother on earth. No single one is ever outside of the ministrations under Myself and sometimes by Myself supplied and applied by the angelic members associated with My Office of World Mother.

Admittedly, mankind today, mystics and occultists apart, know naught of these spiritual and superphysical occurrences associated with motherhood, but as the race evolves, humanity—especially women—will become more and more aware of these necessities and ministrations. Any published work, therefore, which draws attention to them now is of practical value to all mothers and mothers-to-be.

Please continue writing and draw upon Me when needed.

22 April 1976 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Concerning the “Fourth Objective” article,^{^[152]} your next step is to present the article much as you said it tonight, together with the rest of the material, to The Theosophist and see what are the reactions, if any...

As for the possibility that you could officiate occultly, this depends almost entirely upon the reaction to the article of those concerned in the T.S., as also of any individuals who might find themselves awakened and moved to place themselves under you. One of Us will then always intervene and “guide” [give directions for occult progress]. Rest assured that this will occur. Try to get the article off and also circulated throughout your group as soon as possible.

7 May 1976 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Regarding the Fourth Object article,[153] this is a ballon d’essai—a trial balloon! The result of the trial cannot as yet be wholly foreseen. Two possibilities are that either the General Council responds and suggests action or, failing that, groups ask for some procedure within the Society and its lodges. In most cases, the direct appeal would be to yourself as leader. You would, we know, respond, accept, and act according to the nature of the requests and also Our own views, which you are always to be relied upon to seek and follow. At best, organized response might occur and at least groups and even individuals would communicate with you. In the latter case, We would guide and respond to legitimate enquiries.

First then, the appearance of the article. Second, the responses, and third, any action by yourself which would seem to be called for and you would feel called upon to take. In the meantime, at all your meetings here—youth, yoga, and Co-Masonry—advance the central idea, even quoting and requoting the title of the article. Responses, if any, may possibly indicate what may be expected of you.

7 May 1976 - Epsom, Auckland

Geoffrey, when preparing his lecture on the Lord Shri Krishna, entered, however partially, into union with Him, seeing Him as both child of Vrindavana and the Divine Creator of the Universe, as if by the power of sound. There then arose in Geoffrey’s mind the salutation to the Lord, “O Singer of a thousand divine songs.”

10 May 1976 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

As soon as the article appears, write to...[154] informing... in very strict confidence, but for.. ,’s guidance, that the whole Plan was presented to your mind by the Masters. Ask...then seriously to think of ways and means whereby a beginning might possibly be made along the lines of the article. This could include collections by groups or persons of statements from H.P.B. throughout all her writings. These could then be arranged and presented in article or pamphlet forms, or both, to be made available to everyone who favourably responded.

Then, if friends were available or publishing houses would act, these collected affirmations could be printed and sold and advertised outside the T.S. where and when funds allowed. Thus, gradually, the public could learn of the existence of the possibility of Discipleship. If this comes about, as is hoped, it will be a critical, even climactic, period in the Movement to fulfil the idea. However, this is all in the future as yet and we must wait upon TIME.

Your book, The Pathway to Perfection, is suggested for study by prospective aspirants to Discipleship and Initiation because it is easily understandable by beginners, while The Voice of the Silence would not so readily be grasped, used though it must be on suitable occasions.

If there is a response, then would not something like a team be necessary in order to adjudge and respond to public advances?

In conclusion this evening, remember that the whole project is admittedly a “trial balloon” and be at this stage, and later on, in no sense disappointed or cast down by meagre results. Actually, the founding of the T.S. was similarly regarded at first and so remained nearly disappearing—until the publication of Isis Unveiled. The first attempt in Egypt failed completely.

22 May 1976 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

COMMENTS UPON THE POSSIBLE RESULTS OF THE ARTICLE ON THE SUGGESTED FOURTH OBJECT OF THE T.S.—THE CONTINUANCE OF THE MYSTERY TRADITION

The changes towards your future work together are moving favourably just now. Fortunately, no further personal action on your side is necessary at this time. You have issued a message from Ourselves of great potential importance in the fulfilment of Our plans for possible developments in the impact of the T.S., and so of Theosophy, upon the human mind of today.

The emphasis at all times must always be upon the basic teachings (such as your oft-used summing up), their practical applications to human life, and especially the methods by which maximum effectiveness upon the human mind may be achieved and maximum Egoic progress made by individual contributors. This last naturally leads on to the resumption under Ourselves, and not hosts of pretenders, of the true Mystery Tradition.

These are the two approaches to be accentuated now. The former has always been done by you and now the gradual, careful, and wise presentation of the Mystery Tradition and its possible drawing of people into the Outer Court, and care for them after arrival, is a very important task. This is being done by you both and We suggest that in your correspondence on the subject to the carefully chosen few, you should include the suggestion of both having one’s eyes open for possible “recruits”, and to the watchful care and training of those who respond.

Yes, of course, the members may be very few at first. But there will be some genuine and reliable ones—some of those in your group, for example. To them you may feel inclined to put the ideas of Reincarnation, Karma, and Evolution to Adeptship practically applied to daily life. One should very wisely and very discriminately be ready to encourage—never to force, no pressure ever being advisable in this field—those who intuitively (actually in memory from former lives) respond to the idea of THE MYSTERY TRADITION.

Fortunately, such a concept and prospect requires no pressure or unusual demand, but rather an open-eyed “lookout” for returning Initiates, as We might express it. There are a great many now in incarnation, you know, and so very largely without means of resuming the Ancient Quest along Mystery lines.

Yes, those within the T.S. do have the E.S to guide them, but there are far more outside of the Society who are “on the verge”, so to say.

You may, We think, expect developments along these lines, however gradually.

6 June 1976 - Auckland

The Master Rakoczy

Yes, Geoffrey, I became aware of the reading of your Diary and collected quotations, remembering with you those early days in London. Do proceed with the publication of all material that may permissibly appear... So find typists with whom the intimacies may be preserved and who may take up the whole work of typing and preliminary arrangements. And now retire and come to Me.

17 June 1976 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

ADVICE FOR THOSE ASPIRING TO BECOME SPIRITUAL HEALERS

In choosing to include daily invocations on behalf of fellow men in one’s life, it is important that the motive should arise from a genuine and deep personal concern for both the healing from suffering of particular persons and the welfare of the human race as a whole. The deeper the feeling towards one’s fellow men, the more effective will be the prayers. In other words, THE SUPPLIANT MUST DEEPLY CARE FOR ALL OTHERS AND ESPECIALLY THOSE IN PAIN.

July 1976

Master Polidorus Isurenus

THE MYSTERY TRADITION

Prepare during some leisure time if any, a Masonic statement that all Freemasons, whether they believe it or not, are in fact engaged upon a modern continuation of the Mystery Tradition. Preserve this last statement as part of contributions to what follows from the article.

The difference today from olden days is that in these times the bodily selves of candidates are not aware of their positions as Egos, whilst in olden times they were made aware. Ultimately, all tests must be passed through by the candidate in full waking physical consciousness.

Freemasons and Co-Masons are the most promising people for the fulfilment of the ideal of the first article.^{^[155]} Somehow or other, this idea must be infiltrated throughout both movements, making Masons aware that in fact they are continuing the Mystery Tradition. Work this up, present it to Me and we will proceed in that direction. All responses to the Fourth Object article to be directed to Co-Freemasonry. Numbers are nearing the Portal, for although the world knows it not, the Mystery Tradition is in a different way, but very similarly also, quite active in the modern world. What We are aiming for is that more and more people should know this Truth and prepare themselves.

7 July 1976 - Auckland

THE ASALA FESTIVAL

Geoffrey recorded to me verbally that on one or more occasions he remembered, on awakening, an out-of-the-body experience following the Asala Festival, of attendance at the home and garden of the Lord Maitreya.^{^[156]} Geoffrey stated, “As far as my memory goes, not only Adepts, but a considerable number of aspirants to Adeptship—devotees of the Lord Buddha, the Lord Maitreya, and the Masters of the Wisdom—were also present and listened to the discourse. Most of them, in physically influenced memory, were floating in their subtle bodies, as it were, in the air above the Lord’s garden on the southern slopes of the Himalayan Mountains.”

19 July 1976 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

The Masonic work is far more important than probably is realized. Not, of course, by both of you who appreciate it, but by some of the members of your class. This second contribution, when published, will be very highly valued for the simple reason that you will be providing for Masons not only such occult teaching as they can respond to, but arousing and awakening some to serious, very serious indeed, search for and entry upon the Mystery life in real earnest. This is what We are hoping for in many fields and from many people, as your first article indicates.

Very interesting will it be to see what response is evoked and from how many people—yes, and what they do when they feel the general impulse. This will all become naturally revealed and both of you will be called upon to help, no doubt. So, in every esoteric talk especially, whatever your subject, always add something about the Mystery Tradition and entry into it being available today as always... So, also, in your public lectures on religions, show that in all of them, whatever the method, there resides the call and the key to the Gateway leading to the Outer Court [of the Mysteries of Initiation] and to the Temple itself. When you talk of the Tohungas and their teachers, show that this has been and is representative of the same tradition in the region of the Pacific Ocean. Admittedly, great care and much wisdom are needed in talking about these things to the general public, members of which can so easily misunderstand and misapply.

Warn against mediumship, particularly in this respect, and about movements that are dependent upon mediumship for their supposed communications.

Freemasonry is a spiritually and occultly rewarding field, and, of course, E.S. members have all, in effect, taken what can prove to be a first step. This is still more true in…when again the message is that what happens visibly and ceremonially can and does happen actually.

We suggest that you keep this note in all your talks from now on, very much as you have already done, however guardedly. The Brotherhood is seeking disciples.

12 August 1976 - Epsom, Auckland

An Adept

A HEALING RITUAL

(Given by a Member of the Brotherhood of Luxor for a Particularly Tragic Case, a Devout Christian)

Place the person in the following special category of invoked aid: “Powerful spiritual enlightenment and transformation of mind”.

“We offer to the invoked powers for special healing: May... (mention name in full) be given powerful spiritual enlightenment and transformation of mind.”

Take up to half a minute or so after using the Invocation as above. State the name again in full; visualize a descent of white healing power into the person, holding it there, up to a quarter or half a minute every morning.

A MEDITATIVE PRAYER [given to the person]:

“Most Holy Lord Jesus Christ, 1 offer myself and my life to You. May

Your Divine Power and Wisdom enlighten me and strengthen me to live my life on behalf of others in Thy Holy Name. Amen.”

Advice for the person involved:

This should be repeated morning, midday, and before going to sleep, with strong realization.

Say to the person: “Instead of struggling with your life in your own hands alone, place yourself and your life in the service of God and His Son, Jesus Christ Our Lord.”

Advise that the person try to maintain this meditative discipline, not, of course, in words alone, but very sincerely and truly in dedicated devotion to Our Lord.

This is her true salvation, namely to cease from living her life as turned inward upon herself alone but instead increasingly turned outward, as a true servant of Our Lord, the Blessed Saviour of the World. We of the Brotherhood, as also of course her family, and including yourself, are deeply concerned and compassionately very sorry for her.

24 September 1976 - Waitangi, Northland

An Adept Member

of the Brotherhood of Luxor

... The Parent Theosophical Society must grow into a very efficient, very effective world movement for the spreading of Theosophy in the full meaning of that word, including practical applications to life.

In one way—desperately tragic though it is—the declining world situation offers the Parent Theosophical Society its greatest opportunity. For is not everyone asking, “What is the solution?”

26 September 1976 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Morya

Quote the Adept’s own words before signing the original document: “As long as the Rules (of the Occult life) are kept”.

In almost every other idealistic movement in the world, to say nothing of the supposed idealists, a marked tendency exists “to slip from observance of original vows”.

These vows, be it remembered, are in no sense personal but wholly impersonal statements based on recognition of rules that absolutely govern both spiritual progress and acceptance into Pupilhood.

Of course, in the occult life, acceptance of and adherence to decisions, vows, and pledges in and by one’s mind and inner nature are even more important than obedience to printed rules, extremely important although these also are.

In occultism, though never wishing to probe into a person’s privacy, the Adept knows instantly whether the outward vow is being inwardly adhered to. Outward words alone without the inner intention are of limited value, though useful, no doubt, as indications at least of a beginning.

Karmically, however, the outward utterance of a pledge of obedience to occult rules which is followed by disobedience of them, whether subjective, objective, or both, poses serious barriers to onward progress.

When a Master “looks” at a potential co-worker, He cannot fail to become aware of such serious, deliberate, and even flagrant indifference to rules and pledges.

The application of all this to aspirants whose karma and evolutionary position cause them to be living in the outer world, and not within the seclusion and protection of the Ashram, can prove to be very difficult indeed. Eventually, however, the Ashram life is wholly available, after which any temptations remaining cannot and must not be responded to.

10 October 1976 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Morya.

It is Our wish, whilst recognizing the demands upon your health and strength are always to receive full and careful attention, that you now proceed as regularly as you can with the continuation of the book on world mythologies. We wish the first volume of this work, with the very valuable illustrations, to be in the hands of our publishers—Indian or American as you yourselves consider wise—as soon as possible.

The material you now have is very considerable and the Labours of Hercules, the fabulous activities of Perseus and Theseus and others of the great heroes might well provide further subject matter. Eventually, We presume, the more outstanding and obviously inspired and occult myths of the other nations might follow. We are aware that this has already been considered by you both and is your tentative plan.

We communicate now to assure you of its complete acceptance, even welcome, by Ourselves with the aid of Our inspired Egyptian Brother (Master Polidorus Isurenus).

This communication is in no sense intended to imply the slightest pressure upon you both, busy as you continually are, but to inform and assure you of Our close interest in this next work; for in this especially, you [Geoffrey] fulfil the Office suggested by the “gift of the Pencil” and the indication on the “Roll” of the continuance of the Office held and work done by H.P. Blavatsky, Our former representative, and of whom you are already a successor.

The home classes are very valuable, especially since the whole house is now thoroughly saturated with Our influence, and We are in consequence, with a minimum output of energy, able to bring Our influence to bear upon those who study with you here.

The Esoteric Section [the Master Morya the Inner Head], whilst extremely important, need not be regarded as unduly demanding upon you. Four meetings a year may again be considered sufficient...

Healing and counselling also remain as essential parts of your work, and thus We suggest your next year may usefully and advisedly be planned.

Rest assured throughout that Our watchful care and aid will always be with you as also will Our responses to your important personal and international Invocations day by day.

Thus, knowing that We are somewhat early in terms of time, another wonderful year in Our names awaits you both...

Our greetings as ever from the relatively far north.

11 October 1976 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

[A tap was heard within the Shrine, and Geoffrey received the following:]

The requisite statement is that the Masters of the Wisdom, for over sixty years, have formed the centre and the heart of your life, wholly devoted to Them as every day has ever been. Without this, nothing would or could have happened, with or without a Shrine. ‘

19 October 1976

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Whatever you think, Sandra, will add to the presentation of Geoffrey as Our agent and a Self-illumined man, should be included in The Diary.

23—25 October 1976

[During the night, when at work on the Greek myth book, Geoffrey—in an out-of-the-body experience—visited an Adept of the Brotherhood of Luxor in one of the “Hidden Communities” of the Adept Hierarchy upon earth. The meeting took place in the Library-Archives at Luxor. He related this wonderful interview as follows:]

When the Master Polidorus Isurenus unrolled and displayed a huge wall-sized chart, it became “alive” with the associated Akashic Record, and this fascinating story of the myths of Egypt and Greece became revealed as living history.

I entered the Master’s or the Brotherhood’s study, or library, which was lined with deep square receptacles, in each of which were kept the scrolls of differing world myths—India, Egypt, Greece, Scandinavia—which became revealed to me. These are, however, not charts alone but also historical Akashic Records of the physical history, the living activities of the Brotherhood during related epochs in world history.

When, for example, one concentrates occultly upon a name or an event, the actual Akashic Record becomes visible. Hence, my experience one night long ago when, in the Presence of a Member of the Adept Brotherhood of Luxor, He caused the wall of the underground room to appear to become transparent and I beheld a procession of the Eighteenth Egyptian Dynasty, as in beautiful technicolour...

When one enters the library, one finds it to be on all sides, and above and below, “alive” with living history itself. The room might justly be named the Library of Earth’s Historical Archives, physical, superphysical, and spiritual. Master Kuthumi is in charge of the Historical Library or Archives in the cave beneath the Master Morya’s house, but preserved physical objects are there as well.

I was deeply impressed by the responsibility borne by the Adepts Who are in charge of this Akashic Library of living history of the Fourth Round earth life; for, remember, it is not only the physical, but also the superphysical history from the highest levels down to the physical. In consequence, the normally invisible “forces” revealed to me also were true meanings of the so-called fairy-tales or myths of Egypt and Greece. The Master then instructed me regarding the myth book—to fill in the list of every “amour” of Zeus, all of which were actually the work of the Logos in spiritualizing the consciousness of the life in every kingdom of Nature, especially, of course, including the human. The Master spoke as follows:

“The Divine Masculine Principle in Nature (personified by Zeus) ever seeks to quicken the evolution of the life evolving in all substances (‘feminine’) and beings up to the level of Adeptship. This especially applies to human beings, and the so-called ‘sexual intercourse’ between Deity and a human female is merely a fablelike or symbolic way of portraying this ceaseless function of Deity on behalf of all life. The members of the deva kingdom, with their almost complete absence of the self-limiting sense of separated personal identity, are a possible exception. Indeed, as has been discovered when studying this subject, advanced devas are found themselves to be actively participating in this procedure of evolution-quickening. Certain orders of them—possibly all—convey the stimulating power into Nature, more particularly in the mineral and plant kingdoms where, presumably, the inertia of substance delays the attainment and development of consciousness. Every included ‘amour’ is susceptible of interpretation in these terms, thereby removing from a Divine Being the ‘slur’ of illicit sensual sexuality.”

The Master went on to say, “Thus, the opening paragraphs of our myth book^{^[157]} will be designed to lead into this study, showing the reader that we are not just playing with ‘fairy-tales’ but, on the contrary, are deeply penetrating into and studying cosmogenesis in all its aspects.

“One cannot but be impressed by the accuracy and closeness by which the often seemingly nonsensical actions are performed. Actually, they are most sensible, logically inevitable, in fact, as by our books we seek to demonstrate.

“The Lord Zeus was not a profligate and unfaithful husband. Rather was he a very active impregnator of Nature’s products with his divine and, at first, instinctual spiritualizing influences.

“Fill in every amour with named recipient, Aphrodite: correctly place Eros and his bow and arrows moved by love; Europa, Leda, Danae. His remarkable children demonstrate how effective his spiritualizing manifestations can be when the amour is successful: Castor and Pollux become ‘Stars’ (Adepts). At their best they were godlike and divine and when less so they were heroic. Give examples and name them.

“Thus,” the Master continued to relate, “just as the physical sun permeates the solar system with discharged electromagnetic energies, so also at all levels above the gaseous the Logos (Zeus) permeates the Universe and all that it contains with spiritualizing energies. Each of these orders of quickening powers affects matter, the bodies or vestures of souls, and the consciousness within them with inspiring and illuminating influences, emotional, intellectual, intuitively perceptible, will-power-enforcing, and recharging forces and motives. These and others are discernible, even though meditation is required to contact their inner history at various superphysical levels. In fact, this study demands occult investigation at level above level from physical to Atmic. When there are resistances, oppositions, inertia (Titans) and so on, link them as closely as possible with the mythological personages.

“Hephaestus—armourer and blacksmith of the gods and heroes—represents the devas and their contributions to the ‘shaping’ of matter (the metals) in response to the divine impulse. His casting out from Olympus and fall to earth represents the response of the Devic Hierarchy, notably Gandharvas. They use sound as the ‘implements’ in their ‘forge’, wherewith to assist in awakening responsiveness in matter, forms, and beings of the sub-Olympian (Universe or Space) responding to the ‘Word’ throughout all the kingdoms of Nature. Devas are thus active in each of them as collaborators with the One Will (Zeus).

“The natural, permissible jealousy of Hera, wife of Zeus, symbolizes the inherent—and in the subhuman and pre-initiate human kingdoms, despiritualizing—effect of desire and possessive egoism.”

The Master revealed to me also the true meanings of the so-called “fairy-tales” of Egypt. This great Adept went on to say, “In Egyptian mythology, this is all somewhat similarly portrayed. Each Monarch, for example, was the child of Amun, Rah, etc., who had intercourse with the King’s mother in the Temple in one presentation. Hence, to the populace, the Monarch was a manifestation of God Himself. Another approach to the same idea will be worked out later.”

29 October 1976 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Geoffrey, try to work on the book as often as you can, even though the difficulties are natural and well understood by Us (pressure of work).

Yes, I do have an important addition—or rather, “entrance into the book”—to dictate when next conditions are good enough. The present approach is, and will prove to be, very important indeed. True, all your introductory comments on the Sacred Language from all your books on the subject wonderfully prepare the way. We have to be ready, however, to protect our work and ourselves, especially you and Sandra, against those who might tend to laugh scornfully, saying, “Myths are myths and had better be left there!” (Master smiles benignly.)

My warm salaams to you both.

(On the morning of 30 October 1976, the “opening remarks” to the myth book were received from Master Polidorus Isurenus.)

5 November 1976 - Epsom, Auckland

BUDDHIC CONSCIOUSNESS

[Geoffrey called to me to write a description, as far as could be expressed in words, of his entry into the higher consciousness, or Buddhic awareness. In terms of the locality within the waking brain, the experience exists in the middle of the head behind the eyes—mid-brain, thalamus approximately. Attempting to describe this experience, he dictated as follows:]

Whilst affirming, meditatively, identity with THAT—meaning (partially) the One, All-inclusive and All-pervading and All-present Spirit-Essence of the Universe, I transcend (without altogether losing knowledge of) my Ego-personality, and “touch” in consciousness the Bliss-Aspect of that “One Alone”! It is still there within me as an utterly impersonal bliss-state, not as in the case personally due to any action, achievement, or cause, but a single, or almost single bliss.

Blessedness, beyond anything ever known on earth. It is described by Dante very well as “the smile of the Universe”, but not on anybody’s face; for it is a perpetual interior state of “smiling”, blessedness, or bliss.

Although it is a limitless condition of the interior aspect of the Universe, and doubtless its Logos, I know that I was, as I began by saying, only “touching” it then, and still am. But this touch in itself is remarkable beyond any possibility of appropriate description, except, if I dare, as an infinite “ocean” of never ceasing, deep, still happiness, existent in itself and by itself and of itself.

I presume the experience will never leave me though I cannot sustain the consciousness of it which depends on complete withdrawal from both externals and the existence of anything else but a UNITY. I have, as it were, mentally left it now, though I know that it is, and will be, forever present within me as a part of me. In physical terms, it would be as if one were unceasingly in a state of smiling ease, unaffected by circumstances, ever going on inside one. In a familiar phrase, “bliss consciousness”, which I have just touched, as I have said.

The effect of that so-called touch is marvellous, since, knowing of the existence now of the bliss state (physically) 1 can memorize it, as it were, think myself back into it and, when successful, touch and enter it again.

I think the body was asleep part of the time, but when I “awoke” the interior process was still going on, though “muted” or far away; nevertheless still there, very definitely. I can see that the body must be comfortable and reasonably well, the emotions content, and the mind at ease, and consciousness thrown open to this inward state.

The part of the mind that tends to analyse and describe the experience, as if diagrammatically, produces a very peculiar picture! Across the middle of it, or rather three-quarters below from the top, would be the surface of the earth, with its phenomena, trees, etc. A deep trench has to be imagined down into the depths of the picture, the bottom. One’s feet are there, one’s head just above the surface, and straight up above is a vertical, direct line into what would be the upper air and penetrating into the Sun, with its tremendous radiance reaching in far-flung lines to the edge of the picture. In this state one is in the middle of the Sun, as it were, diagrammatically.

11 November 1976 Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

It is of immeasurable importance that nothing should ever disturb—and of course ever take away—the seclusion and privacy in which, at this moment you can reach Me, and at all others, I can reach you. This is the supreme necessity in our work together for the rest of your two lives. The same, of course, applies to communications from the other Members of the Adept Brotherhood, certain of Whom communicate with you on occasion. This would be impossible without your present completely assured and maintained seclusion and privacy. Never deprive yourself—and so Ourselves—of this benefice...

12 November 1976 - Epsom, Auckland

An Adept

[To Geoffrey, who had been contemplating the exalted status of Adeptship:]

You will never leave the world entirely as long as there remains a single person on earth who needs you. True, an Adept is “free”—has conquered and so is internally in a state of freedom, His beneficent karma very greatly exceeding and overbalancing all possible adversities. Therefore, indeed. He is as sometimes pictured, smilingly free. What is more, if He does remain on earth, He labours at His own level and in His own way for the similar attainment of freedom by all others. Such a one cannot permit Himself fully to enjoy His freedom as long as one single human being remains bound—yes, if you like—to the “wheel of birth and death”.^{^[158]} Although it may sound selfish, the most effective way to bring others to freedom is to free oneself. Every Adept is truly free within and as Himself and partakes of this in a state of bliss or supernal happiness that cannot be described.

So, the freedom for all mankind from that wheel, with all the limitations and all the sufferings experienced by one who is bound thereto, is the supreme objective of Adeptship and of every Adeptic Movement, including the Theosophical Society; for the knowledge of the Ancient Wisdom is largely, but not wholly, provided that men and women will study, absorb, and apply it to their lives, and so—and only so—win freedom in their turn from the inexorable wheel. Continue, as We know you will, to lead your fellow human beings on to knowledge and practice of Theosophy.

December 1976

An Adept

Yes, Geoffrey, when at Convention you refer to the conditions necessary to be worthy of admission to the Temple of the Mysteries, add to your list and accentuate that of uttermost selflessness through and throughout one’s whole nature. Before that wondrous door will open, especially into the Greater Mysteries, every shred and trace of self-seeking and use of occult opportunities for personal profit in any department of one’s life whatever is not only a disgrace but is an impassable barrier to progress beyond a certain point or degree.

Yes, quote the Master Morya, as you remarked to Sandra.

Your obligations to the seeking ones and the sick ones must of course be met to the full. I know, however, that you will make much progress with your book^{^[159]} as thereafter is reasonably possible to you both. The book is growing, will grow, and will be completed to make a very considerable impact upon the minds of a great many people, some of whom would not be attracted to occultism without such a form of introduction—the great myths, I mean.

3 December 1976

The Master Morya

The closing of the E.S. would be a tragedy, if only because membership in it, attendance at its meetings, the vision of the portraits, the acceptance of the teachings and disciplines, are distinct indications — proof, in fact—that the member has both found a link with the Masters and the Masters with him, thereby fulfilling the Law to which you do so often and rightly refer: no one is ever overlooked.

For this purpose alone, of those members who join the E.S.... there undoubtedly are those who are approaching and others who have reached the evolutionary stage at which Adeptic response to idealism is assured and occurs, who receive the answers to their prayers, the outstretched hand of the Teacher.

In addition, the letter, whilst having some good points, almost entirely ignores the great class of aspirants to the higher life who are bhaktis, devotees, in fact. For these, all the arguments in the world and all the destructive conclusions of others are as nothing. It would be a great mistake if ever the T.S. were to lose the E.S.

Say so, Geoffrey, underlined; FOR THIS MUST NOT OCCUR. Large numbers of Egos, some of them reincarnated from the Mystery Schools of old, are coming into the world and the T.S. at this time, who are far less doctrinaire students and exponents of Theosophy than idealists and devotees ascending along the mystic pathway. These must not be left without a base and centre from which their aspirations may be fulfilled, and this would be the case if the E.S., Co-Masonry, and...were to be closed.

Our idea is surely better, for We seek to destroy naught but only to build the T.S. as an increasingly Theosophy-teaching organization.

*****

Master Polidorus Isurenus

The substance of this morning’s letter with suitable introduction, additional matter, perhaps, and conclusion might well be useful as an article for The Theosophist.^{^[160]} Among the possible titles might be (the choice is left with you both):

1. The E.S. as a Source of Spiritual Inspiration and Guidance.

2. The E.S. as a Channel between the Masters and its Members.

3. The Value of Shrine-rooms.

4. The Dual Purpose of the T.S.: To Popularize Theosophy and to Serve as a Link (an available link, channel) between Aspirants to Discipleship and the Masters.

5. The E.S. as a Portal to the Temple of the Mysteries and Hierophant Within.

The concept of the Seven Rays indicates that not all seekers for Truth are searching for philosophy alone. For some, this serves as a necessary firm foundation for the intelligent expression of devotion to a religious ideal, being, or principle, such as the Godhead. Others require more definitely a reliable philosophic direction for a life of service to one’s fellow men. Others seek more importantly the knowledge and guidance on the Pathway to interior self-command, illumination, and ultimate realization of oneness with the eternal, universal life. The ideal of orderly, precise, regular, ceremonial self-expression, service, and search holds a marked (or decisive) place in the thoughts and ideals of those who also have awakened and answered to the spiritual Call.

Whilst the activities of the T.S. offer opportunities in some of these fields, particularly the discovery of Truth and the service of mankind, as an organization it does not provide the direct occult and spiritual training and self-expression for those of other temperaments. The existence of and admission to the E.S. can—indeed has and still does—provide the more especial teaching and direction for those who by temperament and perhaps experiences of the same in former incarnations, seek to tread the mystic and occult Pathways.

Millions of people in former lives became associated in varying degrees with the Mystery Tradition, and it is but natural for them again to seek the portal of the Temple, approach, and again be admitted to the Anaktoron or Holy of Holies within. For all such, the E.S. makes available the very opportunities, guidance, and training needed to again tread the Pathway of Hastened Evolution and, one day, ever more effectively assist fellow men to attain Adeptship. True, the E.S. is to be regarded as but a preparatory institution, giving as it does instruction in the way of life, of thought, self-discipline, and meditation, along which each member is left free to proceed to the discovery of the Spiritual Self, the One Self, and the truth of the Unity which ever exists between them.

Whilst in one sense the E.S. may not be described literally as a physical ashram, monastery, or convent—even though for many members of the E.S. their homes are as ashrams—nevertheless, it does definitely give such aid as those institutions make available and extremely important to the majority of members—permits the continuance of life out in the world.

The E.S. has, almost from its beginning, been described as the “heart” of the T.S. and, if the above descriptions are accepted, it does become for many of its members the very “heart” of their lives in the emblematic sense. To divide these two—the T.S. and the E.S.—would inevitably remove a great deal, if admittedly not all, of the mystical and the spiritual heart from the Theosophical movement in the world of today.

If only from one other point of view, the insistence upon a strict vegetarian diet and abstinence from the wearing of furs for members of the E.S. does make a practical contribution—however slight—to the reduction of the inconceivable brutality and cruelty characteristic of the relationships between men and animals on this our earth. For this alone, the existence and the function of the E.S. constitutes a valuable contribution to the evolution of mankind upon our earth.

Late December 1976 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

You are quite right, Sandra, in regarding your work in producing The Diary of Geoffrey’s life as of great importance and for the very reasons you have enunciated, namely: assurance that the Masters continue to train and to use a human agent as vehicle for Their teaching and yogic and psychological influences.

I recognize the heavy demands upon you both, but wonder whether—however briefly, at a particular time—both books could not continue side by side as it were.[161] The Diary will not make such demands upon Geoffrey’s brain as does reception of ideas for books, though of course literary work itself is tiring. So continue pulling together and arranging in as correct a sequence as possible such of Geoffrey’s occult experiences as lend themselves to support for the above described objective. Through him, I will also help you in this on appropriate occasions, bringing to mind, for example, certain temporarily forgotten expansions and assisting in descriptions of the others in appropriately occult language:

1. His vision of his deceased brother, Stanley.

2. His fellow Scottish tank commander in the cave.

3. Even his experience on the eve of his first actual tank action when he sought to become the rightly activated soldier and, on looking up as he lay beside his tank, saw two wounded soldiers, one German and one British, supporting each other along the road to the rear and his Ego-brain exclaimed, “The Brotherhood of Man!”

4. Somewhat earlier appearance within his head of the full “incarnated” portrait of the Master Kuthumi on entering the School (E.S.) and the Master’s words to him, “Welcome back to the Ranks, Geoffrey.”

5. His experience with Mrs and Miss Case concerning the life after death, at Wigan, England.

6. The copying action of the tree nature spirit at Thirlmere [Lake district, England] and, on that occasion, the sudden vision of the deva of Helvellea

7. Of course, the first and totally unexpected vision of Bethelda must be clearly and vividly described with references to following experiences, not only in Sheepscombe but in many distant parts of the world.

8. Then, if he can recall them, some of the dramatic occult healings might be described, Geoffrey going back into his memory for these.

9. Yes, the loss of his home (in teenage boyhood) and very painful experiences in London thereafter, were of course decided by karma...

*****

Master Polidorus Isurenus

THE MASTER THE PRINCE RAKOCZY

You may speak of the Master, the Prince Rakoczy, as a great Lord of Fohat or cosmic electric fire. He is—more especially, but not only—one of the “Sons of Activity” Who are invoked.

They are really “the Sons of Fohat” which is the fiery power that energizes the whole universe and is the driving force in man. Up to a certain stage in evolution (that of the middle of the Fifth Race) this force operates as the mental, emotional, and physical driving power, the electricity which drives the machine of the human personality. It is then called Kundalini, or the Serpent Fire, and is symbolized by serpents as shown on aprons of certain (ceremonial) stages. It is still a universal rather than a consciously used human power.

As the next evolutionary phase is entered, that of the Sixth subrace of the Fifth Race and of the Sixth Race, the higher mental and Buddhic bodies also become energized and awakened as vehicles of human awareness.

The Path of Holiness is then sought, found, and trodden, and die Master Rakoczy becomes personally concerned with the aspirant. Fohat as Kundalini now becomes a personal force, stirs in the physical and higher bodies, lets in the Ego, and speeds up human evolution.

The Master Rakoczy, as Head of the Seventh Ray, the Fohatic Ray, is then associated with the awakening individual and assists him directly or through His representative in this particular part of his development; hence the... Rite in modern days, and hence Freemasonry, etc.

The Master is also, of course, a very wonderful superhuman Being, highly developed in every aspect of human nature, a glorious, perfected man, a very high Adept Not only Third, but also Second and First Aspects are therefore fully and perfectly developed and expressed in Him. Thus, although He [the Master Rakoczy] deals with creative forces of the Solar System and planet, He is also a great Lord of Wisdom and Love, and an embodiment of the Cosmic Will. He is also a Master, an Adept Who takes pupils.

*****

Master Polidorus Isurenus

INITIATIONS AND HIGHER CONSCIOUSNESS

Each of the great Initiations is lead up to, and prepared for, by preparatory assistance from the Guru, which includes preliminary Rites reflected, if incompletely, in the “bridge” Degrees in Masonry and Co-Freemasonry. These preparations resemble the major Rite in some respects and have as their purpose and effect the bringing of maximum Adept aid to the candidate who is forcing evolution ahead of the Race, Round, and Chain, and so to prepare him or her to pass the all-seeing and penetrating eye of the Senior Members of the Occult Hierarchy. Then, when one of Them passes the candidate, He himself takes up the Thyrsus, whether wand, sword, or Rod of Power, and performs in full power and ratification the actual and final Initiatory Ceremony of the Degree. All this is then entered in the age-old and imperishable record carefully maintained by the Hierarchy.

Initiates vary and whenever two particular conditions exist, preparatory Ceremonies are less necessary. One of these is full response to the more or less private assistance given by the Adept-Guru, and the other is, of course, the historical fact that the candidate has passed through at least the preparatory Rites, if not the full ones, in former lives. If a person has taken the Third Initiation and advanced towards the Fourth in former lives, then in this one he is able to consummate Arhatship and begin the preparation for the Asekha Rite. These are many and include worldly experience and physical illumination with Buddhic consciousness gradually until the highest is reached. Then the Monad itself takes over the function of all Gurus and preparatory Rites and, in effect at least, takes the Arhat out of the human into the Adept-state and kingdom of Nature. That is why He is called the “Self-Initiated One”.

Fully successful Arhats who have passed through successive grades of Arhatship, seven at least, and Adepts, perpetually experience this bliss. When once fully attained, or rather made manifest in the brain-mind, it is never wholly lost again, even amidst the stresses and strains of the so-called “passion” of the Arhat degree. To produce this Causal-Buddhic consciousness experienced as bliss is the ultimate purpose of yoga.

*****

THE SEPTENNIAL GATHERING OF THE BROTHERHOOD

Last night I was in the company of quite a number of very great superhuman Beings, one characteristic of Them being stillness, a sort of remarkable “living quietude”. I don’t remember being spoken to or taught anything—merely permitted to be there.

Master Polidorus Isurenus commented, “You attended the septennial gathering of the Brotherhood, which has been held during the last twenty-four hours and even longer in some ways, which might perhaps in the human sense be called ‘subcommittees’—meaning groups of Adepts concerned with certain situations.”

They all seemed to be dressed in white and to be very remarkable Beings, each possessed of a great and dynamic strength and power, but completely still, calm, as far as Their minds and natures were—and are—concerned. Those with Whom I became associated were all standing, or even as it now seems, “floating” with Their feet just above the “ground”. The level of Their consciousness is at the Atmic, and whilst operative in the Buddhic and higher Manasic planes and bodies, They are undisturbably serene.

Unlike us, however, They exist and so abide mentally, knowing that the slightest measure of emotion, for example, would intrude upon and reduce the absolute clarity of Their minds and so the effectiveness of Their planning and even actions. In our time sense, such a gathering would occupy at least a week, after which each withdraws in the personal sense, though never from the great Lord of the World in His own inner consciousness.

I was present during the time of bodily sleep, and this is part of the impression and memory that has been with me ever since throughout this day. It seems to me to be—in our ordinary terms and ways of thinking—very, very far removed from earthly life or even parliaments, for naturally there is what might be called a superhuman detachment associated with the sense of occult power, and of stillness which I have remembered and of which I am still aware. Of course, this in no sense means that the Adepts of the planet are so detached and living in Their own wondrous worlds that they are not concerned with and participating in earth life. On the contrary, the whole “conference”, I gather, concerns human evolution at this time and They are deeply concerned with humanity and all that has to do with sentient life. This includes both long-term plans for beneficent intrusions upon that evolution, and planned activities such as the founding of the Theosophical Society in 1875 as well as other beneficent movements, especially those which help the mind of mankind towards right thought.

1977

1976-77 Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

ARTICLE ON CEREMONIAL

The article on ceremonial^{^[162]} might well begin with a stage-by-stage reference to human love of ritual, e.g., pageantry in peace times and also military parades. Include in the pageantry regal parades and displays, together with military guards, mounted and on foot, with appropriate musical accompaniments. Then lead on to church-and orders of knighthood, culminating in coronation, with your existing material on both.

Then lead into your writings on religious ritual and Masonic ceremonial, using your own excellent material. Then the Ancient Mysteries in Greece and elsewhere and, finally, the Portal still exists, its Guardians await all those sincerely prepared and are ready to open wide the door into the true Mysteries which are equally external and internal. In the Lesser Mysteries the accent is on the former, whilst in the latter, the whole procedure includes the accentuation of the interior. Eventually the necessity for ritual itself is outgrown, all results being produced by combined will-power and intelligence based on direct knowledge of the truths, powers, forces, and intelligences involved.

Thus, ceremonial of all valid kinds is useful both for its immediate effects and for the expansion of consciousness which it produces in those sufficiently awake to respond to its visible and invisible influences and powers.

A danger exists, however, that one may become so absorbed in the ceremonial itself (and the personal advantages it offers) as to become unresponsive to—even disinterested [uninterested] in—its REAL purpose (here the church warnings will be useful; define both). Theosophy and the Theosophical Society are very valuable because they teach both.

1977

THE SERPENT

The serpent is the symbol of wisdom because wisdom glides unseen everywhere, seeking entry into the mind of man; the serpent glides through the forest and the fields, silent, certain of its way.

Receive it rightly and it will illumine. Misuse it and it will sting. Do not attack the serpent. Be still and it will glide near you, and you will see its movement and its beauty. Its venom will either destroy or heal.

*****

Master Polidorus Isurenus

In the midst of a universe which is perpetually in movement, there exists a principle that is forever still, of which the pyramid is a symbol.

Contemplation of (and even participation in) the underlying laws, processes, and activities of Intelligences reveals the means by which universes, and so worlds and people, all come into existence when born within and from the Divine Mind. This might be called the Theosophy of Cosmic, Universal, and Planetary relationship.

*****

Master Polidorus Isurenus

The purpose for the existence of the Theosophical Society is solely to teach Theosophy. This demands mature-minded people moved by idealism. Mature minds will advance the work of the Society. Immature people could ruin it. This is realism and vitally necessary to the welfare and work of the Theosophical Society. Let us proceed accordingly.

1977 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

The great principle governing human evolution is that man as an individual must be left free. Nevertheless, the Masters of the Wisdom ensure that the guidance necessary to obtain and maintain peace, health, and happiness is always available.

*****

A YOGIC AFFIRMATION OF UNITY WITH ALL THAT LIVES

God-Self, myself—One Self

God-Life, my Life—One Life.

1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

It is important for the occultist not to be a judge over the actual conduct of others—even Theosophists. Those matters must be left to those who are concerned with them.

We occultists are concerned (principally) with the other world, the world of the souls of men and women and with the Egos incarnated in them. The link between these two—Ego and soul—and, if it may be, body, must be preserved from disruption, especially in times of extreme crisis and suffering.

One reason for this, amongst others, is that it is the disruption of the association and the suffering of the bodily person which turns people from the right-hand to the left-hand path. Rage, outrage, fiery antagonism, and oppositely, deeply interior hatred against those responsible for the agony—it is these which can “jolt” the personality out of touch with the Ego. As a result, driven by the experience described, a person can become an enemy of society, quite wrongly a hater of his fellow men.

It is important that the Egoic contact be neither overshaken nor broken, and it is this unifying, “holding together” of outer and inner Selves that is a very important part of the work of the occultist

He or she should never join those who drive people beyond their ability to receive adversity, attack, accusation. Always must the occultist remain judicially calm in equipoise and so assist in the maintenance of a working relationship between Ego and brain.

It is wise guidance not to stand before and fight your attacker, but to stay away, to ignore. This may sound subtle and delicate and so it is; for the work of the occultist is ever and ever to hold people together, to harmonize, and so to save. Blind hatred is a terrible thing, and once it gets hold of a person, it can destroy him for that incarnation and even onward. Open-eyed love builds, illumines, and saves people always when very tactfully employed.

*****

Master Morya

Your Diary will be like a continuation of the Mahatma Letters^{^[163]}...and will greatly validate all that which has already been revealed. This will be very helpful—hence the idea.

*****

Master Polidorus Isurenus

[Communication for Sandra]

Of course, the actual language in which Geoffrey receives My teachings is only the vehicle for instructions which I give him out of his body when we talk over all these ideas and sometimes look up the Akashic Records, and so into the minds of the authors of ancient times, to see what they really did mean and were trying both to reveal and to conceal. .

The concealing principle is almost as important as that of revealing, especially where the subject matter can lead to the discovery of the attainment of power, yet this had to be made available to mankind, for this is the law—the law of Light, you may call it if you wish—under which all spiritual discoveries must be shared.

The whole symbolical language arose out of this dual necessity for revelation under pressure of law, and concealment—also in obedience to law—of information which is potentially dangerous.

January 1977 - Onerahi, Whangarei, Northland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

THE SIBYLLINE SIDDHI

(Communication for Sandra for The Diary)

Supernormal powers attained by the practice of yoga may be classified into one or the other of three orders:

1. Totally unconscious—trance mediumship;

2. Semi-conscious—mediumship;

3. Fully conscious, reported conversation—sibylship.

In the last of these three, the communication is made directly to the higher and lower minds of the recipient who is completely awake and conscious, knowing full well the process that is taking place and quite deliberately participating in it.

The word sibyl, thus used, has rather come to be misunderstood and even descriptive of a certain mentally retarded state or person. Whilst this may have been true, or partly true, of some of the more public sibyls of ancient days, it was and is in no sense even slightly true as a description of an advanced yogi-sibyl, for he—as is always the case with Geoffrey—receives cleariy in his mind, and then his brain, every idea and even word that is communicated to him by a fellow yogi of the same standing, or by an Adept.

Thus viewed, Geoffrey’s books are rightly published overhis personal name—for he himself, aided by his Adept Collaborator, Egoically arrives at an understanding of the thought-stream, or rather enters an illuminated state and, aided when necessary, translates the ideas into the best English at his disposal at the time in his formal mind, and after having achieved these yogic siddhis, verbally dictates them to his personal recorder.

In some cases—many indeed—the truths were made known to Geoffrey in former lives so that their awakening to his conscious mind in’ this life is, partly at least, a recovery of his own knowledge attained by study and during philosophical education in previous incarnations.

Nevertheless, Geoffrey does, by yoga, place himself in a mentally receptive, yogic condition, and it is then that the Teachers awaken the chosen knowledge—interpretations of allegories and symbols chiefly—in his Egoic consciousness when necessary. They further assist by aiding the transference of the ideas first into reasoned thoughts and then into verbal statements of them. All this which, by the way, occurs instantaneously and continuously, proceeds from the beginning to the close of every communication.

Such, from these points of view, is the siddhi of true sibylship by means of which Geoffrey’s interpretive books have been written, as also certain articles and even lecture notes.

Ideally, the hypersensitive sibyl should be dwelling in a totally secluded ashram, but the Teachers require a messenger who is in touch with the world, and so—generally all unknown as the faculties are—living an apparently normal life amongst his or her fellow men.

These remarks are offered both in explanation of the occult procedure of sibylship and to provide complete justification for Geoffrey’s use of his own name as the author of his books, whether sibylline or otherwise. Throughout the whole of this sibylline function, Geoffrey is in such complete control of body and mind as to be able without difficulty to clarify or repeat any statement which to the recorder may seem unclear, rephrasing it if necessary. He is able even to enquire of the occult informant whether the new phrasing meets with His approval or not, or to require either restatement or enlargement.^{^[164]} Never, under any consideration whatever, has Geoffrey permitted his mind and waking consciousness to be controlled to the very slightest degree by anyone physical or superphysical.

Apparently this collaboration and tuition, and the resultant literary and verbal contributions to human knowledge and thought, were well known, if not ordained from before Geoffrey’s birth. If so, then it was for the fulfilment of these purposes that the descent of the “Bird of Fire” into his body as a child occurred; also the numerous instances of his life being saved when otherwise he would have died; the meeting with the two seeress teachers, Mrs Booth and Mrs de la Middleton, who taught and guided him so effectively during the two most important occult phases of this incarnation, namely the beginning and continuance of membership of the Parent Theosophical Society (1912) and entry upon the highly specialized occult work to which he was invited in 1923 in London.

Therefore, Sandra, in The Diary, please be sure to make clear concerning Geoffrey’s writings the following: Every single idea that is transferred to Geoffrey is always absorbed, fully comprehended, and then consciously formulated into his best English. The process, therefore, in no slightest degree resembles mediumship, because he himself thinks out every single contribution received from the mind of one of Us [the Adept Teachers], himself fully understands, and is mentally illumined by it before and during the process of its communication. Thus it may truly be said that Geoffrey himself knows exactly each and every truth that he receives or hears and dictates. At suitable places repeat this statement.

[To conclude this utterance of the Master Polidorus Isurenus concerning Geoffrey’s fully conscious sibylline siddhi, I append the following passage which includes statements made by the great Mahatmas to show Their abhorrence and Their continual denial of the use of mediumship as a means of communication by Them to human beings:]

ADEPTIC WARNING AGAINST MEDIUMSHIP

Adeptic communications make quite clear that under no circumstances does an Adept ever use spiritualistic mediums as channels of communication. All suggestions to the contrary are false, as every true occultist is fully aware.

Their words to this effect are:

“Mediumism, as practised in our days, is a more undesirable gift than the robe of Nessus”^{^[165]}

“The blood of the centaur, Nessus, soaked into the shirt of Herakles, producing upon him an agony as though he were in a burning fire, and ultimately brought about his death.”^{^[166]}

“Imperator cannot preach the occult Sciences and then defend mediumship…”^{^[167]}

“But the medium and the chela are diametrically dissimilar and the latter acts consciously….”^{^[168]}

“And now, you may understand why we oppose so strongly Spiritualism and mediumship.’’^{^[169]}

In consequence, literature containing communications claimed to have been received by entranced mediums from those Adepts Who participated in the founding of the Theosophical Society, must therefore be recognized as spurious.

A QUESTION PUT TO GEOFFREY AT A PUBLIC MEETING IN MANILA AND HIS ANSWER

Question: Please tell me why mediumship is so harmful, why it is so dangerous, and why the messages cannot be trusted to be truthful. Some of the mediums here tell us that the Masters speak through them, many Masters. Are we to believe them? Is this likely to have any truth about it at all? Some who go to these mediums regularly may be being taken in and cheated.

Answer: Obsessing entities on the astral plane use these Masters’ names (any names) in order to gain increasing power over, and dependence from, their unfortunate mediums. NO ADEPT EVER USES A MEDIUM. TOO HARMFUL. TOO DOUBTFUL. QUITE UNNECESSARY.

I receive continuing requests from persons so afflicted for exorcism from obsessing entities. If the enclosing veils of the mental or etheric bodies are tom, then it may be beyond my limited capacities to save them from madness or psychological derangement. Mediumship is a symptom of the absence of determination to discover and live exact truth for oneself.

1 January 1977 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

The distance between the Master and the aspirant is not one of space; it is moral and spiritual only. Similarly, the barriers between them are not mountain chains; they consist of qualities of character. The separation is within the aspirant and this can and must be overcome. He must strip himself “to the bone”. Everything personal must go. Stem simplicity is the ideal.

22 January 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Occult progress during incarnation and before Adeptship is reached is always dual, remember, if not triple. The Monad progresses—erroneous though the term would seem to be—but in ways beyond human comprehension. One may think of this as an extension of the range of responsiveness on its own plane, e.g., from other planets, other Rounds, other Chains, but one must definitely say, not other Universes when in incarnation.

The second form of evolutionary development refers entirely to the Ego and the increase in both inner capacity and outer power to affect the mind accordingly. This might be called “Egoic Steps”, Atma, Buddhi, and Manas I being involved. Ultimately, this progress does reach the brain-mind, giving added capacities there in various ways and compartments of personal understanding.

The third, of course, concerns the personality itself and indicates that the mento-astral nature and, of course, vehicles, have advanced in occult capacities. These could include facility in grasping ideas, in-depth comprehension of them, and a general clearing away or lighting up of areas in the mind which hitherto have been, as it were, imperfecdy lighted, even shaded—quite deeply in some cases. This is a very valuable step and, when conjoined with and expressive of the Egoic advancement, is a very notable achievement. Or, to be more truthful, this happens within one like a form of growth in any cellular body. At the brain level it could eventually cause that exclamation, “Oh, now I understand!” The Ego-mind more especially becomes aware of an added dimension of consciousness.

Entrance upon this stage is a very important one from another point of view, namely that it constitutes an open gateway or portal to the next “area of consciousness” in the widest sense.

*****

Master Polidorus Isurenus

THE LAW OF KARMA

Noble and highly beneficent motives, words, and deeds, spoken and performed in uttermost sincerity, long continued and oft-repeated, can “drench out” or overbalance effects from undesirable deeds [in the present and past lives] so that their results upon evolutionary progress and conditions are very much even entirely—outweighed.

23 January 1977 - Whangarei

Master Polidorus Isurenus

THE WORLD OF MYTHOLOGY

[During the writing of The Concealed Wisdom in World Mythology, Geoffrey had been exclaiming, “Oh, what a wonderful and fascinating world is the realm of mythology!” Master Polidorus Isurenus, having evidently overheard him, spoke to him as follows:]

You could not live in a better, even a more wonderful, literary heaven than that one which is inhabited by the gods and radiated by not only their heavenly light but also by the mysterious accounts, the wisdom-filled stories, and the magnificent symbolic emblems of their most fascinating activities, engagements, heroic deeds, mystery-actions, and all the remarkable miracles which they performed and helped others to perform.

Mythological literature—and the history of the lives and experiences of all the gods that ever lived from dawn of Creation by Nut and Shu, down to the present day—might well be named “THE WORLD OF THE GODS”, “THE KINGDOM OF THE SUN”. For of course, each and every one of them still lives in that wondrous world and still performs his mysterious and often quite incomprehensible actions, representing, as each of them does, the forces of Nature and the products of their actions and especially their interactions. Blessed is he who is able intelligently to enter and, with elevated mind, to abide in the wonderful kingdom of Brahma, Vishnu, and Shiva [Hindu]; Atun, Amun, Mut, and Khonsu [Egyptian], of Zeus and all his brother and sister gods and goddesses and all offspring, and the magical adventures through which all of them passed and continue to pass.

A way in which this may be done is to pierce the illusory veil on which is projected, as on a screen, the mere shadows of the dwellers in the world of the gods and their fantastic deeds and experiences. “Pass through” or “Behind the veil,” say those who wrote, age by age and epoch by epoch, in the wondrous literature revealing not only the shadows of forms and movements seen upon the “screen” or “veil”. Of course – and to a modern world I hardly need thus to affirm – whilst abiding in heaven with the gods, goddesses, and their relations, one must keep one’s feet firmly on the ground!

A student of the Occult Sciences may learn by means of meditative study, and even reverent ndeavor, to solve the mystery, to interpret the personifications and the performances, thereby discovering that which is the goal, if I may say so, “the bull’s-eye” for every truly reverent and reasonably wise reader of books on world mythology. He may thus wish, on occasion, to withdraw from this world and find the treasures of wisdom that an awakened intuition and a reasonably informed intellect may discover.

31 January 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

The purpose of the Sages for introducing occultly significant events, portions, and parts into existing myths—in those days folk tales, of course was not only to attract attention to spiritual, philosophical, and occult truths and teachings purely in terms of knowledge of them. It was also, and more importantly, to arouse the actual potencies within reader or hearer of fairy-tale and myth. Knowledge, of course, was vital and was delivered in however deeply veiled forms. But what was hoped for was its application to the ever deepening study of Brahma Vidya or Theosophia and thereafter the use of the knowledge to awaken within the recipient, student, and even preliminary Initiate, the occult forces indirectly referred to.

3 February 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Yes, Sandra, The Diary of Geoffrey is very important indeed because of the reasons you advance, whilst the accounts of his occult experiences will prove extremely interesting and encouraging to occult-minded readers. The reassurance to members of the Theosophical Society in recent and later times that We, their Teachers, continue to contribute and communicate will be a great source of encouragement. Therefore, proceed as I know you are doing.

[To Geoffrey, who was soon to begin further research into music forms:]

Rest and fill your mind with “NOTHINGNESS”.

8 February 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Morya

Sandra, as you must present Geoffrey’s Diary, the affirmation will need to be made by you, quite solemnly as it were, that very definite, quite unmistakable physical phenomena frequently occurred whenever the Masters wished to obtain his attention for the receipt of special communications.

You may well, if so moved, fully affirm this fact as a regular experience—the taps, knocks, and even rattle sounds occurring within and from our Shrine.

True, Geoffrey was at all times readily responsive to and aware of the Masters’ intention to communicate. But sometimes he was deeply preoccupied with various matters, both occult and worldly, so that a brief knock readily served the Masters’ purpose when They decided to communicate, to guide in some matter, or to teach concerning our books or Geoffrey’s lectures, for example.^{^[170]}

9 February 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Stress again the importance of reaching the human mind with the teachings of Theosophy and stress the danger to present humanity of the declining world situation. Keep on using the word danger as a spur to all who hear you and hear from you for world dissemination of Theosophy.

10 February 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Yes, by all means, change over to Freemasonry for a time as soon as Volume IV of the Bible books is completed. This will help forward the Co-Masonic Order and your own contributions. Produce our early book on Freemasonry, adapted to modern publications. The Co-Masonic Order itself would be greatly helped by occult and spiritual stimulation, tending as it does to become over-concerned with ceremonial—valuable as this is and with all the material and organizational aspects of the Movement This is contrary to the Plan of the H.O. A.T.F. for Co-Masonry. Hence the value of all you have done and can do to spiritualize and add occult science and realism to Co-Freemasonry.

18 February 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

[During the writing of the Introduction to The Concealed Wisdom in World Mythology:]

The Prometheus Principle—well named—is most profound and will, I think, demand rather special conditions and also very special preparation. The whole story, with each successive incident, had better be written out and each incident then offered to Me for interpretation.

Would not the Onerahi conditions perhaps be best for this very great subject? If you so decide, then the Heracles story might well be begun now. Write briefly each specific incident from fatherhood by Zeus, and especially the serpent attack and entry in the cradle, on to the beginning of The Labours. Then I will offer interpretations which will form, as it were, the introduction to the Heracles story. Now, therefore, to facilitate the resumption of our work of interpretation of myths, let us take the First Labour...

5 March 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Morya

PRIDE

One of the very greatest tests and difficulties for those who must pass through them in the dedicated occult life is deep-seated personal pride. For some temperaments in whom the First Ray is strong, this can prove to be, in a great many cases, the cause of failure in a particular life.

Those who are not afflicted or who have outgrown the deep-seated interior sense of their own special importance naturally transcend it. They cannot adequately know or easily understand the extraordinary conflict which its possession can cause. Almost, it may be said, personal pride concerning deeper issues especially, means more to those afflicted with it than anything else on earth. Grant them that and all is well. Deny it, or be placed in a position where it has been obviously a cause of profound error—fall, in fact—and there arises from hidden depths within the personal nature an antagonism that almost amounts to hatred or at least deep resentment.

This, of course, is not really against the people before whom the fall became apparent and its cause revealed, but amounts to an impersonal, extremely angry resentment. This is not only because the fall has occurred, but also because the quality and the error it produced have become self-evident. This is the problem and position of...and before it our friend is helpless, even forced wrongly to agree and support the error. We must wait, therefore, for time, the inner Ego, and human nature, for a resumption of the earlier intimacy, should that ever become possible. The word “ever” is deliberately used; for the monumental obstacle is PRIDE. This was the trouble and this is the meaning of the incidents associated with Devadatta, Set purely theoretical by the way—and Cain, for example.

13 March 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Morya

[Last night, Geoffrey had a vivid superphysical experience of being with his Master (Master Morya). The following directions were given to him:]

Do not go abroad unless you are both assured that the body [Geoffrey’s body at the age of ninety-one years] will withstand the strain and that every possible convenience and ease will be provided both on the way there and on the way back. You should, particularly—if this all comes about—stay at least two days and nights at Honolulu. A useful contribution to the occult life of Krotona could be made...Krotona does have a very important occult future. You helped greatly before and could do so again. However, guard and govern the body from every point of view, especially according to the guidance of your doctor.

Your myth book^{^[171]} under your Teacher of Luxor [Master Polidorus Isurenus], with illustrations, is of very great promise. The first volume only needs completion and is already nearly large enough, according to your plans. This work is in the direct line of H.P.B.’s, and so is Our literature; and apart from its great value, interest, and instructiveness, it is the assurance of the continuation of Our work on behalf of the Society and the world, through the Parent Theosophical Movement

The continuing and increasing “sweep” of true and pure Theosophical thought and influence into the mind of humanity at this time is of great importance. Unfortunately, direct interest in and direction towards her literature (H.P.B.’s) are slipping. Advise... to write an article—more than one, if possible—for The Theosophist stressing this thought and necessity.

Then, yes of course. The Diary (apart from its direct personal interest, especially for all who respond to true occultism) also assures the members of the Theosophical Society that We have not deserted the Movement. Note that this is clear in introductory articles.

Your lines of work as now being followed are quite the best for these years of your life. Continue them, meaning public and selected classes here at your home in Epsom.

As the trend becomes observable, your work at the Masonic classes is invaluable and should eventually also be made public, including the book^{^[172]} directly given to you by your Teacher from Luxor. However, above all, proceed with and finish the two books now before you, and in addition avoid strain and fatigue as you do. The outings and holidays are excellent, especially the latter, with their opportunities for literary work. Therefore keep this last in continuance.

22 March 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Morya

[After the arranged signal of the taps within the Shrine]

It is thought desirable that you should write and send a further article to The Theosophist dealing with the problem of the always possible conflict between adherence to strict and original Theosophical principle® and especially primary objectives on the one hand, and the exercise of freedom of thought on the other. A suggested title for the article is: “Adherence to Fundamental (or basic) Doctrines and Purposes whilst Able to Exercise Freedom of Opinion, Interest, and Activities”.^{^[173]}

23 March 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Kuthumi

The problem of the advantages and disadvantages of freedom of thought must also be dealt with by us. The article upon which we have embarked may well continue somewhat as follows...

[Several days later the Master Morya added the following:]

You might draw up a set of classified writings, each dealing with the whole objective advanced in the article.

The modern Theosophical Society lacks this and also the outward-looking attitude that could make this opportunity acceptable in practice. Try spreading the idea throughout the Society’s magazines. Tell the members of your classes about it too, and your Masonic brethren.

Make this your White Lotus Day talk and E.S. as well as youth.

3 April 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

A LETTER OF ENCOURAGEMENT AND HELP TO TIRELESS WORKERS IN THE PARENT THEOSOPHICAL SOCIETY

Dear...

Master Polidorus Isurenus asks me to assure you that under no circumstances at all likely to arise will He ever allow His deep interest in and Teacher’s affection for you both to be withdrawn. He dictated to me the enclosed letter.

Affectionately, (signed) Geoffrey

Letter from the Master Polidorus Isurenus

As with you all [other dedicated aspirants and workers in the spreading of Theosophy—the divine and Ancient Wisdom—to humanity] your Egoic evolution and onward progress towards Adeptship has ever been and will be My great concern. It was for this purpose of evolutionary aid that our group was first formed. Applied to your lives, under your present circumstances, this ideal and aspiration to tread the evolutionary Pathway swiftly to its goal for mankind must hold first place in the inner life and endeavours of every aspirant. Nothing should ever be allowed wholly to distract one’s attention from this Egoically adopted and inwardly established objective and even purpose for living.

The practices of yoga, participation in the work of our Masters, the all-important watch for others approaching this stage, and offering of friendly and increasingly active guidance and aid, form, as it were, the very core of the existence of the occultist.

With My Brothers, I am very happy that you have advanced in the inner work to your present official positions, and We hope these will lead to further advances, especially in your inner lives and states of consciousness. Ever deepening realization of the full intent of the stages and self-offering towards the Temples as a whole and, of course, those who receive your ministrations will, I know, increasingly occupy their places in your hearts and minds.

The ability to perceive through the mask of a personality to the true Self hidden therein and readiness, effectively and wisely when convenient, to offer advice—these are, as you already know, the ideals before you now and throughout these present lives. Of course, great and wise discrimination and extremely tactful approaches are necessary in the fulfilment of this increasingly important part of the life and work of sincere aspirants.

At home, as I am aware, your circumstances are quite difficult, although the situations are being endured and even made use of in the right frame of mind.

I hardly need to remind you also of the great importance of one-pointedness in the occult life, especially regarding the moulding and shaping of one’s thoughts, feelings, wishes, and activities amidst the demands and circumstances of daily life.

May I presume to advise that, as with us all, the central thought and aspiration is always the same and may be expressed somewhat as absorption in the attainment of THE GOAL. In fact, those words, THE GOAL, THE GOAL, THE GOAL, together with their full intent should ever occupy the ruling position in our hearts and minds. One’s whole being must become absorbed in the fulfilment of the One Ideal—Initiation and Adeptship as soon as possible in the outer mind and deepening realization of unity with the Spirit-Life-Essence of the Universe, or Parabrahman, the NUCLEUS of all that exists.

Rest assured that you are not in the least alone occultly and spiritually, and receive My offered blessing and best wishes for your happiness and progress.

Warmly and protectively,

° Polidorus Isurenus

5 April 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Morya

[as “Spokesman” only for a group of Adepts]

Our and your two subjects—”publicity for Theosophy” and “wanderers”—are intimately interrelated, for they refer to the same subject, which is the efficiency of the Parent Theosophical Society as it is today in reaching the public with Theosophy and, by so doing, warding off the very dangerous decline and even “fall” of so much that is valuable in modern civilization—particularly freedom.

Our second article,^{^[174]} or second part, defines the latter and the dangers which it arouses. Submit both as one but (or and) agree when submitted to their successive appearances, particularly in monthly consecutive numbers of the magazine. Stress this when you write to the Editor...

Impress...with this danger and the necessity for both personally expressing, and widely advocating, concentration in public work upon the spreading of Theosophy and the reasons for doing so.

We think you should write to... very soon along these lines.

*****

Master Morya

The solution suggested, whether expressed privately or in your articles as you may decide, will depend for its effectiveness, as does every other spiritual and occult activity, upon the existence and united action of a sufficient number of completely dedicated Theosophists. This means those who show a faithful adherence to the Theosophical principles in daily life and who are free and capable of selflessly participating in the fulfilment of the project. But to that must surely be added the acceptance of and practice of an idealism that includes conviction based upon deepening experience that the life in all beings, and so in all men and women, is ONE LIFE. The really worthwhile man or woman is one for whom this conviction is both unshakeably established in direct experience and preserved by daily meditation, who in consequence concludes that no other mode of life is truly worth living than that of helping, healing, guiding fellow human beings towards and along the Pathway of knowledge of Theosophy. These are the people upon whom to depend and to them surely may be added the very large number of those who are already on the verge of this conviction but who need the efficiently guiding hand (direction in the wise approach and philosophic counsel suitable to each individual) of one somewhat more advanced than themselves.

Uncounted numbers of such people exist in the world, and a wonderful opportunity is, in consequence, available to offer them the aid to which they would almost certainly respond.

A form or type of Theosophical literature that would lead to the acceptance of such an immensely important opportunity is desirable. Develop a graded series of books or booklets even, adaptable for the guidance of spiritually awakening and sincerely seeking people, so leading them to an understanding of truth and a knowledge of Theosophy and of its consistent and undeviating application to daily life. (Tell your E.S. members all this and include the idea in our article, which is progressing favourably.)

7 April 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Morya

THE GRAVE WORLD SITUATION

The spiritual and occult influences and benedictions always shed upon the world at this time will be especially powerful this year. Therefore keep yourselves closely in tune with your own inner Selves and Ourselves throughout this festive Season [Easter].

Modern civilization, especially in the near East and Western worlds, is in danger of even deeper decline. This is because of the all-too-numerous and unhappily increasing numbers and forms of what must be described (between ourselves) as sheer evil, that now exist and grievously threaten mankind’s future.

The Theosophical Society should in consequence, at this time, be sounding forth both a very serious warning and a very strong call to its members, and through them and their organizations to the whole world, for concerted action, at least to check if not to diminish the growth and activity of these most adverse tendencies.

Armaments, of course, come first, and unless the SALT meetings are successful in achieving their object of limiting nuclear weapons, as also others of grave destructibility, then a Third World War is by no means an impossibility.

Hail to all who, perceiving the danger, are raising their voices!

Continue with the warning, We therefore advise, and obtain the collaboration of as many fellow members of influence as possible in so doing.

Draw up a strong and powerfully appealing statement concerning this situation and again place it by article and tape-recording before the world. All serious Theosophists will surely see that unless the danger is averted and reduced, so many other idealistic movements will be weakened, fail, or even pass into relative insignificance, including our First Object

Next in the list of “GRAVITIES” if a word may be coined, is a rapidly growing tendency to violence, brutality, viciousness, in many interrelationships, and other crimes deeply harmful to and destructive not only of bodies but also of the psychological conditions of the emotions and the minds of an increasing number of people from children upward.

The only remedy and the only safeguard against both these evils is, in the highest sense, UNIVERSAL AND PERSONAL LOVING REGARD FOR FELLOW INHABITANTS OF OUR GLOBE—UNIVERSAL LOVE in minds and hearts and deeds. Endeavour to state this as effectively as possible.

A third—and in many ways more horrendous and revolting to all who are moved with kindness of heart—is the ferocious, carefully planned, deliberately deepened, and intensified infliction of cruelty on human beings and animals. This also is increasing in both range and ferocity. (Word this also as appealingly as you possibly can in any statement you may make.)

The curse of the craving for monetary gain should perhaps be added to the above statements, particularly in relation to the fields of alcohol, tobacco, other drugs, food, clothing, and cosmetics, including perfume (brutality of treatment of civet cat).

A further “disaster”, as We are tempted to name it, is the failure of mankind to give mind, heart, ear, and life to the teachings, to the wisdom and guidance so richly available in Brahma Vidya, Theosophia, call it what you will.

The voices that are raised on behalf of the eternal and most practically applicable teachings of Theosophy are unhappily not being seriously heeded by the men and women of both the professional and workaday world—perhaps the greatest disaster of all, since from this other evils arise.

One difficulty is that intercommunications between nations, groups, and individuals is continually becoming more intimate, with the result that an evil in one place can more rapidly spread to another. May this not also be increasingly true of the statements and understandings of the remedies, especially the BROTHERHOOD OF ALL LIFE?

Would not your New Zealand Section publish a pamphlet or booklet written by yourselves as above, and use all the means available to popularize it throughout the world? Give a special exposition of karma.

Try also to engage the enthusiastic support of... and any other group of people who might respond to the wording and spreading of this warning and this appeal to mankind.

Yes, even a coloured film with appropriate wording could very well be produced and be very effective.

The keynote of the Brotherhood of all Life must again be struck, and you, with Our guidance and your abilities, are again called upon to make sure that it is both struck, and as widely as possible heard and responded to.

This, Our respected fellow workers, is Our call to you and all who would hearken at this Easter time.

8 April 1977 (Good Friday) - Epsom, Auckland

Master Morya

Yes, indeed, you may truthfully affirm to intimates, and Sandra to include it in The Diary, your attestation that you have seen Me physically, for I temporarily materialized My face before you on one occasion.

9 April 1977 (Good Friday) - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

A WARNING STATEMENT TO GEOFFREY FOR A NEWLY-ADMITTED ASPIRANT TO THE LESSER MYSTERIES

Warn... against wavering, or still more against ever surrendering to the earlier mode of life, for this would be disastrous both for the personality in the present incarnation and for the Ego in terms of karmic opportunities later on and in future lives, and the development of the Ego itself; True, the management of the Masters’ work, being in human hands, may not always appear to maintain the high standards of the ideals of the occult life, especially selflessness and impersonality, but the work of helping forward the evolution of individuals and of the race is in the Masters’ hands and can never fail. ‘

One of the greatest advantages, I have come to believe, in the occult life is in one word: opportunity. If we stand firm and do our best now with existing opportunities, then further opportunities will be ours. If we fail, the opposite will be true, even disastrously true. This is important because a danger is foreseen and a temptation might arise, seriously diverting...and even causing... in indignation to tell us that...has been deceived...

11 April 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Geoffrey said, “The greatest Easter Festival on earth is continually being held within you.”

14 April 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

DEATH

Just as there is always a deva at birth who attaches the permanent atom to the zygote, so at every natural death a deva detaches the sutratma from the body, generally withdrawing it from the crown but sometimes from another chakra.

The term “sudden death” is not quite accurate, since a certain time passes between the physical cause reaching the body and the body’s death. In that pause, the cord is withdrawn. In both the life-beginning and the death-coming, the moment is always foreknown in the department of the Mahatma-Devic “management” of human life.

Nothing is ever in the slightest degree haphazard where the experiences of the Monad-Ego are concerned. There is always the appointed time.

17 April 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

The publication of the Masonic work^{^[175]} is important, Freemasonry being one of the almost unbroken—however secret at times—activities of Our Brotherhood.

21 April 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Since Kundalini is the all-essential force in Nature for the creation of universes and all their components, and also for the awakening of the faculties of abstract thought, intuition, will, and their expression in the brain, including clairvoyance and clairaudience, a whole chapter or even part of the myth book must be devoted to both an exposition of the subject (much as you have it in your Lecture Notes of the School of the Wisdom, Volume I, and chart) and a proffered statement that its symbols in any myth indicate their occult source and revelation.

Therefore, describe the power with all the charts you have and then choose all myths with rod or tree, single or dual serpents, whether separate or intertwined as in the caduceus, and present existing interpretations of them as evidence that indeed certain, but decidedly not all, myths are of an occult origin devised by Ourselves, sometimes through what were called Sages.

The Medusa picture and myth is a very good example and, with care, can be shown to be a very full and accurate presentation of the philosophy and occult knowledge concerning the power of Kundalini. You will need, as you have done in your chart and elsewhere, to state the dangers associated with the phenomena of Medusa, Garden of Eden serpent with expulsion therefrom, Hydra of Lerna, guardian dragon of Hesperides, and Golden Fleece, etc.

Then, choose from Our interpretations and your writings an account of the advantages of having fully aroused Kundalini. Use, for example, the case of the winged state of Hermes and Perseus (meaning free entry into higher planes); possession of Pegasus, the rescue of Persephone and Eurydice. In addition, you may refer to all the other godlike powers exhibited by those who were Masters of the Serpent Fire; the fact that Cerberus had serpents emanating from his body and that the Hydra of Lerna was immortal, and other cases of the supernormal powers granted to those possessed of serpents in any symbolic form. Such are the occult phenomena exactly corresponding to the experiences through which, in your occult development, you yourself have passed.

Choose that Egyptian picture you know of and add to the very fine uraeus; this may well be the opening part of Volume I of the book, since it is the nearest mythological symbol (serpent) to direct occult power. Almost all of this is already done, but this arrangement will be the best order to offer as at least a reasonably convincing argument, if not proof, that the world myths do contain spiritual wisdom and philosophy.

Immediately after, or in the chapter on the Rod of Hermes, add this Medusa story; they intimately interrelate.

24 April 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

FOR THE PRACTICE OF YOGA

After chanting the Gayatri Mantram:

As the light of the sun shines throughout the solar system and doubtless beyond, so the Power, Wisdom, and Intelligence of the Solar Logos pervades His Universe and all that it contains. I am That, That am I, or, in place of these words: I am forever at one with Him. Aum.

One’s whole being must become an incarnation of the Aum. Then, every cell of the physical body, and every molecule of all the subtle bodies will be perpetually chanting the Aum.

The Monad, or Dweller-in-the-Innermost, perpetually does so; for Aum is its three-lettered Name, chanted as a single syllable.

Would-be yogis whose minds are sane, motives pure, and bodies healthy, may usefully chant the Aum every day, both audibly and silently...

When physical conditions do not permit the chanting to be audible, then it may quite effectively be done mentally or “imaginatively”. Whilst the whole of this form of Sacred Word Yoga is being performed, the mind should, of course, be well controlled and held as firmly and uninterruptedly as possible upon the implications or several meanings of the word and their possible applications to the practice of yoga.

In all cases during such practices, whenever the slightest tension—and especially pain, however slight—is felt, then chanting whether physical or mental, should instantly cease and the body become wholly relaxed. Pain is Nature’s warning signal and one of the yogic aspirants’ best friends. Indeed, all those who practise meditation in any form and by whatever method should always heed this warning and bring the particular form of practised yoga to an end as quickly as possible.

You might well close your forthcoming Mantra Yoga class by first repeating the H.P.B. material on the Aum and Aum Mani Padme Hum as you have it, and then repeat the above.

If you consider it suitable for your class, you might give at least the correspondence with the chakras to the planes of Nature, the planets, and the zodiac. This would round off your study and supply information definitely associated with—even inseparable from—the science of Mantra Yoga, and indeed of yoga itself.

As you feel moved, proceed with Bhakti Yoga. It will always be helpful to begin and end with your own and then the combined chanting as before at every class of yoga. If permissible in the eyes of both of you, our book, The Call to the Heights, could be recommended.

In Bhakti Yoga, all your quotations from all sources of the “Christ Indwelling” material may well be included.

Gradually use the selections from the best of your many collected descriptions of mystical experience. These may awaken the inner responses in some who might not be moved by the Mantra Yoga method.

In Bhakti Yoga, accentuate the central purpose of yoga. This is to pass into the experience of oneness with the Divine Life or Spirit-Essence. Use again the “kite”, “Tensing Norkey”, “Buffalo”, “centipede”, and other experiences, and the importance of stilling the mind, as in the Psalm (“Be still and know that I am God”).^{^[176]} Elijah and the still, small voice, and other illustrations, including the “Shepherd’s Psalm” (“The Lord is my Shepherd, I shall not want...”).[177]

25 April 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

The picture of Hermes to be the frontispiece of the myth book.

Include at suitable places in connection with the serpent symbol, from the Bible, the brazen serpent raised in the wilderness, and the turning of the rods of Moses and Aaron into serpents, from My interpretations in Volume IV of The Hidden Wisdom in the Holy Bible and any other strikingly appropriate examples from world mythology.

All of these may well be included in one introductory chapter, as I have suggested, telling how you realized occult truths in world myths and scriptures, for it was truly the Kundalini material from Indian sources and the exactly similar Hermes rod in the statue, amongst other examples, which arrested your attention.

Consider the indications of Kundalini presented by one writer, Arthur Avalon, in his book, The Serpent Power, in the Kabbalistic Tree with the pictures which I think you drew. The other Greek references, as you know, are: Medusa, Lerna, Golden Fleece, Atlas, Cerberus picture, Serpent-powered chariot of Triptolemus, and, if you think fit, the Leontecephallus (Mithra), and Unicorn from Bible.

Find, also, what you can about Shiva as Maha-Yogi and the association of the Serpent with Him textually and pictorially.

Biblical: In Volume IV, The Hidden Wisdom in the Holy Bible.

Egyptian: Have your artist draw from Egyptian pictures associated matter including symbol of union and serpent-entwined flower stalks, etc; perhaps from your slides, if not originals in various books.

At leisure, both of you, gradually put together all quotations descriptive of mystical experiences from every known and available source, then spread them appropriately throughout the myth and other books, lectures, and classes. Use each quotation very discriminately, being careful to make sure that it really applies to the subject to which it is near. This will very beautifully and convincingly illustrate each theme. You both have made these collections, which are really very valuable—jewels, indeed—and from now on, surely, should be shared as fully as possible as suggested above.

The mystic sense is in many people—far more than they realize it themselves—increasingly breaking through even this materialistic age when kama manas has such a strong hold on minds. Illustrations of your themes will often help people when verbal and scholastic descriptions are not really understood. Go on collecting and saving, for these could eventually all be put together in a beautiful Theosophical book. Mysticism and occultism together, artistically blended, make an almost irresistible appeal, whereas each one separately might not do so.

*****

Master Polidorus Isurenus

The music investigations have reached a point where a well-ordered and systematic approach is needed. For instance, for each piece that includes an air performed by voice or instrument, there first should be a description of the song or tune-ribbon. Then, the work itself in general as in the book, the effect upon the performer, and then upon various listeners a large work, I know, but very valuable at this time.

Then the evoked devas and nature spirits, especially the former, which could open up for you the subject of Gandharvas—a wonderful field—concerning which you could learn much, not only by observation with your group—inevitably limited—but also from Bethelda, Who has assured you of His readiness to assist

Yes, the Park (Cornwall Park) deva assumed Office in response to the dedicatory ceremonies, especially including the Maori, or Dedication on the Summit.

I do not wish in the least either to press or seem to overload you. However, following the publication of the book and response by your friend... has not an interesting field of further music research opened up to you? Already these later years—in no sense to be referred to as “the last”(!)—of your life, can and will become enriched in so far as you find yourself able, and Sandra agrees,^{^[178]} to add further to the occult aspect of the work of the Theosophical Society.

The youth work should continue, being perhaps the most important work of all [as future workers in the Society].

If definite Masonic classes are resumed, then these could end after the 18° and 30° studies, say two or three meetings only. Then let the brethren get to work upon the publication of all that has been given...

April-May-June 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Last night’s presentation [of Bhakti Yoga] was valuable because it went closer to the difficulties and experiences of heart and mind of the members of the group. Extend it, I suggest. From the personal point of view and the kind of people in your group, Bhakti Yoga is almost of the greatest value of the whole seven. Last night you directly touched a large number with the references to forgiveness and allied virtues. Repeat them.

29 April 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

[After the taps within the Shrine at 8:25 a.m.]

WORK DESIGNATED FOR GEOFFREY HODSON BEFORE THE CLOSE OF THIS EARTHLY LIFE

Before the close of this life, work designated for you includes healing and guiding the sick in mind and body, whether present or absent, with Sandra’s collaboration; all literary activities, including basic ones—books and articles—maintaining a steady flow to magazines from yourself, meaning from Us; lecturing, of course, especially important, to keep in touch with the general public and, of course, with as many groups as care to listen to you; youth and yoga very important, as also Co-Masonry when consulted. When significant articles are dictated, consider sending copies to carefully selected numbers—small, perhaps—of dedicated workers in the Society.

The recent articles, including the one on “Schools” (for the instruction of members in basic Theosophy)^{^[179]} may well be included in this.

Try to maintain outdoor exercise throughout the winter whenever the weather is not too adverse, even walking about the streets. Sandra, of course, to continue the most valuable Invocations on your behalf.

30 April 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

The Angel of the Talisman might be invoked and carefully, even reverently, approached, leading to the already present subject of the Maternal Aspect of the Logos, the World Mother, possibly enriching your existent references to Her in The Kingdom of the Gods and wherever else you approach Her in thought and teaching. That is an aspect of Theosophy that is not very well developed and could valuably be added to, particularly as you have written so beautifully of Her in your contribution, The Inner Side of Church Worship. This material could very usefully be further developed and the Angel of the Talisman might well be a very valuable link, should your experiments succeed.

Then, perhaps from Bethelda, the subject of the natural interrelationships between angels and men could be further investigated. If thus you direct your thoughts, you could show that, detached and even abstract though they seem to be, the angels of Nature in all her various kingdoms-mineral, from subsoil to mountain ranges, and vegetation from small plants to gigantic trees and forests—are all intimately related.

The nature of this “familyhood” on the planet, and even elsewhere, could prove to be a rich and very informative direction of research; for as mankind enters the Sixth Subrace more fully, and later the Sixth Root Race, an increasing number of people will become mystically aware of these presences and interrelationships, some people also seeing them as you do. Thus, amidst all the terror-filled darkness of the present age, the light of beauty, truth, the divine Presence, or, rather, Omnipresence, and the whole principle of interrelationship throughout cosmos, universe, solar system, planets, and particularly our earth—might well be brought to the minds of those interested. For some people, natural mystics perhaps, whilst reading of these things, might find their own interior awakenings being stimulated. Indeed, a considerable number of people are on the threshold of this next phase of development of human awareness, despite all the appearances to the contrary so tragically apparent at this time.

In other words, Geoffrey, hold in your mind the idea—even through most, if not all, of your lectures—of awakening the mystic in people as you do even by your various quotations.

Of course, The Secret Doctrine includes it all, but the mystical element might well be accentuated, almost as a spiritualizing element in your writings and talks, as you admittedly already do to some extent

Make clear, then, that the actual spiritual Essence is the same in both angels and men, despite their seeming difference caused by the invisibility of the former. Thus, this self-revelation of the angel of the Cornwall Park area to you may usefully lead along the paths referred to.

Yes, complete and publish the myth book first, using the angel material when a rest from the intensity of literary work is needed and activity of a seemingly, but not really, lighter vein may be followed.

April 1977 Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

THE LIFE OF HERACLES

(Comments on “The Cradle State”)

The life story of Heracles wisely and correctly understood may be seen and interpreted as a description of the experiences of the neophyte on the Pathway, degree by degree, to Adeptship, or flaming death and ascension to Olympus.

We must look at it afterwards before we turn from it, at least briefly from this point of view, for then it will have a message, many warnings, and much inspiration for every neophyte who, Heracles-like, symbolically enters the Temple of the Mysteries. Readiness for this is indicated by the “cradle-experience”.

Yes, Geoffrey, the cradle is an occult symbol of that spiritual state—definitely not physical, remember, in this approach—of rebirth, or of that mysterious and nearly always outwardly inexplicable state of consciousness when at last a person embarks upon the Path—a mystery indeed!

The egg, egg-shell, hatching out, and emergence of the chick have the same meaning; all referring to that mystery, when “there is no other way to go”, or the “cradle” state of mind is reached. So the story begins, most appropriately and correctly, with Heracles in his cradle. Then follows what exoterically is a danger—the two serpents—but esoterically is one of the surest signs of the awakening, Kundalini aroused.

The serious faults of character and errors of conduct are also descriptive of both virtues and weaknesses by which every aspirant is threatened, until all of these are outgrown. One of the surest indications of this is the greatly needed Heraclean characteristic of uttermost humility after failure or “crime”, and readiness to make amends no matter at whatever personal cost—the Labours and the female service performed by so gigantic and outstanding a masculine being.

Add to last night’s teaching, if you like, a cross heading: “The Cradle State”. Begin yesterday’s with a cross heading or chapter heading, “The Heraclean State”; “The Assurance of Victory State” (Heracles always knew that he would be victorious). Before the Hydra of Lerna interpretation put suitably “The Victory by Fire State”.

*****

Master Kuthumi

[The following ideas were shared with Geoffrey by the Master Kuthumi after the pre-arranged tap within the Shrine.

They were for one of His Initiated pupils who had appealed to Geoffrey for help and guidance in the mental and spiritual aridity of later life. This was the culmination of leaving the Parent Theosophical Society to wander in other fields of psychological and pseudo-occultism, resulting in the falling away from the fine moral and ethical ideals and standards of the true occult life. Now, aging, in failing health, and in the grip of a frightening symptom of oncoming illness, the mind of the once young Initiate of the Greater Mysteries turned again back “home” to the Divine and Ancient Wisdom of Theosophia which never fails the seeker after Truth in the difficulties and dangers of incarnated existence. She, therefore, remembering the friendship of former days, sought the advice and help of Geoffrey in whom she had put her trust and from whom in the past she had received spiritual guidance. The Christian name given is entirely fictitious.]

... An interpretation of Sophia’s dream is offered, not only to explain it and her present situation, but also to endeavour to draw her back in her own thought to Ourselves and especially to her own Master or Masters. For she is not only linked with her own Master Who presented her for Initiation, the Master Kuthumi, but also to the Blessed Lady Mary Who, as the official World Mother for this period, took her under Her “wing” in order that the “birth” of the newly-born Initiate might be preserved from any harm which could result from her later detachment from the Initiate-ideal and life of the Path.

Thus, as her dream would seem partly to indicate symbolically, she became a partial victim of her more personal nature, including the insufficiency of mental self-mastery and mental grasp and continuing grip upon Theosophical philosophy. To this would appear to have been added conflicts with and poorly comprehended aspects of her emotional nature.

From these, the World Mother has preserved the Initiate-aspect and power of the reincarnated Ego. Her Master, in His case, officially maintained her recognized position as a member of the Brotherhood. Partly because of these benefices she was able to respond quite favourably to the presence of you both and the appeal of your lives so obviously and clearly dedicated to the occult Path, the Adept Brotherhood, and the service of mankind and the animal kingdom of Nature.

Unfortunately, your time together was not sufficiently long to enable her Inner Ego to maintain the grip and influence, which it achieved in your presence, for much time afterwards.

From the point of view of her membership of the Brotherhood and her close links with more than one Master and the Blessed Lady Mary, it is important that before she is freed from her body later on she endeavours, as far as possible mentally, to bring to life again her memory of her time under her Initiate Teacher and of any experiences she may have passed through.

Two special reasons for this are that when she finally leaves her body she will immediately become conscious in her Causal body and thus be spared many of the experiences, some of them not pleasant, of astro-mental life after death. The other reason is that this will greatly affect her next life, both in the choice of parents and conditions and in the provision of opportunities to draw near to the Adept life of the planet, to the Ancient and all-important Theosophical Wisdom, and to the extremely important knowledge of both the existence of the Path and an opportunity to enter upon it once again.

Send her books also, directly, upon the Masters, as by Annie Besant, for example, whilst, if she wishes, she can borrow C.W.L.’s The Masters and the Path from a nearby library.

2 May 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Kuthumi

At the reference to the “help” of the Masters in invisible helping, remember that this can lead to Discipleship.

INVISIBLE HELPING

Certain principles are fundamental to success in all enterprises, and this is particularly the case where the slightest degree of objective proof of activity is normally unavailable.

Conviction:

1. That man is not a physical being alone, but is “built” of and inhabits superphysical vehicles composed of substances of which the superphysical worlds consist and wherein in varying degrees he is conscious.

2. That both during sleep and after death the individual continues to exist, be aware, to suffer, and to be happy according to nature and karma.

3. That therefore beneficent help is needed in either or both cases, i.e., during sleep and after death.

4. That man’s subtler bodies are in general always allowing for exceptions—more responsive to both beneficent and harmful influences than are the denser and less sensitive physical bodies.

5. That the possibility—fact, one may say—exists, that adequately efficient helpers can be very helpful indeed to all who are suffering in their superphysical vehicles and lives.

Invisible helping, as the above-mentioned, is correctly named, and is not only most desirable but can be most effective. If, therefore, conviction exists concerning the above, any physically living human being can be both helpful and hurtful to either sleeping or deceased people, fellow citizens of the world as they are.

Success in this procedure also depends upon the existence as part of the innate character of a would-be helper of the quality of compassion. One must really care for both the welfare and the protection and healing of all other sentient beings. Without this quality, full success is unlikely, although a purely intellectual endeavour can be helpful.

Invisible helping is carried out by means of thought-power. If, for example, someone is known to have died in deep sorrow, it is of benefit both to converse with that person on the subject and sources of happiness and mentally to flood his mento-astral bodies and consciousness with powerfully concentrated thoughts of ecstasy, bliss, happiness, and serenity. When persistently carried out for a sufficient period of time, this remedy is assured of success.

If a person dies in fear because of the terror-producing nature of the death, then conversation and a powerful flooding of the whole aura with calming, peace-giving thought-power and assurance of security will be successful in the course of time.

If people are in grief because separation from one or more loved ones is thought to be final, then the fact of reunion with living people during their sleep and especial efforts to bring about sufficiently full awareness of this, can do away with much if not all of the sense of tragic bereavement. This is true whether those living are but babes, are children, or grown-ups, though very young babies, whilst possessing mento-astral bodies, may as yet be far from the conscious use of them. Nevertheless, they do continue to exist and therefore death does not involve total or final loss of active loving relationships.

When reasonably possible, teaching may mentally be given concerning the virtually perpetual togetherness of the inner Selves of those who, at the physical level, love very deeply. Reassurance is thus added to mento-astral reunions whilst the still living are asleep and when, in their turn, they pass away.

In the case of very deep-seated disease-like psychological conditions of unnatural attitudes or overindulgences, what might perhaps be named “an operation” has to be performed. This consists of the removal from the mind, desire-nature, and aura of an area of the superphysical substance by which the indulgence or habit finds expression at that level. This is a very delicate part of invisible helping but again the “instrument” is thought-power which also must be as “sharp” or acute as the surgeon’s knife. In this, as in physical training in medicine, guidance and practice under observation are necessary. Fortunately, both are available to those who meet the above conditions: conviction and compassion.

This leads to the existence of groups under leaders concerned with invisible helping and advanced teachers and directors, ever available to those deeply concerned with this procedure. These are the disciples of Adepts, Initiated members of the Great Brotherhood, and the Masters of the Wisdom Themselves. Indeed, it may be affirmed that all who sincerely, selflessly, and compassionately devote themselves to the service of their fellow men and other sentient beings, from the beginning of such activities, become known to one or more of those occultly and spiritually more advanced than themselves. As they prove themselves, succeed, and—very important—faithfully continue, they in their turn become guides, philosophers, and friends to others seeking to help and to heal. Thus, a veritable new world can open up for the truly sincere and faithful, continuing invisible helper.

In conclusion, it might be affirmed that all of the above forms and methods of ministration can also be carried out by those who are active as far as their consciousness is concerned on the physical plane alone. Automatically, they become invisible helpers as well, and if so moved, may enter upon the Path of Swift Unfoldment, and in this age become disciple, Initiate, and Adept

It would be better for any members of the group so moved to resolve and act in response to the ideal rather than under personal leadership, though this need not be ruled out

This guidance could well be continued ad infinitum, infinite almost as are the needs of the suffering people and creatures of this our earth.

4 May 1977 - Auckland

[Sitting in the car at the waterfront, Mission Bay, facing Rangitoto Island, Geoffrey describes the inner life of the mountain:]

The chief elemental activity is below the ground, where the crater is, and far below that there are numbers of astro-mental lire devas and lesser nature spirits, all of fire. Evidently the volcanic condition still exists far below the crater.

Some etheric and astral eruptions of the element of fire are taking place at those levels, and the elementals are very active participating in the play of the uprushing and outspreading forces.

The major volcano deva departed, I think, when the last eruption finally died down, greatly reducing the uprush and outrush of elemental energies of which the original deva, I gather, was in charge. It was brilliantly coloured, giving the aura a parrot-like effect as the different levels of fire and other energies played into and through its aura.

The original volcano fire deva, whose presence is preserved in the Akashic Record of the Island of Rangitoto, possessed and so displayed—as viewed clairvoyantly at Astro-Manas II and Manas I levels—areas of its aura corresponding particularly to where the body exists in a human being. The colours within and shining from this deva were extremely brilliant, scarlet, flame-colour, deeper red, and also golden yellow and very vivid grass-green.

From the “shoulders” a tremendous uprush of highly-coloured energy was rising high into the air as if from sources deep within the “body” of the deva, shining with the colours puiple, soft green, light yellow, and the effects of some blendings of these at certain places. This caused the deva to seem to be “crowned” with a marvellously living coronet of these colours on all sides and directly above, powerful auric forces of which were radiating up almost immeasurably to my limited vision.

This being vacated the area, as I have suggested, and “flew” towards the centre of the North Island and is now, I conceive, part of the very large group of planetary fire devas associated with the volcano Ngauruhoe.[180]

At some period after Rangitoto became extinct for the time being, and at the surface at any rate, a landscape deva “took charge of” or was “stationed” at Rangitoto. This being appears not directly to be associated with the element of fire but rather of earth. It is by comparison and great contrast a quietly peaceful angel associated not only with Rangitoto but with other islands and the ocean around.

This deva is very largely concerned with the evolution of the life within the substances of which the island is built, earth, and other minerals and, more especially, in the plant kingdom, the evolution of which is continually quickened by radiations of its aura. It is also very benignly aware of the Egos of the human beings within the range of its consciousness, especially those who are sailing upon the Hauraki Gulf and the Waitemata Harbour. The inner form and aura is at least 100 feet tall, whilst the radiations reach beyond the island itself. The deva of Cornwall Park appeared to be observant of these attempted investigations, somewhat in the relationship of teacher.

I realize that Bethelda is also associated with these researches, planetary distances being for Him without significance.

7 May 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

[Concerning a member, faithful and true, who works steadily on, without thought of return:]

...is one of our much loved colleagues and is on Probation, though We do not wish him to know as yet, for his household life could almost be described as terrible...

*****

Master Morya

[Regarding the Theosophical Society at this time:]

The problem to which you refer is due in part to the fact, is it not, that the greatest number of the people who keep the Lodges and Sections alive and working are all, or nearly all, themselves working people? They are finding it in these days exceedingly difficult even to keep their own finances in good order...

Yes, directly approach the Manager of T.P.H.^{^[181]} concerning your Lecture Notes. Ask whether the fact of changes in the production is preventing reprinting; I fear so, since the type is all completely set up and so maintained. In addition, as you have heard, the cost of printing has risen in India so as to present an almost impassable barrier to reprinting some of your works.

No, although we know full well the existence of the great need, it is not possible, is not practicable, and would not be effective just at this time, for one of Us or Our high Disciples to come and lead the T.S. and the world. We regret this just as you both do, and share your views. You two are doing very well indeed to keep “the torch alight” for plain Theosophy. Congratulations and gratitude from Us all, as of course to your own Adept literary inspirer and Friend [Master Polidorus Isurenus of Luxor],

8 May 1977

Only as the restless and argumentative mind-brain is rendered inoperative may the faculty of implicit insight or pure wisdom manifest to and through the “head”, mind-brain. Only as it is rendered inactive—decapitation—may pure wisdom, symbolized by the elephant, become not only available but dominant. Only when the illuminating power of the spiritual will is brought to maximum effectiveness—the midst of the heavens—does the susceptibility to both the darkness of ignorance and the defeat by unspiritual propensities disappear.

9 May 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

As your music studies proceed, as they are doing very successfully, would it not be well to polish the typed records for publication fairly soon after each session? Thereby a large build-up will be avoided.

The results are very favourable and you have an excellent team. Every member is benefiting and will do so. Try and get...to sketch out for himself a view of the work as he sees and thinks it, when it has proceeded a little further.

Yes, the perception of the change in... after the dubbing was not only accurate but very fortunate, since it convinced all present of your faculty and its accuracy.

[Geoffrey stated, “As I observed... singing the same song again for observation of the effects of the performance upon the performer, I was struck by the change that had occurred in her astro-mental body. It was more luminous and the brow and crown chakras were notably more active, larger, and more luminous. This was so striking that 1 asked her whether she had experienced an enlargement of consciousness since the last gathering. After at first saying ‘No’—not remembering a ceremonial event the previous evening—she suddenly recollected and reported that ‘Last night she had been dubbed a Knight of the Order of the Round Table.’”

This is a genuine Mystery Ritual with the corresponding powers operating through the Sword in the hand of the Ruling Knight. This was regarded by those present as a proof of the possession by Geoffrey of the faculty of clairvoyance and of his ability correctly to use it in the course of clairvoyant research.]

The same may well be true of the angel researches, the records of each being reasonably well written up soon after in preparation for our new book or additions to the last one. Do not be in the least alarmed at these two additions to our work. They will be easily fitted in and probably... may be given the task of final editing. Good night.

12 May 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

THE INVITATION TO GO TO KROTONA

[Geoffrey puts to the Masters the question whether to accept or decline the invitation to conduct a six-month seminar]

“I ask the Masters if it is advisable for me to accept the invitation received through Felix Layton. I have been invited for a six-month seminar. I have consulted the doctor as You, Master, advised me. After the three tests, the doctor reported: ‘There is nothing whatever the matter with you, Geoffrey, but I insist on three months only’—thereby confirming Your orders previously given to me that I should only go for three months to Krotona. Would this be worth the expense to Krotona? Would they accept such a reduction? If You, Blessed Masters, wish to guide me I will always act in accordance with Your wisdom. Should I inform Krotona of availability from the end of August 1977 to end of November?”

Answer from the Masters:

“Our answer is: if the authorities will accept the short visit, GO. You are needed there and could contribute much. The central need is for Krotona residents to wholly regard it as a consecrated place and therefore an Occult Centre. Krotona needs vitalizing into an active Occult Centre. If you go, that is your message. When you go, deliver it.”

Cable sent in answer to invitation:

To Felix Layton, Krotona Centre, Ojai, California, U.S.A.

“Invitation deeply appreciated. Health good. Doctor after tests permits three months only. Difficulties recognized. If acceptable could arrive late August and depart late November next. Saturday acceptable. Same conditions as previously.

Geoffrey Hodson”

14 May 1977 - Onerahi, Northland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

CONCERNING THE INTERPRETATION OF THE TWELFTH LABOUR OF HERACLES

First of all, after announcing the Twelfth Labour of Heracles, begin with the whole story of Cerberus so that the reader will know who Cerberus was, his office, why he was snake-maned and therefore the meaning of the Twelfth Labour. Cerberus was not a prisoner, evidently, except that he held the position of guardian of the entrance to Hades. Read all about him and we will interpret him fully either at first or afterwards.

Also, we must describe and interpret both Hades and Pluto (otherwise the readers won’t know).

Remember as we go on, that Heracles personifies one in whom Kundalini is aroused and mastered, e.g., “Cradle”. Hence his mighty power. He also personifies, almost but not entirely, the right use of Kundalini. His suffering came from its misuse and there are good examples of this which must be included. Make much of these crimes and disasters of Heracles as illustrating the dangers of the aroused fire and clearly show the effects of his mistakes.

It would also be useful for you to pick out those states which show all the benefits, since they portray the advantages of aroused Kundalini, including his indomitableness and attainment of immortality after physical “death” and burning of body—meaning total transcendence of all dangers and temptations and possibility of physical expression as sex.

Compare him with Hermes who had totally transcended all possibility of misuse and always, with Caduceus in hand, laboured spiritually and heroically.

The introduction suggested to you must include these aspects of both heroes which were discovered from Greek myths alter Kundalini had already been learnt about from Hinduism; for the direct teaching therefrom already known and the mythological Greek presentation of the same truths arrested your attention and directed it to interpretations of Greek myths.

Look into all the other myths and take out and present any serpent—and so Kundalini—reference, e.g., dragon, including St George, most striking serpent symbology, particularly the pictorial, including uraeus and serpent-over-sun symbol.

Actually, Geoffrey, the Serpent Fire is the central heart of all; hence the otherwise strange Shiva and serpent, He really being divinely manifested Kundalini—as also was Ganesha, (eldest) son of Shiva.

Note suitably the beheading of Ganesha and Hydra of Lerna—Medusa (Kundalini personified) and all other decapitations.

Such is the general approach, you adding these references yourself at suitable places unless I have done so.

15 May 1977 Onerahi, Northland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Yes, in accordance with the will of the Brotherhood. Try if you can go, and even if you don’t, to have the Occult Seal established upon, and therefore descriptive of, Krotona.

If possible, a declaration of Krotona’s objectives should be drawn up and include positively its choice by Us through Annie Besant as one of the connecting Centres from the present into the future of what you call the Mystery Tradition—the Mysteries themselves, in fact

This kind of affirmation, whatever the form may take, that the Occult Sciences and the Mysteries are both the “heart” of Krotona as a Centre and its function by which they are to be delivered to future workers and residents there, is much needed.

The danger exists that this could be lost despite functions of the E.S. and...Therefore suggest to both organizations the necessity for the fullest possible understanding of this mission and of the Occult Sciences and the Mysteries as the REAL WORK OF KROTONA.

Of course, all public and semi-public work is valuable and should be fully encouraged and carried on, but in them the above should be more frequently mentioned.

In this,...E.S., and Co-Masonry should really combine, even if necessarily kept separate as organizations, each of them stressing the Krotona Function.

Accept opportunities to address all three and at each meeting stress the above.

*****

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Make the Mystery Tradition, past, present, and future, your underlying theme for the members (of Krotona Centre). Build it up as fully as you can. Add from Taylor and Méautis and, of course, H.P.B., to give as complete a picture as possible.

Then stress that it has never been closed, has been operative continuously from Atlantean days, is to become increasingly active at this time, hence the Theosophical Society’s founding and Third Object, Co-Masonry, and E.S.—“still more occultly” if you address... As long as mankind faithfully, intelligently, and correctly collaborates, the Mystery Tradition is to be accentuated during the present dark age wherein it is so greatly needed as “one of the Salvations of mankind”.

All of us, therefore, who are drawn towards Occult Centres (that are VALID—meaning those accepted and directed by the Occult Hierarchy) both from within ourselves (important) and by our karma, have extremely important and valuable opportunities. According to our temperaments and our outer and inner (most important) interests, we are blessed with two great opportunities. One of these is to collaborate with the Brotherhood and the other is to increase our understanding of Theosophy, exoteric and esoteric.

Add there, guidance in the occult life from The Call to the Heights and elsewhere, especially stating, “Don’t drift”.

In presenting these and other associated ideas, do not consider very much either apparent or obvious responses. These belong to the Krotonians, your task being to reorient objectives, accentuating the Occult Path and Mystery Tradition.

Accentuate without sensationalism everything that corresponds to the sixth sense: clairvoyance, clairaudience, and—most especially—intuition, and give talks on ESP, Yoga, Discipleship of the Masters of the Wisdom, Initiation, Adeptship, the Masters by name, and the work of the Brotherhood. We will help.

16 May 1977 - Onerahi, Northland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

At Krotona, as part of the accentuation of the importance of the Mystery Tradition, and especially of bringing it to the point of being a potent and living influence in one’s life, add:-

The importance, for those sufficiently awake to knowledge of the Angelic Hosts, of learning to collaborate with them whether one sees or personally knows them or not. For this is a valuable part of the contribution of the Mystery Tradition which is to be re-established more and more publicly as humanity becomes ready and responsive. Hence, Geoffrey, your introduction to it, which in actual fact was no mere accident, but a deliberate intrusion into your life by Ourselves – even including your Peter![182]

This present epoch in the life and history of the T.S. must be characterized by a highly skilled and highly presentable and acceptable accentuation of the true Occult Science amidst all the medley of today, and these present books will help in this whilst you yourselves will both present it and stand as living examples.

If possible and wise and acceptable, also introduce the idea of Initiation and all that it means, even to the E.S. and... allowing it—but not stating it exactly—to be known that you are an Initiate.

Find someone in the U.S.A. who could begin sorting out the true and usable aspects of Occultism now being put before the public in various ways and separate them from the undesirable forms which are all too many. Try and set a group to work, if you happen to go to Krotona, and even if you don’t. In other words, try and initiate a group movement which might be called “The False and the True”, and study the continuing examples of both now apparent, especially in the U.S.A. Indeed, a voice needs to be raised on behalf of White Occultism. If you don’t go, send an article to The Theosophist.

Ask the question: Ought not the T.S. to be leading in this most important matter of widely increasing interest and often wrong development of Occultism?

Leave the U.F.O. question where it is for the time being.

18 May 1977 - Onerahi, Northland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Of course, Geoffrey, this is the most important period in the twentieth century incarnation, marked as it is by entry upon the “NINES”. Whether or not one actually lives to be ninety, one key is that the occultly more fruitful period will at least be divisible by three.

One of the mysteries of human life is that whilst everyone is free, everything is also preordained.

[Geoffrey asked, “Apparently I have lived my life—especially my inner life—with freedom of choices; nevertheless, from birth, all major events and experiences, especially the occult, were indeed preordained and foreknown as in the case of H.P.B. Hence the many instances of my life being saved. Master, in what way can it be proven that one’s life is preordained?” The Master answered:]

Your natal horoscope, in which, when correctly meaning occultly—read, the whole life is portrayed. The natal horoscope is proof, especially for the occultist, that the main incidents are preordained. Hence the prophecy of the phrenologist to your mother when you were a child, that in later years you would “dream true”, meaning, be clairvoyant, intuitive, and remember with certainty experiences in the superphysical worlds during the sleep of the body.

[Geoffrey commented, “When I began the deva work, my mother reminded me of this prophecy of the phrenologist.”]

*****

...as Master closed His remarks, Geoffrey turned to me, saying, “There is a deva outside my window (our hotel room overlooked the beautiful Whangarei Harbour) flashing away! I wonder what he wants.” Geoffrey turned to the deva, saying, “Yes, what do you wish to communicate?”

The deva answered, “Do not fail—weather permitting—to complete your studies of the devas of the headlands [Mt Manaia, Lion Rock, and Bream Head] before you go back to Auckland.”

This proved later to be most important, since, following the advice of the deva, Geoffrey investigated Bream Head, where a remarkable Kundalini-powered Deva-Raja was discovered, contacted, and who communicated with him.^{^[183]}

19 May 1977 - Onerahi, Northland

An Adept

Remember that there once was one continent throughout this whole area and, in consequence of the changes caused by the sinking of Lemuria, the present land called New Zealand was left above the waves, having been mountainous when the great change occurred. So you are really studying very high mountains from millions of years ago.

As the planetary and landscape changes occur, the Maha-deva and devas themselves appropriate according to the remaining landscapes, as here. Your Mt Manaia is, in fact, the remains of a very ancient and very high mountain, as also is the Lion Rock…

20 May 1977 - At Mt Manaia, Whangarei, Northland

Geoffrey to Sandra

As one may presume, every Initiate member of the Great Brotherhood of Adepts is inwardly aware of unity with and guidance by the One Initiator, the great Lord of the World, Sanat Kumara, so I find myself impressed that every deva of a corresponding degree of development is conscious of unity with, and guidance by, the head of the Devic Hierarchy for this planet, the Maha-Deva of our globe. Indeed, oneness with a senior and superior being forms a basic condition or foundation of the consciousness of every individualized member of the Devic Hierarchy.

The totality of Archangels on this planet concerned with every process of Nature in which procreation, interior growth, birth, childhood, youth, and motherhood, including that in the animal and plant kingdoms in which some form of pollinization and subsequent developments occur, is under the general and also very real directive “Rulership” of the Holder of the Office of World Mother Who is, therefore, rightly entitled “Queen of the Angels”. As far as my understanding and experience inform me, the Blessed Lady Mary, Mother of Jesus, is the present Holder of that Office.

Supraplanetary Maha-Devis fulfil the same Office for groups of planets in a Solar System upon which those functions have begun to take place and have continued to do so. Such a being—Maha-Devi—is in relationship and collaboration with the Solar Logos, as is the planetary Queen of the Angels, World Mother, Our Lady, with the Lord of the World—in what might be called, if one may so presume, His femininity-functions, extremely delicate and refined as they are in every kingdom.

This is also true, one presumes, of the Maha-Devi for the Solar System and relationship with, and the fulfilment of, Offices under the more Feminine Aspect of the Solar Logos.

22 May 1977 - Onerahi, Northland

Master Morya

[Directions to Geoffrey]

At private meetings, wherever held, endeavour to make Ourselves once more a living reality, as indeed you valuably have done. If you like, describe My room and even refer to the existence of My library, with rolls and The Scroll, using your best judgement always.

Describe My Brother’s long room with the window along one side and the two smaller rooms off on the other side, with a third at the far end and the entrance door at the other end, as pictured by C.W.L.

Tell also, if you wish, of your experience in the partially underground crypt and other parts used by the Brotherhood of Luxor at Thebes, and even of your vision there of the long procession of the monarchs...

Then tell of that ruined castle and adjoining house where once you saw Master Rakoczy emerging and, on other occasions, in the castle itself. He receives visitors there. Describe Him and His wonderful eyes and powers, perhaps using Sandra’s notes from your descriptions of visits and presentations.

Whilst making no personal claim, it will be reasonably obvious that you will convey realism, which is Our wish, concerning Ourselves, which is, not unnaturally, tending to be lost.

[Geoffrey asked the Master how They, the Adepts, preserve the privacy of Their homes and Themselves, even against aerial photography. The Master answered at once:]

By a deflection of light, just as when a qualified yogi makes himself, or herself, invisible as did H.P.B. If possible, find and quote that passage. In addition, whenever the projected result is worthy, meaning “white” in the occult sense, then also, the consciousness of observers can be influenced so that they see, hear, and feel as decided upon by the yogi—always for the benefit of the Work, remember.

The Altyn Tagh Retreat is similarly preserved, as also are all Our Retreats throughout the world and by the same methods will continue so to be preserved; likewise, the physical bodies of certain of Us Who—again for the sake of the work—are enabled to maintain them in a state of efficiency, and by the processes referred to—the deflection of light, etc.—to prevent even the slightest intrusions upon Our personalities at any time.

Needless to say, a physical appearance to a collaborator, as once to yourself, is always both possible and permissible. Thus, Our Valley is still Ours and undisturbed as you have experienced many times, and this also will continue as long as needed, whether by Ourselves or by Our successors.

Speak thus, in an easy manner, of all things in order to bring back the reality to our members of Our continued existence and function.

We still inspire members—particularly workers in important movements, writers, and speakers—causing ideas to arise in their minds which are in harmony with the Theosophical Plan.

Yes, refresh E.S. and members’ minds about the Ancient Mysteries, speak of their more or less public manifestations down the ages and in the modern movements of which you are aware, assuring that this—the Mystery Tradition—will never be allowed to be effaced from the earth, always being available to those likely to respond to the Mysteries in their WHITE form only.

I wish you at your leisure to pick out from early Theosophical literature, references to My personal appearances and known activities, perhaps putting them together in both article and E.S. talk forms for magazines and members. The same could be done concerning My Brother Kuthumi more particularly, including references to the appearances and work of other Adepts.

This is all designed to reawaken in the members’ minds and to bring realism about Us, the fact of Our existence, not only at the founding [of the Theosophical Society], but continually and ever continuously...

You are valuably gathering around yourself potentially very useful coworkers and workers for the future—a most useful activity.

25 May 1977 - Whangarei, Northland

BREAM HEAD DEVA-RAJA

[When Geoffrey and I were in Whangarei, he was studying the devas of Mt Manaia, Lion Rock, and Bream Head at the mouth of the Whangarei Harbour. The great Deva-Raja of Bream Head communicated to Geoffrey as follows:]

“Hail to you, from one Kundalini brother to another. I perceive the same Fire established and active within yourself. Greetings, Kundalini brother!...

“Devas are of many orders, and one of them may be classed as Kundalini devas, of which I am privileged to be one, having been thus ‘conceived’ of by the Great Lord of All that Exists.

“This locality for two or three miles around this peak is an area of considerable Kundalini activity within Nature, a kind of Kundalini ‘volcano’ if you like. Meditate, my brother, on this occult truth, that the Creative Fire exists not only in man, but in all Nature.”

26 May 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

[After our return from a holiday in the north of New Zealand, where much remarkable and wonderful research into the deva kingdom was carried out and glorious angelic beings were contacted and communicated with:]

Geoffrey, you would do well to sketch in colour as well as you can from the descriptions and memories, the devas you have just contacted, especially the last one, the Kundalini deva. This is a remarkable and somewhat rare combination of landscape and Kundalini deva combined. The extra power is needed to enable the deva to maintain a “bridge” or link with the further shore of the entrance to the [Whangarei] Harbour. In consequence, every single mariner who enters the harbour receives a special blessing, a purification of the aura, and a stimulation not only of his evolution, but to the arousal of an occult or mystic possibility in him. Some people entering the harbours are in a peculiar mood and this renders them responsive to such ministrations. So, try drawing and sketching, however incomplete and imperfect the results. The investigations were valuable, successful to a high degree, and when made public will usefully add to the appeal for the Brotherhood of angels and of men, a greatly needed and very valuable development in the human mind, however few those who respond in this period!

The angels will, however, live on and exert their influence into the future. So, in your spare time, if any, try your hand at colour sketching with the crayons and paper that Sandra bought for you, activated as she was by Us.

Yes, also, fill in your memory and knowledge of the ancient Lemurian continent, adding any available information about New Zealand and other islands. Gondwanaland was a reality and you are living upon part of it, whilst Sandra was born and lived her earlier life upon another part of it [Perth], The great Manor Centre was established thereon as also the strong but briefly-lasting Centre in Perth.

Try to move forward if a suitable artist arises, to bring out Volume II of The Kingdom of the Gods[184]—one of your valuable contributions to human knowledge.

We would also advise you to put the newly received teachings, including especially that received from the Arhat disciple of Master Kuthumi, into your work here, infiltrating the occult note into the Theosophical work and Society, and its world-wide activities. If possible, send the resultant article to The Theosophist with The Mystery Tradition and occult notes accentuated.

We note with pleasure your instant responses to every new type of work, despite your great preoccupation with the myth book, rightly stressed.

Could you not, in addition to your fortnight’s holiday in the North every three months, slip away for a long weekend in the intervening period? Friday to Tuesday, for example, when there are no engagements?

29 May 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

AN ARHAT INITIATE-PUPIL OF MASTER KUTHUMI SHARES IDEAS WITH GEOFFREY

The western world is taking a great deal of interest in clairvoyance and the like, yes... and you, Geoffrey, are actually investigating such matters in a scientific way.

You could do a great deal of good by actually describing in detail, both to the public and to members of the Theosophical Society, what positive clairvoyance and clairaudience really are—not how they are developing, but the technique of their use in the fields in which you have researched: chemistry, nature spirits, angels, health, disease, especially psychology. Wouldn’t this also be another good subject in modern days? The title could perhaps be: “The Nature of Conscious Clairvoyance and the Technique of Its Use for Research”.

Then, of course, the list of fields in which you have done so much. You could include what people call prayer, which for you is real Invocation, performed by you both so wonderfully every day—and the effects; would not all these be useful fields for study? Yes, I know the grave risks and that you will always give the warnings, but a great deal—and the amount is growing—of very wrongful interest and activity in the whole mediumistic approach is dangerously developing. You can help, and I know you will, especially as we have so many patients, physical and superphysical, suffering from misuse of the knowledge and forces and their effects, especially sensitive people who ought to be carrying their natural Sixth-Race capacities to better and safer use.

The need is not so great in the superphysical world (astral plane) where people are inclined to be dull and sleepy in these directions; this is perhaps better, and certainly safer, than oversensitivity wrongly directed.

Don’t you think that this whole matter of the growing and widening interest in everything psychic should receive positive attention and not only descriptive references as now?

Of course, the beginning would have to be the presentation of the total nature and make-up of every human being, the areas, largely astral, where the developments are occurring, the dangers as well as the right uses of the interest, and any inherent faculties. Especially, as you know, the accent must be placed upon total impersonality and freedom from all thought of personal gain. Nothing kills dawning spirituality and hypersensitivity faster than the opposite of those, especially prestige-hunting and money-gaining...

Your music group contains fine people and is a very important development in the work of the T.S.—one which unfortunately is almost disappearing, has done so, except through yourself.

30 May 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Morya gives instructions

As you were both “moved” to believe, the invitation to Krotona has materialized and your acceptance received with much gratitude. When you reply to the formal arrangements which are to follow this morning’s letter, be careful to enunciate the following necessities, even if written in the form of requests:

1. Although Geoffrey enjoys good health for his age [91 years]—beyond it in truth—he finds it very necessary to guard against fatigue. In consequence, at the close of eveiy activity, he always retires into complete privacy—at least for a necessary time.

2. This privacy—aloneness in fact—is perhaps his greatest necessity, for when granted, any fatigue is quickly recovered from and brain and nerves preserved. As a result, there are no restrictions on participation in the work. Perhaps certain times of each day would be recognized as being for Geoffrey’s complete quietude.

This retiring into privacy immediately after lectures, however, does not necessarily involve the public Saturday morning activities, when you and Geoffrey will meet the people—non-members and unawakened members.

3. Whilst responding gratefully to the opportunity to take the Saturday morning, within the natural limitations of his age, he will be ready to meet members of private groups—E.S....and Co-Masonry and Krotonians. With these, he hopes to share the fruits of his studies in the esoteric life, the Mystery Tradition—past, present, and future—and the Occult Sciences in general.

For your consolation, Sandra, as long as the above “rules” are obeyed, We do not foresee any real harm or slightest deterioration of health to Geoffrey as a result of response to this very valuable invitation and opportunity which We desired and to some extent have planned.

The subject of the present increasing interest in, and trend towards, many different forms of psychism is of very great interest and importance. Therefore it is suggested, special attention should be paid to it, offering guidance in the approach to, study of, participation in, and safe, regular, and controlled exercise of the psychic faculty. If such mutual studies should prove at all fruitful, then would it be possible to produce a presentation of Theosophical truths, their application to the present interest in psychism, forms of investigation likely to be usefully followed by those so drawn, and especially the aspects to be avoided as dangerous, or at least unlikely to be of value? The world—and especially it would appear, the Americas—would seem to be a widely open field for such directions if they could be compiled. Hence, the very great importance of Krotona as having been founded in a region where the interest in psychism is very apparent.

On these subjects, Geoffrey hopes to share developing ideas. The more informal the gatherings could be, the more convenient—comfortable indeed—they would be for him. Other subjects that could be shared:

1. The superphysical planes and man’s vehicles and consciousness within them.

2. Meditation as an effective means of unifying brain and Egoic consciousness and the latter with the all-pervading, Divine Power, Life, and direction of the evolutionary process.

3. The Masters of the Wisdom as conscious Agents in that process.

4. The Devic Hierarchy.

5. The superphysical effects of thoughts and emotions, especially strong and urgent desires, and of spoken words, upon the matter of human vehicles.

6. The psychological effects of the differing forms of the aits upon human nature, conduct, and development, refined and uplifting, developing and pleasing, coarse and degrading.

7. Kundalini’s position as a source of trustworthy knowledge and guidance in the Occult Sciences.

8. Krotona’s possible position at the present time—and, most important also, surely, its contributions and development as an occult Centre into the future.

Yes, for both of you, the keynote for your contributions can best be described under the title you have already conceived: “The Mystery Tradition, Past, Present, and Future”.

Geoffrey, the excerpts you are now making concerning the Mysteries, when put together, will provide you with a useful and generally acceptable presentation of that idea, whilst in talks it will, of course, become more and more developed.

Yes, take a good quantity of specially chosen descriptions of the higher consciousness at all levels and of mystic experiences in general; for these, when you repeat them, can be very arousing to some people and start them on the great search, especially for the inner groups, but not alone for them.

Take with you, if you think fit, your best Kundalini and deva slides after a careful sorting; also, perhaps, a carefully selected number of your very best slides of Adyar.

We congratulate you upon the receipt of this invitation and your acceptance of it, both of which are directly in line with the fulfilment of Our intentions.

Geoffrey, it is good to be keen but not to overstrain.

However, you may both be prepared for a reception and a visit in which thoroughly warm affection, love indeed, will be received by you both from the people.

Drive on with the myth book.

Why not a series entitled:

1. “A Theosophical Approach to the Prevailing Interest in Psychism, Parapsychology” or other general name.

2. “Kundalini’s Position as a Trustworthy Source of Knowledge and Guidance in the Occult Sciences.”

3. “The Seven Forms of Yoga, Their Safe and Effective Practice.”

4. “The Spiritual Pathway leading to Discipleship and Christhood.”

5. “The Temples of the Mysteries and Their Ever Open Doors.”

[1] June 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

CONCERNING THE HEPHAESTUS MYTH

Try to simplify the chapter somewhat. The bases are correct and very difficult to put into clear English. Might it not be helpful to have a full statement, as from the new deva work, of the evolution-quickening of the life and inertia-reducing of matter as a primary statement? Then follow much as now. The fact is that the peoples built up the myths and the Sages organized them into occultism-producing allegories. This was one of the functions of the Greater Mysteries (and the Lesser Mysteries) which should surely have a place in the myth book—probably early.

The work grows and the tendencies are all fairly good, most of them very good. Watch yourself, Geoffrey, and you watch him, Sandra, against fatigue after the close of a lecture. Otherwise, health is basically good for both of you. Now rest Work is later.

10 June 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

THE DEVA OF ONE TREE HILL, CORNWALL PARK

The deva of One Tree Hill, Cornwall Park, said to Geoffrey, “Include in both your books (The Concealed Wisdom in World Mythology and Volume II, The Kingdom of the Gods) that whilst we perform our evolution-quickening function on behalf of the life in Nature, we are ourselves fellow inhabitants of the solar system and planet, undergoing with yourselves the evolutionary procedure.”

17 June 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

THE KROTONA CENTRE

The Krotona invitation, acceptance, and permission by the doctor are all very favourable in the furtherance of our work and not only for the lectures to be given but that a dedicated Initiate will be living and working at the Centre.

Remember, Geoffrey, you have during this forthcoming visit no other visible responsibilities than the one Saturday morning activity. Of course there are invisible opportunities which, with great discrimination, will be fulfilled. Take care. You won’t be lazy if you spend a lot of time resting, for of course this prepares you for your next activity as is the case here in your occultly dedicated and power-charged home. Peace be with and ever upon you on behalf of the Brotherhood of Luxor.

19 June 1977

The Blessed Lady Mary, the World Mother

... Though I am concerned for all mankind, I am especially concerned on behalf of all your female patients.

******

Master Polidorus Isurenus [after loud knocks in the Shrine]

All the more exquisite and sensitive parts of The Diary may well be extracted at leisure and given their places in your talks, especially to groups. I am aware that this—suggestion only—will make demands upon you, but the contributions especially at Krotona for example, will be enriched and beautified by those that are extracted and put in their places in the talks to which they could belong. You can easily mark them—not on the paper itself, I know—and then between you, you could collect and save the best of them for more immediate use. This may sound like putting extra work on you both, but as The Diary will not appear for many years, the helpful sayings could very well be put to use right away...

The Krotona work could prove to be very far-reaching indeed, not only in talks themselves, but in the help and possibilities that arise. You will see. Sandra, We think you may very well find a collaborator with The Diary there and find yourself greatly helped and encouraged with regard to the work you have so nobly undertaken in determining to save and give to humanity the story of Geoffrey’s life and activities. Neither of you need really feel any stress or pressure of speed, even though all you are doing together does demand fairly continuous attention. But my dear colleagues, believe me, whilst not wishing to slow anything up, I wish you (especially Sandra) not to feel overdriven at any time, even whilst doing your best with the work. Krotona should, if all goes well, be very productive concerning the myth and Diary work.

23 June 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

DISCIPLESHIP

As you introduce your subject of Discipleship (at the Krotona Centre) could you not say more than once, perhaps at the beginning, middle, and end, that although the T.S. teaching on the subject may sound somewhat historical, as if of the past, the whole procedure described has never ceased to occur from the earliest days when superhuman Beings remained near to, taught, and when feasible, accepted aspirants as disciples, whether male or female.

Furthermore—and try to make your own living experience real if never stated—make clear that men and women are reaching Pupilhood and Discipleship today, and this will continue as the necessary qualifications have developed in a person and knowledge of the possibility has been gained and a selflessly dedicated life is offered as possible participation in the work of the Great Brotherhood. Repeat this also concerning Initiation and, of course, the function, however secret at this time, of the Mystery Tradition.

You might also indicate, even if somewhat indirectly, that as human evolution on this planet proceeds, and when it reaches the necessary stage in a sufficient number of people, then an adapted form of the Mysteries will, with increasing publicity, be restored. In other words, give hope, stating as you do that truly unselfish idealists alone, could be admitted to the renewed or reborn Greater Mysteries, even though admission to the Lesser Mysteries might become more readily and easily available.

We want this whole subject brought to the notice of mankind as you have done and are doing. As one necessity, you could usefully quote from parts of your (Our) Call to Humaneness. Also, hammer away at the curse of cruelty and the blessing of humaneness.

The overall tide is good (for the seminar series of lectures): “Theosophia—Spiritual, Mystical, and Occult”.

The above, concerning the reality and the restoration of the Mysteries, very much needs to be made clear and living to the residents and workers at Krotona and their associates.

From Luxor.

(With a “smile”: We do not all live at Luxor, though We visit there for aspects of the work.)

The two World Wars, for the student of Theosophy—in the impersonal meaning—may be regarded as a “product” or even a remnant (the last one it is hoped) of the moving spirit or attitude of the Fourth Chain, Fourth Round.^{^[185]}

This, if accepted, would imply that in terms of the two World Wars, the lowest human elements—however civilized their bodily life—still had the power to affect the conduct of millions upon millions of human beings. This included the arousing in them of an intense determination to rule over all others, to conquer and, yes, enslave.

The inherent tendency to rule autocratically and brutally is unfortunately present as an attribute of humanity, outgrown though it already is, happily, in an increasing number. It is this which makes the Theosophical Society so important

One vital, if little understood purpose for the founding and hoped-for influence of the Theosophical Society was and is that it will give humanity that extra racial urge or nudge which will carry it over all the impulses characteristic of the “four fours” (Chain, Round, Globe, Race).

Every influence exerted by the Theosophical Society and by every individual member in harmony with the First Object^{^[186]} moves humanity over and out of that limitation and tendency. Moreover, if this succeeds, then the danger of a fall backwards becomes reduced, eventually to disappear.

6 July 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Rakoczy

The Devic Hierarchy and its activities on earth are within My department as collaborators.

Proceed with deva work as much as you easily can. The knowledge gained is of great importance to humanity and will later be more so.

7 July 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

GUIDANCE FOR THE KUNDALINI LECTURE

Why not, when showing these myth pictures [which illustrated the Serpent-fire or Kundalini] mention titles of suitable (easy and illustrated) books, Larousse and Edith Hamilton, for example, to which students may turn if interested?

Have available a fairly simple excerpt from our book on myths—a statement that many, if not all, are either fairy-tales with additions by the Sages or original accounts from the various Mysteries. Encourage the study of mythology and tell of your present literary work on the subject. The veritable myths may be described as the Theosophia of the pre-Christian eras, especially Egyptian, Cretan, and Greek.

Include in the myth book that Apollo represented all that was rational in the Greek spirit—adherence to harmony and respect for order, as well as gaiety and artistic sensitivity...

17 July 1977

From the Brotherhood of Luxor

True it is, as you are saying, that We are engaged upon preliminary planning and laying the foundations for the RETURN OF THE MYSTERIES.

The Co-Masonic Order is a most vital step in this direction... Hence the value of your book^{^[187]} and of others similarly written. The LIFE needs to be reinforced throughout Co-Masonry, even whilst perfection in the performance of ritual be also accepted as an ideal but not the only one!

So, in your study talks and resultant books on Co-Masonry, accentuate your well-presented ideal of Kavannah^{^[188]}—a magical word (!)—repeating its full meaning...Study circles are needed in the Co-Masonic Order, even whilst admitting as We do that the present world day-by-day demands upon most members, of necessity restrict their freedom to engage in study and meditation. In fact, what is now needed in the Co-Masonic Order is an “interior movement” dedicated to study and expansion of consciousness towards realization of the ever essential ideal of Oneness expressed as service and loving kindness.

Actually, of course, the 18° should thus exist and to some extent does so. In your talks in the Degree, therefore, accentuate this necessity and also the concept of the restoration of the Mystery Tradition—two very important ideas.

Yes, if invited, accept invitations privately and informally (when at Krotona) to address Co-Masons, putting all these ideas before them, including those received this morning.

Thus, the danger may be avoided, of the Co-Masonic Order becoming, or rather drifting towards, a ceremony without Kavannah.

Your American article is first class but will not be read widely enough. Every single Co-Mason should study that article.^{^[189]} See what you can do.

21 July 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

INITIATION WITHIN THE MYSTERIES OF ANCIENT EGYPT

[During the morning meditation, Geoffrey had a remarkable experience in which he beheld a ceremonial of Initiation. He dictated to me the following:]

It was in the Temple of Khonsu, at Karnak, Luxor, in Egypt. The Hierophantic position and Office was seated in the South as Amun, with Khonsu at East and Mut at West, these Offices being fulfilled by highly evolved Egyptians, especially the Hierophant Himself. The Temple was lighted by oil flares in saucer-like lamps, about seven feet above the ground. The North was unoccupied and this was the entrance.

The colour vermilion was predominant in the colours used, blue next, and much white and gold. The Officers wore uraei and were seated on the cubal thrones raised some eighteen inches above the ground. The Altar was on the line between Khonsu (East) and Mut (West). The candidate took vows kneeling at the Altar and then stood before the Hierophant

Who descended from His throne and, with a Rod of Power, with a rather complicated head including the Tau, Initiated the kneeling male figure with a very powerful ceremonial and, touching the crown of his head, brought high occult power (Atmic, I think) down into his brain and heart He fell unconscious on the ground and was laid in the form of a cross, X, upon one of wood.

Out of the body, the consciousness was raised to and functioned readily at the Causal level, this being the objective of the Degree, and not Buddhi. At once, the candidate knew that the named gods were only personifications of divine powers, particularly as they functioned at the Causal level. The words I heard were “Kingly” (Atma) in action under Manasic direction, “Queenly” (Buddhi, similarly) and “Higher Manas”, all functioning in the creation and management of the Universe and planet The forms disappeared to be replaced with mighty and tremendous currents of energy, differently coloured as they operated and became visible to the candidate Causally.

This was the primary goal of the Egyptian Mysteries, namely, Causal consciousness in which all symbols and personifications disappeared, to be replaced by the intelligently functioning powers of the G.A.O.T.U.^{^[190]} throughout all Nature. In other words, symbols were known for their true significances and not as realities in themselves.

[Geoffrey realizes as he watches and shares, why he became and is so interested in the same subject in this life and why interpretations of myths both attract and become realized in however limited a degree. In this, he is reliving Egyptian Initiate life and in writing and teaching now, he is working architecturally at the mental level, not with stones and carvings, but with thoughts and words.]

There are two rows of members, one behind the other, behind the three sides of the Temple, all being very reverent and deeply moved, and there are clouds of incense which is kept burning. Sistra^{^[191]} and some musical sounds follow profound utterances.

The heart chakram is the chief objective for “opening” and the knot made by the two figures in the symbol of union represents the “knot of ignorance” (meaning restriction to lower Manas only) which Initiation releases, thereafter freeing the candidate from that limitation. The Mysteries were a highly privileged and selective institution.

The candidate was brought back slowly to waking consciousness. The lull memory of realizations was preserved, and somewhat dazed by the elevation, he was most carefully disrobed of ceremonial insignia, seated for the closing ceremony, and then led, shepherded, indeed, to his boat at the outside of the first Portal and, still in a dream, as it were, taken to his home where he almost immediately went to sleep for a long time and received further guidance.

22 July 1977 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

The two great works, as you know, are the myth book series and the book which you, Sandra, at present call The Diary. You are most wisely saving, collecting, and including the spiritual and occult events in Geoffrey’s life for the book that is to be published after he leaves the physical plane—material of occult and spiritual value especially, which Geoffrey has produced both privately and semi-publicly. It will be likely to live monumentally long after you both have left the earth.

Geoffrey, We would like (actually meaning “hope”, but We know We can express Ourselves freely to you both) the two works to be advanced as far as possible at Krotona.

27 July 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Rakoczy

GUIDANCE TO AN INITIATED DISCIPLE

I suggest that you are now duly prepared for further experimentation in yoga. Remember, my dear pupil, that all yogic activities in their personal adaptations are truly experimental. Every one of us, each of us, is passing through phases of yogic unfoldment which when achieved will lead us into wider fields and degrees of awareness.

As the yogi develops in this sense, he or she continually gains wider and wider, and so less personal, ranges of experience or deeper realizations of the fact that the idea of “others”, of oneself as a separate entity, is erroneous. They have been necessary, and what might be called imprisonment within them is essential to successful passage through phases of human life and mental experience from personal to impersonal—ever more and more so, in fact

There is no such thing in the universe as one spiritual being—miscalled self—as separate from any other. No such entity exists; for there is only a vast Unitary Identity, a ONE, a UNIT, but not separate because there is nothing else in existence from which to be separated. Like all sun-rays and other radiances, physical and superphysical, emanating from the sun, each human Ray—Monad or Ego as you will—is an indivisible part of the Sun or Source.

Think over, both in the quietude of your mind and as you approach meditation, this extraordinary and wondrous truth that only One exists, and there are not any others anywhere. Then affirm in your meditative consciousness and seek ever to know, “I am That All-inclusive One, That am I.”

This is, I know, very abstract but you have brought yourself now to the stage of cranial development and sensitivity at which you could enter into this knowledge of only Oneness. We now wish for you to add to your yogic experience in the meaning I have above given to the word. In other words, without wishing to complicate your meditation, leave room—increasing room—for the experience of Oneness, affirming: “I am That One, THAT, THAT, THAT am I.”

I am helping with the attainment of both inner Light and outer awareness, but I now wish for you to experience in the depths of your consciousness—brain and superbrain—what must be described as the glory of Oneness. Let exaltation fill your mind as you contemplate this splendour, glory, truth, that only One exists, I am That One, That am I.

What will it be like, My dear pupil? Well, in day-by-day terms known and used by us both in our physical bodies: a sunrise and noonday sun within mind, heart, and brain. This is the true spiritual goal. Work for it just as you have so worked with wonderful persistence to bring fire and life to your brain.

Now, My initiated pupil, together let us increasingly know the glory of Oneness.

4 August 1977 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

AN EXPLOSION OF LOVE

What is needed is a world-wide and effective spreading of the Gospel of Oneness with its keynote of unity and its expression of humaneness. Therefore, it would be well to draw together all Our statements, your own and those from world religions, philosophers, and poets, etc., and from these extracts to compose an extremely beautiful and even heart-piercing and especially heart-winning affirmation of the one central Truth concerning every human being: namely, that however different mentally, racially, and individually, in spiritual Essence, ALL ARE ONE.

Then, draw up simply, lucidly, and very attractively, the ways in which this Truth could affect human conduct in every walk of life, giving various instances and incidents in which human life has been made beautiful by the acceptance and expression of Oneness.

Of course, the most obvious expression is in and through LOVE, whether for humanity as a whole (add the necessity for this in your yoga lectures as the goal of yoga), or for an individual. Collect and present the most beautiful accounts of the most exquisite and most touching expressions of human love, the “life of the human heart” expressed as love.

Then, fittingly always, collect and present some very dramatic examples of the opposite, limiting your choices to this century, perhaps, whilst not overlooking very “attention-attracting” accounts of the horrors and cruelty in the earlier past

Thus, the statement will present two opposites—love and hatred, compassion and cruelty. These could then be both appealed for and most earnestly appealed against in a statement showing these two opposites in dramatic form, particularly with personal self-sacrifice and even complete abnegation of self-thought in expressions of compassion and love.

Stress that not only the outward physical action is called for—most important though it is, of course—but much more the inward feeling experienced deeply in the heart that leads to such self-sacrificial and truly noble conduct.

Then perhaps, refer to the heartfelt unity that leads to the love and selfsacrifice which can be attained through and within the mind and, far more deeply, the innermost spiritual Self.

Thus a gospel, a kind of yoga, could be built up with its foundation of physical love and compassion, its heartfelt experience of tenderness which leads thereto, the mental understanding that the life in all beings must necessarily be One Life. And then, by contemplation realize why this must be so since the spiritual Life-prinriple is all that exists and in all people must be one and the same! Having discovered this, the yogi makes sure that it finds expression in and through every thought, feeling, word, and deed.

Thus, there could be brought about—without going to extremes and appearing to be an extremist—the concept of what might be called “AN EXPLOSION OF LOVE”.

Between yourselves and Ourselves, secretly, what the world of human beings really needs is just that very happening—AN EXPLOSION OF LOVE. You may think it advisable very discriminately to point to the alternative—increasing destruction of man by man.

Think about these views, formulate statements of them, and allow this to become, as it were, a message to humanity, the delivery of which in these forms could begin at Krotona.

15 August 1977

Master Polidorus Isurenus

OUR LORD CHRIST AS AN AVATARA

[On reading an article in Time magazine, 15 August 1977, entitled “Was Jesus merely Man?”. Geoffrey, as a deeply dedicated Christian, felt the need to express his complete conviction as to the reality of Our Lord Jesus Christ as an Avatara. The Master came and communicated die following teaching on this most sacred subject:]

The essentials are:

1. To accept, read, study, and apply to one’s own life the teachings of the four Gospels more particularly.

2. To conceive of the Christ less as an historical figure alone, but more as a temporary manifestation of the Threefold Godhead as Messenger of Wisdom, Teacher, Healer, and Guide, and as Inspirer in one’s own personal life.

3. To regard the Gospels more largely as allegorical and symbolic presentations of the (continuing) manifestation of the Divine in universe and in man—a completely non-historical approach.

(Sandra, the Master wants the word “continuing” put before “manifestation”.)

In addition to whatever choices may be made of the above, and they are not intended to be in any way mutually negative:

4. To perceive the Gospel story of the Annunciation and Virgin birth as an account (a quite intimately descriptive and instructive one) of the awakening from relative “slumber” of the Christ-Principle[192] within the consciousness of a human being.

This applies especially to those who have begun to experience the interior “birth”, and find themselves occasionally illumined, inspired, and increasingly interested in the living of the spiritual life amidst worldly activities. In this case, every chapter and almost every verse or group of verses when studied, will reveal, indeed potently declare, the way in which one’s own inner life must be led, and its expression in one’s daily life and associations.

If this becomes natural, then an intuitive but very private, reserved, and almost secret “eye” may be opened in search of others who are passing through the same experience.

Here it may be added that very similar experiences to those passed through by Jesus and His various disciples at different times, may seem actually to be taking place, both within one and in the conduct of one’s affairs.

From these last points of view, the devotee, if so moved, may accustom himself to live even as the disciples of old are said to have lived and even to be spiritually observant should the great Lord Himself appear or His words be heard: “Follow me and I will make you fishers of men.”[193] Thus life may come to be lived as if always within the Presence of the Lord and with the heart and soul ever turned towards Him, dedicated wholly to Him.

Others may have found themselves also realizing beyond the slightest possible doubt, the existence of the Mother of Our Lord, the Blessed Lady Mary, and similarly devote themselves also to Her.

5. The sincere student of philosophy who is deeply concerned with the discovery of Truth itself, may in addition to any of the above approaches, study with an open mind the lives of previous great World Teachers, discern similarities, as also and usefully, differences from the Bible story.

The ideal might very well be to become wholly convinced that there is but One Great World Teacher Who, age by age, manifests Himself to the world and teaches according to the needs of the time and the responses of hearers, the self-same underlying truths. He offers the same calls to a life dedicated both to service in the name of each great Being and pursuit of the single path of selfless love and devotion, purity, and compassion, exemplified to a large extent in all such histories or Gospels of the manifestation of the Divine upon earth for the benefit of all mankind.

Commenting, may it reasonably be added that it is this last living out of the spiritual ideals in one’s thought and life which is the important consideration—the only one, in fact—to be accepted in the heart, mind, and life of the truly sincere seeker for Truth.

[To Geoffrey personally, the Master spoke thus:]

If amongst a suitable selection of people, or on a proper occasion, you felt so moved, could you not say, “For my own part, the Lord Christ of the Bible is a supremely great Personage, Who holds this our world within His heart of love and ever keeps the promise made at His Ascension: ‘... lo, I am with you alway, even unto the end of the world’.”?[194]

* *

Geoffrey: I have almost from boyhood, if I dare say so, found myself completely convinced that He did indeed appear on earth in Palestine, however much the accounts of His visit seem somewhat to differ. I have at times felt that His promise has been kept and that He is here and now flooding the human mind with His wisdom and His love and perhaps

specially guiding those men and women who have, since His declared departure, found themselves utterly devoted to Him as a completely real, living, spiritual Presence to be revered, of course, but perhaps more important, in Whose name they should endeavour selflessly to serve.

Do you not think that in all these matters of one’s religious life, the all-important thing is the way in which, in His name and following in His footsteps, one tries, does one’s best, truly to live a Christ-like life?

I believe, as do all Churches presumably, that the Jesus—the supposed carpenter’s son—was born as a human being on earth and in that sense was of human heritage, but that as the highly allegorical account of the Baptism tells, He became overshadowed by the incarnation of the One Teacher on earth, the perfected expression of the Supreme Godhead of the Universe, One upon Whom had descended “the Spirit of the Highest”.

18 August 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Geoffrey, though not within your present plans, it may still become your duty to write the true story of the remarkable Personage Who was Christed. Admittedly, the proper place for such work is Palestine, and if one wishes to define a locality, then amongst other places (as you felt at the time of your visit there but did not recognize fully) the signpost to Cana would be one of them; for there His footsteps really trod and more than once. If the actual spot still exists, and the full archaeological investigation could be carried out, then the reported home of Martha and Mary and Lazarus at Bethany would be another. The hills and dales of Judea were His “synagogues” and the homes and presences of the devotees and suffering ones were as the altars.

Since this really is beyond the bounds of possibility as far as We can tell, then you might go back to your own experiences and carry out the research within your own consciousness of those two events—death of your servant-guide and... If so, then this can very well be carried out here under Our direction and assistance—perhaps next year? After all, Geoffrey, if you can go back a million years from a fossil,^{^[195]} could you not go back 2000 years from a personally remembered experience?

That will do for now—we shall see.

[The Master saw Geoffrey’s fatigue of brain...]

On the other hand, Geoffrey, it is not wholly impossible, is it, that the real Master Jesus Himself might come and tell you the story, illustrated by your own visions of the events?[196]

20 August 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

The investigations into the interior effects of music proceed favourably considering the time, opportunity, and energy at your disposal and that of your assistants.

We trust you will write to your friend again concerning her willingness to illustrate some of the forms and also the new devic discoveries of which you have written to her. If she responds favourably, as she may, encourage her to continue as valuably effective illustrator of these two new works. Keep your minds and thoughts open for possible illustrators in America. Whilst the world in many directions appears to be declining, nevertheless, increasing numbers of people are earnestly seeking the higher truths, the higher life and, still more, direct personal experience.

1 September 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

CONCERNING DISCIPLESHIP OF A MASTER OF THE WISDOM

When once the decision is unalterably made to seek the “Master’s feet”, it is very important that a sufficiency of time be preserved, as far as possible, every day for meditation.

This may well be dual and begin with the clear visualization of the Master’s person, together with a salutation of profound respect, followed by a suitable mode of yoga—combined Raja and Mantra for example.

When this is rendered impossible by circumstances, then the salutation and aspiration should nevertheless always be performed very realistically, however briefly.

‘The Lord Jesus Christ and Our Lady Mary, the World Mother, did indeed come to Geoffrey at a later time; however, this is not recorded in The Diary.

10 September 1977 - Krotana, Ojai, California, U.S.A

The Brotherhood of Yucatan

[Geoffrey and I left for Krotona, California, where Geoffrey was to conduct a seminar for three months. A short time after we arrived in Los Angeles the following communication was mentally shared with him:]

Welcome on your return to Our continent from Those Whose aid you daily invoke, the Members of the Brotherhood of Yucatan. Although the outward costs have all been met and comfort provided, the inward test has been considerable, and only your united dedication would have caused you to respond so favourably to the invitation which literally was to restore the life of Our Centre, Krotona. May We not be permitted now and hereupon to be included amongst Those with Whom you have hitherto communicated? We will not detain you now but will salute you after you are established at Krotona.

True, knowledge both of and from Ourselves is very slight indeed, even if it exists at all! Mental collaboration has long been daily sought by you, and now We, in Our turn, salute you and assure you that We may be called upon, especially in matters pertaining to Our continent and, of course, California and Krotona.

The success of your visit has already been assured to you. We add Our assurances and Our aid.

Your Brothers of Yucatan^{^[197]}

26 September 1977 - Krotona, Ojai, California

Master Morya

[Said to Geoffrey prior to the delivery of his first lecture at the Krotona School of Theosophy:]

I bestow upon you the gift of stillness, which is “No-thing-ness”.

There are aspects of the life and work of the Adept Brotherhood which are unknown to you as yet When this knowledge reaches you, as it will in due course, then you will understand the position of the Adepts of a planet in relationship to human laws and responsibilities. Concerning these, you may rest completely assured that every Adept ever contributes to the welfare of human life upon the globe, even if not in recognizable, technical, legal terms. Furthermore, the Adepts receive naught from the community, being only CONTINUOUS CONTRIBUTORS.

October 1977 - Krotona, Ojai, California

Master Polidorus Isurenus

When you read unity-statements and poems, before you begin, say something of this nature:

“Thus, our purpose and objective now is not so much hearing and enjoying beautiful words and even stated ideas, but also—and far more important—to enter into the experience itself which the words describe, or to which they refer.”

The great lack in many objectively-minded people in your audiences is that they listen mentally but, with exceptions of course, do not enter at all deeply into the marvellous experience and wonder of self-transcending unity with the all-pervading Life.

7 October 1977 - Krotona, Ojai, California

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Geoffrey, We wish you to be sure to include in The Diary, but not necessarily in your introduction, the account of your First Initiation. This was and is one of those very remarkable experiences which, when so overwhelmingly true and real as yours was, bestow the mark of reality and truth to your own experience of being Initiated... The unmistakable and overwhelming reality of the memory on waking, and the pressure which was upon you throughout that day and has been with you ever since, is quite rare when the recipient is also a person living out in the world and obliged to conform to all the customs of the world.

The experience is nearly always brought through by those Initiates who are living under ashram conditions—not unnaturally—but is rare otherwise. The time, the occasion when you were personally free throughout the day which followed, as well as the fact of your arrival at the necessary stage of unfoldment—all contributed to bring about that very consciousness of the existence and power of... and His bestowal of His Initiatory Grace upon you. Therefore, include it in The Diary, though perhaps not in the introduction.

[I had already placed in The Diary this experience of Geoffrey’s Initiation, dictated by him to me at the time and date at which it took place. Just prior to the above remarks made by Master Polidorus Isurenus to Geoffrey, the previous day in fact (6 October 1977), Geoffrey was deciding that this wonderful event was too personal and private to himself to be made public, and he forthwith directed me not to include it in The Diary. On the evening of the 7th of October, 1977, Master gave Geoffrey His expressed wishes in this matter, included above. After the Master had finished His remarks I spoke to Him, saying aloud (as I always do if I wish clarification of a sentence or to make enquiry about the matter being discussed at the time), “Master, the account of Geoffrey’s Initiation is already in The Diary.” Master replied (through Geoffrey, as always), “Yes, We know, but please leave it there.”]

I will be with you tomorrow for the special tape recording^{^[198]} which is quite important for the Theosophical Society, yourself, and the public which will hear widely and realistically a lecture on Ourselves. Your quotations from H.P. Blavatsky and Sir Edwin Arnold at the end will be very impressive, as also will the one from Master Kuthumi which, by the by, may well be repeated rather slowly a second time.

Yes, begin with the reference to the hesitation which Christians may feel about accepting the Theosophical teaching of other Adepts besides the Lord Christ. That will surely be your most suitable opening remark and have the effect of taking your audiences with you, being Christian yourself.

[I asked a further question regarding the inclusion of certain other personal experiences of Geoffrey’s in The Diary. The Master replied:]

We wish The Diary to be not only an account of Geoffrey’s life, inner and outer, but also an instrument for the teaching of the Occult Sciences. All the other material [that I asked about] will remain in the book itself.

2 November 1977 - Krotona, Ojai, California

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Explain the principle of total impersonality governing the occult life and that the conduct of others should never be either criticized or applied to movements to which they belong. The single necessity, the ideal in every respect—from mind through speech to the body—is to be concerned with the perfecting of one’s own character alone, based on a deepening recognition of the need for such personal improvements.

If every occultist would observe this fundamental rule, then every private and semi-occult movement would prosper greatly. Aum.

A Proverb: Adverse criticism of another can be a proof of faults and limitations in oneself.

6 November 1977 - Krotona, Ojai, California

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Advise the young people (both here and at home) about the choice of Theosophical fundamentals and their possible extensions to which belief is given; to be careful never to lose the centralizing and unfailingly directive influences of these great truths, their possible extensions, and their applications to life.

A very good practice is to write out their personal beliefs, check them against basic Theosophy, and be watchful never to be led astray from, or too far beyond, these. This will enable them to avoid erroneous ideas and, even more important, to help others similarly.

All this is very important at this time, when many apparently—but not truly Theosophical ideas are being advanced and are leading, almost seducing, students away from true and real Theosophia.

This will be part of their mission if they retain their membership and continue to work for the Society—the greatest opportunity open to any individual at any time, personal circumstances permitting.

*****

Master Kuthumi

This visit of yours has actually exceeded Our expectations, and the gratitude of the Adept Head of Krotona and Ourselves is fully conveyed to you both. Yes, each one of you has been a very useful channel and helpful co-worker of Ours indeed.

The lectures have met a great and definite need here and in the valley, whilst the tapes and videotapes will prove helpful elsewhere in the world, as also in the land of your present home, of course. You might usefully have selected tapes sent to your active friends and Lodges overseas, such as South Africa, Holland, Germany, and Denmark, for example. The Life after Death tape might also be sent abroad.

Sandra, be assured that progress will be made with the books when you arrive home. I am aware of your regrets in this field, but the demands upon Geoffrey have been too great. The arrangements for The Diary and the help received are particularly fortunate; congratulations for these advancements and the future to which they will surely lead. Yes, next year could be largely a “book year”, with music and deva research continuing and later to be published.

Your home is indeed an ashram and your quite various kinds of work on Our behalf are greatly appreciated, as knowledge conveyed and—very important—channels which We are able to use quite freely.

A due rest will and must be enjoyed for a time after your return from a visit which has brought light and much stimulus in the right direction to a considerable number of people and will still do so, especially as you have followed Our instructions so closely—regarding Discipleship, for example. Stress the reality of this, Geoffrey, and the discovery of the relationships after death at your E.S. talk and say also that the Ego is always fully informed. Both of your Masters are much preoccupied just now. Hence My part in “calling you up”.

Yes, Geoffrey, of course. We are always physically safe, whatever occurs.

21 November 1977 - Krotona, Ojai, California

Master Morya

Of course, We are both here in Our same bodies, Our same homes, and—although greatly extended—Our same work...

A useful topic for your thought and conversations together could very well be concerned with ways in which the present deplorable situation could be not only improved but almost “saved”.

When home and rested, why not join Us at your convenience in such speculations as these? Although We have already contributed some “balloons”,^{^[199]} nevertheless, a very bold, very clear statement about the future of the Theosophical Society from many points of view could and would be very valuable and possibly lead to further “balloons”.

26 November 1977 - Krotona, Ojai, California

While Geoffrey and I were discussing a question with regard to The Diary, he suddenly called that a glorious purple Maha-Deva had flashed into the room above our heads. It shared with him the following:

“The major question—in fact the only one—is how to turn the tens of thousands of members of inner valid Mystery Ceremonials into interested and consciously active occultists, instead of being ‘repeaters’ of received ceremonial—valuable in itself, remember.”

Master Morya and Master Rakoczy now actively entered the conversation:

“In fact, what We [the Masters] greatly need is an ever increasing number of such active and conscious pure-hearted occultists, ceaselessly at work in that field; in one sense mankind on our planet is in danger of spiritual bedullment, obsession, possession, and—like your patient madness.”[200]

Geoffrey said that the beautiful purple deva was one of the Order of purple devas at the command of the Great Head of the Seventh Ray, the Master Rakoczy, Who is deputed to watch over and suitably direct the fulfilment of occult ideals in both movements and individuals.

3 December 1977 - Epsom, Auckland, New Zealand

Master Morya

Your combined visit to Krotona, My Centre, has been as successful as We could have hoped, and the health of both of you—with occult aid and your careful living—is found to be well preserved. The governing word after all necessities have been met is: relaxation reasonably far into the New Year, concerning which advice will later become available.

Here, it may be said, that 1978 is going to be one of the most successful and occultly fortunate and blest years of your lives—especially concerning opportunities to fulfil your missions, and successes in doing so. Yes, books, public lectures, and classes.

The holiday visit to the North should be carried out as far as possible. Whilst there—and everywhere, actually—continue your investigations into the kingdom of the devas. This involves not only valuable investigation of individual devas at work, but the acquirement of a still deeper knowledge of their place (in the widest sense) in the solar and planetary scheme of things concerning which your new volume should contain much. Draw for this upon your original Maha-Deva [Bethelda],

State the fact that from your direct experience, the all-important quality of FAITHFULNESS could fade from the minds of dedicated aspirants. This would be a tragedy, and such an error should be referred to and immediately corrected; for it Is one of the greatest enemies to progress in the occult life. PRETENCE could take its place. DETAILED ACTUALITY should be stressed in contradistinction to pretence. No one ever successfully climbed ahead of time that famous “Ladder” leading to the Canopy of Heaven with his or her eyes still on the ground.

[The Master gave His blessing to the work Geoffrey was carrying out on behalf of the Society, saying, “All of which is My work.”]

On a suitable occasion, when these all-important tasks have been fulfilled, communicate with Us concerning the other very important work of this and future years, but especially this one—the completion of your books, which appears to be more hopeful than when you departed [for Krotona]. Help to the full the members of the Music Forms group.

12 December 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Geoffrey, do not be at all disturbed by the apparent slowness of the return of your full vitality. This is occurring and will come about. Rest, then, and take your ease in the care of our Sandra. As your doctor said, there is no organic trouble whatever, only very considerable fatigue. When your energy is restored you will, We know, turn again together to the wonderful world of our books—but never too soon.

We would like the myth book finished first and suggest that your almost complete introduction might well be concluded when you return to literary work. The first real sign of this will reach you from your Monad-Ego from which indications will arrive in your brain, probably with some interesting and very appropriate continuations of that part of the work...

For both of you, this period of what seems to be enforced leisure is in reality greatly needed. Follow it, enjoy it, and so be ready for Our collaboration in 1978.

[After this communication by Master Polidorus Isurenus, the Master Morya’s face appeared clearly in front of Geoffrey, who said, “He stretches out His hand over my head and says,’Rest My son, and then proceed.’” Geoffrey said, “A wonderful influence is left behind by these two Visitors.”]

13 December 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

In relation to the deva material, Volume II of The Kingdom of the Gods, introduction to new concept of devas as evolution-quickeners:

The closer in consciousness one is privileged to approach the source of all life, the more does one learn that one single motive exists for the manifestation of that Source, namely quickening the evolution of others. It is as if the whole Universe is an incarnation of One Single Being, imbued with one single objective or purpose, namely universally to assist, and wherever possible to quicken, the evolution for which everything was brought into being.

19 December 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

There are other worlds than this, and the occultist is one who has entered them.

*****

Master Morya

The important thing is to conceive of becoming an Adept as soon as possible. This is because one cannot seriously hold our concept of that future Self as an Adept unless it is already a practical possibility. Otherwise the brain as it is would not be interested.

Only those who conceive of ascending the later Initiate heights have awakened within themselves the capacity to do so. It is possible to conceive of an attainment only if and when it is a practical possibility.

21 December 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

on behalf of the Brotherhood of Luxor

[Communication received after hearing the first tap within the Shrine since our return from Krotona on the 2nd of December:]

Your responsibilities to Us for the New Year consist very largely of procedure with literature. We would wish the myth book^{^[201]} completed and presented, and of course, natural but not enforced progress with The Diary.

The myth book completed—hopefully by mid-year—definite possibilities of a second volume, well illustrated, of Music Forms and The Kingdom of the Gods will have presented themselves and should guide our activities. Thus, with the new artists and the continued music-form investigations—though far less public—the New Year promises very well.

The Krotona work has opened up further possibilities both for yourself and Our collaboration. We know that you will plan the New Year on physically quieter lives, but with responses to requests for private classes here as before. These are extremely valuable, not only for those attending but for your mind and the growth of ideas for presentation.

Quietude may well have its place in your mind and life next year, however outwardly active the literary work and illustrations might seem. In any case, all may quite legitimately be allowed to proceed at a leisurely pace.

I will visit you again nearer the Christmas Season, for which every possible happiness for you both is hereby wished by ALL OF US.

27 December 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

ONE-POINTEDNESS—A TEACHING FOR ASPIRANTS

Gradually, as your lives become more and more deeply involved in and united with the ideal of Discipleship and Initiation—the all-important ideal—remember that one central habit of thought, way of thinking, is always for every aspirant—young and old—extremely important. What is this? In a word: one-pointedness. As you proceed, each one of you, make yourselves a kind of one-pointed incarnation of the ideal of quickened evolution, in order more effectively to help mankind.

In this, like every single person who has—whether swiftly or gradually—turned from the worldly to the occult life, one-pointedness is the supreme virtue, quality, mental decisiveness, ever to be remembered and so developed.

Never, never, as you unfold under Our care like flowers in Our garden, never allow your thoughts—apart from business and material necessities—to stray, wander perchance, away from the central theme of your lives (Theosophia—the Divine Wisdom).

And upon this enshrine in your hearts, build into your hearts, one—pointedness upon the Pathway to Adeptship.

December 1977 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

The Lord of the World; the Great Brotherhood; one’s own Master and one’s nearest and dearest—ONLY ONENESS, ALL TOGETHER IN ONLY ONENESS.

*****

Master Polidorus Isurenus

The “flowering” of one individual bestows an almost immeasurable benefice on the human race as a whole. Soul -quickening occurring in one brings nearer that “day” for all mankind.

1978

1977-78 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

DIRECTIONS TO GEOFFREY FOR THE THEOSOPHICAL CONVENTION 1977-78

In the public lecture on “The Descent of the Ego to Birth”, include much special information concerning the World Mother (the Blessed Lady Mary), bringing home Her importance both in this procedure and in the world. Use the lecture for this purpose.

When opening the youth group study of the Masters, begin with the basic ideas modified to their understanding of your public lecture on the subject.

Include your collected references to Our Lady and the various accounts of Her meditation offered to the Bishop of the Liberal Catholic Church in New Zealand. Consider xeroxing the manuscript “Our Lady”, for presenting to each member of the youth group on the evening when you speak of Her to them.

Apart from your repetition of the Invocation, the Masters may have a somewhat reduced place at Convention. Therefore, speak of the Masters and of H.P.B.’s vivid relationship with Them for your two five-minute talks—the Masters and especially Their original purpose for the Theosophical Society, quoting: “We have to popularize a knowledge of Theosophy.”

Try and formulate, however briefly, a statement that the visits of the Avataras, of which that of Jesus Christ was one, are all designed for the illumination of human beings and more especially to give guidance for the right direction, right motives, and right conduct of their lives—especially to be merciful.

If possible, briefly repeat a suitably chosen story of Ourselves, such as H.P.B. and the Teacher of her dreams as a child, actual meeting in

London, long talk in Hyde Park [with the Master Morya] on the subject of the then non-existent Theosophical Society, and perhaps her residence at the Ashram.

At Convention, make definite reference to Ourselves, so opening the minds of members to the idea and thereby rendering them more responsive.

*****

Master Morya

THE ADEPTS

There would appear to be a tendency in the T.S. today not to think about the Adepts, or at least to regard Them almost as abstractions without relationship to the work of the Society. This is a profound and regrettable mistake. The T.S. is in truth Their Society and They cannot be, as it were, thrust out of it; and to carry out its work week by week and month by month without direct reference to Them is unfortunate—a grave error, I suggest. Lodge meetings might very beneficially be opened by a brief meditation upon Them [the Masters of the Wisdom], and the fact that the T.S. is Their Society owing its existence to Them. Due gratitude from humanity is, therefore, in order. Individual members in their turn will be well advised to have Them at least in the back of their minds, though of course all are free.

1978

The Master the Prince Rakoczy

Concerning two protégé of yours, I am grateful to have been drawn to the attention personally of your two protégé and will ordain help for them (especially in their membership of the Order of International CoFreemasonry).

5 January 1978

THE LAW OF KARMA

Remember that every twinge of pain suffered at any time, means that amount less of pain to be endured in the future. “Whatsoever a man soweth, that shall he also reap.”^{^[202]}

10 January 1978 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

[after the usual tap within the Shrine]

Both Adepts—the Master Morya and the Master Rakoczy—may be thought of as Agents for the Power Aspect of the Logos. The Master Morya is in Himself—on account of His predominant Ray (First)—Power incarnate. Master Rakoczy represents that same Power also expressed outwardly in that which somewhat corresponds to the ceremonial method, combined with full collaboration with the Angelic Hosts.

Thus, the First and Seventh Rays are intimately associated, even though to some extent their methods may seem to differ.

All members of the... are intimately associated by virtue of their successive Initiations through the stages, with both Master Morya and Master Rakoczy.

...members are well advised to realize and understand the special function and methods of the Seventh Ray, or “Power expressed in orderly manner”. All members of valid ceremonial^{^[203]} would be well advised to open their consciousness to the Seventh Ray method and its Great Head.

22 January 1978 - Epsom, Auckland

Masters Morya and Kuthumi

THE CONTINUED BUILDING OF THE THEOSOPHICAL SOCIETY

[This message came whilst Geoffrey was sharing with me memories of some activities—exoteric and esoteric more especially—into which he was drawn on entering the movement:]

The “building” during this phase of the Society’s life must largely be done by good literature as a foundation, hence Our efforts in collaboration with yourselves...The world-wide spreading of Theosophy through such literature is the phase through which gradually and all too slowly, it would seem, the building proceeds.

Unfortunately, as you well know, the original basic directions (the real foundation) are not being wholly adhered to. It is important that the very foundations of the Society remain firm and strong. The walls must be steadily built, largely as a result of good literature and good expositions founded thereupon—very strictly so. As in all architectural structuring, any wandering from the architect’s design and engineering can be very harmful indeed, almost mortal in some places, in fact

Your contributions more recently begin to refer to the upper regions of the structure, namely the spiritual and occult teachings and their especial applications to two classes of people: genuine seekers for philosophic and religious truth upon which their ways of life can be founded, and guidance—assurance even—of assistance on the Path of Hastened Evolution available to those who, totally ahamkara-less, find themselves awakening to the call of the Path Life. Many of them are reincarnated Initiates from the Ancient Mysteries—the Lesser Mysteries for the most part, it would appear, since the more advanced have attained major Initiations and even Adeptship.

This, in architectural language, leads towards what could be described as either the summit of the central tower or—more slender and so more suitable symbolically—the steeple.

Writers and speakers, very especially the second, will be the effective members who will best continue the Society’s work and assist in the building of the great edifice held in mind by Ourselves at the founding of the Society and ever since.

Here, then, is a CALL—uttered without the slightest pressure—to those so moved: to write Theosophy in accordance with modern terms and thought and teach Theosophy by lectures with the dedicated motive of the continuance of the building of the Parent Theosophical Society.

Encourage all your class people, especially the youth, to follow this idea.

13 February 1978 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

As for the poor second victim, he has already learnt and will more fully learn that suicide is always a mistake, for although he is out of the physical influences, he is not free of the personal associations, such as the addiction which will be felt far more deeply than in the body, and also he knows the futility of his action and its terribly tragic effect upon his mother and other members of the family.

In addition, as you know, his consciousness is restricted to the lower levels of the astral plane, and he can only with difficulty be reached by his Ego and become aware of this. Include him on the healing list, therefore, with a special prayer for the interior enlightenment which alone can lift him above and out of the psychological darkness into which he has plunged himself. Add to the prayer: “May the personal mind become aware of, and enlightened by, the Inner Self.” This is one of those very sad cases into which you have been privileged to be drawn. Help, as We know you will, with Ourselves.

March 1978 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

KUNDALINI SHAKTI

Tune into the Kundalini deva in case further information on this extremely important subject becomes available.

... Pictures could well be included in both the Hephaestus Principle in the myth book and in the new deva book.

In the introduction also, in each of these, prepare the reader for this material. Tell of the rarely-known existence of the Kundalini force in Nature and not only in man: that it is deva-operated—hence your experience in Colombo. Reveal very carefully the place and activity of Kundalini Shakti as the active principle in all procreative procedures, particularly sentient creatures, though of course it operates even in the plant kingdom where a male spore fecundates a female recipient with “birth” results. It is, in fact, the male-female fecundating agency in Nature, without which nothing would happen from the unions.

You may even raise the question as to whether Ida functions in the female recipient and Pingala in the male, with Sushumna as the cohesive principle, holding the oppositely polarized currents together in the fulfilling of their functions. Nature is not blind and, above all things, the reproductive principle is power-operated. Hence Ida and Pingala.

When you introduce this into the three books, and even into the next reprinting of The Kingdom of the Gods, lead in as tactfully, carefully, and wisely as you possibly can, since the whole subject will be entirely new outside the occult world.

You might even allow a certain definite reverence on your part concerning this subject. For the vast continuing evolution-quickening process everywhere at work is part of the contribution of the Solar Logos Who, in one aspect, may be regarded as the Great Kundalini Reservoir and Supply for the Universe.

Prometheus, who stole the fire from heaven according to myth, may be interpreted with great care as a very high Adept—or rather, Planetary Spirit—who, as a link, assists in the establishment of the productive procedure very early after the emanation of the Universe. The price he paid—voluntarily, of course—was to remain in touch with manifestation, although he had already attained to levels of consciousness and being far beyond those limitations, Anupadaka-Adi, in fact. The supposed torture by an eagle and the regrowth of the liver portray the “sacrifice” of such a being in associating with manifested worlds and their inhabitants and contents, at least throughout Manvantaras, major and minor.

Man is the only being at this stage of the evolution of the Earth Scheme (hence the rock on Mt Caucasus) and the Solar System as a whole, every major aspect of which has its Prometheus.

The small number of Kundalini devas of whom you have caught glimpses are seen by their fiery nature to be members of the great Order which is concerned with the systemic and planetary function of the Kundalini Shakti. Of course, metals do not procreate and, with present investigatory possibilities, do not seem to grow or change. Yet the Hephaestus-Kundalini-Principle is at work within them. Watch the procedure of the forming and growth of crystals and see if you can possibly discern Kundalini at work even at that most primitive level, for of course it must be there—is there.

Fiery-looking and Kundalini-looking devas are all associated with this force in Nature, chiefly as quickening agencies and sensitizing forces, bringing the apparently insensitive elements, minerals chiefly, towards the precious stone, and onward to the responsiveness of even the most primitive semi-plant, plant, and animal kingdom. (What is known as “heat” in female animals has its cause in the functioning of Kundalini.) Science will doubtless one day discover a hitherto unperceived and at present undiscoverable growth-stimulating force at work throughout the mineral kingdom.

Knowledge of how precious metals are formed (also coal) and especially what is known of the appearance, characteristics, and “increases” in precious metals and jewels—all of this belongs to the Hephaestus Principle that is the personifying power by which all of this occurs, however deeply the secret is concealed.

3 March 1978 - Epsom, Auckland

This afternoon Geoffrey was being flooded with exalted and deeply occult teaching pertaining to the Second Labour of Heracles—the overcoming of the terrible Hydra of Lerna as recounted in his book, The Concealed Wisdom in World Mythology. He had, this afternoon, been engaged super-physically for some time in collaboration with Master Polidorus Isurenus, Who was conveying to him the underlying meanings of this remarkable and great Labour of the Initiate Heracles.

The siddhi-power of a conscious superphysical, mental, and intuitional reception of such intricacies of occult revelation from the mind of the Master cannot possibly, even faintly, be gauged by an “onlooker” in this wonderful process of interchange between Master and Initiated disciple. It is almost impossible to understand the intense effort of concentration of the mind, made white as an unmarked sheet of paper and held absolutely still, so that not a word may be missed or a single “thread” of the Master’s train of thought broken, and which must be immediately clothed in correct English and given vocally to me, waiting with pen in hand.

The Master had been instructing Geoffrey for quite a long period and seeing that he was becoming tired commented understandingly, “Yes, I know all about it. I have had to fight against it Myself throughout My preparatory days before I reached Adeptship. This state might possibly be described in the bodily sense as the power of tirelessness.”

Geoffrey continued for some little time until the particular interpretation was concluded and then came his rest. He told me that, for him, the task of interpreting allegories and symbols and consciously receiving such and other teaching and instruction from the Masters was one of the most demanding tasks to which he had ever put his mind...

5 March 1978 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Your work on the great myths is admirably conceived and worked upon. It will bring much occult light and understanding to many people who otherwise would not tend to come in contact with either the idea of the real meanings or the meanings themselves behind the ancient myths. Very good work indeed to “unearth” and present them.

12 March 1978 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Morya

IMPERSONALITY

Impersonality is a very rare quality indeed. An ever improving impersonality ensures that the individual, at whatever level, never intrudes herself or himself upon the work of the Brotherhood and, indeed, the Solar Logos. This not at all unnatural intrusion and sense of personality can and does force itself upon the mind so that full impersonality does not exist. Until this is outgrown, quite naturally in many cases, there can always be a barrier between a person and his Ego and so Ourselves, and so the Logos—a serious impediment. Perhaps wisely, and also impersonally, you might share this idea both with your friends and with your pupils in the various classes—yoga, for example.

One might almost say that, without going to extremes, personality, the personal sense of being someone and doing something worthwhile, could be described as a “curse”, for it both shuts the person within his own sense of individuality—not unnatural, of course—and shuts him out from that universal awareness and freedom of mind that is of first importance in both the inner life in general and in the reception of idealism, ideas, and personal guidance.

So many people, even aspirants, shut themselves in what perhaps might be called “the prison of personality”, locked up within which they mistakenly think that they are the actual actors, inspired persons, and inspirers of others, nothing of the sort being at all true. Even when one thinks things out correctly for oneself when using the mind, the ideas received are found to be never original, but drawn from the “great bank” of ideas, knowledge, thought, upon which the Universe is founded and from which truth and inspiration are drawn. Therefore, Geoffrey, include in your addresses this important idea of impersonality, thereby helping to unlock the “cell doors” behind which a person can become imprisoned.

One of the great advantages of being a fully conscious sibyl,[204]as now, is that channelship may be regarded as the explanation of every achievement—especially in the realm of the mind.

A happy ninety-second birthday from Myself as your Master and, as I am asked to add, the Members of the Brotherhood of Luxor. You are at this moment living in your body at your physical location, whilst in truth and actuality you really and increasingly live with Us, Whose valued and trustworthy and very active representative you unfailingly are.

Our blessings upon you on this great day of your ninety-second birthday—by no means your last!

19 March 1978 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

A CALL TO SAVE THE HUMAN RACE FROM MUTUAL EXTINCTION

The central problem with which, in many countries, the Theosophical Society is confronted consists of the continuing diversification of the interests of members and the apparently permissible widening of the interests and regions of study and enquiry, as a consequence of extensions of knowledge now being attained in many intellectual, psychological, and psychic fields. These inevitably distract the attention of members away from the original central scheme of thought and group of ideas theoretical and practical—which the T.S. was designed to present.

Admittedly, all members are free and must so remain, but a “voice” is needed, giving warning of the danger to the effectiveness of the Theosophical movement in preventing and solving those evils that have occurred, the grave disadvantages by which humanity is becoming increasingly threatened.

The central Theosophical teachings, the basic Theosophical truths which the Society was founded to advance, are in danger of falling into the background, displaced by what may appear to some to be modern and so more interesting concepts. This is an error.

Actually, none of them is new, although scientific and psychological and psychic developments reaching the public mind demand careful study, careful planning, and careful outworking of the ways in which they can be practically applied to the solution of the dangerously threatening developments occurring in some countries and groups. These need to be listed and the many solutions to them which Theosophy makes available should be applied—very realistically applied, of course.

Should you possibly have both time and energy I would gladly suggest both urgently pressing modern problems and dangers and their immediate and long-term solutions to be answered in the light of Theosophy.

Would an article in your national magazine produce a group willing to work under your direction or that of another, do you think? In addition, and more important, however, would be the same Call to members as a whole through The Theosophist and, do you not think, all Section magazines?

The basic issue—especially acute at this time—is the threat of war and the way to assure permanent world peace. This is accentuated by the latest scientific discoveries of the leading countries in the production of ever more deadly weapons and other means of both widespread and individual destruction. In other words, what is really needed—very urgently, We believe—is what might be called a confraternity of the peoples of all nations, especially those with selfless motives.

The members of the human race must at this time increasingly collaborate in the meeting of this danger and the unshakeable foundation of organized international effort for world peace. United Nations is not capable of Achieving this and for many reasons, one of the chief being the necessity for avoiding the withdrawal and non-co-operation of nations who are in disagreement—those seeking world domination, for example.

Has not the time arrived when the thousands of millions of people themselves must—perceiving these dangers—combine in an international effort which might be called “A CALL TO SAVE THE HUMAN RACE FROM THE DANGER OF MUTUAL EXTINCTION”?

Another grave problem consists, as you know only too well, of the insensate increase of cruelty throughout the world, man to man and man to animals. The chief forms should be listed and the call to their solution formulated.

A third problem is the planetary sharing of food so that the deaths of millions and the miseries of millions more resulting from starvation may cease. Behind and within all these is the thirst for superior power, financial superiority, and national technical advances ahead of other nations in both weapons of war and industrial developments and exports.

The call, then, is perhaps in better language: “HUMAN BEINGS ON EARTH MUST UNITE”. Love must replace both direct hatred and the absence of love in the deliberate infliction of cruelties both within countries and beyond them.

Then your ten statements^{^[205]} and the accentuation of the inescapable function and operation of the Law of Cause and Effect which operates nationally, upon groups and, of course, individuals—beneficially where love and harmlessness reign, and most destructively where their opposites are accepted and used in obtaining benefits.

Had you not better call upon your friends as a whole for collaboration with you in this activity, drawing all others willing to collaborate and capable of doing so effectively?

First, perhaps, Geoffrey, an article for your Section magazine,^{^[206]} with the bare statement of the above and calling for collaboration in spreading the message throughout the world. At the same time, The Theosophist^{^[207]} should be called on and the General Council Section magazines everywhere, hoping for a response corresponding to, but much greater than, THE CALL TO HUMANENESS.

Whilst you might be responsible for the initiation of such a movement, others should, as it were, take over from you if you succeed, thereby leaving you free for our literary work—also most important

*****

TEN TEACHINGS CONCERNING MAN

1. Man is that being in whom highest spirit (Monad) and lowest matter (body) are united by intellect

2. The etheric double is the connecting link or “bridge” between the superphysical and the physical person.

3. Man’s spiritual Self peipetually unfolds potential capacities, this being the result of his existence.

4. This process culminates in the attainment of perfected manhood, Adeptship.

5. The method of human evolution is by means of successive and progressive physical lives, or rebirth.

6. Human conditions and experiences are the results of human conduct under the Law of Cause and Effect or Karma. Kindness brings health and happiness. Cruelty brings disease and misery.

7. The processes of evolution can be delayed by self-indulgence and cruelty, proceed normally, or be hastened by following a kindly, helpful, and self-controlled mode of life. The Kingdom of Heaven can be taken by stonn. This calls especially for self-training, regular meditation, and selfless service.

8. Century by century a perfect man or woman arises, the rare efflorescence or “flowering” of the human race. Perfected men and women—Adepts—exist on earth.

9. Ages ago, and ever since, certain Adepts shared Their discovered wisdom and knowledge with humanity. This is named Brahma Vidya and Theosophia.

10. The Theosophical Society was founded in 1875 to “popularize a knowledge of Theosophy” in order to “ameliorate the condition of man”.

28 March 1978 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

AN APPEAL ON BEHALF OF THE WORLD

The world situation is greatly relieved whenever an individual feels moved to enter the life of the Path, does so in deep earnestness, and determines to become a disciple of an Adept and, as soon as possible, an Adept himself or herself. These are the people who, by their presence on earth and their activities at all levels and their personalities, greatly help to lift the heavy darkness and danger from the world, and especially from humanity. It is the “Path” people that we need so much.

28 March 1978 - Epsom, Auckland

THE SCROLL OF THE LAW

On the evening of the 27th of March, I was (superphysically) in the presence of a great Adept. Being in His Presence (and the knowledge of being in a city, aged and marvelously clean and clear, in which the interview occurred) is vividly in my mind and consciousness... He seemed to uncover a cylindrical “recording”, a symbol which was tremendously charged with power, and said to me, “Geoffrey, continue to uncover and reveal the Scroll of the Law, the Eternal Truth. Remember that distance is in actuality without significance at the higher levels of consciousness, so that one part of you, and indeed of all Initiates, remains, as it were, in this city and in unbroken linkage with Myself and the Brotherhood.”

I remained for a time in this state of higher consciousness, exalted and even more deeply resolved to continue to reveal to my fellow human beings, the Scroll of the Law. Thereafter I proceeded with invisible helping.

One effect of the experience is to produce an interior calmness and, the other, a strengthening of the aspiration to become a Buddha as quickly as possible for the helping of all that lives.

2 April 1978 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

If possible, do not cease your public lectures,^{^[208]} since you are Our most direct agent to the public.

Reduce the home classes, perhaps Freemasonry. Maintain youth classes. .

5 April 1978 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Humanity’s present greatest “curse” is the prison of Manas II with its especially destructive separateness. One of the greatest blessings for mankind would be, or will be, to rise in consciousness from Manas II with all its limitations into the freedom of Manas I and eventually to think and to live there always. May this not be the one solution for all human problems? Happily, the human race—or at least a sufficient number of them—will so evolve, realize ONENESS and practise it universally.

25 April 1978

Master Polidorus Isurenus

AN EXAMPLE OF ADEPTIC AID

We—the Brotherhood of Luxor—share with you the great seriousness of the... case. We therefore assume major responsibility for her safety, particularly in protection against the evil ones. Indeed, We have an Initiate on guard in case an immediate physical danger should arise. As she herself says, however, her very adverse karma from more than one former life poses a difficulty. This is where your personal contact with and help to her have their place. Between us, it is hoped that she will be saved. We inform you of this in order that you may be as free as you reasonably can be of anxious care concerning her... Work on her behalf at all levels, therefore, but without due concern or anxiety. We as a Brotherhood have her in charge...

June 1978 - Epsom, Auckland

[Geoffrey and I were musing concerning such Beings as the great Lord of the World, the Silent Watcher, and the Logoi of the Rounds, Chains, and Planetary Schemes. He shared the following thoughts with me:]

One assumes that after Adeptship is attained, not only the sense of sight, but an increasing general awareness is extended beyond the limits of the planet. Just as a scholar or tourist studies and sees only an atlas, whilst a well-informed student knows a great deal more, so the Adept becomes increasingly aware of the manifestations of the Divine Life, consciousness, and power outside of and beyond the limits of the single planet earth, and its confines. In Theosophical terms, this would presumably include knowledge of Rounds and Chains, especially the former.

THE SILENT WATCHER

Intermediate between the Round Manu—more especially—and the Sanat Kumara, there does exist an intelligent and extremely lofty Being to Whom the title applies. Indeed, throughout the Universe a systematic—but not in terms of the concrete mind—Order of Beings exists, Members of which at the Atmic and super-A/mtc levels, serve as intermediaries between the “Seniors” and “Elders” and the more actually responsible Officials of the planet.

Through Members of this Order, the Solar Logos can at any moment be informed—if ever necessary—should an invasion arise when supra-planetary intervention is necessary, particularly as safeguard for the continuance of the designed activity and progress of both areas of the Solar System and the Universe as a whole.

Since these Beings hold Their designated Offices as named, They never intrude unless what might be described as a crisis in the Solar System or even the Cosmos arises. Should this occur, then They are available as both Directors and Guides under the Solar Logos to the more “local” Officials concerning the necessary actions to be taken and, of course, the intervention in terms of power and intelligence which the Solar Logos or Lesser Official decides to fulfil. Then, the Silent Watcher becomes the Agent, as it were, and the Communicant for and of all the subsequent activities.

Yes, this did happen on earth when the Atlantean Race fell too deeply into daikness and their continent had to be destroyed—a typical very lofty intervention.

*****

Master Polidorus Isurenus

When once you have become an Initiate of the Greater Mysteries (and so within the Brotherhood)—especially the later stages of the Path—then everything that happens to you is in a strange way a continuation of the “Mystery” development and advancement.—Indeed, the world amidst which you live becomes your Temple wherein, if only mystically, the great ceremonies continue to be performed.

14 June 1978

Master Polidorus Isurenus

THE LAW OF KARMA

The Theosophical Society can make an important contribution by showing that all sufferings of man are due to the sufferings he has inflicted on others under the Law of Cause and Effect. Therefore, the only sure way to make certain that it will neither get worse nor continue always, is for humanity—if only in recognition of the Law of Karma, and so selfishly—to put an end to cruelty. THIS IS THE SOLE SOLUTION! In other words, humaneness is the only preventative, and knowledge of this fact specially presented, painstakingly documented, would be an extremely valuable and potent contribution of the Theosophical Society.

14 June 1978

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Some day, when free and there is a suitable opportunity, add to the Third Object [of the T.S.] the ideal of developing in oneself these supernormal qualities and powers in order to be of increasingly effective service to one’s fellow men, using these higher powers. Quote, perhaps in different words: “When one person becomes illumined, the individual next to him lights up.”

(a) June 1978 - Onerahi, Whangarei, Northland

During residence under peaceful conditions in a quiet and small cottage in New Zealand, to my surprise I found myself aware of companies of shining ones and of being in the actual Presence of my Archangelic Teacher, Bethelda, Who transmitted The Brotherhood of Angels and of Men and the other angel books to me when deep within a beech wood in Gloucestershire, England. This great Being continued the teaching association as if neither break in time nor planetary distance of some 12,000 miles made any difference whatever.

(b) June 1978 - Onerahi, Whangarei, Northland

[Received by Geoffrey in our room at the hotel which looked out over the lovely bushland and harbour to the hills beyond Whangarei. We had been discussing cosmic and solar creative processes in which the Angelic Hosts, in their different degrees of evolutionary status, have their necessary function as “quickeners” of evolution of all life and form. Suddenly Geoffrey turned and looked at me and pointed outside the window saying, “They are all out there Bethelda and the angelic presences...” His face was lit up by the joy of it all, which he alone could experience. I at once got my notebook and took down the following wonderful words:]

The Angelic Hosts possess universalized consciousness and are not divided by any differences of membership of Orders, or position in the economy and administration of universes and planets, individual opinions and, unlike mankind, have no “walls” or “doors”.

Certain of them are ordained to be associated with humanity in the fulfilment of the Divine purpose and so become aware—acutely at times—of the existence in the human mind of all such exclusive barriers. In a phrase, the totality of the Angelic Hosts and spirits of Nature is characterized by an inherent and perfectly natural ALL ONENESS. Even space itself, and therefore distances, are without restrictive meanings, for the whole universe and the superphysical planes of a planet are freely available to them, whilst movement is so rapid as virtually to eliminate both distance and travel. Indeed, the problem of “place” as a restrictive position does not exist, since to conceive of an association in space will be followed at once by position there, so very rapidly does vehicle respond to consciousness—immediately, in fact. Bethelda, when He so conceives it, is at once in my presence.

True, non-individualized nature spirits are not thus liberated, since they are intimately and vibrationally attuned to—and so to some extent geographically placed at and with—areas of Nature in which they are at work. Their activities may be associated with each of the four elements, and areas and such aspects of landscape as mountain ranges and forests, single mountains and trees. Once individualization has occurred, however, these “positionings” are transcended.

This means, of course, that as far as co-operation with man is concerned, the Angelic Hosts may reasonably be thought of as everywhere, ever present, and so ever available...The gateway to the Angelic Kingdom may be thought of as “the clear blue sky”—physical and mental. Before I can communicate with the devas, my mind must become as “empty” as the cloudless, clear blue sky.

25 June 1978 - Auckland

Master Morya

[Last night Geoffrey was with the Master Morya and remembers Him giving the following directions:]

Broadening is permissible, even inevitable where knowledge of Theosophy and its applications to human life and therefore our Society are concerned. But not so, definitely not so, where the ancient landmarks of Occult Science and the Occult Life are concerned, for these are, as you have quoted, “adamantine” and therefore cannot ever be changed, whether by a Hierophant or by His Representative in the world... The Original Rules must be accepted and obeyed by every single person who, once admitted, would remain a member of a truly occult movement like the E.S. Share strongly with...this, your own knowledge, certainty, and assurance.

Resume and maintain the three activities, public, youth, and yogic, for in each of these you both convey knowledge and serve as Our Channel...

Yes, proceed at a good pace with the literary work—important, even unique, as it is. But there exists no need for a good pace to become or be regarded as excessive drive to the stage of overfatigue. This last must be guarded against always.

Yes, employ your various useful collaborators to the full as in final typing, checking errors, and preparing for the publishers the literary fruits of your life, which will live long after you have gone. However, this (smiling) “disappearance” is still quite a long way in the future...

Holiday visits are highly recommended. Yes, visit the active volcano[209] in order to acquire and transmit resultant knowledge (devic) very greatly needed in the world.

[Geoffrey thinks that this occurred at and within the home in the Valley. He presumes that both Master Morya and Master Kuthumi are intensely busy, overwhelmingly so almost, at the present time—utterly calm though Master Morya very clearly proved to be. Geoffrey thinks he hears a comment as he says this: “Detached concerning Ourselves, but deeply involved in world affairs, mental, emotional, and physical or material.” Geoffrey remembers that the Master’s home still overlooks the river, flowing down below.]

30 June 1978 - Auckland

Master Morya

RULES GOVERNING SUCCESSFUL TREADING OF THE OCCULT PATHWAY

The central issue is as stated: the Rules governing the successful treading of the occult pathway, and so also applying to the Esoteric Section [of the Theosophical Society] are, in no slightest degree, either Adept-made or man-made. They are quite simply the laws, the procedure of the hastening by himself or herself of a human being’s evolutionary progress. These laws as far as this planet is concerned—and in this Chain, Round, and Race are quite unchangeable. They are adamantine, rocklike, and therefore absolutely unalterable, as each one of Us has found.

Nevertheless, human beings are involved in the procedure and the outworking of these laws, so that it is almost inevitable that attempts will be made both to deviate and yet to progress and succeed. In this exists a pair of opposites between which there can be no bridge.

The very basis is itself immovable and may be described as the one and only permissible and so successful motive for the great endeavour; namely, by quickening one’s own evolution to bring about to an increasing extent the quickening of the evolution of all else, the Life and its expressions in every kingdom of Nature and all beings. This is particularly true when the motive has been in response to an unmistakable non-negotiable interior evocation, that cannot be denied, from the inmost Self. It is indeed to bring one’s whole way of life into such a condition that what may be described as “a leap forward in evolution” will be attained.

Admittedly, this somewhat complex foundation is not grasped when the great endeavour is first entered upon, and even followed for a time. Obstacles appear within and without one—may even be made to appear (as a test)—and it is at this point, or during this experience, that those who have already attained, the Adepts, hold out Their hands to be grasped, whether consciously or not, by the awakened individual.

For this reason, the Greater and Lesser Mysteries of the world have been founded and conducted and will so continue until the need for them has been outgrown.

So much, then, for fundamentals which cannot be too often repeated, too frequently recognized and obeyed, and especially made clear by the all-important procedures of organized help and example.

The E.S. was originally founded entirely according to the above laws which still obtain and must at least be so firmly enunciated that every single member of the School knows them and so—if he remains as a member—follows them to the very best of personal ability, especially including unchanging sincerity and selflessness.

Further, it should be clear that the aspirant is almost certain to be tempted in many ways, particularly to break this last-named Rule of selflessness. Herein lies one of the greatest difficulties, aroused as it is or can be by perceiving the possibility—and falling a victim to it—of the attainment of personal gain, whether prestige or material enrichment.

This is what might be called the “Achilles’ Heel” of every would-be hero—the possibility of falling because of this vulnerability. This warning should frequently and unmistakably be put before every single aspirant to the spiritual heights. Of course, far more is involved, particularly as concerns motive and conduct, and this also has been made plain in numerous publications dating from immemorial times.

Absolutely, those who have been thus informed, warned, and who continue to ignore the ancient rule, should be asked to withdraw from the system of organized help, whatever its form may be.

As I close, may it be remembered that the more exalted the worldly and obvious position or office, the greater the danger both of being tempted and—unfortunately—of a FALL!

From the first awakening and self-discipline to the successful close of the Quest, let all be on guard self-guard, indeed—founded upon this knowledge of possible temptation and danger of FALL with tragic results.

Late June 1978 - Auckland

INVISIBLE HELPING^{^[210]}

A large assembly of people on the astral plane were strenuously “at work” on behalf of the Greeks who were killed and others who were suffering as a result of the Salonika earthquake. Invisible helpers were healing, soothing, and supporting in many ways these poor sufferers, most of whom were so deeply and doubly hurt by both great—even terrifying—shock and death, and acute disturbances and bereavements.

This activity, in which I joined them, consisted largely but not entirely of invoked healing and becalming and “talking” to the sufferers, many of whom were almost completely shocked out of their minds and reason. Hence their great need for the reassurances that the invisible helpers give. The searches for still-missing loved ones and others were urgently continuing amidst grave bereavement and anxiety. Many of our well known and loved friends and Theosophists were actively present.

High Initiates, with great wisdom and compassion, direct this work, advising helpers to become more especially active on behalf of certain groups and individuals who suffer violent deaths from whatever causes, and all those who have died of shock, agony of mind, body, or both. Assistance is also given to those who, mentally, are unprepared to die due to various psychological causes or from terror resulting from such false religious beliefs as “hell fire” and “eternal damnation for poor sinners”.

*****

Master Polidorus Isurenus

THE VALUE OF CO-MASONRY TO A PERSON AFTER DEATH

Co-Masonry—especially high office therein—is a tremendous, even incalculable, benefit and help in almost every aspect of life here, particularly for the mind, its reasoning and responsiveness to the Ego. As you say, Geoffrey, the “touch of the sword on the crown of the head works wonders, whether or not the candidate knows it”.

The value after death:

1) Philosophy—the meanings and purposes of life and how they are fulfilled.

2) Stability—in differing conditions out of the body on the astral plane and when under strain or stress.

3) Contact with the Angelic Hosts—especially after having been in office, but always after the O’s and E’s which, by the by, are never limited to the E’s, but extended to the individualized devas.

After the First Degree, according to ability and responsiveness, the Craft Mason is gradually introduced to that subject and those beings, especially whilst the body is asleep, consecration having in addition to other benefices awakened the Ego in the mental and astral bodies to both increasing superphysical awareness in general, and the existence of the devas in particular.

Over and above this, of course, is knowledge attained of not only evolution itself, but the Path of hastened progress, or ascent of the famous symbolical “Ladder” up to the “Canopy of Heaven” meaning, in general, Egoic awareness. This includes the knowledge of one’s real Ego—the purpose, evolution, and as much else of the “Waters of Esoteric Knowledge” as possible.

The great benefit of admission to Co-Masonry is receipt of the answers to your Five Questions:

(1)What am I?

(2) Where do I come from?

(3) Why am I here?

(4) Where am I going?

(5) How do I get there?

One of the most important of all opportunities available to students of Theosophy and Co-Masonry is increasingly to transfer and transmute acquired knowledge of doctrines into direct and increasingly rich and deep experience in consciousness—a silent, inward comprehension.

10 July 1978 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

[After a group meeting of young Theosophists in our home:]

Through the presence of yourself, Geoffrey, We are able to obtain contact—and of course more—with the Ego of every single person present.

25 July 1978 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Music, when wholly performed and listened to (apart from the composer), is an entirely impersonal art and absorption within it releases one from all connections with persons and things. One is concerned solely with a principle: music, harmony.

Yoga, likewise, is totally unconnected with persons. The yogi in meditation becomes freed from all distractions and relationships with people, beings, and objects. He is wholly absorbed with the One Principle—spiritual identity with the Spirit-Essence of Cosmoi, Universes, all beings, and all things.

Every Adept has achieved this, so that whilst all Their activities at the objective levels continue with high intensity, deep within them and the mind which conceives and operates them, there exists an “interior Shrine” wherein which—when once established—silence itself is immovable, unshakeable, and undisturbable. Although We are doing all We can in various fields and are as active as possible within and throughout them, one part of Ourselves—not a separate state at all—actually consists of a state of being which can only be described as “stillness in the extreme”. This conception begins to be built as a permanency as the stature of Adeptship is closely approached. Thereafter, it becomes a consciously realized condition and manifestation of one’s Monadic nature, namely, STILLNESS.

*****

Master Polidorus Isurenus

The true mystery of Isis is the mystery of the hidden Divine Life which is the essential soul of all Nature and all substance, the Divine Light which causes matter to become that which it is, the luminous veil through which, from without, the Deity is perceived, and upon which, as on a screen, He becomes manifest The Master the Prince Rakoczy is Hierophant of that greatest of Mysteries as well as Hierophant of the Greater Mysteries which lead man from darkness to the true Light

Consider the three Offices—Queen, Priestess, and Mother of aspiring souls—the World Mother. Meditate upon the mystery of the deific Feminine Principle and its triple function of Queen, Priestess, and Mother of aspiring souls. Then will be discovered the chart and course of life and the duties owed to the Master the Prince, for He, as Head of the Seventh Ray, is Hierophant of the Mysteries of both the Feminine and Masculine Aspects of Hathor-Isis and of Osiris-Horus, of both the devic and the human Hierarchies, the B. and J.[211] respectively.

*****

By a Highly Initiated Disciple of the Master Kuthumi

When speaking of beautiful divine Personages, such as the Madonna, you might perhaps show how Her title “Star of the Sea” refers to the Cosmic and abstract principle about which your Adept Teacher might speak. Thus, the Madonna principle, ideal, and Personage, may find its expression in your talks as it has for so long in your life.

Cruelty in the treatment of women, children, and animals, its evil and sheer ugliness, might prove acceptable to you as an illustration of the opposite of the ideal for which She stands.

You have already drawn Her very near to you by your full response to the unexpected transmission of a task from a former aspirant to Her work, which, of course, was no accident at all, but part of what might be called “the Grand Design”.

2 September 1978

OUR LADY MARY—THE WORLD MOTHER

The Blessed Lady Mary, incarnation of the Maternal Spirit of the Godhead, moved by purest compassion and love, holds the whole of humanity in Her arms and at Her breast, nourishing it with spiritualizing life for the purpose of quickening the evolution of all sentient beings.

The World Mother shares Herself with every mother—human and animal—throughout the periods of the gestation and delivery of her offspring.

Impersonally, She is also present and Herself helps the mother during her labour.

Impersonally, She also is present and helps to bring about the mystical “birth” of the Christ consciousness within the Inner Self of every Initiate when admitted to membership of the Great White Brotherhood.

[Geoffrey sees Our Lady at the Causal level as a very beautiful feminine Being surrounded by forces outraying from Her to produce a specially shaped and formed aura, with colourings of white, gold, rose, and sky blue, shot through and shining beyond with white radiance.]

24 September 1978 - Auckland

Master Serapis Bey of the Brotherhood of Luxor

Your insight into mythology, especially of Greece and Egypt, together with India, and your first offering of the results of your studies to the world, are very greatly appreciated. The world of today needs this knowledge from the world of the past, and you will do well to probe more and more fully (Our help will be available) into the symbolism of the old Egyptian religion.

Yes, We [the Brotherhood of Luxor] suggest and your Teacher [Master Polidorus Isurenus] agrees, that the next volume should be concerned with Egyptian mythology more especially.

You might like to enquire from your London publishing agents whether, in the British Museum or elsewhere, anything like a reasonably complete book or series of books exists illustrating as much as possible of the “field” of Egyptian symbolism.

You do well to warn very seriously against the direct personal application of the symbol of the three serpents—or sometimes two—whenever you refer to the Serpent Fire. Nevertheless, the time has come, is ripe, for various presentations of this one single power in Nature which is of such very great, even supreme, importance.

Of course they (the Egyptians) knew and concealed the real truth concerning this dangerous power, as also the systems of progressive training and Initiations to the highest degree—as was known and followed by you, by the way.

Whilst not wishing to press you and knowing the demands upon you, may We suggest that you continue this extremely valuable subject of mythology—not only because of the interest and value of the teachings revealed by interpreting the rites and symbols, but also as a way of reaching the world with Theosophia itself.

So, brother Geoffrey, whilst producing what will in fact be Volumes II of the angel and music research books, you may also do the same with the myths... for this is one way of reaching the minds and awakening the interest of people who would not otherwise study Theosophy.

The three central subjects thus to be presented are:

— The possibility of spiritual advancement under Adept guidance through successive and continually more potent Initiations.

— The Serpent Fire in all its aspects and symbology—as you are doing.

— As a sufficient number of people are moved by and display the right, true spirit, more definite steps may be taken by Ourselves with your and other aid, to establish the Occult Mysteries as a recognized aspect of civilization. This, as you know, is Our aim, so that the few right-thinking people, worthy women and men, may once again be drawn towards the sacred portals and admitted to successive and advancing Initiatory Rites.

True, Co-Freemasonry is partly performing this function, reviving and making the great Ideal available. Even there, verbalism tends to hold too large a part to the neglect or diminished interest in the occultism which the “words” are planned to reveal.

Your books on this and other aspects of Freemasonry are thus very useful, even though not sufficiently read by those for whom the wonder, beauty, and possible progression to the highest degrees tend to be submerged beneath overconcentration and the demands of ceremonialism for its own sake and the privileges of progression.

Fear not, brother Geoffrey, your life and health are likely to be preserved and continued for work in these most important fields, namely, the existence of the Path, the Path itself, the necessities for progress along it, the position of occult seniors, and—one might also say above all—the awakening within the brain-mind of realization and experience of these sublime verities.

We know full well that you are already working up to and even beyond your available energy and therefore suggest that you keep your eyes open for the formation of a group of literary helpers who will take as much as possible of the sheer labour in literature from your hands. Some of them exist and only await calling into collaboration in addition to your excellent first volunteer and most excellent illustrator.

So, not only in your prophesied future life, but before this present life closes, proceed as far as you can with the task of presenting what really is the Ancient Mysteries in modern days. ‘

9 October 1978 - Onerahi, Whangarei, Northland

THE ARCHANGEL BETHELDA

The whole central form shines with a pure white radiance. There is discernible the suggestion of an angelic and so partly humanlike form with an extra concentration of light where the head would be, and an indication of the two eyes, chin, neck—or rather where these would be in a human being. Thereafter, the form widens out on either side as for shoulders. No more “shape” appears, but only an added intensity of white light shining down far below where feet would normally be.

The heart chakra contains a wondrous blend of violet and light green, also illumined from within the centre by rays of white light. These colours appear to be concentric with the gold on the outside next to the white radiance, then violet, vividly glowing, then delicate but living, pale grass green, whilst both around and within the very centre the blue of the sky above shines forth. These colours change position occasionally according to the state of consciousness being used, especially when relating towards formal thought.

The outshining white rays from the centre of the chakra pour out in eight directions: vertical (above head and below feet), horizontal (from both sides), and then at equal distances between all four angles. The throat chakra is similar but much smaller, with different colours—rose, gold, and blue, with the blue predominating.

From the level where the eyes would be, there are both vertical and upward slanting radiations passing through the upper head itself and into the surrounding space. There again, the colour green is very noticeable (soft, grass green), with a heart of gold deep in the centre of the head, this being at the core of the crown chakra. Extending outwards is a pale violet radiance, also intermingled with the colour of grass green. The suggestion of interior movement is also very noticeable, and can be described as a spinning motion, anti-clockwise, as seen from the front. Occasionally, one colour shines throughout the aura more brilliantly than the others.

The shoulders, the back of neck and head, and the whole of the crown are united in an uprush of tremendous power in which I perceive a distinct suggestion of fire. Within this I discern an upward spirally moving current of fiery power. Yes, ‘this is Kundalini Shakti itself, the triple current rising far above the crown of the head, widening out as it does so.

Above the head, to a considerable height, at the centre of the upward flow of white and otherwise coloured forces, there appears in almost solid state (not really so, of course) an upright pillar shaped into a symbol which may be found above the heads of Egyptian pictures. There are also two upward streaming currents, one on either side of the central uprush, also reminiscent of some Egyptian pictures or statues, but, of course, force-built. The head-dresses of the Egyptian goddesses may usefully be studied from this point of view, in which they are not only symbolic or even picturesque, but pictorially portraying what I have just been describing.

Beyond this wondrous vehicle of power and thought, there radiate vast upward and outward flowing streams of energy which change in colour, doubtless according to successive states of consciousness. I now begin to perceive the actual individuality of the great Archangel at levels of form-free thought and purest wisdom. Here the communications are received both by my Inner Self and the formal mind, for it is at these levels that, to my very great privilege, the intercommunion was first established in Sheepscombe and is now resumed. Deeply interior phases of Archangelic Being exist within this upward and outward flowing shoulder-head-crown-stream. Presumably, it is at these levels beyond my range that the Teacher, Bethelda, normally abides.

At this point, the Blessed Lady Mary becomes visible before me in all Her wondrous blue and, as it were, reaches out and touches my head as if to warn and protect me from brain-fatigue.

9 October 1978 - Onerahi, Whangarei, Northland

The Archangel Bethelda

THE WORLD MOTHER PRINCIPLE AND THE ANGELIC HOSTS

I will instruct you concerning the Universal Kundalini which, in addition to following channels in bodies, is present as an Atmic-Manasic stimulating power throughout all Nature at all levels. It is the manifestation or incarnation of the feminine generative interior “faculty” of the Logos, Second Aspect—yes, feminine if you wish, though of course far beyond such divisions, being arupa in this universal aspect of its expression.

The World Mother in Universal Principle and as portrayed and named in world religions is a personification and accentuated manifestation of this aspect and so, like the other two, very sacred indeed. She is to be revered most deeply and humbly, wondrous One as She is and not only in religious personifications as a celestial Personage, but as a universally present and active Principle and power which participates in the triple creative Kundalini-manifestation of the Logos with which She is ever identified, AT ONE, indeed. That is why personalized presentations are made available to mankind as a means of providing, when rightly worshipped, entries into the Logoic and impersonal World Mother aspect of the Logos.

Helpful it could be if as many as possible of those who find themselves naturally adoring the World Mother, permitted their minds to be enlarged beyond the named form and being and worshipped fully, becoming at one with this aspect of Deity. This is possible because all Logoic powers, principles, and functions are built into both the universal Life-Principle and the arupa vehicles of men and women. Therefore, She can be reached both in Her more personal aspects and as a Principle in the Logos, Nature, and man.

Because of this Presence in the arupa vehicles and its influence upon mind, heart, and prayer, the World Mother idea and worship is of great value, especially to those who at first find it impossible to conceive of the threefold Logos Principle within and at the heart of all Nature. That is why all successful descriptions of Her and Her conduct, and paintings of Her imagined form in the greatest possible beauty, are helpful. Encourage this, Geoffrey, for it is not sufficiently explained, devotion being a rather vague concept.

[The World Mother Herself speaks. She says, “Try and reduce the quite natural tendency, and so limitation, to think of the personal Being alone and not the Universal Principle.” Bethelda continues:]

Throughout the ages, Adept and Archangelic Teachers have placed before—and even caused to be built within—the human mind the concept and therefore the worship of a Feminine Aspect of Deity. One purpose for this teaching is to inspire devotion leading to the adoption of the concept of a perfect Divine Woman. The states of consciousness brought about in those who thus respond inwardly can grow towards the more abstract Feminine Principle in Nature. This principle pervades all creation from the mineral of the dense world to the formless aspects of Solar Systems, Universes, and Cosmoi. This journey in consciousness is part of the evolutionary procedure and will naturally take place in the course of human evolution.

In addition, the continuing emotions and thoughts of devotion to a World Mother are also valuable if only because they turn attention towards the Divine and withdraw it from the limitations of purely (and particularly excessive) personal interests.

Hence, throughout such records as now remain of the successive religions followed by the humanity of this planet, the idea of a vastly superior, enlightened, and compassionately moved Divine Being has been presented. Included are Kwan Yin, Kwannon, Uma, Mut, Isis, Hathor, Nephthys, Hera, Athena, and the Christian Virgin Mary.

My reference in The Brotherhood of Angels and of Men, your discovery recorded in The Miracle of Birth, and in any other literature, may all be regarded as similarly designed, namely to evoke and develop the faculty of devotion and adoration with their invaluable concomitant of selflessness. In addition, the Universal Maternal Principle awaits discovery within the human mind-heart, thus opened to its reception.

The presentations to the human mind throughout the ages, of the existence of the Angelic Hosts and their functions and places in cosmic, universal, planetary, and human nature have had similar purposes. In this case, however, the assistance is designed to free the human mind from the personalization of Deity and Divine Powers and Presences to a far more universal concept, since the teaching in general has referred to angels as often mysteriously representative of the Godhead itself. Hence the meaning of the word “angels” as “messengers”.

The introduction of this idea—of the Elohim, for example—was also made and intended to hasten the development not only of the Inner Selves of men and women, but more especially of their minds. For, again, angels are regarded as messengers from on high and expressions of the healing and guardianship principles of divine compassion. Thus, the idea of the existence of the Angelic Hosts has long been presented with the identical purpose of developing and expanding, from the personal to the impersonal, the rupa to the arupa powers of human thought and understanding.

[Master Polidorus Isurenus now comments:]

Hence, Geoffrey, the introduction to you from young manhood of the fairies, leading to our association as indicated in The Kingdom of the Gods. The whole purpose, be it remembered, is not so much to awaken concepts of a personal angel attached to or working with oneself, as to lead to belief in and study of the existence of the Devic Hierarchy and its functions. Make this clear in your introduction to the second volume,[212] showing why an intelligent person should pay attention to such apparently unreal beings. Our next theme together will lead towards a further presentation of the ideas in The Brotherhood of Angels and of Men and The Angelic Hosts, including the value of collaboration by man, even with invisible beings. Request from your American artist, if she will give it, a description of her experience with the gnome and of any others through which she has passed.

You might try to collect as many instances as possible of such contacts as you have recently done most reverently concerning Her gracious Majesty, the World Mother, of Whom—particularly inspired—you spoke so beautifully after your lecture the other evening [at H.P.B. Lodge of the T.S., Auckland, New Zealand],

15 October 1978 - Onerahi, Whangarei

Geoffrey had been receiving teaching from the Archangel Bethelda, and was slowly returning from Causal consciousness to normal awareness. He said to me, “When I am receiving from Bethelda, I am out in the ‘ocean’ of the arupa worlds. When I cease, I must return and ‘tie up to the jetty’ of the rupa worlds. This confinement of consciousness after experience in the abstract world wherein Bethelda abides into the almost unbearable limitations of purely mental concepts, often demands the greatest effort. The terrific cosmic energy with which I am filled could, in someone who was not experienced in this consciousness or held there by angelic aid, upset mental ^balance, so intense is the concentrated power of the thought-stream. If there is not sufficient control exercised, and conditions surrounding the conscious yogi-seer during the process and afterwards are not harmonious, one could easily disintegrate.

“I began my mental intercourse with the Archangel Bethelda in the remains of a beech forest in England, in peace and utter stillness, vitally necessary for the opening of the cosmic, arupa consciousness, and for the protection of the brain during its closing and the return to bodily, brain awareness. For the safe opening up of arupa consciousness and the commencement of the receipt of teaching from the great Archangel, the peace and quiet seclusion of this forest temple were absolutely necessary. I was also living in a somewhat remote village in the Cotswold district of Gloucestershire, withdrawn from the world.”

Master Polidorus Isurenus (Who was present during the communication) commented: “Although Planetary Schemes, Chains, Rounds, Globes, and Races are passed through by the evolving Life-Essence and Monads, to the Solar Logos and the Directors of those phases—strange though this will seem to you—time is virtually without significance.” Bethelda said, “Time is not and we work together where space is without significance. On the Causal plane space does not exist.” Geoffrey adds, “There is no geography at this level.”

20 October 1978 - Auckland

Master Morya

A MESSAGE TO MANKIND

STOP rushing to mutual laser-neutronic annihilation.

STOP alcohol, harmful drugs, cruelty involving torture of man and beast, and every other form of self-degradation.

STOP all killing for personal gratification and material gain.

COMPASSION for all that lives and suffers must become the keynote of human life on earth, the alternative being continually increasing slaughter of animals and human beings.

LOVE and desire to help, not hate and a desire to hurt, alone can save mankind and must become the ruling principle, an essential to urgently needed (or dangerously needed) world peace. True, appeals are being made by many groups and individuals, yet not only are these proving ineffective, but the evil itself is steadily increasing. Therefore, in addition to such appeals which should increase, individuals are needed who have themselves awakened from, evolved out of, the possibility of participation in such wickedness and set their whole souls, hearts, and minds upon the ideal of entering upon the Path of Swift Unfoldment with the motive of added service—without the slightest thought of self-gain—that accompanies each step forward that is taken upon the Ancient Path.

5 November 1978 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

ACQUIRED CAPACITIES AND THE AKASHA

(A Teaching for Aspirants)

The effective essence of all you have ever learned is yours forever and can never be lost, for it is registered, indelibly “imprinted” upon and stored within both the Akashic Record of your Egoic existence from the moment of individualization, and upon the very atoms of the Causal body itself. The knack or gift of doing everything you have learned to do is yours forever, can never be lost, and will become manifest within and through you whenever the suitable situation exists, your karma permits, and it is dharmically suitable for expression.

Admittedly, you have to relearn your total education for the most part, every life. Nevertheless, the facility so to learn and express effectively can never be lost and will manifest itself life after life... In ordinary language, these will be “natural” to you, will be the gifts that no one and nothing can ever take away from you. Almost all the faculties and tendencies towards efficiency acquired in former lives are always available in every successive incarnation.

The only problem is whether your karma in any given direction is, favourable or unfavourable. If you always use your faculties for the benefit of others and continually try more and more effectively to do so then no adverse karma will keep back from you in your next life every useful capacity that you have ever acquired. In this sense, you see, a certain “longevity” is granted to everybody, for the Ego in the Causal body neither dies before Adeptship nor loses one fraction of acquired capacity.

November-December 1978 - Auckland

CLAIRVOYANCE

[A doctor and a scientist were questioning Geoffrey after a research session into the atomic structure of matter.]

Question: How can you describe a minute particle in detail when it is continually travelling at an extreme speed?

Answer: The information is established in die intellectual region of Causal, or Egoic, consciousness. Therefore such knowledge can always be continuously maintained, studied, and so described. Indeed, all my research into physics is carried out by a combination of the following: Kundalini, the ajna chakram, the observing mind-brain, and the intellectual aspect of Causal consciousness which is timeless and spaceless, and wherein all results are preserved. In consequence, they can be consciously and in detail re-examined and described with the collaboration of the Ego itself, as if motionless.

About December 1978 - Auckland

Master Kuthumi

INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING THE FORTHCOMING CONVENTION OF 1978-79—THE MASTERS

Indicate—as you intend—Our continued existence and interest in the Theosophical Society and, if time, touch on the fact that the possibility of becoming one of Our disciples still exists and, if necessary and wise, repeat as the method the permissible “Golden Stairs” by H.P.B.

Include in your talk the visit to Colonel Olcott in New York and the leaving behind of the turban. This story might be helpful.

A great co-operatively active Brotherhood of Masters of the Wisdom does definitely exist upon our earth, whilst over it presides its great “Head”, reverently referred to as the Great Lord of the World, amongst other titles. Then, if there is time, just state the major Adeptic Centres, including Luxor, and those of Hungary, Tibet, and the Brotherhood of Yucatan.

THE GOLDEN STAIRS

H.P. Blavatsky

A clean life, an open mind, a pure heart, an eager intellect, an unveiled spiritual perception, a brotherliness for one’s co-disciple, a readiness to give and receive advice and instruction, a loyal sense of duty to the Teacher, a willing obedience to the behests of TRUTH, once we have placed our confidence in and believe that Teacher to be in possession of it; a courageous endurance of personal injustice, a brave declaration of principles, a valiant defence of those who are unjustly attacked, and a constant eye to the ideal of human progression and perfection which the Secret Science depicts: these are the golden stairs up the steps of which the learner may climb to the Temple of Divine Wisdom.

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Such, we learn, is the answer to the question, “How may the entrance to the Temple of the Mysteries be found?” It is to be ready, deeply ready to help your fellow human beings to develop the Paramitas, tread the Noble Eightfold Path, and mount the “Golden Stairs”. To take even the first step may bring one to the door, namely to give of oneself to serve others; develop dana (charity to others); think rightly; live a clean life; and even these first steps sincerely taken will bring one to that door which will not only be found but prove to be open with the Guardian awaiting you within. Silent and motionless, He may then regard you, but once you voluntarily self-moved, cross the threshold, He will take you by the hand. Then, all the other Steps will be taken, the Telestrion is discovered and the Anaktoron not only found but entered and spiritual illumination attained.

15 December 1978 Auckland

Master Morya

[After a knock in the Shrine]

THE PATH TO DISCIPLESHIP

The Path to Discipleship is in actuality a “stairway”. The disciple-to-be mounts this entrance step by step and ultimately arrives at the “door” of the Master’s “house” and “home”. This is not a building but a state of awareness consisting chiefly of uttermost selflessness, resultant happiness, mounting on occasion to bliss, and the ability to solve all problems instinctually, as it were, and to know all truth from the most mundane—the atom—to the most sublime: the Supreme Source of all, the Godhead without and within him (One Being).

The disciple, of course, enters this Presence very gradually and guardedly—unless acting unwisely—with the Master watching as each stair is mounted, sometimes joyously and with relative ease, and sometimes with restrictions and high endeavour. Each mounting, each successive step brings its own interior reward, chiefly in terms of participating in the Master’s state of consciousness. This includes reductions—step by step—of the illusion of separateness and experience of the truth of Unity. Eventually, as Adeptship is approached and mounted, the totality of one single life in every separate form is fully known. Thus, Jesus says, “I and my Father are one.”[213]

This wondrous Path, this “stairway”, is ever present and always available to the individual who instinctually believes in its existence and unyieldingly resolves to find and ascend it to the “heights”—realized in unbreakable oneness with all else that exists, and so, of course, with all sentient creatures and beings.

On the summit—mystically, though very effectively—stands a “Caller”, or embodied “Power”, an incarnate “Truth revealer” who (or which) calls perpetually to all human beings but is heard in this epoch by only a few. The message includes the call: “Mount these stairs, for on the summit which is attainable by you exists indestructible peace of heart and mind, a serenity that nothing on earth below can ever destroy.” Climb then, for the banisters exist to which you may turn whenever aid is needed, especially when you sense the danger of falling into the depths below or lack of the strength needed to reach the heights. Since the “Caller” is ever there and ever “calling”, no one attempts the great ascent in loneliness, the required help being ever available.

One warning is included in “the call”. It tells of one danger from which the whole undertaking may fail if only temporarily. This danger is in the one word: selfishness, meaning a personal desire to benefit in some aspect of human life from success. Therefore, says the “call” even at the very first step—before it is taken, in fact—eliminate wholly and completely every trace of desire for personal gain of any kind.

Fill your whole being, every atom of your heart and your mind with ONE idea, ONE ideal, the welfare of ALL that exists and, of course, especially of all that can and does ever suffer. This is the great safeguard, the one salvation by means of which alone the great interior ascent may successfully be made. Failures, however, there may be, but all are temporary, since the very Soul of the would-be climber knows full well that all sense of selfhood is an illusion and all desire for self-gain is born of blindness, whilst the great goal itself may be described as ALL ONENESS.

Fortunately, no normal fall is irrevocable. Recovery and renewed aspiration for the summit are always attainable, likely even to “force” themselves upon the climber who thereafter outgrows all selfishness and for whom the virtue of selflessness is not assumed but—all important—born from within.

Such, then, in other language and other words, are the age-old “Golden Stairs”. One noble task, it may be said in conclusion, one ideal activity may be undertaken, and this is to seek for, find, and hold out a helping hand to others in whom may also be born the yearning for the heights. This is the surest “banister” of all, the unbreakable and immovable support, with a hold on which success in the great inborn endeavour is assured. In the words of the great Teacher of the New Testament: “Become fishers of men.”

24 December 1978 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

The past doesn’t matter at all. The past is without significance. It must be forgotten. We have all had past lives as human beings when we acted accordingly—namely as men and women. Only the Adept when His degree is fully attained is perfect in conduct and without blemish in motive. Overcome errors but do not dwell upon them. “What a man thinks on he becomes”—man, here, meaning mankind. There is no benefit whatever in dwelling in thought upon the past. The moment a memory begins to draw near turn immediately to the fulfilment of the vow: “to become a Buddha as quickly as possible for the benefit of all that exists”.

The Adept does not think less of a person at all because of his past, and this is because He knows his future as a Buddha-in-the-becoming. The greatest error, however, is the deliberate self-chosen betrayal of the ideal of the occult life both in thought and in conduct. Betrayal is perhaps the worst of all errors and, unfortunately, it is visible all around you. One reason for this appraisement is that betrayal is not a sudden and human “sin” alone, but unfortunately it is carefully and continually plotted in the mind beforehand. The will to attain Adeptship as quickly as possible for the sake of others is both the highest ideal and the noblest thought. Although it appears to pertain to oneself, actually, as the wording demonstrates, it is entirely dedicated to the welfare of others, spiritual, intellectual, and physical. This vow, however, is not something that can be taught and sincerely accepted by others from without as it were. Only as it is born and gestated within the “womb of the heart” does it become fulfilled in all its glory.

30 December 1978 - Auckland

Master Kuthumi

This concerns the advice you are asked to give both to... and to... [another senior member of the T.S.]. If you can arrange a quiet pause of some ten minutes during the interview, then I will look more closely and advise. If not, your own experience is sufficient, adequate indeed.

In both cases, and with many other active members in our Society, the need exists to deepen their inner experience of the reality of the teachings of Theosophy, so that they are really true and known to be, so far as is possible to a lecturer. A certain personal conviction then becomes apparent without the necessity for any claim being made.

It is this, the interior experience and the developing mystical sense which are so important, if only because they take the mind of the worker past mere mental knowledge, however necessary, into an increasing measure of certainty of the Truth which is being taught.

This, of course, is also very important to the workers themselves, and the development of their own inner lives and consciousness. Thus, although the spirit is good and the readiness to work exhibited, it can all be largely, if not entirely, at the mental level, and it is this which needs, in both cases referred to, to be illumined by an interior dawning of intuitive perception or Buddhic consciousness. Actually, the offices are extremely important from this point of view because they both offer opportunities and evoke the aspiration to attain to the mystic experience of oneness.

Therefore, let us advise both... to practise yoga regularly and, if you can, with Our help, suggest methods such as The Yoga of Light or one or more of the seven yogas according to temperament Thus can be attained a greatly needed deepening of intellectual life to increasingly include Buddhic consciousness. They live and work far too much in and from their formal minds and not enough from the Inner Self which has difficulty in reaching them. One lack is that neither of them has really practised total quietude of mind and receptivity.

In other words, they need to learn to meditate for the diminution and eventual exclusion of self-interest and the desire to shine. Despite all this, they have for a long period rendered magnificent service, and We hope therefore that they can now enter what might be called a deeper phase of their lives. This is Our message for them both; they greatly need Our help.

You might usefully say, also, that the measure or depth of response received from audiences is very largely dependent upon the depth of one’s own interior response to and intuitive recognition as truth of the teachings given—very important

Late 1978 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

THE ATMIC ADEPT

Atma is the essential principle in all human beings, unknown by the vast majority. Every disciple is an Atmic disciple (one in whom the Atmic Principle is awake and increasingly active). It begins to be known by the pupil as ardent aspiration develops into inward strength within an accepted disciple, and in an Initiate begins to be the dominant influence.

The future for everyone is effective Atmic consciousness and rule, and for those on the Path this interior influence gradually becomes more and more realized and experienced, inspiring one to develop one’s own Atmic will and progress to become a conscious Atmic disciple of the Master—one with Him at that level, and of course at the preceding ones.

More and more thought and attention and expression might well be given to the Atma, which is one’s Power Self. Then one becomes more like—and so nearer to—the Atmic Adept

*****

Master Morya

SINCERITY

(Advice for Aspirants)

In meditation and the meditative life, always genuinely live up to the chosen yogic affirmation. Never first make it and then deny it in a personally chosen opposite way of life. If this is not done, then instead of being an honest yogi, you will be a charlatan.

Better not to state it at all than to inwardly affirm an ideal and then outwardly deny it in the practice of daily life, or to mantrically affirm a yogic truth and then wholly deny it. In other words, be honest, true, and sincere through and through. This is the assurance of success, not only in yoga but in attaining to and maintaining Discipleship. If in yoga you make an affirmation, then thoroughly mean it

Although not generally known and taught, sincerity is one of the great—even the greatest—necessities for success in the yoga life! However weak one may be in various forms of meditation, at least be wholly sincere in yogic intention and affirmation...

Always live out as fully as possible in your outward daily life everything which you affirm in your inward life.

1979

1979

Geoffrey says, “For years and years of my life I have been convinced of the value of lying down or relaxing in apparent inactivity; for so very often, illuminating ideas and personal (Adeptic) guidances have been received whilst I had given myself over to resting.”

*****

Master Polidorus Isurenus

SPIRITUAL OPPORTUNITY

The greatest benefit that can ever be afforded an individual, and especially an aspirant to the spiritual life, is OPPORTUNITY. The most valuable response is wise and effective acceptance.

*****

Master Polidorus Isurenus

THE CHANTED WORD “AUM”

The chanted word, Aum, is an affirmation of the presence within and throughout the Universe of the spiritual Life-Essence; and that the very same spiritual Life-Essence, therefore, exists within oneself.

In consequence, these are not two separate spiritual Life-Essences, but ONE SPIRITUAL LIFE-ESSENCE. “I am That, That am I.”

*****

The Solar Logos is not someone else!

*****

Master Morya

Do not only meditate at times on Parabrahman, but live there forever.

*****

Master Kuthumi

Every Initiate of the Greater Mysteries belongs to Us all.

4 January 1979 - Auckland

Master Kuthumi

Your researches will be assisted both into the universal principle of the Devic Hierarchy and the individual devas. You are advised to keep both of these in mind, the former (the principle) being susceptible to research within your room, though the latter, at least at first, depends upon contacts in relationship with the mountains themselves.

The occult contributions you are now able to make for the Society’s offerings to the world must be continued as long as possible. Yes, Geoffrey, I have come back more fully and more consciously for you and your life during this period of its continuance, your Master being otherwise engaged for the time being, though ever consciously in touch with you.

5 January 1979 - Auckland

Master Nylghara (a great Buddhist Adept)

I have come only briefly to suggest—with other Masters—that the healing list could usefully be considered at leisure and, in some cases only, the names of those sick ones who have received healing for a long period may be removed, especially if just for the time being. Personally, I am privileged to respond with My Brothers to your very potent Invocations. I deeply appreciate your heartfelt concern for those whom, with Our aid and that of the Angelic Hosts, you so wonderfully help and heal.... I will always tap on your chest-of-drawers or direct a stream of energy onto the right side of your head.

Your combination of concentrated literary work and recreation is very valuable, not only for our work, but for the good health and well-being of both of you—very important, as always.

If you should have an especially urgent “case”, Geoffrey, at any time, do not hesitate to call personally upon Me mentally...This will, of course, in no sense exclude the more universal Adeptic aids which your “patients” are privileged to receive.

Do not, I suggest, reduce Invocations on behalf of the world, world affairs, and world officials.

*****

THE MASTER NYLGHARA

Whilst recently considering such information as we have concerning former lives and closer approaches to the occult life, a very highly evolved “Presence” was observed by Geoffrey. He was a tall and slender Adept, a Master of the Wisdom, Who appeared to be wearing the saffron robe of the Buddhist monk.

On various occasions this great One continued to be with us and to help by participation in such work as we were engaged upon, and also in our seeking for increased knowledge and understanding of Theosophia in general.

As this privilege continued and Geoffrey was meditatively communing with Him, He revealed to us His Adept Name—“Nylghara”. Somewhat later, He dictated some of the purposes for which His visits had begun and continued. These included the need for assistance even in our physical lives and health, and more especially the gaining of further knowledge upon subjects which we were studying, as in the new book on yoga, for example.

Geoffrey’s additional responsibilities were also one of the reasons for His extremely helpful and often near Presence.

After speaking with him, the Master Nylghara then quickly withdrewas if vertically upwards to great heights in the inner worlds. As He did so He said to Geoffrey, “I must leave now as I am called on for other tasks.”

9 January 1979 - Mt Ngauruhoe, Tongariro National Park

(In front of the slightly smoking volcano)

THE TRANSMISSION OF LOGOIC POWER IN EVOLUTIONARY PROCESSES

[While studying at a holiday resort, and carrying out occult research into the appearance and activity of the great devas of the active volcano in the North Island of New Zealand, Mt Ngauruhoe:]

Very high above the mountain is a great Deva-Raja, the Deva-King of this area. The stature is immeasurable, the central suggestion of a form being at least 20 feet tall with the upward and outward flowing radiance streaming out at least half a mile all around. As I observe, these radiations are seen to be arranged chiefly on either side, behind, and far above. The colouring is extremely fine but distinct, with gold as the central colour of the form, green all about the region from heart to “chin”, and roseate colours within and outraying from the head.

A white Atmic shaft glows, from far above the radiance, completely through and as the centre of the form, and down into the centre of the crater, descending further towards the depths of the earth.

This is perhaps one of the greatest Nature devas I have ever observed. It graciously acknowledges our presence and researches, and I receive offerings of guidance on suitable occasions, the whole investigation being very important indeed.

My thought is carried away from observations of the figure itself and down into the depths where the great fire is raging, from which the eruptions occur.

The host of fire elementals and devas are extremely active at and surrounding this fire centre which, I suggest, has its origin very much further down towards the centre of the planet.

Their activities keep the more solid elements from imprisonment in their solidity and bring about in their very etheric and physical natures continually increasing mobility, plasticity, and responsiveness to interior and external forces. This, I perceive, is part of the work of the Hierarchies of devas employed in the stimulation and quickening of the evolutionary developments of earth and water more particularly. The reason for their presence, continuing activities, and the receipt by their surroundings of their forces, is to render the matter of the planet more and more responsive to the evolution-quickening potencies rained down upon it and into it by members of the Devic Hierarchy ordained to these duties. Whilst this occurs everywhere, it naturally becomes more concentrated, and so visible, in mountains and mountain ranges. Volcanoes, on the other hand, also receive from the interior fire the uprushing fiery energies and flames, thus fulfilling the same dual function.

[Master Polidorus Isurenus comments: “Yes, this which you are observing is the true Hephaestus Principle…”[214]]

Where the uprising fire and flames actually scorch the rock and other elements the stimulating effect is greater, though the radiant auras of the fire devas and their salamander servants reach widely out from the “tunnel” up which the flames rise. Indeed, in the case I am observing, the astro-mental flaming aura is visible right throughout the mountain and for at least one mile beyond.

Associated with the crater at the region from which the eruptions emanate is a second, less advanced deva. It resembles a gigantic deva-human form, remarkably materialized compared with most other devas I have seen, and built of streaming energies, as in all cases. This being, under the direction of the Deva-Raja, is conveying forces and carrying out activities throughout the upper portions of the mountain from about halfway between the “live ground” and the summit. Here, one is more definitely in the presence of a veritable Hephaestus, for the deva is not stationary in relation to space as so many lofty mountain gods appear to be. This “crater-deva” turns from side to side and sometimes rotates, emanating the forces into the mountain through its chakras, especially the throat, solar plexus and where the “feet” would be.

From the Solar Logos, through subordinate Beings of interspace and the Logos of the earth—all a manifestation of the One Alone—there is continually being projected or discharged the essential energies (evolution-hastening and inertia- or hardness-reducing) onto the surface of the planet. There, these forces pass through the members of the Devic Hierarchy, level by level, using their chakras and auras as “machines” or “fans-for-fire”, through which the Logoic forces are perpetually being DRIVEN.

At this level, the mountain in front of me is seen as but one of a very great number in which these Logoic activities are being carried out on behalf of the substance of the globe and the evolving life within it. The Logoic centre was visualized, however imperfectly, as a vast, glowing, chiefly golden but also multi-coloured sphere, filled or “ruled” by the Solar Logos.

All human beings, I am allowed to feel assured, are recipients of similar beneficial influences, especially whilst in incarnation and more immediately afterwards. At the Causal level, the Ego of man—at varying degrees of effectiveness according to evolutionary stature—is a kind of substation for the transmission of these Logoic powers.

[Bethelda then speaks to Geoffrey:]

Bethelda

Just as hastened evolution is brought about in volcanoes and all other regions where physical matter is submitted to the element of fire, so also, the human concept of the Path includes the application by Seniors of spiritual stimuli upon juniors. Thus, whether realized or not, every single person who has made progress upon the Path, however slight, by the very Presence and influence of his Master and indeed the Brotherhood, plays upon and stimulates those who have not yet so attained. Naturally, the more advanced the disciple or Initiate, the greater is the degree of potential quickening applied. This process may, in part only, be named “channelship”, a very important procedure, an ideal which is almost forgotten and neglected since Leadbeater days when it was always kept to the fore. Geoffrey, strange though this may seem to you, even the evolution of the devas of various Orders who respond to your Invocations is similarly quickened, and they are rendered more informed concerning the possibilities of angelic co-operation, at least with human idealists, whether occultists or not

So you see, this hastening of unfoldment, and in aspirants entry upon the Path, together with every true advancement, are all intimately associated with the divine purpose of Logoi and Their Hierarchies: namely’ to free consciousness from restrictions—hardness, for example—whether of matter or hearts, enabling the evolution-quickening process to be more effectively fulfilled on behalf of the indwelling life.

Every genuine occultist and, of course, every disciple and Initiate may, with due humility, be regarded as a “partner” of the Logos.

14 January 1979 - Central North Island

On returning to rest after studying the Mt Ngauruhoe deva, Geoffrey realized how wonderful was his privilege and that he wished to express his gratitude at having been consciously admitted to so great a presence. The great angel said to him, “You are welcome amongst us; for you are a brother of the Fire...The association will never be obliterated, but always active and available.”

24 January 1979 - 17 Belvedere Street, Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

CAUSE AND EFFECT—KARMA

Even Our power and Our loving regard for sufferers do not necessarily either enable or permit Us to intrude upon the onward flow of the karmic tide. We cannot actually prevent its outworking, but We can temper and modify some of the results, especially with regard to selected means (of treatment). This, We are now engaged upon in response to the request of Our colleague. Whatever the result, karmically it will be for the best

27 January 1979 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

... Your plan to send the “Judas Iscariot Error”^{^[215]} to several Theosophical Society magazines is a very good one. Place it as widely as you can, even though with different titles. Of course, the church magazines will receive it, but also those of certain Sections, especially those of Australia and India.

We leave you to decide concerning The Theosophist, particularly; however, it could very well appear in the proposed new youth magazine, Phoenix Arising. This is regarded as very important by the Master Kuthumi. Wide publicity willbe valuable, including The Morning Star. We will be with you through this year, especially with the young people.

3 February 1979

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Look at interpretations of the “Tree” (in various forms and myths) and where adequate and appropriate add to the Hesperides story in which trees and an orchard are mentioned... I am prepared to assist when, together, you again read over the Eleventh Labour. There may well be suitable places for interesting and quite pointed additions.

20 February 1979

Master Polidorus Isurenus

CONCERNING THE LABOURS OF HERACLES

As usual, in the interpretation of allegory, each of the people included in the story may actually personify a characteristic of one and the same person. Thus viewed, Eurystheus represents the inner, spiritual Self from within which is exerted upon the mortal man the aspiration to become free of human limitations and attain to superhuman degrees of development. Every one of the Argonauts and beings in the Labours of Heracles—as in all other truly inspired myths—represents and displays by conduct an aspect of each and every human being from the innermost spiritual Self (the god Zeus and the goddess Hera) to the most unheroic of the persons or beings included in the story. Every allegory, whether scriptural or mythological, portrays in symbol the principle of man, its chief characteristics, means whereby success and failure come about, including the interior powers of resistless will among others and the Kundalini Shakti in all its phases of unfoldment, use, and misuse.

Then, if feasible, and not upsetting the book unduly, in brackets or as footnotes, state the interior principle personified. Daedalus, for example, represents the Higher Manas, with its spiritual associations (ability to fly to heights) whilst Icarus represents the formal mind with its weakness and pride.

In due course, let us go through certain of the truly inspired myths, and just name the principles of man and the human characteristics which each personality represents. We might even make a list and then draw upon it as would seem desirable.

8 March 1979

Master Polidorus Isurenus

YOGA

The necessities of yoga are:

I Existing obligations must be fulfilled, thereby assuring an atmosphere of harmony in the home where one lives with others.

II Deepening aspiration, mounting to yearning to attain to the goal of yoga: realized identity with the spiritual presence and life in all that exists.

III Regularity of meditation.

IV Privacy.

V Relaxation in suitable posture.

VI Mental and even verbal repetition of the foim of yoga being used.

VII Before closing the meditation, repeat with very strong intent and determination the ideal which you have set for yourself, affirming that it will be faithfully lived out in daily life.

VIII After meditation, preserve at least a short time for stillness.

IX Resolve to practise the ideals throughout daily life. Moments and even minutes of “self-recollection” will help in the fulfilment of this determination.

X In life, try always to be harmonious and a harmonizer.

XI Always encourage people. Never demean them. Never hurt anyone, mentally, emotionally, verbally, or by physical action.

Thus you will be a true yogi and not only a yogi when practising yoga, a great necessity. Remember that the true aspirant is never really alone but becomes increasingly under the observation of a Teacher. This relationship can deepen into Discipleship. Such is the way of life of a true yogi, female or male, rich or poor, young or old.

12 March 1979 - Auckland

The Brotherhood of Luxor

[After the usual tap inside the Shrine]

GEOFFREY’S NINETY-THIRD BIRTHDAY MESSAGE FROM THE BROTHERHOOD OF LUXOR

The Members of the Brotherhood of Luxor send you Their cordial and fraternal greetings on this morning of your ninety-third birthday, in completely harmonious collaboration with Ourselves.

We are fully aware of your address to the young people^{^[216]} last evening and reference to Ourselves. There could hardly be a more perfectly chosen subject for a one-year youth group study than the subject you have chosen – Ourselves.

25 March 1979

This morning, early, after Geoffrey’s meditative period, he turned to me with glowing face and radiant expression and handed me this statement in his writing, saying to me, “Put this somewhere.” I looked at his glowing face and the light in his eyes and felt his life-activity and total dedication to the blessed Masters and Their Work. Here is the consecrated life-intent uttered by Geoffrey:

“The Radiant Splendour of the Inner Consciousness of the Adept: To this we aspire.”

25 March 1979 - Auckland

THE ELIXIR OF LIFE

Geoffrey finds himself for the last year or so increasingly meditating upon something which might be called “The Elixir of Life”. This, he can only describe thus far as a very highly “electrically” chained force or energy gradually emanating from the Atma within or above and like a white or colourless, extremely dynamic power which increasingly seems to be pervading chiefly his thought but also his physical body.

The term “Atmic Adept”[217] given to Geoffrey by his Master would seem to have awakened his attention to the reality of this strange “youth- or at least body-preserving” spiritual power. Geoffrey realizes that a very gradual process is going on in him. It causes him, when mentally still, to visualize the supposed Atmic Elixir of Life flowing over and into him, especially his head and face, as if intending to preserve the present state of health and appearance.

Geoffrey finds himself thinking of the process of individualizing from the animal into the human, which produces a Causal vehicle available to the Inner Self, and suggests that, at a later stage, something similar may occur at the Atmic level. In consequence, the unindividualized, general Atmic power of the Monad-Ego would seem to become, or be in the process of becoming, an Atmic vehicle for the Monad, just as individualization produced a Causal vehicle for the Ego.

2 April 1979 Auckland

THE ATMIC CENTRE

This afternoon, at 3:25 p.m., I went in to Geoffrey who was resting after a strenuous day of literary WOIX on the yoga and myth books. He was lying quietly and had an atmosphere of stillness and “awayness” about him. I bent over him and stroked his head for a little while. He then said very quietly to me, “I am having experiences for which there are no words.”. I said, “Tell me.” He then thought a while, quietly looking at me, and began to speak slowly and quietly, with pauses in between his comments.

“I am having the experience of my existence as an Atmic Centre within and part of the Atmic plane of the Solar System, balanced within or part of this Atmic Ocean, ageless, even timeless. However, whilst an individual, there is that unity with the planetary and Solar Atma, so it might seem.

“The main experience is of floating or weightlessly being within and part of the Atmic Essence of the Solar System, eternal existence. This is beyond the personal level of myself subject to what corresponds to successive incarnations and karma. The terms ‘one with all’ and ‘being all’ are natural parts of the awareness, as also is being beyond beginnings and endings in what might be described as ‘always-ness’. I will go back into it now for a time.”

16 June 1979 - Epsom, Auckland

An Adept

CONCERNING THE APPARENT DISAPPEARANCE OF A TRUE OCCULT CENTRE OF THE SPIRITUAL AND OCCULT LIFE AND WORK

Remember that only the bricks, mortar, and building material can disappear, and nothing else. The extremely valuable work done in an operative occult Centre throughout a long period of time will still continue in the lives of earlier and present workers. Aspirants have there passed through Steps from idealism, self-purification, and training, Probation, Acceptance, and onward through to Arhatship [Saintship] and beyond, drawing near to the ultimate human attainment—the stature of the Adept or perfected human being. This can never be destroyed, never be lost, will indeed continue indefinitely, as successful Centre idealists bear the standard and shed the light of the Ageless Wisdom, popular and esoteric, out into the world. There it will continue to be absorbed, inspiring idealists to continue the work of the Centre which was and is THE GREAT WORK.

Weep not, therefore, but rather give thanks that such a Centre of the spiritual Mysteries of the regeneration of human beings has once existed, has helped the world and through its still living representatives, will be reborn in the same inspiring and uplifting way.

The Centre Building may disappear, but the Centre Ideal and the Centre Work can never disappear, engraved indelibly as they are upon the Scroll of the Imperishable Record. Furthermore, we may be sure that another Centre of spiritual activity will arise, to continue at an even higher level the work of the original Centre and Centre Ideals of the spiritual life.

*****

The Master Morya

YOGA

Yoga in the highest meaning of the word is the greatest science and the greatest religion ever available to mankind. It is the greatest science of all because it includes not only physical knowledge and its applications, but also superphysical and spiritual understanding and its applications to human life. Without yoga, all other endeavours in these fields can fail. With yoga, success is assured.

Yoga, correctly understood, practised, and applied, is the secret of enduring success in every department of human activity—physical, occult, and spiritual. It is especially important in successfully quickening human, and so personal, evolution and the attainment of progress in the occult life both individually to Adeptship and personally in giving assistance towards the welfare of one’s fellow human beings and sentient creatures.

Geoffrey, get these truths over to humanity as inwardly you were born to do.

22 June 1979 - Auckland

Master Kuthumi

In your next youth talk, after picking up the threads of brotherhood as a whole and before proceeding with the World Mother talk, introduce the subject of Probation and Discipleship, repeating this at every lecture with the strong affirmation of its possible attainment and fulfilment.

Later, of course, the subject will, I know, be fully dealt with for your young people.

The World Mother idea is a good one. Proceed with this also, including Hindu and Buddhist concepts gradually, always reminding them of freedom of thought in our Theosophical Society.

20 July 1979 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

THE MONADIC NAME

Every Monad has the same Name which is “The Atma and the Param-atma are One.”

This is the heart of the Science of Yoga.

MANTRAM

The Atma and the Paramatma are One. I am That, That am I.

21 July 1979 - Eastern Beach, Auckland

Geoffrey asked this question of the Master Morya concerning the new book he is writing, ‘The Yogic Ascent to Spiritual Heights’: “Master, is it correct for me in this book to include the same terms as those you used when writing through H.P. Blavatsky?”

The Master answered at once, “Of course, include them, for they were repeated to you to show that you are under the same direction, by the same Masters, as H.P.B....”

22 July 1979

[Geoffrey was wondering how the Masters can remain undiscovered in this modern world of aeroplanes and modern aerial cameras and equipment used for scanning terrain and mountainous areas.]

During the morning, the Master Morya, whilst clearly towering above me, kindly, even humorously, communicated to me as follows: “The Adepts have powers of which you little dream. They can make a group of homes appear like a bare landscape.”

During the night of the 21st-22nd of July, Master Morya again showed me the wonderful Scroll, or Akashic Record of occult events and history on our earth. He pointed to the reference to my continued use of the symbolic H.P.B. Pencil. He allowed me to understand the sequence of occult events and offices in which I have continued, however imperfectly, to act and serve as a type, or kind, of H.P.B.-channel and conscious communicant between Adepts and human beings. I perceived and grasped the orderly outworking of the Law in obedience to which the more advanced in evolution on our planet earth must, within the limits of karma, provide the less advanced with both Adeptic inspiration and precise occult knowledge.

I was taken to the window of the Master’s house and onto the balcony from which I beheld the same view that had been pointed out to me by the Master Djwal Kul. The Master Morya then said, “Far to the north, in certain mountains, there are Adept Ashrams, kept very private indeed, except from fellow Adepts.”

Turning to me, the Master graciously said, “You are doing well. Continue to convey portions of the Occult Sciences through your books to your fellow human beings.”

I withdrew, greatly elevated. As I dictated this after waking in the morning, the Master Morya confirmed the events just related.

During this same night I also was privileged to be received by the Master Rakoczy. He said most graciously, “You are fulfilling a very important occult function on behalf of both Ourselves and your fellow human beings in bringing to the latter in both literary and personal forms—by the life you lead, for example—knowledge of Our existence, Our teaching, and the lofty idealism in both mental and worldly life inseparable from and essential to the Occult Sciences. Indeed, I may say that you are fulfilling the Office of messenger between Ourselves and the human inhabitants of our earth in the awakening call not only to idealism, but also to Discipleship and Initiation.”

In conclusion, the Master said, “Remember, not only on these visits to Us, but always, we are intimately linked together—yourself in the world and Ourselves in Our world. Therefore, ‘My visitor’ I cannot truthfully say ‘good-bye’, for causally we are always in touch with one another.”

I then withdrew and joined in some very painful and harrowing services to suffering human beings—starving, dying in pain, and recently released from the body.

6 August 1979 - Auckland

Geoffrey was preparing his Shri Krishna lecture for the public and studying the scriptural information in Hinduism. He was also showing me the lovely coloured collection of pictured Indian deities, when he observed clairvoyantly a group of Indian-like devas at the same time with the impression of the very ancient civilization and religious worship. The devas saluted him, gave their blessing which flooded his aura and communicated to him the following ideas: “Your lecture on Hinduism was and still is much appreciated. Why not repeat selected parts as a basis for next year’s lecture on the revered Lord (they bowed and bent their heads in reverence) Shri Krishna? Yes, you knew Him not in allegorical guise, but the holy Avatara as He really appeared. That is why He caused you to perceive the vision of Him whilst at Adyar.”

9 August 1979 - Auckland

AWAKENING AND REALITY

(A great Being, very informally and harmoniously received and communicated with me largely at the Egoic level as follows:)

The all-important issue for mankind on this planet during this age may be described and expressed by the one word “AWAKENING”. This refers, of course, not to bodily awakening from sleep, but to mental awakening, through and by means of intuitive consciousness of the innermost aspect of the reincarnating Ego—namely, the Atma.

This is to be regarded less as a consciousness functioning through a vehicle, than as a gateway or pathway to the Absolute Reality implied by the Monad. Passage through this region opens up the way for the dawning or budding and gradual development of Monadic awareness, or in intellectual terms, the experience of REALITY.

These two words, “awakening” and “reality”, are the very heart of man’s passage through the phase of personal and mental consciousness to a state of knowing and being which is unrestricted by the mind or any intellectual constraints.

The beginnings of awakening generally take the form of increasing idealism. At first, the personality relates this to itself, but gradually dawns the growing conviction that concern for the welfare of others is of greater importance than concern for oneself. All sense of being a separate entity becomes reduced until finally it is outgrown.

The awakening person is not likely to be aware of the deeply interior changes or evolutionary developments which this unfoldment implies, but nevertheless, he experiences both a yearning for THE REAL and a sharing of the experiences of the lives of not only fellow human beings, but of all sentient life. The individual may then justly be defined as awake.

Meditation in whatever form, silent or mantric, is increasingly directed beyond the obvious first purpose of personal progress, development, and yogic experiences towards the increasing reduction of the sense of personal identity and the increasing experience of “identity-less-ness” or blended sharing in universal, spiritual existence. Applied to the meditative life and processes (of the numerous yogas, for example) this change causes the yogi, without surrendering the intellect and all that it implies, to know by empirical experience the birth of realized higher consciousness occurring within him. The whole of this development occurs naturally when the spiritual evolution of the Inner Self reaches a certain stage. A natural aspiration arises to understand more deeply, more fully, the meaning and purpose of one’s existence, one’s place in the world and, beyond that of course, in the Universe itself.

In the later stages of meditation, world or planetary consciousness gradually opens towards universal awareness. This refers not only to the astronomical universe of zodiac, suns, planets, and moon, but increasingly to their fading out as separate existences as realization of the One All-pervading Spirit-Essence begins and develops towards, and eventually into, full realization. Then the yogi can say concerning that Essence, with reality, “I am That, That am I.”

This “knowing direct” is the great secret. It reveals the deeply interior truth of uttermost, totally unrestricted, and universal ONENESS, UNITY, which is the real truth upon which, strange though it may sound, all manifestation is founded.

Thus, the great words in yoga, as also in the ideal life are: AWAKENING and EXPERIENCED REALITY.

[The Teacher, Geoffrey remembers, looked like a map of youthful maturity, sometimes quite young and at others an elderly Sage, the reality being, of course, that the Elixir of Life had produced a cessation of the process of ageing.

Geoffrey also brings back a sense that whilst the teaching was impersonal and in part very abstract, the Teacher, in the highest sense of the words, wishes him well. In other words, he is, if one may so presume, “cared for”, that is, as a gardener watches with interest the gradual opening of the petals of a flower. The Adepts may be regarded somewhat as “Superhuman Gardeners caring for the Egoic plants in the World’s Garden”. The Adept Gardener adds His Atmic power to that of the Monad-Ego of the human being, thereby increasing the capacity to stimulate the procedure of unfoldment from bud to fully opened flower.]

12 August 1979

Geoffrey said, “There is one Life in all that exists, from atoms to Archangels. The Life within every atom and molecule of my whole being is one with, the same as, the Life within every atom and molecule of all that exists—ONE LIFE. When I was experiencing that Truth, every atom in the atmosphere in our room was glowing or rather was a golden light.”

24 August 1979 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

THE EVER OPEN HEART AND MIND OF THE ASPIRANT

Amongst many very important qualities to be developed by the aspirant to Discipleship, as a human contributor to the Master’s work, is that of OPENNESS. This implies that the whole heart, mind, and daily life remain uninterruptedly open to the Master’s thought. Indeed, the aspirant’s own life and work are ideally ever identified with that of the Master, in complete OPENNESS.

9 September 1979 – Epsom, Auckland

TIMELESSNESS

During meditation, one realizes that pan of the attainment of the Adept at the Fifth Initiation and beyond could be defined, as far as the ageing of the body is concerned, as TIMELESSNESS.

The human being is wholly governed by passage of time as far as his named, fourfold, mortal personality is concerned. From conception within the mother’s womb and onwards, mortal mankind is time-governed. Mysteriously, a measure of this control continues to be outgrown and overcome, and finally, emancipation from time is completely attained as in the case of the Sanat Kumara, “the Youth of Sixteen Summers”.

To the mortal eye, this is a complete mystery, an insoluble change as the rulership of time is outgrown and the freedom of timelessness is entered into. In other terms, the Adept “drinks”, becomes a manifestation of, the Elixir of Life.

A thought enters my mind that the essential requirement under which agelessness is attained, consists of DESIRELESSNESS from its outer into its deeper and deepest significance. When desire disappears, then freedom from time and so its effects upon the body begins to be established. Yes, Master? (Master Polidorus Isurenus interpolates) “Hence the importance of the Buddhistic Paramita of desirelessness. The Adept still has ‘aims’ but none of them are for Himself and in their fulfilment, He lets everything flow.”

Geoffrey was preparing a talk for the young Theosophists upon the Adept Members of the Great Brotherhood, Those Whose names have been given to us. As the last name was added, the Master Polidorus Isurenus gave the following instruction: “Include the many Chakshusha Manus and the Maha-Chohan. At the end of the list say: ‘Although physically living far away, Their consciousness is not restricted by distance.’”

To Geoffrey, Master said, “We will be there!”

22 September 1979 – Eastern Beach, Auckland

C. Jinarajadasa

[Brother Jinarajadasa came and communicated with Geoffrey. He said:]

… At a certain level of consciousness, distance is replaced by attunement. In an attuned condition, you are together without concern for distance. Attunement is of tremendous importance. It might almost be said that realized attunement is everything and depends upon mental stillness. Success in the true sibylline function depends upon and is in conformity with this stillness.

30 September 1979 – Eastern Beach, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

The heart of the spiritual life consists of uttermost singleness of mind, sincerity, and selflessness of purpose. Assurance of failure results from deliberate plotting for personal benefit.

The rich young ruler (in the Bible story) who turned sorrowfully away from the Path of Selflessness behaved far more favourably than those similarly restricted, in that he did not remain and pretend selflessness. What reads and sounds like a great failure was, in fact, the first step towards great success, namely, truth and truthfulness.

It is important in the inner life that you should be your own deep originality (original Self) and not playing a part on the stage of life. In one word, the all-essential quality is sincerity or truth.

[Geoffrey says that he feels like calling out to all aspirants:

“For heaven’s sake never pretend!”]

8 October 1979 Auckland

Geoffrey remembered an out-of-the-body experience of carrying out invisible helping in the inner worlds. He awoke in the night with the vivid and terrible memory of having superphysically watched men under-going torture and of endeavouring to help them. Sleep was then impossible for him until the Master Polidorus Isurenus enabled him to go to sleep.

During the night, the Master Morya drew Geoffrey into His home and familiar room, and from the side room brought out again the Scroll of Planetary History. However, on this occasion, the Master Morya unrolled the Scroll backwards in time. He pointed to the record of one of Geoffrey’s earlier incarnations. He then directed Geoffrey’s attention to an area which, when examined by him, proved to be a record of his office as a sibyl at Cumae.^{^[218]} “This function,” the Master explained, “indicated the naturalness with which you received guidance from devas in your present life and especially the reception of the whole of the teachings from the Archangel Bethelda.”

Although the adverse memory of watching human beings under torture remained, this expression of the Master’s Presence and His guidance completely restored Geoffrey’s peace of mind. Apparently, during these visits, the Master materializes a temporary physical body for Geoffrey. This assumption is supported by his memory of the above occasion which included looking fully into the Master’s eyes.

Geoffrey said, “When you are with a Master and in communication with Him nothing else exists and so this agony of mind vanished in His presence.”

14 October 1979

H.P. Blavatsky

Remorselessness of the will and thoroughness in its application to the appropriate affairs of one’s life, are necessary to hasten the attainment of human perfection—Adeptship.

If you keep on as now, you will be able to complete the work designated for you: ‘The Yogic Ascent to Spiritual Heights’, the second deva and music forms books,[219] The Diary, teaching, healing, dictating articles, writing, clairvoyant research, and reception of communications from Us.

10 November 1979

Master Nylghara

Yes, Geoffrey, you uttered a perfect truth, something that can be extremely rare in human society, that on the final attainment of Adeptship and ever more thereafter, the Adept Brother has no more—never more indeed—to live in the world of conflicting opinions about Himself or His ideas; for Truth alone at every level from spoken word to higher intellect fills the very life and life’s experiences of the Adept. It is, therefore, quite impossible for Him or Her ever justly to be personally attacked. Discords at any level can find no place whatever, no vibrating influence upon the life and the mind of a Master of the Wisdom.

This is one of the freedoms gained by the Adept... This undisturbable harmony is one of the great advantages afforded to those blessed ones who are drawn either into a fully satisfactory Ashram life or to live with him or her who has been the guide, philosopher, and friend upon the Path which has then been completely trodden to its end—Masterhood.

In explaining this, as I am venturing to do to you both, my dear sister and brother in the occult life, I must add that the privilege beyond all price of utterly harmonious relationships with Associates at the Adeptic level, is also founded upon karma. The high Arhat and the Adept have, in fact, outworked all their adverse karma, paid at every level all their debts to life and living beings. In consequence, free are they even in the personality of a discordant influence in their lives. Harmony is the secret treasure, the priceless privilege of all who have utterly outgrown the errors of untruth and the discordance with which that is intimately involved.

Your Brother, fellow devotee and student of the Holy One Whom the world calls “The Lord Buddha”

12 November 1979 - Auckland

Master Nylghara

You are cared for and never alone.

No one who has trodden the Path of Hastened Development has ever been entirely without periods of both stress and distress. Fortunately, Senior aid, suitable to the time and need, is ever available, especially since the oncoming of such periods are foreknown by the Seniors in charge… No one ever sincerely and selflessly treads the Path either alone or unobserved.

Every Adept knows and remembers the trials, bitter as they can sometimes be, inseparable from the processes of treading the Path. So it is and will ever be for you, Our conscious representative in the outer world.

15 November 1979

Master Nylghara

One part of the processes of the conscious interrelationships between Master and disciple depends upon, amongst other factors, that which can perhaps best be described as “intensity” of awareness, of knowing, of being, and of entering into occult experiences. This last can really only be entered in response to a high concentration of will-thought rightly directed, naturally. This intensity with which you, and all others thus endowed, enter the Master’s Presence or invoke the Master’s power, somewhat resembles the turning of a key after it has been placed in a door. Many members of the Mysteries believe, but only the few really “turn the Key”.

In the occult life and all occult proceedings and experiences—as also, of course, occult benedictions and healings—the whole of the occultist’s available will-thought is vitally... and intensively focused to the highest degree possible upon the occult experience which is being passed through; for example, the very rare reality of fully conscious, direct contact with an Adept Member of Our Brotherhood.

22 November 1979 - Auckland

Immediately after the close of the year’s objective work, Geoffrey awakens with the memory of the privileged admission to the Presence of the Masters Morya and Kuthumi during the night, and Their remarks: “Arrangements have been made for the continuance of your work of spreading Theosophy, with the accent more especially applied to the books and their possible conclusion in 1980.”

Geoffrey asked the Masters about world affairs such as those in Kampuchea and Iran and received comment only to the effect that “Our own lives We can and do control. The lives of Our fellow human beings We cannot control,[220] and so must permit unavoidable events to occur, deeply regrettable though they are. Nevertheless, We assist wherever We may permissibly do so; the founding of the Theosophical Society and drawing attention to Theosophy being examples. Our deep concern is always with root causes, and their outworkings. Every basic Theosophical principle that is both understood and applied to living by a human recipient, is of immense value not only to that person but to humanity as a whole; for the UNITY principle applies there also. Therefore, as Our collaborator, please continue to proceed.”

Geoffrey remembers this experience occurring at the Masters’ Valley, across the river from Master Morya’s home where the Master Kuthumi lives. On this occasion, surroundings and forms such as homes were without much significance. Only the Masters Themselves filled his consciousness.

Geoffrey said, “The chief impression is expressed in the words addressed to me: ‘Continue with the one and only prevention and cure—namely, Theosophia.’

“The Masters were obviously centrally or inwardly concerned with far deeper Adeptic activities, not limited, it seemed to me, to this planet alone or at least to its physical life alone.”

Late in the year 1979

From the Master Kuthumi

No sincere aspirant to spiritual understanding and selfless service is ever overlooked by the great Adepts. On the contrary, when the change or the idea is sufficiently born and grown within the aspirant, Adeptic help is immediately bestowed and retained. Establish this in people’s minds. Refer to these ideas, warning also against the spell of power as the grave threat to every occultist, testing the deep reality of their dedication. In all your writings and teachings about the Path, stress this TEST through which every aspirant must successfully pass if further progress is to be made.

1 December 1979 - Auckland

The Master Tuitit Bey of the Brotherhood of Luxor

Yes, Our headquarters is near where you tend to think it is, but totally and occultly concealed from the eyes of the world.

We are able to conceal Our Centres by means of a mayavic veil drawn over them.

9 December 1979 (8:00-8:15 p.m.) Eastern Beach, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

We of the Brotherhood, with Whom you are more closely associated, are happy that you have taken and benefited so fully from this holiday. Indeed, there could hardly be a more suitable place than this one [Eastern Beach] both for yourselves and Ourselves when We may need to communicate with you. We trust that the immediate conditions at your home and district will continue to maintain for you and in you the peace of heart and mind which We are all so pleased to observe you have attained here.

We know full well that eager and devoted readiness to continue with our combined activities in every department will always cause you to make the best of contributions to the very important work upon which We and yourselves are so seriously engaged. Please, therefore, dear colleagues, be on guard against even the beginnings of strain and the emergence of stress in your wholly devoted and dedicated lives. Endeavour to do so for both the sake of the work and your own happiness.

Our prayer for you is that circumstances at your home will be pleasantly peaceful, thereby granting you a continuance of the present restful life you have lived here.

14 December 1979 - 17 Belvedere Street, Epsom, Auckland

Master Morya

The Will to continue ever increasingly in Our service is the highest form of occult realization of Truth. Remember the First Ray is not only Atmic, but practically physical. Hence the ideal of service. Adept-dedicated service is of immense importance at this very difficult period and age in human history on our globe. Human beings thus motivated are far too rare, wonderfully true though it is that an increasing number of them are at work. Each and every selflessly dedicated, active worker in the great Cause of the popularization of Theosophia shines like, and occultly is, a brilliant, clearly cut “diamond”. This really means “We must popularize a knowledge of Theosophy.”

Remember that equally important in terms of humanity’s Egoic evolution towards interior Light is the whole life lived for the same purpose. The continuing accentuation of both the ideal and the necessity for uttermost selflessness in living the inner spiritual life, is of very great importance.

19 December 1979 - Auckland

Master Rakoczy

THE PATH OF DISCIPLESHIP IS NEVER CLOSED

Yes, you were during the night thus instructed by Us to prepare a possible semi-public Theosophical statement affirming the presence within the consciousness of the Masters of the Theosophical Society, founded under Their inspiration, and of its function as a gateway to direct collaboration with Them resulting in continuing progress, when truly earned by selfless service, to Discipleship and Initiation.

* *

Geoffrey Hodson states:

Whilst all opinion is free within the Parent Theosophical Society and this affirmation of mine may, therefore, be freely and pennissibly contradicted, nevertheless, in view of certain developments tending to reduce dedication to the Masters, I venture to offer in complete humility, the following statement: THAT FOR EVERY TRUE—MEANING ARDENT AND COMPLETELY SELFLESS—ASPIRANT, THE PATH OF DISCIPLESHIP IS NEVER CLOSED.

[This affirmation appears as the closing paragraph of The Path to the Masters of the Wisdom by Geoffrey Hodson, reprinted in 1980 by the New Zealand Section of the Theosophical Society, 18 Belvedere St, Auckland.]

22 December 1979 - Auckland

Master Nylghara

The singularity about your work when lecturing, teaching, writing, and doing research, whether in science or as a consultant, is that you yourself either have experienced or are experiencing within yourself the spiritual, philosophical, and occult ideas and teachings which you are presenting. Therefore, it is important at this period in the life of our Society that you continue as long as you wisely may do so (healthwise).

True, nothing whatever can be so valuable in these fields as the spoken voice. Therefore, at least one and preferably two lectures a month during active periods will, or rather would be, very beneficial, especially those which are tape-recorded and reproduced. Try, therefore, to continue at least with your public work if later on your outer life includes this alone.

However, from the point of view of enduring contributions to the fulfilment of the Maha-Chohan’s affirmation: “We have to popularize a knowledge of Theosophy”, literary work is the most lasting, even if less directly and less pointedly reaching other people’s hearts and minds. Therefore, We would suggest, if and when the time for reduction comes, let public lectures and literary work continue as far into the future as possible. This relates only to the preservation of your health and does not in the least overlook the usefulness of class work. Then, with your valued helper now more fully available, endeavour to clear up all unfinished investigation work and its recordings, since these also are of great importance, particularly in bringing about an open-minded relationship between Theosophy, especially the Third Object, and people of scientific ways of thinking and working. This is very important since you now have such a large quantity of as yet unpublished records of clairvoyant research. This is the field in which... could prove to be most helpful and your collaboration most productive as far as this more limited, but very valuable, field is concerned.

Looked at more personally, he himself would be greatly helped, advanced even, by such collaborative intimacy. Actually, you should keep a weather eye upon all records of research with this same objective in view.

Your objectively new but actually old Friend

(The Adept) Nylghara

30 December 1979 - Auckland

Master Kuthumi

THE PATH IS NEVER CLOSED

Yes, follow the idea of presenting Ourselves as available Teachers for those moved and drawn towards the ideal of Discipleship. Yes, throughout the year in The Theosophist, if possible, present this idea with a strong accentuation of the truth that, as you have stated, THE PATH IS NEVER CLOSED.

Perhaps you could select some two or three or more such affirmations from your books and suggest their inclusion in the local magazine at the choice of the Editor. This concept must not be allowed to disappear from the Society, its literature or its idealism; for developments of this idea and even direct experience by the pupils themselves are possible should any member of the Inner School find himself or herself thus deeply impressed. If successful in this, another phase of Our personal relationship with human beings could be entered upon; for this is indeed a most important consideration and the loss of the ideal and its practicability would be a great disadvantage in the long-continued progress and fulfilment of Our Plan.

It would even seem possible that certain of your own experiences as prepared for The Diary might possibly find reference in suitable forms, thereby opening out the idea that WE HAVE NOT WITHDRAWN BUT REMAIN AS MUCH AVAILABLE AS EVER TO THOSE WHO GENUINELY CLIMB “THE GOLDEN STAIRS”.[221]

A selection of passages from The Voice of the Silence and Light on the Path which bear definitely upon this subject might also usefully appear. We do not wish to distract your attention from the yoga book, but refer perhaps to literature that will follow its completion.

You have been informed that the year ahead of you could be very promising. Perhaps such activities may find a place during your passage through the months and weeks of the forthcoming year? At least I advance this as a thought for you to ponder.

My best wishes and assurances of aid, particularly in the saving of the occult aspects and contributions of Our Society.

1980

1980 - Auckland

Our Blessed Lady Mary, the World Mother

[Geoffrey was contemplating material on the corruption of humanity, to be referred to in lectures, when Our Lady Mary came and spoke to him.]

Amongst the evils of the world, always add, when speaking upon this subject, the degradation of and the consequent suffering of women.

*****

EXAMINATION OF THE CONSECRATED HOST

Observation reveals that the Host is definitely consecrated both interiorly and externally. It is surrounded by an aura of radiating energies of three main kinds.

The whole Host is thus very much alive. The interior of the substance that was a wafer is now vividly alive with highly active power as if its molecules were hyper-charged with dynamic energy.

The Host appears to me now, both clairvoyantly and mentally, to be a centre of continuing spiritual and occult dynamism, as if an unbroken procedure of surcharging with a force of extreme delicacy, but also of extreme potency, is taking place.

*****

FROM A LETTER TO AN ASPIRANT TO THE PATH OF DISCIPLESHIP

If you are seriously considering the Path of Discipleship of a Master of the Wisdom and feel so moved, form a habit of offering each piece of work to the Masters, and yourself to One of Them, as a dedicated and devoted servant.

January 1980 - Auckland

An Adept

YOGA

(Dangers Arising from the Misuse,

Whether Deliberate or Unconscious, of Chanting the Sacred Word)

Warning should always be given before teaching this yoga. Knowledge of the necessary safeguards against misunderstanding, misuse, and the resultant undue excitation of the brain and its glands, should always be provided. Otherwise, the words can be used injuriously upon oneself.

* *

When chanting the Sacred Word on the morning of December 21st 1978, whilst the Shrine was being opened, Geoffrey heard the words, “Aum means: I am one with the Cosmos and the Cosmos is one with me.”

* * * *

Master Nylghara

For the pupil’s mind and heart, truly only his Master can affirm the establishment of the relationship. A fellow Adept—Myself, for example may confirm but hardly originally affirm, lest a sense of diversity is introduced into the pupil’s mind.

4 January 1980 - Auckland

The Brotherhood would value the submission to The Theosophist of the article suggested by Them on the continuance of the regular system of Steps upon the Path of Holiness taken by qualified aspirants.

Thereafter, whilst recognizing on behalf of both of you the necessity for reasonable rest and quietude, progress with the book on yoga is important. Its publication is very important, for it constitutes one of the most—even the most—deeply and potently occult teachings you have ever received. The Theosophical Society, and indeed the world, are now ready for the production of such a piece of occult investigation and revelation

We know that you are ardently wishing to complete and present this book. However, We fully recognize the variety of demands upon you, mentally and physically, and so wish you to be aware of Our full understanding, especially concerning what seem (only) to be postponements and delays in giving your ever devoted attention to literature. Even so We request that the continuation and completion of our literary work be allowed their very valuable places in your fully devoted lives.

On behalf also of Masters Morya and Kuthumi, as of course the Members of the Brotherhood of Luxor and your ever watchful and ever helpful Brother therein (Master Polidorus Isurenus), could We suggest the somewhat regular appointment of certain hours of suitable days for our literary work? In no sense must this even momentarily intrude upon your work of ceremonially invoked healing and consultative activities and ministrations.

Meanwhile, the world situation is very adverse, perilous even, so that all mental and verbal ministrations in this field are also of great importance.

Advise, press even, that the group of invisible helpers[222] and healers include the world situation every time Invocations are uttered both personally and at regular gatherings. Young people are inclined to fail to give full attention to and evaluate the importance of international affairs and the progress of humanity towards world brotherhood and world humaneness.

6 January 1980

Speaking to Geoffrey, he communicated the following:

“You do not need to visit here in order to receive my thoughts. Link mentally and, when necessary, invoke your Archangel Teacher, Bethelda.”

9 January 1980 - Auckland

THE GREATEST GIFT TO ASPIRANTS

One of the greatest—meaning most favourable—gifts of karma to the aspirant on the Path of Holiness leading to Adeptship, is the provision of circumstances of life closely suited to the fulfilment of aspirations.

* * * * *

Master Nylghara

Our friend... has for some months [Geoffrey thinks since September; confirmed by the Master] been on Probation. Advise him, when his personal psychology becomes troubled, to affirm probational Pupilhood of his Master and impersonally to dwell with increasing realism upon the identity of the Monad-Atma in him with the Monad-Atma in ALL, the Solar Logos. Advise dedication of Theosophical work first to his own Master and then to the Brotherhood as a whole.

16 January 1980 - Auckland

THE MASTERS’ AGENT (The Pencil Incident, 10 March 1943)

Describing and living again this experience (which ever persists in his consciousness), Geoffrey remarked to me that the revered Master Kuthumi then spoke to him saying, “Now, perhaps, you may understand even more fully the true meaning of the proffered Pencil.”

Geoffrey realized that the Master referred not only to his reception of many published books and articles, but to his somewhat newly appointed position as “Pronouncer” or the Masters’ Agent to inform aspirants of Steps upon the Path of Initiation. Actually, he had earlier than this date performed this Office twice for Master Kuthumi, on one occasion informing the recipient of Probation and later Acceptance, and the recent attainment of Probation by another colleague and fellow worker in the Theosophical Society.

Without presuming in any way whatever thus to be useful to the Masters in the future, he realized the delicacy in thus officiating. Master Kuthumi added, “Yes, Geoffrey, happily there will be others.”

Geoffrey said to me, “Master showed me H.P.B.’s initials on the Pencil, and I could not then see my place as a successor to H.P.B., however far behind. Looking back from the present time with all that has since happened as recipient of dictation from the Masters, I do humbly see part of the Master’s wonderful prophecy—especially now that I have been appointed to the Office of Agent or Communicator between Master and disciple.”

17 January 1980

Master Nylghara

We do not wish to press you, but suggest that the article for the church magazine should be offered as reasonably soon as possible. Then, articles for the magazine here may well be offered. Perhaps, the tape recording of the next public lecture could be typed for the magazine, making a valuable contribution.

Thereafter, you will be well advised to turn to the book when you feel able. Go carefully, Geoffrey, into the newly-discovered material and plan its suitable inclusion, however much careful sorting is found to be necessary. Perhaps you can place it appropriately according to subject matter in one or other of the six chapters of which the book consists thus far. We wish this work to go forward as much as is reasonably possible (underline the word “reasonably”, Sandra). Yes, We are looking after you and guarding you for the unique work which you are doing.

Our new pupil across the sea is receiving news of his progress very well indeed, and this renders hopeful the possibility of a further advance (when he is ready, of course) in the not too distant future. His Master has him in His care.

The shared typing idea is a good one, especially as and when the assistants are utterly and wholly trustworthy.

20 January 1980

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Only positives are immortal and eternal. Negatives die.

25 January 1980 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

THE SCIENTIFIC, FIFTH-RAY MENTALITY AND ITS OBSCURITIES AND PROBLEMS IN STUDYING THE OCCULT DOCTRINE

(Notes on Teaching Occultism to a Scientist)

Scientists are students for whom all the component parts must fit accurately together, support and sustain and prove each other and above all demonstrate consistency. In consequence, if some of the parts and persons seem to fail, then there is a tendency for their whole system of thought to fail also, which is a mistake.

These people must decide for themselves and preferably write down or make charts of the scheme of thought as it develops according to their studies and realize that Theosophia, which is the Ancient Wisdom, will not break down, however much people may do so. Such students expect every part of the philosophy to fit together perfectly like a piece of smoothly operating machinery, in terms of philosophy. It is not possible where human beings below the rank of Adepts are concerned. They should not expect this, but rather the contrary, and so they won’t ever be troubled by the apparent mistakes and failures of personalities. The more abstract their philosophy the more indestructible it will be. It is best to keep off persons at an early stage of such studies and deal with principles only.

*****

An Adept

THE RESTORATION OF THE MYSTERY TRADITION AND THE REFORMATION OF HUMAN NATURE

You will also know and practise the secret powers when your present bodily life comes to an end. Complete rest—divine rest, indeed—will be greatly needed for a time and one of Our Centres will receive you and grant you that blessed seclusion. Then, when the call of dharma is heard, newly-born as a result, and with much of the knowledge you have acquired available—reborn, as it were within you—again you will step forward in the service of the Brotherhood and its Supreme Head or King and all else that exists on earth. You will go forth totally rebuilt and renewed in every aspect of your nature and become a teacher, leader, and healer.

As in your present life, so still more in your next one, will a more general rebirth of the Mystery Tradition, in both knowledge and power, occur upon this globe (earth), for this may justly be described as the gravest need of mankind: namely, THE PUBLIC, SEMI-PUBLIC, AND SECRET RESTORATION INTO AN EVER INCREASING ASCENDANCE OF THE MYSTERY TRADITION.

Since so much has been performed by you in this life in these directions, so will the task continue to be yours and with many occultly inspired colleagues you will play your appointed part in that which for your immediate life will be the Great Work. Idealistic movements, services, and activities will be the outward and visible signs that this less visible activity is being carried on.

If one may choose a suitable word, then the keynote for all this work in its outer expressions will be the all-important REFORMATION. This so greatly needed restoration of the honour of human beings will be activated in an increasing number of the major welfare services, human, animal, vegetable, and mineral welfare organizations in the world.

This, My valued brother, is perhaps the most needed manifestation of the Mysteries and of the human race in this epoch—namely, the reformation of human character from selfishness to selfless idealism and strictest honesty in every welfare activity; the rooting out from human nature of every form of deceitfulness for one’s own gain to another person’s loss. Honesty, truth, beauty, and the total absence of self-desire in any activity—these must become established in the character and within the conscience of mankind, especially truthfulness and uttermost selflessness.

Perhaps you may increase your own references to these great needs as part of the reformation of human nature, to these great ideals and their establishment in the very heart, mind, and soul of an increasing number of members of the human race.

28 January 1980

Master Morya

Should you later deem it necessary, prepare a proffered (only) statement concerning the favourable part played by Path teaching and literature in the fulfilment of the Three Objects of the Theosophical Society. Examine the situation from the experience which you have had and prepare a commentary on the place possessed by Step literature and “Step-life” in the history, development, and progress of not only the Theosophical Society itself, but the Theosophical Movement.

Every member must be left free in forming opinions upon this subject. However, you may show or suggest the ennobling effects upon the lives of those, if only the few, who respond to the great ideal of Discipleship and Initiation in order to be more helpful to humanity. Indeed, it is one of the greatest ideals to which the mind of man can ever be turned.

Having done this, gradually, as the situation develops, prepare a statement, as clear and conclusive as possible, of the benefits to both the Theosophical Society and humanity, of the Path ideal.

We [the Masters] greatly favour the presentation of the literature and practices of the great ideal of hastened evolution and would regret its withdrawal or even reduction from Theosophical literature—E.S. or public. One faithful and steadfast disciple is of great value to humanity and so to Our work.

In any further articles or books written on the subject, always include this last reference to the value of disciples and the ideal of Discipleship. Your many books, articles, and lectures Very favourably presenting the ideal are highly valued. The other Co-Founder (Master Kuthumi) wholly assents.

3 February 1980 Auckland

Master Morya

THE IMPORTANCE OF MAINTAINING THE PATH TEACHINGS IN PUBLIC PRESENTATIONS OF THEOSOPHIA

Whilst it is most important that complete freedom of thought and so of teaching, whether vocally or in writing, must be accorded freely and fully to every member of the Theosophical Society, nevertheless, conviction, born of frequently experienced intuitions and direct spiritual and occult experiences whilst awake, may at the same time be freely presented. This is of first importance, particularly now, as a kind of wave is passing over the Parent Theosophical Society, producing accentuations of openness to other movements and other teachings and a general tendency to maintain a very wide “landscape of thought” throughout the Movement. Whilst these have their values when rightly understood, they are also potentially harmful to the Movement, dangerous, indeed.

Amongst the Theosophical ideas originally prevalent and very notable throughout the first century of its existence, were the subjects you are referring to. These include:

1. The possibility of knowing Theosophical teachings direct, whether intuitively or from experience—vivid memories of former lives, for example.

2. The existence within every human being of powers, largely latent up to now, of direct examination of Theosophical doctrines.

3. The ways in which these intuitive, intellectually responsive, and directly clairvoyant pathways of knowledge may be trodden – extremely important.

4. The existence on earth of a considerable number of Adepts in Whom the purpose of human existence has been fulfilled.

5. Some of These remain in privacy, whether physical or superphysical, whilst Others are available to those who genuinely seek to tread the Path of Hastened Evolution and to know the Masters face to face.

6. This is possible for any selfless, self-controlled, open-hearted human being.

7. Indeed, the Adepts Who remain relatively available are ever both watching for, and available to, every single person in whom the right spirit is awakened and active mentally, emotionally, and physically.

8. All such human beings who so aspire and seek selflessly to serve, are noticed from the awakening of their aspirations by an Adept, Who inwardly watches over them and waits for the time when the Path of Discipleship may be consciously entered upon.

9. Then follows training received from the Master intuitionally, intellectually, in the subtle bodies during physical sleep, and eventually during meetings, whether physical or superphysical—both being wisely made available.

10.Courageous, determined, and inwardly inspired continuance of the spiritual, philosophic, and compassionate mode of life hastens the evolution of the interior self towards the attainment of superhuman powers at every level, and eventual entry into the superhuman kingdom of Nature.

Whilst all aspects of Theosophy are most desirably to be presented—popularized, indeed—these more deeply intellectual, spiritual, and philosophical ideas should not be allowed to sink into the background as they are now in danger of doing. Hence the value of your continual references.

The problem before members who become moved to draw attention to the Path becomes accentuated by the fact that relations between Master and disciple are, in general, entirely secret and only find expression in modes of life and vocal and literary activities. However, the Theosophical Society is entering upon a phase at which, if not prevented, the teachings of what may be referred to as the “Inner Life” may almost fade from the public presentations of Theosophy in modern times.

True, the books of the founders and their Initiate co-workers up to the present time, still exist and should be given all possible publicity—again, of course, by those who feel so moved. Perhaps, a series of lectures and books under the general heading of “The Adept Masters Exist” might very usefully be brought forward.

Thus, in conclusion, the ideals and teachings of the Path must not be allowed to disappear or become reduced in the present and near future popularization of Theosophy. If this is allowed, the Society could greatly decline, especially with regard to the fulfilment of the original ideals for its founding and the ever wider fulfilment of the Three Objects. We know and see that you are following this very plan, and wish to encourage you not only to continue, but also consider if reasonably possible and advisable, some public presentations of these truths. Greetings to you from amidst the snowy heights!

12 February 1980

Master Kuthumi

[Geoffrey remembers that he was received by Master Kuthumi in His home across the water from that of Master Morya. Amongst the remarks, he remembers Master saying:]

The Adept Nylghara is on the “Buddha Ray” and thus collaborates with Myself and similarly active Colleagues. Indeed, He is a manifestation of Wisdom-Love. He will always be available in both personal and Theosophical activities.

16 February 1980 - Eastern Beach, Auckland

Master Morya

[Geoffrey clearly remembered receiving the following from his Master when out of his body during the preceding night:]

Steps on the Path are an essential element in the occult life of our planet, known as the “Pathway of Light”. You do well to write and speak strongly of the Path in its more public aspects, notably Steps. Continue to do this, We pray you, lest darkness deepens in the hearts and minds of mankind. Yes, Geoffrey, any denial of the existence and continuing function of the Steps contributes evidence of the influence of the opposers. Official announcements of the cessation of Steps come from those who have surrendered to the pathway of the personal self.

Strengthen and repeat often the ideal of the Path of Hastened Attainment, pursuit of which is one of the sure signs that the stage has been reached at which this Path may successfully be entered upon. This aspiration is entirely an interior experience brought about when the evolutionary phase is entered at which time both the Path may be found and trodden and help from a Senior, one of Ourselves, is assured. Such frequent moments of Egoic inspiration are themselves also signs that what may be called “The Path Way” is not only being entered, but is being successfully trodden.

Embarkation upon “The Way” may be likened to the phase in a seed and an egg at which generative fructification has occurred, with all its potentialities. You may very, very usefully repeat the statement of the Law that THE PATH IS NEVER CLOSED.

[Geoffrey thinks that possibly the Master was or had just been riding, particularly as he sensed the character and smell of leather in the surroundings, as it were. Also, the Master spoke to Geoffrey as follows:]

Continue in your life dedicated to the popularization of Theosophy and as you do so, it will be preserved and prolonged. At this point, the prophecy of the Scroll is being further fulfilled. Yes, repeat this present rest as frequently as you may permissibly do so. Also come here and visit My Brother (Master Kuthumi) as often as you can. This is why it is good to come here (to the beach cottage), for it is easier for you to remember the night’s experiences.

[Geoffrey sensed the presence of a disciple who personally serves the Master. Master comments:]

Yes, for every Buddha and Buddha-to-be such as Ourselves has life enriched by Ananda-like^{^[223]} services.

*****

Master Nylghara

This holiday, for the sake of your health, has been more than worthwhile—rest you regularly need. This apparently rather quiet holiday is of great importance in preparation for what, as you have been told, is likely to be one of your most fruitful and profitable years of collaboration with Ourselves and contribution to the Section and so to the Society.

No weakening of the central Theosophical philosophy is at all permissible, especially for the sake of those in whom the spiritual awakening is occurring. Yes, write, quoting H.P. Blavatsky about “The Bundle of Sticks” and their strength, as you are planning.[224]

“Never has it been more necessary for the members of the Theosophical Society to lay to heart the old parable of the bundle of sticks...divided they will inevitably be broken one by one; united there is no force on earth able to destroy our Brotherhood.”

(H.P. Blavatsky)

Try, as your strength reasonably permits, to maintain the progress upon the yoga book... Of course, as always, lectures and classes must be kept well to the fore in the planning of your work, your rest at home, and your holidays.

Be on the alert, as it were, intuitionally not only for your sake and Our work but for the sake of the Society in this very critical year of the election of a new President. Warn, if you really find yourself so moved (whoever is elected), especially against the withdrawal from E.S. and public teachings of the whole wonderful concept of hastened evolution and Probation and Acceptance as disciples by Ourselves.

Whilst the whole Theosophical philosophy is valuable beyond price, Our existence, and Discipleship of certain of Us, are of extreme importance. May We advise you to draw attention to this in your lectures and classes, especially, of course, to the young people.

A part of the class work for the youth group during this year could not be better than a description of the Steps and all that they involve and bring to the aid not only of privileged ones, but humanity as a whole.

Our benediction from the Brotherhood as a whole.

Their privileged Spokesman

(Master) Nylghara

Geoffrey remembers being in the Presence of Mahatma Kuthumi again. The experience, he tells me, resembles one of being within and near to the source of an extremely brilliant white light—the true Light of the Adept which is without division or limitation of any kind.

His whole house is radiant with this light. The Master’s aura, especially the “heart” thereof, radiates forth well beyond its walls, whilst the total aura, of course, reaches far beyond the central, intensely radiant, white light.

There is the impression of the depth of winter and of the Master occultly producing physical warmth for this and other physical bodies nearby.

Geoffrey appears to be alone in that same room, and the Master to be very deeply engaged in contemplation and superphysical activities (largely Causal and beyond), the human recipients being very numerous indeed.

His body is strangely still and not awake at the time of the privileged visit. However, He draws Geoffrey very closely into His aura and His wondrously radiant Inner Self, where he shares, as far as he is able, in the Master’s spiritual and occult wisdom and activities.

The exchange is less in words and sentences than in experienced Causal ideas which illumine his mind. His personal aura is also made to vibrate more rapidly and to shine more brilliantly, as he remains in the privileged position near to the Master. An intensification of his own Egoic power and capacities, and especially understandings of the more subtle meanings and purposes of human life are occurring. Curiously, it seems as if a measure of the Master’s Monadic will-force is directed with almost needle-like precision into his Monad-Atma and through them to the Ego in the Causal body. The result is a tremendous inspiration and quickening of his spiritual aspirations and faculties.

Geoffrey says, “I am (this morning) so elevated and concentrated in my Causal body that the personal nature for a time is only aware of the Master’s radiance, body, and room. In consequence, every highest impulse and aspiration is given added power of fulfilment and expression. This applies not only to the Ego, but also to the mental body especially in which the privileged visit occurred. Then the Master ‘became awake’ towards me, as it were, and spoke to me.”

Master Kuthumi

Rest assured that your so usefully repeated vow day-by-day will most assuredly be fulfilled. Every time you utter such a vow with deep intent, it strengthens its influence upon the personality and you draw nearer that great day when a measure of Nirvanic consciousness becomes increasingly active and alive in you, especially in your brain when you are awake. I know I need not say so, but advise you—and am closely with you—regularly to maintain the utterance of this wonderful vow which you so beautifully and dedicatedly have conceived and utter.

My warmest good wishes to you. Please continue to guard your health, needed as you are in Our Work...

22 February 1980 - Auckland

Master Morya

When teaching, present not only the Vows of a Buddha, but alter them, even as a separate study with your classes, consider the ways in which they can be fulfilled.

THE VOWS OF A BUDDHA^{^[225]}

“However innumerable sentient beings are,

I vow to save them!

However inexhaustible the defilements are,

I vow to extinguish them!

However immeasurable the dharmas are,

I vow to master them!

However incomparable Enlightenment is,

I vow to attain it!”

Take each one at a time and when you do so, advise one of Us and We will guide you in building up a reasonably systematic plan which could be followed by people in the world and awakening aspirants, and indeed, all... leading to your four new vows and the one you very usefully repeat every day.

By the way, repetition and even more than once, is of great help in the attainment of the fulfillment of the vow and is a very valuable form of yoga itself. In other words, get into the way of repeating it when the mind is free.

The difficulty is, with men and women and youngsters of the world, that they may have times of enthusiasm and begin, but the enthusiasm or perhaps the memory tends to fade. Hence the value of regular repetitions. Teach your young people especially, and tell of the Steps including the affirmation:

“When a person joins the Theosophical Society, I look at him.”

26 February 1980 - 17 Belvedere St, Epsom, Auckland

Master Rakoczy

When a certain level of evolution has been attained, the influences from one’s former lives increasingly affect one’s present incarnation and normal consciousness.

March 1980

Master Kuthumi

The heart chakram is the “Rose” of the personality.

When fully opened, it reaches out to all mankind and all sentient creatures.

4 March 1980 - Auckland

Master Morya

[This evening Geoffrey began the monthly series of nine public lectures on behalf of H.P.B. Lodge, Auckland. His title was: “The Divine Presence in the Universe and Man”. Before he left for the lecture the following message came to him (and a wonderful blessing) as follows:]

The blessing of the Brotherhood will be upon you, throughout the evening and through you upon the audience.

[The morning after Geoffrey’s public lecture, the Master Morya referred to the lecture again.]

Could you possibly turn it into an article for The Theosophist? Do not be concerned with whether people understand an idea at the time of hearing, because powerful ideas start people seeking for themselves. In other words, such addresses tend to awaken in some hearers, but not in all, aspirations for understanding in terms of mystical consciousness. It is always well to have an aspect of mystic wisdom in a Theosophical lecture. Accentuate.

A suggested closing paragraph:

No sincere aspirant to spiritual understanding and selfless service is ever overlooked. On the contrary, when the “change” or the “idea” is sufficiently “born” and “grown” within the aspirant, Adeptic help is immediately bestowed and retained.

Not only should the concept of Steps on the Path of Discipleship not be reduced, but on the contrary should be increased.

Thus, whether out of devoted feeling (as in the “Soldier”),^{^[226]} the result of scientific research, of interior experiences or of scriptural teachings—such a study of the Divinity in universe and man can prove to be of great value in one’s own religious and mystical life. Thus, one may grow in wisdom and so in capacities to help one’s fellow men.

12 March 1980 - Auckland

Master Morya

Do not think only of the Master in His physical body and residence, but also, and far more, of the spiritual Self or Atma, consciously at one with the Paramatma.

When one thinks of the physical Master only, excellent practice though that is, one nevertheless becomes inclined to “belittle” Him.

Both approaches are valuable for the aspirant and the disciple, although the visualization of the Adeptic physical appearance alone, inevitably reduces the concept of Adeptship to its physical and personal nature. Therefore, it is valuable when thinking of the Master and approaching Him, at least to remember His true attainment which is spiritual and not bodily alone.

One important consideration is that physically, the Master may be very far away, whilst spiritually He is ever present with the spirit of the disciple, these two being at one. This last, is the real meaning of Acceptance, which is a permanent relationship. Hence, the words of the Master Jesus to His disciples: “I am in my Father and ye in me, and I in you”[227]—one of the most complete descriptions of the intimate, occult relationship.

*****

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Your friend must be taught to find the God-Power within herself and rest serenely upon that, knowing it to be omnipotent. This is essential because no outer protection is possible...

Probably, the best form of her chant will be one in which she is inspired to discover and utterly trust in the God-Self within her, her true Self. In the meantime We will help by means of your Invocations which should continue, since the situation is becoming ever more serious and dangerous, even for her reason, poor...

26 March 1980 - Eastern Beach, Auckland

An Adept

HEALING

Effective spiritual and occult healing continues to function for some considerable time after the actual ceremonial words and actions.

In some severe and tragic cases in which hope of relief exists, the Angelic Hosts maintain the direction of healing powers, even for many hours after the ceremony is closed.

This is part of the great advantage of Archangelic and angelic cooperation. It is especially true when the karma of the recipient is favourable to recovery.

30 March 1980 - Auckland

An Adept

In the occult life, it is of first importance that resolves should be carried out in every department of one’s threefold personal life—physical, astral, and mental. One must not affirm an occult decision verbally and, whether deliberately or not, deny it in some aspect or activity of mento-physical life. The great principle governing both truthfulness and, therefore, success in the spiritual life, is THROUGH AND THROUGH AND THROUGH.

In this, deeply interior motives are very greatly involved.

April 1980 - Auckland

Master Morya

All-important in the occult life and especially concerning both interior experience and occult advancement, is the attitude of mind in which opportunities for Theosophical service become available, are sought, accepted, and embarked upon. It could almost be said that both one’s true nature and one’s spiritual and occult progress are revealed by the all-important, deeply interior attitude of heart and mind in almost every circumstance. Exceptions there must be, but these fundamentals form the very basis of one’s entry into the occult life and activities associated with the world’s Adepts. Watchfulness on behalf of one’s position in life, spiritual and material, is of course, not only permissible but quite natural.

The apparent subtleties of the occult life include, not exclusively, what has been described as “purity of heart”, “white-heartedness”, even up to self-forgetfulness; this is of supreme importance in what is referred to as “the Master’s Work”. No human being is ever perfect, of course, especially during the opening phases of the dedicated life. Fortunately, both time and guidance are ever available for self-purificatory purposes, whilst in addition, quite natural human approaches to one’s life and opportunities are normal, even inevitable, during opening phases.

The aspirant learns to live at the summit and not the base of the pyramid. He also abides in the “King’s Chamber”.

9 April 1980

Master Kuthumi

When one earnestly acts to help others,

mentally and physically,

one’s self becomes illumined.

Appalling selfishness and materialism

have far too large a place

in human minds and consequent actions.

O Humanity on earth!

Thy greatest need is for more Buddhas

and for more Buddhas-in-the-becoming

...for more Ascended Christs

and for more Christs-in-the-becoming.

Hence, the value—deeply felt—of the daily vow:

“I vow to attain Buddhahood as quickly as possible

for the benefit of all that exists.”

14 April 1980

On waking, Geoffrey remembers resuming help to certain members of the Theosophical youth group and taking them to Sheepscombe. The minds of some of the young people were sufficiently open to respond to and even see both the Akashic Records and certain devas and nature spirits, greatly to their interest.

Then Gorhambury (St Albans), home of Lord Bacon, was visited. There, we were privileged to witness some of the events of Lord Bacon’s life, particularly the earlier periods in some of which Anthony (brother of Lord Bacon) also appeared. The Abbey of St Albans was visited with views from the A kasha of both the Elizabethan and Roman periods associated with Master Rakoczy.

A call then came from higher levels and these pleasures were drawn to a close as work and meditations at the Causal level were undertaken. Geoffrey gathers that when one is occultly educated and advanced, contributions to invisible helping include, and largely involve, Invocations at the Causal level: of benedictions and other aids to both mento-astral workers and the recipients of their services. Evidently, after occult advancement, consciousness out of the body during sleep is focused and active at the arupa levels, especially the Causal. These, for Initiates, are a conscious meeting or blending-level of beneficent supramental powers, forces, and intelligences.

For Initiates, invisible helping largely consists of: (a) flooding the mento-astral worlds with benedictions, spiritual light, and specially adapted knowledge; (b) teaching and training responsive neophytes and disciples-to-be.

One quite extensive part of out-of-the-body life consists of studies based upon observations of creative processes and their operative principles, as a result of which Divine or Logoic Will-Thought becomes manifest in the form worlds. Consciousness can be centred at the hypercritical period and situation at which relatively abstract, creative Will-Thought produces its effects, especially at Manas 4 and below, and thereafter in the astro-etheric, outer worlds.

Geoffrey finds this to appear somewhat like an Initiate Geometrician studying, and to some extent engaging in, planetary creative processes, perhaps Third Aspect activities.

The Master Rakoczy would seem to be similarly engaged in one aspect of His Being, but at higher levels as well. He is established at the level at which the enormous Solar Logoic, Creative Will-Thought-Power arrives at or reaches this Planet and Planetary Scheme. The forces there are indescribably potent in themselves and appear to be at what might be described as needle-point concentration. Geoffrey thinks that he discovers that this is partly the field of activity also of Master Hilarion, with certain of His disciples, with Third, Fifth, and Seventh Ray attributes.

The Third Ray comprehends the plan, the Fifth Ray progressively develops the movement towards form, and the Seventh Ray expresses in ordered activity the physical form or forms as throughout all Nature.

26 April 1980

An Adept

Quiet and private evenings are of great value not only to your nature but also to your work and the development of your spiritual understanding and knowledge. Furthermore, whilst you are quiet and at ease, as now, the power and the aid which you give to others flows uninterruptedly. This is one of the not fully understood or grasped values of being quiet and alone—channelship.

*****

Master Morya

Yes, Geoffrey, the reprinted pamphlet (The Path to the Masters of the Wisdom) is appreciated and especially at this time... it draws attention winningly to this great ideal of the spiritual life. Continue, if We may indicate, this work of presenting the Discipleship and Initiation ideals, as you have recently and valuably been doing.

Perhaps, rather privately, We might say to you that the whole concept of the Path leading from the worldly life to the attainment of Adeptship is, if the term be permitted, a priceless “GEM”, which beautifies Theosophical idealism. Proceed, therefore, with your constant reiteration of the Path Ideal; for in truth, many potential disciples are members of the T.S., E.S., and other organizations and are very near to, indeed have passed through without awareness, the preliminary Steps on the Path.

We will continue thus to inform you.

28 April 1980

Master Rakoczy

THE IMPORTANCE OF STEPS

The procedures of occult advancements are of extreme importance, not only for the individuals concerned, but for humanity as a whole. A Step taken by one Ego-personality helps onward the evolution of the human race, especially as regards both mental attitudes towards life itself and all sentient beings, and also general evolutionary progress, however slightly the conditions of one person may be presumed to affect the whole of humanity. Path people are therefore racially of great importance in the eyes of the Adept Brotherhood as a whole, and those Masters Who perform the specialized function.

Even the admission by a more advanced student of one less advanced to proffered personal friendship, especially Theosophical, can, when sincerely accepted, be of similar if less potent value to the latter. Therefore, you do well to continue to draw near to yourselves presumably hopeful, and even occultly ready, young or older associates; for slight though the contact might seem on some occasions, the invitations can be of great importance, notably when fully accepted.

The one major difficulty, as throughout one’s occult life, is the arousal of self-centred pride and mistaken sense of superiority. Always warn against this on suitably early occasions and never fail to be helpful. As you are doing, references to ever available Adeptic guidance and occult assistance may very well continue, even increase.

One very important consideration applying to the whole procedure from Probation through Initiation to Adeptship is totally sincere and truly spontaneous humility, the opposite as ever being the great hindrance to progress and making more likely a fall.^{^[228]} Unfortunately, at this stage of human evolution, falls are numerous and responses in true humility tend to be proportionately rare.

Those who attain Egoic and occult advancements whilst under karmic disadvantages and yet remain true, are as always the recipients of special support by their Masters. The more favoured disciples (karmically) are in their turn used occasionally as the Masters’ agents and messengers, particularly concerning stages of occult and Egoic progress.

Whilst physical death and rebirth are quite naturally of great if not first importance for the incarnated Ego, they do not possess a real significance, especially for Members of the Brotherhood, since Egoic or spiritual evolution continues through successive incarnations.

April-May 1980 - Auckland

H. P. Blavatsky

... Not all, after Their attainment, voluntarily submit to the restriction of appearing in human bodies and as Personages out in the world. But the French Revolution period was also a very dangerous one, more especially for France, although humanity as a whole was inevitably affected. Also, the time was ripe for the establishment of certain inner movements such as Freemasonry—normal and occult.

Such, my dear colleague, was your experience last night, at least in part; for you eventually returned to your other preoccupation, namely, the tragic circumstances and conditions of the East and Far East and other most serious world disasters.

You have also visited the Iranian situation, but thus far have found yourself largely helpless as karma works itself out for those involved—always the ruling factor.

My salaams to you. Continue with our Work; for your favourable karma and the protection which surrounds you will preserve your life and peace for some time yet

H.P. Blavatsky

(Geoffrey says, “In whose footsteps, however far behind, we seek to tread.”)

May 1980 - Eastern Beach, Auckland

Master Nylghara

The Lord Buddha did not reincarnate fully as either of the members of the two Hierarchies: the Teshu Lama or the Dalai Lama. He remained closely in touch and on many occasions inspired both of them. He also maintains His contact with the planet and its leading Adepts, including the Lord of the World. Quite truly, He does flood the mental plane with elements of His Wisdom on the full moon of May each year.^{^[229]} In this He has never once failed. I do not advise anyone to think of Him as being incarnated in or overshadowing a permanent physical body.

16 May 1980 - Eastern Beach, Auckland

Master Morya

Your immediate welfare and well-being are assured for some considerable time. The oncoming winter should, however, be carefully guarded against by both of you, especially Geoffrey, when out of doors. Even so, your regular methods and the special care you take, We believe, will prove to be effective protection against colds...Therefore, take great care, wrapping a scarf around the neck during cold times when out of doors.

Yes, you will benefit from chiropractic treatment and are well advised to continue at least monthly and even fortnightly when quite convenient. Yes, all the homeopathic and other remedies, such as vitamins, are valuable; therefore, continue carefully and wisely with them, increasing Vitamin C in both forms as the winter grows colder—one of your best protectors, in fact. Your bodily-caring habits are excellent and We know that you will very carefully continue and maintain them.

17 May 1980 - Eastern Beach, Auckland

Master Morya

Your meeting and handshake with Mr A.P. Sinnett at Bournemouth in 1917, following a strong sense of the Presence with you in your room of Master Kuthumi, was purposefully arranged by Him to ensure a physical continuance of the link which A.P. Sinnett had with the Master.[230]

This may be regarded as an example of the “long” foresight of which Adepts are capable and use for the procedure and continuance of Their work. However transient such an event may appear to be, it can actually be of considerable importance. In your case, your sibylline contributions to Our work were even then foreseen.

25 May 1980 - Eastern Beach, Auckland

Master Morya

Your time may yet come to make a statement of your knowledge concerning Ourselves. We will, of course, inform you, for We know full well that otherwise your “voice” will not be heard. The Diary will perform the task, hence the great value of the perceptive action of recording every event and word that may permissibly be recorded.

28 May 1980 - Eastern Beach, Auckland

Master Morya

Talk quite generally to our young friend about the possibilities of the Path, thereby sounding him out at his present age and experience in life, whether he is at all moved towards Discipleship. Actually, he is a reincarnated accepted disciple from the Rosicrucian period in Europe and earlier as an Indian yogi. Refer as if casually to the Path, note carefully his reactions and, when suitable, bring him along.

Whilst roundly developed, he has Third and Seventh Ray attributes and innate, natural ways of thinking, being also aware with Second Ray qualities. Try him with your well known care. We want for him to return consciously to the Path and further stages of progress.

If he responds favourably, then talk a little more seriously and even personally about the Path and its Steps, watching for his responses and encouraging any favourable ones. Ultimately, he might resume occult progress and be informed personally of his own position.

As if informally, draw him into private talks about his own inner life. Find out if he has any memories, however instinctual, of his own position. If favourable, he is definitely a potential Initiate in this life. We know that you will always use extreme caution, extreme care, in all such tasks. Unfortunately, the... are power-conscious as are other pupils. You do well to keep warning against this as in your forthcoming Church article. Perhaps you could prepare an article expressing the same truths but with other illustrations for The Theosophist.

30 May 1980 - 17 Belvedere St, Epsom, Auckland

Yes, the idea is just and true that the Path ideal and its practicability “crown” Theosophical teachings concerning individual human beings.

June 1980

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Your collection of mystic statements and descriptions of the higher consciousness will produce valuable lecture, class, and literary material.

Continue to collect wisely, save, and employ acceptable mystic writings; for they will greatly enrich your lectures and produce upliftment in the minds of your hearers.

*****

Master Morya

HEALING GROUP

For those members so moved, the daily (or more frequent) earnest repetition of a short healing prayer, with all or certain of the names, together with the closing Invocation, is a good practice. Especially, the names of those in great suffering and great need should be included. Thus, the beneficial effects of the hfealing prayers will, in all probability, be maintained in activity beyond the time of the [healing group] meeting.

Furthermore, the true healer not only invokes healing grace upon sufferers, but increasingly feels inwardly drawn, inspired ever more deeply, indeed, to the calling of “Healer of Men”.

21 June 1980 - Auckland

THE ONE ALONE

[Geoffrey was sitting in a large leather chair at his bank, waiting for an official to execute his business for him. He began to meditate silently. The Master said to him, “The gate is now ajar!” He continued to meditate and later recounted the experience to me.]

(a) The One Alone is the Centre of Light and Power in every atom everywhere.

(b)Mysteriously, it is, nevertheless, not outside of, but part of, the same centre of Light within one’s bodies and auras—One Light

(c) One receives the impression that it is “indifferent” to, unaffected by, time; it is eternal, having ever been and ever to be.

(d)Regarding it, consciousness becomes free of distance, of space separation, with a strange consciousness of “all-in-one-place”, free of all sense of “other-where” or “elsewhere”.

(e) Behind, within, and pervading it everywhere would seem to be abstract Intelligence, which is all-pervasive or universal, meaning without a central focus; am almost aware that everything is free of all obediences to qualities of space or of time, being equally everywhere and ever present.

(f) Although first seen as a Cosmos (Universe), and local air as “atomic” or myriads of minutest centres of light, it also impresses one as being undifferentiated—a unified totality.

All these experiences with their attempted descriptions must always be limited and therefore faulty, because the One Alone is a totality as regards both space and time. It is characterized by “everywhere-ness” and “forever-ness”.

The experience is also characterized by the total absence of emotion of any kind, whether of pleasure, pain, or strain. Approaching exaltation could have no place and would have no meaning as the observations and watchings continue and are described. Indeed, my condition can only be described as unmoved stillness, perhaps as being motionless throughout my whole consciousness. (This is an approach to Samadhi.)

June 1980 - Auckland

Master Morya

[Geoffrey was contemplating “THAT’—the Divine Life, omnipresent without and within all that exists.]

Continue and you will go even further in consciousness of the One Alone. You see, Geoffrey, such words as “the Supreme” at this level can have no meaning, since they suggest at least two-ness, whereas naught exists except ONENESS. Oh, yes, one might place all these otherwise strange concepts under the classification of ALL ONENESS—without and within all that exists.

Such concepts as “other-where”, “over there”, and “not here” have no significance since the whole radiant, brilliantly lighted pinpoints or centres are everywhere and therefore both without and within all that exists, whilst to the normal brain-mind this is virtually inconceivable in the exalted state of consciousness. All is everywhere and everywhere is all, and also all time is NOW in which past and future can have no place, all time being blended into the ETERNAL NOW. In physical awareness, however, the points of light fill the room and the air outside.

As far as My body is concerned, I am at home, but My consciousness reaches quite easily to where you are in your home. Furthermore, I can experience this at will and so also bring it to a close when My awareness is demanded to be elsewhere. Nevertheless, the strange word “every-where-ness” is really true at Supercausal levels. And for the Adept at least, this continues as part of Him and His awareness.

[Geoffrey, after receiving this, entered into the experience of “universal nowness” (no past, present, or future) and “fathomlessness.”]

27 June 1980

Master Polidorus Isurenus

[Commenting on the work of a healing group]

The fact that a patient is apparently incurable, should not in the least reduce either expressed sympathy or all such aid as could be helpful. Whether it finally cures or not, the aid of the Angelic Hosts and Ourselves should always be fully invoked – as in the case you are now working upon.

2 July 1980 - Auckland

Master Morya

Although you will hesitate to accept it, you yourself are producing what might be called a “following session” in which relationship between Ourselves and others is made possible by you.

The method is, however, very different, since no physical objects have been transmitted, your highly sensitive condition making this unnecessary. But you are, with Our aid, producing what may perhaps be regarded as a “reincarnation” of the Mahatma letters and phenomena of the early years of the Theosophical Society.

Geoffrey said, after a long time of deep, inner contemplation:

“You may travel throughout the ‘boundless, unwalled world’ only to find when you return, that actually you haven’t moved!”

The aspirant may seek to find and attain to the summit of the evolutionary mount, only to find that no such summit exists, since evolution itself is limitless; all of the concepts are as “jumps” in consciousness from Manas (mental level) to Buddhi-Atma.

19 July 1980 - Eastern Beach, Auckland

An Adept

May not the Buddhist Anhatta doctrine[231] have as a basis, not that no reincarnating Ego exists, but rather that That which is referred to as the Monad, is found ultimately not to be a distinctly separate manifestation of the One Divine Life?

* *

Geoffrey continues the trend of the above: . . . At a certain level of consciousness towards which I am aspiring and under the Master’s guidance, is the realization that however individual the reincarnating Self may be, the spark (Monad) is not actually ever a distinct, separate individual from and in the Parabrahman, but is utterly identical therewith. The goal of yoga (and the evolution of interior awareness) is to know this fact, ‘I, the Monad, and my Father, Parabrahman, are eternally One.’”

22 July 1980 - Eastern Beach, Auckland

Geoffrey defines Parabrahman: The Non-Self-Entirety.

THE OCCULT LIGHT IN OUR SOCIETY

Everything which proves that the Occult Light is still BRIGHTLY SHINING in the Theosophical Society should be preserved (as is being done within The Diary) and at a suitable later date, presented.

Master Morya

Whilst stillness is an ideal, there is not only stillness here, as you see and hear.

25 July 1980 - Eastern Beach, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

DIRECTIONS FOR A SPIRITUAL HEALING LECTURE

At a suitable place in the lecture, put: Granted that a person is moved by interior inspiration to spiritual healing, one if not the only secret of success is WHOLE-HEARTEDNESS.

This includes both absolute belief in the effectiveness of the procedure, and absolute trust in fullest response on behalf of each of the sufferers for whom one prays. Admittedly, this is also true in the pursuit of the spiritual life in general...

A true healer does not heal only during the Healing Ritual, but is always potentially helping and healing all, symbolized by, for example, “the hem of the Master’s garment”.[232]

IN ORDER TO CURE EFFECTIVELY ONE MUST CARE DEEPLY.

Master Polidorus Isurenus

The surest remedy and protection against obsession—to have in one’s character no slightest desire or thought to control anybody else.

13 September 1980 - Belvedere St, Epsom, Auckland

Master Kuthumi

I am happy to inform you that a member of your original group... has been received as a pupil on Probation by Myself. May I ask you to write and inform him and advise him concerning further Steps on the Path, and if, like yourself, he is so moved, to learn mentally to visit Us here in the Valley where We continue to reside in Our physical bodies.

17 September 1980

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Yes, Geoffrey, your sensitivity is increasing as recent events have indicated. Yes, take your lecture notes and especially your Introductions to The Diary with you tomorrow and we will study them together. All of them are of very great importance. Use attractive titles for the youth group next year if they wish to continue as almost surely they will. For them, naturally, titles mean a great deal.

Your holiday promises well as does the work of the remaining months of this year.

As you have been thinking, select references from Our letters and other early works on the subject of Steps on the Path and offer an article to The Theosophist on this most important but threatened subject. Point out that the Theosophical Society is the only world movement in which references to this vital subject are directly to be found.

Your widespread and widespreading pamphlet^{^[233]} is performing excellently in this field. Continue to write on this subject and include it in public and members’ talks. Why not intimately describe Probation and Acceptance and nearness to the Master, to the young people?...

Your Sangha Brother has been called away to other duties temporarily but retains conscious contact, and will return in due course after His other work is complete.

Our gratitude and good wishes for your holiday and especially for your readiness to officiate as Our Pronouncer.

21 September 1980 - Eastern Beach, Auckland

The Theosophist who is really alive to Theosophy and loves it, is continually exploring Truth, whilst one who is mentally imprisoned in the “dogma-cell” of religious, insistent, mentally-limiting orders and demands does not, cannot do so. He is psychologically and occultly limited indeed. Dogmatism in religion imprisons the soul. That is where so many people suffer and are spiritually restricted. Hence the accentuation by the Masters of the Wisdom of freedom of thought for members of the Theosophical Society.

When you live Theosophy, you go to the root of your being. Theosophy, in the highest sense, adds to the illumination of the spiritual Ego in the Causal body—the vehicle of the reincarnating Ego.

25 September 1980 - Eastern Beach, Auckland

Learn to love and pray for people in distress without becoming unduly distressed yourself and constantly worrying.

Better not to think of the sufferers at all than to think of them and become unduly distressed and worried about them.

28 September 1980 - Eastern Beach, Auckland

DESCRIPTIONS OF YOGIC EXPERIENCE

Lit by the One Light

Empowered by the One Power.

Animated by the One Life.

Pulsing with the One Pulse.

Enlightened by the One Truth.

Eternally merged in the One Alone.

Sensing Oneness with the One Infinity.

Existing in, and as, the One Eternity.

29 September 1980 - Eastern Beach, Auckland

Master Morya

[Let it be always remembered that Geoffrey, in all his clairvoyant work and researches, and in receiving from the Masters and members of the Angelic Hosts, does so always in full physical and mental consciousness, by hypermental awareness, in fact. Geoffrey shares with me and dictates some of his night’s experiences with his Master, the Master Morya, at His home in the Valley in Tibet. The Master Morya says:]

We live not only in houses with rooms, tables, chairs... but in what you might further care to describe as “placelessness” or beyond the limitations of space. In fact, this planet, earth, is only Our bodily abiding place. Otherwise, at the full Fifth Initiation one becomes Cosmic as far as consciousness is concerned. If We have bodies, We must have homes and do so, but Our real lives are relatively bodiless and so virtually if not wholly at first, limitless...

Of course there is, at least for a very long time, always a “Ring-Pass-Not”, whether of one’s planet, Planetary Scheme with its Sections, a Solar System, or however inconceivably, the Cosmos beyond and within, or without and within.

October 1980 - Auckland

As Geoffrey meditates, he finds himself saying,

“Everywhere throughout the Cosmos, the air, our bodies—indeed, all that exists is composed of myriads of ultra-minute atoms of power and light. Dare I conceive this as ‘The Elixir of Life’?”

*****

Master Morya

Make clear that in the Theosophical Society:

(1) No one is under the slightest obligation of aspiring to Discipleship of a Master of the Wisdom.

(2) A great many of the members do not do so as yet.

(3) Some do so.

(4) For some: “There is no other Path at all to go.”

Tell of the existence of the E.S.

* *

THE LAWS OF DISCIPLESHIP ARE NATURAL, NOT MAN-MADE.

I suggest: Decide irrevocably in this present life to become a disciple of the Master and as quickly as possible an Adept, Bodhisattva, and Buddha, for the benefit of all that exists. Keep this decision constantly in mind. Mentally, and with full power, repeat it frequently, so that it totally takes up its abode within you.

7 October 1980 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

[Geoffrey said to the Master Polidorus Isurenus one day when they were talking together, “Master, may I ask where do you live?” Master replied:]

In My same white house—one of My houses only—where you once remembered visiting Me, on the…I have wonderful views of...In season, fanning goes on around Me. A larger Centre is used by more than one of Us much further south in the general neighbourhood of...

9 October 1980 (about 8:30 p.m) - Auckland

ANGELIC CO-OPERATION AND MINISTRATION

Whilst we were resting after the October yoga class held in our home this evening, Geoffrey became aware of brilliantly lighted sylphs, nature spirits of air, flashing into his vision, first close to his bed and then about the room. He began to share the experience with me as usual. Shortly afterwards, he became conscious o/ the presence in the superphysical worlds, as if high above him, of the radiant figure and presence of an advanced deva, who began to communicate as follows:

“The great and beneficial power generated by your own voice and then that of the group when chanting the Sacred Word, has not only attracted the attention of an Order of angels, but has also provided its members with very useful power for the performance of the work of the Order associated with both the hospital in Warborough Avenue, just below the slopes of Mt St John (where we live), and the Mater Hospital on the side of Mt Eden. This aid is increased by the angelic ministrant’s added power provided by your group’s chanting and meditations—very valuably so.” Geoffrey sees the very lofty devas (largely white) one of whom hovers over the Mater Hospital and is intimately engaged therein on behalf of all who are suffering. The other is the very great deva associated with Mt Eden. The deva continues:

“In fact, the evening with your yoga group provides not only additional power, but more valuable, makes easy the pathway between the angelic and the human kingdoms, thereby facilitating the work of the devas—a harmonious interrelationship between the Angelic Hosts and the patients being established. This makes far easier the transmission of healing force from the higher planes by the healing angels, into the patient’s superphysical and physical bodies in the hospitals and neighbourhood.

“In addition, the deva of Mt St John responds to the yogic and mantric power generated by the chanting of the group and is assisted in its very responsible work, chiefly for processes of Nature, but also for helping certain human beings even as far away as Ash-Lynn Hospital on the other side of Mt St John.

“The two schools, Diocesan and St Cuthbert’s are also fields of angelic co-operation and ministration on behalf of the young people, especially their spiritual Egos and subtle bodies, wherein evolution is both guided and quickened whenever the character of the scholars makes them responsive – some being very much so and others not so at all.

“Your personal Rituals, in their turn, provide assistance for the ministrations of angels within reach in the surrounding districts.

“The patients on your healing list benefit as do some of these named at the Services on the hill (Mt St John). This your home, is a veritable Centre of very considerable spiritual and occult powers which great Adepts provide in response to your Invocations. Indeed, it is a very potent Centre.”

Geoffrey then sees that similarly, the deva of One Tree Hill also assists all those who are responsive in its neighbourhood, including, of course, the large hospital (Green Lane), where a considerable number of healing devas officiate continuously. Individual cases in households of very great need and suffering also receive aid from these greatly evolved Archangels through what humanly would be described as highly organized systems of ministrations. One of the devas speaks:

“Your attention was purposefully caught by the quite advanced sylphs in order that this communion might be brought about or begun as far as your brain-consciousness was concerned. Indeed, you are greatly blessed and are an agent for blessings to many others.”

Geoffrey says that the areas of most beautiful soft leaf-green in the auras of the leading devas express their profound compassionate concern for all the suffering which human beings pass through, even whilst they, the devas, are not called upon to endure suffering at all. The teaching angel continues and says:

“All your occult faculty is intimately associated with and used by members of the Angelic Hierarchy for the spreading of the influences which you radiate, especially when you are active in healing and teaching. Of course, in one part of yourself you are one of us.”

12 October 1980 - Auckland

Geoffrey tells me that the Master Kuthumi has been “away”, whether physically, superphysically, or both, though giving consideration to the Work of the Brotherhood at those levels. He has now returned and is approachable for guidance and advice mentally, concerning the new deva book[234] for example.

Geoffrey says that Master Rakoczy, Master Morya, and Master Kuthumi, when he ventures to approach Them, are sometimes thus withdrawn from Their physical bodies and so presumably aware and active at Buddhic and Atmic levels. Master Polidorus Isurenus at this point says, “The same is true of Myself and other Members of Our Brotherhood of Luxor – all the Adepts, in fact – not Ourselves, of course, but ‘The Spirit of God that Worketh in Us’.”

17 October 1980 - Auckland

An Adept

CONCERNING THE LORD SHRI KRISHNA AND AVATARHOOD

[Geoffrey says that since he began the preparation for the lecture on Shri Krishna, the vision and experience at Adyar,[235] whilst never forgotten, has become vivid and real, almost as if repeated in terms of present consciousness.]

Amongst the many truths to be made clear is the fact that differences of epoch, nation, and name wherein He becomes physically expressed in no slightest degree indicate difference of Being. This needs to be made clear, not only in order to express the truth, but to draw people together under the realization that He is forever the same, eternal, Deific Principle, most correctly named the One Alone for your information, His real Name.

If you wish, after you have formulated the miracles or pranks, quietly pause, and I will offer an interpretation.

You could not possibly close your year’s lecture-subjects more suitably than by expanding and interpreting, however briefly, the so-called Shri Krishna Avatarhood. By the by, use and explain that word, Avatar, to your public, yes, and readers of the resultant article.

One cause, amongst many others, for the condition of humanity during the present age, is the absence of an Avatara even though this has had great advantages also. Whilst increasing numbers of individuals have had what may be described as “personal” avatara-like experiences, as world mystics and yogis have variously defined the experience, far more have remained silent in stilled experience of identity with the One Alone.

Fortunately, the voices of both female and male illuminates demonstrate that single or personal manifestations have occurred, and at this time are doing so increasingly.

For those so moved by temperament, Avatarhood may well, with reverence and humility, be mentally conceived as an ideal.

22 October 1980 - Auckland

[Geoffrey remembered attending superphysically a gathering of Members of the Adept Brotherhood. He described it to me as a very large meeting in what was almost like an open air arena. Certain members of the Theosophical Society were Initiated and of this Step he later informed them.]

The Star of the One Initiator shone over the head of the officiating Hierophant. The three members knelt before the Officials and were in turn Initiated. An address of both recognition of their status and appreciation of their almost life-long contributions, each in his own field, was then uttered. Thereafter, when they had arisen, their Masters took them into very close association. Only encouragement was given to each of them and they eventually emerged highly illuminated and uplifted.

Other Adepts and Initiated friends also conferred and talked over aspects of the work with each of them, and thereafter, the three received guidance about the Theosophical Society. Again, appreciation was expressed to them, and each was taken by his own Master for a more private and personal conference.

As far as I can remember, and was permitted to be aware, one subject was the presentation of the original teaching concerning the great Steps upon the Pathway of Initiation, and the importance of the work of invisible helping while the body is naturally asleep. This is important at this time of extreme suffering for very large numbers of people, some of whom are still living, some dying, and some already free from their bodies. All are apparently suffering severely from shock, as well as from pain of many kinds.

30 October 1980 - Auckland

EGOIC CONSCIOUSNESS

[Geoffrey entered into and described the following experiences:]

However dull the brain-mind (of the personality), the Monad-Ego continues with blazing power and such experiences as: limitless distance, space, light, life, power, energy, and general transcendence of normal five-sense, brain-consciousness.

Nevertheless, although brain-mind awareness, with its control by physical limitations (such as time, distance, and words) only continues whilst the body is awake, the Ego abides in increasing transcendence of all those limitations—in degree according to evolutionary progress. This stage of development cannot and must not be judged or assessed by normal brain-consciousness, with all its physical plane restrictions—imprisonments.

The two states of consciousness, Egoic and physical, might be likened to bathing in the whole ocean without known distance-limits on the one hand, and holding a cup of sea-water on the other. Actually, the sea-water is the same, but the cup (brain-mind) encloses and separates it from the ocean itself, giving the totally erroneous impression of two waters, whereas there is only one sea throughout the whole world.

Furthermore, the geographical necessities to the mind-brain, of north, south, east, west, height, depth, and time-differences as past, present, and future—these are without significance in Causal consciousness.

In truth, none of these exist at those levels, all is here and always.

*****

In the plant kingdom, the seed, bud, flower, and fruit-phases must physically be passed through. Causally, however, they are also conceived of as universal, time-free, time-unlimited Oneness. Though during Manvantara these stages are time-bound for the brain-mind awareness, they can best and most truly be considered by the higher consciousness as one continuing, original PRINCIPLE, ceaselessly operative. In other words, Causal consciousness leads towards and possesses the possibility of consciousness of principles.

The concrete (lower) mind is bound by such concepts as Euclidean geometries and numerical relationships (e.g. arithmetically twice two are four). Causal consciousness, however, might be described as “supra-Euclidean” (in terms of space) and supranumerical. The brain-mind is restricted to successive time-limited and appearance-limited procedures of Nature whilst the higher consciousness lives with principles. Down here, we say the population of the globe consists of millions of people of different nations, but in Causal consciousness we only conceive of US.

*****

An Adept

ONLY THEOSOPHY CAN SAVE THE WORLD

We must not be too pessimistic, especially to start with. Perhaps we could begin by listing brotherly movements and actions including, of course, the founding of the Theosophical Society, the League of Nations, the United Nations, and the world brotherhood movements, like the Boy Scouts, Girl Guides, UNESCO, WHO, and all unifying, compassion-moved movements, Save the Children Fund, etc.

Then, perhaps, you could begin with the awe-inspiring increase of opposites, and perhaps you may say, Geoffrey, the opposing political movements of democracy and communism. (I will come and help you—but you don’t need Me!)

Early amongst the favourable movements you must put: founding of the Theosophical Society.

What is really needed, if only it could be founded and made to work, is a movement to prevent, by law if necessary, the hitting and hurting of children by their parents; in addition, an international World Welfare Brotherhood Movement to spread itself throughout all the countries of the world and reduce the appalling internal, political antagonism which tends to “tear nations to pieces”.

The same could be true with religion and the founding of an international “God-Worshipping-Movement”, in which all similarities between the different religions could be stressed and all differences ignored until they die out.

Perhaps some kind of an appeal to the young people of the world for the foundation of an international youth movement, somewhat like...without undesirable attributes, if any. Not sport—with its too separative thought of competing and winning. If there is one human attribute, which amongst many others needs to be outgrown, it is “the desire to compete and continually to win”.

If the anti-cruelty campaigns in the world could be united in the spirit and practice of ahimsa [not hurting] then another field of separateness could be reduced in size and efficacy, namely, cruelty for financial gain, pleasure in eating and in killing, cruel trapping of animals for vanity, and cruelty to animals for the supposed preservation of health. Suppose world brotherhood movements were to respond fully to all of the above World Freemasonry, for example?

November 1980 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

[Directions to Geoffrey on lecturing]

Useful to have with you at lectures, quotations from the writings of men of science descriptive of a dawning and even developed spiritual consciousness.

Also, why not a whole lecture devoted to the one subject without references to the scriptures—namely, descriptions such as you gave this evening and as many more as you can collect and add from every available source?

Why could not the search for and collections of these be part of the work for next year? Then you could, as this evening, share them with your audiences, greatly to their benefit. Include such stories as “Meditation on the buffalo”; also “And to know rather consists in opening out a way whence the imprisoned splendour may escape, than in effecting entry for a light supposed to be without.”[236]

1 November 1980 Auckland

I have received the following communication today, which I now forward ... has for some time been a much respected accepted disciple of Master Rakoczy, Who inspires him in his varied activities ...

*****

An Adept

The Seventh Ray is an inclusive Ray and includes the functions of all the others, carried out with a certain ordered activity, almost ritually planned.

The Second Ray is very highly developed in…and he is also inspired by the World Mother, Who uses him for assistance in certain compassionate aspects of Her world activities.

His health should be carefully guarded throughout this coming New Year; there is likelihood of an accident, possibly while walking. Guidance, which is available directly by intuition, may well be from his Master. The Brotherhood inspires him and hopes that he will continue with his splendid work.

He is fortunate to be living and working not too far away from one of the Centres from which his Master operates. He may well silently practise the procedure of invoking his Master’s and Our Lady’s blessing upon people and places, where and when he knows that responses would be favourable.

Sympathy is expressed for his personal limitations. Health needs to be watched.

5 November 1980 - Auckland

Master Kuthumi

Do what you can to interest your protégé in the Path and Myself, to Whom the Inner Self belongs (as an aspirant to the Path of Adeptship). With all her intellectual manner and tendencies, she has, nevertheless, basic Second Ray qualifications. Perhaps you could say in one of your letters that I am on the same direct line as the great World Teacher for this age, and observe how she responds. You might well do this fairly soon.

All your other friends upon the Path are proceeding very favourably even if not always entirely without difficulties, small ones though the majority of those generally prove to be.

Congratulations upon your Pronouncements.

K.H.

(From My Tibetan home)

8 November 1980 - Auckland

Master Morya

The article in The Theosophist^{^[237]} should. We suggest, be followed as soon as reasonably possible by others.

Why not search through your lecture material and collected article material, to compile a succession of articles under the new President,^{^[238]} outlining the need for the continual presentation of basic Theosophy and the ideal and certain establishment of the Path and the verity of Our existence.

Repeat your “Ten Points”^{^[239]} to your youth class tomorrow and to your yoga class on Thursday.

15 November 1980 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Your two second volumes must become the major demand upon your return from your holiday. Please concentrate upon them.

The visiting member has been helped as far as he has been able both to receive and respond. Stimuli have been received, however, and these will continue to be of help for some time... great is the need.

A quality which is lacking and which he may be encouraged to develop is aspiration. Teach him to aspire to the spiritual, occult, liturgical, and Masonic progress in this life, including the Path to Discipleship. Assure this member that the Masters know him and will continue to help him as far as They find possible.

Yes, aspiration is his great lack, his great need, and hope for the future.

I know that you will assure him that the contact with you will continue to be active.

17 November 1980 - Auckland

Master Morya

THE MYTH OF GOLGOTHA—“THE PLACE OF THE SKULL”

When accentuating the necessity for transferring scriptures and yogic experiences and teachings into interior experiences whilst awake, generally, if not always, use and expound the Myth of Golgotha; for this is one of the most widespread and least understood symbolical expressions of the necessity for transferring all occult and spiritual teachings into personal experience in waking consciousness.

Golgotha means “the Place of the Skull”, there being a mountain of that name. It also alludes to the human skull wherein man’s Initiatory experiences occur. Hence the significance of the touch of the sword upon the head in all Degrees of the Greater and Lesser Mysteries, including Freemasonry. Perhaps you could devise effective ways of making this great necessity—great Truth, indeed—ever more convincingly true to your listeners.

Mt Olympus, the abode of the Gods in Greek mythology, is of course, of the same significance.

23 November 1980 - Auckland

A Feminine Adept

Everyone with sufficient intelligence can learn and teach Theosophy because it is all stated in the books, especially yours, for simplicity of teaching. But very few, hardly any, can bring home to the mind the mystical meanings and experiences and illuminations which are the important partners of the great fundamental ideas.

Many, Geoffrey, have taught Theosophy, and fortunately still can and do, but not a sufficient number of them are able to bring home to the consciousness, and even “heart”, the experiences of the inner meanings as you wonderfully did the other evening, and so often do. This is part of the great value of your yoga group teachings, for there you both teach the inner truths and explain and chant them all together with your audience.

Don’t you think that people must not only learn Theosophical truths, but realize them in their hearts and deeper minds? May I presume to suggest that you stress this side of your work, accentuating the mystical equally with the philosophical truths.

May we not say that one Truth deeply realized could be more valuable than many truths only grasped by the intellect?

December 1980 - Auckland

Master Nylghara

The Christmas season, as you know, is the period when a very great outpouring of spiritual benediction and intellectually enlightening energy or power is projected into, or made available in, the world. It is well that you should know this, as you do, and keep open your heart and mind in responsiveness to this very real and very great outpouring.

Ever with you, (The Master) Nylghara

4 December 1980 - Eastern Beach, Auckland

THE UNDINES

Geoffrey was reminding me of a suggestion made by the great Archangel Bethelda that he add to his studies of the deva kingdom the order known as undines (devas and nature spirits of the element of water). Whilst he was studying the devic life of the beautiful undines of the ocean at Eastern Beach, a glorious deva presented itself to him from the Orakei Gulf, between Eastern Beach and Waiheke Island. In communion, it offered itself as a source of information and a very wonderfully willing collaborator in the research when it is begun.

As it is late in the evening, Geoffrey’s brain is not quite as fresh as is needed for occult research into the kingdom of the angels, but he sees the great being, about three-quarters of a mile from the beach, and is struck by the fact that it is built of, or contains within its being, a number of lesser devas of its element. They are all apparently aspects of, or collaborators with the great deva who, thus viewed, presents to Geoffrey the impression of a magnificent statue of combined figures.

As Geoffrey watches, he sees, however, that whilst the natural association between these devas is very close, as if they were all one, a single member of the associated group moves away southwards, and pauses a moment to allow itself to be perceived as a remarkably radiant and elevated member of the Angelic Hosts. The Master Polidorus Isurenus now speaks to Geoffrey, saying:

“You are indeed fortunate; for a lofty deva of the element of water granted you these visions and, as I feel sure you are aware, offered to assist you in your studies of the devas of the element of water—or as I should say—of the element of sea-water. As you know, the water devas include all those associated with what is called fresh water—meaning lakes, rivers, and waterfalls, for example. These must be studied in their own regions and in the relatively salt-free form of their element; for naturally, there are differences between the two—the Gods of the ocean and the Gods of fresh water, including those of the clouds and therefore of rain, whether in torrents or showers. When you are about to research these fields, then, of course, you will need to be in appropriate places. Fortunately, you have access to both (where your research could be followed) as there are oceans all about you, rivers great and small, and also lakes.”

Geoffrey ventures to think that the sea-water deva gives him the impression of friendly interest. Geoffrey says to me, “As you and I sit here, out there, about a mile away from us across the ocean, it is ‘smiling’, inviting, offering to teach me, as if very ready to assist in the association and the research.”

The great angel of the sea communicated to Geoffrey:

“Of course, I and my colleagues have long known of your presence here, so the impression you receive is that, not only are you not a stranger because of so many visits throughout the years, but also, with one portion of yourself, we of the deva kingdom of every element are related to you and you to ourselves. Permit us, therefore, to offer our assistance and harmonious interrelationship in the fulfilment of the great ideal of bringing the members of the two kingdoms, human and angelic, into closer and more harmonious relationship and collaboration with the divine Will; for this, as you have revealed, was the purpose for the assistance rendered you by your great Archangel Teacher, Bethelda. All that exists must not only evolve, but be of assistance in the evolution of others—and so ‘the Brotherhood of Angels and Men’.”

Geoffrey expressed his gratitude and acceptance, and assurance that later visits will be spent in research.

19 December 1980 - Auckland

An Adept

[The “case” to be exorcized and healed was continually being interfered with psychologically by the deceased, forceful, and dominating close relative. The following advice was given to Geoffrey:]

After you have completed the Healing Service on Sunday, keep...back and perform a second powerful Exorcism concentrated upon the final exorcism of the deceased relative and ordering the person mentally and occultly to cease entirely from interfering with... at all. Perhaps you could work out the wording for this second Healing Service. I will be present^{^[240]}

21 December 1980 - Auckland

An Adept

A very effective Healing Service.... [the name] may very well be maintained fairly regularly for some weeks on our healing list. You might usefully repeat at the same time, the exorcism from the sufferer’s mind and psychology.

Reports might be asked for, especially concerning the possible adverse return to power over the patient

[After Geoffrey had performed a Healing Service as a fully ordained Priest, the Master Jesus communicated thus:]

The Master Jesus

It is I Who was, briefly, Jesus. We have collaborated many times in this your present life, and always during such Healing Services. Perhaps on a suitable occasion you might contemplate our relationship in this your twentieth century life.

Your dedication to and researches upon My life as Lord Bacon have long drawn us harmoniously close together, whilst your services to Our Ceremonial Orders have been of great help to Our Work... Be assured that no single aspiration, thought, and act which forwards Our Work, is ever without its results and effects in weaving more closely the interrelationships or links with which we are now timelessly woven together. Please continue with your occult writings on Freemasonry—an important aspect of Our Work.

Your Brother in the Great Work Who brings His New Year’s greetings and good wishes

Master Rakoczy

“From the Castle—physically in…occultly I am here.”

30 December 1980 - Auckland

Master Morya

THE ONE ALONE

There eternally exists a single or unitary One Divine Spirit-Essence. This is the Eternal All, the unchanging One Alone, forever unmanifest in its interior existence, unaffected by such alternations as Manvantara and Pralaya. It is beyond and yet the source of the creative impulse and the inevitably threefold manifested Deity—Brahma, Vishnu, Shiva, or God the Father, God the Son, and God the Holy Ghost. These arc the supremely divine products of the ever still One Alone.

The ultimate goal in Raja Yoga, is to realize the One Alone, first intellectually as at present being described, and then intuitively, as ihe interior power by which Manvantara begins, remains, and eventually withdraws.

Thus behind all manifestation, all concepts of the triune Logos, there exists a timeless, motionless, and so utterly still “THAT” lo which has been given the title “The One Alone”, or as Master Kuthumi described or quoted it: “The One Eternal Life”. This ever silent changeless Principle is the Heart of all that exists.

[Geoffrey says to Master Morya Who is communicating, “Yes, I see!” Master continues:]

At Adeptship, this discovery and this realization are permanent experiences and the source of the tremendous occult Powers. Utterly far distant, and almost incomprehensible though this concept of a “One Alone” is to the mind, it can begin to be known and eventually realized as yoga is racticed and the occult life in all its aspects is truly lived. This is possible because the identical One Alone of the Cosmos is, nevertheless, present in the Spiritual Heart of every human being.

[The Master Polidorus Isurenus commenting to Geoffrey:]

The experience of individualization which is passed through by the evolving life is of tremendous importance; for only then and thereafter is the “Giant Stairway” open, leading ultimately not only to realization of the existence of the One Alone, but deepening entry into experience of ONENESS therewith – the dual goal of yoga.

31 December 1980

An Adept

Your Introduction to The Diary should be read over carefully, for there are two if not more places where some modifications and even additions are necessary; otherwise an excellent Introduction, not only to your Diary, but also to Ourselves.

Yes, as We have agreed, the two new books may very well, must in fact, be carefully proceeded with. The deva book has progressed favourably. Pray proceed.

Yes, careful association of each painted picture with its literary description is very important, both for the lecture and, of course, for the book. Perhaps you will approach Us nearer the time of presentation for further material...

1981

New Year’s Day 1981 - Auckland

Master Nylghara

Mental quietude should be the ideal for you except for pleasurable literary work. You must not overdrive in any department of your life. Remember, reasonably quiet ease and peace for you, throughout the year.

[Effortlessly relaxing after the Master’s words, Geoffrey finds himself mentally reliving his Bethlem Farm life as a boy in Lincolnshire, climbing the old staircase with his left hand on the stair-rail—thinking of all the hands that have touched this old family staircase hand-rail!^{^[241]}]

2 January 1981 - Auckland

We were discussing the sunny Christmas and New Year holiday vacation. There came a sentence to Geoffrey from the Master Polidorus Isurenus, “But there is an interior sunshine wherein We take Our vacations!”

10 January 1981 - Auckland

Master Kuthumi

Yes, Geoffrey, both the Australian Maha-Raja “King” Devas and Their “subjects”, will prove readily available, whilst the highly evolved Undine (Maha-Rani) “Queen” Deva, still awaits your approach and continued research...

Your occult faculties and receptivity are not only being preserved, but, I might also say, increasing.

Your Brother Who welcomed you back to the Ranks—K.H.

20 January 1981 - Auckland

Master Kuthumi

My main purpose, Geoffrey, in arranging time together at this level of consciousness, is largely to give you complete assurance that with Our aid and that of certain friends in the Angelic Hierarchy, your health will be reasonably well preserved. However, the habit of resting your body on all occasions should—must, if I may say so—be followed from now on. This year should prove to be relatively peaceful and stress-free for you both—a reasonably quiet year, in fact. Be at ease, therefore, Sandra, for as you have been severally informed, We of the Brotherhood have you and Geoffrey in Our care.

Yes, an acknowledged scientist’s affirmation that Geoffrey’s clairvoyance has been tested and proven accurate would be valuable,^{^[242]} even if not wholly necessary, since he has won the confidence of Theosophical readers and many others.

Your dedicated building of The Diary is of very great importance to both Ourselves and the world. This book will be one of the greatest aids—powers, indeed—in supporting the work of Our Society throughout many future years; for, as you know, Geoffrey...can speak in full consciousness concerning Our views and advice. This is an exceedingly important activity; for a decline in the occult aspect of the work of Our Society must not occur. We of the Brotherhood greatly appreciate your dedication and continuing service in this particular field.

Geoffrey, accentuate the occult, mystical, and Path aspects of Theosophy. The three if not four new books, articles for both The Theosophist and the New Zealand magazine[243] will be your main work in addition to teaching throughout this present year, although advising, encouraging, and healing people will also have their places.

Whilst We do not for one moment or by one iota of force presume to put the slightest pressure upon you as Our ever active co-worker, nevertheless, may We say how greatly your morning Ritual is appreciated. These Rituals truly provide Us with opportunities and chances which We are able, gratefully, to use in response to your Invocations. Although this, our more intimate interchange must now begin to close, rest assured that both Egoically and personally your utterly devoted dedication to Our Cause is fully and deeply appreciated.

Your Co-Worker K.H.

20 January 1981 - Auckland

Master Kuthumi

Merely advise that you preserve your energy and rest for this evening. Astrological and other influences have reduced your reserve of prana temporarily only. Rest, therefore, Geoffrey.

The patient who called this morning naturally demanded close attention and so the exercise of considerable prana. You helped her very much for which We are grateful, since she is one of Our people. She is a worthy collaborator indeed and possibly one with a considerable Theosophical future.

Yes, Sandra, just resume your very helpful and very restoring heart treatment for Geoffrey; for although the work he was performing may have appeared to be easy and simple, it made considerable demands upon his vitality.

We know you will explain the due position and functions of the Devic Hierarchy in your lecture on the subject. Call upon Us should you need to do so.

I would welcome a visit from you tonight—quite naturally, remember, and with no further effort than the acceptance of this My invitation. Perhaps you will plan to record any memories in the morning concerning subject-matter which will have been discussed.

30 January 1981 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Little by little, and very wisely, increase the more purely occult note in all your talks. This is not only because it is needed and valuable, but also because certain other contributors do not possess the necessary knowledge.

Yes, Geoffrey, when talking to members, refer quite frequently to Ourselves, phases of evolution through Buddhahood to the Summit, and the very closely guarded, yet ever open PATH OF DISCIPLESHIP.

Perhaps at deva lectures and talks, you might sometimes put or offer the question: “Why is it that some people can see the nature spirits and devas, whilst others do not do so?”

Explain the evolutionary importance in physical life of experiencing, understanding, adapting to, and possibly controlling purely physical phenomena. These processes are of very great, the greatest in fact, evolutionary importance at present This is one reason why the vast majority are granted the time, opportunity, numerous experiences in and from which to make valuable intellectual and psychological developments. Unless well understood and usefully used, psychic sensitivity can be distractive and, therefore, harmful at certain periods of development.

As evolution proceeds and the next Race, the Sixth, becomes more and more apparent, then increasing numbers of people will also benefit from psychic experiences having met the above necessities in former lives. Unless the sensitivity is natural and controllable, it can be harmful. When it is controlled and a certain degree of level-headedness has been attained, then awareness of the superphysical planes, inhabitants, and phenomena can very usefully be developed.

Remember that experiences in former lives—especially those of a fully desirable, spiritual nature—and even training, also play their part in what is desirable and possibly beneficial in the development of the psychic sense in the present life.

Explain, also, that in such cases, personal, philosophic, and occult guidance is generally made available, but one’s response to this should always be very carefully scrutinized, particularly as regards motive—the decisive factor. Then proceed to present the essential ideal of uttermost selflessness, especially where occultism is concerned.

All-important, of course, and always first must be maintained the fulfilment of existing and acceptable responsibilities.

2 February 1981 - East Beach, Auckland

An Adept

Geoffrey, do please rest, rest. The body becomes fatigued. The Soul is never tired. The Soul which is never tired can overdrive the body.

*****

Master Nylghara

A benediction is upon you always, of course, but especially for this well-earned holiday of yours, away from the possible disturbances inseparable from your home life and, indeed, important parts of your work. We wish you both very well for the sake of your personal health and your planned occult and literary activities. Peace be upon you during your residence here and may its purposes be wholly fulfilled as We have belief that they will be, notably—the first lecture of this year and the first new book.

The healings from here are very valuable for the world and potent for your sufferers.

Geoffrey, The Lord Buddha as you must know, did not live and serve in forests alone, but on occasions, in cities as well. If I may so presume, you both can hardly do better than pervade yourselves with the influence and teaching of the Lord Buddha and find space for it in your group classes especially. In a phrase, “remain near Him”.

Messenger from My Brothers

and Guardian of your two selves

[Master Nylghara—the Tibetan Adept]

4 February 1981 - Eastern Beach, Auckland

An Adept

THE SPIRITUAL EGO MUST ATTAIN BRAIN-CONSCIOUSNESS

The Ego’s influence is largely concerned with consciousness. For this purpose the Ego “plays” upon the body like an instrument, with the chakras as the notes, particularly those in the etheric double.

The analogy is imperfect, however, because a musician is separate from his instrument, while the Ego plays from within the chakras, through which he attains brain-consciousness.

7 February 1981 - Eastern Beach, Auckland

Master Nylghara

Geoffrey, a blend of the loftiest forms and levels of Hindu yoga philosophy and definitions of yogic consciousness, together with similar parts of the teachings of the Lord Buddha, will provide you with the very highest foim of spiritual teaching or Theosophy in the abstract

Of course, the truths themselves are purely references to states of being, inner consciousness and awareness, and they are very valuable indeed for those like yourself, who are interested in these lofty—very lofty—ideals, kinds of idealism, and states of consciousness to be entered.

The goal is to be able to extend one’s powers of thinking always beyond forms and into the realms and levels of ideas, associated experiences in consciousness, and what you might name Causal and higher levels of knowledge, thinking, and knowing.

I am well aware that many people must, for the care of their bodies and the protection of their minds, keep contact with the earth and all the necessary rules of physical existence. Nevertheless, whilst so doing, one may still, like yourself, often think about, meditate upon, and seek to enter those conditions and outlooks concerning living and levels of consciousness to which the Lord Buddha referred in such wonderful conversations as Sandra has just been reading both to herself and aloud to you.

Yes, although you do not need to be informed, seek continually the inner Light, the hidden Light, and the more abstract laws of being to which the laws like karma and evolution gradually lead the mind.

9 February 1981 Eastern Beach, Auckland

An Adept

We have already taken care of your four sick ones—feel free.

*****

GEOFFREY’S MEDITATIVE APHORISMS

At the Atmic level there are no terms “I” and “you”, only “US”.

Absolute All, Absolute Cause, or Absolute Consciousness.

I am one with the Universe and the Universe is one with me.

I am the WHOLE.

1 March 1981 - Auckland

Master Morya

We wish you to teach those who attend your yoga class, each time, of the existence of the Path of Discipleship, however briefly, and affirm that no true and sincere aspirant is ever overlooked.

Indeed, please keep this note, and that of your October article, to the fore.

3 March 1981 - Auckland

Geoffrey had just finished working on his deva lecture, when suddenly he perceived the presence nearby of a beautiful, radiant, blue nature spirit, with many other colours in its aura. From its consciousness, Geoffrey received its message, “The strong thought of our kingdom, held and projected by you, has attracted the attention of a number of ourselves and our seniors (individualized devas). This makes it quite easy for myself, very harmoniously, to draw near to you as you continue your thoughts and preparations concerning our kingdom.”

Geoffrey said to me, “I used to have a little garden gnome sit on my knee in the sitting-room at Letchworth Garden City, England. This creature used to come into my house and play around for a time and then sit on my knee, whatever 1 was doing, staying there for a time and then vanishing into the garden!”

4 March 1981 Auckland

The whole world is your “oyster shell” (or body) and the “pearl” your shining hidden Self.

Every would-be successful yogi must ever be on guard against the “shells” of self-centredness. The hard and ugly oyster shell must be opened by the yogi before the beautiful shining pearl within can be seen.

12 March 1981

Master Kuthumi with the Master Morya

THE FOUNDING OF A POSSIBLE SECONDARY THEOSOPHICAL HEADQUARTERS IN EUROPE

A Theosophical Secondary Headquarters in central Europe might possibly, at a suitable time, be a valuable asset to the Society. Give this serious consideration...

May We express Our affectionate congratulations upon the arrival of, and your healthfully passing through your ninety-fifth birthday on earth?

[Geoffrey answers, saying to the Masters, “May there be many more years of popularizing Theosophy! Your perpetually available guidance, Masters, is a constant inspiration and very practical aid to Sandra and myself. Aum.]

*****

A MASONIC DEVA AND THE GREAT WHITE BROTHERHOOD

Geoffrey had been considering the higher Degrees of Freemasonry and their representation here in New Zealand, when a blue Masonic deva appeared to him. Geoffrey described it to me as having a shining aura of which the central portion is all a beautiful deep sky-blue, but from the back and all sides, especially from the shoulders, a white radiance shines right up into the air.

There is the semblance of a face and, just where the hair-line would be, a five-pointed star, three inches or more high, shining with a silvery light. This is in occult correspondence with the Star of the great Lord of the World and, therefore, with the great Lord Himself, in truth, the One Initiator of this world’s Archangels and human members of the Great White Brotherhood.

The great angel spoke to Geoffrey, saying, “In this my capacity, I am also, of course, intimately in touch with you and have been so from that hypercritical moment when you took your first Masonic Vow and Initiation. This applies to every Co-Mason and also to every Masculine Mason who is from first to last utterly sincere and selfless in motive.”

Geoffrey comments, “He is a wonderful being. In the right side of his aura, he holds a staff of flowing white power or Atmic energy.”

The angel continues, “If you so wish, I will provide the opportunity for a more detailed research upon my person, perhaps for your book, in which much interest is taken by many officiants amongst ourselves.

“As you see, I am largely blue with white aura and chakras, with an uprush of golden crown-shaped and even bejewelled radiance above my head, over which the Star is shining in intimate correspondence with the One Star of the supremely great Lord of the World.

“The same is true, naturally, of the relationship between the Star above the head of every Initiate-member of the Great Brotherhood and the great Lord Himself. The Star above the head of all Initiates, whether devic or human, is in all cases somewhat like a receiving station in both directions for the Power, Life, and directive Thought, under very special circumstances, of the One Initiator. Thus, in addition to the universal relationship between the Atmas of the Monads of devas and humans, there exists this much more directive and directed interrelationship between Initiates and the great Lord Himself.

“Use as much of this teaching as you intuitively feel might in some semi-symbolic way be included in your second book concerning ourselves.”

15 March 1981 - Auckland

Master Morya

We think that the lectures on yoga would be preferable for next year, 1982...

Teach yoga, yoga, yoga, the world’s great need, in all the significances of that word—YOGA.

Perhaps you will apply it not only in your classes and lectures, as rightly now, but also to the world as a whole, for yoga, in its full meaning, I repeat, is the world’s great need.

23 March 1981 - Auckland

The aspirant seeks realized identity with Parabrahman.

The Adept never departs therefrom.

26 March 1981

Master Polidorus Isurenus

ORDERLINESS

The Adept is an incarnation of orderliness. Hence the advisability of developing an increasingly strong natural instinct in that direction as well as the establishment and practice by human beings of supersensitive compassion. These and other special “virtues” are indications of the nearing approach to Adeptship.

27 March 1981 - Auckland

An Adept Teacher

[Recorded after a morning’s occult research in Cornwall Park, Auckland, upon a beautiful and wonderfully designed “weed”:]

If you wish to investigate that profound procedure, then, of course, you will need to have a seed. Any fresh living seed would do, even the green-pea, sweet-pea, or both, comparing them. Now a pea within its pod is itself the product of the parent plants—the father pea and mother pea. Even so, you would need, do you not think, a “pre-seed” product of Nature? Consider going back to the real physical origin, the feminine cell in the flower, into which a bee transmits the pollen causing the whole procedure to begin at the physical level.

Eggs, also, of differing animal species would provide sources, facilitating research back from them through the planes to the divine concept, presumably at not only the planetary Causal plane, but also the solar system Causal plane and deeper and more interior still, the level at which the divine concept appears and is held—if such be the procedure?

Some enquiries, perhaps from your friend...

March 1981 - Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

We have to popularize a knowledge of Theosophy. Care must, however, be taken to guard against over-expression—especially overzealousness. As in all matters, especially personal characteristics, the highly important quality of discrimination, viveka, must also be increasingly developed and very watchfully applied.

10 April 1981

Master Morya

Yes, continue more deeply still teaching about correspondences,[244] at least for one more yoga class. Very carefully, as of course you will, put all correspondence teaching together for a public lecture and either an article for The Theosophist, a pamphlet, or both, presenting fully this important subject. Include your planned extracts from books (Manly Hall).

Your conjoined Theosophical lives are far from completed, in regard to literature and lectures. Your planned continuance of both is very important. We will also continue to help your work and support you both personally in your lives together, valued as they are by Ourselves.

7 May 1981 - Auckland

Master Morya

To fail to keep within the teachings of Theosophy the great Ideal of the Goal of Discipleship, would be to take the Heart and the Soul out of Theosophy.

The maintenance of the Path Ideal within the teachings and thought of the Theosophical Society, is one of the greatest if not the greatest responsibility before you in this life. Proceed. THE PATH IS THE HIDDEN LIFE AND LIGHT OF THE WORLD.

8 May 1981 - Auckland

Master Morya

Your article is the important thing. Work on it with your literary helper and transmit as soon as possible. Yes, another article on the ever open Path of Discipleship would be a very valuable contribution...

Perhaps you could open it with carefully selected quotations from three occult books: The Voice of the Silence, Light on the Path, and The Idyll of the White Lotus. Then add your own contributions. Certain of these, the most appropriate, could well be included in your European Letter. You will surely have even more than enough for two articles? If so, prepare and submit them, keeping the great “Heart Doctrine” [245]thoroughly alive. Will not the article with the above-mentioned quotations usefully serve for your two forthcoming public lectures?

We thank you for Basic Theosophy, now appearing, which includes that which “we have to popularize” so fully.

Your valued yoga for this time is “brain rest”.

9 May 1981 - Auckland

Master Morya

As always, in the closing periods of life-cycles, especially when aged, difficulties are experienced. Rest assured that We know every single one of them and watch over and are with you every time such difficulties occur.

10 May 1981 - Auckland

An Adept

The Path Ideal as part of the Society’s work and the reason for its founding—this whole subject—is of supreme importance.

Find your ways of introducing and developing it throughout the Society as you have done and are doing here. Write to each of those who have taken Steps presenting these ideas and appealing to them for ideas and practical aid. A letter should be formulated and sent to the above people. Use Our new disciples as collaborators.

Don’t hesitate to press the privilege of the opportunity.

15 May 1981 - Auckland

Master Morya

Although I may sometimes be firm with people, I also always “shake their hands”.

17 May 1981 - Auckland

Master Morya

Fear not, Geoffrey, the fundamental truths (of Theosophy) can never be successfully denied even though, perhaps, some people may doubt them. The planes of Nature, the devas, Ourselves, the privilege of Discipleship of a Master of the Wisdom, the existence of trained clairvoyance as a reliable instrument of research—cannot possibly be destroyed; for they are basic fundamental truths as you know and have proved only too well.

However, if you feel so moved, you might care to collect the available evidence of the correctness of your own research, and put it together in support of any basic Theosophical truths being challenged.

20 May 1981 - Auckland

Master Morya

[Geoffrey was pondering how the authors and lecturers of the Theosophical Society could make Theosophy more widely acceptable and accepted. The answer was immediately given to him by his Adept Teacher, Master Morya, as follows:]

The real answer is to make all the presentations of Theosophy so interesting and convincing that no one really wants anything else.

7 June 1981 - Auckland

An Adept

One part of the great value of The Diary is that it demonstrates that, although publicly closed, the Occult Life and Tradition of the planet • continues.

17 June 1981 - Auckland

Master Morya

If the Path Ideal as a practical part of Theosophy is over-reduced or, far worse, almost disappears from the teachings, this could be a disaster for Theosophy—if only because of the absence from the Society’s world contribution of personal idealism, and the assurance of its fulfilment with the aid of an Adept Spiritual Teacher.

17 June 1981 - Auckland

Master Morya

Geoffrey, consider the possibility of saying during such lectures, that all that is recorded as having happened two or three thousand years ago, ever continues in various forms, chiefly psychological. Similarly, present the concept that the Teacher is always both within reach of the aspirant and ever available, even if not necessarily visible. You might add to the statement that the Path is never closed, the words: AND THE MASTER IS ALWAYS PRESENT.

Make it clear that the Beings of the great stories are always both present and in action, whilst the stories themselves never cease. In other words, keep the whole Path Ideal fully alive and ever active instead of scriptural.

If possible, in your lectures on Ourselves, especially the Discipleship lecture, add a line or two stating that, despite the New Testament and even the scriptures of other nations, the Path is as freely open to females as to males. Otherwise, a certain over-accentuation of the importance of maledom might mistakenly be received.

Yes, include the Blessed Lady Mary in your lecture and, if necessary, quote suitably from one of the prayers in the Liberal Catholic Church

Liturgy. She is “ever within reach and ever present”. Refer to Her as you have planned, very beautifully, perhaps with a reference to such benedictions to the human race as “Our Lady of Lourdes” and the attainment of the siddhis by Yasodhara,[246] thereby balancing your presentation and the Western Theosophical teaching in which maledom is prominent. A fine story of St Clare and, if you think advisable, Mother Teresa of more modern times, would be appropriate.

4 July 1981 - Eastern Beach, Auckland

Master Morya

Blaze away with popularizing a knowledge of Theosophy.

August 1981 - Auckland

WE HAVE TO SATURATE THE WORLD WITH THEOSOPHY

As a ninety-five-year-old member of the Theosophical Society, I am convinced that any movement or even tendency to reduce or eliminate the purpose for which the Masters founded the Theosophical Society—to popularize a knowledge of Theosophy—would be entirely contrary both to the fulfilment of that purpose and the reduction of the danger of mutual destruction by members of the human race, with its present means of such destruction. Indeed, I would presume to affirm that the greatest need in the world today is to saturate the world with a knowledge of Theosophy: especially Oneness of the life in all beings, the purpose for the incarnation of human Monads in physical bodies, the method of its fulfilment—reincarnation—under the inescapable Law of Cause and Effect.

Just as a great Adept wrote: “But if not (that is, if Theosophy does not prevail), then the storm will burst and our boasted Western civilization and enlightenment will sink into such a sea of horror that its parallel in history has never yet been recorded.” Even far greater is that danger at this time in human history.

Therefore, I repeat, I find myself convinced that we have to saturate the world with Theosophy.

4 August 1981 - Auckland

Master Morya

The earth is the planet in the solar system upon which Monads can become Adepts.

23 August 1981 - Auckland

Master Morya

TEACHING UPON OCCULTISM

One of the greatest dangers in receiving teaching from invisible sources is, and has long been, that the recipient allows himself to continue long after the occult source has ceased to inspire. You are free from this. Indeed, one of your values, Geoffrey, is your matter-of-factness in these directions. A most valuable faculty of the true sibyl is knowledge of when to stop.

29 August 1981 - Auckland

The important deepening of realized relationship with the Master is, perhaps, best attained by the regular practice of yoga somewhat as follows, after adaptation to personal tendencies:

Master Morya

YOGA

The eternal and so immortal Spiritual Self that I am is absolutely identical and identified with the Eternal and so immortal Spiritual Self of the Universe. I am That Eternal Self, That am I.

Dwell upon this one central Truth in order that it may increasingly become profoundly and omnipotently true for oneself.

Unless the admitted limitations of capacity, opportunity, time, and energy permit this practice to be followed—realization of relationship with one’s Master as a vital influence in one’s life and the described expansions of consciousness will not often be achieved.

True, one’s Inner Self is performing this yoga at the Causal and higher levels frequently if not almost continuously. Nevertheless, the brain-mind requires to be increasingly sensitized in terms of response to the one central Truth, namely: I am That, That am I.

Although the word may seem to have some undesirable meanings, nevertheless, it is always well, occultly, when the above practice becomes a physical and mental HABIT.

*****

Master Morya

Kill the idea of Discipleship (of a Master of the Wisdom) and you could almost kill the Theosophical Society.

*****

Prepare lecture notes on Discipleship as an article and have your typist type them and then distribute them. Geoffrey, spread a great movement for the establishment and preservation of Discipleship as a very important aspect of the work of the Theosophical Society—your mission.

31 August 1981 - Auckland

An Adept

The Egos know unquestionably, so also astro-mentally during sleep, whether they have (including the physical personality) taken Steps [upon the Pathway leading to Adeptship],

Meditation on the Master and service under Him is strongly advised. Knowledge will then come to the brain as an interior assurance of the relationship with the Master—if not as a realization of the actual occurrence of this event during the body’s sleep, then as an interior certainty that this event has occurred.

This interior assurance comes directly from one’s own spiritual Self or Ego. Steadfast belief in this knowledge that has been given can be a verity of one’s own Egoic knowledge and participation in the event.

1 September 1981 - Auckland

Master Morya

Geoffrey, keep the consciousness of Oneness going and it will keep you going. Contemplation of Oneness is the greatest preserver of your continued bodily life. Hence your youthfulness.

2 September 1981

An Adept

The most mysterious and the most powerful condition in the world is STILLNESS—whether concerning knowledge or sound. Hence: “Be still and know that I am God.”¹

23 September 1981 - Auckland

Master Morya

A MORNING GUIDANCE IN MEDITATION—COSMIC CONSCIOUSNESS

Each of the component parts of the Universe is important. The Stars and their Logoi are of extreme importance, but the Cosmos as a Whole is of supreme importance. Deeply contemplate them both but realize identity with the Whole. An expansion of consciousness then begins.

Every atom of the physical body and all other bodies is “pregnant” with the Whole. Each atom and also the Whole are One. The intervening space is composed of atoms, every one of which is pregnant with the Whole. Realize with increasing clarity the identity of every atom of all one’s bodies with the Whole.

Affirm and ever more fully and deeply realize: I am the WHOLE.

These are not separate ideas; for each one contains the Whole.

[To Geoffrey:] Rest in peace now for a while. All is contained and implied in the one word—Aum. Every Adept abides perpetually therein. Do thou similarly abide.

October 1981 - Auckland

Master Morya

READMISSION TO THE ANCIENT MYSTERIES

(Guidance for a Lecture to the Young Theosophists)

Inform the young people that We have made available a doorway, entrance, or re-entrance to the Ancient Mysteries in modern times by the establishment of the Esoteric School within the Theosophical Society and its availability to members. This, I consider to be perhaps the greatest of all privileges open to human beings—an open doorway to the Timeless Mysteries.

1. With the correct motive, passage through this gateway or doorway to a Temple of the Timeless Mysteries can lead to still greater privileges, namely, knowledge of the more esoteric aspects of Theosophy.

2. Assistance by a Master is available, whether realized or not, in finding and treading the Ancient Pathway and adoption and acceptance as a disciple of a Master, with all the spiritual, intellectual, and physical opportunities and aid which such a relationship, properly received, ensures for the privileged disciple.

3. If it be asked: “What quality and what purpose cause the aspirant thus to advance?” the answer throughout all ages and today is: “Aspiration to be ever more effective in the service of others”. All this is to be realized with increasing clarity.

17 October 1981 (9:15 a.m.) Auckland

Master Morya

The weight on your mind concerning your long and effective contribution to Our Work will be from this time notably lifted. The completion of the two books draws near, lifting a great load from your responsive heart and leaving you clearer for the building of their successors.

In addition, your contribution to the Lodge and Section will be likely to be more easily made; for your lives will be much lighter from next year onwards.

[Later in the day Master Polidorus Isurenus said to him:]

In your literary life, you are entering upon a good long period of lighter life—holiday, in fact

[Geoffrey said, “I have to watch myself that I do not put on my ‘holiday clothes’ yet...!”]

10 November 1981 - Eastern Beach, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Whenever there is an assembly of people, whether public or private, arranged by a pupil or Initiate, there may always be present at least one person who instinctively or intuitively is longing for Discipleship, the Initiations, and who is even eligible for Theosophical privileges.

Of extreme importance—and completely decisive—is the total absence of self-desire, selfishness, and egoism as part of the governing motive. The welfare of the world and, therefore, of all human beings who could benefit from the privilege must be the single motive existing within the aspirant’s heart and mind; for the slightest trace of either self-gain or pridefulness could, and almost certainly will, prevent the fulfilment of the otherwise idealistic aspiration for Discipleship.

Lofty and illuminating as the attainment of Discipleship is and ever will be, equally deep are the depths and the darknesses into which the thought of worldly gain can lead the self-minded seeker.

Therefore, it is wise and helpful on all suitable occasions to speak convincingly of the Ever Open Path of Discipleship.

15 December 1981

An Adept

Progress is gained not only, or so much, from solving problems as from enduring them.

16 December 1981

Master Nylghara

[Geoffrey says that the superphysical Presence of the Master Nylghara is made known to him by a physically experienced “auric touch”. Master Nylghara comments:]

I do not wear the saffron robe now, but some of the colour saffron remains in my aura, as you see.

[On a previous occasion, Geoffrey told me that the Master Nylghara’s aura shows a very wonderful glowing saffron, glowing as if lighted from within, and beyond it shines a silvery white radiance.]

1981

An Adept

THE COSMIC SUN-SELF

The reincarnating human entity is a divine, immortal, formless, radiant Spirit-Centre of God-Power and intuitive Intelligence.

What the sun is to the solar system, the Cosmic “Sun”-Self of a human entity is to the bodily person. I am That, That am I.

The Self which I am is one with the Self in ALL. I am That Self in All, That Self am I.

When we gather together as Monad-Egos or Sun-Selves in the higher planes, we are a collective aggregate of Cosmic Sun-Selves. We are lit by an invisible Sun-Self within us, the divine Light that lighteth every man that cometh into the world. I am one with all my loved ones in barrier-less, cosmic Sun-Self-ness.

The Solar Logos is a Solar “Sun” accompanying and penetrating the whole Solar System with all its manifold Sun-forms and Selves likewise the Cosmic Logos and the vast Cosmic System.

1982-1983

3 January 1982 - Auckland

Master Morya

Our purpose and yours is to bring all mankind into a harmonized unity.

17 January 1982 - Auckland

Master Morya

[to Sandra]

The arrival of Dr Robinson’s confirmation is the most important event of this year. No other occultist in history has ever been submitted to complete scientific tests carried out by scientists. Hence, the great value of the two affirmations^{^[247]} of conviction after strict tests that undoubtedly Geoffrey not only has clairvoyant power, but is able to use it accurately for both scientific and occult research.

The testaments should appear in every book of Geoffrey’s where clairvoyance has been the source of the knowledge which the book conveys. The original documents should be preserved with the greatest care and when suitable made available to the publishers. The originals might well be placed in the hands of your lawyers for complete preservation.

This is the most important, purely physical support for your work you have received, Geoffrey. We greatly congratulate you on this unique, almost worldly affirmation.

TRIBUTES FROM SCIENTISTS

(Three scientists, who have worked closely with Geoffrey Hodson in various fields of occult research, bear testimony to the scientific impartiality and accuracy of his clairvoyant powers.)

“I was able to work very closely with Geoffrey Hodson for sane months during the late ‘fifties testing his clairvoyant powers on pieces of fossils of early man about two million years of age. Each session carried out in the field site from which the specimens came, was recorded cm a tape recorder. No indication was given him what I thought of his information until after the series of tests were completed and analysed. Many of the questions put to him required answers which could not be positively checked against known original specimens. The analysis showed that every statement made by him which was able to be positively checked against known specimens was absolutely accurate, and most of what could not be positively checked was in close agreement with what was thought to be correct

“At that time almost all of the known fossil material of these early hominids was in my laboratory, and Geoffrey did not see any of it until after the investigations were completed. I was impressed by the extreme care he took over being as accurate and clear as he could be in the observations he made, as well as his descriptions of them in such a way that his words were as precise as possible in offering the least possibility of misinterpretation.

“At each session a small number (2-4) of specimens were dealt with, and some were presented several times at more than one session without telling him this. He never handled the specimens himself; I placed them on his forehead while he was lying on his back with his eyes closed in a state of yoga. Two different species of hominid were used mixed at random, only small specimens being used, e.g. a single tooth.

“He never misidentified a specimen or gave conflicting statements about a specimen that had been presented more than once. As far as I could determine his information was always accurate and he gave me a strong impression of complete reliability.”

Professor J.T. Robinson, D. Sc.

4 January 1982

“I, of course, would be happy to state unequivocally my belief that Geoffrey Hodson possesses powers of accurate clairvoyant research.

“During the years 1956 to 1959 I was fortunate enough to work with Geoffrey Hodson. My contribution was to record his observations on the clairvoyant appearance of subatomic matter, I now have some forty hours on cassette tape giving a verbatim account of the experiments we performed. There is no doubt whatsoever in my mind that Geoffrey possesses quite remarkable powers of extra-sensory perception and invariably used these faculties with meticulous regard for accuracy in both observation and description. He frequently stressed the selective nature of clairvoyant observation and was fully aware of the pitfalls associated with the translation of what can be called ‘raw extra-sensory data’ through the brain-mind into words capable of conveying useful meaning to his hearers. Throughout these sessions he was a model of scientific caution, taking every possible care not to make statements that might be misleading.”

David D. Lyness, M.B.Ch.B., D.P.M., M.A.N.Z.C.P.

10 September 1981

“For many years, Geoffrey Hodson has co-operated with various scientifically qualified people in attempts to demonstrate the research potential of superphysical faculties of perception, with which he is evidently highly gifted. From 1978 to 1981 I was closely associated with him as assistant and technical adviser in two such pieces of research.

“The first of these was an extensive series of observations of the superphysical effects of musical sounds and pieces. The record of his descriptions of these effects is extremely interesting from the artistic, acoustic, psychosomatic, and other points of view.

“The second main area, undertaken at the request of Dr E. Lester Smith of England, was an attempt to make further observations of matter at the atomic and subatomic levels with a view to testing recent hypotheses on the interpretation of the Occult Chemistry findings of C.W. Leadbeater and Annie Besant. This work has produced a number of tape recordings of Geoffrey Hodson’s descriptions which are in the process of being transcribed and will be sent to England for analysis.

“Having been present with him throughout the approximately twenty hour-long sessions in these two investigations, I feel able to offer some impressions of his attitude and approach to this work.

“I have been repeatedly struck by his integrity and uncompromising desire to seek the truth in every situation, regardless of any risk of possible conflict with established findings of the scientific establishment or of earlier Theosophical investigators. At the same time, he is clearly aware of the difficulties and limitations inherent in any process of observation, especially one involving inner levels of the psyche, and has a tremendously careful and indeed craftsmanlike attitude to the handling and direction of his extended perceptive abilities.

“In my opinion, Geoffrey Hodson has amply succeeded in his goals of: (a) indicating the potential of superphysical research methods, (b) producing material of great interest to the enquiring mind, and (c) providing a stimulus to others to follow in his footsteps and expand and consolidate this work.”

Murray A. Stentiford, M.Sc. (physics)

May 1982

19 January 1982 - Auckland

Master Nylghara

ONE WORLD, ONE HUMANITY, ONE LIFE

No effort which you can make will be too great, if it brings about a return of the Theosophical Society as a whole to its original interests, including the Masters and Discipleship. The tendency is for this ideal to be neglected or ignored, largely because of the absence of speakers on the subject who obviously know the Masters. It is also largely because humanity is becoming increasingly interested in the physical world and plane, with all its possibilities and wonders, together with, however, all its dangers, which are very acute at this time.

One philosophic “note” which, therefore, may very well be repeated is that of the Universal Brotherhood of Man—the First Object of the Theosophical Society—and its inspiration to lift people’s mental attitude above the national limitations and characteristics.

The message of Theosophy to the world, it may be suggested, is at this time: ONE WORLD, ONE HUMANITY in which is incarnated and evolves, ONE LIFE. In other words, the natural tendency of nations and their people to be nationalistic, even in the highest meaning of the word, should be reduced until it almost disappears, as one day of course, it will.

So, Geoffrey, together with your many offerings why not add this one: ONE WORLD, ONE PEOPLE, ONE LIFE, AND ONE GOAL—ADEPTSHIP.

Your closing ideas for this country are simply splendid, especially the wonderful illustrations and, if it may be, the wonderful books thus named to follow. Nationalism must begin to be more and more overridden, until as soon as possible it disappears.

[The Master Polidorus Isurenus adds:]

Very, very true; nationhood even, will one day be outgrown; hence the inspiration for Our First Object, in part at least

When one looks at the state of the nations of the world from the point of view of the First Object, whilst some nations are joining closely together, the groups they form seem to be more widely divided and separated than ever before—and very dangerously so.

The great call of the Theosophical Society—or one part of it—could therefore well be: “TO FORM A BROTHERHOOD OF ALL THE NATIONS OF THE WORLD” and not only of individuals.

Work with that, Geoffrey, Our greatly needed message to mankind at this time. Work this out if you can and send an article to The Theosophist, and in a modified form to the magazine of your own Section. Enough for tonight.

Master Polidorus Isurenus

2 March 1982

The Master Morya said to Geoffrey, “You could hardly have chosen a better subject for the closure of your lecturing career [Kundalini—the primal power in man].”

11 March 1982 - Epsom, Auckland

A Great Feminine Chohan

Geoffrey, you are wonderfully fulfilling these later years of your life.

[He replied, “There is nothing more wonderful in the world than to be spreading the Gospel of Theosophia.”]

Every Initiate and every Adept must be a vegetarian, and have been so whilst he thus achieved. Such is one of the Great Laws. If it were not so, the sinfulness of cruelty to human beings and animals would not cease. Voluntary and deliberate cruelty is always a crime; it is one of the very greatest of sins. Therefore, Geoffrey, continue personally to practise, stand for in the world, and teach the virtue of compassion—and, if you choose, the sinfulness of cruelty.

The Lord Buddha became a vegetarian as He embarked upon the final stages of the attainment in which the virtue of compassion is essential.

12 March 1982 (8-10:00 a.m.)

Master Morya

We don’t greet you this morning because you are always here.

[Geoffrey had been endeavouring to work out the exact time of his birth in the parish of Wainfleet-St Mary’s, Lincolnshire, England, and was somewhat undecided. The Master Morya said:]

The birthday time was about 6:00 a.m. in England and 6:00 p.m. here in New Zealand.

25 March 1982 - Auckland

Meditating upon Aham Evam Par am Brahman, Geoffrey experienced and “heard”:

“The whole Universe is ablaze with the Solar Light from the Logos of the Spiritual Sun.”

25 March 1982 - Auckland

Master Morya

In Our Brotherhood, every member, every single one, is equally valued and there is no placing of one Initiate-Brother above or below another, for all are highly valued in their Initiate membership with Ourselves.

4 May 1982 - Auckland

Geoffrey gave his last public lecture at the H.P.B. Lodge of the Theosophical Society on this date, at the age of ninety-six years. It was entitled “Kundalini-Shakti, its Use in Occult Research”.

After the lecture, the Master Morya said to him, “I listened throughout, at the time of delivery …

5 May 1982

Master Morya

... Another important part of the value of your last lecture was and is[248] that your voice can be heard pronouncing the results of your research and the actual scenes of doing so are available; for these two facts render it impossible for any would-be enemy to class you as a pure visionary and Theosophy as without immediate practical value. These are proven and will long continue to be true.

Geoffrey, the lecture not only reveals with proof the truth of the teachings of Theosophy, but also that there is the provision of means of proving their factuality. In addition, it presents both audible and visible proofs of that very valuable aspect of Theosophy, namely, its very practical capability of being applied to the solution of solid material problems. Not only now, but in the future, these will be important supports for Theosophia...

5 June 1982

An Adept

Not one article you have ever written should be lost, whilst every new one you write must be preserved, and as heretofore, all published in a further Geoffrey Hodson book.

Our message to you at least, if not to every member Theosophy must be preserved.

13 June 1982

An Adept

One of the utterly essential qualities which makes fully conscious and correct reception of a Master’s teaching possible by the recipient is an utmost, natural, inborn reverence for the communicating Adept, indeed, for all Adept Members of the Great White Brotherhood upon our earth. If this quality did not exist, communication by the Adepts would not ever be either begun or be continued; for as you know, Geoffrey, real reverence depends upon uttermost selflessness.

Yasoda, the foster Mother of the Lord Shri Krishna, may sometimes have seemed only to waver or even lack this gracious quality, but never once did Arjuna do so. Therefore, he was granted on the battlefield of life itself, the vision splendid.^{^[249]}

29 June 1982

An Adept

The greatest loss for members of the Theosophical Society would be the “loss” of the actual reality of the existence of the Masters, and the greatest gain would be the increasing “recovery” of the reality of the Masters.[250]

At least two purposes moved Us to found the T.S.:

(a) To popularize a knowledge of Theosophy sufficiently to reduce the likelihood of world wars, and

(b) To discover disciples.

Even if the first has not been sufficiently achieved as yet, who knows how many wars have been prevented and will continue to be prevented the great and immediate work of our Society in the world.

Three further objectives would, therefore, seem to be:

(a) The founding and spreading of enthusiasm or dedication for the establishment and assurance of world peace.

(b) The acceptance and adoption—especially in the Western world—of the Path of Discipleship Ideal.

(c) An ever increasing enthusiasm for the practice by humanity of the ideal of humaneness in thought, feeling, and conduct, especially in the Western world, applied particularly to children and animals.

In spite of apparent failure, the gospel of humaneness has been accepted and applied by an increasing number of people.

7 July 1982

Master Morya

The period after Sandra’s eyesight ha£ been restored will be active for you both in the literary field. All the many outstanding and some halffinished manuscripts will then be concentrated upon—very valuably...

17 July 1982

An Adept

...The Brotherhood of man is most gravely needed, not only as an utterance of Truth, but as an irresistible interior experience continually expressed in the conduct of one’s life, and in all relationships with one’s fellow men...

20 July 1982 - Auckland

Geoffrey says that he has a very strong impression of being with his Master, the Master Morya, during the night, and that the Master is remembered as being, amongst all His other qualities, an incarnation of Power. Geoffrey says to me, “In my conscious mind I am with Master Morya in His Power Aspect, as if it was to inspire and support us in the time ahead to maintain continuous attention to the remaining literary work.”

The Master Morya said to Geoffrey, “My appearance to you last night in terms of ‘Power’ was not so as to order you but to provide you with energy, not with ‘emergency’, but with the importance of your new Life.”

*****

Every association with a Master of the Wisdom is hallowed.

30 July 1982 - Auckland

Master Nylghara

Parabrahman—the interior Divinity. You don’t attain it—it flowers.

August 1982 - Auckland

THE ORIGINATION OF GEOFFREY HODSON’S BOOKS

The Master causes Geoffrey to know the inner meaning of the Scriptures or other literary texts. The procedure of this is as follows: the knowledge within the Master’s mind awakens within Geoffrey’s own mind. It is not a procedure of clairaudience—for no sound is ever heard—but interiorly transferred active understanding and, quite often, with an accompanying state of upliftment. It is the transference from one conscious mind to another fully conscious mind.

Geoffrey comments, saying, “During reception, ideas are caused to arise and to become established within my own mind in full Selfconsciousness—hyper-Self-consciousness, in fact—as if it were my own knowledge. The same procedure is undergone when I read a passage to be interpreted. My mind becomes illumined and inspired with the deep spiritual and occult significance of the literary passage. Thus, the difference between mediumistic methods and Self-conscious intuitive reception of the Masters’ teachings is that the former, mediumistic, is external, passing from one mind to another unconscious mind, whilst the latter, origination—the arising of knowledge from the Master within one’s own mind—is entirely interior.”

Geoffrey describes the process in the following words:

“It is somewhat like a teacher saying to a disciple: ‘Do you see that lighthouse over there?’

“Answered by the disciple: ‘Yes, Master, I do clearly see it and the Light shining from it’—meaning the interior Wisdom shining from within it.”

2 August 1982

An Adept

Geoffrey, some day (in a future life) you will do [for history] what you have publicly done for fossils. Probably, in your next life, you will be an “official restorer of history”—a revealer of the past.

Early August 1982

Master Kuthumi

[Geoffrey had awakened in the morning unusually disturbed. The Master communicated the following message to him:]

You were caught in very adverse out-of-the-body ministrations and these proved to be much of a shock to you. Happily, this was not remembered (on waking in the morning) even though the effects were very noticeable. Eventually, We brought you to sleep.

[The news in the morning newspaper revealed that this night experience coincided with the warfare in Kenya, Central Africa, with which place Geoffrey has had close connections in the past and in the present.]

The situation there continues to be very serious. Perhaps you would hold the city of Nairobi and the Kenyan Government in your Invocations for peace for a few weeks according to conditions. Indeed, a war is being waged there and this most gravely disturbed you last night... In the meantime, continue your wise restfulness.

27 August 1982

Master Morya

Try to state and describe the happiness-giving and elevating beauty of the life of aspiration to Discipleship – perhaps the greatest assurance of happiness for mankind…

Query: title of an article: “The surest way to happiness” or “The surest way to a life of happiness is to follow the Discipleship Ideal”.

Let it ever be remembered that the reason or motive for following the life of aspiration to Discipleship is to become a more effective servant of one’s fellow human beings.

Geoffrey, ponder this, frame it

* *

Geoffrey says, “We must suggest answers to the above statements; but hardly anyone either knows or sees the Masters.” The Master replies, “Hence, the Esoteric Section of the Theosophical Society.”^{^[251]}

5 September 1982 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Kuthumi

[Geoffrey says to me, “A wonderful Presence.”]

Endeavour to complete, ready for presentation, Volume II of Music Forms whilst at Eastern Beach. Receive now as health and demands permit. Try to complete whilst on a holiday.

(Master smiles)—Myself, your first Master. K.H.

18 September 1982 - Epsom, Auckland

Master Morya

Prepare the teaching for members of the Theosophical Society concerning knowledge of the Masters. Then send a copy with kind explanatory remarks to My new disciple.

In addition, offer it as an article to either The Theosophist or the New Zealand magazine. (With the above comes: “How The Masters may become Greater Realities”.)

Near the end reiterate: “Regularly and wisely practise the Science of Yoga”.

HOW THE MASTERS MAY BECOME REALITIES FOR THE STUDENT OF THEOSOPHY

(Some Suggestions by Geoffrey Hodson)

(a) Dwell in thought upon all available material concerning the revered Masters.

(b) Carefully note a special interest in One or more of Them arising in your mind and heart as you do so.

(d) Perceive increasingly the tremendous importance, both to humanity as a whole and to every single individual, of this Their purpose.

(e) Form and follow the habit of dwelling upon these great Presences, granting Them ever increasing time and place in your own thought and your unfolding motives for living, thus becoming increasingly absorbed in the concept of the existence of the Great Brotherhood and, when natural, of an individual Master.

(f) Do not always regard a Master as being restrictively located or using physical consciousness. Rather remember, and often repeat, the following beautiful words of H.P. Blavatsky: “He standeth now like a white pillar to the West upon whose face the rising sun of thought eternal poureth forth its first most glorious waves. His mind like a becalmed and boundless ocean, spreadeth out in shoreless space. He holdeth life and death in His strong hand.”^{^[252]}

(g) Allow these ideas increasingly to absorb your interest in life, and your most effective and practical work to be done for humanity’s sake. Very privately and humbly offer yourself as a channel for the Masters’ benedictions to the world. Form the habit of healing and helping groups and individuals, if only mentally and privately, visualizing the Masters and invoking Their aid.

(h) Permit and even enforce all the above to become increasingly the very meaning, purpose, and motive for your existence, your present incarnation, and your work, dedicating yourself without the very slightest thought of personal gain.

(i) Regularly and wisely practise the Science of Yoga.

28 September 1982 - 17 Belvedere Street, Epsom, Auckland

Geoffrey said to the Master, referring to Music Forms, Volume II, “My last work, Master.”

The Master Polidorus Isurenus answered and said, “A most important work.”

15 October 1982 Epsom, Auckland

Master Polidorus Isurenus

Yes, Sandra, a daily Healing Service for Geoffrey would be valuable.

25 October 1982 Epsom, Auckland

Master Morya

Use the Shrine and Ourselves more frequently until Geoffrey is better.

29 October 1982

After Geoffrey had sorted his considerable pile of mail into three groups – “urgent”, “soon”, and “keep” – Master Morya commented to him, “The least fortunate are those who have no list of tasks awaiting them. Fortunate are those who have a larger list than they are able easily to fulfil.”

6 November 1982

THE HEART OF YOGA

Two great things exist:

1. The Cosmos.

2. That of which it is a manifestation.

These can become experiences in consciousness—the true objective of yoga.

Is there an aspect of THAT which is motionless? Consciousness of the lower self must be reduced to the absolute minimum before this question can be answered; hence the phrase “Be still and know that I am God.”[253]

16 November 1982 - Auckland

The widest distances in space are here.

17 November 1982

Geoffrey said, “One spirit exists in spite of myriad forms.” He feels that there will only be lasting peace on earth when that Truth is recognized.

19 November 1982

Geoffrey had gone back in thought to his childhood at his father’s estate in England, called Bethlem Farm, and was relating some of his more memorable experiences of that time. He went on to tell me, “When I was about four years old, I realized the existence of a secret disciplined Brotherhood. When the thought occurred to my childlike brain, I was actually standing in a position facing Greece, Egypt, and the Middle East Strangely enough, it was outside the front door of the house. I now realize that I was remembering, however faintly, past lives in that part of the world—Greece, Egypt, and Palestine. That is where, in those former lives, my great occult experiences were passed through.”

15 January 1983 - Auckland

Master Morya

Let us enter into Music Forms work. Arrange with your helper...

16 January 1983 - Auckland

Master Morya

Today is a rest... Stay near him, Sandra. Let him sip if he likes and sleep also.

*****

Geoffrey left us peacefully in the early morning of 23 January 1983. Our home seemed to me then, to be steeped in a blessed stillness and silence that nothing could disturb. Upon Geoffrey’s face there was an expression of utter peace and joyous serenity—beyond any words. It was as though the Masters were so very close at this time.

In looking back over our life together and before the world, I can testify that never once has he ever made any claim to greatness or to the superior powers which he most truly possessed. He was the most humble of men, living his whole occult and spiritual life in secrecy and anonymity. Geoffrey has wrought mightily and heroically in the selfless service of humanity and of the Most High, and his inspired utterances will ring out to all Theosophists and those ready to receive the Ageless Wisdom—Theosophia—throughout this second century of the life of the Parent and other Theosophical Societies as the message of one who was a Light-bringer.

ABBREVIATIONS

A.B. Dr. Annie Besant

C.W.L. C.W. Leadbeater

E.S. Esoteric School (of the Theosophical Society)

F.T.S Fellow of the Theosophical Society

Gr. Greek

Heb. Hebrew

H.P.B H.P. Blavatsky

H.S.O. H.S. Olcott

Lit. Literally

Sk. Sanskrit

Tib. Tibetan

T.P.H. Theosophical Publishing House

T.S. Theosophical Society

GLOSSARY

Adept (Latin—Adeptus, “He who has obtained”): An Initiate of the Fifth Degree in the Greater Mysteries, a Master in the science of esoteric philosophy, a perfected man, an exalted Being Who has attained complete mastery over His purely human nature and possesses knowledge and power commensurate with lofty evolutionary stature. A fully Initiated Being Who watches over and guides the progress of humanity.

Adi (Sk.): “The first, the primeval”. The Foundation Plane, the first field of manifestation, “the foundation of a universe, its support and the fount of its life”. For an exposition of the seven planes of Nature, see Through the Gateway of Death, by G. Hodson.

Ahamkara (Sk.): The first tendency towards definiteness, regarded as the origin of all manifestation. In man the conception of “I”, selfconsciousness or self-identity, the illusion of self as a self-separate existence in contradistinction to the reality of the universal One Self. The illusion of separateness, the “Great Heresy”, is regarded as the source of human sorrow and suffering. Self-emancipation from this delusion is the sure way to happiness and peace.

Ajna Chakram (Sk.): The sixth chakram, centred at the brow. See Chakra.

Akasha (Sk.): The subtle supersensuous spiritual essence which pervades all space. See Kundalini Shakti.

Anaktoron (Gr.): The secret shrine in which Initiation was conferred at Eleusis in Greece (The Eleusinian Mysteries). See Mysteries.

Anhatta (Sk.): The doctrine of non-separateness of all forms of life. As applied to man, it states that there is no permanent ego or self in the five skandhas which make up the personality. The Buddha, however, nowhere denied the existence of an ego or soul, but taught that no permanent entity can be found in any of the human faculties.

Antahkarana (Sk.): The path or bridge between the Higher and Lower Manas.

Anupadaka (Sk.): “Parentless”, “self-existing”, born without any parents or progenitors. A term applied to certain self-created gods, and the Dhyani Buddhas.

Archetype (Gr.): “First-moulded” or stamped. The ideal, abstract, or essential “idea”. The divine conceiving from which arises the divine “idea” of the whole universe in time and space; the governing power in creation.

Arhat (Sk.): “The worthy”. Exoterically, “one worthy of divine honours”. Esoterically, an Initiate of the Fourth Degree who has entered the highest Path and is thus emancipated from both self-separateness and enforced rebirth.

Arupa (Sk.): Bodiless, formless, as opposed to rupa, body or form. This term is most often used as a qualification of the Manasic Plane, the three higher or innermost conditions of this being described as the arupa levels.

Asana (Sk.): The third stage of Raja Yoga; one of the prescribed postures of meditation.

Asekha (Sk.): In Buddhism, one Who has nothing more to learn; one of the Hierarchy above the Arhat; an Initiate of the Fifth Degree, an Adept.

Ashram (Sk.): A sacred building, a monastery or hermitage for ascetic purposes.

Astral: The region of the expression of all feelings and desires of the human soul. See also Kama.

Astral Light: The invisible region that surrounds our globe... a subtle Essence visible only to the clairvoyant eye, and the lowest but one (viz. the earth), of the Seven Akashic or Cosmic Principles.

Asuras (Sk.): Exoterically, elementals and evil gods—considered maleficent, demons, and no gods. But esoterically—the reverse. For in the most ancient portions of the Rig Veda, the term is used for the Supreme Spirit, and therefore the Asuras are spiritual and divine. See Pitris.

Atma (Sk.): Universal Spirit—The seventh principle in the septenary constitution of man, the Supreme Soul. The faculty which manifests as spiritual will.

Augoeides (Gr.): “The self-radiant divine fragment”, the Robe of Glory of the Gnostics and the Karana Sharira, Causal body, of Hinduism.

Aum (Sk.): The name of the triple Deity. A syllable of affirmation, invocation, and divine benediction.

Avalokiteshvara (Sk.): “The on-looking Lord”, the manifested Logos, Ishvara.

Avatar (Sk.): The doctrine of Divine incarnation or “descent”.

Avatara (Sk.): “Descent”. The incarnation of a Deity, especially Vishnu, the Second Aspect of the Hindu Trimurti.

Bodhisattva (Sk.): Lit. “He whose essence (sattva) has become intelligence (bodhi)”. He who needs but one more incarnation to become a perfect Buddha. See entry of 10 May 1943.

Brahpia (Brahman) (Sk.): The impersonal, supreme and incognizable Principle of the Universe, from the essence of which all emanates and into which all returns.

Brahma Vidya (Sk.): “The wisdom of Brahma”, the Supreme Deity.

Buddhi (Sk.): Universal Soul. The sixth principle in the septenary constitution of man, that of intuitive wisdom, vehicle of the seventh, Atma. The faculty which manifests as spiritual intuitiveness.

Causal Body: The immortal body of the reincarnating Ego of man, built of matter of the “higher” levels of the mental world. It is called Causal because it gathers up within it the results of all experiences, and these act as causes moulding future lives and influencing future conduct.

Chakra (Sk.): A “wheel” or “disc”. A spinning, vortical, funnel-shaped force-centre with its opening on the surfaces of the etheric and subtler bodies of man, and its stem leading to the superphysical counterparts of the spinal cord and of nerve centres or glands. There are seven main chakras associated severally with the sacrum, the spleen, the solar plexus, the heart, the throat, the pituitary, and the pineal glands. Chakras are both organs of superphysical consciousness and conveyors of the life-force between the superphysical and physical bodies.

See The Chakras, by C.W. Leadbeater.

Chela (Sk.): A disciple or pupil.

Chohan (Tib.): “Lord” or “Master’’, a chief, thus Dhyan-Chohan would answer to “Chief of the Dhyanis”. A high Adept, or Initiate of the Sixth Degree. See Dhyani.

Correspondences: See Law of Correspondences.

Dana (Sk.): Charity, love. One of the six Paramitas. See Paramitas.

Devachan (Sk.): The “dwelling of the Gods”. A state intermediate between two earth-lives, into which the Ego enters after its separation from Kama Rupa, and the disintegration of the lower principles on earth.

Devas (Sk.): “Shining ones”, spiritual Beings, Planetary Logoi, and Hierarchies of Archangels and angels. The main stages of devic development each have their own name. Nature spirits, like animals and birds, are actuated by a group consciousness shared with others of the same genus. Gods, Sephiras, devas, and angels have evolved out of group consciousness into separate individuality, as has man. Archangels, especially, have transcended the limitations of individuality, and have entered into universal or cosmic consciousness, as has the Superman or Adept

Deva-Raja (Sk.): An Archangel—King Deva.

Dharma (Sk.): (That which is to be held.) Moral and religious duty; justice; right and orderly action; virtue. “Dharma is a wide word, primarily meaning the essential nature of a thing—that which makes it to be what it is externally; hence, the laws of its being—its duty. And it includes religious rites appropriate to those laws and customs—also righteousness.”—A. Besant.

Dharmakaya (Sk.): One of the three vestures of the Path. See The Voice of the Silence, by H.P. Blavatsky, vs. 140-5, 306.

Dhyani (Sk.): “Expert in Yoga”. Also a generic name for spiritual Beings, Planetary Logoi, and Hierarchies of Archangels and angels. The term Dhyana signifies a state of profound contemplation during which the Dhyani becomes united with the highest parts of his own constitution and communes therewith. Dhyan-Chohans, “Lords of Contemplation”, are members of the Host of Spiritual Beings who live in this exalted state and supervise the cyclic evolution of life and form in a Solar System. Monadically, man is an embryo Dhyan-Chohan, and at the close of the Planetary Age will himself have become a fully developed “Lord of Contemplation”.

Ego: The threefold, immortal, unfolding spiritual Self of man in its vesture of light, the “Robe of Glory” of the Gnostics and the Karana Sharira or Causal body of Hindu philosophy. This higher Triad evolves to Adeptship by virtue of successive lives on earth, all linked together because they are reincarnations of the same spiritual Self. Thus the Ego is an individualized manifestation of the Monad, which is the eternal Self of man, the dweller in the Innermost, a unit of the Spirit-Essence of the Universe. The term is used to denote the unfolding spiritual Self of man in which the attribute of individuality inheres. The adjective “Egoic” refers to the Ego in this sense.

Fohat (Tib.): “Divine Energy”. The constructive force of cosmic electricity, polarized into the positive and negative currents of terrestrial electricity; the ever present electrical energy; the universal, propellant, vital force.

Gandharvas (Sk.): Celestial choristers and musicians of India.

Gnana (Jnana) (Sk.): 1. Spiritual insight; the deeper or divine vision; wisdom, gnosis. 2. The Second Aspect of the Trinity.

Gnosis (Gr.): Lit. “knowledge”. The technical term used by the schools of religious philosophy, both before and during the first centuries of so-called Christianity, to denote the object of their enquiry. This spiritual and sacred knowledge, the Gupta Vidya of the Hindus, could only be obtained by Initiation into Spiritual Mysteries, of which the ceremonial “Mysteries” were a type.

Gnostics (Gr.): The philosophers who formulated and taught the Gnosis or knowledge. They flourished in the first three centuries of the Christian era. The following were eminent: Valentinus, Basilides, Marcion, Simon Magus.

God: In occult philosophy the term “God” in its highest meaning refers to a supreme, eternal, and indefinable Reality. This Absolute is inconceivable, ineffable, and unknowable. Its revealed existence is postulated in three terms: an absolute existence, an absolute consciousness, and an absolute bliss. Infinite consciousness is regarded as inherent in the Supreme Being as a dynamic force that manifests the potentialities held in its own infinitude, and calls into being forms out of its own formless depths.

Guna (Sk.): “A string or cord”. The three qualities or attributes inherent in matter: Rajas, activity, desire; Sattva, harmony, rhythm; Tamos, inertia, stagnation. These correspond to the three Aspects of the Trinity: Father, Son, and Holy Ghost; or Brahma, Vishnu, and Shiva respectively.

Guru (Sk.): An Adept Teacher.

Hierophant (Gr.): “One who explains sacred things”. The discloser of sacred learning and the Chief of the Initiates. A title belonging to the highest Adepts in the temples of antiquity, Who were teachers and expounders of the Mysteries and the Initiators into the final great Mysteries. See Eleusis and the Eleusinian Mysteries, by G.E. Mylonas; The Eleusinian Mysteries and Rites, by D. Wright; The Mysteries of Eleusis, by G. Méautis.

Ida (Sk.): See note on Kundalini Shakti.

Individualization: According to occult philosophy, animals have souls that are animated by group consciousness, a herd instinct arising from a group soul, and not from a single spiritual Soul as in humanity. In the course of evolution, out of this group soul a number of selfconscious Souls become differentiated. In this way the indwelling and unfolding life in Nature, having evolved during vast ages through the mineral, plant, and animal kingdoms, attains to the status of manhood or womanhood—thus entering the human kingdom. This natural procedure is termed “individualization”.

Initiate: From the Latin Initiatus. The designation of anyone who was received into and had revealed to him the mysteries and secrets of occult philosophy.

Initiation: A profound spiritual and psychological regeneration, as a result of which a new “birth”, a new beginning, and a new life are entered upon. The word itself, from the Latin Initia, also implies the basic or first principles of any science, suggesting that Initiates are consciously united with their own First Principle, the Monad from which they emerged. Both the Lesser and the Greater Mysteries, ancient and modern, confer Initiations of various Degrees upon successful candidates.

Ishvara (Sk.): The “Lord” or the personal god—divine spirit in man. Lit sovereign (independent) existence. A title given to Shiva and other Gods in India.

Kabbalah (Heb.): From QBLH, “an unwritten or oral tradition”. The hidden wisdom of the Hebrew Rabbis derived from the secret doctrine of the early Hebrew peoples. See The Kingdom of the Gods, Part III, Chapter IV, by G. Hodson.

Kali Yuga (Sk.): See Yuga.

Kama (Sk.): Evil desire, lust, volition; the cleaving to existence. Kama is generally identified with Mara, the tempter.

Kama-Manas (Sk.): The desire mind.

Karma (Sk.): “Action”, connecting both the law of action and re-action, cause and effect, and the result of its operation upon nations and individuals. See Reincarnation, Fact or Fallacy?, by G. Hodson.

Kriyashakti (Sk.): The creation of fornis by means of thought; hence the power—divine or human—to manifest. See The Secret Doctrine, by H.P. Blavatsky, Vol. 1 (Adyar Edition), p. 312.

Kumaras (Sk.): “Beings of original spiritual purity”. The four great Beings in the Occult Hierarchy of Adepts Who help on the evolution of humanity; also applied to the Ever Virgin Youth and His disciples, Who are said in occult philosophy to have founded the Adept Hierarchy on this planet. Sanat Kumara is the name given to this deeply revered Head or Chief of earth’s Adepts. See Lecture Notes of the School of the Wisdom, Vol. I (Revised Edition) Chapter XVI, Section 4, by G. Hodson.

Kundalini (Sk.): “The coiled up, universal Life Principle”. A sevenfold superphysical, occult power in Universe and man, functioning in the latter by means of a spiral or coiling action, mainly in the spinal cord but also throughout the nervous system. It is represented in Greek symbology by the Caduceus. When supemormally aroused, this fiery force ascends into the brain by a serpentine path, hence its other name, the “Serpent Fire”. See The Hidden Wisdom in the Holy Bible, Vol. I, Part III, Chapter I under “Serpents”; Lecture Notes of the School of the Wisdom, Vol. II, Chapter I, Section III, by G. Hodson; The Serpent Power, by A. Avalon (Sir John Woodroffe).

Kundalini Shakti (Sk.): The power of life; one of the forces of Nature. The occult electricity intimately associated with Azoth of the Alchemists, the creative principle in Nature, and Akasha, the subtle, supersensuous, spiritual essence which pervades all space. The seven-layered power in the base of the spine of man, composed of three currents which flow along three canals in the spinal cord, named Ida (negative), Pingala (positive), and Sushumna (neutral). These names are sometimes also applied (erroneously) to the currents of force which flow in these canals. See The Kingdom of the Gods, by Hodson.

Kurukshetra (Sk.): The Armageddon or great battlefield, typifying the area of the conflict between the spirit and its encasement. “The Kurukshetra of the universe is man.” (A. Besant). See The Bhagavad Gita.

Law of Correspondence, The: The harmonious co-ordination or mutual resonance between the many apparently separate parts of the Universe and corresponding parts of the constitution of man. Occult philosophy teaches that all components of both Macrocosm and microcosm are interwoven and interactive according to a universal system of vibrational interchange. In his spiritual, intellectual, psychical, and physical make-up, man is regarded as a miniature replica or epitome of the whole Order of created beings and things, a model of the totality of Nature. He is said to contain within himself the collective aggregate of all that has ever existed, does at any time exist and will ever exist throughout the eternity of eternities. The Chinese philosopher Lao Tzu expressed this in his words: “The Universe is a man on a large scale.” Eliphas Levi quotes from the Kabbalah: “The mystery of the earthly and mortal man is after the mystery of the supernal and immortal one.”

Lipikas (Sk.): The Celestial Recorders, the Agents of karma. Exoterically four and esoterically seven great “Scribes”. The Lords of Karma Who, as far as man is concerned, adjust beneficence and adversity resulting from former deeds.

Logos (Gr.): “The Word”. “A divine, spiritual Entity”. The manifested

Deity, the outward expression or effect of the ever concealed Cause. Thus speech is the Logos of thought, and Logos is correctly translated into Latin as Verbum and into English as “Word” in the metaphysical sense.

Macrocosm (Gr.): Lit “Great Universe” or Cosmos.

Maha (Sk.): Great. A prefix and qualification of other Sanskrit words as below.

Maha-Chohan (Sk.): “Great Lord”; also descriptive of a Grade of Adeptship, that of the Seventh Initiation. See Lecture Notes of the School of the Wisdom, Vol. I (Revised Edition), Chapter XVI, Sections 3 and 5, by G. Hodson.

Maha-Manvantara (Sk.): Great interlude between the Manus or Creative Logoi. The major, total period of universal activity which includes numberless inner cycles, finite and conditioned or minor periods called Manvantaras.

Maha-Tattva (Sk.): See Tattva.

Mahatma (Sk.): Lit. “great soul”. An Adept of the highest order.

Man (Constitution of): Man is that being in whom highest spirit (Monad) and lowest matter (body) are united by intellect Man is a microcosm, a miniature reproduction of the Macrocosm, and is therefore rightly said to be made in the image of his Creator. The following is a diagramatic representation of the constitution of man.

Manas (Sk.): Mind.

(c)The world of mind or mental forms; the field of consciousness that lies between the Buddhic and astral planes.

(ci) The mind of man. Manas is known to Theosophists under two aspects: the higher mind (I) being part of the individuality and the lower mind (II) part of the personality.

The higher mind together with Atma and Buddhi form the microcosmic trinity or threefold spiritual Self—the Ego of man.

Mantras (Sk.): Verses from the Vedas rhythmically arranged so that, when sounded, certain vibrations are generated, producing desired effects upon the physical and superphysical bodies of mantra yogis and the atmosphere surrounding them.

Manu (Sk.): “Thought”. A generic term applied to Creators, Preservers, and Fashioners. Manvantara means, literally, the period presided over by a Manu. According to their function and Office, they are called Race, Seed, Round, and Chain Manus, and so on up to the Solar Logos Himself.

Manvantara (Sk.): “Period between Manus”. Epoch of creative activity. A period of manifestation, as opposed to Pralaya. See preceding reference to Manu.

Mara (Sk.): The god of Temptation, the Seducer who tried to turn away Buddha from his Path. He is called the “Destroyer” and “Death” (of the Soul). One of the names of Kama, God of Love.

Marga (Sk.): A path or way. Four paths to liberation are known in Hinduism:

Karma-Marga, the path of action;

Gnana-Marga, the path of wisdom, philosophy;

Bhakti-Marga, the path of faith and devotion;

Dhyana-Marga, the path of contemplation.

Maya (Sk.): Illusion; the cosmic power which renders phenomenal existence and the perceptions thereof possible. In Hindu philosophy that alone which is changeless and eternal is called reality; all that which is subject to change through decay and differentiation and which has, therefore, a beginning and an end is regarded as maya—illusion.

Medium: One who acts as a channel of transmission. A person whose Etheric Double is less closely knitted to the dense physical body than is the case with non-mediums. Such a condition renders the medium susceptible to the withdrawal of the substance of the Etheric Double and its use in producing psychical phenomena. The procedure is aided by the voluntary submission of the medium’s mind and will to such invisible entities as may be producing the occurrences. This extreme passivity also tends to lead to various degrees of unconsciousness in the medium, ranging from partial to complete trance. In these conditions the medium loses all control of both mind and body and is generally, but not always, depending upon the degree of trance, unaware of what may be taking place. As a method of selfspiritualization, of attaining self-mastery and of discovering truth, the surrender of oneself to an invisible entity is not recommended by occultists. Some disadvantages are: the serious weakening, up to complete loss, of the control of the personality by the Immortal Self; the likelihood of self-delusion; and the danger of becoming obsessed, and even driven insane, as the result of psychic invasion by undesirable, lower astral entities.

Microcosm (Gr.): “Little Universe”. The reflection in miniature of the Macrocosm. Thus the atom may be spoken of as the “microcosm” of the Solar System, its electrons moving under the same laws; and man may be termed the “microcosm” of the universe, since he has within himself all the elements of that universe.

Moksha (Sk.): “Liberation”. The same as Nirvana; a post-mortem state of rest and bliss of the “Soul-Pilgrim”.

Monad (Gr.): “Alone”. The divine Spirit in man, the “Dweller in the Innermost”, which is said to evolve through the subhuman kingdoms of Nature into the human and thence to the stature of the Adept, beyond which extend unlimited evolutionary heights.

Mutt: Hindu convent of celibate mendicants.

Mysteries, The: From Muo (Gr.), “to close the mouth”, Teletai (Gr.), “Celebrations of Initiation”. The Sacred Mysteries were enacted in the ancient Temples by the Initiated Hierophants for the benefit and instruction of the candidates. A series of secret dramatic performances, in which the mysteries of cosmogony and Nature were personified by the priests and neophytes. These were explained in their hidden meaning to the candidates for Initiation. See Eleusis and the Eleusinian Mysteries, by G.E. Mylonas; The Eleusinian and Bacchic

Mysteries, by T. Taylor, The Mysteries ofEleusis, by G. M6autis.

Nadi (Sk.): The channel or nerve for the conduction of a current.

Neophyte (Gr.): A novice; a postulant or candidate for the Mysteries.

Nirvana (Sk.): “Having life extinguished”. Conscious absorption in the One Life of the Cosmos, or absolute consciousness (Buddhism).

Nirvani (Sk.): One who has attained Nirvana—an emancipated soul.

Occultist: A student of the “hidden” powers, forces, and intelligences in Nature. Whilst necromancy may—very undesirably—be resorted to by such a student, the practice is frowned upon by all teachers of white or wholly altruistic occultism. These point out that the discovery of truth demands increasing self-control, and that any surrender of one’s will to another leads to self-delusion and untruth.

All researches motived by the twin ideals of attaining knowledge and so of becoming more helpful to mankind are, in consequence, carried out whilst in command of mind and will. The power to produce occult phenomena is developed by self-training, but these are always the result of the will and thought of the operator employed in that full consciousness and complete self-command which are essential to success.

Occult Science: The science of the secrets of Nature—physical and psychic, mental and spiritual; called Hermetic and Esoteric Sciences.

Om: See Aum.

Parabrahma (Sk.): “Beyond Brahma”. The Supreme, Infinite Brahma, the “Absolute”, attributeless, secondless Reality, the impersonal, nameless, universal, and Eternal Principle.

Paramatma (Sk.): “The Self Beyond”.

Paramitas (Sk.): In Buddhism, the six virtues: dana, charity; shila, purity; kshanti, patience; virya, energy; dhyana, contemplation; prajna, wisdom. See The Voice of the Silence, Fragment III, vs. 198, by H.P. Blavatsky.

Pingala (Sk.): See note on Kundalini Shakti.

Pitris (Sk.): “Forefathers”, “progenitors”. Highly evolved, incorporeal, spiritual Beings, products of preceding evolutionary epochs, Who build for the Monad the mental, emotional, etheric, and physical vehicles whereby it is brought into touch with the external worlds at these levels, and is enabled to act and evolve in them. Three of the ten main classes of Pitris referred to in Hindu philosophy (Vishnu Pu-rana) are the Asuras Who build the mental bodies, the Agnishvattas Who build the emotional bodies, and the Barhishads Who build the etheric and physical bodies. Other classes are named Kumaras and Manasaputras. The Pitris are also referred to as the Fathers Who set the types for mankind at the beginning of the various great periods of solar and planetary evolution.

Planetary Schemes: See Lecture Notes of the School of the Wisdom, Vol. I by G. Hodson; The Solar System, by A.E. Powell; or, for a brief explanation, see “Chain” in the Glossary of Hidden Wisdom in the Holy Bible, by G. Hodson.

Pralaya (Sk.): An epoch of quiescence, a period of obscuration or repose, whether planetary or universal. See Planetary Scheme.

Prana (Sk.): Life Principle; the breath of Life.

Pranava (Sk.): A sacred word, equivalent to Aum.

Pranayama (Sk.): The suppression and regulation of the breath in yoga practice.

Puja (Sk.): An offering; worship and divine honours offered to an idol or something sacred.

Rasa (Sk.): The mystery-dance performed by Krishna and His Gopis, the shepherdesses, represented in a yearly festival to this day. Lila (Sk.): Lit. sport. Hence Rasa Lila.

Rays: See Seven Rays.

Rishis (Sk.): Adepts; the inspired ones.

Rupa (Sk.): Body, any form, applied even to the forms of the gods, which are subjective to us. cf. arupa, formless.

Rupa-deva (Sk.): Any deva whose ordinary existence is on the four lower divisions of the mental world.

Samadhi (Sk.): A state of ecstatic and complete “trance”. The term comes from the words Sam-adha, “self-possession”. He who possesses this power is able to exercise an absolute control over all his faculties, physical or mental. It is the highest state of yoga.

Sanat Kumara (Sk): The Lord of the World. See Kumaras.

Sanskrit: The classical language of the Brahmans.

Sat (Sk.): The one ever present Reality in the infinite world; the divine essence which is but cannot be said to exist, as it is Absoluteness, Be-ness itself.

Sephira (Heb.): An emanation of Deity; the parent and synthesis of the ten Sephiroth when she stands at the head of the Sephirothal Tree; in the Kabbalah, Sephira, or the “Sacred Aged”, is the divine Intelligence (the same as Sophia or Metis), the first emanation from the “Endless” or Ain-Soph.

Serpent Fire: See Kundalini and Kundalini Shakti.

Seven Rays, The: A term used in occult philosophy for the seven main classes of Monads and the powers, qualities, and weaknesses by which they are expressed in the seven differing types of human beings. See The Seven Human Temperaments, by G. Hodson, and The Seven Rays, by E. Wood. See also entries of 11 June 1942, 1 March 1944, 13 July 1944.

Shaberon (Tib.): A great Saint or Avatar.

Shakti (Sk.): “Ability”, “power”, capability, faculty, strength. The outgoing energy of a god is spoken of as his wife or shakti. Thus, although a Deity or a central personage and his consort or wife are presented as two separate people, the latter (wife) actually personifies attributes or powers of the former (husband). In consequence, the supposed pair in reality represent one being.

Shekinah (Heb.): A title applied to Malkuth, the tenth Sephira, by the Kabbalists; the veil of Ain-Soph, the Endless and the Absolute.

Siddhis (Sk.): Occult powers developed by yoga.

Skandhas (Sk.): Groups of innate attributes of the finite which endure between Macrocosmic manifestations and microcosmic manifestations, uniting and reappearing as inherent qualities at the dawn of Manvantaras and at each human birth.

Steps: Stages on the Path of Hastened Unfoldment. They include Probation, Discipleship, Sonship (of a Master of the Wisdom), and the Great Initiations leading to Adeptship.

Stupa (Sk): A conical monument, in India and Ceylon, erected over relics of Buddha, Arhats, or other great men.

Sushumna (Sk.): See Kundalini Shakti.

Sutratma (Sk.): “Thread-self’. A current of spiritual life-force, a golden thread of continuous life upon which the seed atoms or nuclei of the seven bodies of man are “strung”. See A Study in Consciousness, by A. Besant

Svara (Sk.): Sound

(a) The Great Breath.

(b)The intonation of words.

Tattva (Sk.): “The abstract principle of substance”, physical and superphysical. The subtle elements. The essential nature of things. “That-ness” or “quiddity”. Mahatattva, the first differentiation of pre-cosmic space.

Telestrion (Gr.): The Hall of Initiation, sometimes called “The Mystic Temple”. The main building or hall within the sacred precincts of Eleusis. See The Mysteries ofEleusis, by G. M6autis and The Eleusinian Mysteries and Rites, by D. Wright

Theosophia (Gr.): (Theosophy) Wisdom religion, or Divine Wisdom. The substratum and basis of all the world-religions and philosophies.

Upeksha (Sk.): Lit. renunciation. In yoga a state of absolute indifference attained by self-control, the complete mastery over one’s mental and physical feelings and sensations.

Vaishakh (Wesak) (Sk.): A Ceremony of great occult significance at which each year, normally in the month of May, the Lord Buddha bestows his blessing on the world. See The Masters and the Path, Chapter IV, by C.W. Leadbeater.

Yoga (Sk.): The practice of meditation as a means of leading to spiritual liberation. The seven forms are:

(d)Hatha Yoga: aims at realized union with God through control of body, breath, and vitality.

(e)Karma Yoga: aims at skill in action and perfection in service, especially at the physical level.

(f) Laya Yoga: seeks mastery of will and expansion of the mind; it includes the arousing of Kundalini.

(g) Gnana Yoga: seeks conscious union with the Supreme through knowledge and mastery of the intellect This faculty of penetrative perception has almost nothing to do with what is popularly referred to as book learning.

(h)Bhakti Yoga: seeks to express and develop devotion and love into “wings” on which to rise to the Supreme and into mystic communion and union therewith.

(i) Mantra Yoga: uses sound and sacred speech as instruments of thought-power and aids to self-realization.

(j) Raja Yoga: gives mastery over all methods of yoga plus the special powers of discrimination and dissociation from the restrictions of the personal nature, to know by direct and continuing experience that Man-Spirit and God-Spirit are ONE Spirit.

Yuga (Sk.): An age of the world. The Kali or dark Yuga is the turning or balancing point of materiality in a series of seven cycles or racial epochs, each with its four ages. According to Hindu philosophy as expounded in the Puranas, Kali Yuga began in the year 3,102 B.C., at the moment of Shri Krishna’s death. Each Yuga is preceded by an epoch called in the Puranas, Sandhya, “twilight” or “transition” period, and is followed by another age of like duration called Sandhyansa, “portion of twilight”. Each of these is equal to one-tenth of the Yuga, and, in consequence, in accordance with this ancient system of chronology, the earth is now in the “portion of twilight” of Kali Yuga, the dark or iron age. Hence, presumably, the difficulties to which the human race has been and is still subject.

^{^[1]} Matt. 5:48.

[2] Heb. 12:23.

[3] cf. Eph. 4:13: “Till we all come in the Wlity of the faith and of the knowledge of the Son of God. Wlto a perfect man, Wlto the measure of the stature of the fullness of Christ.”

[4] Alfred, Lord Tennyson.

^{^[5]} Occult: concealed, hidden from the eye. The pure altruistic sense of the word only is intended throughout, as in all Geoffrey’s writings. See Glossary—Occultist.

^{^[6]} See my book The Pathway to Perfection.

^{^[7]} See entry of 30 June 1975.

^{^[8]} The Mahatma Letters to A.P. Sinnett, Letter LXXXV, transcribed and compiled by A.T. Barker.

^{^[9]} See entry of 10 February 1935.

[10] See PI ate III.

^{^[11]} See entries of 24 March 1976 and 8 April 1977.

^{^[12]} One of the founders of the Theosophical Society, the other being H.S. Olcott

^{^[13]}Letters from the Masters of the Wisdom, First Series, Letter XL, transcribed and edited by C. Jinaradasa

[14] 311 Cor. 5:1.

^{^[15]} Thyrsus (Gr.): The Rod of Power in the hand of the

[16] Hierophant H.P. Blavatsky’s greatest work, I venture to affirm.

^{^[17]} Letters from the Masters of the Wisdom, First Series, Letter I, transcribed and annotated by C. Jinarajadasa.

^{^[18]}The Mahatma Letters to A.P. Sinnett, Letter LXXXV, transcribed and compiled by

^{^[19]} See entry after 1 December 1975, also 8 February 1977.

^{^[20]} See entry of 22 July 1979, for example.

^{^[21]} See entry of 22 June 1958—Memory on Waking; also entry of 18May 1977-”Hence the prophecy ... you would ‘dream true’.” — Master Polidorus Isurenus.

^{^[22]} See also Plate 2, Clairvoyant Investigations, p. 21, by Geoffrey Hodson.

^{^[23]} See entry and footnote of 18 August 1977.

^{^[24]} Geoffrey began lecturing for the Theosophical Society before World War I and continued throughout his life until less than a year before his death.

[25] Geoffrey related to me, that when the war drew to a close and the men of the cavalry had to part from their horses, some of them had grown so fond of their animals, presumably being together throughout the batdes, that they put their arms round their horses’ necks and wept.

[26] The Mahatma Letters to A.P. Sinnett, transcribed and compiled by A.T. Barker.

[27] Jane Hodson told me that Geoffrey was sent for on the field of battle by Field Marshal Haig and congratulated for his bravery in action. Geoffrey then introduced his men to the Field Marshal and subsequently was recommended for the Military Cross.

^{^[28]} See p. 16.

^{^[29]} A barrister and leading English Theosophist

^{^[30]} Elegiac Stanzas, by William Wordsworth.

^{^[31]} Aurora Leigh, by E.B. Browning.

[32] A similar passage appears in the Introduction to The Kingdom of the Gods, by Geoffrey Hodson.

^{^[33]} See Plate II.

^{^[34]} The Seven Paths. See Man: Whence, How and Whither, p. 12, by A. Besant and C.W. Leadbeater.

^{^[35]} E.S.: the Esoteric School of the Theosophical Society.

^{^[36]} See entry of 6 June 1975, second part.

^{^[37]} Sibyl: a fully conscious seer. See entry of January 1977 — The Sibylline Siddhi.

[38] Cor. 5:1

^{^[39]} Self-conscious: being conscious of and illumined by the higher Self or spiritual Ego, rather than limited to the lower self as the normal usage of “self-conscious” infers.

^{^[40]} The two great Masters Who inspired the founding of the Theosohical Society.

^{^[41]} The Steps upon the Path of Initiation to Adeptship are given as Probation, Acceptance, Sonship, and the Initiations. See The Masters and the Path, by C.W. Leadbeater; The Pathway to Perfection, The Call to the Heights, and The Path to the Masters of the Wisdom, by Geoffrey Hodson.

^{^[42]} Red-cap lama of the dark powers in contradistinction to the yellow-cap lamas, agents of the Powers of Light

^{^[43]} All the colours of the spectrum are present in this Deva’s aura, but those mentioned in the description appear greatly to predominate. (G.H.) See Plate 26, The Kingdom of the Gods, by Geoffrey Hodson.

^{^[44]} Stupa: See Glossary. ‘

^{^[45]} cf. “... see of Rome.” King John, Act V, Scene n, by Shakespeare.

[46] John 14:6.

[47] cf. Job 38:7.

[48] Mercurys: those enlightened with Buddhic consciousness; in ancient mythologies, messengers of the Gods.

[49] The Monad.

[50] Master Kuthumi in The Mahatma Letters to A. P. Sinnett, Letter LXXXV, transcribed and compiled by A.T. Barker.

[51] Cor. 10:12.

[52] Geoffrey Hodson was a Priest of the Liberal Catholic Church.

[53] Matt. 5:5.

[54] Geoffrey Hodson was a Priest of the Liberal Catholic Church.

[55] To do good to a person who has offended or handed one (Prov. 25:22).

^{^[56]} See Glossary.

^{^[57]} John 12:24.

^{^[58]} Masonic term.

[59] cf. Matt. 10:39.

^{^[60]}The Mahatma Letters to AP. Sinnett, transcribed and compiled by A.T. Barker, and Letters from the Masters of the Wisdom, transcribed and annotated by C. Jinarajadasa.

^{^[61]}Disinterested: the older meaning (indifferent, uninterested) is intended here rather than the modem meaning (not biased). Similarly, p. 310.

[62] See entry of 13 February 1945

^{^[63]} See entry of 24 November 1946.

^{^[64]} Master Kuthumi in The Mahatma Letters to AP. Sinnett, Letter XXXI, transcribed and compiled by A.T. Barker.

[65] Cf. Luke 22:42

^{^[66]} See entry of 9 May 1942—Sacrifice.

^{^[67]}The Bhagavad Gita, Fifth and Revised Edition, Eighteenth Discourse, vs. 68-9, translated by A. Besant

[68] An Adept, Whose name Geoffrey later came to know to be Master Polidorus Isurenus of the Brotherhood of Luxor. See entry of 1 February 1945.

[69] Scientifically checked clairvoyant research.

^{^[70]} Sk. Illusionary, unreal.

^{^[71]} The Mahatma Letters to A.P. Sinnett, Letter XXXI, transcribed and compiled by A.T. Barker.

^{^[72]} Luke 5:31.

[73] See “A Life Remembered”, pp.16-20.

^{^[74]} See entry of 24 July 1975.

^{^[75]} The term “white” has nothing to do with colour. It alludes to the utter purity, shining radiance of the totally purified Adept throughout every atom of His or Her whole nature.

^{^[76]} Geoffrey Hodson, “Seventy Years Young” Part 1, The Theosophist, Volume LXVI, no. 8, May 1945, p. 58.

[77] For further information, readers are referred to Letters from the Masters of the Wisdom, Second Series, pp. 8-10, transcribed and annotated by C. Jinarajadasa.

^{^[78]} Master Polidorus Isurenus is the “Recorder of the Luxor Brotherhood” which corresponds to the Maha-Chohan’s Office in the Inner Government of the World, and in reality the great Egyptian Adept is on the Staff of the Lord the Maha-Chohan,

^{^[79]} The Golden Book cf the Theosophical Society, pp. 12-15, edited by C. Jinarajadasa.

^{^[80]} Master Philo Judaeus, as my husband sometimes called Master Polidorus Isurenus.

^{^[81]} Fellows of the Theosophical Society.

^{^[82]} Phil. 2:12,13.

^{^[83]} The Mahatma Letters to A.P. Sinnett, Letter XI .ITT, transcribed and compiled by A.T. Barker.

^{^[84]} A slight adaption of the original by Geoffrey to suit the context. See entry of 3 July 1945.

^{^[85]} Light on the Path, p. 16, by Mabel Collins.

78 Ahamkara-maya (Sk.): self-importance and self-delusion.

[87] Geoffrey Hodson, “Seventy Years Young” Part 2, The Theosophist, Volume LXVI, no. 9, June 1945, p. 91.

^{^[88]} See entries of 10 September 1947 and 7 October 1977.

^{^[89]} See entry of 18 January 1976.

^{^[90]} Geoffrey Hodson, “Spiritual Dynasties”, Part 2, The Theosophist, Volume LXVII, no. 2, November 1945, p. 66.

^{^[91]} International Co-Freemasonry, Le Droit Humain, of the Ancient and Accepted Scottish Rite that admits women to its ranks.

^{^[92]} Capital letters. Masonic terms.

[93] Masonic terms

[94] Masonic term.

^{^[95]} Masonic term.

[96] Masonic term.

^{^[97]} See Illuminations of the Mystery Tradition, compiled by Sandra Hods on.

^{^[98]} The Ruler of the Fifth Root Race. The Adept Who is the Representative Man of our Race.

[99] Manu is applicable to the presiding Spirit—if personalized, the Creator, Ruler and Guide—of a Race, a Round, or a Globe. Nirvani: one who has reached the sphere of Atmic consciousness.

[100] See The Masters and the Path, by C.W. Leadbeater.

[101] Truth, and nothing but the Truth

^{^[102]} Geoffrey Hodson’s beloved wife Jane suffered from a long drawn-out terminal illness lasting—in hospitalization—for about twenty years. This was a continual source of anguish to him.

[103] Manas II: the lower materialistic mind.

[104] Combined Animal Welfare Organizations.

[105] Masonic term.

[106] Masonic term.

[107] Master Kuthumi in The Mahatma Letters toAP. Sinnett, Letter XLV, transcribed and compiled by A.T. Barker.

[108] Initiation: See entry of 10 September 1947.

^{^[109]} The Bodhisattva or World Teacher.

^{^[110]} The Bhagavad Gita, Tenth Discourse, v. 36.

[111] Vaishakh: See Glossary.

[112] The Bhagavad Gita, Tenth Discourse, v. 36.

[113] Ibid., v. 39.

^{^[114]} See The Secret Doctrine, Volume 2 (Adyar Edition), p. 487, by H.P. Blavatsky.

^{^[114]} The Voice of the Silence, Fragment I, v. 42, by H.P. Blavatsky.

^{^[114]} Mutt: See Glossary.

[115] The Bhagavad Gita, Sixth Discourse, v. 30.

[116] Matt. 28:20

[117] The Voice of the Silence, Fragment I, v. 42, by H.P. Blavatsky.

[118] Mutt: See Glossary.

[119] See entry of December 1978 — The Golden Stairs.

[120] The Four Great Truths: “... that suffering is, that it arises from desiring, wanting and craving and the sense of ‘I’ and ‘me’, that you escape from the burden of suffering when you are liberated from yourself and its desires, and I have told you of the practical Eightfold Path by which this may be achieved”.—Footprints of Gautama the Buddha, Chapter 10, p. 76, by M.B. Byles

[121] For a continuation of this passage, see ‘The Yogic Ascent of Spiritual Heights’, by Geoffrey Hodson. At the time of going to press (1988) this book is unpublished as yet

^{^[122]} See The Masters and the Path, Chapter XIV, by C.W. Leadbeater.

^{^[123]} See The Voice of the Silence, Fragment II, v. 141, by H.P. Blavatsky.

^{^[124]} “The Druses are a large Sect numbering about one hundred thousand adherents living on Mt Lebanon in Syria. Their Rites are very mysterious, and no traveller who has written anything about them knows for a certainty the whole truth. They are the Sufis of Syria . . . They . . . keep friendly as far as possible with both Christians and Mahammedans, respect the religion of every other sect or people, but will never disclose their own secrets.”—The Theosophical Glossary and The Secret Doctrine, by H.P. Blavatsky.

^{^[125]} See The Brotherhood of Angels and of Men, by Geoffrey Hodson.

[126] Mark 15:34

[127] The “Open Heart” or “Sacred Heart” represents the outpoured love of the Lord Jesus Christ for all that lives.

[128] Master Polidorus Isurenus.

[129] The valley of Sheepscombe. See “A Life Remembered”, p. 14.

[130] Luke 22:42

^{^[131]} Hermes Trismegistus (Gr.): the “trice great Hermes”, the Egyptian; the mythical personage after whom the Hermetic philosophy was named; in Egyptian, the God Thoth or Thot.

^{^[132]} Matt. 18:3.

[133] Capital letters, Masonic terms.

[134] Fouth subplane of the mental plane

[135] Masonic term.

^{^[136]} A private Ceremonial performed daily by ourselves.

[137] One of the Seven Paths. See Man: Whence, How and Whither, p. 12, by A. Besant and C.W. Leadbeater.

[138] See The Miracle of Birth, by Geoffrey Hodson.

^{^[139]}Some of Whose actions and teachings were put together by the Evangelists in a semi- allegorical and gnostic form which presented Him as Jesus of Nazareth. I receive an affirmation of this. (G.H.)

^{^[140]} Hindu, Chinese, Chaldean, Egyptian, and Christian respectively.

[141] See “A Life Remembered”, pp. 26-31.

^{^[142]} At the time of going to press (1988) this book is unpublished as yet.

^{^[143]} Luke 1:27-31.

^{^[144]} See Illuminations of the Mystery Tradition, compiled by Sandra Hodson.

^{^[145]} See entry of 10 March 1943—The Pencil Incident.

[146] Mark 1:17

^{^[147]} See entry of 24 November 1946.

^{^[148]} See The Masters and the Path, by C.W. Leadbeater.

^{^[149]} Subtle body: superphysical body.

^{^[150]} See The Secret Doctrine, (Adyar Edition) Volume 3, p. 319, by H.P. Blavatsky.

^{^[151]} Geoffrey Hodson, ‘“To Affirm the Continuance of the Mystety Tradition’—A Fourth Object of the Theosophical Society?”, The Theosophist, Vol. 97, no. 11, August 1976, p. 158.

^{^[152]} Geoffrey Hodson, “‘To Affirm the Continuance of the Mystery Tradition’—A Fourth Object of the Theosophical Society?”, The Theosophist, Vol. 97, no. 11, August 1976, p. 158.

[153] Geoffrey Hodson, “‘To AfimR the Continuance of the Mystery Tradition’—A Fourth Object of the Theosophical Society?”, The Theosophist, Vol. 97, no. II, August 1976, p.158.

[154] A high official in the Theosophical Society.

^{^[155]} The Theosophist, August 1976. See footnote p. 283.

^{^[156]} As described by C.W. Leadbeater in The Masters and the Path, Chapter XIV.

^{^[157]} The Concealed Wisdom in World Mythology, by Geoffrey Hodson.

^{^[158]} See The Masters and the Path, Chapter XIV, by C.W. Leadbeater.

^{^[159]} The Concealed Wisdom in World Mythology, by Geoffrey Hodson.

^{^[160]} The article was submitted to The Theosophist and was subsequently published in Theosophy in New Zealand, July 1979, and The Theosophical Link (Australia), February-March 1980.

[161] The Diary and The Concealed Wisdom in World Mythology, by Geoffrey Hodson.

^{^[162]} Geoffrey Hodson, “Sources of World Ceremonials and Maximum Effectiveness in their Performance”, The American Theosophist, Vol. 65, no. 5, May 1977, p. 128. See also entry of 17 July 1977.

^{^[163]} The Mahatma Letters to A.P. Sinnett, transcribed and compiled by A.T. Barker.

^{^[164]} During the teaching procedure, Geoffrey would sometimes say, “Oh, Sandra, I have lost the thread. Wait a minute ... Yes, Master? Oh now I have it again.” He would then proceed from the point of departure in completely sequenced thought

^{^[165]} Isis Unveiled, Vol. 1, Chapter XIII, by H.P. Blavatsky.

^{^[166]} Greek mythology. Note: Herakles, equivalent to Heracles.

^{^[167]} The Mahatma Letters to AJ³. Sinnett, Letter IX, transcribed and compiled by A.T. Barker.

^{^[168]} Ibid., Letter XCIE.

^{^[169]}The Mahatma Letters to AP. Sinnett, Letter XVI, transcribed and compiled by A.T. Barker.

^{^[170]} See entry after 18 November 1975.

^{^[171]} The Concealed Wisdom in World Mythology, by Geoffrey Hodson.

^{^[172]} At the Sign of the Square and Compasses, by Geoffrey Hodson.

^{^[173]} Geoffrey Hodson, “The Adherence to Unchanging Theosophical Doctrines whilst Exercising Freedom of Opinion, Interest, and Activities”, The Theosophist, Vol. 101, no. 1, October 1979, p. 80.

^{^[174]} The Theosophist, October 1979. See footnote 2, p. 324.

^{^[175]} At the Sign of the Square and Compasses, by Geoffrey Hodson.

^{^[176]} Ps. 46:10.

[177] P.S 23:1.

^{^[178]} According to Geoffrey’s health.

^{^[179]} Geoffrey Hodson, “The Urgent Call—‘To Popularize a Knowledge of Theosophy’”, The Theosophist, Vol. 98, no. 2, November 1976, p. 64.

[180] See entry of 9 January 1979.

^{^[181]} The Theosophical Publishing House, Adyar, Madras, India.

[182] See “A Life Remembered”, pp. 11-12.

^{^[183]} See Clairvoyant Investigations^ 41, by Geoffrey Hodson.

^{^[183]} This volume was combined with further Music Forms material and published as Clairvoyant Investigations.

[184] This volume was combined with further Music Forms material and published as Clairvoyant Investigations.

^{^[185]} Since each of these consists of a sevenfold cycle of forthgoing and return, with “four” the deepest and densest part, the fourth stage of such cycles will always prove to be the most densely material. See The Earth and its Cycles, by E.W. Preston.

^{^[186]} Of the Theosophical Society: “To form a nucleus of the Brotherhood of Humanity without distinction of Race, Creed, Sex, Caste, or Colour”.

^{^[187]} At the Sign of the Square and Compasses, by Geoffrey Hodson.

^{^[188]} Kavannah: intention to carry out a divine command or precept.

^{^[189]} Geoffrey Hodson, “Sources of World Ceremonials and Maximum Effectiveness in their Performance”, The American Theosophist, Vol. 65, no. 5, May 1977, p. 128.

^{^[190]} Masonic term.

^{^[191]} Sistrum: musical instrument used in Ancient Egyptian Rites.

^{^[191]} The Second Aspect of the Godhead.

[192] The second Aspect of the Godhead

[193] Matt 4:19

[194] Matt 28:20

^{^[195]} The investigations carried out with Dr J.T. Robinson.

[196] The Lord Jesus Christ and Our Lady Mary, the World Mother, did indeed come to Geoffrey at a later time; however, this is not recorded in The Diary.

^{^[197]} See Basic Theosophy, The Living Wisdom, p. 525, by Geoffrey Hodson.

^{^[198]} The tape referred to by the Master was the videotape of Geoffrey taken during his lecture on “The Occult Hierarchy”, in the midst of his seminar at Krotona.

^{^[199]} Special articles for The Theosophist, Adyar, August, November, and December 1976.

^{^[199]} Geoffrey and I had just been performing an exorcism on behalf of a psychically tormented person.

[200] Geoffrey and I had just been performing an exorcism on behalf of a psychically tormented person.

^{^[201]} The Concealed Wisdom in World Mythology, by Geoffrey Hodson.

^{^[202]} Gal. 6:7.

^{^[203]} See The Priestly Ideal, by Geoffrey Hodson.

[204] See entry of January 1977—The Sibylline Siddhi.

^{^[205]} See next page.

^{^[206]} Geoffrey Hodson, “A Call to Save the Human Race”, Theosophy in New Zealand, Vol. 40, no. 1, January-March 1979, p. 1..

^{^[207]} Geoffrey Hodson, “The Adherence to Unchanging Theosophical Doctrines whilst Exercising Freedom of Opinion, Interest, and Activities”, The Theosophist, Vol. 101, no. 1, October 1979, p. 80.

^{^[208]} Geoffrey had been speaking to me of his age — ninety-two years — and how he had best maintain his physical strength and vital energy in order to carry out the literary tasks that still lay before him in advance of his departure from the physical plane. He said to me, “Sandra, I think I will have to give up my public lecturing.” The Master’s direction given above came very soon after these words were uttered.

[209] See entry of 9 January 1979.

[210]See entry of 2 May 1977.

[211] Masonic terms.

[212] Clairvoyant investigations by Geoffrey Hodson.

[213] John 10:30.

[214] See Clairvoyant Investigations, pp. 15-18. by Geoffrey Hodson.

^{^[215]} Geoffrey Hodson, “The Ideal of Selflessness”, The Theosophist, Vol. 103, no. 7, April 1982, p. 262.

^{^[216]} On March 11, Geoffrey began a twelve month study with the young Theosophists of H.P.B. Lodge, Auckland, at our home in Epsom on the subject, “The Masters of the Wisdom”.

[217] See entry at end of 1978—The Atmic Adept.

^{^[218]} Sibyl: a clairvoyant, with fully conscious powers of spiritual perception. See entry of January 1977—The Sibylline Siddhi.

^{^[218]} The Law of Karma — cause and effect.

[219] Clairvoyant Investigations, by Geoffrey Hodson.

[220] The Law of Karma—cause and effect.

[221] See entry of December 1978.

[222] A group of young Theosophists of Auckland dedicated to this work of invisible helping.

^{^[223]} Ananda: personal disciple and server of the Lord Gautama Buddha.

^{^[223]} Geoffrey Hodson, “The Adept-Inspired Theosophical Society”, The Theosophist, Vol. 102, no. 1, October 1980, p. 14.

[224] Geoffrey Hodson. “The Adept-Inspired Theosophical Society”, The Theosophist. Vol. 102, no. 1. October 1980, p. 14.

^{^[225]} After D.T. Suzuki in Manual of Zen Buddhism (1935), p. 4.

^{^[226]} Poem: “Glad I met you today”. (The poem about the soldier. Source untraced.)

[227] John 14:20.

^{^[228]} Such as: leaving the noble Theosophical ideas, ideals, and way of life (selfless service of humanity and the other kingdoms of Nature); the breaking of one’s high moral code.

^{^[229]} The Vaishakh Ceremony. See Glossary.

[229] The One Alone is the Centre of Light and Power in every atom everywhere.

[230] See “A Life Remembered”, p. 8.

[231] See Glossary.

[232] Matt. 9:20.

^{^[233]} The Path, to the Masters of the Wisdom.

[234] Clairvoyant Investigations. by Geoffrey Hodson.

[235] See entry of 1953-54.

[236] From Paracelsus. by Robert Browning.

^{^[237]}Geoffrey Hodson, “The Adept-Inspired Theosophical Society”, The Theosophist, Vol. 102, no. 1, October 1980, p. 14.

^{^[238]}Mrs Radha Bumier.

^{^[239]}See entry of 19 March 1978, second part.

^{^[240]} Invisibly and astrally, of course, Id help and to take away the invading superphysical presence of the deceased “tormentor”.

^{^[241]} All the members of my beloved family, mother, father, cook, housemaid, housekeeper, my brothers Stanley and Eric and my two sisters, Phyllis and Margaret—all have left this world.

^{^[242]}See entry of 17 January 1982.

[243] Theosophy in New Zealand.

[244] See Basic Theosophy. The Living Wisdom. p. 362. by Geoffrey Hodson.

[245] See The Voice of the Silence. Fragment II. by H.P. Blavatsky.

[246] The royal princess who was the wife of tile Lord Buddha.

^{^[247]} The other affirmation at that time was by Dr D. Lyness.

[248] As with many of Geoffrey’s lectures. This one was tape-recorded.

^{^[249]} See The Bhagavad Gita.

[250] See entry of 17 June 1981— “... the Master is always present”.

^{^[251]} See entries of 3 December 1976, and October 1981—Readmission to the Ancient Mysteries.

^{^[252]} The Voice of the Silence, Fragment HI, v. 282.

[253] Ps 46:10